Kare ae ae noe EE : a Nyon te oe \ Reon PIO SNe . 2

a nen Rv -

“tae >,
, Ty, fet
al Mt
th .
2 ro cee

fi BA) %
_

=

Rha el “yh

re A ¥ ‘ : LT Py oe’ Vii
rT ean S
j ' sw * cy
: i it
%, . Un if er i ij
a) : j ' 1 o4 vi ia
ea)
| f ce — ic ff
; |
’ ?
i, 7 i ;
)
7
; i
7 i 2 @ ’

vt “a
come

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING
ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND
CHARLESWORTH 'S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. )

CONDUCTED BY

CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Ese., M.A., F.B.S., F.LS., F.G.8.,
JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.RS., F.LS., F.Z8. &e.,
WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.LS.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

VOL. X.—FOURTH SERIES———~

‘S

LAPIN OS

2 ANOS
onal muse
LONDON:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,
AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS :
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1872.

“‘Omnes res create sunt divine sapientiz et potentia testes, divitix felicitatis
human :—ex harum usu donitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapzentia Domini ;
ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis
elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper sstimata ;
a yeré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper
inimica fuit.”—Linnxvs.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour
voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuyre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-
tent toutes ses opérations.”—Brucnner, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden,

1767.

SES hs goer ear cole Berd The sylvan powers
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock
Or rifted oak or’cayern deep: the Naiads too
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,
All, all to us unlock their secret stores
And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

CONTENTS OF VOL. X.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

NUMBER LV.

I. Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. By GrorcEr
STEWARDSON Brapy, C.M.Z.S. &e.—No. VI. A List of the Non-
parasitic Marine Copepoda of the North-east Coast of England.
(Plates IT.-VI.)

Il. Further Observations on the Myology of Sarcophilus wrsinus.
By ALEXANDER Maca ister, M.B., Professor of Zoology, Univer-
sity of Dublin, and Director of the University Museum ..........

III. The Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton. By Harry G.
SEELEY, St. John’s College, Cambridge

IV. Proposed name for the Sponge-animal, viz. ‘“ Spongozoon ;”
also on the Origin of Thread-cells in the Spongiade. By H. J.
(CAPRIS Psy aunts ees Marana keener ee tage MO Qt alae Gh nage ee ea Oks

V. On my so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. By Dr. HERMANN
BURMEISTER

ia ta elybiva/iee we) «re! .y. wisiied.e lelrel.eiiace tombe

VI. On Emys nigra from Upper California. By Dr. J. E. Gray,
[DAR eh SOB er hore neal hbo be o aitteidn pein Sram cr aoe Se
VII. Experimental Researches upon the Position of the Centre of
Gravity in Insects. By FELIx PLaTEau

VIII. Observations on Mr. Carter’s Paper ‘‘ On two new Sponges
from the Antarctic Sea, and on a new Species of Tethya from Shet-
land ; together with Observations on the Reproduction of Sponges
commencing from Zygosis of the Sponge-animal.” By J.S. BowER-
Bank, DED: BRIS. BOL vides 2 aos A a eo eit s vies Ak ee ae

IX. On a new Species of 7imalia from Eastern India. By Ar-
THU ER Viscony WALDEN, ED Z,S.5 RSs) Scent cae eutoleh sia steele =
X. Notes on the Anatomy of the Derriah ( Cynocephalus hama-
dryas). By ALEXANDER MacatisTER, M.B., Professor of Zoology,
University of Dublin

aia) oe! Oia 6,'0) vee) of eee) isu) e. * 6 © e) see vie) .e. 5 e) Selvin ef elelielle

On some Dermal Tubercles associated with Fossil Fish-remains, by
James Thomson; On the two (?) unknown Species of Argus
Pheasant, by T. W. Wood ; Note on a Deformed Example of
Cariama cristata, by Dr. A. Giinther; On the Natural Affinities
of the Balistide, by M. C. Dareste; On the Synonymy of the
Genera of Euryalide, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On a new
Species of Paradoxornis, by the Abbé A. David; Investigations
on Fossils Birds, by M. A. Milne-Edwards; Migrations of the

Page

17,

2]

58

61

lv CONTENTS.

Page
Graptolites, by H. Alleyne Nicholson, M.D., F.R.S.E., F.GS.,
&e.; Notice of a new Netted Sponge (Meyerella) from the Phi-
lippines, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Additional Note on
Osteocella septentrionalis, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. .... 66—76
NUMBER LVI.
XI. Antipathes arctica, a new Species of Black Coral (Antipathide)

momenne olan seas. :| by Wr. 0), LuOiREN |. 6.25.10 oh) ss aeln soe nie (4
XII. Additions to the Australian Curculionidae. Part UI. By

BEAN GTN eAscom, Classe. (Plate T,)) ois siciee sic ciaceiwrals oad 84
XIII. Description, with Illustrations, of a new Species of Aplysina

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c.

PELVIS Nios Sy cvay cra co ops ssndavirar saalaliaas ne See task Bite tiara crue Mae ets ie ME
XIV. Descriptions of two new Sponges from the Philippine Islands.

PES Lage WPAN TIGER Bude, (05. val aats bo fess isis Susann evo d rates epene ioe Stolen 110
XV. On two new Species of Birds. By Joun Gouxp, F.R.S. &e. 114
XVI. List of Echinoderms collected by Robert M‘Andrew, Esq.,

F.R.S., in the Gulf of Suez in the Red Sea. By Dr. J. E. Gray,

LIGITGSS Gh eM cl ogee IAC Ra ae ee AREER S ok oR a Maser tats ri 115
XVII. Description of a new Genus and Species of Heterocerous

Lepidoptera. By ArrHur Garpiner Burts, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.

PTT Seay PISULE eat cavats eaeto-e baal assyeSepacs a Guede ays abate tee arate oe beers 125
XVIII. On a new Genus and Species of Hydroid Zoophytes. By

RY oD) Om ote MENS.) vk, Ah ace SERA TS Je eB cai Wamu cee eta 126

XIX. The Muscular Anatomy of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus).
By ALEXANDER MacatisTER, M.B., Professor of Zoology, University
SUNT ave: 3a un oleic sas ac oyeegs a oa yal ionedad ar before la me ome Ree Niece

XX. On a new Genus of Hexaradiate and other Sponges dis-
covered in the Philippine Islands by Dr. A. B. Meyer. By Dr. J. E.
Gray, F.R.S. &e.

XXI. On Codiophyllum, a new Genus of Unicellular Green Algze
from Port Natal. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &. (Plate IX.)....

XXII. Answer to Dr. Bowerbank’s “ Observations on Mr. Carter’s
paper &c.” in the last Number of the ‘Annals.’ By H. J. Carter,
F.R.S. &c.

Proceedings of the Royal Society

© (20) 0) ae) @),0\ @) 0) 0) ale) 0.0) oop 8) 0) 4a) 8 esis e)-e mae lejjalie. mis. #ie) we eieal ehe.e

else) ote ena .e) ee) oie 6) 160), 0 '@l.e aa; ie aie 4 ke: 10 te) elie, @, 6:10 18 ue eaiieted ale) aifeael ihe! te (a

Ce CeO) Ta ONCmCAC i mat On ter a ee eh O

On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spelling, by Dr. J. E. Gray,
F.R.S. &e. ; Note on the Systematic Name of the Walrus, by Dr.
W. Peters; The Clustered Sea-Polype (Umbellula grenlandica),
by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; On Ziphius Sowerbiensis, by Dr.
J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Marine Sponges in the British Mu-
seum, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. ; Habits of Terebratula trun-
cata, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Reproduction and

127

Mode of Life of the Phyllopoda, by Dr. Friedrich Brauer, . 150—152

CONTENTS. Vv

NUMBER LVII.

XXIII. Note on some Fossil Monkeys found in Italy, preceded by
a Review of the Fossil Quadrumana in general. By C.J. ForsytH
MNNETCD Ey ICN ts hat are ays nits pera tabek o Picea a ta"atal stake tatetaotavereeteretererdave athe a ates 158
XXIV. On Flustra mar: vee of Krauss and an allied Species,
forming anew Genus (Flustramorpha) of Escharide, from Natal. By
DDE REIL EAs EIT GGG 51 59s cts sha Piarc enal el dateraxnio aiwle’ sla lehe pte atis 167
XXV. A Cuvierian Principle in Paleeontology, tested by evidences
of an extinct Leonine Marsupial (Thylacoleo carnifex), by Professor
OWEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Foreign Associate of the Institute of France.
Reviewed by Grerarp Krerrt, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., M.F.D.H., &e.

OE aa ecee NSM rN ae? =! al aes nya, ars ithe ap ae er eae, cals ah een 169
XXVI. Description of two new Fishes from Tasmania. By Dr. A.

Ga Uoc e801 eee Sea Ake en AR ND oir hae oe orth iere Bets ir ic 183
XXVII. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K.

Parker, 1. R:S;, andProf, T; Rorurr Jonus, F:G:S....005 7225... 184
XXVIII. A Monograph of the Genus Thelyphonus. By ARTHUR

G-Burinn, BOL.S., Z:95; &e. - ((elete si). 0. ee cele ee 200
XXIX. Notes on a new Propithecus and the Fossane from Mada-

gascar.. by Dr. J. Ee Grae PRS, Seppe. 5 coe es canes so th oor: 206
XXX. On the double-horned Asiatic Rhinoceros (Ceratorhinus).

Meyeikne ey tle GAY, ERAS a Ocenia. 2 ie! «aye Rinses soa gee rate eee 207

XXXI. Note on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, and Dorvillia agari-
ciformis, Kent. By W.Savitue Kent, F.Z.S., F.R.M.S., Geological
Department, British Marseums 7. jaaaeaieteledé «ald. .chetet. attends 209

XXXII. Description of Hesperornis regalis, with notices of four
Other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. By Prof. O. C. Marsn.... 212

XXXIII. On the Genera Manourta and Scapia. By Dr. J.E.

CGA NEUSE WAS ROU car srek | svete a iaNe: hase Dy STA SHS fst c ees thee PO Dealer ohare tens 218
XXXIV. On Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Trionyx hurum, B. H.

and Dr. Gray... by Dr. AnprEson, Calcutta.......5 5 <2.inqcs as. 219

Proceedings of the Royal: Society). 205. cass cae ao eee 222—224

On the Specific Name of the Black Redstart, by Alfred Newton, M.A.,
F.R.S.; New Names for a long-known Lepidopteron, by C.
Ritsema; Note on Intelligence in Monkeys, by Prof. Cope ;
Curious Habit ofa Snake, by Prof. Cope; Eggs and newly hatched
young of Ixodes Dugesti and Argas reflexus, by George Gulliver,
F.R.S.; Onthe Embryonic Form of the Gordii, by M. A. Villot

227—231
NUMBER LVIUI.

XXXV. On Callograptus radicans,a new Dendroid Graptolite.
By Joun Horxrson, F.G.S., F.R.M.S. (Plate X.).............. 233
XXXVI. The Mollusca of Europe compared with those of Eastern
North America. By J. Gwyn Jerrreys, F.R.S................. 2387

al CONTENTS.

Page
XXXVII. Remarks on the Genera Trimerella, Dinobolus, and
Monomerella. By Tuomas Davipson, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., and WIL-
L1AM Kina, Se.D., Professor of Mineralogy and Geology in Queen’s
Gilere MOnIWAYy. ince sade scWes Soup ets ae pe ae ee ee ealeee elute 248
XXXVIII. On two new Species of Birds from the Philippine
Islands. By ArTHUR Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.S., F.R.S. ........ 252
XXXIX. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K.
ParkKER, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.8. .... 253
XL. On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. By FREDERICK
FE CATTLE Rept LISI A TLIS chk favseeka ee HAM bee dm Rah wialaton fo wtie E> baie ou eral 271
XLI. Remarks on Crinodes Sommeriand Tarsolepis remicauda. By
MOON MERPREST STOR BUS T2005, E Liss y COCs v sere dare oi tere We ere Rad Dee kee aION G 274
XLII. Preliminary Report on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. By H.
ALLEYNE NicHo.son, M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of
Natural History in University College, Toronto.................. 276
XLIII. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof. 8. Lovén.
Hkee ARADO MUINVECD) Mk tess srskestaks) VAR at We Raia es ene ts PAR ALANS CIE g. Blarote acai hake Coce 285
XLIV. Notes on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis. By
Esme MOA PhD), F Rise. Mies. rteais a Soe are bn 298

New Book :—Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles drawn from Life, by
James de Carle Sowerby, F.L.S., and Edward Lear .......... 299

Proceedings of the Royal Society

On Thread-cells and Semen in Marine Sponges, by T. Eimer; Inyes-
tigations upon the Development of the Gregarine, by E. van
Beneden ; Diatoms in Hot Springs, by Dr. Blake ; On the Habits
of Galeodes pallipes, by Prof. Cope..........-20.e0000- 306—312

NUMBER LIX.

XLV. On the Hydroid Lar sabellarum, Gosse, and its Reproduc-
tion. By the Rev. THomas Hinoxs, B.A.,F.R.S. (Plate XIX.).. 313
XLVI. Notes on Coleoptera, with Descriptions of new Genera and
Species.—Part II. By Francis P. Pasconr, F.LS. &e. (Plate XV.) 317
XLVII. Notes on the Mud-Tortoises of India (Trionyx, Geoffroy).
Poynter Ana ER SeiReG, «it, snuttaieacon state Sue AE ee 326
XLVIII. Notes on a Deep-sea Dredging-Expedition round the
Island of Anticosti, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. By J. F. Wurr-
RUMMORL KS VOUC 42 SLY. oN an Cladeethicls Oh eine bee end RE ERE 541
XLIX. Descriptions of new Myriopoda of the Family Glomeride.
By ArtTHuR GARDINER Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &c. (Plate XVIII.) 354
L. On Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. By Oscar Scumipr. (Plates
Pree LL) Welrrre gest bihs Mii sgt Ae ag Ae etc bcore, nee ... 359
LI. Notice of a new Species of Lizard (Eumeces albofasciolatus)
from North Australia. By Dr. A. Ginruer, F.RS. ............ 370

CONTENTS. Vil

Page
LIT. Dredging-Excursion to Iceland in June and July 1872. By

UAV BO VOR RIKGEULTATINE SS aiche sc fet, ERT Ales ails soleil Paee CRIA oh ae eab A AO eras chardis ofl sz

LUI. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof. 8. Lovin.. 376
LIV. Contributions to the History of the Hydroida. By the Rev.
Tuomas Hincks, B.A., F.R.S. (Plate XX. figs. 1-4, & Plate XXI.) 385
LY. On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa. By the Rev.
THomas Hincxs, B:A., F.R.S. (Plate XX. fig. 5.). 2... scenes 396
LVI. Notice of some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands.
Ayes he ss UNE EER Sh 6 agg sc oes ond vacsensrahet oe ais hokey oles eke pea ae 397
LVII. On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. By
fpwarp Biver. kon, Mom. Ag: Soe. .osii cece sae wawsarseiete 399
Varieties of the Tiara (Galera barbata), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.
&e.; On Branchipus and Artemia, by C. Voat; On Osteocella
septentrionalis from British Columbia, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.
&e.; Sowerby and Lear’s ‘ Tortoises’; The Ahu (Capreolus py-
gargus), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; A new British Calli-
thamnion, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On Macroxus tephro-
nacter, aby Uris J... Fu Greys Wl. SECs. 5 5s. tn ard sistent ne 405—408

NUMBER LX.

LVIII. On a new Family and Genus and two new Species of
Thelyphondea. By the Rey. O. P. Campriner, M.A., C.M.Z.S.

CG RLEN Fey. ©. @ dp eaeaergee eer emia) OF ie Ange AC Meine Ceci ere ran tae ca A 409
LIX. On Bulenoptera patachonica and B, intermedia, By Dr. H.

SUPREMO THURS hy woe a ca Ccpateas cashed «esta! 9,6, tS) seks avs. sa.oicen ef Se 418
LX. On some new Species of Reptiles and Fishes collected by J.

Brenchley, Esq. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S. ............ 418

LXI. On Psammoperca and Cnidon. By Dr. A. GiNTHER .... 426
LXII. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof.S.Lovin,. 427
LXIII. On the Guémul (Huamela leucotis). By Dr. J. E. Gray,

TR etl Celeste eedar Zo atcn.«scferoe apace: ohtsas D gsbeidte kta Wet af Oats Gude wes 445
LXIV. On Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda, in answer

to Mr. Butler's Remarks. By C. RrmsmMa ........ 06+. cncses 446
_ LXV. On the Habits and Distribution of Lycosa ingens (Bl.). By

the ev. O: Ps Cancsamen, MAS CIMA: crs encase gene ee cones 448
LXVI. Notice of a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons. By

Hy ACY: Be Te nea Ys CaN EDNG ER kee nal eee ha satel oe, RUA ZoLS ol 0° ale ocelat anak: 449

LXVII. Description of some new Species of Birds in the National
Collection. By R. Bowpiter SuHarpe, F.LS., F.Z.8., &c., Senior

Assistant, Zoological Department, British Museum .............. 450
LXVIII. Descriptions of three new Species of Humming-birds.
Pay eh OHRID PEL Bema co dn glial 5 sinter <a s caphointe Minn eratadeta 452

LXIX. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera, By W. K.
PaRKER, F.R.S., F.Z.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jonss, F.R.S., F.G.S. 458

Vill CONTENTS.

Page
New Books :—Notes on the Birds of Damara Land, by C. J. Andersson ;
A Handbook to the Birds of Egypt, by G. E. Shelley, F.G:S.,
F.ZS., &e.; A Handbook of British Birds, by J. E. Harting,

Ps UR pe cas & ak Pin ehe ccpe wie) absent maces Oe papahwn gam etecw 457—461
The Bell Collection of Reptiles; On Spatulemys Lasale, a new
Genus of Hydraspide from Rio Parana, Corrientes, by Dr. J. E.
Gray, F.R.S. &c. ; Observations on the Metamorphoses of the
Bony Fishes in general, and especially on those of a small Chinese
Fish, of the Genus Macropoda, recently introduced into France,
by M. N. Joly; On the Habits of Terebratule, or Lamp-shells,
by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Connexion which exists
between the Nervous System and the Muscular System in the
Helices, by M. Sicard ; On Delphinus Desmarestii, Risso (Aliama
Desmarestii, Gray), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.; The Swedish
Scientific Expedition ; Report on a Memoir by Dr. Dufossé, “On
the Noises and Expressive Sounds which the Freshwater and
Marine Fishes of Europe produce,” by M. C. Robin; On a new
Species of Balenoptera, by Capt. C. M. Scammon, U.S.R.M ;
On the Varieties of Lndris and Propithecus, by Dr. J. E. Gray,

F.R.S. &e.; on Peloric Structures, by Dr. Peyritsch .... 466—474

lbaahsc~ Senay ae PRA i ee SAA = COORDS Dat ke Soot een ee Ne eae 475

PLATES IN VOL. X.
PLATE I. Australian Curculionidae.

a Marine Copepoda.

VL)

VIL. Aplysina corneostellata.

VII. Tarsolepis remicauda.
IX. Codiophyllum natalense.
X. Callograptus radicans,

ey Thylacoleo carnifex.

XIII. New species of Thelyphonus.
XIV. Structure of the Echinoidea.

XV. New Genera and Species of Coleoptera.

eat Coceoliths and Rhabdoliths.

XVIII. New Myriopoda.
XIX. Lar sabellarum and its reproduction.

XX. Sarcothecee of the Plumulariide.—Reproduction in Campa-
nularia neglecta.—New Genus of Polyzoa.
XXI. Plumularia cornu-copize.—Planoblast of Cladonema radiatum.
XXII. New Genus and Species of Thelyphonidea,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. }

Ce tptecanscuceece per litora spargite muscum,
Naiades, et circiim vitreos considite fontes:
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:
Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.
At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas;
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas
Ferte, Dew pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”

NV. Parthenii Giannettasii Kel. 1.

No. 55. JULY 1872.

I.— Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. By
GEORGE STEWARDSON Brapy, C.M.Z.S. &e.

No. VII. A List of the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda of the
North-east Coast of England.

[Plates IL—VI.]

TuE following list, though embracing all the species at pre-
sent known to me as inhabiting the above-named district,
must be taken only as an instalment of what an exhaustive
survey would no doubt reveal. The examination of these
little creatures is exceedingly tedious and laborious, the points
of difference being often undistinguishable except with tolera-
bly high microscopic powers. ‘Thus a very small gathering,
if it contain any great variety of species, will often occupy
many hours in its examination.

By far the greater number of species here noted, or described
by foreign authors, are free-swimming animals; some have a
special predilection for the fronds of Fuci, and others for
muddy localities or the bed of the sea; but little is yet known
of the ground-inhabiting forms, and among them there remains
doubtless a rich harvest for future collectors.

T'wo of the species described in Baird’s ‘ British Entomo-
straca’ it seems impossible to identify— Canthocamptus Stromitt
and C. minuticornis. The former name probably applies to

some member of the genus Thalestris, the latter, perhaps,
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x.

2 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

to a Laophonte. Neither species is included in the following
list.

Fam. Calanide, Dana.
Subfam. Oazawrvm, Dana.
Genus CALANuSs, Leach.
(Cetochilus, Roussel de Vauzéme, fide Boeck.)

Calanus finmarchicus (Gunner).

Monoculus finmarchicus, Gunner, Act. Hafn. (1765), x. p. 175, f. 20-25.
Cetochilus septentrionalis, Goodsir, Edinb. New Phil. Journ. xxxv. p. 389,

pl. 6. figs. 1-11; Baird, Nat. Hist. Brit. Entom. (1850), p. 835, t. 30.

figs. 1, a-g.

Cetochilus an olinitacits Claus, Die frei-leb. Copep. (1863), p. 171, t. 26.

figs. 2-9,

According to M. Boeck the species described first by Gunner
as Monoculus finmarchicus is identical with the Cetochilus hel-
golandicus of Claus, and not at all with the species called by
Baird Temora finmarchica. Leach’s genus Calanus, however,
was constituted to receive Gunner’s species, and is synony-
mous with the more recent name Cetochilus, applied by Roussel
de Vauzeme to the same animal. Not having the opportunity
of reference to the original memoirs of Gunner and Leach, [
must accept as substantially correct M. Boeck’s careful account
of this synonymy. ‘The generic name Cetochilus must there-
fore give way to Calanus.

The present species, C. finmarchicus, is generally distributed
all round the British coast, being met with in equal abundance
both between tide-marks and in the open sea. It is said to
constitute an important part of the food of the whale.

Genus CLAustA, Boeck.

Clausia elongata, Boeck.

Clausia elongata, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864), p. 10.
Calanus Clausit, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N, & D. (1865), vol. i. p. 33,

pl. 1. figs. 1-11, 13.

Often taken in abundance, by the surface-net, in the open
sea and in tide-pools, all along our coast.

Boeck’s C. elongata is undoubtedly the same species as tha
described by myself (possibly a little later, though I am not
pertectly sure as to the actual date of publication of Boeck’s
monograph) under the name Calanus Clausi?. The differences
between this and the genus Paracalanus, Boeck (Calanus,
Claus), lie chiefly in the one-jointed inner branch of the first
foot, and in the very small or entirely wanting fifth foot of the
female. It is, I think, open to doubt whether these ought to

_of the North-east Coast of England. 3

be considered of generic importance; but the separation having
been made, it seems best to adhere to it.

Genus Dias, Lilljeborg.
Dias longiremis, Lilljeborg.
Abundant all round the British Islands, both in the open
sea and between tide-marks; frequent also in brackish water.

Genus TEmorA, Baird.
1. Temora longicornis (Miiller).

Cyciops longicornis, Miller, Entomostraca (1785), p. 115, t. 19. figs. 7-9.
Temora finmarchica, Baird, Brit. Entom. (1850), p. 228, t. 28. figs. 1, a-g;
Claus, Die frei-leb. Copep. p. 195, t. 34. figs. 1-11; Brady, Nat. Hist.
Trans. N. & D. vol. i. p. 36, pl. 1. fig. 15, and pl. 2. figs. 1-10.
Temora longicornis, Boeck, loc. cit. p. 16.
Diaptomus longicaudatus, Lubbock.
(Not Monoculus finmarchicus, Gunner.)
Common in the open sea; and between tide-marks perhaps

the most abundant of all British species.

2. Temora velox, Lilljeborg.

In the autumn months, when the brackish pools of salt
marshes have become thoroughly warmed by the sun, this
species occurs in such situations in immense profusion. I
have only on one or two occasions met with a stray specimen
amongst the weeds on the sea-shore.

Genus Istas, Boeck.
Isias clavipes, Boeck.
Isias clavipes, Boeck, loc. cit. p. 18.

Superior antenne twenty-five-jointed, about equal in length
to the cephalothorax ; joints short and broad at the base, and
gradually increasing in length to the nmeteenth, which is
about four times as long as broad; first fifteen joints of the
male antenne bearing each a single club-shaped, ciliated,
auditory seta; hinge-joint of the twenty-one-jointed right male
antenna situated between the eighteenth and nineteenth joints ;
eighteenth joint formed by the coalescence of the normal
eighteenth and nineteenth; nineteenth by the twentieth and
twenty-first ; twentieth by the twenty-second, twenty-third,
and twenty-fourth. Mouth-organs and swimming-feet as in
Centropages typicus. Fifth pair of feet two-branched, in the
female having the inner branch of one joint with two terminal
sete, the outer branch of three broad laminar joints, the second

of which is produced on the inner margin into a broad spinous
1*

4 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine, Copepoda

process: in the male the feet are somewhat similar, but the
central joint is destitute of the spinous process, and the ter-
minal joint of the outer branch of one side is expanded into a
very broad lamina, which is terminated by a broad ciliated
seta. Abdomen of the female with four, of the male with five
segments. Length, exclusive of tail-sete, 1; of an inch.

Hab. Bridlington Bay; several specimens taken in the
towing-net by Mr. E. C. Davison. On weeds in Roundstone
and Clifden Bays, Ireland (G. S. B.).

The most distinguishing characters of this fine species are
the auditory sete, with which the upper antennz are on their
basal portions thickly clothed, and the broadly laminar con-
struction of the fifth pair of feet, more especially in the male
sex.

Genus CENTROPAGES, Kroyer.
(Ichthyophorba, Lilljeborg ; Calanopia, Dana; Catopia (?), Dana.)
1. Centropages typicus, Kroyer.
C. typicus, Kroyer (1849), Nat. Tidsskr. Anden Reekke andet Bind, Side 288;

Boeck (1864), Oversigt over de ved Norges Kyster iagttagne Copepoder,
.19.

P
Ichthyophorba denticornis, Claus (1863), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,

p- 199, pl. 35. figs. 1, 3-9; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. i. p. 40,

pl. 4. figs. 1-6,

This species occurs not uncommonly in surface-net gather-
ings from the open sea, but never in very great numbers, so
far as my observation extends. I accept Boeck’s identification
of the species with C. typicus of Kroyer, but without the
opportunity of myself referring for verification to the original
description.

2. Centropages hamatus (Lilljeborg).
Ichthyophorba hamata, Lilljeborg (1853), De Crustaceis &c. p. 185, t. 21.

figs. 1-5, 7-9, and t. 22. figs. 9-12; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D.

(1865), vol. i. p. 39, pl. 4. tigs. 7-10.

I, angustata, Claus (1868), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 199, t. 35.

figs. 2, 10-12.

Diaptomus Bateanus, Lubbock (1857), Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2.

vol. xx. p. 404, pl. 11. figs. 1-3.

Centropages hamatus, Boeck (1864), Oversigt &c. p. 20.

Of very frequent occurrence in surface-net gatherings from
the North Sea, I have also once taken it sparingly amongst
Fuci near low-water mark, between Sunderland and Ryhope.

Subfam. Powrerriw.

Genus ANOMALOCERA, Templeton.

Anomalocera Patersonit, Temp.

Anomalocera_ Patersonit, Temp. Trans. Ent. Soc. (1837); Baird, Brit.
Entom. (1850) ; Boeck, loc. cit. (1864).

of the North-east Coast of England. 3)

Ireneus Patersonii, Claus, Die frei-leb.. Copep. (1863).
Of common occurrence in the open sea all round the British
Islands.
Genus PoNnTELLA, Dana.

Pontella brevicornis, Lubbock.
Pontella brevicornis, Lubbock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xx.

(1857), pl. 11. figs. 4-8.

In surface-net off Grimsby and in Bridlington Bay. Amongst
weeds in tide-pools near Ryhope, August 1871. Shetland
(Mr. Norman).

In a gathering made by Mr. E. C. Davison in Bridlington
Bay, this species occurred in great abundance, the contents of
the net, which quite filled a six-ounce bottle, consisting of
about equal numbers of P. brevicornis, Anomalocera Patersonitt,
and larval forms of the higher Decapods.

Fam. Cyclopide.
Genus Cyctiops, O. F. Miiller.

1. Cyclops Lubbockit, Brady.
C. Lubbockii, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans, N. & D. vol. iv. p.127, pl. 4. figs. 1-8.
In pools of brackish water, Hartlepool, June 1866.

2. Cyclops equoreus, Fischer.

C. equoreus, Fischer, Abhandl. der Akad, der Wissenschaften, Munchen
(1860), Band viii. p. 654; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. iv.
p- 128, pl. iv. figs. 9-16.

In brackish pools at Seaton Sluice, Northumberland.

3. Cyclops littoralis, n. sp. Pl. I. figs. 9-14.

Superior antenne twenty-two-joited, clothed with long
setee, more particularly towards the base ; joints all very short,
the two terminal ones, which are the longest, not being much
longer than broad, the twelfth and sixteenth much produced
and bearing a long seta at the external margin. Inferior an-
tenn without a secondary branch, four-jointed ; fifth pair of
feet composed of a single three-jointed branch ; caudal seg-
ments about four times as long as broad; sete four, the two
central ones being alike in length and equal to the three pre-
ceding segments.

Hab. Amongst weeds in tidal pools, near Whitley and
Ryhope. Rare.

4. Cyclops ovalis,n. sp. PI. III. figs. 1, 2.

Superior antenne twenty-four-jointed, as long as cephalo-

6 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

thorax, slender and nearly equal in width throughout; joints
about equal in length and breadth at the base, gradually in-
creasing in length towards the apex, the terminal joint being
about thrice as long as broad; each joint bearing a single
short delicate hair on the external margin, the twenty-second
and twenty-third one on each margin, the last having four
or five apical sete. Caudal segments about four times as
long as broad; seta not much longer than the caudal seg-
ments.

Hab. One specimen only, taken off Sunderland in the surface-
net.

Genus Orrnona, Baird.

Oithona helgolandica, Claus.

Oithona helgolandica, Claus (1863), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 105,

Taf. 11. figs. 10-12.

O. spinifrons ?, Boeck (1864), Oversigt Norges Copep. p. 25.

Taken occasionally in the surface-net; plentifully off Sun-
derland, August 1871. Frith of Forth, Whitby, and Brid-
lington, in gatherings made by Mr. E. C. Davison.

Boeck’s description of O. spinifrons seems to me not to in-
dicate any essential difference between it and O. helgolandica,
Claus, the chief point being the presence of a minute rostrum
in the Norwegian specimens, which is not noted in Claus’s
definition. ‘This, however, might be easily overlooked. I
have seen it in some of my examples, but have not succeeded
in bringing it into view in others, and should, in fact, have
probably missed it altogether, had it not been for M. Boeck’s
description.

Genus BorckIA, nov. gen.

Like Cyclopina in general appearance. Superior antenne
very short, six-jointed, much shorter than the cephalothorax.
(Mouth-organs totally different from those of any of the allied
genera.) Swimming-feet like those of Cyclops, but very short
and broad. Fifth pair of feet one-jointed, laminar, spinous.
Abdomen much elongated ; tail-sete short; ovisacs two.

Boeckia arenicola, n. sp.

Second joint of superior antenne the longest, three times as
long as broad ; fourth and fifth joints of equal length, two thirds
as long as the second; sixth joint scarcely as long as the pre-
ceding; third the shortest of all, about one-fourth as long as
the second. Inferior antennz short and thick, three-jointed,
without any secondary branch, densely beset with rather short
and stout seta. Swimming-feet having the marginal angles

of the North-east Coast of England. 7

of the inner branch much produced ; margins densely and finely
ciliated ; lateral spines of the outer branch lanceolate, laminar;
the basal joint fringed with a row of somewhat similar, but
much smaller, spines in pectinate series. Feet of fifth pair
consisting of a single slightly curved, club-shaped joint,
having on its outer margin one long spiniform seta with two
minute ones near its base, at the truncate extremity two
similar large setee with an intermediate smaller one, on the
middle of the inner margin six subequal curved setee of mo-
derate size, and at the extreme angle three of a similar kind
but smaller. Abdomen elongated, swollen at the base; caudal
segments rather more than twice as long as broad; tail-sete
shorter than the abdomen. Length +4 of an inch.

One specimen, dredged on a sandy bottom at a depth of
4 fathoms, off Seaton Carew, September 1871.

The mouth-organs of this animal are of very remarkable
structure; but I defer attempting any description or giving
any drawing of this species, in the hope of being able to illus-
trate it completely from a better series of specimens.

Genus PSEUDOCYCLOPS, nov. gen.

In general conformation resembling Cyclops. Right supe-
rior antenne of male without a hinge-joint, but much swollen in
the middle. Inferior antenne two-branched, secondary branch
nearly equal in size to the primary. Lower foot-jaw like that
of Cyclops. Swimming-feet having both branches three-
jointed. Fifth pair of feet in the male very complex in struc-
ture, the external branch of one side produced into a powerful
sickle-shaped clasping-joint, the whole resembling very closely
the male copulative organs of some Ostracoda.

Pseudocyclops crassiremis, n. sp. Pl. II. figs. 1-8.

Left superior antenna of male seventeen-jointed ; basal joint
large and stout, those next following very short and broad,
gradually decreasing in breadth to the fifteenth, which is about
as long as broad; last two joints more slender, about twice as
long as broad; the whole limb densely beset on the outer
margin, especially towards the base, with long sete; antenna
of right side ten-jointed, the central joints much enlarged, last
two suddenly contracted and similar to those of the left side,
antepenultimate joint armed with a strong lateral subfalciform
process ; both branches of inferior antennz bearing numerous
long, curved terminal setze ; first joint of the lower branch en-
larged and truncate at the distal end. Maxillee composed of
four digitate lobes, each bearing four long terminal sete.

8 Mr.G.S.Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

Lower foot-jaw stout, with almost entire margins. Joints of
swimming-feet very broad, subtriangular, much produced at
the external distal angle. Abdomen slender, consisting of four
segments ; tail-sete slender, finely plumose, the longest equal
to about twice the length of the abdomen. Length of animal
gi, of an inch.

Hab. Off Seaham Harbour, dredged in a depth of twenty
to thirty fathoms. Only one specimen taken.

The characters of this genus are very remarkable and
strongly pronounced, especially as regards the fifth pair of
feet of the male, which are more complex than any thing of
the kind hitherto known amongst the Copepoda. Another
species referable to the same genus (P. obtusatus, Brady, MS.)

was taken abundantly in the surface-net by Mr. D. Robertson
and myself in Roundstone Bay, Ireland, on a calm moonlight
night in June of last year.

Genus THORELLIA, Boeck.

Thorellia brunnea, Boeck.
T. brunnea, Boeck (1864), Oversigt over de ved Norges Kyster iagt.

Copep. p. 26. k
iNadere regional, Norman (1868), Last Shetland Dredging Report,

p- 2965.

One specimen of this species occurred to me amongst Fuci,
in pools near low-water mark between Ryhope and Sunder-
land, in the autumn of 1871. Mr. Norman has taken it abun-
Soy amongst Laminarie in Shetland and at Tobermory in

ull.

The genus differs from Cyclops chiefly in the conformation
of the lower foot-jaw, which is transformed into a four-jointed
clawed foot. M. Boeck describes also in the same place an-
other closely allied genus, Misophria, in which the maxille
are formed as in the Harpactide, but with a strongly deve-
loped palp; the lower foot-jaws as in Calanus.

Genus CYCLOPICERA, nov. gen.

Superior antenne about as long as the cephalothorax, many
jointed, bearing (as in the Harpactide:) a sword-shaped ap-
pendage near the distal extremity. Inferior antenne three-
jointed, having a minute secondary branch. Upper foot-jaw
chelate, three-jointed, the last joint forming a doubly-curved
very long claw; lower foot-jaw four-jointed, last two joints
forming a long claw, each joint of which bears a spine on its
inner margin. Swimming-feet as in Cyclops. Fifth pair of
feet small, one-jointed.

of the North-east Coast of England. 9
Cyclopicera lata, n. sp. Pl. III. figs. 3-8.

Superior antenne twenty-jointed, basal joint large, next
eight very short and broad, the following six about as long as
broad, sixteenth and seventeenth about twice as long as broad,
last three shorter and more slender, seventeenth joint bearing
a long laminated ensiform seta ; inferior antenne triarticulate,
the first joint bearing a minute biciliated one-jointed branch,
second joint of about equal length with the first, third very
short and bearing a slender terminal claw; maxille two-
branched (?), each branch terminating in three long slender
sete ; fifth pair of feet very small, laminar, with one basal and
two apical sete. First segment of abdomen very short and
broad, finely ciliated in the middle of each lateral margin ;
caudal segments about twice as long as broad; setee equal in
length to the abdomen.

One specimen only, taken amongst weeds in rock-pools at

Roker.
Fam. Corycexide.
Genus MAcrocHIRon*, nov. gen.

Superior antenne (six to seven-?) jointed; inferior four-
jointed, uncinate. Lower foot-jaw very large and powerfully
chelate. First three pairs of swimming-feet alike, each branch
being three-jointed ; fourth pair with the mner branch small
and two-jointed, rudimentary. Fifth segment of cephalothorax
long and greatly swollen below. Abdomen consisting of five
segments, all short.

Macrochiron fuctcolum, n. sp. Pl. III. figs. 9-18.

Rostrum short, but distinctly angulated; first cephalo-
thoracic segment very large, following three small, fifth con-
stricted at the base but much swollen and elongated below,
equal in length to the preceding. three segments ; abdominal
segments short, none of them longer than broad, the first the
shortest. Superior antenne of the male seven-(?), of the
female six-jomted; last joint of lower antenna very short,
bearing several long sete and a long curved claw, which is
serrated on its inner margin; terminal claw of the lower foot-
jaw very long and strong, suddenly curved at the extremity.
First three pairs of swimming-feet short, springing from a large
base, the joints short and broad; fourth pair having the outer
branch elongated, the inner short, biarticulate, its second joint
bearing two apical sete. Fifth pair of feet rudimentary,
slightly different in the two sexes. Caudal segments about

* Maxpos, long; yelp, a hand,

10 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

thrice as long as broad; sete short, ciliated, jointed in the
middle. Length !; of an inch. Colour dark brown.

Hab. Amongst Fuci near low-water mark between Ryhope
and Sunderland. 'T'wo or three specimens.

This approaches very closely the genera Oncea, Philippi,
and Antarva, Dana, but does not seem strictly referable to
either of them. Probably, indeed, the two are synonymous.
One of my specimens differed in some minor points from the
others, whence I supposed it to be of different sex, and have
so described it here. The species, however, requires further
examination.

Fam. Harpactide.
Genus LONGIPEDIA, Claus.
Longipedia coronata, Claus.

This beautiful species occurred abundantly on a sandy
bottom off Seaton Carew, in a depth of four fathoms, also off
Seaham Harbour (twenty to thirty fathoms), and among weeds
near the Bell-Rock Lighthouse. Mr. Norman finds it in
Shetland; and I have myself taken it on the west coast of
Ireland.

Genus Ecrinosoma, Boeck.
Lictinosoma melaniceps, Boeck. Pl. V. figs. 1-12.

Off Seaton Carew and Seaham Harbour, in company with
the foregoing species, but less abundantly.

The characters of this remarkable species are so distinct
that I cannot doubt its identity with that described by Boeck,
though I have not noticed any thing in my specimens which
warrants the term melaniceps. Moreover the fifth foot con-
sists of two branches, and not of one only as stated by that
author, unless, indeed, the Norwegian animal be a different
but closely allied member of the same genus.

Genus 'Tacurprus, Lilljeborg.
Tachidius brevicornis (Miiller).
Cyclops brevicornis, Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 118.
Tachidius brevicornis, Lillj., De Crustaceis; Brady, Nat, Hist. Trans. N.
& D, vol. iv. p. 180, pl. 5. figs. 1-9.
In pools of brackish water at Hartlepool, Hylton Dene, and
Seaton Sluice.
Genus Ipya, Philippi.
Idya furcata (Baird).
Canthocamptus furcatus, Baird, Brit. Entom. (1850).
Tisbe furcata, Lilljeborg, De Crustaceis (1858),

of the North-east Coast of England. 11

Tisbe ensifer, Fischer, Beitr. zur Kenntn, der Entom. (1860).
e tt ya barbigera (?), Phil. Wiegmann’s Archiv (1843).

Very common amongst weeds in tide-pools.

Genus WeEstwoop!A, Dana.

Westwoodia nobilis (Baird).
LHarpacticus nobilis, Baird, Brit. Entom.

One specimen, on Laminaria saccharina at Roker (1871).

Berwick Bay (Dr. Baird).

Genus DELAVALIA, Brady.
Delavalia palustris, Brady.
D. palustris, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. iv. p. 134, pl. 5.
figs, 10-15.
In pools of brackish water at the side of the Seaton burn,
above Seaton Sluice.

Genus CANTHOCAMPTUS, Westwood.
Canthocamptus imus,n.sp. Pl. IV. figs. 1-5.

Animal slender, sublinear. Superior antennee of the female
eight-jointed, the fourth, seventh, and eighth joints bearing
several long sete, the second and third each three of moderate
length, the last joint having also five or six smaller marginal
sete arranged in a pectinate series ; rostrum long and slender,
curvate. Lower foot-jaw simple, chelate; mner margin of
hand bearing in the middle one seta of moderate length.
First joint of inner branch of first swimming-foot equal in
length to the entire outer branch, second joint very short,
third about half as long as first, bearing three terminal sete,
the middle one being very long and minutely pectinate at the
extremity ; outer branch of fifth pair oblong, having two long
apical sete, three shorter ones on outer and one on inner
margin; inner branch ciliate on outer, and armed with five
long setee (the last of which is excessively slender) on inner
margin. Ovisac single, curvate, containing but few (six to
nine) ova, ranged in a single plane, and very large in propor-
tion to the size of the animal. Length 5! of an inch.

Hab. About ten miles off Seaham Harbour, in a depth of
thirty fathoms on a muddy bottom: a few specimens only
taken.

Genus LaopHonte, Philippi.

1. Laophonte similis? (Claus).
Cleta similis, Cls. Die Copepoden-Fauna von Nizza, p. 23, pl. 5. figs. 13-16,

Amongst weeds in tide-pools at Whitley, Cullercoats, and
Sunderland, and in brackish water at Seaton Sluice.

12 Mr.G.S8. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

My specimens do not entirely agree with the figures and
descriptions given by Claus; but 1 am unwilling, without a e
more extended examination, to describe them as belonging to
a distinct species.

2. Laophonte lamellifera (Claus).
Cleta lamellifera, Cls. Die frei-lebend. Copep. p. 123, pl. 15. figs. 21-24.
One specimen, on frond of Laminaria saccharina at Roker.

3. Laophonte Hodgit, n. sp. Pl. VI. figs. 1-9.

Upper antennz six- or seven-jointed, those of the male (?)
shorter and thicker than those of the female, rather densely setose;
lower foot-jaw of moderate size, with a very long and slender
slightly curved claw; outer branch of first foot three-jointed,
short ; fifth pair of feet foliaceous, larger in the male, the outer
branch elongated, having four or six long sete on the apex
and outer margin; the inner wider, and bearing internally
four or five marginal sete, those situated near the apex being
very long. Caudal segments in the female at least four times
as long as broad.

Hab, Off Seaham, dredged in twenty to thirty fathoms.
Several specimens were taken. I have a mournful pleasure in
naming this species after my late friend, Mr. George Hodge,
it having been taken during one of the last dredging-excur-
sions in which I had the pleasure of his company.

Genus CLETODES, nov. gen.

Animal resembling Laophonte in general appearance. Up-
per antenne six-jointed. All the four pairs of swimming-feet
alike, and having the outer branch three-, the inner two-
jointed. Lower foot-jaw chelate. Lower antenne without a
secondary branch.

Cletodes limicola, n. sp. Pl. VI. figs. 10-17.

Animal, when seen from above, elongated, distinctly in-
dented at each ring of the body. First segment of cephalo-
thorax short, about equal in length to the two following ;
second and third abdominal segments produced into spinous
processes at the lower lateral angles. Upper antenne in the
female much shorter than the first cephalothoracie segment ;
first three joints short and nearly equal, fourth about half as
long as the third, fifth as long as the third, but much more
slender: in the ma/e forming at the third joint a large vesi-
culiform swelling, last joimt elongated and uncinate. Swim-
ming-feet elongated, slender ; the outer branch ciliated on the

of the North-east Coast of England. 13

margins, bearing at the apex of each joint, on the external
margin, a long slender spine; terminal spines long and slen-
der; the middle joint has also a long apical seta at the inner
margin: inner branch two-jointed, the first joint very small,
the second long, almost filiform, and dividing at the extremity
into one short and two very long lash-like branches. Fifth
foot in the female foliaceous, the outer branch rather the longer,
bearing one long seta at the apex and three shorter ones on
the outer margin; inner branch with two long apical sete : in
the male the two branches are of nearly equal length, very
narrow, simple, one branch bearing one, the other two long
setee at the apex. The caudal segments short, but longer in
the male than in the female; seta one on each segment,
scarcely longer than the segment itself. Length 1, of an
inch.

Hab. Off Seaham Harbour, in a depth of from twenty to thirty
fathoms, on a soft muddy bottom. ‘T'wo specimens only taken.
On account of the peculiar structure of the swimming-feet,
which were identical in both examples, I think I am justified
in referring these to the male and female of the same species.
The genus approaches Lilljeborgia of Claus; but the characters
given by that author, “ Pedum sequentium (2, 3,4) rami in-
ternt rudimentarti, rami externi triarticulati, uncinati,” do

not apply here.

Genus Harpacticus, M.-Edwards.
1. Harpacticus chelifer (O. F. Miller).

Cyclops chelifer, Miller, Entomostraca (1798).
Harpacticus chelifer, Claus, Die frei-lebend. Copep. (1863) ; Boeck, Over-
sigt Norges Copep. (1864).
(Not H. chelifer of Lilljeborg.)
Not uncommon amongst weeds between tide-marks, Roker,
Whitley, &c. In the open sea, off Seaton Carew.

2. Harpacticus gracilis, Claus.
H. gracilis, Claus, Die frei-lebend. Copep. (1863).
H, elongatus, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864).

This occurs in the same situations, though not so frequently
as the foregoing species. M. Boeck doubts the identity of his
H. elongatus with Claus’s gracilis, on account of a difference
in the lengths of the antennal joints. This character, however,
seems to me to be often subject to considerable variation ; and
I should not, without some divergence in other respects, be
disposed to separate the two forms. Indeed both approach so
closely to H. chelifer that it seems questionable whether they
might not be more fitly regarded as varieties of that species.

14 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

3. Harpacticus fulvus, Fischer.

H., fulvus, Fisch. Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Entom. (1860); G. O. Sars,
om. 1862 Zool. Reise.

H. curticornis, Boeck, loc, cit. p. 88 (1864).

H. chelifer, Lilljeborg, De Crustaceis ex ord. trib.

Tigriopus Lilljeborgi, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report, p. 296.

In pools at or above high-water mark, Bamborough, Cul-
lercoats, Marsden. Boeck and Sars both describe this species
as inhabiting chiefly pools at or above high-water mark, which
are liable to get warmed by the sun. In such situations it is
often extremely abundant in our district.

4, Harpacticus niceensis ?, Claus.
Harpacticus niceensis, Claus, Die Copep.-Fauna von Nizza, p. 31, pl. 2.
fies, 12-14.
A few specimens which I doubtfully refer to this species
have occurred to me on the fronds of Laminaria saccharina
and other Fuci at Sunderland and Ryhope.

Genus ZAus, Goodsir.
Zaus spinosus, Goodsir.

Z. spinosus, Goodsir, Edinburgh New Phil. Journ. (1842) ; Claus, Die frei-
lebend, Copep. (1863) ; Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864).
Common on Fuci, and especially on the fronds of Laminaria,

in tidal pools and beyond low-water mark, Roker, Ryhope,
Sunderland, Cullercoats, &c. Shetland (Rev. A. M. Norman).

Genus THALESTRIS, Claus.
1. Thalestris longimana, Claus.

Frequent on the smaller weeds and on Laminarie in tidal
pools, Roker, Sunderland, Ryhope, &c. Also in the open sea,
but more rarely.

2. Thalestris helgolandica?, Claus.
On Laminaria in tide-pools at Roker; not common.

3. Thalestris harpactoides, Claus.
In the surface-net off Grimsby and Teesmouth.

4. Thalestris Clausii, Norman.
T. Clausii, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report.
Frequent on Laminaria saccharina and other weeds in tide-

pools, Ryhope, Sunderland, Roker, Whitley, &e.

of the North-east Coast of England. 15

Genus DacryLopus, Claus.
1. Dactylopus tisboides, Claus.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker and Ryhope; scarce.
Abundant in brackish pools at Seaton Sluice.

2. Dactylopus similis, Claus.

One specimen, dredged in a depth of four fathoms off Seaton
Carew.
3. Dactylopus brevicornis, Claus.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker ; not common.

4. Dactylopus Normani,n. sp. Pl. V. figs. 13-17.

Closely approaching D. tisboides, from which it differs, how-
ever, in the following particulars :—The superior antennz are
eight-jointed, and not so densely setose, the proportional
lengths of the various joints being as follows :—4, 4, 3, 4, 4,
$,4,4%. The secondary branch of the lower antenne biarti-
culate, each joint bearing two moderately long sete. Lower
foot-jaw (gnathopod) simply chelate; the inner margin of the
hand fringed with short sete. Longer branch of the first foot
slender, bearing almost at the extremity of the outer margin a
short ciliated seta. Fifth pair of feet large; outer branch
subovate, bearing three long sete (one at the apex, one on
each lateral margin), and three shorter ones on the outer mar-
gin between the apical and lateral sete; inner branch ver
much smaller, subquadrate, extending only half the length of
the outer, bearing four primary sete, two of them long and
two of moderate length, the interspaces being densely ciliated.

Hab. Roker, on Laminaria saccharina; rare.

Genus ScuTELLIDIUM, Claus.
Scutellidium tisboides, Claus. Pl. IV. figs. 6-10.

One specimen, on the frond of Laminaria saccharina at

Roker.
Genus ALTEUTHA, Baird.

1. Alteutha bopyroides, Claus.
Often taken abundantly in the surface-net, all round the
British Islands.
2. Alteutha purpurocincta, Norman.

A. purpurocincta, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report.
Peltidium purpureum, White, Pop. Hist. Brit. Crust.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker and Cullercoats; fre-
quent. Shetland (Rev. A. M. Norman).

16 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda.

3. Alteutha depressa, Baird.
This species, described by Dr. Baird in his ‘ Natural History

of the British Entomostraca,’ is unknown to me, and appears
not to have been recognized by any other author. It was

taken by Dr. Baird in Berwick Bay.

Genus Aspipiscus, Norman.

Aspidiscus fasciatus, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging
Report, p. 298.

Abundant on the fronds of Laminaria saccharina at Roker,
Sunderland, and Cullercoats. Shetland (fev. A. M. Norman).

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate IL.

Fig. 1. Pseudocyclops crassiremis (male): animal, seen from right side,
x 84. iy. 2. Superior antenna of right side, x 210. Fig. 3.
Superior antenna of left side, x 210. Fg. 4. Inferior antenna,
<x 210. Fig. 5. Maxilla, x 210. Fig. 6. Lower foot-jaw, x 210.
Fig. 7. Fifth pair of feet, x 120. Fy. 8. Last abdominal seg-
ments and tail, x 84.

Fig. 9. Cyclops littoralis, superior antenna, X 210. Fg. 10. Inferior
antenna, X 210. fg. 11. Mandible, x 210. Fig. 12. Upper
foot-jaw (?), X 210. Fg. 18. Lower foot-jaw, x 210. Fig. 14.
Abdomen and tail: a, foot of fifth pair: x 210,

Puate III.

Fig. 1. Cyclops ovalis, superior antenna, X 120. Fig.2. Abdomen and
tail, x 120.

Fiy.38. Cyclopicera lata, superior antenna, X 210. Fig. 4. Inferior an-
tenna, X 210. Fig. 5. Maxilla, x 210. Fig. 6. Upper foot-
jaw, X 210. Fig. 7. Lower foot-jaw, x 210. Fig. 8. Abdomen
and tail: a, foot of fifth pair; x 120.

Fig. 9. Macrochiron fucicolum, male (?), seen from right side, x 100.
Fig. 10. Upper antenna of male, x 220. Fig. 11. Upper an-
tenna of female, x 220. Fig. 12. Lower antenna, x 220.
Fig. 13. Mandible, x 220. Fig. 14. Lower foot-jaw, x 220.
Fig. 15, Foot of fourth pair, x 220. Fig. 16. Foot of fifth
pair (male), X 220. Fig. 17. Foot of fifth pair (female), x 220.
Fig. 18. Caudal segment and sete, x 220.

PuateE LV.

Fig. 1. Canthocamptus imus (female) : animal, seen from left side, x 100.
Fig. 2. Superior antenna, X 250. Fig. 3. Lower foot-jaw,
Xx 250. Fig. 4. Foot of first pair, x 250. Fig. 5. Foot of fifth
pair, x 250.

Fig. 6. Scutellidium tisboides (female), upper antenna, x 210. Fig. 7.
Mandible and maxilla, x 210. Fig. 8. Foot of first pair, x 210.
ee Lower foot-jaw, xX 210. Fig. 10, Foot of fifth pair,
x 1

On the Myology of Sarcophilus ursinus. 17

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Ectinosoma melaniceps, female (?), seen from right side, x 84.
Fig. 2. Superior antenna, x 210, Fig. 3. Lower antenna, x 210.
Fig. 4. Mandible: a, origin of palp, x 300. Fig. 5, Mandible-
palp, x 300. Fig. 6. Maxilla, x 300. Fig. 7. Upper foot-jaw,
x 300. Fig. 8. Lower foot-jaw, x 300. Fig. 9. Foot of first
pair, x 210. Fvg. 10. Posterior abdominal segments and setz,
x 120. Fig. 11. Foot of fifth pair, x 210. Fig. 12. Maxillary
appendage (?).

Fig.13. Dactylopus Normani, superior antenna, X 210. Fig. 14. Lower
foot-jaw, X 210. Fig. 15. Foot of first pair, x 210. Fig. 16.
Secondary branch of lower antenna, xX 210. Fig. 17. Fifth
pair of feet, x 210.

PuateE VI.

Fig. 1. Laophonte Hodgii, upper antenna of female, x 210. Fig. 2. Upper
antenna of male, x 210. Fig. 3. Lower foot-jaw, x 210.
Fig. 4. Foot of first pair, x 210. Fig. 5. Foot of fourth pair,
x 210. Fig. 6. Fifth foot of female, x 250. Fig. 7. Fifth foot
of male, x 250. Fig. 8. Caudal segment of female, x 250.
Fig. 9. Caudal segment of male, x 210.

Fig. 10. Cletodes limicola, female, seen from above, X 100. Fig. 11. Up-
per antenna of female, x 250. Jy. 12. Upper antenna of male,
x 250. Fig. 18. Lower foot-jaw, x 250. Fig. 14. Foot of
first pair, x 250. Fig. 15. Foot of fifth pair, female, x 250.
Fig. 16. Foot of fifth pair, male, x 250. Fig. 17, Caudal seg-
ment of female, x 250.

IL.—Further Observations on the Myology of Sarcophilus
ursinus. By ALEXANDER Maca.ister, M.B., Professor of
Zoology, University of Dublin, and Director of the Univer-
sity Museum.

In the ‘ Annals’ for March 1870 I published an account of
the dissection of a young female Tasmanian Devil. Since
that time three specimens of this species have been brought
alive to the Dublin Zoological Gardens. Two of these still
live, and are in an exceedingly healthy condition ; one, how-
ever, did not survive its imprisonment for more than a few
months; and I have had the opportunity of making a careful
examination of its muscles and of repeating my former obse1
vations.

As this second specimen was fresh, a male, and full-grown,
it was in far better condition for examination than its prede-
cessor in our dissecting-room, which was a salted specimen.
This individual was 30 inches long, and his muscles were
red, plump, and strong.

The platysma myoides, and indeed all parts of the panni-
culus carnosus, were very strong and red, contrasting decidedly
with the weak undefined condition which they exhibited in

- Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 2

18 Prof. A. Macalister on the Myology

the former specimen. The cervical portion of this muscle
formed a thick strong sheet, which passed from the occipital
and mastoid regions downwards and forwards, over the mova-
ble clavicle and over the humeral region, to be attached to the
integument in the vicinity of the elbow. The dorsal and
abdomino-lateral and femoral parts of the panniculus were
particularly strong.

The muscles of mastication were exceedingly remarkable in
their development. The masseter was distinctly bilaminar,
the superficial portion being four times the size of the deeper ;
the directions of the two lamine were exceedingly oblique.
The temporal was of enormous size, three times the size of the
external masseter; the pterygoids were smaller, the external
being exceedingly feeble; the internal was also small. The
most expressive way of representing the enormous size of
these muscles is by stating that the weights of the muscles
which elevate the lower jaw (masseters, pterygoids, and tem-
porals) were equal to the sum of the weights of all the scapular
and brachial muscles (deltoids, spinates, biceps, brachiales,
triceps, &e.), or to the entire series of muscles which act on
the shoulder-joint (pectorals, latissimus dorsi, spinati, deltoids,
&c.). This will give some idea of the power with which these
formidable creatures can close their mouths. (However, the
habits of the two specimens in the Zoological Gardens do not
seem to indicate the great degree of ferocity for which the
species has got credit.)

The trapezius arose from only four dorsal spines (in my
other specimen it extended to seven); the clavicular portion
was distinctly attached to the outer third of the clavicle. The
central portion of the cervical and upper part of the muscle
was directly continuous with the acromial (not the clavicular)
deltoid; and, gliding over the shoulder, this portion was in-
serted into the lowest part of the deltoidal crest.

The latissimus dorsi was attached to the lowest five dorsal
spines, and to the spines of three lumbar vertebre, and only
to the tip of the last rib: I was able to separate it clearly
from the pectoralis quartus (from which it was not easily
distinguished in the last specimen); its tendon of insertion
was rather below that of the teres major.

Rhomboideus major was only attached to three dorsal spines.
The serratus magnus arose from the seven upper ribs and the
four lower cervical transverse processes ; a detached slip arose
from the second and third cervical transverse processes, and
represented a levator scapule.

The cleido-mastoid was small and separate, one third the
size of the sterno-mastoid.

of Sarcophilus ursinus. 19

There were two trachelo-acromiales muscles, as in the
otter, one from the transverse process of the atlas to the outer
half of the scapular spine; the other arose from the same
process further back, and was inserted into the posterior
third of the scapular spine. In the former specimen I missed
the posterior portion of this muscle.

The supraspinatus is double the size of the infraspinatus,
and equal to the subscapularis. There is a distinct small
teres minor; I could not separate it in my former specimen.
The subclavius was not only attached to the clavicle, but also
extended beneath that bone to the spine of the scapula.

The deltoid consisted of three parts :—a clavicular, from the
outer half of the clavicle (this I before thought was acromial) ;
an acromial, continuous with the trapezius; and a scapular,
from the metacromion and anterior half of the scapular spine.

The pectoralis quartus was a strap-like band from the linea
alba of the abdomen (extending upwards for *2 of an inch
from a point ‘25 above the umbilicus) ; its insertion is above
that of the pectoralis minor.

The two tendons of the biceps were very closely tied toge-
ther, and the main body of the muscle was radial in its inser-
tion; yet there was a very slender ulnar slip. The biceps was
twice the size of the brachialis (‘32 oz. :°16 0z.). The extensor
mass was very much in excess of the flexors (1°67 oz. : 0°48 0z.).
The anconeus externus was inseparable from the triceps, but
the anconeeus internus was very distinct. The palmaris was
as described in my former paper.

A careful dissection satisfied me that the slip which I had
before taken as a supinator longus was really only a slip of
the panniculus carnosus—as it had no bony. attachment, but
was directly continuous with the continued slip of the pla-
tysma: the only supinator is the short one, which nearly equals
in weight the pronator quadratus. The extensor secundus
digitorum was only attached to the fourth and fifth digits ;
and the former digit had two tendons supplying it (in my
former specimen there were four tendons—two to the fifth,
one to the third, and one to the fourth). A separate slip
(ulnaris quinti) existed, which arose with the extensor carpi
ulnaris, and, passing in the groove in the annular ligament
with the extensor minimi digiti, is inserted into the base of
the fifth metacarpal bone.

The psoas magnus and the iliacus are easily separated from
each other; these, taken together, are four times the size of
the psoas parvus. The pectineus was not double, as it was
in the former specimen. The upper slip of the obturator ex-

ternus was semidetached from the rest of the muscle.
Q%

20 On the Myology of Sarcophilus ursinus.

The quadratus femoris was very remarkable, arising from
the transverse process of the first caudal vertebra, from the
tuber ischii, and a tendinous band which passed from the one
to the other. Gluteus minimus was easily separable from the
medius. A very thin slip represented the obturator internus.
Tensor vagine femoris is separate and thin. Sartorius is ex-
ceedingly feeble. The biceps flexor cruris arises only from
the tuber ischii and two caudal vertebree.

The “ bicipiti accessorius” was quite distinct at its origin,
but joined at its insertion to the semitendinosus—which muscle
was thus tricipital, having one head caudal overlapping the
biceps, one ischiatic, and, thirdly, this accessorius. The two
other heads are similar to those which exist for the same muscle
in Castor fiber, Atherura, and the Otter. There is a middle
head of the gastrocnemius, which joins the external.

The peronsi and tibial muscles were exactly similar to those
in my former specimen. The foot-muscles were as follows :—
Abductor ossis metatarsi minimi digiti, from the os calcis to
the spur of the fifth metatarsal; abductor minimi digiti, a
superficial muscle, with a short triangular belly and a long
tendon, which arises from the external annular ligament over
the peroneei tendons, and is inserted into the fascia over the
flexor tendon of the little toe.

The lumbricales were six in number—one to the inner and
one to the outer side of the outer toe, a similar pair for the
fourth toe, a single internal muscle for the third and one for
the second toes.

The rudimental hallux has two muscles—a flexor brevis,
which extends from the scaphoid bone to the first phalanx,
and an exceedingly fine triangular and superficial adductor,
which arises superficial to the palmar interosseous muscle for
the index toe, and is inserted into the inner side of the first
phalanx of the hallux.

The interossei were three plantar and four dorsal, the former
being (1) adductor indicis, (2) adductor quarti digiti, (3) ad-
ductor quinti digiti; the latter were (1) abductor indicis,
(2) adductor terti digiti, (3) abductor tertii, and (4) abductor
quarti digiti.

The only other points worthy of note were the extension of
the scalenus posticus to the upper four ribs, of the external
oblique to the ten lowermost, the absence of ilio-costal fibres
in the quadratus lumborum, an enormous triangularis sterni,
a two-bellied depressor of the mandible, whose anterior por-
tion is connected to and parallel with the genio-hyoid, with
which it agrees in function.

On the Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 21

I1.— The Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton.
By Harry G. SEELEY, St. John’s College, Cambridge.

[Continued from vol. ix. p. 280.]
§ 3. The Physics of the Skeleton.

The next step after a study of growth is to observe in what
directions growth usually occurs; then we may discover the
forces which accumulate the energy that results in such growth.
All animals of the kinds named Vertebrata have their internal
bones arranged in a way which in many respects is the same
for them all—a great antero-posterior extension; and this
arrangement is named the skeleton. But when animals are
contrasted with each other, they manifest differences in the
degree of growth, and in the presence or absence of some of
their bones; and these peculiarities, being persistent through
an immense number of variously modified individuals, give to
the skeleton a number of different plans, which admit of being
defined. And out of these considerations arise the great pro-
blems affecting all bones, which will here be stated. They
are :— What is the skeleton, and why has it an existence as a
skeleton ? and what are the plans of growth of the skeleton
among vertebrate animals, and why do those plans exist ?

Here, then, the skeleton first appears as an accomplished
fact, without visible genesis beyond such as may be traced in
each individual, where changes are observed to occur in the
bones after an animal has left the egg or the uterus, which
are in sequence from their first formation to completed growth.

By the skeleton, I understand in the foregoing passage the
vertebrate skeleton only ; and I wish, for convenience, to keep
the idea of the vertebrate skeleton distinct from other impor-
tant osseous machinery of vertebrates, which is better named
the appendicular bones, the dermal bones, and the respiratory
bones. The reason for this distinction is that the nature of
their relation to the axial skeleton must first be demonstrated
before it can be reasoned upon. ‘The vertebrate skeleton,
moreover, is the only one which is well developed in every
vertebrate animal, the other bones being variable and giving
characters to the plans of the subordinate sections. Thus the
Vertebrata admit of being defined as those animals in which
the elongated central nervous system is sheathed posteriorly
by a sequence of osseous rings, and anteriorly by a bony box—
the rmgs being the vertebree protecting the spinal cord, while
the box is the skull covering the brain. This definition in-
cludes all the animals classed by zoologists as Vertebrata, ex-
cepting the lancelet (Amphioxus), which, for reasons given in

22 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

the chapter on classification, must be regarded as forming a
group of equal zoological value with the Vertebrata.

The division of the nervous system and of the skeleton into
a long posterior part and a wide anterior part is the essential
vertebrate character. And if we are to understand what cha-
racters are essential, and why they undergo change, an attempt
must be made to state clearly what they are, and why they
exist. It will be sufficient, with regard to the spinal column,
to know that it is a central, somewhat cylindrical mass, ex-
tending the length of the vertebral column generally, giving
off at intervals pairs of nerves, and tapering towards the tail.
While the brain is posteriorly continuous with the spinal cord,
it is much larger, and consists of parts which are sometimes
arranged one before the other, and sometimes one over the
other; it usually gives off nerves to the eyes, the ears, the
nose, &e.

The vertebree have a common basis, on which the neural
column rests, and which is a subcylindrical column, called the
notochord. When segmented and ossified, it forms the part
of each vertebra named the centrum; and this centrum gives
attachment to a pair of bones which arch over the spinal cord
and are separated from others by the intervertebral nerves ;
they may become inseparably united to the centrum or always
remain distinct. The skull is made by a number of small
bones which suturally unite, or simply overlap each other, so
as to enclose the brain, which case usually may be separated
vertically down the sutures into three more or less well-defined
segments, each consisting of a bone at the base, a bone on
each side for the sides of the arch, and one or two bones above
vaulting it over. A necessary and separate part of the skull
is comprised generally under the terms upper and lower jaws.

Now we have to inquire why these parts exist—in other
words, how they come to grow. And all growth has been
seen to be organic dialysis, which takes place under the in-
fluence of alternating pressure and tension and rest. How,
then, does this law apply to the formation of the vertebrate
skeleton, and account for the formation of bones so deeply
seated and well protected, and for the formation and com-
plexity of brains and crania? I will endeavour to explain.

All vertebrate animals are locomotive, and all fish and all
immature Amphibia live in water. These animals progress
backward, though we usually name the motion forward ; that
is, each uses its tail to obtain a leverage by which it retreats,
the animal’s head necessarily going where the tail sends it.
It is therefore evident that the head, in piercing the water,
experiences some pressure alternating with rest, while the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 23

body experiences a serpentine motion originated by the tail
and passing forward. ‘To understand clearly the effects upon
the animal of this movement, it will be useful to study it ex-
perimentally. If, then, I take an ordinary long bolster, which
in its cylindrical form will represent a fish, and hold firmly
one extremity of it (which for convenience I suppose to be its
tail), and then imitate the movement of the fish by moving
the tail powerfully from side to side, it will be seen that the
movement propels the feathers towards the free end of the
bolster; that is, by granting the bolster a tail, I have elabo-
rated for it a head also. Now to apply this principle to the fish.
Instead of the force furnished by my hands, there are enor-
mous muscles extending down the body ; instead of the bed-
ticking for an outer envelope, there is a vertebral column;
and finally, instead of feathers inside of it, there is the central
nervous system, which, in the young state at least, is centrally
fluid. Now, if the tail is set moving as it is seen to move in
a fish out of water, the powerful pressure behind will compress
the light semifluid substance of the spinal cord and force it to
move forward, and this movement is maintained during the
life of the individual; it will also by the tension increase the
length of the spinal matter relatively to the osseous sheath.
The mechanical effect, then, of motion originated by the tail
is an immense amount of leverage applied at every point of
the curve of the body, which inevitably acts upon the con-
tents of the spmal tube in compressing and forcing the sub-
stance forward. It also must act, as all tension and pressure
have been seen to act, in stimulating the growth of the spinal
cord.

Thus there is a persistent influence ever tending to elongate
the spimal column. As it was seen that there is an actual
forcing of the spinal cord forward, so this growth will tend in
the same way. But I have already pointed out how soon the
individual power to be modified in form comes to an end,
although the forces capable of modifying the organism con-
tinue to act,—and that thus the energy of life is not lost, but
becomes potential for a time in the parent, and can only be
manifested kinetically when a bud or ovum which has in it a
capacity for mobility which the parent had not, is thrown off
from the organism; and then, under the name of a variety,
we see manifested the potential activity of the parent which
its organization had previously compelled to remain as poten-
tial activity. So that we cannot expect to find these forces
producing large visible effects under our eyes in one indivi-
dual. But we must expect that im a succession of individuals,
each of which remains for a certain period capable of modifi-

24 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

cation, the force which is potential and persistent, and in each
individual is renewed, will, as the opportunities for it to take
the kinetic form successively arrive, be manifested as fully as
it would originally have been in one individual if the organic
machinery had been capable of maintaining the nutrition ne-
cessary to elaborate growth. I shall thus be justified in
reasoning about the species as though it were an individual,
and to conclude that the force which has been shown, both
theoretically and experimentally, to be competent to produce
an elongation of the spinal cord toward the part called the
head, actually does produce the effects which it ought to pro-
duce. And the way in which this is done depends upon the
means to do it: first, the forcing of the nutritive fluid forward
necessarily produces an enlargement of the nervous system at
the anterior end; and, secondly, the growth forward of the
nervous system must cause a pressure which will stimulate
special growth in that region; and the parts of the brain
which were originally arranged one before each other may
come to be forced one over the other by growth forward of the
neural tissue pressing into the brain-case.

And when a brain is examined, in it are found large cavi-
ties called ventricles, which are the receptacles of fluid, such
as we might theoretically expect. And when the brains of
the lower Vertebrata are compared with those of the higher
Vertebrata, there will be remarked a gradual increase, as we
ascend in organization, in the size of the cerebral lobes, which
first push the optic lobes on each side so that the cerebrum
abuts against the cerebellum, and finally overrides it. There- |
fore it must be anticipated that the longer the time for which
a vertebrate type of animal has persisted upon the earth’s
surface, the higher will be its nervous organization; and
hence that extinct animals which seem to be the direct repre-
sentatives, so far as their bones go, of existing animals, will,
so far as they approach nearer to the common vertebrate
plan, have had a lower grade of vital organs. Having seen
that the movement of the body would be competent, by
governing the direction of growth and the distribution of
nutriment, to generate the brain from a pre-existing spinal
cord, it is probable that the nerves are in the same way
affluents to and sustainers of the spinal column, and that their
presence preserves its division into segments.

Having advanced this hypothesis of the vertebrate plan of
the central neural system, we will endeavour to see how the
nerve-matter becomes coated with the investing skeleton.
And to do this, it will be requisite to consider the entire body
as a machine capable of manifesting the forces of pressure and

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 25

’ tension, and to examine how the part of the body under con-
sideration can be affected by these forces.

It is due to Mr. Herbert Spencer to state that he has
endeavoured to grapple with this question; but, although he
appreciated fully the simple mechanical conditions of the
problem, he seems to me to have failed to solve it. His argu-
ment is that when pressure is manifested on alternate sides of
a rod, there will be a neutral axis within it which only expe-
riences small compressions, and external to that an investing
region, where pressure and tension alternate. He then tries
to apply that principle to a fish. The principle would be »
perfectly applicable to a long bone, and would account for its
being hollow or less dense internally ; but it is not applicable
to a fish, because there is nothing to correspond to the hollow-
ness of a bone in the middle line of the animal; and, on the
contrary, the region which should be the unossified neutral
axis is the ossified neural skeleton—a condition exactly the
reverse of what it should be were Mr. Spencer’s hypothesis
true. Mr. Spencer’s error consists in not recognizing that the
muscles of the body are, in regard to the production of the
neural skeleton, precisely what the weight is which bends a
revolving flexible rod—the power which produces a neutral
axis, and which also produces the pressure and tension in
which we have seen that ossifications arise*.

In seeking to explain this formation of an osseous skele-
ton, stead of taking an abstract, impossible archetype to
reason from, my argument may be clearer if we examine
the conditions of the problem as presented in some animal.
Having the choice of animals, among which a Chelonian
would be the least suitable, the most difficult skeleton to un-
derstand, I select a whiting. The fish manifests locomotive
energy ; and to find the source of this mechanical power, I
skin her. ‘The skin requires to be dissected off, on account of
its close union with the constituent fibres of the muscles ; and
in some parts of the body there are attached to it special
skin-muscles in addition. The skin removed, there is seen an
enormous development of muscles, which are arranged in a
very marked way. Fibres extend from the skin obliquely
inward toward the skeleton; and these fibres are grouped into
obliquely placed muscles, which are arranged along the animal
parallel to each other, so as to make large strips of similar
muscles, which reach from tail to head. In the tail of the
whiting there are four of these strips on each side; and the
constituent muscles are so arranged that the obliquity of the

* Principles of Biology, vol. ii. p. 196.

26 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

four series makes a W-like outline when traced externally ©
from the dorsal to the ventral surface, the upper part of the W
being towards the animal’s head. Here, then, is an immense
muscular power, so arranged as to act in many directions.

Removing the whole of the muscles, we expose the verte-
brate skeleton beneath them, and find that each transverse
muscular segment corresponds with a transverse osseous seg-
ment ; and that the direction of the muscles of the two middle
strips of the W coincides with the direction of the dorsal and
abdominal processes of the vertebree, and with the nerves.
‘These middle muscular strips are large compared with the
superior and inferior strips; and in transverse section each
often shows, by the method of overlapping, an approach to a
concentric arrangement of the constituent muscles in the re-
gion of the tail. The forces represented by these muscles are,
I believe, precisely such in their distribution and combination
as theoretically might have been anticipated. But, before
considering the effects of their action, it is to be remarked that
the discovery of a notochord among the Tunicata lends strong
probability to the supposition that the notochord, which ex-
tends beneath the neural chord, is not a product, but one of
the original foundations, of the vertebrate plan. But, granting
a notochord, it is impossible, without a stretch of imagination,
under which the reason gives way, to assume the existence of
a mass of muscle like that which makes the great bulk of a
fish, and then try to account for its segmented condition, as
Mr. Herbert Spencer does, by lateral breaking strains. In
nature, so far as [ am aware, no such phenomenon exists.
And it seems to me as gratuitous to assume the existence of
the muscles, in order to have them subsequently segmented
by these imaginary lateral strains, produced without any force
to produce them, as it is to suppose that the foundation of the
vertebral column is laid by breaking strains segmenting the
notochord. Before such views can claim to be considered in
science, their author is bound to show that an animal is acted
upon by lateral forces external to itself, and that an effect of
such strains would be to cause the muscular tissues to snap
into little short muscles, and that such strains continued would
eventually pass through the whole of the animal except its
skin and viscera! In the chapter on growth, we have seen
that the consequences of strains would be, not a weakening,
but a strengthening of the tissues.

In the axial part of a fish, a serpent, or indeed in any ani-
mal, the successive segments, both of bone and muscle, are
exceedingly similar to each other. Almost at all parts of the
trunk two adjacent vertebree can only be distinguished from

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. par

each other by close comparison, if they are in the same divi-
sion of the body. And there being this sequence, the form of
parts only changing with the changed function of different
regions of the body, it will be legitimate reasoning, if we can
discover a law capable of accounting for a primitive initial
segment, to conclude that the continuous operation of that law
would eventually segment the entire animal, 7f an animal
capable of being encased in a segmented covering already
existed.

According to the laws of growth, we find that differentiation
of parts is due to the kinetic energy of the individual or to
the potential energy of its organization—and that no organic
energy is lost, but becomes accumulated in the individual long
after the mobility of the parts ceases, and then is transmitted
with and added to the common stock of energy to be inherited.
If this inherited energy is such that it is capable of being
manifested within the mobile period of life, then it will stamp
its characteristic marks upon the organism. But if it is too
general to be manifested during that period, it takes a poten-
tial form, and may even remain latent for several generations
and accumulate, and then, instead of being developed kineti-
eally in the individual, it at an early period is merged in the
common stock, and appears kinetically in the organization,
and potentially in the individual, as a new part.

Thus in Ophidians, which exert continually an intense
muscular force upon every joint of the vertebral column, we
find that the kinetic energy is manifested in giving to the
bones great density, sharpness of definition, and perfect ossifi-
cation, but never in the partial formation of a growth like
an epiphysis, between vertebre. Yet, if the views which
IT urge are true views, there should be some result, in in-
creased ossification, of all this muscular power; and the
result is found in the numerical increase of the vertebra, so
that in Ophidians they sometimes number 400 or 500. But
this increase is potential, and takes place at so early a period
that the newly added segment (vertebree, muscles, nerves, &c.)
is developed equally with the others. If the increase takes
place in the thoracic region, it necessarily elongates the viscera;
if the tail is lengthened, by comparison the body appears to be
shortened.

If we take another type, that of the Anurous Amphibia,
which do not display muscular power by: wrigglings which
press and pull the vertebrae, as among serpents, but progress
by leaping, and keep the body removed from the ground, ex-
cept at the caudal style, the power, both kinetic and potential,
acts chiefly on the limbs—kinetically in the elongation and

28 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

hollowness of the limb-bones, the ilia, &c., potentially (per-
haps) in the formation of investing epiphyses at their ends—
but in scarcely an appreciable way upon the vertebree in either
form, since they remain both very few in number and short.

It cannot be necessary to multiply these illustrations ; for
the same law may be traced in every osseous structure. Where
an animal uses any part of the body, the part grows long,
either kinetically by lengthening the individual parts, or
potentially by increasing their number.

If, now, we generalize these facts in relation to the vertebral
column, the result is, that since the potential epiphyses multi-
tiply indefinitely and elongate the body, so there must have
been a period when the body was short and when the seg-
ments were very few—and that the elongation of the body
proceeds gradually, and, except in the caudal region, is likely
to be arrested by the development of limbs.

It were simplest to assume, if there had been grounds for
doing so, a single vertebra as the basis from which the body
was formed; but the existence of a notochord among tunica-
ries, and the vast gap between Amphioxus and ordinary
vertebrates, does not warrant such an assumption ; nor does it
indeed enter practically into my theory of a vertebrate. How-
ever, if we assume an animal with the viscera of a fish, with
a notochord, and with terminal muscles capable of moving the
tail, then the consequence of that arrangement would be the
formation of a terminal segment, not by breaking a piece off
the notochord, but by the muscular action increasing the
density of the terminal portion, and this organic dialysis even-
tually giving it a structure by which it is chemically separated
from the other parts. The direction of the mechanical strain
becomes the direction of greatest density, and determines the
directions in which the osseous matter is deposited and the
shapes which it assumes.

Then, just as the inherited energy of many individuals at
last became a force sufficient to differentiate the first osseous
caudal segment, so the continuous operation of the same mus-
cles goes on accumulating energy for which there can be no
outlet in the adult organization, and the energy takes the
potential form. It has, in fact, become so powerful that, in-
stead of displaying itself only in maturity, it begins to act
upon the immature animal at as early a time as the other and
ordinary laws of its growth, and in this way gives expression
to itself, differentiating a new segment similar to the pre-
existing segment—a potential epiphysis, which, growing con-
tinuously with the original segment, can afterwards scarcely
be distinguished from it. Thus the tail comes to have two

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 29

segments; and so the process must go on, the vertebra in-
creasing in number and extending further towards the head,
till the basis of a vertebral column is elaborated. So far as I
am aware, this hypothesis is in accord with the sum of the
facts, and gives an explanation of their relation to each other.
And not only does it account for the original existence of a
vertebral column, but for its subsequent modifications, and for
the repetition of the successive similar soft parts (muscles and
nerves) which are correlated with the bones.

But so far we only account for the centrum of a vertebra.
In our usual conception of it, especially as seen in the fish’s
tail, it includes an arch on the dorsal part, called the neural
arch, which covers the neural column, and a similar arch on
the ventral side, called the hemal arch, which covers a blood-
vessel. In dissecting a fish, the muscles in the tail of the
dorsal and hemal sides of the animal are seen fo be as like
each other as are the neural and hemal arches; so that it will
be in accord with the mechanical basis on which this investi-
gation started to conclude that in both cases a like force has
produced a like result.

But how? If we grant the differentiation of an initial
caudal segment of the notochord by muscular power, then as
those lateral muscles of the tail, acting obliquely, enlarge,
they would, with increasing force, become competent to set up
a separate ossification upon the notochord at each of the mar-
gins of their overgrowth. And these points, it is to be re-
marked, coincide with the points of origin from the centrum
of the lateral parts of the two arches. When once these
kinetic epiphyses are brought into existence, the lateral mus-
cular attachment would ensure their growth, and the dorsal
and ventral muscles would as surely draw them towards each
other above and below. Thus the fundamental plan of the
tail of a fish in its soft parts supplies the machinery necessary
to elaborate the hard parts; and from their less bulk and the
greater relative power brought to bear upon them, it would
seem not improbable that the neural and hemal arches should
be ossified at an earlier period in the history of the organiza-
tion than the centrum. And this muscular power would be
competent, if the arches long remained separate from the cen-
trum, to draw them towards each other, so that the dorsal part
of every neural arch would abut against the dorsal part of the
arch next behind it. Thus there will come to be formed in-
terlocking facets between the arches, of which the anterior
will look upward while the posterior will look downward: in
most animals the neural arches actually have such. facets,
which are known as anterior and posterior zygapophyses.

30 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

In the median lateral line between the great lateral muscles
slight transverse processes are sometimes developed; and these
may be upon the centrum, or upon the neural arch, or upon
the hemal arch, according to the arrangement of the muscles.
But the point is one of detail, and not a fundamental part of
the vertebrate common plan. As the caudal vertebree progress
forward towards the head, they encounter the viscera on the
hemal side; and then the hemal arch widens and embraces
the viscera, so that the parts called hemapophyses, which in
the tail are directed downward, come in the thorax to be lifted
up the side of the centrum and directed outward, sometimes
attached to the median lateral osseous process, and often con-
nate with it.. When the viscera extend to a great length
down the body, the lateral transverse processes are not deve-
loped as distmct processes; when the viscera have a short
extension and the tail is long, they are considerably developed,
and then pass forward as epiphyses upon the visceral region,
being developed at the point of junction of the hemapophysis
with the part of the centrum which supports it. In this form
the hemal arch is called a rib. And as the arch widens, new
elements come to be introduced into the circle which it consti-
tutes—formed toward the ventral surface by the increased
expansion given to the ventral strips of muscles, which often
become blended with the lower lateral strips.

In this way I conceive the vertebrate common plan to have
been elaborated, so far as its osteological structures are con-
cerned, by the mechanical machinery with which it is inevi-
tably accompanied. And if so, it will be evident that all
subsequent variations it may assume in form will be due to a
different distribution of the muscular machinery resulting
from kinetic growth, while the different proportions of the
different regions of the column will be due to potential growth.

In first conceiving of a vertebrate I introduced two ideas—
the tail and its product, the head. In obtaining a similar
generalized idea of the head to that just given of the body, it
may be as well to remark :—that the extension forward of the
vertebre will have maintained the spinal cord of approxi-
mately uniform size up to the point where, like the constricted
neck of a bottle, it abuts against the enlarged terminal part;
and that the transition im the dorsal region from neural
matter covered by a vertebra to the brain covered by the
skull is not dissimilar in kind to the transition seen on the
hemal surface, where the tail suddenly expands and covers
the viscera, only with this difference—that while the brain ex-
periences but very slight fluctuations im size, the viscera are

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 31

constantly undergoing change. Both hemal and neural parts
terminate in the head, but under these different conditions—
that while the neural arch is being modified for the first time,
the hemal arch undergoes its second transformation, which
may be altered to some extent by the relation of the two
arches to each other; so that, on & prior? grounds, the hemal
arch in the skull may be expected to be more complex than
the neural arch, and also to more readily assimilate to the
heemal arches of the body.

Now, if the brain-substance is supposed to have accumulated
at the anterior end of the body as a consequence of the motion
and mode of growth of the animal, and quite irrespective of the
vertebre, its covering from the very first experienced some
different conditions of ossification from those of the vertebral
neural arch—supposing, of course, an anterior enlargement of
the nervous system to have taken place prior to the entire
segmentation of the notochord. Such a view, however, is not
supported by the evidence from Amphioxus, since the noto-
chord is segmented and no brain developed. And the difficulty
of a theory of the skull hinges upon the relative probability
of the skull originating prior or subsequently to segmentation
of the notochord—because in the one case it will be but an
extension onward of the vertebral plan, and in the other case
it may have originated apart from the vertebral basis. If the
Amphioxus is a distinct type animal from the Vertebrata,
we shall not be warranted in reasoning from it to a vertebrate.
But, whatever the initial circumstances were which governed
the formation of a brain-case, we shall not be justified, except
with good evidence, in assuming any other cause to account
for it than potential repetition, which under altered conditions
has been found competent to produce very different osseous
structures in different parts of the vertebral column, especially
as the brain offers a surface to be covered different from the
spinal cord, and conditions of stability different from the visceral
region. It has been seen, with the diverging vertebral pro-
cesses, that, under the new conditions, osseous elements come
into existence which were not found in the caudal region:
similarly it will not be surprising if some new structures are
developed in the head by the special influences working in
that part of the body.

Suggestive evidence of original unity of origin, direct or
indirect, for the whole skeleton, is supplied by the skull being
segmented, as it is shown to be by well-made researches ; for
if it had originated independently, no trace of segments could
be anticipated, but an arrangement of bones with which the
spinal column would have at first nothing in common, though

32 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

eventually its potential energy would influence their arrange-
ment, and gradually bring the structure of the brain-case into
harmony with the vertebral plan. Thus there are three pos-
sible ways of formation for a skull :—1Ist, potential repetition
of the vertebrate plan; 2ndly, independent ossification; and,
3rdly, independent ossification modified by potential repetition.
The facts of the case are such that it is quite possible to select
examples which would sustain each of these views. Thus
among the shark tribe, the bony cerebral envelope is made up
of homogeneous osseous particles which show no indication
whatever of segmentation. And, in the absence of evidence
of division of the head into separate bones, it would be an
unwarrantable use of the imagination to suppose that the
divisions had once existed and have become obliterated. This
would seem to be a type of those examples of the skull which
have originated independently of the vertebral column and
before it extended the whole length of the animal. The ser-
pent might be taken as a type in which the skull might have
originated as a natural consecutive part of the vertebral sys-
tem; while for the third type we might instance fishes like
the sturgeon or animals like the Chelonians, where the brain
is first sheathed in homogeneous cartilage which may have
been formed independently of the vertebral system, then this
is covered with osseous plates, which reproduce with some
modifications the vertebral elements.

Thus there must always be a conflict between potential
energy, in organization, leading to uniformity and simplicity,
and kinetic energy, leading to variety; and the longer any
type endures in time, the more closely its cerebral region will
approximate to the vertebral structure, so far as the grouping
of the bones is concerned; thus in the human subject the
structure of the brain-case is more simple and the segments
are better marked than is the case with fishes; so that a
theory of the skull will depend upon the organization of the
animal, which determines the relative influence of kinetic and
potential ossification.

The human brain-case, being almost entirely a potential
ossification, is one of the simplest. It consists of some (three)
bones at the base, in the median line, called in sequence basi-
occipital, basisphenoid, and presphenoid, the basisphenoid
and presphenoid in the adult being united together as one
bone. The basioccipital immediately follows the centrum of
a vertebra; and these bones are to the skull what the centrums
would be to three segments of the vertebral column. On each
side of this row of skull-bones are placed three other bones (a
side bone to each base-bone), which rise up to embrace the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 33

sides of the brain. They are called (in sequence from behind
forward) exoccipital, alisphenoid, and orbitosphenoid, and have
the same sort of relation to the base-bones that the lateral
elements of the upper arch of a series of three vertebre have
to the three centrums out of which they rise. In the vertebra
the upper bones, called neurapophyses, enclose the neural
substance, meeting above it. In the skull they do not meet
above ; but just as with the lateral elements of the inferior
vertebral arch, in the transition from the true caudal region to
the preanal or visceral region osseous elements come to be
introduced between them in some animals, which did not
exist in the tail, so in the transition from the upper arches of
the vertebree to the upper arches ef the skull, enlarged to
cover the brain, a sequence of bones is introduced, to roof
over the cavity, to which there is nothing corresponding in
the vertebral region. ‘These bones, counting from behind
forward, are named supraoccipital, parietal, and frontal.
And all the bones enumerated differ from those of ver-
tebree in touching each other throughout their lateral margins
by sutures or overlap—a condition which in the vertebral
column is only met with exceptionally, as in the cervical re-
gion of the rays, pipe-fish, &c., and a part of the vertebral
column called the sacrum, in many land-animals. And these
bones touching each other throughout their extent, enlarge
the cranial cavity much in the same way as a sea-urchin en-
larges its covering shell. In the human skull there is some-
thing more, however; there are bones which have existence
in relation to the senses: such are some bones which come in
between the first and second segments of the skull, and are
connected in a more or less evident way with the ear; they
have been named collectively the otic bones. Then, between
the second and third segments, though external to them, is
usually one bone or more, developed seemingly i in relation to
the eye: the lachrymal (and, perhaps, the malar) is such a bone.
And in front of the brain there are bones which have relation
to the nasal functions, and are named generally the ethmoid
bones. In possessing these sets of bones the bony investing
girdles of the brain differ in plan from the investing girdles
of the spinal column.

If, now, we ask why there should be three segments in this
bony box for the brain, and why not an indefinite number of
segments as in the vertebral column, and why the structure
of the skull should become simpler the higher we ascend in
nervous organization, so that the three segments become more
and more well defined, the answer is, that the division be-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 3

34. Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

tween the segments is maintained by senses which are not
repetitions of each other, that the brain has a terminal sense
anteriorly, and that by the bones touching each other on
every margin, along all of which they can grow, there is in
the skull an exercised facility for kinetic growth, which ren-
ders it impossible that potential growth should be manifested.
If, for instance, a potential epiphysis of the frontal segment
of the skull were to be formed, it could only be developed

etween that segment and the parietal segment; and it could
only reproduce, to mark its division, a new pair of eyes behind
the old pair. And it is impossible to conceive of such a change
taking place except as the only way in which the energy of the
animal could be manifested. While, therefore, the bones of each
segment remain separate from each other, and permit growth
within, it is impossible that any cerebral increase, supposing
for a moment it were competent for such an end under any
circumstances, could result in the formation of a new segment.
Then (no matter how the mammalian skull originated), being
segmented by the sense-capsules, it must ever have been sub-
jected with greater and increasing influence to the potential
power of the vertebral column, which will be manifested in
bringing the plan of the segments of the skull more and more
into harmony with the plan of the vertebree, and so will obli-
terate any differences due to origin or number that there may
have been, in an earlier condition, between the structures of
the different segments.

Neglecting for the present the jaws of the potential skull
and the whole question of the nature of the inferior arches to
the segments, I would draw attention to the question whether
the potential character is always an induced one.

In most sharks there is no differentiation whatever of the
brain-case into constituent bones. In a specimen of the angel
shark in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, there
appears on the base of the skull to be a faint indication of a
transverse division. And it might be presumed that the seg-
ments would originate first, and then that each segment would
put on the divided condition; but I doubt whether the ten-
dency to potential increase is the same in the neural arch and
centrum ; for in many sharks the neural arch appears to be
double, to have been formed originally at each end of the
centrum, though often one of these arches has more the aspect
of a supplementary arch introduced between two centrums ;
moreover the fact that in paleeozoic fossil fishes the centrum is
rarely ossified would lead us to anticipate that in the skull the
base-bones would be the last formed and least well defined ;
so that in conceiving of a skull induced potentially upon the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 35

basis of a shark’s skull, it would be quite consistent with the
vertebrate plan to have a greater number of superior arches
than of median base-bones.

But in those ordinary osseous fishes in which the several
bones can be separated from each other, we find the skull in
no transitional state, but already with the elements well de-
fined, except at the base of the skull, where the kinetic ossifi-
cation persists as a long median bone called the parasphenoid
or basitemporal. And in the upper part of the skull, besides
the three ordinary arches such as have been described, there
come to be introduced three additional, imperfect arches, ana-
logous to the intervertebral neural arches of sharks, and which
I interpret as potential representatives of those structures.
The first pair, in front of the frontal bones, are named the
prefrontal bones, one on each side; the second pair are be-
tween the frontal bones and parietal, and are named post-
frontal; the third set are between the occipital and parietal,
and are named the interparietal bones: these latter only per-
sist in the skulls of the higher Vertebrata.

It is to be remarked that in fishes the cranial bones overlap
each other in the squamous way in which an ordinary zyga-
pophysis laps upon its fellow.

And it appears to me probable that Prof. Owen truly appre-
ciated the homology of the bones which roof in the skull when
he compared them to the small ossification which often
crowns the spimous part of the vertebral neural arch, which is
by him named the neural spine, since without that ossification
it would be more difficult to see why the lateral bones should
not curve upward and roof in the cranium.

It is also worth considering whether in osseous fishes the
potential growth may not have a direction, so to speak, given
it by the influence of cerebral form, because it is observed, in
skulls of equal size, that in Lophius, which has the cerebellum
very short and small, the occipital region of the skull only
measures 2 inches in length, while in the tunny, which has the
cerebellum large, the oécipital part of the skull measures 44
inches in length ; so that, since some fishes (like the eels) have
olfactory lobes to the brain almost as large as the cerebrum,
it may not be impossible that such a condition in fishes may
have had a tendency to promote differentiation like that seen
in the separation of nasal bones from the prefrontal in some
Chelonians.

Now, just as in the more osseous fishes the parts of the
divided neural arch become blended, and the centrum becomes
more solid, so in the higher Ver tebrata the prefrontal and post-

frontal bones have become lost under the uniformity induced
3%

36 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

by potential growth—if ancestors of such animals are con-
sidered ever to have had such bones.

This being, as I suppose, the mode of origin and plan of
growth of the neural arches of the skull, I turn to explain the
inferior arches.

In sharks the head is singularly instructive in the relation
of the jaws to the skull; for there they are seen to be free
structures which are merely appended to the brain-case. This
condition, permanent in the shark, is embryonic in what
are called higher Vertebrata.

The jaws are the entrance to the digestive canal ; and there-
fore we must anticipate that they will be surrounded with
bones which are the representatives of those which encompass
the digestive organs in the region of the vertebral column,
viz. of ribs. Prof. Rathke, describing the embryonic develop-
ment of the jaws in serpents, records that “that part of the
investing mass of the notochord in which the basisphenoid is
developed in many animals sends out a ‘ray’ or band down-
wards on each side, which presents a remarkable similarity to
a rib, not only in its mode of origin, but in its original posi-
tion and form.” “ But very early there grows out from near
the upper end of the ray a long thin process, which passes off
at an obtuse angle to it, and applies itself to the inferior wall
of the future brain-case.” Now this condition is that of an
ordinary rib of a fish. There is a long rib, as in mammals ;
but near its junction with the vertebra it gives off by articu-
lation a long thin epipleural element, homologous with that
of Crocodiles, [latteria, Birds, &c.; so that I see no reason to
doubt that the jaws are developed primarily as one rib, the
epipleural elements of the two sides being directed forward
and meeting in the middle line, so as to form the palate, and
the ordinary pleural elements being directed downward so as
to meet and enclose the digestive tube below. ‘The ribs of
fishes are simple ; but in reptiles and birds and mammals they
become segmented ; and there appears to be no limit to the
number of parts which may be included, while the degree of
ossification 1s various. In some animals there are five parts.

In the serpent the epipleural element. becomes segmented
into the pterygoid, palatine, and maxillary bones; while the
rib itself is divided into the quadrate bone proximally, then
the articular bone, and then the elements of the lower jaw,
which surround the cartilage and may number as many as
five. ‘The cranial representative of the rib always articulates
with the squamosal bone.

It must at once occur to any one to ask, if the cranium
consists of three segments, and only the middle one developes

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 37

arib, what has become of the ribs to the other segments ?
And it was the difficulty that there is in meeting this question
in the higher Vertebrata, which led me (in a former paper*)
to regard the occipital and frontal segments of the skull as
standing i in the same relation to the parietal segment as the
epiphyses of a vertebra stand to its centrum. But remember-
ing that, no matter what the potential power may be, it can
only ¢ rive great development to a structure when coincident
with functional growth, we should no more be justified in
anticipating ribs to all the cranial segments than to all the
vertebral segments ; and with many animals parts of the ver-
tebral column will be devoid of ribs. Yet as the upper arches
of the skull retain characters which long previously became
lost to the upper arches of the vertebral column, so we might
with more reason expect the lower arches to be present in the
skull than in cervical or lumbar vertebree. Accordingly, if
we examine a skull, and remove all those bones which we
have regarded as modified from a functionally developed rib
(which we name the jaws), there will be found in front of
their point of attachment, and under the frontal segment, two .
bones, named the vomeres ; sometimes they become ‘anchy rlosed
into one median bone. And anterior to these bones, and bent
up over them frequently, are the ethmoid bones, which simi-
larly may become anchylosed. Thus we again have the re-
presentative of a rib with its epipleuron. By segmentation
the ethmoid developes the nasal bones; and it 1s probable that
by segmentation the vomer forms the premaxillary. Thus the
pene rib conforms in plan to the posterior rib, and, like it,
embraces an organ which, in the lower animals, 1s only that
of smell, but which, by potential g growth comes, in the higher
vertebrates, to be the respiratory region. So that, just as there
are distinct tubes for breathing and for swallowing in the
land Vertebrata, so distinct tubes are made for those offices in
the skull by the prolongation forward of thé dorsal respiratory
tube till it is embraced by the first pair of cranial ribs, while
the digestive tube, not prolonged so far forward, is embraced
by the second pair. :

It is not so easy to find the third pair; and only on turn-
ing to the fish is the homology evident. At each side of the
back of the skull is a bone attached to the periotic bones,
named the hyomandibular; and to this bone is attached in
front the circle of hyoid bones; and attached to it behind are
the opercular bones; so that there is again a forked rib va-
riously segmented for the third arch.

* “ Outline of a Theory of the Skull &c.,” Annals, 1866, xvii. p. 345.

38 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

With the termination of branchial respiration (and the
branchial arches appear to represent the epipleural elements
of cervical ribs) the function of the pleural element of the first
cerebral arch appears to cease, and the bones of the operculum
are no longer developed; and in the same way, when the
respiratory function becomes changed, so that the animal
breathes by lungs, the branchial bones are merged in the
hyoid; the hyoid loses its heavy osseous character, and has a
less firm attachment to the hyomandibular. This bone then
gives attachment to the quadrate, and becomes the main sup-
port for the mandible ; so that it appears to be the bone which
among the higher Vertebrata is named the squamosal. In
the fish there are bones in front of the quadrate bone which
are called metapterygoid and symplectic. I have doubted
whether these bones may not have originally stood in the
same relation to the second visceral arch which the hyo-
mandibular held for the first, since they persist, the meta-
pterygoid becoming the quadrato-jugal, and the symplectic
becoming the supraquadrate ; and they both appear ultimately
to be absorbed into the squamosal. If this view were taken,
it would in no way be inconsistent with fact, and would only
show that the lower jaw had been carried a stage backward,
while it would explain the existence of two otherwise obscure
bones, and justify their disappearance under the influence of
potential growth in those animals in which they are wanting,
since in the Amphibia is seen a similar lateral joming-up and
absorption of the branchial arches into the hyoid.

Already it has been remarked that the lower jaw always
articulates with the squamosal bone, the squamosal bone
being, as we have just seen, apparently the proximal element
of a visceral arch. Sometimes the squamosal bone itself is
free, as in serpents ; but usually it is firmly fixed in the skull.
Sometimes, also, the quadrate bone is firmly wedged in the
skull, as in Crocodiles, Chelonians, Hatterta, and most of the
extinct Monocondylia; but there is no evidence whatever of
any other part of the lower jaw (as the os articulare) being
united with the skull» And in all those animals in which the
quadrate bone is joined with the skull, the lower jaw remains
composite. In the highest Monocondylia (birds) the quadrate
bone remains distinct, while the squamosal bone has entered
into the skull in the same way as in mammals, and furnishes
a concave articulation for the quadrate bone exactly like that
which in mammals is given to the lower jaw. Now, in so far
as the lower jaw occupies the position of a rib, the influence
of potential growth upon it would be to make it ever more
and more like a rib in simplicity of structure: hence I pre-

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 39

sume that when, in the mammal, one continuous ossification
joimed up all the splint elements of the lower jaw, the os arti-
culare and quadrate bone, as natural elements of the same rib,
could be no exception, and that there is nothing more re-
markable in this union than in any of the other transitions to
simplicity and uniformity and order which are produced by
potential growth.

And it may not be uninteresting to remark how much the
vertical part of the lower jaw in any herbivore reproduces of
the form of the quadrate bone in such an animal as a bird,
and how the inflection of the lower jaw in marsupials and
rodents reproduces such an inflexion as characterizes the os
articulare in birds and many reptiles. These growths in the
mammal may, I conceive, be potential repetitions. In the
mammal the pterygoid is moderately developed and is directed
downward posteriorly, and not backward as in birds and
lizards ; so that it does not actually meet the representative of
the quadrate bone; but the union is kept up by the ptery-
goideus muscle, attached from the outer inferior side of the
pterygoid to the inner side of the quadrate portion of the
lower jaw.

I am aware that Prof. Huxley has supposed that, contrary
to all analogy, the quadrate bone and os articulare enter the
mammalian cranium and become the malleus and incus.
After reading all that has been said for that doctrine, I can
see no evidence in its favour sufficiently strong to dissuade me
from stating my own view. If it has been important to con-
struct those bones out of pre-existing cranial elements, I would
suggest that Prof. Huxley might have taken the quadrato-
jugal and symplectic, which were available and would have
answered equally well. But I do not think any exigency of
theory can justify the creation of a new joint in the body by
imagining a convex articulation beneath the articular bone,
when there is nothing in the vertebrate province to suggest
that such an articulation might exist.

Such, divested of details, is the conception of the common
plan of the axial skeleton which, by the operation of the laws
of organic energy, may, I believe, call all skeletons into exis-
tence, extending them over the viscera like a pillow-case over
a pillow, till the animal is gradually but inevitably sheathed
in rings of bones. And thus it will be remarked that the pre-
existing soft animal would have no necessary correlation of
soft vital parts with its osseous sheath.

I touch with reluctance, because of its difficulties, on another
part of the skeleton, which seems as though only appended to
the vertebral column, already discussed by Prof. Owen, in his

40 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

treatise on limbs, and by others. Each limb consists of a
sequence of bones, of which the number of parts in each seg-
ment in most animals increases from above downward, and is
usually the same, part for part, in the fore limb and in the
hind limb. Thus in the first segment there is one bone, the
humerus or femur ; in the second segment two bones, the ulna
and radius or the tibia and fibula; in the third segment three
bones, in the proximal row of the carpals or tarsals; in the
fourth segment four bones, in the distal row of the carpus or
tarsus ; and in the fifth segment the five digits. Variations
occur in great number, but chiefly by suppression of parts;
and so true is the correspondence in general, that Professor
Humphrey offered an interpretation of the structure by sup-
posing that there were originally in each hmb five rays,
which in the humerus are blended into one, while in the pha-
langes they remain more frequently distinct.

It will be necessary to ask, what are these limbs, and in
obedience to what mechanical law are they where found, and
why do the fore and hind limbs correspond in their parts ?

But, besides the limbs, the skeleton possesses the arches
with which they articulate :—for the hind limb a pelvis, made
up of an ilium, ischium, and a pubis; and for the fore limb a
scapular arch consisting of a scapula and coracoid, and some-
times having associated with it a clavicle and interclavicle.

If we turn to comparative anatomy for an explanation of
the phenomena, in sharks and rays the pectoral and pelvic
regions will be found to be well developed, and Jong limbs are
attached to them which are already well segmented and limited
at the sides to fore limbs and hind limbs. In osseous fishes,
however, the fins represent, as a rule, more than two pairs,
and are often strongly developed down the back. So the first
difficulty is, why should there be but two pairs of limbs? 'To
that question, perhaps, an examination of a skeleton will fur-
nish an answer ; for the two arches will be seen to be at the
two ends of the primitive soft animal enclosed by the skeleton,
and at the two chief points of flexure of the skeleton—one
where the neck bends with the body, the other where the tail
bends with the body; and in those animals in which there is
little or no special flexure in one part more than another,
limbs are wanting, the potential tendency to the development
of limbs nevertheless notwithstanding. Now if we can dis-
cover why they are wanting, we obtain a clue to their law of
development.

In serpents the power expended in motion is distributed
equally along the whole body, and there is scarcely greater
pressure in one part than in another; so that its influence

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 41

upon growth is only seen in the great length of the ribs.
Now, if the body were stiffer in the middle, and flexible chiefly
in the neck and tail, then, instead of intermittent pressure
being distributed uniformly, it would be manifested chiefly at
the two extremities of the stiffer part, which, touching the
ground, would be lifted by the movements of the head and
tail. If, then, a large part of the pressure and tension which,
distributed over the body, elongate the ribs of Ophidians, were
accumulated in this or some such way (by movement of the
body) at these points, whatever osseous structures pre-existed
there would grow ; and potential growth would tend to make
the parts at the anterior end of the body correspond with those
at the posterior end. What parts, then, would there be exist-
ing in such places? Clearly some element of the abdominal
rib—elements, it may be presumed, which become the coracoid
bones and the ischia. As the ribs become segmented into a
number of parts in different animals, it is not easy to guess
how many were developed ; but as the facts of the case only
require two (coracoid and scapula, and ilium and ischium),
these may be presumed to be the second and third segments
of the rib. Now the consequence of setting up a special ten-
dency to grow in these elements can in no way interfere with the
growth of the original rib, which, being joined to these hemal
elements by overlap and by muscles, would, I suppose, slide
over the outside of these new growths, which would extend
inside of it. And I should regard the epipleuron as eventually
forming the clavicle and the pubis, while the suprascapular
is an effort of potential growth to reproduce the original rib
from which the arch-elementsthave become detached.

But how account for the limbs?~ Did they spring into ex-
istence ready formed, or grow gradually ? and, in either case,
how? I cannot but be impressed with the forked character of
the limb, dividing in its second segment, as reproducing the
forked character of the visceral arches of the cranium and of
the vertebre; and therefore I believe that, in the absence
of any other evidence of a distal osseous fork, we can
only look for the proximal element of a limb in the proximal
element of a rib. And so I conceive that the increased mus-
cular power of the pectoral or pelvic girdle might detach the
proximal part of the rib from its attachment with the vertebra
and draw it on to the already expanded hemal elements—and
that potential growth, such as reproduces the lizard’s tail and
the salamander’s legs, would cause its distal segments to be
developed anew at the distal end, although the proper distal
segments now gave attachment to the proximal end. With
the bone would necessarily follow the muscles ; and potentially

42 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

added segments would comprise both hard and soft parts. In
the absence of evidence, I can only throw out this idea as com-
pleting a conception of the skeleton as a whole. It explains
the origin of limbs simply as a modification of pre-existing
structures, without calling any new part into existence ; It
explains the harmonious segmentation of fore and hind limbs,
and the increase in number of bones in the successive distal
segments (as well as the primitive separation of the arches
from the vertebrae), which are the fundamental points of
structure in a limb. And no idea of epigenesis from the arches,
as suggested by Professor Owen, could justify either one
condition or the other. The only other obvious origin for the
limbs is by potential growth repeating the structure of the
jaws with their segments upon each of the arches, first on the
pectoral and afterwards on the pelvic arch, which is simple
and so far a preferable view. And if the limbs were regarded
as potential jaws, the fact that there are thus two modified
appendages to the body may explain why the three segments
of the brain-case have only one functionally developed hemal
arch, the other two, by potential growth, bemg removed to
the pectoral and pelvic arches.

This conception of the skeleton as originating in a single
ossification, and attaining all its complexity by growth in a
definite direction, which is sustained by laws coextensive with
the universe, and modified in the limbs by the circumstances
of existence, has a unity of plan, and gives a reason for every
variation which it displays. And if we believe that animals
have been changed in form and stature by the continuous
operation of those laws of energy which, by changing the
minutie of every thing that cognizance extends to, preserves
for them uniformity, order, and progress, then such small va-
riations from this common plan as give the distinctive marks
to each group of animals are themselves but an evidence of the
larger range of those laws which give the animal its unity and
one harmonious government with all things. Because this
unity is mcontestable, I believe in this change as a condition of
its stability ; but whether it is named creation or whether it is
named evolution, no name can extinguish the unbounded
harmony of the relations which it exhibits, or the unvarying
order in the changes to which names are but paths, or can
part a knowledge of the universe in its government from an
unutterable and reverent confidence. For to me it indicates,
beyond laws and their consequences, what, judged by human
standards, is Intelligence, of which laws in their working are
manifestations. If, then, an attempt is made to explain the
plans of animal life, it is in faith, born of science, that they

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 43

are products of divine law, and in a conviction of duty to seek
out its working in all ways.

The scheme of the skeleton now sketched is what may be
named a potential skeleton ; and whatever value it has is in
the insight it gives into the tana to each other of the parts
of skeletons and the importance of resemblances between
similar parts in different skeletons as evidence of genetic rela-
tion. All the types of vertebrate animals are based upon this
general plan, and each differs from the other m some compa-
ratively slight details of potential growth; and there is no-
thing peculiar i in the genera eee to onal of these minor
types except a varying growth, or suppression of growth, or
combinations of erowths: in the different bones of the body :
such modifications are the kinetic skeleton. If we find simili-
tudes between bones when they are compared together, the
comparison becomes meaningless and unprofitable unless we
believe the similitudes to be consequences of laws which can
be traced in their effects. The idea of affinity expresses faith
in such laws by teaching that the structural resemblances be-
tween animals are a consequence and evidence of an original
community of plan now only seen in fragments. And an
original common plan for vertebrates, a potential skeleton,
implies that the physical laws of nature producing growth
have upon their simpler product acted in differing ways, so
that the energy of the type became manifest in the divergence
of special different parts which make the plans of the several
vertebrate classes.

Hence the practical question, affecting all comparative
study, after the mind has cancelled whatever osteological
structures are variable in the type (and therefore demonstrabl
kinetic), is to discover in what direction each order has di-
verged from the common plan, and in what way this diversity
obscures or renders clear its affinities with the other orders.
To put a special case :—in what direction. relatively to the
vertebrate common plan is the osteology of a tortoise deve-
loped ? and how far from this osteology can we inter a com-
munity of divergence between the tortoise and all other or
any other known animals? Those points of divergence in the
potential skeleton would be the osteological affinities of an
animal, and, determined for a number of leaders types, would
eaaplen us to predicate within approximate limits the characters
of many extinct orders of which the existence is at present
hardly suspected.

To examine such a problem, it is necessary to be familiar
with the facts which are factors in it; and so to these we
must next turn.

44 On the Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton.

The correspondence of parts is frequently close between
animals which would not be placed by classifiers in the same
natural group; so that, as animals can only have diverged in
many different directions, or in directions which are approxi-
mately parallel, it is impossible not to believe that the corre-
spondence is the evidence of some kind of parallel relation
between the groups, which may, of course, be a parallel func-
tion kinetically modifying different common plans, or parallel
plans kinetically modified by different functions. Hach verte-
brate class consists of orders, but if these are arranged in
sequence of classificational semblance, their bones do not
graduate from one group into another: the lowest mammal
does not graduate into the highest bird, nor is there a sequence
from the bird down to the reptile. Classifiers, however, have
always agreed that there is something unnatural in the best
grouping “according to a logical system, because it removes
from near association animals which have real affinity with
each other. Nor can this be surprising, when we remember
that by a class of animals is practically understood a certain
horizon or grade of complexity of soft structures. So that if
the organization of the bird, for instance, has any relation of
affinity with mammal or reptile, the relation must be with
some specified order of reptile or mammal, and must be due
to their all having diverged in the same direction from the
common plan, all being the consequence of a line of variation
which has preserved parts of the skeleton unaltered for them
all, while the soft parts have become more and more complex,
in such ways that the ordinal stem has been divided at inter-
vals into parts which are successively named, it may be, fish,
reptile, and bird. If there is foundation for such a view, ‘there

can be no such close osteolo-
gical resemblance between the
different natural groups of ani-
mals upon the same horizon of
organization as there must be
between some animals upon
that horizon and some animals
upon another horizon. This
proposition may be exempli-
fied by a diagram of a hand,
where there may be supposed to
be five stems, springing from
a common plan, and it might
be better exemplified by taking
the entire limb as a type, w here the humerus would stand for
the common plan. Such a diagram expresses the idea that

_ Bird.
Reptile.
Fish.

\ common
One ]

A ve

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. 45

the resemblance between the different groups of reptiles, for
instance, is a correspondence of homologous parts, and no
evidence of the orders having had an immediate parentage in
common. Such a doctrine invites investigation. Here T can
but state it, and try to show hereafter in what way such por-
tions of it as practically concern the student of reptile bones
may be profitably studied.

IV’ —Proposed Name for the Sponge-animal, viz. “ Spongo-
zoon ;” also on the Ori. ‘agin of Thread-cells in the Spongiade.
By I. J. Carter, F'.R.S. &e.

As it has now been. satisfactorily determined that the Spon-
ciade are animals and not plants, and the form of the animal
which produces them has also been determined, it becomes
necessary to give that form a specific name, and to define the
animal, in order that henceforth both may not only be used
by the zoologist, but by the comparative anatomist, whose
lectures without such additions now cannot be considered
complete, the time having passed for the comparative anato-
mist and the botanist to dispute respecting the kingdom to
which this class of beings may belong.:

The name that [ would propose for this purpose is ‘ spon-
gozoon,” which is only the Greek rendering of “ sponge-
animal,” but retaining “ sponge” for the root will ever ally it
to the ’Spongiade, and thus aid the memory by associations
which any other term differently compounded would not do.

Spongozoon, or the sponge-animal, then, I first poimted out
in Spongilla, in 1857 (Annals, vol. xx. p. 28, pl. 1. fig. 4),
wherein it is shown that it is a granuliferous polymorphic
body possessing a nucleus and one or more contracting vesi-
cles (p. 30), that it exists in communities of a spherical form
with a common circular aperture (figs. 2,3, 5), in countless
numbers, in the sarcode of the sponge (fig. 1), and that it is

capable of taking into its body crude material and of dis-
charging the undigested portions after the manner of Ameba ;
lastly, that the circular aperture opens and closes itself as
required.

Then, in 1859 (Annals, vol. iii. p. 14, pl. 1. fig. 12), the

same monociliated body is described and figured with two
ear- or spine-like points of its sarcode, one on each side the
cilium, which, I might also add, now stands in my journal as
it was ‘fio ured Aug. 12, 1854, 1 although not published until
1859 ; and that I had been previously acquainted with the
existence of the spines may be seen by the following passage
in the paper to which I have last referred, viz. :—“ But there

4G Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon.

is one [monociliated body] in particular, which has two spines
or ear-like points projecting backwards, one on each side of
the root of the cilium (pl. 1. fig. 12), and this was the kind
which I first discovered and described; but, confounding it
with cells not possessing these spines (because I then thought
the spines might be accidental prolongations of the sarcode),
I did not give it this character.”

That I might have been right in this conjecture, the poly-
morphic nature of the whole of this body will presently show.

In June 1866, Prof. James-Clark read a paper before the
Boston Natural-History Society “ On the Spongie ciliate as
Infusoria flagellata, &c.” (Mem. vol. i. pt. 8, reprinted in
Annals, Feb. 1868), in which (p. 21, footnote) he conceives
that the two spines or ear-like points represent the lines en
profile of a‘ membranous cylindrical collar’? which he had
observed to exist round the cilium of the monociliated cell in
Leucosolenia botryoides, of which most satisfactory delineations
are given in his plate 1. figs. 41-44, together with that of
several species, fluviatile and marine, of similar aniinals that
live independently in groups or singly, sessile and pedicelled,
respectively, apart from the sponge altogether. In the latter
Prof. James-Clark most sagaciously demonstrates the exist-
ence also of this ‘‘ membranous collar ’’—observations which
have been further confirmed as satisfactorily by Mr. Kent’s
descriptions and delineations of several of the same kind of
Infusoria that he found in a pond at Stoke-Newington, in the
neighbourhood of London (Monthly Microscop. Journal for
Dec. 1871, p. 261, pl. cv.).

Returning, however, to Prof. James-Clark’s “ footnote,” he
adds, “ that Carter did not always find these ‘ two spines,’ may
be explained by the fact that the membranous collar, as | am
inclined to believe the ‘spines’ to be, was retracted, since I
have frequently observed this to happen in the case of Leuco-
solenia when it was disturbed.”

That is as much as to say that the “ collar” is polymorphic ;
and herein is the explanation of what I have above quoted
from my paper of 1859, viz. that “I then thought the
spines might be accidental prolongations of the sarcode,’”’—
a fact which is still further confirmed by my paper of 1871
(Annals, vol. vii. pl. 2. figs. 17 & 18), wherein it is not only
stated that every part of the sponge-animal is polymorphic, but
the “collar” itself in the figures mentioned may be observed to
be transformed into two pseudopodial tentaculiform processes
for seizing particles of food, like those of an Actinophrys or of
an Acineta.

Hence the “ collar ”’

may be cup-like around the base of the

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. 47

cilium, transformed into pseudopodial prolongations, or, as
Prof. James-Clark has stated, ‘ retracted’ altogether.

In 1871 (Annals, . c. pl. 1. ‘flow. 15, 16, &c.) [not only con-
firmed Prof. James-Clark’s observations respecting the exist-
ence of the “collar,” but found that in the spongozoon of
Grantia compressa it was supported on a neck-like projection,
to which I gave the name of ‘rostrum.’ Moreover it was
also proved, “by the use of indigo-solution, that the spongozoa
of this sponge took in crude particles of this substance, while
similar monociliated bodies similarly grouped were also ob-
served in the marine siliceous sponges; to which I can add
one of the horny species par excellence, viz. an Aplysina
(Nardo & Schmidt), now belonging to the British Museum,
but which Mr. Kent lately found while dredging for sponges
on board the yacht ‘ Norna,’ in Vigo Bay.

Thus having found spongozoa in all the three divisions of
the Spongiade, viz. in the Keratospongiz, the Siliceospongie,
and the Calcispongiz, similar in form and similarly grouped,
we may reasonably infer that the spongozoon exists as such,
perhaps more or less modified, throughout the whole of the
Spongiade, and therefore is the animal which constructs the
sponges generally

In Siliman’s Journal for Dec. 1871 (reprinted in Annals,
vol. ix. p. 71, pl. 11) Prof. James-Clark confirms, so far as his
observations go, the principal points of my description and
figures of the “‘ Ultimate Structure of Spongilla,” given in the
‘Annals’ of 1857 (7. c.), to which I have alluded in the first
part of this communication.

But at p. 76 (Annals, /. c.), where Prof. James-Clark states
that the groups of “ monad cephalids”’ (our spongozoa) are
“not cells; they are the heads of a polycephalic individual,
and consequently correspond functionally to the tentaculated
heads of polypi,” I cannot agree with him, inasmuch as
they appear to me to be much more analogous to the groups
of Ascidians in the gelatinous structure of a Compound Tuni-
cated animal, where the little colony is divided up into
groups, furnished respectively with a common cloacal orifice
(Annals, vol. vin. pl. 2. fig.41). Here I might add that some
of Schmidt’s Halisarcine are so like the Compound Tunicata,
that his HZ. guttula appears to me to be one of the latter, and
no sponge at all. I speak, of course, from the actual exami-
nation of his specimen in spirit at the British Museum in
connexion with his published description.

Further, Prof. James-Clark does not admit the existence of
a distinct cell round the groups of spongozoa, as I originally
described and figured them as a whole under the name of

48 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon.

‘‘ ampullaceous sac” (Annals, 1857, 7. c.), but that the groups
are situated in excavations of what I termed, in 1849, the
“intercellular substance ” (that is, in “‘ mere cavities,” having
“no lining wall,” Annals, 1872, /.c. p. 76), but opening into
the chamber which I have delineated between the “ investing
membrane” and the “ parenchyma” (fig. 1, 1857, /. c.), Pro-
fessor James-Clark’s “ cytoblastemic mass.’

All that I can state in reply to this is, that I have figured
faithfully (7. c.) what appeared to me to be the rim of a circular
opening in material belonging to the spherical group of spon-
gozoa. Furthermore, in my journal, under date “ 26th March
1857,” stands a figure of one of these spherical groups of
spongozoa which I well remember to have observed in
the watch-glass by dtse/f, with the cilia still vibrating in its
interior and the aperture closed, after that state had arrived
when, as I have described (p. 29, /. c.), the whole of the soft
parts of the young Spongilla, apparently from starvation,
leave the spicular structure and become dispersed about the
watch-glass.

That I did not figure this cell I also well remember to have
arisen from diffidence on account of the great number of new
and startling facts that were then revealed to me.

Of this being fact, [now have no longer any doubt; and
thus we had an “ampullaceous sac” entirely isolated from
the parenchyma (“cytoblastemic mass,” Prof. James-Clark)
of the sponge, that is, by itself in the watch-glass.

With no aperture, it is true; but then we know that this
can be closed or opened as required: yet it still retained the
globular form; and hence the question then comes, whether
this globular form was retained by an intercellular substance
or sarcode uniting the spongozoa together, or whether this
union arose from an amalgamation of the polymorphic sarcode
of which their bodies are respectively composed. I incline to
the former; and this is what I should designate as the ‘ am-
pullaceous sac.”

But here we arrive at a point which is most perplexing, if
it be not almost entirely beyond our powers to decide,—viz.
that state in which the living material assumes forms so deli-
cate and so fugitive that we are inclined to deny to them
characters even in a remote degree of that solidity and per-
manence which by comparative coarseness becomes so evident
to our senses in the more advanced developments of ordinary
tissues.

In short, are we to deny the existence of a cell of inter-
cellular substance binding the whole of the spongozoa into a
spherical community, or not? And if so, where is the proof

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. | 49

that this spherical form is maintained by the spongozoa
uniting together without the intervention of this substance ?

This brings me to another point which I wish particularly
here to clear up.

In Prof. James-Clark’s footnote (Annals, Jan. 1872, p.76) it is
stated that ‘he [Carter] has since (viz. in the Annals of 1859,
i. c.) revoked that view and adopted another. We believe him
to be, excepting the inferred ‘ampullaceous sac,’ in the main
right in his first interpretation ’”—that is, of 1857.

Had Prof. James-Clark chanced to have looked on to my
“Notes and Corrections” (Annals, 1861, vol. viii. p. 290),
two years afterwards, he would there have seen that which he
himself has stated, viz. that I myself then felt right in my
interpretations of 1857.

Time and subsequent observation have explained how all
this revoking occurred. The whole has arisen from the poly-
morphic ever-changing nature of the soft parts of the sponge.
What I saw at first was changed upon my second observa-
tions ; and I saw in the third set again what I had proclaimed
in the first and denied in the second. In the higher develop-
ments there is no dispute as to the nature of structures, because
they are permanent and evident; but in the ever-changing
sarcode phenomena are exhibited which certainly, in our pre-
sent state of knowledge, are inexplicable; and the very dif-
ference of opinion respecting them to which I have above
alluded proves at once that we have as yet no certain data:
to go upon for any assertions respecting them. What is a
mass of sarcode at one moment may be at another in the form
of a membrane so delicate as almost to be inappreciable by
our senses, and at a third reappear in the form of pseudopodial
prolongations. Nay, in dthalium the sarcode may be seen
to divide into separate portions and reunite into one mass,
apparently as intimately as drops of water.

Finally, I have to describe Spongozoon.

It may be defined to be a spherical polymorphic body or
cell, bearing on one part of its circumference an oblong cylin-
drical neck-like process, called the rostrum, which supports a
delicate cup-like collar, from the centre of which proceeds a
long cilium. Internally it contains granular plasma, in which
are imbedded a nucleus and one or more contracting vesicles.
It possesses the power of taking in crude material for food,
and exists in spherical or globular communities imbedded in
countless numbers in the sarcodal lining of the areolar cavities
of the sponge. Each of these spherical communities is pro-
vided with a circular contractile opening on the surtace,
through which the particles of food enter, to be further taken

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 4

50 On Parasitic Polypes and Thread-cells in Sponges.

in by the monociliated bodies which, in juxtaposition, line the
interior and, projecting their cilia inwards, keep up a rapid
undulating vibration towards the centre of this hollow sphere.
The undigested parts of their food may be seen to pass into the
excretory canals, and, through them, to be finally ejected at the
vents on the surface; but whether it passes through their
bodies after the manner of Ameba, or has a distinct channel
appropriated for this purpose, has yet to be determined.

Parasitic Polypes and Thread-cells in the Parenchyma of a
Sponge.

In a specimen, about two inches long, of a thick digito-
lobulate branched Reniera, tubulate, opening by a large vent
at the end of each lobe, and having one form of spicule only,
viz. thin, curved, acerate, said to be of a “pale red colour
when alive,” and found in “ Bon Bay,” in “ 25-65 faths.,”
just sent to me by Prof. Wyville Thomson, I have found the
parenchyma interiorly to be charged with thread-cells of an
ovoid form, almost elliptical, and averaging 3-6000ths of an
inch long by 2-6000ths of an inch broad—in short, very
similar to, if not exactly like, that delineated by Dr. T. Eimer
(Schultze’s Archiv fiir mikroscop. Anatom. vol. i. pt. 2,
fig. 1, A, p. 283).

Not having found these cells in the dermal part of this
sponge, nor in the surface-layer of the great tubular vents,
analogous to their position in the polypes &c., but, on the
contrary, in the interior of the parenchymatous structure of
the sponge, I began to think that they could not belong to it;
so I placed a portion in water and examined it with one-inch
focus, when they were observed to come from minute delicate
polypes, seated in dilated cavities, apparently of the excretory
canals, the disk or head of each polype averaging 100th of an
inch in diameter, and supported on a short neck, which ended
in a little saccular prolongation that was sunk into the paren-
chyma or sarcode of the sponge, and charged, in its walls
as welf as tentacles, with thread-cells so numerous that they
appeared to exceed in bulk the rest of the polype, as may be
seen by picking out one on the point of a needle, and putting
it under a higher power.

This is the first instance, I think, in which a parasitic
polype has been discovered in the znterior of the substance of
a sponge; and when it is remembered that a microscopic
power with delicate manipulation under water is required for
their detection, it may perhaps be assumed that this is how
these polypes escaped Dr. Kimer’s notice, and may also explain

Dr. H. Burmeister on hi's so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. 51

how he found thread-cells in Rentera fibulata and Desmacella
vagabunda, seemg that many thousands of microscopical ex-
aminations of the Spongiade have been made by different
naturalists up to this time without their observation.

The Renierinz are especially subject to surface polype
parasites, and none more so, perhaps, than Reniera fibulata, Sdt.,
all over the world. (This species 1s characterized by two forms
of spicules, viz. (1) acerate, curved, smooth, large, and (2) C- &
S-shaped, minute.) But I have never before found a parasitic
polype in the interior of a Hendera or any other sponge, and
never any thread-cells where there were no parasitic polypes
to originate them. Nor should I have been able to detect
them now but for the process mentioned.

There is also another jar sent me by Prof. W. Thomson, in
which there is a portion of the same sponge with three other
small fragments of as many species undescribed; but this is
labelled “‘ Adventure Bank, 92 faths.”

“Bon Bay” is on the African coast, opposite Cape Sparti-
vento (Sardinia); and “‘ Adventure Bank”? is the shoal between
Tunis and Sicily.

Prof. Thomson also adds the following interesting informa-
tion respecting thread-cells, in a note just received :-—

“'Thread-cells are abundant in every thing which feeds upon
Ceelenterates of any kind, young or mature, whether feeding
by cilia or by the mouth. I have found the thread-cells of
several Hydroids apparently living in the skin of a Synapta;
and you can always find plenty of them in Amphidetus. Of
course, if you find a parasitic polype in the sponge, there is no
further difficulty ; but that does not seem necessary. Thread-
cells appear to be able to live, for a time at least, an indepen-
dent life in foreign quarters.”

June 17, 1872.

=

V.—On my so-called Globiocephalus Grayi.
By Dr. HerMANN BuRMEISTER.

Iv the new ‘ Journal de Zoologie,’ the editor, Prof. Paul Ger-
vais, of Paris, has noticed (tome i. p. 68) the descriptions of
Cetacea published by myself in the ‘ Anales del Museo Publico
de Buenos Aires,’ tome 1. p. 367 et seqqg., and has hinted, with
good reason, that the animal described there as Globiocephalus
Gray? is not a Globiocephalus, but a Pseudorca, nearly allied
to, if not identical with, Ps. crassidens of Prof. Reinhardt
(Overs. Kong]. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl. 1862, p. 103
et seqq.), comparing my figures given on pl. 21 of es ‘Anales’
| 4

52 Dr. H. Burmeister on his so-called Globiocephalus Grayi.
with those of the ‘ Ostéogr. d. Cétacés,’ pl. 50, published by

himself two years ago.

As the sixth part of my ‘Anales,’ wherein is to be found the
description of Globiocephalus Grayt, was published in the year
1869*, I could not compare the excellent figures of the ‘Ostéo-
graphie’ during the elaboration of my treatise, because the part
of M. Gervais’s work alluded to did not reach Buenos Ayres
until Sept. 1870. Ihadat hand no other scientific works than
Cuvier’s ‘ Ossemens Fossiles’ and Gray’s ‘ Catalogue of Seals
and Whales,’ as I have already said in the ‘ Anales,’ p. 369.
Even Prof. Reinhardt’s extended description was not known
to me until after the printing of my ‘ Anales.’ Occupied
with the elaboration of the following parts, I could not find
time to compare my previous labours with the new publi-
cations; and although, in Sept. 1870, I had seen the cited
figures of M. Gervais, and recognized my error, I could not at
once undertake the careful comparison of them with my own,
as I was so much engaged with other labours which it was
necessary, for various reasons, to complete. But now the
criticism of M. Gervais has obliged me to do what I have
hitherto neglected, to compare the cranium of G'lobiocephalus
Grayt in our museum with the figures of his work, and to
publish the results of this comparison.

From my new examination there can be no doubt that my
Globiocephalus is a true Pseudorca; but I am also convinced
that the species from Buenos Ayres is not identical with Ps,
crasstdens, but anew one, more nearly allied to Ps. meridionalis,
Flower (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1864), than to the species of the Euro-
pean seas. My opinion is founded on the following reasons :—

1. The whole skull is narrower before than that of Ps.
crassidens, and resembles more in the general figure that of
Ps. meridionalis, with the exception of the tip of the muzzle,
which is somewhat broader in my skull, and more nearly
allied in its form to that of Ps. crassidens.

2. The right intermaxillary bone is much longer posteriorly
than the left, surrounding there the outside of the nasal bone,
nearly in the same manner as in Gervais’s fig. 1. pl. 50. This
character is not well indicated in my fig. 3. pl. 21, because the
tip of the ght intermaxillary bone of my skull has been
broken off, which I had not noticed before I saw the figures
in the ‘ Ostéographie.’

3. The two small faces of the maxillary bones, immediately
before the nostrils, are of the same unequal size as in Ps. me-
ridionalis, the right bemg larger and broader than the left.
In Ps, crassidens both are smaller and of nearly equal size.

* The copies of this part of my ‘ Anales’ were sent from here to London
Oct. 25, 1869, and to Paris Noy, 12, 1869, by the post-steamers.

Dr. H. Burmeister on his so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. 53

4, The nasal bones are of very different form, without the
high knob behind, but each with a deep diagonal furrow,
which divides them into two faces.

5. The tip of the united parietal bones, with a prolon-
gation going in between the frontals, is not poimted as in Ps.
crassidens, but broad and truncate as in Ps. mertdionalis.

6. Both the upper and the under jaw have the same num-
ber of nine teeth, of which the first in the upper jaw is much
smaller than the others, but the last of equal size with the
preceding ones. This character does not agree with the other
species ; both have one tooth more in the under jaw than in
the upper jaw. Ps. crassidens has eight teeth above and nine
below, and Ps. meridionalis nine above and ten below, the
first of the upper jaw of this species being also much smaller
than the following ones.

This difference seems to me to be of great importance, and
alone sufficient to prove the distinctness of my species.

7. The vomer is visible between the upper maxillary bones
in my skull, but not visible in Ps. meridionalis.

8. At least the form of the teeth is entirely different from
that in both the previously known species; neither of them
has the teeth so thick, short, and worn as my species from the
Patagonian coast.

For all these reasons I believe I am quite justified in sepa-
rating this animal as a distinct and new species from Ps. cras-
sidens and Ps. meridionalis, naming it now

Pseudorca Grayt.

As [ have given a comparative description of the skull in
the ‘ Anales,’ and also added the measurements (p. 373) on
the metrical scale, I will not here repeat the same, but add
only the principal measurements of the skulls of the three
species in English inches, in the same manner as they are
given by Gray in his ‘ Catalogue of Seals and Whales,’ pp. 290
& 294.

Ps. meridionalis.

Pseudorca Ps.
crassidens.| | sté«dS:«CG@ ray.
Adult. Young.

Bmtmedlene ths Ac sas cs Sky 2 23-24 237 | 204,| 26
Dhengthvol mosey. sia: oka ls s- WAS ey LS 93 | .12
Length of teeth-line ........ 10 94 S21 ete
Length of lower jaw ........ 21 19 164 | 21
Breadthgat Motch 1. xe wise « 84 ie 64 9
Breadth at middle of beak.... 8 53 on 8
Breadth of intermaxillaries .. 54 44 33 oF

54 Dr. J. E. Gray on Emys nigra from. Upper California.

These measurements prove that the cranial part of the skull
is relatively somewhat larger in Ps. Grayt than in Ps, crassi-
dens, and that the whole animal may have been consequently
stronger and stouter than the European species, exceeding the
Australian one still more in both qualities.

The description and figures of the swimming Delphinide,
seen by myself in the Atlantic Ocean and published in my
‘ Anales,’ p. 368, do not belong to the Pseudorca Gray?, as I
supposed, but to a true Globiocephalus, which cannot be deter-
mined exactly without further observations.

Buenos Ayres, April 24, 1872.

VI.—On Emys nigra from Upper California.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

mys nigra of Hallowell is said to be the same as Emys
marmorata of Baird and Girard, which Agassiz, in his great
work on the Natural History of the United States (of which
only the general observations and the tortoises have appeared),
refers to the genus Actinemys, and figures the young of the
species ; and on his authority (for I have never been able to
see the species) I have arranged it under Ceoclemmys (see
Cat. Shield Reptiles, Suppl. p: 27).

In Hallowell’s Report on the Reptiles colleeted in the
Survey for the Railroad from the Mississippi to the Pacific
Ocean, 1859 (a work which I had not previously consulted),
he describes and figures Emys nigra, which he says is very
abundant in Posa Creek, northern part of Upper California.
The figure represents a very depressed water-Hmys, with a
dark narrow band across the eye, broad webbed feet, with
acute elongated claws. The head appears to be covered with
a uniform skin, not divided into symmetrical plates. The
limbs and tail are marked with large black spots; and the
upper part of the head and neck is blackish, with numerous
small yellow spots.

The skin of the head and limbs more resembles that of the
true Terrapins than any other American species I know; and
it would be very interesting to know the form of the jaws. It
certainly is a purely aquatic tortoise, and has nothing to do
with the more terrestrial tortoises of America forming the
genus Geoclemmys or Actinemys.

Mr. Hallowell’s figure is very like a specimen that I ob-
tained at Nantes, and which I deseribed and figured as Hmys
olivacea in the ‘Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ p. 30, t. 12 ¢,
and which is named Redamia olivacea in the Supplement to
that Catalogue, p. 35.

M. F. Plateau on the Centre of Gravity in Insects. 55
The specimen only differs from Mr. Hallowell’s figure in

being marked with brown lines beneath, and in having more
elongate claws ; and I strongly suspect that they are both the
same species.

VII.— Experimental Researches upon the Position of the Centre
of Gravity in Insects. By Friix PLATEAU*.

TuE study of the conditions of equilibrium of living crea-
tures, I need scarcely say, is only possible when we know in
each of them the situation of the centre of gravity. Now that
the knowledge of the mechanics of the Articulata has made
considerable progress, thanks to the employment of processes
of investigation borrowed from physics, it seemed to me that
it would be really useful to describe an easy method of inves-
tigating the centre of gravity of the Articulata, and to give an
account of the results which its application to insects has en-
abled me to obtain.

Unfortunately I cannot, in a mere summary, give a descrip-
tion of the instrument I have employed. A mere short de-
scription without a figure is of necessity obscure and of no use
at all. I shall only say that this instrument nearly reproduces,,.
on a small scale and with some improvements, that which was
invented by Borelli to determine the position of the centre of
gravity in man. As to the results of my experiments, I must
likewise refrain from giving them under the form which they
take in my memoir—that is to say, in the shape of a consider-
able number of figures brought together in several tables. I
shall therefore confine myself to the indication of the general
conclusions which I have thought I might deduce from them,
supporting these, where necessary, by a few examples.

1. The centre of gravity of insects is situated in the vertical
median plane which passes through the longitudinal axis of
the body.

2. It occupies a very nearly identical position in insects of
the same species and of the same sex in the same attitude.

3. It is rarely that the external form of the body allows us
to determine, without experiment, the exact position of the
centre of gravity. I shall cite, as an example, the results
furnished by the family of the Odonata. All its representa-
tives have nearly the same external aspect ; and yet, notwith-
standing this quasi-identity of structure, I have found the

* Bibliothéque Universelle: Archives des Sciences Physiques et Na-
turelles, tome xliii. 1872, from an abstract communicated by the author.

56 . M. F. Plateau on the Position of

following differences in the relative positions of the centre of
gravity :—

Agrion puella 9. First third of the third abdominal seg-
ment.

Agrion sanguinea. Posterior margin of the second abdo-
minal segment.

Libellula conspurcata 9. Posterior margin of the meta-
thorax.

Lnbellula vulgata 2. Furrow between thorax and abdomen.

Cordulia metallica 9. Posterior margin of the metathorax.

Lischna grandis 9. Middle of the second abdominal seg-
ment.

4. The centre of gravity does not occupy the same position
in the two sexes of the same species; it is sometimes more
and sometimes less backward in the females than in the males,
and its situation depends upon the relations existing between
the various dimensions of the individuals.

It might have been supposed that the centre of gravity was
always situated further back in the females, the abdomen of
which is generally more voluminous than that of the males.
I have observed the opposite condition in the females of
Oryctes nasicornis, Libellula vulgata, and Agrion puella.

5. During the metamorphosis of the larva into the perfect
insect, the relative centre of gravity approaches the head; the
absolute centre of gravity, on the contrary, departs from it*.

This apparent contradiction is easily explained. The tho-
rax.of larve is generally very much reduced and the segments
of the abdomen numerous. The centre of gravity therefore
falls imevitably in an abdominal segment. In the perfect
msect the thorax has acquired considerable dimensions, and
the number of abdominal segments has diminished. The
thorax, thus being more prolonged posteriorly, has advanced,
im a manner, to meet the centre of gravity, which remains
plainly in the median region of the body; and the abdomen

* In my memoir I have given the name of the relative position of the
centre of gravity to its position with relation to some one of the parts of
the body (segment, coxa, &c.), and that of the absolute position of the
centre of gravity to the number which is obtained by calculating the
relation between the distance from the centre of gravity to the posterior
cee of the body and the total length of the animal. The quotients
0:50, 0°67, for example, obtained in this manner, signify that the distance
from the centre of gravity to the posterior extremity is five tenths or sixty-
seven hundredths of the length of the body. They show at once, and
independently of the form and extent of the segments, whether the centre
of gravity is at the middle of the insect, more approximated t® the head,
or nearer to the anal orifice.

the Centre of Gravity in Insects. oT

becoming shortened, the distance from its extremity to the
point in question diminishes.

6. In standing, the centre of gravity is placed at the base
of the abdomen, or in the posterior part of the thorax, and
usually at the middle of the length of the body.

_ 7. In walking, the centre of gravity of an insect is con-
stantly displaced around a mean position, but by too small an
amount to be capable of measurement.

In fact, if we make experiments by means of Saltatorial
Orthoptera (locusts or grasshoppers), we find that the move-
ments of their enormous posterior limbs induce changes in the
situation of the centre of gravity; but these changes being
very slight, we arrive at the conclusion that it would be im-
possible to measure them in ordinary insects.

8. We do not detect any displacement of the centre of
gravity when an insect passes from the position of repose to
that of flight, except in those species in which the wings are
decumbent or crossed upon the back in a state of repose. The
displacement is horizontal and from behind forward. For
example, this displacement is as follows, in the following
species :-—

Dytiscus dimidiatus 0°045 of the total length of the body.
Hydrophilus piceus 0028
Melolontha vulgaris ¢ 0°053
Notonecta glauca . . . 0°032
Locusta viridissima. . 0°054
Vespa vulgaris . . . . 0°023 + 93
Plusia gamma ... . 0°025 . ”
Eristalis tenax . . . . 0°037

”? ?

9. During active flight the centre of gravity oscillates con-
tinually around a mean position which answers to the moments
when the extremities of the wings are at the point of crossing
of the figure-of-8 curve which they describe in the air.

10. In aquatic insects the centre of gravity 1s nearer to the
lower than to the upper surface of the body.

11. During natation the movements of the oar-like posterior
legs cause oscillations of the centre of gravity around a mean
position, which answers to the situation of the natatory feet
at the middle of their course. These oscillations of the centre
of gravity induce a continual balancing of the body upon a
transverse axis passing through the mean centre of gravity,
and cause it, consequently, to traverse a slightly undulated
path.

58 Dr. J. S. Bowerbank on Mr. Carter's Paper

VIII.— Observations on Mr. Carter's paper “ On two new
Sponges from the Antarctic Sea, and on a new Species of
Tethya from Shetland ; together with Observations on the
Reproduction of Sponges commencing from Zygosis of the
Sponge-animal.” By J.S. BowerBAnNK, LL.D., F.R.S.,&e.

Mr. Carter’s frank and straightforward, though not very
courteous style of criticism, emboldens me to adopt a like
free-and-easy style in making a few observations on the sub-
jects of his paper published in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of
Natural History,’ No. 54, June 1872. Let me ask him, then,
why he designates his proposed new genus Rossella, without
giving us the slightest idea of its generic characters, as the
author himself states, p. 415, “ All that I have to offer re-
_specting this sponge is the description of two forms of spi-
cules ;”” and these organs are essentially specific characters.
If he had described these spicula without going to the extre-
mity of founding a new genus and species to account for them,
it would, I think, have been quite sufficient for all scientific
purposes. ‘The term Rossedla does not seem to be a happy one,
and would certainly have been perfectly imcomprehensible
without his reference to Ross. In the first place we have
already two genera named Lossia, one of birds and one of mol-
lusca ; so that a third founded on the same name appears to be
rather superfluous; and, as constructed by the author, it is
very possible that our French friends would understand the
genus, from its name, as having been founded in honour of
Rossel, the eminent communist who was summarily disposed
of some time since by the military tribunals of Paris.

Tethya antarctica, Carter.

The specific characters of the sponge (upon which its whole
history, both actual and imaginary, is based) are given from
a single specimen of a gemmule apparently somewhat dis-
torted ; but this distortion gives the author an imaginary basal
anchoring character, which, however, is quite a new habit
among the Tethec in their adult and natural condition. The
supposed new species is illustrated in a diagrammatic series of
dots and lines, which may afford effective recollections to the
author, but will certainly serve any other purpose rather than
that of leading future students to the identification of the
species, which, I have a strong idea, is, in reality, Tethea
simillima, from the South Sea, in the museum of the Royal
College of Surgeons, and registered in the catalogue of
“Contents of the Museum,” part i. 1860, p. 128, B. 176,
“from Tongatabue ;” and he will see, in the last paragraph,

-

on Sponges from the Antarctic Sea and from Shetland. 59

p- 148, vol. i. of ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiadex,’ that I
have stated that that species has the same description of gem-
mule as the larger of the two described as belonging to 7.
cranium, but that the smaller and more simple ones which
accompany the large one in that species are not present in
the college specimen of 7. simillima. A difference in the
amount of the projection of the spicula beyond the margins of
some parts of the object prepared for microscopical observa-
tion, as represented by Mr. Carter in his pl. xx. fig. 2, is
very likely to be caused by the process of preparation for ex-
amination. In the natural condition, as represented in the
gemmules of 7. craniwm, in ‘ Mon. Brit. Spongiade,’ pl. xxv.
tig. 344, they do not appear beyond the external membrane of
the gemmule. ‘These facts are all stated in p. 147 of vol. i.
of my work, and might have been readily verified by Mr.
Carter from the specimens of 7. cranium in the British
Museum, had he taken the trouble to carefully examine
them. ‘The fact of their not appearing beyond the surface of
the gemmule militates strongly against Mr. Carter’s imaginary
base with its anchoring spicula; and neither in the adult state
of the specimens of 7. simillima, nor in any other among the
ten species with which I am familiar, are there any such an-
choring spicula in their natural state.

The author, in the last paragraph of p. 410 of his paper,
has evidently fallen imto the error of imagining that the
“ ovum or, rather, young Tethya”’ is, in point of structure, the
exact representative of the mature sponge, when, in truth, a
very considerable difference in structural arrangement exists
between them—that is, if we are to take Tethea cranium,
the structure of which we do know, as our exainple of the
anatomy of the fully developed sponge and the gemmules
within it.

Mr. Carter appears to have been somewhat shocked b
finding a jar at the British Museum labelled “‘ Shetland. J.
S. Bowerbank, 52. 3. 12. 70-73,’ to which is added, in Dr.
Bowerbank’s blue ink and handwriting, ‘ Tethya lyncurtum.’”
1 think Mr. Carter will find that I have not labelled the jar
Tethya but Tethea, if I have labelled it myself at all. At
this distance of time I only recollect that I gave some British
Sponges to the British Museum, and that among them were
several specimens of Zethea cranium; and whether I mis-
labelled the jar myself inadvertently, or the label was cut
from the list of species sent, and so stuck on it in error, I really
cannot say; the numbers on the label were certainly not put
on by me. In this jar Mr. Carter found “ six specimens, two
of Zethya cranium and four of another species of Tethya as

60 Dr.J.S. Bowerbank on Mr. Carter’s Paper on Sponges.

yet undescribed ;”’ and the latter specimens he subsequently
described as Tethya antarctica. Mr. Carter seems to have been
exceedingly fortunate, if he be correct in his conclusions, in find-
ing four specimens of a new species, as immediately on reading
his observations on them I set myself to carefully examine
the remainder of my stock of 7. cranium, more than a hundred
specimens, varying in size from a pea to an average-sized
orange; and I could not find a single specimen among them
that could not be satisfactorily identified as 7. cranium. I
therefore feel strongly inclined to believe that Mr. Carter has
fallen into the error of making from small, unimportant dif-
ferences in the same sorts. of structures, two species out of
one; but the dots and lines he has given in illustration of his
paper are so vague and unsatisfactory, that they do not at all
assist us in unravelling the mystery. The description of the
gemmules‘of his 7. zetlandica would apply quite as well to
those of J. cranium; and every form of spiculum that he
figures as from the former, may be readily found in the latter
species. ;

The author, in p. 419, treating of “the small globular and
compressed elliptical bodies” or gemmules of Tethea, writes, in
the second paragraph, ‘‘ In Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘ British Sponges,’
pl. 25. fig. 343, will be found a monstrous representation of one
of these oviform bodies under the designation of ‘ gemmule,’
which is only surpassed by his description (vol. 1. p. 87),
where he applies the term ‘sexual’ to them, and conjectures
that one may be the ‘female or prolific gemmule;’ but Dr.
Bowerbank had never been able to discover any ‘ spermatozoa’
in either! As this is a kind of physiology that I do not un-
derstand, let us go back to the term oviform &c.”

If the author of the paper, in place of criticising the represen-
tation of the gemmules of 7. cranium in vol. 1. pl. 25. fig. 343,
and the description of them in vol. ii. p. 87, of the ‘ Monograph
of British Sponges,’ in the flippant manner in which he has
indulged, had communicated with me on the subject, I could
have informed him that, instead of illustrating the anatomy of
the subjects under consideration by dots and lines, the figures
alluded to were drawn from the preparation still in my pos-
session, by the aid of the microscope and the camera lucida,
by one of the most talented and accurate microscopical artists
that we have among us, Mr. W. Lens Aldous, and that his
representation of the originals is not in the slightest degree
exaggerated; on the contrary, the figure of the larger of the
two is that of a gemmule rather less complicated in its struc-
ture than many of those closely adjoining it, in a slice of the
sponge immersed in Canada balsam, about four lines square,

Viscount Walden on a new Species of Timalia, 61

and which contains twenty-one such gemmules as the two
represented—fourteen of the small and more simple ones, and
seven of the so-called monstrosities; and I shall at any time
be happy to show the originals of the figures to Mr. Gaies
and to convince him that all that is monstrous in the matter is
in his own imagination. Having had ample opportunity of
verifying the correctness of the figures under consideration by
access to the specimens in the British Museum, and having
failed in this part of his researches, it is evident that he has
much more to learn of the anatomy of the sponges under con-
sideration before he will be master of his subjects. What we
want in the investigation of such matters is careful minute
observations and faithful figures and records of their structure,
and not abstruse hypothetical imaginations illustrated by dia-
grams of dots and lines. And | think I may venture to pre-
dict that no naturalist will hereafter be able, by Mr. Carter’s
descriptions or his illustrations, to recognize either his Tethya
antarctica or Tethya zetlandica.
I must acknowledge that I have not yet been able to realize
Mr. Carter’s idea that a sponge is a compound creature, and
that every cilium with its basal cell is a separate or distinct
animal. It is a step beyond my comprehension; for if it be
so in sponges, why not also in human beings? from one of
whom I have seen the cilia living and in motion. The late
Professor Liston, of University College, many years ago had
a patient in the University Hospital with polypus in his
nose; and he invited me to come up one morning, and pro-
mised to show me the human cilia in motion on a small piece
of the polypus from the nose of the man. I went, and had
the satisfaction of seeing them, in rather languid motion, in
some of their own fluid, in a cell slightly warmed by having
been put into warm water and then placed beneath the micro-
scope. The aérating surfaces of a great variety of animals,
beside sponges, are abundantly supplied with cilia and ciliated
cells; are we to regard all these as compound animals ?

IX.—On a new Species of Timalia from Eastern India.
By Artuur Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.S., F.R.S.

Timalia Jerdoni, n. sp.
Timalia pileata, Horsf. ap. Jerdon, B. of Ind. ii. p. 24, nec Horsf.

A narrow frontal band extending over the eyes, the cheeks,
chin, and throat white; forehead and crown deep chestnut ;
remainder of upper surface dark olive-grey ; quills and rec-

62 Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah.

trices above brown, tinged with olive; rectrices traversed by
numerous narrow bands of a darker shade of brown ; upper
part of breast white, changing to cinereous lower down ; each
feather with a black shaft ; remainder of lower surface fulvous
mixed with cinereous olive ; under tail-coverts cinereous olive.

Longitudo
Rostr.a nar. Ale. Caude. Tarsi.
T. Jerdom.. 0-31 2°36 2°88 0-88. * Khasia Hills.”
T. pileata .. 0°50 2-62, 312 1:00. “ Java.”

Described from specimens obtained in the Khasia Hills.

This bird has hitherto been considered identical with the
Javan T. pileata, Horsf. A comparison I have recently been
enabled to make with authentic Javan examples has convinced
me of their specific distinctness. True 7. pileata is a larger
bird; in it the bill is much more powerful, its altitude being
quite double that of examples from the Khasia Hills; the
crown of the head is bright ferruginous, not dark chestnut ;
the colour of the upper plumage, wings, and rectrices 1s con-
siderably paler; that of the lower is pale tawny ; and the ashy
colour of the black-shafted breast-plumes is less intense. My
deeply lamented friend Dr. Jerdon fully concurred with me in
the propriety of separating the two species.

In the ‘ Birds of India’ (/.c.) this species is said to extend
through the Malayan peninsula to Java; but I believe that
it has never been found further south than Arakan. Neither
it nor the Javan species has been shown to occur in the
Malayan peninsula or in Sumatra. It seems to belong to
that category of Javan forms (such as Harpactes oreskios,
Crypsirrhina varians, Bhringa remifer, &c.) which, while
absent from the intermediate regions of Sumatra and the Malay
peninsula, reappear further to the north in Burma, some pene-
trating as far as Nipaul.

X.—Notes on the Anatomy of the Derriah (Cynocephalus
hamadryas). By ALEexaNDER MAcALisTer, M.B., Pro-
fessor of Zoology, University of Dublin.

THE Dublin Zoological Gardens received from Viscount
Southwell two fine specimens of this curious animal, a male
and a female, both full-grown and in excellent condition.
After a residence of some months, the male sickened and died
suddenly, and was dissected carefully by Professor Haughton
and myself.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah. 63

The most important points of the muscular anatomy of this
animal are as follows :—

The trapezius was indivisible, and was inserted into the
outer half of the clavicle. ‘The sterno- and cleidomastoids
were inseparable and large, being nearly an ounce in weight.
The omohyoid was a single-bellied muscle, with no tendinous
intersection. ‘The trachelo-acromial was large, half the size
of the sterno-cleidomastoid. ‘The latissimus dorsi arises from
the eleven spines below the fifth dorsal, and from the posterior
fifth of the iliac crest, but from no ribs. The rhomboid is
indivisible, but consists of the usual occipital and dorsal por-
tions. The serratus magnus is in three parts, and extends
from the second cervical transverse process to the tenth rib;
the uppermost and lowest of these are strong, the middle
weaker.

Serratus posticus superior is attached to the third, fourth,
and fifth ribs, the inferior to the ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth,
and thirteenth ribs. The pectoralis minor arises from the
cartilages of the second to the seventh ribs, and from the
abdominal aponeurosis. ‘The deltoid is easily divisible into
scapular, acromial, and clavicular parts; of these the acromial
is the largest, the clavicular about half its size, and the sca-
pular still smaller. The subclavius does not extend beyond
the clavicle. The capsular muscles of the shoulder are as
usual, and in the following proportions of relative develop-
ment :—supraspinatus = 1, infraspinatus = 1°34, subscapu-
laris = 1-6, teres major 0°6, teres minor = 0°17. There is a
pectoralis quartus from the cartilages of the lowest ribs, in-
serted under the pectoralis major and below the pectoralis
minor into the shoulder-capsule. -The coraco-brachialis is
double—a short muscle (c. brevis of Wood) weighing 0:07 of an
ounce, and a longer, going to the lower third of the humerus,
weighing 0°14. The two heads of the biceps humeri were
inseparably united ; and the entire muscle was nearly 2 ounces
in weight: this muscle was 2°3 times as heavy as the bra-
chialis anticus; and the triceps (which is divisible into long,
outer, and inner parts) is exactly double the sum of these two
flexors. The coracoid head of the biceps was fleshy. The
dorsi epitrochlearis was thin, extending halfway down the
arm, and half an ounce in weight.

There are two anconei, an outer and an inner.

Among the forearm muscles the peculiarities were :—The
palmaris longus fleshy for the upper half of the forearm, and
half the size of the flexor carpi radialis. The flexor sublimis
has no radial origin. The flexor digitorum profundus and
pollicis are inseparably connected, and there is a condyloid
head separated from the rest by the median nerve. The polli-

64 Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah.

ceal tendon of this muscle arises from that part of the flexor
mass which springs from the inner side of the olecranon.

Pronator quadratus is bilaminar, the upper layer being tri-
angular, with the base at the ulna; the deeper layer is also a
triangle with a radial base: the entire muscle occupies one
fourth of the ulna and one sixth of the radius.

There is a large supinator longus, exactly equal to the pro-
nator teres (0°4 of an ounce). The extensor minimi digiti
supplies the fourth and fifth fingers. The indicator supplies
the second and third digits; and there is no abductor minor
pollicis (extensor primi internodii pollicis).

Palmaris brevis is very thick, and attached to the pisiform
bone. The abductor pollicis brevis is divided into two—a
weak external slip arising from the metacarpal bone, and an
internal stronger one from the trapezium. ‘The flexor brevis
pollicis is also divided into two parts, both of which arise from
the annular ligament. A distinct opponens pollicis stretches
from the trapezium to the polliceal metacarpal; and there is
an adductor from the middle metacarpal. The little finger
has three muscles—an abductor, an opponens, and a flexor.
The hand-interossei are as in man, as are the lumbricales.
The abductor pollicis major is mainly inserted into the trape-
zium, with a few fibres into the metacarpal.

The psoas parvus is one seventh part of the psoas magnus,
which latter 1s inseparable from the iliacus. ‘The adductors
are three, as usual; and the pectineus is very small. The
gluteus maximus, agitator caude, and tensor vagine femoris
are inseparable, as also are the pyriformis and gluteus medius.

The biceps femoris is ischiatic, and has only one head.
The semitendinosus is one third the size of the biceps, and
the semimembranosus is one fourth. The extensors of the
knee are to the flexors as 11°6 : 16°09.

Plantaris is very large, and attached as usual. The flexor
digitorum muscle mainly supplies the second and fifth toes,
while the flexor hallucis supplies the first, third, and fourth
toes. The tibialis anticus has a double tendon, and is attached
to the internal cuneiform and metatarsal bone of the hallux.

The peroneus longus has a sesamoid bone in its tendon.
The peronzus brevis has a thread-like oftshooting tendon, re-
presenting the peroneus quinti. There is a large pyriform
abductor minimi digiti. The flexor brevis digitorum has no
tendon to the fifth toe ; nor is there a lumbricalis for the second
toe; the others are all bicipital.

From the tendon of the flexor hallucis at the ankle there
arose a fleshy belly, which soon became tendinous; and this
formed a head for the first lumbricalis, which was thus made
into a digastric muscle.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah. 65

The foot-interossei are as follows :—three plantar, an ad-
ductor hallucis, an adductor indicis, and adductor quinti digiti.
The dorsals’ are :—abductor indicis with only one head from
the second metatarsal bone, an abductor medii digiti with two
heads, an adductor medii digiti, an abductor annularis.

The masseter is very large; and so is the temporal; the
entire muscular mass for the closure of the jaws is over twelve
ounces in weight—that is, equal to the entire quadriceps ex-
tensor cruris.

This animal is a native of Abyssinia, and, under the name
of Hepi and Thoth, figured largely in the Egyptian mytho-
logy; but this part of its history has been very thoroughly
elucidated by Ehrenberg in his paper “ Ueber den Cynocephalus
der Aegyptier, nebst emigen Betrachtungen tiber die iigyp-
tische Mythe der Thot und Sphinx vom naturhistorische
Standpunkt,” in the ‘ Abhandlungen’ of the Berlin Academy
for 1833 (Physikal. Klasse, p. 337). Mr. Ogilby, however,
has combated this opinion, and supposes that another species,
which he names Cynocephalus Thoth, is the sacred animal of
Hermapolis (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1843, p. 10). However, it is
unquestionable that the figures of the animal in Lepsius,
Rossellini, and on Canopi and Scarabei, &e., in the Dublin
University Museum, are exceedingly good representations of
the Hamadryad.

The literature of the anatomy of Cynocephali and their
allies is not extensive : the best papers on the subject are those
by Pagenstecher (Drill, ‘ Zoologischer Garten,’ 1867, p. 128),
and Champneys (Anubis, ‘ Journal of Anat.’ 1871, p. 176). In
comparing the latter paper with my description, the following
points may be noticed in which the Anubis and Hamadryad
are dissimilar :—The trachelo-acromial is attached to the occi-
put in the Anubis, while it is not in the Hamadryad; the lesser
pectoral was not separate in the Anubis, and the insertion of
its representative was along the bicipital groove, not into the
semivagina of the shoulder-joint; the rhomboids were separa-
ble in the Anubis, not in the Hamadryad; the arrangement of the
serratus magnus, described by Champneys in the Anubis,
was very dissimilar to what is described above; the extensor
carpi ulnaris had an origin from the ulna in the Hamadryad, but
not in the Anubis; the abductor pollicis major had a sesamoid
cartilage in the Anubis (/. ¢. p. 184), no such thing existed in
the Hamadryad ; the iliacus is simple in the Hamadryad, not
in the Anubis; plantaris was perfectly separate in the Hama-
dryad, but not so in the Anubis; Champneys’s peroneus
tertii m the Anubis is really, as he suggests, a quinti, as also
is the so-called tertii of Church.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vel. x. 5

66

MISCELLANEOUS.

On some Dermal Tubercles associated with Fossil Fish-remains.
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrntLEMEN,—In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’
for April, pp. 260 & 261, there is an interesting communication by
Messrs. Hancock and Atthey, in which they describe the discovery
of certain teeth-like bodies found associated with Cladodus mirabilis
and Gyracanthus tuberculatus.

They refer to a paper of mine, published in the ‘ Transactions of
the Geological Society of Glasgow,’ vol. iv. pt. 1. pp. 57-59, and
state that I seem to confound Diplodus with those teeth-like bodies
or dermal tubercles, and to consider the remains of the semicartila-
ginous skeleton to be shagreen,—and also state that it is to Prof,
Williamson that we owe the discovery of the true nature of this
peculiar substance, who clearly proves it to be the remains of what
he terms the chondriform bone or semicartilaginous skeleton.

While I do not wish to call in question their deductions regarding
their own discoveries, or the identifications of Prof. Williamson, I
beg, however, to be allowed to express my surprise at those gentle-
men supposing that I had confounded Diplodus with the dermal
tubercles referred to.

In my paper I refer to the discovery of a slab of ironstone covered
with shagreen, and two spines of Otenacanthus hybodoides imbedded
in that substance. Associated with these spines are a number of
the teeth of Cladodus mirabilis, all evidently in their proper relative
position. I had removed a portion of the ironstone overlying the
snout, and exposed the skin thickly studded over with numerous
teeth-like bodies, consisting of two, three, and four curved diverging
points rising from an expanded base, and with a sharp keel on the
curved side passing to the apex of each of the points.

Further on I state that I discovered on another slab of ironstone
the teeth of Diplodus gibbosus associated with another form of those
dermal teeth-like bodies; but these are smooth, enamelled, circular
in section, and relatively larger, and more sharply pointed than
those with the keel along the curved face. Thus having found the
first form associated with the teeth of Cladodus mirabilis and the
latter with the teeth of Diplodus gibbosus, and having frequently
verified this discovery, the conclusion was irresistible, viz. that
they each represented the dermal development of different fish ;
and as in the recent rays (that is, in the living forms) sexual dif-
ferences are to be noted in the dermal development, I suggested
the probability of the difference exhibited in the fossils being due to
a similar cause. This suggestion is thrown out without the slightest
desire to dogmatize, well knowing that there have been far too many
forms named from being simply found associated with other parts.
The evidence, however, is much in favour of the suggestion. The
different forms are not only associated with, but are imbedded in,
the shagreen of the fish.

Miscellaneous. 67

From numerous microscopic sections, both of the semicartilaginous
skeleton and that of the skin, there is not the slightest doubt re-
garding the bone of the skeleton and the shagreen of the skin. In
sections of the latter I have exposed the dermal tubercles resting
upon and attached to the skin. |
JamEs Tomson.
276 Eglinton Street, Glasgow.

May 27.

On the two (?) unknown Species of Argus Pheasant.
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—Permit me to make a few remarks on the feathers of
the two (?) unknown species of Argus Pheasant.

The largest feather, as figured in Mr. Elliot’s ‘ Monograph of the
Phasianide,’ part 5, is undoubtedly a relic of a bird which, when
found, will probably prove to be generically distinct from Argus, so
different is it in form from any feather of the known species of that
genus. Of the other two feathers, which Mr. Elliot supposes to be
primaries of the same bird, I have a very different opinion, believing
them to be feathers of the true tail (as distinguished from the orna-
mental tail-coverts) of the Javan Peacock, Pavo muticus. I sus-
pected this on first looking at the plate; and on examining the tail-
feathers of that bird in the British Museum this opinion was con-
firmed, the form, colour, and markings being identical. I also found
by comparison that the drawings of these feathers are of exactly the
same dimensions as the real ones of P. muticus; whereas Mr. Elliot
states them to be represented only half the natural size. This is
probably a mistake ; but if not, the bird to which they belonged must
have been, in all probability, a very large variety or species of the
genus Pavo.

I also wish to state that the feather which I described as belonging
to an unknown bird related to Argus also presents certain peculi-
arities which seem to indicate that the bird to which it belongs is
generically distinct ; and I regret that Mr. Elliot, in quoting from the
‘Annals,’ omitted the note of interrogation which I placed after the
word Argus, as I think he will agree with me that the generic posi-
tions of these birds can only be approximately determined from their
feathers.

I remain, Gentlemen,
Yours very truly,
London, June 15th, 1872. T. W. Woop.

Note on a Deformed Example of Cariama cristata.
By Dr. A. GintHer.

There is in the British Museum a stuffed example of a Cariama
which differs from C. cristata in so striking a manner, by the short-
ness of its neck and legs, that it might be easily taken for a distinct
species. However, on a closer examination, I have convinced myself

~ Se
ve

oO

68 Miscellaneous.

that it is merely a deformed example of the common Brazilian
species.

* 1. The specimen, although fully adult, is not very old, having still
reddish-brown cross bars on the outer web of the inner primaries.
The state of its wing- and tail-feathers shows clearly that it has
been kept in captivity. ;

2. The head, body, and toes are of the same dimensions as in
normally developed individuals; but the tarsus, which in an old
bird measures normally 7} inches*, is reduced in our specimen to
53 inches, the number of anterior transverse scutes being the same
in both (26 or 27). The bone is slightly bent inwards, thus showing
unmistakable signs of being malformed by rhachitic disease. Also
the tibia appears to be somewhat shortened,

3. The shortness of the neck can be accounted for by the manipu-
lation of the stuffer ; but I must remark that in the skeleton of an-
other specimen likewise kept in captivity, the eleventh and twelfth -
cervical vertebre are affected by rhachitis; so that in our stuffed
example the shortness of the neck may have been really caused by
an abnormal curvature of the cervical portion of the vertebral
column. In the skeleton mentioned the upper end of the right tibia
and the first phalanx of the outer toe of the same side are much
swollen in consequence of osteoporosis.

4. In the plumage not the slightest difference can be observed
between this and other specimens of C. cristata of the same age.

Tt will be seen from these remarks that the Gariama, which is
easily domesticated and frequently kept in captivity, is, in this state,
subject to diseases of the bones, and that bodies of tame birds should
not be chosen for osteological preparations.

On the Natural Affinities of the Balistide.
By M. C. Darzsre.

Ina memoir published in 1851 I showed that the Cuvierian order
Plectognathi contains a certain number of very dissimilar forms
united by a very imperfect character—that it must, consequently, be
struck out of our classification, as M. Vogt had previously indicated,
but without giving any demonstration—and that the diverse types
united under this denomination must be referred to other groups of
osseous fishes. Resuming these investigations, I propose to show
that one of the groups of the order Plectognathi, that of the Balistes,
must take its place among the Acanthopterygians, in the vicinity of
the Acanthuri and other fishes belonging to the small family of the
Teuthyes.

The family of the Teuthyes, as established by Cuvier, presents, in
the small number of genera which he combined under this denomi-
nation, two very different types of organization. The Sidjans or
Amphacanthi, which Cuvier placed at the head of this family, differ
so much from the other genera that M. Agassiz and subsequently

* 84-8§ inches (Rhenish meas.), according to Burmeister.

Miscellaneous. 69

Dr. Giinther have thought it necessary to separate them. This
elimination having been made, the Acanthuri and the four or five
allied genera which remain in the family Teuthyes have the closest
affinities with the Balistes, as I shall now endeavour to prove.

In vertebrate animals it is the skeleton that furnishes the most
correct indications as to the affinities and consequently the true
characters of the natural groups. The uncertainty in which we
still are with regard to the establishment of these groups among
fishes will only be dissipated by the determination of their osteo-
logical types. The elements of such a work are still too completely
wanting to allow of our attacking it as a whole ; but we may prepare
the way for it by partial investigations. Thus I now propose to
demonstrate the very great analogy and the common characters of
the skeletons of the Acanthuri and Balistide, especially the true
Balistes, which are more neatly allied to the Acanthuri than the
Triacanthi, Monacanthi, and Alutere.

In both groups the jaws are very small. The border of the upper
jaw is formed solely by the intermaxillaries. The maxillaries, which
are but very slightly developed, are firmly and immovyably attached
to the intermaxillaries. This character is the more important be-
cause it constitutes, according to Cuvier, the character of the order
Plectognathi. Now the Acanthuri deserve to be called Plectognathi
quite as much as the Balistes. The teeth, in both jaws, have the
form of incisors.

The skull is very narrow. Its upper surface is much elongated
and formed by two planes which meet at an obtuse angle above the
orbit; whence it results that the true cranium descends obliquely
behind the orbit to meet the vertebral column, instead of being
placed in the same horizontal plane as this bony column. It also fol-
lows, from this oblique position of the cranial region, that the mas-
toid bone is placed very low. It nevertheless presents, in both
groups, a large vertical apophysis in front of its articulation with
the bones of the shoulder.

The upper occipital, or interparietal, advances between the prin-
cipal frontals, and forms, at the summit of the head, a more or less
elevated crest.

The ethmoid is much elongated; and consequently the anterior
frontals and the palatines are at a great distance from each other,
and do not become united to form bony nasal cavities.

The anterior sphenoid is produced in front of the orbit in the form
of a vertical plate, which meets a vertical plate produced by the
ethmoid, and forms with it a bony partition which separates the
ethmoid from the palatine arch.

The vomer is very small, and destitute of teeth.

The palatines are also small, destitute of teeth, and movably arti-
culated with the ethmoid and intermaxillary.

The different pieces of the temporal wing are not all soldered
together, and leave empty spaces merely occupied by the membrane
of the palate.

The opercular flap is formed only by the operculum and the sub-

70 Miscellaneous.

operculum. ‘The interoperculum is more or less concealed within
the preoperculum; at least in its anterior part, or that which is
joined to the jaw, and sometimes throughout its whole extent, it
presents the form of a rod. The second case is that of the Balistes ;
the former that of the Acanthuri, in which it acquires the form of a
very narrow plate only in its posterior part.

The hyoid bone is attached to the temporal wing at but little dis-
tance from the posterior angle of the lower jaw; it is consequently
very small. The lateral branches, which bear the branchiostegal
rays, have fewer pieces than in other fishes. The unpaired piece, or
tail of the hyoid, is very large, and formed of two long branches
uniting at a right angle.

The bones of the shoulder appear, in the part anterior to the
pectoral fins, in the form of large plates, produced by at least the
partial amalgamation of the three bony pieces which, according to
Cuvier’s nomenclature, form the humerus, radius, and cubitus. The
coracoid is greatly developed. The pelvis is much elongated, and
the two pieces which form it are more or less soldered together.

The vertebral column is formed by a small number of vertebree
(about 20 to 22). The dorsal vertebrae bear very long vertical
neurapophyses and horizontal hemapophyses starting from the
middle of the vertebra and bearing very small ribs. The caudal
vertebrae have the neurapophyses and hemapophyses vertical and
much elongated.

The differences between the skeletons of the Acanthuri and Balistes
are but few and of slight importance.

The Acanthurt have nasal and suborbital bones, which are want-
ing in the Balistes; but these bones are very variable in fishes, and
can only furnish secondary characters.

The dorsal fin is single in the Acanthuri, whilst in the Balistes
the spinous and soft rays are separated to form two fins,

In the Balistes the preeoperculum has its oblique shorter than its
horizontal branch ; the reverse is the case in the Acanthuri: con-
sequently the branchial fissures and the opercular flaps are larger in
the Acanthuri than in the Balistes.

In the Acanthuri the dorsal hemapophyses bear, besides the ribs,
some little styles which ascend in the interior of the muscles, as in
the Clupeidee.

We see therefore that, with the exception of a few differences, the
osteological type of the Acanthuri is the same as that of the Balistes.
I regret that I am unable to complete this investigation by the
comparison of the other organs, which must undoubtedly present
resemblances similar to those of the skeletons. I must add, how-
ever, that Valenciennes has already indicated the at least apparent
similarity presented by the scaling of a species of Acanthurus (A.
scopas) to that of certain Balistide of the genus Monacanthus—a
resemblance which had even struck the Dutch of the East Indies,
since they confound the Balistide and the Acanthuri under the same
denomination, that of Leervisch, or ‘leather-fishes.” — Comptes
Rendus, June 17, 1872, pp. 1527-1530,

Miscellaneous. @

On the Synonymy of the Genera of Kuryalide. -
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Having occasion to examine ‘and determine the Red-Sea Radiata
presented to the British Museum by Mr. M‘Andrew, I had occasion
to use MM. Dujardin and Hupé’s work. The following corrections
and additions to his synonymy occurred to me. ‘They chiefly arise
from the almost universal habit of French zoologists to ignore the
works of any other country. In the ‘Synopsis of the British Mu-
seum’ for 1840 I gave the characters of the families and genera ;
so there is no excuse for their not being quoted.

Euryalide, Gray, Syn. Brit. Mus. 1840, p. 63, = Huryalidies, Du-

jardin & Hupé, 1862, p. 292.

I. Evryatr, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 62. Huryale, pars, Link.
Trichaster, Agassiz, Dujardin & Hupé, 1862, p. 300,

1. Euryale palmiferus, Lam.

II. Asrropuyton, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p.62; Miller & Troschel,
Liitken, Duj. & Hupé, 1862, p. 301.
Gorgonocephalus, Leach, Zool. Mise.

1. Astrophyton verrucosum, Lam. &e.

IIL. Lasrarta, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 64, with characters.
Asterochema, Liitken, Addit. ad Hist. Ophiur, 1859, p. 255;
Dujardin & Hupé, Echinod. p. 296.

1. Laspalia oligactes = Asterias oligactes, Pallas. Asterochema
oligactes, Litken, l.c.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 297. Ophiura
cirrosa, Say. Trichaster leptocladia, Mus. Paris.

Euryale simplex, Gray, Encycl. Metropol.
West Indies and Central America.
IV. Natatra, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 64.
Asteroporpa, Liitken, Addit. ad Hist. Ophiur. 1859, p. 152.

1. Natalia annulata,

Asteroporpa annulata, Liitken, 7. c. p. 159, t. 5. f.4; Dujardin
& Hupé, Echinod. p. 298, t. 2. f. 6.
Central America.

On a New Species of Paradoxornis. By the Abbé A. Davin,

Father Heude, Missionary at Shanghai, busies himself actively in
studying and collecting the natural productions of the province in
which he dwells. Among the birds in his collection which he showed
me as I passed through that city there are several which do not yet
figure in the ornithological catalogues of the Chinese Empire. Of
these I observed one which is particularly interesting, belonging to
that curious group of Insectivora with a stout and compressed beak,
which is represented in Eastern Asia by the genera Conostoma,
Cholornis, Paradoxornis, and Suthora.

The bird in question appears to me to be intermediate between the
last two genera, and may, perhaps, form a new genus. I place it
provisionally in the genus Paradowornis, of which it presents the
principal characters.

72 Miscellaneous.

M. Heude having allowed me to take the description of his bird,
which is unique in his collection, I hasten to send it to you, and
regard it as my duty to dedicate to him this new species, under the
name of Paradowxornis Heuder.

Morelelencgh:.) 2cjk\. eae ss Gis hits Ries te 18 centims.
eneph at phestalliyy errs. . ws stl etelel ees 92 55
an OF the closedvwint.<. c.045 645 57 millims.
BE GOL CHOKUATAB YE Sodbiekoky. Acese abbots ot ee

Bill yellow ; feet of a yellowish grey; claws grey.

Tail long, much graduated, with the feathers black, terminated
by a broad white spot; the median feathers unicolorous yellowish
TOY.

‘ Wings short and round, with the quill-feathers black, surrounded
by a margin of reddish grey ; lesser coverts of a cinnamon fulvous,
as well as the feathers of the insertion of the wings.

Stalks of the rectrices and remiges black above, white beneath.

Head grey in the middle ; two broad black streaks above the eyes,
like eyebrows; neck grey ; parotic region of a rosy grey ; back rosy
grey, with a few elongated brown spots; rump reddish yellow.

Throat white; breast of a vinous rosy colour; flanks reddish ;
middle of the belly whitish, as are also the subcaudals.

M. Heude killed this pretty bird in December 1871 among the
reeds (Phragmites) which border a lake of the Kiang-Sou; these it
traverses in little flocks. According to that naturalist, it possesses
an agreeable voice and has the climbing (or rather clinging) habits
of the allied genera—Comptes Rendus, June 3, 1872, p. 1449.

Investigations on Fossil Birds. By M. A. Mitye-Epwarps.

At the moment when my investigations upon fossil birds approach
their termination, and before the last part is given to the public, I
will ask the Academy’s permission to explain in a few words the re-
sults at which I have arrived during these studies, which have lasted
fully twelve years.

I believe I have demonstrated, by the examination of the bones
which have been found in the recent deposits in the Mascarene
Islands, and which belong, for the most part, to extinct species, such
as the dodo, the solitaire, the Aphanapteryx, Fulica Newtoni, large
Parrots, &c., that these islands have once been part of a vast extent
of land, that these lands by little and little and by a slow depression
have been hidden under the waters of the ocean, only leaving visible
some of their highest points, such as the islands of Mauritius,
Rodriguez, and Bourbon. These islands have served as a refuge for
the last representatives of the terrestrial population of these ancient
epochs; but the species, confined in too limited a space and exposed
to all causes of destruction, have disappeared by degrees; and man
has in some measure aided in their extinction.

Madagascar evidently was not in communication with these islands ;
for when Europeans visited them for the first time, they did not find

Miscellaneous. Vf)

there any Mammalia, with the exception of some large bats; none
of those remarkable Lemurid peculiar to the fauna of Madagascar
existed in the Mascarene Islands. The study of fossil birds leads to
the same result; and the three species of Apyornis which M. A.
Grandidier and I have been able to recognize among the fossils col-
lected in the swamps of the south-west coast have enabled us to
establish the relationship which connects these birds with the Dv-
nornis, the Palapteryx, and Aptornis of New Zealand. All these
species belong to the same zoological type, and make us feel that at
a more or less remote epoch there may have existed some communi-
cation between these lands so far away from one another; perhaps
groups of islands, now submerged, formed intermediate stations, of
which unfortunately we have now no trace.

In France, from the earliest age of man, we remark sometimes
in superficial deposits, sometimes in caverns, fragments of birds which
furnish us with valuable indications of the climatal conditions of
that epoch. Some of these species have now entirely disappeared ;
others, in considerable numbers, have by degrees retired towards the
north—for instance, the grouse and the great hawk owl, which
then were extremely common in these countries. Their presence is
most significant ; for even supposing, according to some naturalists,
the reindeer is only found fossil in France because it had been in-
troduced by the Finnish population, we cannot invoke the same ex-
planation for birds which have never been domesticated. Lastly.
we also find in our caves a great number of species identical with
those which now inhabit temperate Europe—among others, the
cock, which was supposed to be a native of India, but which, on
the contrary, must have been a contemporary of the first ages of man.

It is especially the Middle Tertiary deposits which have furnished
me with a rich harvest. Thus in the Department of the Allier [have
recognized the presence of about 70 species belonging to very various
groups, some of which no longer belong to our fauna. Parrots and
Trogons inhabited the woods; swallows built in the fissures of the
rocks nests in all probability like those now found in certain parts of
Asia and the Indian archipelago. A secretary bird nearly allied
to that of the Cape of Good Hope sought in the plains the ser-
pents and reptiles which at that time, as now, must have furnished
its nourishment. Large adjutants, cranes, flamingoes, the Palc-
lodi (birds of curious forms, partaking at once of the characters of
the flamingoes and ordinary Gralle), and ibises frequented the
banks of the watercourses where the larve cf insects and mollusks
abounded ; pelicans floated in the midst of the lakes; and, lastly,
sand-grouse and numerous gallinaceous birds assisted in giving to
this ornithological population a physiognomy with which it is im-
possible not to be struck, and which recalls to one’s mind the de-
seriptions which Livingstone has given us of certain lakes of southern
Africa.

The list I have given of the birds whose existence I have ascer-
tained in the part of the Miocene lakes the alluvium of which has
formed the deposits of St. Géraud le Puy, of Vaumas, &c., indicates

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 6

74 Miscellaneous.

the relations in which the different groups of this class of vertebrates
lived. Whilst some of them are extremely common, there are others
which are only found, so to speak, accidentally, and which are only
represented in my collection by a single bone or only a few bones.
The species most frequently met with are the water-birds: thus the
ducks have left numerous remains; the cormorant is only found at
certain places. Evidently at that time, as now, birds had prefer-
ences for certain places, certain rocks, &c., from which they de-
parted but little. The little diver (Colymboides minutus) is less
abundant than the gulls, of which two species, Larus elegans and
L. totanoides, exist in profusion.

It is the same with some of the small shore-waders belonging to
the genera Totanus and T'ringa, whilst Elorius and Himantopus are
represented by few individuals. I have found numerous bones of
the ibis, and in particular of the Palelodus ambiguus ; the four other
species of the latter genus are by no means so common. Thus out
of two hundred bones of these birds hardly one will turn out to be
of P. crassipes, P. minutus, P. gracilipes, or P. goliath. The por-
tions of the skeleton of the flamingo are rarely found entire at St.
Géraud le Puy; whereas at Coumon and Chaptuzat, on the contrary,
they are well preserved. I have only once met with the bones of
the adjutant; they belonged to two young specimens, and were as-
sociated in the same excavation filled with sand. The cranes are rare ;
their bones are almost always broken and often injured by the teeth
of rodents, as if they had lain for a long time on the bank before
being carried to the bottom of the lake. The rails, the gallinaceous
birds, the pigeons, the sand-grouse, the passerine birds, the raptores,
and the parrots have left but few traces of their existence. These
birds, from their mode of life, did not remain continually on the
shores of the lakes or watercourses ; their remains might be eaten
or destroyed at once, and it would need a concurrence of exceptional
circumstances for them to be transported by the streams into the
alluvial deposits of the lakes: thus I had explored these deposits for
more than ten years before I met with a single bone of a parrot,
sand-grouse, secretary bird, or of several of the raptores ; and some,
of which I had collected the remains a long time ago, have not ap-
peared since.

All the bones of birds collected in the Miocene beds of Weissenau,
in the basin of Mayence, that I have been able to examine, present a
complete resemblance to those of the Department of the Alber.

The ornithological population of the celebrated deposit of Sansan,
in the Department of the Gers, presents another character ; not one
of its representatives is foundin the lacustrine deposits of the Bour-
bonnais and the Auvergne: and although the greater part of the
species belong to families at present existing in our fauna, not one
is known to be actually living, and several of them present charac-
ters sufficient to constitute new genera.

I have discovered there a parrot of a more slender form than that
of the Allier, and I have designated it by the name of Pszttacus Lar-
tetianus, to attach the name of my regretted master and friend to one

Miscellaneous. "5

of the most interesting species that I have ever found in this rich
deposit. Some gallinaceous birds of a large size, and in this respect
hardly inferior to the peacocks and true pheasants, also inhabited
the shores of the little lake, where the deposits accumulated which
now form the hill of Sansan ; numerous passerine birds, resembling
the Bengalis and Senegalis, frequented the margins of the waters ;
lastly, the number of species was not less than 35, and certainly new
excavations will not fail to make known more.

The marine faluns of the Loire have only furnished me with a few
species of birds. I have been able, however, to recognize a cormo-
rant almost as large as that which now lives on our shores, a goose a
little smaller than the bernicle, a heron, and a pheasant.

The beds of gypsum in the environs of Paris contain numerous
impressions of skeletons of birds; and it is to be observed that the
animals of that period deviated more from the zoological forms
which exist at the present day. Thus, despite the unwillingness I
feel, especially in paleontological studies, to increase the already too
large number of generic groups, I have beenobliged to formnew genera
for many among them. Thus the Cryptornis antiquus was nearer
the hornbills than any known type; Laurillardia and Palegithalus
belong to the order of passerine birds, but were quite distinct from all
those now living. The Palwortyges are gallinaceous, of the size of
a quail, but very different from those birds. G'ypsornis is the giant
of the family Rallide; it must almost have attained the size of a
stork. Agnopterus approaches the flamingoes, although it displays
some characters peculiar to itself.

The singularity of the forms of these Eocene birds makes us
doubly regret not knowing those of the Cretaceous period. Unfor-
tunately there exist only a very small number of freshwater depo-
sits dating from that period; therefore it is not astonishing that we
have as yet discovered only very few traces of terrestrial animals
which lived during the deposition of these important strata. Perhaps
new zoological forms will be discovered there filling up the immense
gap which exists between the Jurassic Archeopteryx and the typical
birds of the Tertiary epoch.—Comptes Rendus, April 15, 1872,
pp. 1030-1034.

Migrations of the Graptolites. By H. Attnyne Nicuotson, M.D.,
F.R.S.E., F.G.8., Professor of Natural History and Botany in
University College, Toronto.

The author commenced by stating that the occurrence of the same
species of marine animals in deposits in distant areas is now gene-
rally regarded as evidence that such deposits are not strictly contem-
poraneous, but rather that a migration from one area to another has
taken place; this migration he thought would probably in many
cases be accompanied by modification. Applying these principles to
the Graptolites, he endeavoured to show in what directions their
migrations may have taken place.

He excluded from the family Graptolitide the genera Dictyonema,
Dendrograpsus, Callograpsus, and Ptilograpsus, and stated that the

76 Miscellaneous.

family as thus limited extended from Upper Cambrian to Upper
Silurian times. The earliest known Graptolites were those of the
Skiddaw Slates, which he thought would prove to belong to the
Upper Cambrian series. The Skiddaw area he considered to extend
into Canada, where the Quebec group belongs to it. Genera of
Graptolites belonging to this area are represented in Australia; and
this the author regarded as indicative of migration, but in which
direction was uncertain. Having discussed the forms of Graptolites
characteristic of the deposits in the Skiddaw-Quebee area, the author
proceeded to indicate the mode in which the family is represented
in the areas of deposition of the great Silurian series—namely, the
Llandeilo areas of Wales and Scotland, the Coniston area of the
North of England, the Gala area of South Scotland, the Hudson-
River area of North America, and the Saxon and Bohemian areas—
giving under each of these heads a list of species, with indications of
their probable derivation.—Proc. Geol. Soc. Feb. 1872.

Notice of a new Netted Sponge (Meyerella) from the Philippines.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

The British Museum has just received a very beautiful clavate
netted sponge, discovered in the Philippines by Dr. Adolf Bernhard
Meyer, which I have proposed to indicate as a new genus under the
name of MBYERELLA.

Sponge simple, elongate, clavate, acute at the apex, at which are
placed several tufts of short cylindrical fibres. The body of the
sponge is elongate-fusiform, with longitudinal ridges irregularly dis-
posed, often inosculating together, leaving various-shaped deep con-
cavities on the surface. These ridges and the very numerous irre-
gularly shaped often confluent elevations in the concavities between
them are furnished with various-shaped large oscules on the upper
surface. The sides of the ridges and the tops of the prominences are
all united by a very fine cobweb-like netted coat, formed of numerous
fibres, and pierced with an immense number of very minute exceed-
ingly close perforations. The stem cylindrical, thick, ending in a
thick cylindrical tuft of elongated glassy fibres, evidently anchor-
ing the sponge in the sand; numerous cylindrical bunches of fibre
are to be seen through the substance of the sponge extending
throughout the greater part of the length of the stem. Species :—
Meyerella claviformis.

Hab. Philippines (Dr. Meyer, Brit. Mus.).

Additional Note on Osteocella septentrionalis.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e:

I have been informed by Dr. Giinther that this species (see Ann.
& Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ix. p. 405) is frequently found in Buz-
zard Inlet, near New Westminster, Fraser River, British Columbia,
which confirms my original supposition that it probably comes from
the west coast of America.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. |

No. 56. AUGUST 1872.

X1.—Antipathes arctica, a new Species of Black Coral (Anti-
pathide) from the Polar Seas. By Dr. C. LUTKEN*.

A LITTLE before the commencement of the illness which at
the end of last year carried off M.C.S..M. Olik, Councillor of
Justice and Director of Greenland trade, and formerly Inspector
in North Greenland, thus inflicting upon science a serious loss
by depriving us of a man who had striven with much zeal and
great perseverance to elucidate the natural history of Green-
land, especially in collecting its zoological and paleontological
objects for our museums, that gentleman brought to me at the
museum a black coral which, as he knew with certainty, was
found in the stomach of a shark (7. e. a sea-hound, Scymnus
microcephalus) in Rodebayt, about two miles north of Jakobs-
havn, in North Greenland, by M. K. Fleischer. This dis-
covery is of great interest in many respects. It increases our
knowledge of the Greenland fauna with a genus, and, indeed,
with a family, which had not previously been included in it ;
nay, what is more, this family was previously known only
from warm or very warm seas: north of the Mediterranean {

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Oversigt over det Kongl.
Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl.’ 1871, pp. 18-26.

+ Rink calls it “ Rodebay.” I do not know which of these denomina-
tions is the right one.

{ The text was already printed when Professor Wyville Thomson had
the kindness to inform me that Antipatharia had been found in the
British expeditions for the exploration of the great depths by means of
the dredge, and consequently in a part of the Atlantic situated between
the polar seas and the warm seas which, until recently, formed the
northern limit of the known Antipatharia.

From the Mediterranean we know with certainty apparently five spe-
cies—namely, Antipathes lariz, Esper, subpinnata, Ellis, and dichotoma,
Pall., Leiopathes glaberrima (Esper) and Gerardia Lamarchii (J. Haime) ;
whilst I regard it as very doubtful whether Antipathes scoparia, Lamk.,
and Cirripathes spiralis (Pall.) also occur in the Mediterranean, as is

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 7

78 = Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

and South Carolina no Antipathid has hitherto been known;
and that a representative of this group is now suddenly dis-
covered in the extreme north certainly makes a very consider-
able alteration in the notions which we have hitherto enter-
tained as to its geographical distribution, and leads us to con-
jecture that it may extend to all the deeper valleys of the
ocean*. That the Greenland ‘species belongs to deep water 1s
warranted by the sea-hound’s well-known habit of seeking its
food at great depths (200-250 fathoms) ; that it should have
gone to fetch this little “‘sea-shrub” very far from the place
where it was itself caught we may regard as not very probable.
It is true that the sea-hound, like the sharks in general, is a
fish which wanders pretty widely ; and we have instances of
its straying far beyond its proper range—to Scotland and the
north of France, for example. But, nevertheless, in the pre-
sent case it would be improbable that it should have sought

stated by Milne-Edwards (Hist. Nat. des Corall. tome i. pp. 314-319).
The last mentioned is a native of the East Indies; and other species of its
genus are known from the West Indies, Madeira, and Australia. Ant?-
pathes scoparia I believe I have recognized with certainty in a form from
the Red Sea represented in our museum. Of the species which are stated
only by older writers (e. g. Lamouroux) to be from the Mediterranean
we may probably take no notice. From Madeira also various species are
known (Cirripathes setacea and gracilis, Gray, Antipathes furcata, Gray,
and subpinnata, Ellis?)—and from South Carolina Antipathes Bosci,
Lamk., and A. alopecuroides, Ellis. In the tract between Florida and
Cuba Pourtales found five species (A. filix, humilis, tetrasticha, and two
undescribed species). Besides these we know a whole series of species
from the West Indies :—Cirripathes Desbonni, Duch. & Mich.; Antipa-
thes pedata and atlantica, Gray; A. americana and dissecta, Duch. &
Mich. (both from St. Thomas); A. eupteridea, Lamk. (Martinique) ;
Arachnopathes paniculata, Duch. & Mich. (Guadeloupe) ; and Leiopathes
compressa, Esp. (Jamaica). Many of these, however, are but imperfectly
known. A. reticuluta, Esp., and A. lariz, Esp., are also represented as
West-Indian; but this can hardly be correct, but due to mistakes either
in the determination or in the statement of localities. A. reticulata is an
Kast-Indian species (Manilla), and A. larix is a native of the Mediterra-
nean. From Cape Palmas we have <A. spinescens, Gray. From the
southern part of the Atlantic we know no Antipatharia.

* Marsigli took A. dichotoma at a depth of 140 fathoms. Pourtales
captured his species at 116-120, 270, and 195-324 fathoms. Heller took
Gerardia Lamarckwi at 50-60 fathoms, in company with red corals. That
the Mediterranean black corals (palmas neras) usually occur in this asso-
ciation, and at considerable depths, is known from Lacaze-Duthiers’s ad-
mirable investigations upon the Antipatharia. That those in warmer
seas also occur at much smaller depths, however, appears from the fact
that Dana obtained A. arborea in 10 fathoms and A. anguwinea in 10 feet
of water at the Fiji Islands (Explor. Exped. Zoophytes, pp. 577 & 585).
At the Pearl Islands, in the Gulf of Panama, Bradley obtained A. pana-
mensis, by means of pearl-divers, from 6-8 fathoms (Verrill, “ Notes on
Radiata, No. 6,” p.500, Transact. Conn. Acad. i.).

(Antipathide) from the Polar Seas. 79

its prey beyond the Polar Sea; and were we even to stretch
this possibility to its utmost limits, this Antipatharian would
still remain a northern form, and the diffusion of the family
as far as the northern seas would remain indubitable.

The Black Corals, or Antipathide, are still among the less-
known animal-forms; it is only a few years since their struc-
ture was so far elucidated * that they could be arranged in
their right place in the system as a type analogous to the
Horny Corals (Gorgoniide) in the sex- or multitentaculate
order of Coralliaria. On account of the great softness and
perishableness of the outer layer (“‘flesh”’), which, again, is
chiefly caused by the apparently total want of hard parts
(“‘sclerites ’’), it 1s seldom that we find in collections specimens
which show any traces of this the essential living part of these
animals—the horny, most frequently black and spinous “‘axis”’
being in general all that remains, and the only thing that we
have to depend upon in the description, specific distinction,
and grouping of these forms. Most of them, moreover, are
known only by imperfect descriptions or defective figures
(those of Professor Lacaze-Duthiers’s excellent revision T of
the whole family, founded on the materials in the Paris Mu-
seum, have, unfortunately, never appeared) ; and of not a few
we do not know whence they come. That under these cir-
cumstances the determination of species presents nearly insu-
perable difficulties will be evident; but, on the other hand, I
must admit, after the experience that I have been able to
obtain by the examination of the comparatively considerable
collection in the Museum (seventeen species), that in general
it is not difficult to trace the limits between one species and
another. The modes of ramification especially present many
characteristic and easily grasped differences, although it may
be less easy to express these in words.

That the present specimen, after lying, whether for a short
or a long time, in the stomach of a shark, is without any trace
of the softer and more perishable parts, is a matter of course ;
but in other respects it is well preserved. That it represents
a new species is also very probable, as the locality of its oc-
currence is so exceedingly distant from that of any previously
known Antipathid. But upon this circumstance we must
not for the present lay very great stress, as it is certain that

* First elucidated (if we leave out of consideration what Marsigli
(1725), Ellis (1786), and Gray (1832) had previously published with
regard to it) by Dana (Explor. Exped. Zoophytes, x. tab. 56. figs. 1 & 2),
and afterwards more completely by Lacaze-Duthiers (Ann. Sci. Nat.
5° sér., Zool. & Pal., tomes ii. & iv. 1864-65).

+ Loe. eit. tome ii. p. 173, and several other places.

Ts

80 Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

deep-sea species may have a distribution which may extend
even from the tropical to the glacial zones. If it is actually

Big. 1, Fig. 2.
i i oh

A portion of the main stem, enlarged. The tip of a branch, enlarged,

MALS wi ye

Nee

Antipathes arctica, Liitken, somewhat diminished.

ee

(Antipathidee) from the Polar Seas. 81

the case that a whole series of northern Echinoderms (Rhzzo-
crinus lofotensis, Pteraster militaris, Echinus Flemingti, Bris-
sopsis lyrifera, Echinocardium ovatum, Echinocucumis typica,
Cucumaria frondosa, and Molpadia borealis*) live together in
the deep water around and among the Antilles, there is, of
course, nothing against the possibility that an Antipathid also
might be diffused from the icy sea to south of the tropic
of Cancer; and our thoughts turn quite naturally at once to
the species recently recorded by Pourtales t from the Straits
of Florida. Nevertheless I have been unable to refer the pre-
sent form to any species known to me either in nature or from
descriptions or figures; and although this, considermg what
has been said above as to the defective state of this depart-
ment of our science, is not much to say, I hope that I shall
not fall into any mistake in describing it as new. For its
recognition the annexed photoxylographic figure (fig. 3) will,
I hope, furnish sufficient means, although I will not omit to add
a short description of it; but first I will endeavour to deter-
mine its approximate place in the systematic arrangement of
the Antipathide.

According to Milne-Edwards’s proposed classification of
this family, our Greenland species is undoubtedly a true Ané?-
pathes ; itis branched and has a rough surface, and its branches
show no very great tendency to coalesce (as in Arachnopathes
and Lhipidipathes), although, apparently accidentally, a slight
amalgamation occurs at isolated points. I shall leave it for
the present undecided how far it may be possible to distin-
guish the genera of Antipathide in the mode attempted by
the above-mentioned distinguished zoologist: opinions are
divided upon this subject}; and the analogous genera to them
in the parallel group of the Alcyonaria have not stood the test
of the more thoroughgoing analysis of recent times; but under

* Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Anatomy at Harvard Col-
lege, Nos. 9-13. ‘Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf-stream at
Great Depths: Echinoderms,” by A. Agassiz, T. Lyman, and Pourtales,
1869.

+ Op. cit. 1867, p. 112; 1868, p. 133.

{ At the same time with Milne-Edwards, Gray gave (Proc. Zool. Soc.
1857) a systematic arrangement of the Antipathide. He has only two
genera—Letopathes, with smooth, and <Antypathes, with spinous axis,
and distinguishes the species with an unbranched axis only as a subgenus
(Cirripathes) of the latter. Moreover Milne-Edwards himself regards
his attempt at a more minute division of the Antipathide into genera as
essentially only an artificial arrangement for the ready revision of the
species, and pays particular attention to certain striking differences (1. ¢,
pp. 312,513). Verrill also says that “generic characters derived only
from the mode of growth and branching are always unsatisfactory in
classing compound Zoophytes” (Notes on Radiata, No. 6, p. 499).

§2 Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

any circumstances the above-mentioned amalgamation of the
branches at particular points will not justify us in giving our
species a place outside the genus Antipathes. In this genus
A. arctica will take its place among the species whose branches
and stems are not very different in thickness (“ polypier se
subdivisant en branches de divers ordres, qui ne different que
peu les uns des autres par leur diamétre, lequel décroit gra-
duellement”’) ; but it belongs neither to the species whose
branches lie in all possible different planes, and thus form
tufted masses (“ panicules, touffes’’) of different forms, nor to
those in which they all lie in the same plane, and form as it
were a quadrifid or bipinnate leaf (A.myriophylla, pinnatifida).
It stands about in the middle between these two chief types of
the genus, and seems at the same time to point from this to-
wards Arachnopathes.

The stem is nearly straight, widening below into a flat ex-
pansion, by which it has been attached at the bottom of the
sea; its height, in a direct line, is 113 millims., and its dia-
meter about 1} millim.; superiorly it decreases very slowly in
thickness; only its lowest portion is smooth, the remainder
being covered with somewhat irregular fine furrows; on the
raised lines separating these furrows are seated the short acute
spines in tolerably close series (fig. 1). The shining black
colour of the stem gradually acquires a brownish tint in its upper
part; its lower part (about 30 millims.) is destitute of branches ;
but from the upper part of the stem there issue on each side,
right and left, 10-13 main branches. Except in the uppermost
part of the coral, where some irregularity occurs, the points of
origin of these main branches are placed pretty regularly,
alternately to the right and left. The distance between two
branches situated one above the other on the same side is at
the utmost 9 millims. On the whole the middle branches are
the longest and strongest; the angle which they form with
the stem is not much less than a right angle, and their direc-
tion is therefore nearly horizontal. All the branches placed
one above the other on the same side lie, at least approximately,
in the same vertical plane; and the angle which those from
the two sides form with each other at their origin is only a
little more than a right angle; and as they curve in an elon-
gated arc at first forward and then backward, their points
come to lie in the same (vertical) plane as their points of ori-
gin. If we leave the curvature out of consideration, all the
coral’s horizontal main branches will therefore lie approxi-
mately in the same plane. These main branches are not much
less in diameter than the upper part of the stem; and they
maintain this character nearly throughout their whole length;

(Antipathidee) from the Polar Seas. 83

their surface is spinous (fig. 2), like that of the stem ; but raised
and depressed lines are seen only where they are thickest,
which is not always nearest to the base; the length of the
largest main branch is about equal to that of the branch-bearing
part of the’stem. The secondary branches, which are only a
little thinner than the main branches, and have an average
length of about 35 millims. (of course there are many much
shorter, and some much longer), spring from the main branches
at right angles and at an average distance of 8-12 millims.
apart; some are directed upwards, and others downwards,
whilst others, again, project more or less obliquely forwards,
but none backward. ‘The hinder surface of the coral is, in fact,
completely without branches; all the secondary and tertiary
branches are turned more or less towards the same side,
namely the anterior side. At certain points where secondary
branches have met or crossed each other, an amalgamation
has taken place; but in this there is nothing particularly re-
gular, and it therefore appears to me probable that we may
find specimens in which no such coalescence has taken place
at any pot. All the secondary branches are spinous, like
the stem and main branches ; and the finer they are, the lighter
brown is also their colour.

As only a single specimen is extant, I have in this short
description been unable to separate what is only individual
and what may be regarded as characterizing the species. I
shall now, however, endeavour to bring together in the form
of a diagnosis those peculiarities which, until more material
may be before us, may serve to distinguish it from the other
known Antipathide.

Antipathes arctica, Liitken.

Sclerobasis (axis) cornea, nigra vel nigro-fusca, spinosa, arborem
humilem, latiorem quam altiorem constituit; stipes erectus, teres,
gracilis, niger, basi levis, ceterum spinulis brevissimis, longitudi-
naliter seriatis, cum sulculis minutis alternantibus, asper; rami
(primarii) patentissimi, horizontales fere, bifariam dispositi,
utrinque 10 vel ultra, gracillimi, asperi, colore dilutiore, ramulos
(secundarios, tertiarios) similes emittunt, angulos rectos cum
ramis (primaris, secundariis) formantes, sursum, deorsum vel
antrorsum inclinatos ; rariter coalescunt. Superficies dorsalis vel
posterior arboris totius ramulis omnino caret. Altitudo e. 5 pol-
lices, latitudo 63 poll.

In ventre Scymni microcephalo prope oras Groénlandie septentrio-
nales inventa.

84 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

XU1.—Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part III.
By Francis P. Pascoz, F.L.8. &e.

[ Plate I. ]
AMYCTERIN®. (Enochroma rubeta.

Mythites asperatus. Misophrice, n. g.

pithecius. hispida. _

degener. Orpha persimilis.
Aidriodes, n. ». Phrenozemia, n. g.

fastigiatus. lyproides.

mendosus. BELinz.

inuus.
Acherres, n. 2.

Belus centralis.

mamillatus. CYLINz.
Ennothus, n. g. Myrmacicelus exsertus.
fallax. . :
Oditesus, n. @. CRYPTORHYNCHIN&.
indutus. Meechius, n. g.
—— lycosarius. anaglyptus.
—— inceenis. Agriocheeta, n. g.
—— perditus. crinita.
—— sulcirostris. Tragopus plagiatus.
buceros. Imaliodes nodulosus.
Sosytelus, n. g. Drassicus, n. g.
lobatus, nigricornis.
illotus.
CYLINDRORHININ2:. Agenopus, n. g.
Centyres ovis. agricola.

Enchymus humeralis.

Nechyrus incomptus.

ERIRHININZE. ZYGOPINE.
Aoplocnemis lineata. Idotasia sequalis,
(Enochroma, n. g. —— evanida.

Mythites asperatus.

M. subelongatus, ovatus, niger, capite supra oculos corrugato ; rostro
latitudine haud longiore, in medio sulco profundo apicem versus
valde ampliato, impresso, emarginatura triangulari indistincta ;
prothorace vix transyerso, ante medium paulo rotundato, postice
angustiore, crebre grosse granulato, in medio leviter suleato ;
elytris basi prothorace paulo latioribus, ovatis, angulo humerali
modice productis, insequaliter grosse tuberculato-granulatis cavi-
tatibus foveiformibus impressis; corpore infra levigato; pedibus
setosulis. Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

This species differs, znter alia, from M. basalis and M. sul-
cicollis in the absence of the larger conical tubercles, those on
the elytra in ill-defined groups of 3-5, the intervals here and
there with foveiform impressions.

Mythites pithecius.
M. ovatus, niger, capite rostroque mamillato-punctatus, hoc basi
quadrilobato, lobis duobus intermediis prominulis, infra medium

the Australian Curculionide. 85

rugoso-impresso, apice emarginatura triangulari parva, margini-
bus elevata ; scapo flexuoso, apicem versus valde incrassato ; pro-
thorace sat fortiter rotundato, apice valde prominulo, in medio
suleato, granulis mamillatis nitidis majusculis, nonnullis confertis,
munito; elytris prothorace vix latioribus, postice gradatim am-
plioribus, angulo humerali recto, transversim grosse undulato-
granulatis, granulis unisetigeris, singulo elytro postice tuberculo
oblongo obtuso obsito; corpore infra sparse punctato-setoso ;
pedibus setis numerosis adspersis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. New South Wales (Monaro).

Allied to M. basalis, but smaller, with a different rostrum
and the elytra more regularly and less strongly sculptured.

Mythites degener.

M. sat anguste ovatus, niger, capite inter oculos carina depressa
notato, supra oculos cristato; rostro tenuiore, basi profunde
transversim sulcato, antice fortiter sulcato, sulco angustiore, versus
apicem minus ampliato ; prothorace latitudine vix longiore, modice
rotundato, irregulariter rude granulato, in medio profunde sul-
cato; elytris basi prothorace haud latioribus, lateribus ¢ sub-
parallelis, 9 subovatis, apicibus parum emarginatis, subseriatim
foveolatis, interstitiis alternis antice paulo, postice magis elevatis
et in tubercula plus minusye nodiformia dissolutis, humeris
antrorsum fortiter productis; abdomine maris in medio longi-
tudinaliter piloso; pedibus setulis albidis adpressis adspersis.
Long. 43-5 lin.

Hab. South Australia (Port Lincoln).

Much less strongly sculptured than JM. sulcicollis, with
only a single depressed carina in front.

JEDRIODES.

Caput antice convexum, circa oculos elevatum ; rostrum breve, ca-
pite angustius, antice bilobum, inter lobos sulcatum, emarginatura
triangulari terminatum ; scrobes breves, arcuate. Antenne bre-
viusculee, clava distincta. Oculi parvi, subovati, a prothorace di-
stantes. Prothorav rotundatus, convexus, apice productus, basi
truncatus, lobis ocularibus distinctis, plus minusve prominulis.
Elytra oblonga vel ovata, humeris antrorsum productis, postice
declivia. Pedes subvalidi; tibiw recte ; tarsi modice elongati.

The small roundish eyes away from the prothorax, notwith-
standing its ocular lobes, offer a good diagnosis of this genus.
Besides the species described below, which are all very di-
stinct, though the sculpture seems liable to some variation,
Huomus nodipennis, Boh., is also to be referred to it. Phali-
dura scorpio, Bois., seems to me to be the species on which
Schénherr founded his genus Hwomus, naming it, but without
any description, #. Fahret.

86 | Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to
Atdriodes fastigiatus. Pl. I. fig. 8.

47, subparallelus, niger, opacus; rostro sparse setoso; prothorace
longitudine paulo latiore, utrinque fortiter rotundato, valde con-
yvexo, apice trisulcato, sulco intermedio longiore ad basin currente,
dorso confertim mamillato-granulato, granulis depressis, uniseti-
geris; elytris prothorace paulo latioribus, subparallelis, supra
deplanatis, subseriatim punctatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque
carinatis, carina interiore abbreviata, profunde incisa, exteriore in
tubercula quatuor dissoluto, uno humerali cristato-producto,
duobus sequentibus dentiformibus, ultimo majusculo, lobiformi,
ad marginem declivitatis sito, marginibus postice serrato-setigeris,
apicibus acutis; corpore infra sparse fortiter punctato ; pedibus
punctatis et atro-setosis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The subparallel elytra and strong humeral crest afford a
good differentiation for this species.

Atdriodes mendosus.

44, oblongo-ovalis, niger squamulis silaceis vel subeupreis valde
adspersus; rostro breviore, minus fortiter punctato; prothorace
modice rotundato, antice profunde trifoveato, fovea intermedia
majore, confertim mamillato-tuberculato, tuberculis conicis ele-
vatis, setis nigris coronatis; elytris prothorace vix latioribus,
ovalibus, convexis, lateribus paulo rotundatis, supra subseriatim
granulato-punctatis, singulatim tuberculis circa decem, majusculis,
conicis, in seriebus duabus ordinatis, lateribus, etiam fortiter
sulcato-punctatis, tuberculis parvis inzequalibus obsitis, illis pluri-,
his unisetigeris, angulo humerali carinatis, apiee parum producto,
anguste sed profunde emarginato; corpore infra coriaceo, impune-
tato, setulis minutis adsperso; pedibus silaceo-squamosis, setis
numerosis nigris interjectis. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The granules on the elytra are seated between the punc-
tures; or, rather, the spaces between the punctures are granuli-
form ; in this respect it differs, énter alia, from the next species,

Atdriodes inuus.

47, anguste ovatus, niger, squamulis minutis subcupreis adspersus ;
capite fere impunctato; rostro prothoraceque ut in 4. mendoso ;
elytris basi prothoracis vix latioribus, supra subseriatim impresso-
punctatis, haud granulatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque antice
granulato-carinatis, postice tuberculis conicis, illo duobus, hoe
tribus, instructis, lateribus fortiter suleato-punctatis, interstitiis
valde elevatis, angulo humerali carinatis, apice obtuse rotundato,
vix emarginato; corpore infra coriaceo, obsolete punctato; pedi-
bus ut in precedente. Long. 4-5 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

the Australian Curculionide. 87

ACHERRES.

Caput antice convexum, rotundatum ; rostrum validum, breve, ver-
sus apicem gradatim crassius, basi transversim sulcatum, bialatum,
ala utrinque supra oculum currente; scrobes breves, laterales,
parum arcuate. Oculc parvi, rotundati, a prothorace distantes.
Antenne breviuscule, clava distincta. Prothorax breviter ovatus,
apice truncatus, lobis ocularibus nullis. Hlytra ovalia, basi pro-
thorace hand latiora, utrinque antrorsum paulo producta, postice
declivia, plica epipleurali ad apicem instructa. Pedes subvalidi,
setosi ; femora paulo incrassata; tibiw rect ; tarsi robusti; arti-
culis tribus basalibus triangularibus, ultimo haud bilobo, postice
paulo longiores. Abdomen segmentis marginibus prominulis, 3—4
conjunctim secundo longioribus.

The essential characters of this genus lie in the absence of
the ocular lobes and in the form of the rostrum. The claw-
jot is received in a cavity of the preceding one, and the
three basal are all prolonged beneath into a sort of spine.
This structure is common to most genera of the subfamily,
and more or less to the Brachycerine, Byrsopine, &e.

Acherres mamillatus. Pl. I. fig. 5.

A. niger, opacus, plerumque esquamosus, aliquando sparse silaceo-
maculatus; capite antice impunctato; rostro inter alas late sul-
cato, sulco lateribusque punctis grossis sparse impresso ;_ protho-
race parum longiore quam latiore, sat confertim mamillato, ma-
millis validis, singulis profunde foveatim impressis, setam geren-
tibus, interspatiis (aliquando) ferrugineo-squamosis; elytris in
medio prothorace fere duplo latioribus, grosse seriatim punc-
tatis, dorso mamillis nonnullis depressis, aliis externe tuberculi-
formibus, quarum duabus posticis majoribus, instructis, his punctis
plurimis, illis punctis 1-3 impressis, punctis generaliter setigeris ;
corpore infra sparse punctato-setoso ; pedibus, articulo ultimo tar-
sorum incluso, valde setosis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

ENNOTHUS.

Acherre differt rostro bicornuto, plica epipleurali elytrorum nulla,
et tarsis articulo ultimo bilobo.

In Acherres the base of the rostrum is prolonged into two
wing-shaped bodies extending above and overlapping the eyes
on each side; in this genus it is nearly the same as in Odi-
tesus ; but in the absence of ocular lobes and in habit it agrees
with the former genus.

Ennothus fallax.
E. niger, opacus, supra squamulis piliformibus minutis rarissimis
indutus, subtus squamulis longioribus minus dispersis; capite

88 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

leviter granulato, supra oculos paulo elevato; rostro breviusculo,
cornibus basi remotis, apice profunde emarginato, marginibus
convexis; antennis tenuioribus, subferrugineis, funiculi articulo
secundo primo sesquilongiore, tribus ultimis turbinatis ; prothorace
parvo, parum transverso, basi apiceque sequalibus, rugoso, tuber-
culis fasciculatis, apicalibus quatuor, utrinque tribus locatis, his
spiniformibus, instructo ; elytris ampliato-rotundatis, rugosis, seri-
atim punctatis, tuberculisque conicis, apice setigeris, postice ple-
rumque maj oribus, instructis, regione humerali quadrituberculatis ;
femoribus parum incrassatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

ODITESUS.

Caput antice subplanatum vel leviter excavatum, supra oculos ele-
vatum ; rostrum capite angustius et longius, basi supra elevatum,
bicornutum ; scrobes flexuosee, oblique, infra oculos evanescentes.
Antenne ut in Huomo. Oculi rotundati, ampliati. Prothorawx
suboblongus, utrinque rotundatus, basi apice subsequali; lobis
ocularibus prominulis. Elytra obovata vel elliptica, postice de-
clivia, humeris vix productis, singulo crista 3-4-dentata oblique
instructo, apicibus ad suturam aliquando perparum emarginatis.
Pedes longiusculi, ubique setigeri; femora parum incrassata,
flexuosa; tibiw recte ; tars? hispidi, antici et intermedii modice
dilatati, postici angusti, articulis duobus basalibus longitudine
cequalibus. Abdomen segmentis tertio quartoque conjunctim se-
cundo brevioribus. Corpus oblongo-ovatum.

The species of this genus are very homogeneous in point of
habit, the head and rostrum affording some of the most pro-
minent characters. O. buceros differs in having no spines on
the dorsal portion of the elytra. They all apparently vary in
the amount of squamosity, some being prettily varied with
white; the scales probably drop off with age. The females
appear to be smaller and more ovate.

Oditesus indutus. PI. I. fig. 6.

O. niger, opacus, parce fulvescenti-squamulosus ; capite inter oculos.
leviter bicarinulato; rostro vage setoso, antice excavato, cornibus
basi distantibus, divaricatis, in carinulis duabus descendentibus
terminatis ; clava antennarum breviter obovata, obtusa; protho-
race basi apice haud latiore, antice trisubsulcato, dorso utrinque
in medio tuberculis tribus conicis, intermedio majore, instructo,
apice quatuor, aliis etiam dispersis, lateribus mamillato-granu-
latis; elytris breviusculis, obovatis, tuberculis granulitormibus
Tan erosis, quorum duobus pasanad majoribus, munitis, elytro
singulo tuberculis validis conicis octo etiam instructis, scl. uno
exteriors prope humerum, ceteris in seriebus duabus locatis,
spatiis inter tubercula squamositate grisea vestitis ; corpore infra
sparse punctato-setoso ; pedibus valide setosis. Long. 33 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

the Australian Curculionide. 89

Oditesus lycosarius.

O. niger, opacus, haud squamosus ; capite inter oculos sat profunde
excavato, haud carinulato; rostro vage setoso, antice supra scrobes
fortiter excavato, cornibus suberectis, basi approximatis, incras-
satis, in carinulis brevibus descendentibus terminatis; clava an-
tennarum breviter elliptica, acuminata; prothorace basi apice
latiore, in medio antice subsulcato, supra tuberculis inequalibus
mamilliformibus, vel plus minusve conicis, illis singulis setam
gerentibus, instructo, lateribus mamillato-granulatis ; elytris sub-
ellipticis, fortiter seriatim punctatis, tuberculis ut in precedente,
sed apicibus tuberculorum evidenter setosis, et interspatiis haud
granulatis; corpore infra vage setoso-punctato; pedibus valide
setosis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The cavity below the protuberances on the rostrum, which,
however, varies in size, seems to afford a ready diagnostic
of this species from the last.

Oditesus incenis.

O. niger, opacus, sejunctim pallide ferrugineo- vel aliquando albido-
squamulosus; capite inter oculos subplanato; rostro angustiore,
setoso, cornibus erectis, magis approximatis, inter ea profunde
fisso, carinula obsoleta; prothorace magis oblongo, basi apice
evidenter latiore, in medio longitudinaliter sulcato, tuberculis
plurimis conicis, nonnullis submamilliformibus, instructo, lateri-
bus mamillatis; elytris obovatis, seriatim punctatis, basi sutu-
ram versus subcarinato-tuberculatis, singulo elytro tuberculis
validis conicis ut in specie preced. munitis, his interspatiisque
squamulosis; corpore infra pedibusque ut in precedentibus.
Long. 3-3; lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The rostrum is narrower in this species ; and the carinula is
broader, or has in fact ceased to be one. The fissure between
the horns is very marked.

Oditesus perditus.

O. niger, opacus, sejunctim griseo-squamulosus; capite inter oculos
parum excavato, sat dense squamoso; rostro basi squamoso, cor-
nibus valde productis, validis; prothorace antice in medio sul-
cato, basi apice vix latiore, supra tuberculis mamilliformibus
esquamosis eequalibus irregulariter notato, dorso utrinque in medio
tuberculo conico breviusculo munito; elytris subellipticis, ceteris
ut in preecedentibus. Long. 3? lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

90 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

Odttesus sulctrostris.

O. niger, opacus, plerumque esquamosus ; capite inter oculos modice
excavato, rugulis verticalibus notato; rostro in medio longitudi-
naliter sulcato, cornibus brevibus, sulco inter ea currente; pro-
thorace confertim tuberculato, tuberculis submamilliformibus,
nonnullis valide conicis, in medio longitudinaliter sulcato ; elytris
ovatis, fortiter seriatim punctatis, lateribus ampliato punctatis,
maculatim albo-squamosis, interstitio tertio antice tuberculato-
carinato, tuberculo ultimo segregato, nodiformi, post id tuberculis
duobus, ultimo minore, ad declivitatem sito, interstitio quinto
tuberculis tribus, alteroque exteriore humero approximato, totis
conicis, instructis ; corpore infra pedibusque ut in praecedentibus.
Long. 33 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

As the name indicates, there is a well-marked groove on
the rostrum—a character which I have not observed in any
other species, except in a very slight degree.

Oditesus buceros.

O. niger, opacus, fere esquamosus ; capite inter oculos modice exca-
vato; rostro basi valde gibboso, cornibus brevibus, inter ea pro-
funde fisso, antice rugoso, minus excavato ; prothorace confertim
tuberculato, tuberculis plerumque mamilliformibus, uno utrinque
conspicuo, magis conico; elytris ovatis, supra paulo depressis,
fortiter seriatim punctatis, lateribus ampliato-punctatis, apice
rotundatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque carinatis; illo postice
nodos duos gerente, ultimo majore, hoc tuberculis tribus instructo,
primo elongato, sequentibus conicis, etiam tuberculo magno conico
exteriore humero approximato; corpore infra pedibusque ut in
precedentibus. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The absence of tubercles on the dorsum of the elytra, and
the linear smooth carina of the third interstice for the greater
part of its extent, will at once differentiate this species from
any of the preceding. All the above from King George’s
Sound were collected by Mr. Brewer, who is, at the instance
of Mr. Wilson Saunders, F.R.S., journeying in the western
part of Australia.

SosyTELUS.

Caput antice planatum, vel paulo excavatum, supra oculos elevatum ;
rostrum difforme, crassum, in medio gibbosum, antice excavatum ;
scrobes flexuosee, infra oculos terminate. Antenne valide ; funi-
culus brevis, articulo ultimo clave adnato. Prothorax sexangu-
laris, dorso depressus, lobis ocularibus prominulis. Hlytra postice
gradatim latiora, supra planata, humeris antrorsum productis,
postice abrupte declivia, apice producto-ampliata, Pedes sub-

the Australian Curculionide. 91

validi, ubique setigeri; tibiw rectse; tarsi lati, postici ceteris
parum longiores, articulo basali triangulari. Abdomen planatum,
segmentis 3-4 conjunctim secundo longioribus.

This genus agrees with Oditesus in the flatness or concavity
of the front; but the rostrum is short and stout, and not cor-
nuted ; the tarsi also are, for this group, unusually dilated.

Sosytelus lobatus. Pl. I. fig. 1.

S. niger, opacus, squamulis minutis rarissime adspersus; capite
rostroque erebre rude punctatis, hoe capite paulo angustiore ;
prothorace crebre mamillato-granulato, in medio longitudinaliter
sulcato; elytris prothorace latioribus, dorso postice ad latera
lobato-productis, supra subtuberculato-rugosis, lateribus valide
granulatis, apicibus ad suturam dentato-productis; corpore infra
rugosulo, vage punctato. Long. 4—44 lin.

Hab. New South Wales (Sydney).

The table below includes all the genera of the short-scaped
Amycterine which form Lacordaire’s “* Huomides.” I would
remark, however, that, whilst the Amycterine are a perfectly
natural assemblage, the division into two “ groups” appears
to me to be a purely artificial arrangement.

Propectus entire.
With ocular lobes.
Head convex in front.
Eyes partly covered by the ocular lobes.
Prothorax produced at the apex.

ivostrumi short, stout, jcc acters eee sere Euomus, Schonh.

Rostrum longer, narrowed or constricted
at the base.

Tarsi short.

Prothorax angularly produced at

the ICES i. F aierais ce a) austere ssi Tetralophus, Waterh.
Prothorax rounded at the sides.... Melanegis, Pasc.
Tarsi of the posterior and intermediate
dees long, JIMGaD <1 01; 2550* since 2 Dialeptopus, Pase.

Prothorax truncate at the apex.
Terminal joints of the funicle moniliform Mythites, Schénh.
Terminal joints of the funicle transverse Atychoria, Pasc.

Hyes free from the ocular lobes .......... Adriodes, n. 2.
Head concave in front.
Mars, NUTTOWe makers) cfetmiale:siciste/«)<.<'e 5; oatele so alone Oditesus, n. g.
INAS lnpilas 5 one Meee Mee eee ee ae Sosytelus, 0. 2.
Without ocular lobes.
Elytra with an epipleural fold behind...... Acherres, n. &.
Elytra without an epipleural fold.......... Ennothus, n. g.
Propectus excavated 250 sc. c aie ee sos onto wens Amorphorhinus, Lac.

Centyres ovis.

C. breviter ovatus, piceus, omnino dense griseo-squamosus ; rostro
paulo elongato; antennis ut in C. turgido, sed scapo breviore ;

92 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

prothorace transverso, utrinque rotundato, lobis ocularibus fere
obsoletis; elytris ampliatis, modice elevatis, apice acuminatis,
striato-punctatis, punctis singulis squama minuta instructis, inter-
stitiis convexis; corpore infra squamis argenteo-lavatis; tibiis
anticis intus denticulatis. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. Port Dennison (Queensland).

A more depressed form than C. turgidus ; the rostrum longer,
the ocular lobes obsolete, &c. In the recently published
volume of Gemminger and Harold’s ‘ Catalogus,’ Centyres,
Enchymus, and Catastygnus* are placed directly after Leptops.
I do not know whether this has been done inadvertently, be-
cause Leptops immediately precedes them in the work in which
these three genera were first proposed; they are, however,
certainly phanerognathous, and should be placed further on,
near Perperus.

Enchymus humeralis.

E. niger, supra griseo-, subtus lateribusque dense argenteo-squamosus ;
capite rostroque setulis concoloribus adspersis; antennis ferrugi-
neis, griseo-pubescentibus et sparse setulosis; clava subnuda ;
funiculo minus longo; prothorace ante medium magis rotun-
dato, postice angustiore, rugoso-granulato, supra obscure albido
trivittato ; elytris pone medium latioribus, fortiter striato-punc-
tatis, interstitiis convexis, setulis numerosis griseis instructis, hu-
meris dentato-productis, apicibus subacuminatis; tibiis anticis
intus denticulatis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

Differs, inter alia, from EH. punctostriatus in the toothed
shoulders and in the prothorax not being canaliculate.

Aoplocnemis lineata.

A, nigra, nitida, squamis aureo-viridulis lineatim decorata ; capite
sejunctim viridi-squamoso; rostro antennisque subferrugineis,
illo, apice excepto, rude lineatim impresso; prothorace confertim
granulato-punctato, dorso lineis tribus lateribusque squamosis ;
elytris striato-punctatis, interstitiis alternis nudis, nitidis, sub-
granulatis, reliquis sat dense squamosis, apice rotundatis ; corpore
infra sat dense viridulo-squamoso ; pedibus subferrugineis, griseo
pilosis, Long. 4 lin.

Hab. North Australia.
A well-marked species on account of its golden-green stripes.
I have two more species nearly allied to A. rufipes.
CHNOCHROMA.

Ab Aoplocneme differt scrobibus infra haud conniventibus, ab oculis

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. vol. viii. pp. 93-96.

the Australian Curculionide. 93

utrinque sat remote desinentibus ; dds anticis apicem versus fal-
catis ; funiculo articulis ultimis transversis.

From the other genera allied to Aoplocnemis this is differen-
tiated by the curved anterior tibize, which are otherwise some-
what peculiar, the apex not being angularly dilated and the
mucro given off at one of the angles, but passing gradually
into the mucro, which thus becomes a continuation of the
tibia; this is clearly indicated on the Plate (fig. 18).

(nochroma rubeta.

@. anguste oblonga, rufo-ferruginea, opaca ; capite rostroque crebre
tenuiter punctulatis, hoc prothorace parum breviore, apice paulo
depresso ; funiculo articulis duobus basalibus longitudine sequali-
bus (primo crassiore), ceteris brevibus ; oculis ovatis; prothorace
oblongo, utrinque rotundato, basi truncato, apice angustiore, con-
fertim granulato-punctato, pilis parvis flavis parce adsperso ;
elytris oblongo-subcordatis, suleato-punctatis, interstitiis conferte
granulatis, squamis ochraceis maculas adspersas, unam communem
in medio formantibus; corpore infra denudato; pedibus parce
pilosis. Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

I owe this, and many other species, to my indefatigable
correspondent Mr. Masters of Sydney.

MiISOPHRICE.

Rostrum modice elongatum, paulo arcuatum, basi crassius; scrobes
preemedians, infra rostrum currentes ; scapus longiusculus, apice
clavatus ; funiculus 6-articulatus, articulis primo et secundo paulo
longioribus, illo crassiore, ceteris turbinatis; clava valida, di-
stincta. Ocult magni, prominuli, rotundati. Prothoraa subcylin-
dricus, margine antico truncato, lobis ocularibus nullis. Scutellum
punctiforme. /ytra ovalia, prothorace manifeste latiora. Pedes
validi; femora in medio crassa, mutica; tébie flexuose; tarsi
triarticulati, articulo tertio dilatato, integro. Abdomen segmentis
tertio quartoque conjunctim secundo longioribus.

The six-jointed funicle, and tarsi without the claw-joint as
in Anoplus, are at once diagnostic of this genus. Lndalus
and Tanysphyrus, also belonging to this section of the sub-
family, have a six-jointed funicle, but the normal number of
tarsal joints.

Misophrice hispida.

M. oblongo-ovata, nigra, supra pedibusque setis longis erectis ejus-
dem coloris sat vage instructa; rostro apicem versus setis dece-
dentibus munito, in medio lineis duabus longitudinaliter impresso;
antennis nigris, subnitidis, clava breviter ovata; prothorace ob-
longo, antice paulo angustiore, basi parum bisinuato, pube nivea
adsperso; scutello angusto; elytris striato-punctatis, punctis sub-

Ann. & Mag. N. ITist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 8

94 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

quadratis approximatis, basi lateribusque plaga magna nivea e
squamulis condensatis ornatis ; pedibus squamositate alba indutis,
setis minoribus interjectis. Long. 1} lin.

Hab. South Australia.
Orpha persimilis.

O. subdepressa, picea, nitida, rarissime nivyeo-pilosula; ( 9 ) rostro
prothorace duplo longiore, subtiliter lineatim punctulato ; scapo
articuloque basali funiculi flavo-testaceis, ceeteris clavaque piceis,
sparse niveo-pilosis; prothorace subconico, utrinque rotundato,
sat confertim tenuiter punctulato, pone apicem constricto; scu-
tello semiorbiculari; elytris latitudine duplo longioribus, sub-
striatim punctatis, interstitiis planatis et impunctatis; corpore
infra pedibusque fuscis, sparse albo-pilosis ; unguiculis flavidis.
Long. 143-2 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

Very like O. flavicornis; but, besides the absence of pubes-
cence, that species has a much coarser punctation, and the
elytra strongly sulcate, with the intervals finely punctured ;
the coloration of the antenne is also different. In this species
the scrobes are not connivent beneath, the septum between
them passing distinctly to the throat; in O. flavicornis its
form is wedge-shaped, and it terminates at the middle of the
scrobes, which at that point become connivent.

PHRENOZEMIA.

Caput conicum, rostro continuatum. Oculi depressi, rotundati, a
prothorace distantes. ostrum cylindricum, modice elongatum, sat
validum, parum arcuatum ; scrobes preemediane, infra rostrum et
ad oculos currentes. Scapus oculum vix attingens ; funiculus 7-
articulatus, articulo primo crassiore, secundo longitudine sequali,
ceteris brevioribus, duobus ultimis turbinatis; clava distincta.
Prothorax subcylindricus, margine antico truncatus, basi vix bi-
sinuatus. Scutellum punctiforme. Hlytra oblonga, prothorace
multo latiora, humeris rotundata. Pedes mediocres; femora in
medio incrassata, mutica; tibiw flexuose; tarsi articulis tribus
basalibus brevibus, tertio vix dilatato, ultimo elongato ; wnguwi-
culi simplices. Abdomen segmentis tertio quartoque conjunctim
secundo brevioribus ; sutura prima arcuata.

In Lacordaire’s tabulation of his “ groupe Eugnomides,” one
of the five subdivisions of the Erirhinine, this genus would
be placed next to Ophthalmoborus. 'These tabulations are
generally of an artificial character ; yet it would be often diffi-
cult to suggest a better place for the genera than they offer.
Such is the case with Phrenozemia, as the rostrum and de-
pressed eyes.do not allow of an approximation to any genus
of the group. In the species described below the scales have

the Australian Curculionide. 95

a pearly lustre, those on the head are deeply hollowed out at
the base, giving the head itself the appearance of being closely
punctured. Hoplocneme, White (Voy. Erebus and Terror,
Entom. p. 14), without doubt belongs to this group, and is
closely allied to Stephanorhynchus of the same author. Mr.
White says, in regard to its affinity, that “ it is not far removed
from Orchestes.”

Phrenozemia lyprovdes.

P, oblonga, nigra, pedibus rufo-testaceis, squamulis griseo-albis
omnino dense tecta, squamulis piliformibus raro adspersa; rostro,
apice excepto, toto squamuloso, in medio supra lineis tribus ele-
vatis instructo; antennis rufo-testaceis, sparse niveo-pilosis, pro-
thorace latitudine paulo longiore, utrinque leviter rotundato,
punctis plurimis rude impresso; elytris latitudine plus duplo
longioribus, striato-punctatis, interstitiis parum convexis, quarto
quintoque versus apicem tuberculo parvo instructis, apice rotun-
datis ; tarsis articulo ultimo rufo-testaceo, apice unguiculisque
nigris. Long. 12 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.
Belus centralis. Pl. I. fig. 4.

B. linearis, elongatus, fuscus, supra confertim granulatus, impunc-
tatus ; prothorace utrinque vittis duabus, elytrisque macula com-
muni in medio, e pilis condensatis ochraceis formatis, notatis;
antennis articulis duobus basalibus piceis, nitidis (primo quam
secundo vix duplo longiore), ceteris pallidioribus ; elytris apice
productis, lateribus aliquando maculatim ochraceo-pilosis; cor-
pore infra pedibusque albido pilosis. Long. 84 lin. (rostr. incl.).

Hab. South Australia.

This species has the outline of B. bidentatus, but differs in
the sculpture, and in having a central spot common to both
elytra.

Myrmacicelus exsertus.

M. oblongo-ovatus, ater, nitidus; rostro sat sparse subtiliter punc-
tulato ; prothorace subtilissime vage punctulato ; elytris impune-
tatis; tarsis articulo basali antice rotundato, ultimo a precedente
distincto et paulo exserto. Long. 2 lin. (rostr. inel.).

Hab. West Australia.

My specimens of this Curculionid are a little larger than
M. formicarius, Chevr., and the punctation, weak as it is, is
decidedly stronger; but it differs essentially in not having the
claw-joint embayed as it were between the lobes of the pre-
ceding one, so as to give the tarsus the appearance of being
three-jointed only, as in formicarius. Guérin has given a

S*

96 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

figure of the latter in the ‘ Voyage de la Coquille,’ Entom.
pl. 6. fig. 7.
Mecuivs.

Caput hemisphericum; rostrum tenue, arcuatum; scrobes ante-
median, infra rostrum currentes. Scapus oculum attingens ;
funiculus 7-articulatus, articulo primo crassiore; clava adnata,
ovata. Oculi rotundati, laterales, grosse granulati. Prothorax
breviter subconicus, apice productus, lobis ocularibus distinctis.
Elytra cordata, prothorace multo latiora. Femora valida, lon-
giuscula, infra dentata; tibee breves, flexuose, sulcate; tarsi
breviusculi. Rima pectoralis usque ad marginem posteriorem
metasterni extensa. Abdomen segmentis duobus basalibus am-
pliatis; sutura prima distincta.

The only exponent of this genus has much the habit of
Melanterius porcatus, Er.; but, the metasternum entering
into the formation of the pectoral canal, the genus must be re-
ferred to the neighbourhood of Mecistocerus and Aidemonus*,
although differing from both in the characters of the antenna,
legs, sculpture, and in the pectoral canal passing behind the in-
termediate coxe.

Mechius anaglyptus.

M. breviter ovatus, convexus, nitide niger; capite crebre punctato ;
rostro prothoraci longitudine «quali, in medio fere obsolete cari-
nato; antennis fulvo-testaceis ; funiculo articulo secundo primo
longiore; reliquis brevibus, gradatim magis transversis; protho-
race antice paulo tubulato, utrinque rotundato, basi bisinuato,
confertim punctato, punctis nonnullis confluentibus, totis in fundo
squamulam minutam albam gerentibus ; scutello angusto; elytris
profunde late sulcatis, sulcis fortiter foveatis, interstitiis carinatis
et utrinque uniseriatim punctulatis; abdomine segmentis duobus
basalibus, femoribusque grosse punctatis, punctis unisquamigeris ;
tibiis basi sat valde arcuatis, sulcis uniseriatim albo-setosis ; tarsis
extus unguiculisque rufescentibus. Long. 23 lin.

Tlab. Wide Bay.
AGRIOCH ATA.

Caput parum exsertum; rostrum yalidum, equilatum, arcuatum ;
scrobes premedianse, oblique, infra rostrum exeuntes. Scapus
oculum haud attingens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis tribus
ultimis turbinatis; clava conica, distincta. Oculi sat magni,
ovati, laterales. Prothorax transversus, basi rotundatus, lobis
ocularibus nullis. Hlytra ampla, prothorace multo latiora. Pecdes

* Edemonus, Schonherr, not Lacordaire; the former author expressly
states 44. eminentepunctatus to be the type; Lacordaire describes the
genus from 4, Erichsoni: the two species are not congeneric, as Lacor-
daire himself states; the latter, therefore, should receive a new generic
name.

the Australian Curculionide. 97

mediocres ; femora crassa, mutica; tébiew recte, apice haud unci-
nate vel mucronate ; tarsi articulis primo secundoque late trian-
gularibus, tertio fortiter bilobo; wnguiculi liberi. Cow antice
haud contigue. Pectus longitudinaliter canaliculatum. Meso-
sternum angustum, depressum. Metasternwm breve. Abdomen
segmentis duobus basalibus amplis.

The character of the pectoral canal places this genus in
Lacordaire’s arrangement with his “ sows-tribw Ithyporides,”’
but not in the “ groupe” of that name, nor in any of the re-
maining six into which he has divided his “ sous-tribu.” It
is, however, questionable whether he would have not placed
it in the Erirhinine, like Awbeonymus, which also has a pec-
toral canal. In a family so difficult to classify as the Cureu-
lionidee, I think it would be better to adhere more strictly to
characters, even if it should in some cases lead us away from an
apparently more natural arrangement. The species described
below is, from its hairiness and coloration, not unlike Ocladius
variabilis, Ol., after which genus I am content for the present
to place it.

Agriocheta crinita. PI. I. fig. 2.

A, late ovata, modice convexa, nigra, supra pilis longis nigris, non-
nullis albis, vestita ; rostro capite duplo longiore, sat sparse piloso ;
antennis ferrugineis ; scapo ab oculo sat longe terminato ; funiculo
articulis duobus basalibus eequalibus, tertio praecedente fere duplo
breviore ; prothorace antice utrinque rotundato, postice parallelo,
lateribus dense niveo-pilosis ; scutello subrotundato ; elytris cor-
dato-ovatis, striato-punctatis, fasciis duabus interruptis, antica
arcuata ante medium sita, e pilis densis niveis formatis, ornatis ;
corpore infra pedibusque sat sparse longe niveo-pilosis. Long.
3 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Rockhampton).

Tragopus plagiatus. Pl. I. fig. 7.

T. oblongus, utrinque cylindrico-conicus, fuscus, parce silaceo-
squamosus ; capite rostroque sat dense omnino squamosis; antennis
piceis ; funiculo articulis duobus basalibus equalibus, tertio sub-
conico, precedentis dimidia longitudine ; oculis tenuiter granu-
latis ; prothorace conico, utrinque perparum rotundato, basi vix
bisinuato ; elytris basi prothorace vix latioribus, postice gradatim
parum latioribus, supra valde convexis, fere obsolete foveatis,
transversim interrupte undulato-granulatis, singulis plagis duabus
pallidioribus, una ante alteram fere obsoletam pone medium, no-
tatis; corpore infra nigra maculis silaceis lateraliter notato ;
femoribus subtus dente minuto armatis, posticis abdomen haud
superantibus. Long. 6 lin.

flab. Queensland.

98 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

The outline of this species is somewhat different from that of
T. asper and its congeners. One of the latter from Java, and
a very near ally, has coarsely facetted eyes. A good generic
character may be found occasionally to be only of specific
value.

Imaliodes nodulosus.

1. ovatus, niger, squamulis griseis suberectis sat dense tectus ; rostro
capite fere duplo longiore; antennis piceis; funiculo articulis
duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus, tertio quartoque con-
junctim precedente brevioribus; prothorace utrinque fortiter
rotundato, antice valde constricto; scutello transverso; elytris
breviter ovatis, sulcato-punctatis, interstitiis, posticis exceptis,
nodis elevatis 2-4 singulatim munitis ; femoribus modice incras-
satis, auticis dente minuto instructis; tarsis articulo ultimo sub-
testaceo, sparse piloso. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Rockhampton.

This species differs from its two congeners in having a
small but distinct scutellum, and in its nodulose elytra.

DRASSICUS.

Caput inter oculos subplanatum ; rostrum mediocre, validum ; scrobes
prémediane, laterales, Scapus breviusculus, oculum haud attin-
gens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis duobus basalibus longiori-
bus, ceteris subturbinatis ; clava distincta. Prothorax subconicus,
apice productus, utrinque paulo rotundatus, basi truncatus vel
perparum bisinuatus, lobis ocularibus distinctis. Hlytra ovata,
basi prothorace haud latiora, humeris nullis. Pedes validi;
femora modice crassa, postica brevia ; tbiw breves, rect ; tarsi
breves, articulo tertio late bilobo ; wnguzculi liberi. Rima pecto-
ralis pone coxas anticas terminata, apice fornicata. Abdomen
segmento secundo amplo.

This genus differs from Tragopus in its short legs and thick
femora, and from Jmaliodes in the elytra not projecting beyond
the prothorax at the base.

Drassicus nigricornis. Pl. I. fig. 3.

D, ovatus, convexus, niger, squamis griseis sat dense omnino tectus,
aliis nigris erectis adspersus; rostro capite plus duplo longiore,
versus apicem evidenter latiore ; antennis piceo-nigris ; funiculo
articulis duobus basalibus equalibus, reliquis conjunctim fere
longioribus ; prothorace in medio rotundato, antice cito, postice
gradatim paulo angustiore, basi perparum bisinuato, lobis ocula-
ribus prominulis ; elytris orbiculato-ovatis, seriatim grosse punc-
tatis, punctis plerumque squama antice laxe instructis ; femoribus
anticis dente minuto armatis. Long. 34 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

the Australian Curculionide. 99

Drassicus tllotus.

D. precedenti similis, sed squamositate crustacea sculpturam occul-
tante supra tectus; articulo secundo funiculi quam primo. evi-
denter longiore; prothorace apice magis producto, pone medium
lateribus parallelis; corpore infra pedibusque sat dense griseo-
squamosis ; femoribus anticis dente acuto armatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

When the squamosity is removed, the punctation on the
prothorax is seen to be nearly obsolete; on the elytra it con-
sists of large, rather closely set fovez.

AGENOPUS.

Poroptero affinis, sed tarsis linearibus, infra nudis, sparse setosulo-
marginatis, articulo tertio haud bilobo.

The only other genus among the allies of Poropterus with
linear tarsi is Mormosintes ; but in that genus they are hispid
or spongy beneath, as in Poropterus, and the femora are linear,
and the eyes finely facetted. The species described below is
exceedingly like Poropterus musculus ; but, besides the generic
differences, the base of the prothorax and the proportional
sizes of the three intermediate abdominal segments will, cnter
alia, at once distinguish it.

Agenopus agricola.

A, ovatus, supra depressus, niger, indumento fusco, squamulis erectis
setulisque raris nigris interjectis, indutus; rostro valido, sat bre-
viusculo, rude squamoso; antennis subpiceis, funiculo articulis
duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus (primo crassiore), reliquis
subturbinatis; prothorace latitudine paulo longiore, apice paulo
producto, antice constricto, deinde rotundato, lateribus gradatim
parum angustiore, basi fortiter bisinuato, lobis ocularibus distinctis,
supra ineequali, fere obsolete foveato; elytris supra sat confertim
leviter foveatis, basi circa scutellum elevatis, lateribus subparal-
lelis, declivitate perparum latioribus, deinde sat abrupte angus-
tioribus, apice late rotundatis, humeris paulo prominulis ; corpore
infra pedibusque remote rude punctato-squamigeris; abdomine
segmento secundo duobus sequentibus conjunctim breviore ; tibiis
brevibus. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.
Nechyrus incomptus. Pl. I. fig. 9.

JV. ovatus, supra depressus, niger, squamis erectis, plerumque fasci-
culatis, concoloribus vel fuscis, nonnullis griseis, adspersus ; capite
parvo; rostro prothorace vix breviore, dimidio apicali nitido,
lateraliter sulcato, remote tenuiter punctulato; antennis piceis ;
scapo sat breviusculo, gradatim crassiore ; funiculo articulis duo-

100 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

bus basalibus sequalibus, reliquis subturbinatis; clava breviter
ovata; prothorace utrinque usque ad medium gradatim latiore,
deinde lateribus parallelis, apice producto, supra basin versus
laté leviter excavato; scutello semiorbiculari; elytris oblongo-
cordatis, rude remote punctatis, humeris modice prominulis, apice
rotundatis, singulis tuberculis fasciculatis sex biseriatim obsitis ;
corpore infra remote punctato, punctis in fundo squamam griseam
gerentibus ; pedibus squamis elongatis asperrime vestitis; tibiis
minus elongatis, rude squamosis. Long, 4-5 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

Near the Ceram N. porcatus, which has also shorter tibiz,
but, ¢nter alia, with scattered foveate punctures on the elytra,
instead of their being sulcate-punctured. This species has a
resemblance to some species of Poropterus, from which genus,
however, Nechyrus is known by the pectoral canal open at the
apex and extending to the posterior part of the intermediate
cox; from Cnemargus, to which I think it is most nearly
allied among the genera known to Lacordaire, it is at once
differentiated by its straight tibie.

Idotasia cequalis.

J, elliptica, nigra, nitida; rostro arcuato, basi fronteque lineis lon-
gitudinalibus acute elevatis; antennis piceis ; oculis tenui-granu-
latis ; prothorace sat fortiter vage punctulato, punctis squama
nivea instructis ; elytris subtilissime striato-punctulatis ; femoribus
parum incrassatis, muticis, vage lineatim albo-squamulosis; tibiis
suleatis, rectis, posticis intus subflexuosis. Long. 1% lin.

Hab. Cape York; Rockhampton.

Near the Moluccan J. elliptica, but the prothorax less
strongly and closely punctured, and the femora lineated but
not toothed.

Idotasia evanida.

I. elliptica, nigra, nitida; rostro arcuato, basi fronteque lineis lon-
gitudinalibus elevatis ; antennis piceis; oculis tenui-granulatis ;
prothorace sat tenuiter vage punctulato, punctis squamula minu-
tissima instructis ; elytris subtilissime striatis, vix punctulatis ;
femoribus haud incrassatis, sulcato-lineatis, muticis; tibiis sulca-
tis, rectis. Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Wide Bay).

Prothorax and elytra less strongly punctured than in the
preceding, the latter with the least possible vestiges of punc-
tuation, and the femora nearly linear; the posterior femora in
this and its congeners, as well as in allied genera, have the
upper margin densely covered with snowy-white scales. A
figure of Jdotasia nasuta is given in this Magazine, ser. 4.

Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina. 101

vol. vii. pl. 16. fig. 2, which, the femora excepted, will give a
good idea of the two species here described.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. Sosytelus lobatus; 1 a, side view of the head.
Fig. 2. Agriocheta crinita; 2a, side view of the head.
Fig. 3. Drassicus nigricornis; 3 a, side view of the head.
tg. 4. Belus centralis.
Fig. 5. Acherres mamillatus; 5 a, side view of the head.
Fig. 6. Oditesus indutus ; 6 a, side view of the head.
"g. 7. Tragopus plagiatus.
Fig. 8. Aidriodes fastigiatus ; 8 a, side view of the head.
Fig. 9. Nechyrus incomptus.
Fiig.10. Side view of the head of Misophrice hispida; 10a, tarsus of the

same.
Fig. 11. Side view of the head of Nechyrus incomptus *.
Fig. 12. » - yy Oditesus buceros.
Fig. 15. “ ns 9 Amorphorhinus australis, for comparison.
Fig. 14. a = y <Acantholophus Marshami, ditto.

Fig. 15. “- ay », Luomus insculptus, ditto.

Fig. 16. Upper view of the head of Phrenozemia lyproides.

Fig. 17. Side view of the head of Agenopus agricola.

Fig. 18. Fore leg of Gnochroma rubeta.

Fig. 19. Tarsus of Myrmacicelus exsertus; 19 a, tarsus of M. formicarius,
for comparison.

Fig. 20. Fore tarsus and part of tibia of Sosytelus lobatus.

Fig. 21. Fore tarsus and part of tibia of Agenopus agricola (unfortunately
reversed),

XIU1.—Deseription, with Illustrations, of a new Species of
Aplysina from the N.W. Coast of Spain. By H. J. Carter,
HR; Occ.

[Plate VIL]

THERE is a little family of purely horny sponges (that is,
aspiculous, and without foreign objects in the core of the homy
fibre) in which there are as yet only two genera mentioned,
viz. Aplysina and Luffaria. For this family I propose,the
name of “ Aplysinide,” after Aristotle’s term for certain
sponges which he has described as follows :—

“There is also another species, called Aplysia (amducia),
because it cannot be washed. This has very large passages ;
but the other parts of the substance are quite compact. When
cut open it is more compact and smooth than the sponge, and
the whole is like a lung; of all the sponges this one is con-
fessed to have the most sensation and to be the most enduring.
They are plainly seen in the sea near the sponges; for the

* The lateral groove below the insertion of the scape, in a line with

the scrobe, is made rather too much like the scrobe itself by the en-
2raver.

102. - Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

other sponges are white as the mud settles down upon them,
but these are always black.” (Hist. An., trans. by R.
Cresgwell, Bk. V. chap. xiv., Arist. V. xvi. 10.)

How far Aristotle meant the sponges now called “Aply-
sine,” or whether he included others among them under the
general name of “Aplysia,” it would be waste of time to
discuss. Suflice it, therefore, to state that the description comes
very near to the Aplysine of the Adriatic Sea at the present
day, and that the name has thus been well chosen for such
sponges.

On referring to Schmidt’s invaluable work on the Sponges
of the Adriatic Sea (1862, p. 25), we may there find that
Nardo, in 1834 (‘Isis’), first adopted the term “<Aplysine”’
(originally named by him “‘Aplysie”’) for certain sponges, one
of which he called A. aérophoba, and that Schmidt, in 1862,
elucidated this species, in the publication to which I have just
alluded, both by description and illustration—that is to say,
that he added the sine gud non for the identification of Aply-
sina, viz. the character of the fibre of which the skeleton is
composed. So far, then, Schmidt has established this genus.

Now as regards that of Luffaria, which Schmidt has also
accepted (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 80, 1870) :—

In 1845 (Annals, vol. xvi. p. 403) Dr. Bowerbank de-
scribed a sponge from the West Indies, which had been pre-
sented to him by Dr. Veronge, as follows: “ This specimen
is in the form of a cluster of cylindrical tubes about twelve
inches in height and two in diameter, the thickness of the
tube being about half an inch’”—the skeleton of which is
stated at the commencement of the description to be “ com-
posed of a network of keratose fibres inosculating in every
direction without order. Fibre cylindrical, continuously fistular,
without spicula. Cavity of the fibre simple.”

No reference is made by Dr. Bowerbank to any previous
authority—although one of the highest, viz. Esper, had figured
this* sponge in three plates successively in 1794 (Pflanzen-
thiere, tab. xx., xxi., and xxi. a), as confirmed by Dr. Ehlers
in 1870 in his Synonymy of the Esperian Collection at the
Museum of the University of Erlangen, wherein he identifies
Esper’s Spongia fistularis (that is, the one figured in the above
mentioned plates) with the Luffaria jfistularis of De Fonbressin
and Michelotti, given in their descriptions and illustrations of
the sponges of the Caribbean Sea (Natuurk. Verh. Holland.
Maat. Wet. te Haarlem, vol. xxi. 1864); the latter authors
having already, in their description and figure of this species
(op. cit. p. 60, pl. 10. fig. 2), come to the same conclusion.

Dr. Bowerbank, it is true, named the species “ Verongia,”

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 103

after Dr. Veronge, who gave him the specimen ; and the fibre
is well characterized by Lens Aldous’s figure (Annals, pl. 13.
fig. 7, 1. c.), though much better, by the same artist, in
Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘ British Spongiadee’ (pl. 13. fig. 266, 1864) ;
and so far the priority of ‘‘ naming” is in tavour of Dr,
Bowerbank. But when we find Dr. Bowerbank in the fol-
lowing page identifying his “Verongia” in a fossilized state
with the conferva-like glauconite ‘‘in the green agates, mis-
called in commerce jaspers, from India” (which, to my certain
knowledge, come from geodes in the decomposed trap of
Western India), one cannot help being struck by the inferiority
of mental power on the one hand and the sharp-sightedness
on the other—much after the fable of the shoemaker who rose
greatly in the estimation of the sculptor when he pointed out
the absence of the shoe-string in his statue, but sunk lamen-
tably in it afterwards when he made observations on the
higher art.

So much for Dr. Bowerbank’s part in the matter. Now
let us direct our attention to the work of De Fonbressin and
Michelotti (op. cit.), who collected the sponges of the Carib-
bean Sea on the spot, and described six species, with modest
references to all those who seemed to have noticed the like
before them—giving to the whole the generic name of “ Luf-
faria,” drawn from the great resemblance of the horny skeleton
of these sponges to the fibrous mass of a species of the cucur-
bitacean genus Luffa which remains after the skin and soft
parts have rotted away, and which they also state to be used
in the “ colonies” of the West Indies, where real sponges are
not at hand. Further, we find that, recognizing the whole
bearing of the family generally towards the rest of the Spon-
giade, elementarily (that is in the structure of the fibre) as
well as en masse, they finally placed the genus in the third
tribe of their second family of sponges, under the designation
of “‘ Spongice homogene.”

Is it extraordinary, then, after contrasting thus the value of
the contributions to our knowledge of this genus, respectively
named by Dr. Bowerbank and the authors last mentioned, that
we should find Schmidt (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 30)
ignore the former altogether, and accept the name of “ Luf-
faria,” given to this genus by De Fonbressin and Michelotti ?
nor resting here, but also synonymizing Dr. Bowerbank’s
Verongia zetlandica, not with Luffaria (that is, Dr. Veronge’s
West-Indian sponge above quoted), but with his (Schmidt’s)
Cacospongia, which has a totally different fibre, the cavity of
which, instead of being simple, is charged more or less with
foreign objects, 7. e. grains of sand and fragments of spicules.

104. Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

I might here add too, as regards sponges hitherto considered
to have a skeleton possessed of simple, solid fibre only (that is,
without core of any kind), that I very much doubt if there be
many such, since, in the softest officinal sponge, to say nothing
of the coarser kind, it is hardly possible to pinch out the
minute portion which is required for microscopic examination
without finding in it a filament also possessed of an axis
containing fragments of spicules and grains of sand. It is
true that the solid fibre is greatly in excess of this, and that
the softest sponges have most of it; but this does not
release us from the necessity of grouping these sponges among
the Hirciniad, wherein the character of the fibre is to possess
an axis formed more or less of the fragments of spicules, minute
grains of sand, and other foreign objects of the like nature.

While the Aplysine have as yet been chiefly found in and
about the Mediterranean Sea, the Luffariw appear to have come
almost exclusively from the West Indies and their neigh-
bouring seas.

In Dr. Schmidt’s work on the Sponges of the Adriatic
Sea, to which I have already referred, based on the exami-
nation of specimens which he himself dredged up, described
with the power of a professor of zoology, and illustrated with
great ability by skilful naturalists, two species of Aplysine
are mentioned, viz. A. aérophoba, which is Nardo’s name and
form, and A. carnosa, which is Dr. Schmidt’s new species.
Good specimens of the former were sent to the British Museum
by Dr. Schmidt, where they now represent the type specimen
of this species; and the same species would appear to exist in
the Gulf of Florida (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 30, pl. 3.
fig. 16) ; while De Fonbressin and Michelotti, as before stated,
give six species of Luffaria (op. et loc. cit.), of which there
is also an abundance of very fime specimens in the British
Museum.

It is, however, with the former genus, and not with the
latter, that we are here chiefly concerned, as we have to add
a new locality to A. carnosa and a new species to the genus,
from specimens dredged up by W. Saville Kent, Ksq., of the
British Museum, in Vigo Bay, while on board the yacht
‘Norna,’ in 1870, and now handed over with the rest of his
valuable collection to the British Museum.

To Myr. Kent, therefore, we are indebted for the new spe-
cies of Aplysina which I am about to describe under the
designation of “ corneostellata,” on account of the skeleton
chietly consisting of horny stellates; and the specimens have
been so successfully preserved in spirit, that [ shall not only
be able to describe the ova with which they happen to be

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 105

charged, but also the spongozoa which now and then appear in
groups with portions of the sponge placed under the microscope
for examination (as may be seen by reference to Pl. VIL.
fig. 12), pointing out the interesting fact that the kerataceous
sponges possess the same kind of spongozoon as the rest.

Aplysina corneostellata, n. sp. Pl. VII. fig. 1.

Sessile, spreading, massive, rising into short lobes terminated
by mammitorm conical extremities, each bearing a large vent
(fig. 1, 6 6; 2, 6). Colour pinkish violet or flesh-colour.
Surface smooth, minutely aculeated, each aculeation (fig. 2, a)
terminated by the projection of a single horny hair-like fila-
ment (fig. 3,a). Internal structure cancellous, fleshy, permeated
by branched systems of excretory canals, which finally end
in the large vents at the summits of the mammiform eminences
respectively ; the whole supported on a horny skeleton com-
posed of 5-G-rayed stelliform structures (fig. 4, ¢cecc), one
arm of which, when near the surface, projects through an
aculeation (fig. 3, ac), and the rest, where they are in contact
with the rays of neighbouring stellates, united to the latter by
a thin expansion of transparent horny matter (fig. 4, ddd),
which thus, altogether, forms a continuous skeleton supported
or. a few stem-like filaments at the base, which are united to
the object on which the sponge may be growing (fig. 4, bd).
Horny filament hollow, the core consisting of fine granular
matter only, with here and there parabolical wave-like lines,
whose convexities are directed towards the end of the filament
(figs. 5 & 6); diameter of the core much exceeding the thick-
ness of the horny tube (fig. 7).

Dermal structure consisting of a thin transparent layer of
sarcode (fig. 3, ¢; 9, a a), in which the pores may be observed
by the aid of a microscope to be situated in variable plurality
over the interstices of a subjacent network (fig. 8, a, 6; 9, c)
composed of elongated fusiform granuliferous cells adhering
together in a cord-like form (fig. 10, 6), which contrasts strongly
with the globular form of the granuliferous cell in the overlying
dermal sarcode (fig. 11); both structures covering the whole
of the sponge up to the brink of the vents, and by their transpa-
rency exposing the cavities of the cancellous structure beneath,
whose dark round cavities thus: appear like so many minor
vents opening upon the surface generally.

Body charged with spherical ova (fig. 4, 9 gg) of a deeper
colour than the rest of the substance, presenting on pressure
under the microscope a homogeneous, transparent, capsular
envelope, within which is a more delicate one filled with nucle-
ated granuliferous cells suspended apparently in a grumous

106 Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

dark brown-red coloured plasma (fig. 13), in which may also
be observed a few colourless, semiopaque, albuminoid concre-.
tionary masses, each of which, too, seems to be in a cell.

The spongozoa may now and then be also observed in
ageregated groups with the rostrum and cilium extended,
together with two ear-like projections, one on each side of the
cilium, indicative of the remains of the “ collar” (fig. 12).

Size of specimen varying with that over which the sponge
may be growing, the one figured about 1 inch long by half
an inch thick ; horny stellates about 1-15th, ova about 1-120th,
and spongozoon about 1-3000th of an inch in diameter re-
spectively.

Hab. Marine, growing over the shells of living mussels
(Modiola albicosta ?) and on the empty shells of Solen.

Loc. Cies Islands, Vigo Bay (W. 8. Kent, Esq.).

Obs. The chief distinguishing character of this species is
the stellate form assumed by the filaments of the horny
skeleton. It also differs from the specimen of A. carnosa
dredged up by Mr. Kent in the same locality in the followmg
particulars. A. carnosa is more fleshy, solid, and smooth, has
no part of the horny skeleton projecting through the aculeations
or any other part of the surface ; no appearance of holes or
small vents on the surface, from the dermal sarcode being too
thick and opaque to allow the cavities of the cancellous or
areolated structure beneath to be seen through it ; and, for the
same reason, here and there, where the surface is reticulated,
the reticulations are more like superficial rugee; the mammi-
form projections are flattened, and the vents sunk in the centre
instead of being at the end of conical eminences as in A. cor-
neostellata. In short, altogether A. carnosa is a coarser form
with a dark violet colour and opaque appearance.

I have not seen a portion of Luffaria that has been preserved
in the wet state; but we learn from De Fonbressin and
Michelotti (p. 58, op. cét.) that they are all black, brown, or
yellow—and when dry all black, which is the case with those
in the British Museum on which the sarcode still remains.
The sarcode is black, or, rather, blue-black now, more like the
colour of ink, and the colour of the horny fibre more or less
brown or yellow. When the latter is transparent and held
between the eye and the light, it presents an amber-like ap-
pearance with a whitish core in the interior, round like the
fibre, but very much less in diameter than the thickness even
of the wall of the fibre.

The opposite of the latter is the case with the Aplysine
(see fig. 7); and herein, together with their sessile spreading
growth and comparatively diminutive size, they contrast

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 107

greatly with the comparatively gigantic tubular forms of Luf-
Jaria (whence the original designation of “ fistularis””), which,
as yet, have only been found in the seas between the two
Americas.

I have stated that the network (figs. 3 & 8) subjacent to the
dermal sarcode in A. corneostellata “is composed of elongated
fusiform granuliferous cells aggregated together in a cord-
like form” (fig. 10, 6) ; but this assertion, so far as the indi-
viduality of the cells is concerned, rests on the conjecture that
each elongated group of granules represents a distinct sponge-
cell. Whether, however, the cord-like form is produced by
the mere contact of these cells, or they are thus united by an
intervening sarcode, I know of no means to determine.
Certain it is that, if they possess the same polymorphic power
as the soft parts of the sponge generally, this network must
afford considerable support to the whole structure, and thus
also yield to that of the dermal sarcode about it, whose poly-
morphic power we know to be such in Spongilla that it can
extemporize and close pores in its substance wherever and
whenever requisite.

The ova, so far as my examination extended (and I examined
many), did not appear to have gone beyond cell-multiplication;
that is to say, none presented rudiments of the horny structure
like unto the development of spicules in the ova of the spicu-
liferous sponges at this period. What the colourless albu-
minoid concretions may be which I have not figured I am not
able even to conjecture.

The spongozoa presented nothing further than the passive
form above described.

Sudden death, by immersion in a preservative fluid during
active life, would seem more calculated to cause many poly-
morphic parts of the sponge to retain their active forms than
gradual death. At the same time it cannot be ignored that
the pores in the dermal sarcode, which is as polymorphic as
any other part of the sponge, do appear to be retained under
any circumstances, as if, instead of being merely extempo-
raneous, they had been established holes endowed with a
sphinctral power of contraction or dilatation as required.

As regards increase of the horny element of the skeleton
during the general growth of the sponge, a cell was often
observed to be fixed to the side of a ray of one of the stellates
by a transparent film of a horny nature, apparently extended
over it from the surface of the ray itself (fig. 4,e; 5,c). In
some instances this cell was observed to have undergone in-
crease in size, elongation, and the addition of concentric horny
layers to its circumference (fig. 5, d) ; while in others it was

108 Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

observed to have put out several points or buds, as if about to
grow into a stellate (e).

On the other hand, a ray was sometimes observed to present
a young branch(fig. 6, c) whose medullary or central cavity was
in continuation with that of the ray on which it was situated.

Occasionally a grain of sand (fig. 4, f) was seen to be
attached to a horny filament after the manner of the cell, and
some of the stem-like filaments towards their base of attach-
ment had a grain or two of sand in their centre. But these
must be regarded as accidental occurrences; for the structure
generally is not only devoid of proper spicules (that is, of
spicules formed by the sponge itself), but the cavity of the
horny fibre is equally devoid of grains of sand, fragments
of spicules, or any other of the minute objects which are so
characteristic of that in the Hirciniade.

The subdermal network appears to be common to most of
the kerataceous sponges, attaching to itself through the dermal
sarcode, in some of the Hircinic, a number of minute objects,
so as to present a white lacework between the aculeations,
which is visible to the naked eye, and which, when mounted
in Canada balsam and viewed with a microscope, resolves
itself into an infinite variety of entire spicules, both siliceous
and calcareous, together with fragments of the same and grains
of sand—altogether forming a most inviting, instructive, and
interesting study to the spongologist. This lacework is par-
ticularly well developed in many of the great Hircinia at the
British Museum which have been collected from the West-
Indian seas and the coast of Southern Australia, as well as in
the little specimen of H. variabilis from the Adriatic Sea,
presented by Dr. Schmidt. In some of the kerataceous sponges
the network is horny, in the spiculiferous sponges spiculi-
ferous ; in short, more or less modified in all, it supports the
dermal sarcode, in which the pores, in variable plurality, find
themselves conveniently placed opposite the interstices. Thus
the two combined form the pore-structure, which is often as
beautiful as it is characteristic of the species.

I would also here add, with reference to the parasites of
sponges, that on one of the specimens of Aplysina corneo-
stellata are a number of minute isolated Ascidians attached to
the dermal sarcode, which, from their dark red colour, looking
like so many blood-red points, appear to have derived this tint
in some way from the colouring-matter of the Aplysina on
which they were growing, as there is a portion of an Hsperia
in the same collection, and dredged up from the same locality,
on which there is an equal amount of the same species of
Ascidians similarly situated, but without any colour at all, or,

From the N.W. Coast of Spain. 109

at all events, any more than that of the Hsperia on which
they were growing, which merely presents the grey tint of
colourless sarcode. The granuliferous cells represented in the
dermal sarcode of fig. 9 might also well stand for the appear-
ance and relative size of these Ascidians.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Aplysina corneostellata, n. sp., nat. size, growing on the shell of

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

4,

a living mussel (Modiola albicosta ?) ; colour pink-violet or flesh-
colour: a, shell; 60, vents.

. The same, one of the mammiform eminences, magnified, to show

the position of the vents and genera) character of the aculeated
surface: a,raysof horny stellates projecting beyond the summits
of the aculeations; 6, vent, showing its division into smaller vents
within.

. The same, single ray, still more magnified, to show the manner in

which the dermal sarcode hanging upon it tent-like forms the
aculeation: aa, ray; 6, centre of horny stellate; ¢ c, subdermal
reticulated structure covered by the transparent dermal sarcode.

The same, corneo-stellate fibre and ova, magnitied 15 diameters :
a, foreign object on which the stem-like filament (0 0b) is
erowing ; cc ccc, corneo-stellates; ddd, thin expansions of
horny matter uniting the rays together; e, cell enclosed under
an expansion of horny matter; f, grain of sand enclosed under
an expansion of horny matter; gg g, ova.

. The same, portion of ray of stellate, much magnified : a, cortical or

horny tube; 6, core or interior presenting parabolical wave-like
lines, with their convexities directed towards the free extremity
of the ray; c, cell enclosed under a thin expansion of horny
matter; d, the same, enlarged and elongated, with the addition
of concentric horny layers round the cell, which now becomes
the core; e, the same, putting forth five buds, corresponding
with the number of rays in the stellate. Diagrammatic.

. The same, extremity of ray, much magnified, to show the com-

mencement of a branch whose core is connected with that of
the ray: a, cortical or horny tube; ), core; c, branch; d, thin
expansion of horny matter covering the branch.

. The same, piece of horny fibre, still more but proportionately

magnified, to show the relative thicknesses of the core and cor-
tical tube, also that the latter is formed of layers: a, cortical
tube ; 6, core.

. The same, portion of the dermal surface, magnified, showing :—a,

the subdermal reticular structure ; 6, the interstices in which the
pores are situated.

. The same, a single interstice, much magnified, and partly covered

by the dermal sarcode in which the pores are seen and situated :
aa, dermal sarcode, apparently homogeneous, charged more or
less with globular granuliferous cells, also bearing (66) the
pores ; c, interstice or mesh of the subdermal reticulated structure
or network.

10. The same, portion of the subdermal reticulated structure, greatly

magnified, to show that it is composed of elongated fusiform
eranuliferous cells united into the form of acord: aa, cord;
6, elongated groups of granules representing elongated fusi-
form sponge-cells.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 8)

110 Mr. H. J. Carter on two new Sponges

Fig. 11. The same, form of the globular granuliferous cells of the dermal
sarcode, to contrast with the elongated forms in fig. 10.

Fig. 12. The same, three spongozoa, much magnified, each about 1-3000th
inch in diameter.

Fig. 13. The same, ovum much magnified, showing :—a, capsule ; ), ovi-
cell filled with nucleated granuliferous cellules suspended in a
dark red grumous matter.

XIV.—Descriptions of two new Sponges from the Philippine
Islands. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c.

THE two following Sponges, obtained at Cebu, one of the
Philippine Islands, by Dr. A. B. Meyer, and now the property of
the British Museum, are herewith described at the request of
Dr. J. E. Gray, pending their further description and future
illustration elsewhere.

1. Meyerina (nov. gen.) claviformis, Gray.

Specific character.—Sarco-spiculous. General form long,
conical, cucumber-like, slightly bent upon itself. Colour now
(that is in its dried state) light sponge-yellow. Cylindrical
at the base, where the yellow colour ceases, and the structure
is extended by bundles of long, colourless, glassy spicules,
which were continued downwards for several inches into the
sandy mud in which the sponge grew, while they pass upwards
in an oblique network, longitudinally, to the middle of the
body, whence they are continued on, by repetition, to terminate
at the apex in short naked tufts round the cloacal orifice of
the sponge, like those at the root, to which they thus bear a
miniature resemblance. Surface even towards the base, be-
coming angular in the middle third by the projection of long
ridges, which, uniting longitudinally, leave lozenge-shaped
intervals as they gradually subside towards the apex. Vents
chiefly on the ridges, in large circular network, and here and
there in the intervals, which, on the other hand, are occupied
by a small rectangular network, in the interstices of which are
the pores. Internal structure rigid, reticulate, largely canalo-
areolar, especially towards the surface, interwoven with the
longitudinal spicules before mentioned, and surrounding a long,
fusiform cloacal cavity, which commences about four inches
from the base, and, increasing gradually in size to about the
middle of the body of the sponge (where it is an inch in dia-
meter), then diminishes again towards the apex, where it ter-
minates in an orifice about one sixth of an inch wide; per-
meated on all sides by the canals of the areolar structure, which

from the Philippine Islands. 111

open into it. Spicules of ten kinds, viz.:—I1st, of the root:
a, long, smooth, large, ends pointed above, broken off below ;
b, long, spined, small, ends pointed and smooth above, anchor-
shaped below; spines recurved, alternate, ceasing just before
they arrive at the lower extremity, which is two-armed,
opposite. 2nd, of the ridges or vent-arez: c, nail-like, head con-
sisting of four short arms extended horizontally and at or nearly
at right angles to each other, situated on a long vertical shaft ;
d, thin, straight, acerate, fusiform-spined, situated in bundles
round and projecting beyond the former; spines directed in-
wards, almost vertical and recurved at first, becoming afterwards
nearly parallel with the shaft; e, anchor-headed (“‘birotulate”’),
large, with straight tubercled shaft and eight arms at each
end, equally long, directed towards the middle of the shaft and
arranged at equal distances (somewhat spreading) from each
other around each end, very numerous, and bespangling the
surface of the vent-areze with the outermost head; f, crucial-
headed, with long spined shaft; arms of the head short,
one or two blunt-spined, abruptly ended, slightly curved
in opposite directions (¢.e. slightly sigmoid) ; shaft densely
armed a little below the head with long, stout, recurved spines
on all sides, bottle-brush-like; in great numbers round the
vents, with their heads applied to the horizontal arms of c,
and their spined shafts projecting outwards so as to form a
fringe round the vents, capable of thus closing them when
required; g, anchor-headed, minute, resembling a miniature
form of e, charging the sarcode in great numbers round the
arms of c, and, indeed, everywhere; hf, hexaradiate, minute,
each arm bearing a few long spines towards its extremity,
the rest smooth; numerous in the sarcode, and characteristic
of the species; 7, acerate, fusiform, minute, bearing four large
spines opposite and nearly vertical in the centre, and a few
others sparsely scattered over the rest of the shaft, chiefly to-
wards the ends, numerous and characteristic. 3rd, of the
pore-area: k, like c, but with longer horizontal arms and
shorter vertical shaft; 7, like f, but with shorter shaft; m,
the same as e, but not so abundant as in the vent-area; x,
like g, but more plentiful here. Spicule of the tufts at the
apex spined towards the free end, with the spines directed out-
wards. Spicules of the internal structure a mixture of those
above described, with the arms of the crucial-headed one
greatly extended.

Size of specimen: total length 18inches. From the apex to
the commencement of the root-spicules 15 inches ; root-spicules
3 inches (probably six or more if the whole were present
entire and extended, instead of being wrapt up in a bunch as

#

112 Mr. H. J. Carter on two new Sponges

they now are); diameter in the centre 2 inches; cylindrical
portion between the root and the ridges 1} in diameter by
3 inches long.

Hab, Marine, growing erect in sandy mud.

Loc. Cebu, one of the Philippine Islands (Dr. A. B. Meyer).

Obs. The spicules a, c, e, g closely resemble similar ones
in Carteria and the glass-cord respectively; f, although
common to Carteria and Holtenia, more closely resembles this
spicule in the latter; and 6 is almost identical with the long
root-spicule of Holtenia and Pheronema Grrayi; h and @ are
peculiar to the species—that is, not found in either of the other
sponges mentioned. The common, long, acerate fusiform spi-
cule with central canal-cross and inflation is apparently absent
here, together with the rarer spined crucial spicule of Hyalo-
nema, as is apparently the case in Holtenia; so that our sponge
is a mixture of Carteria, Holtenia, and Pheronema, which
shows that they are all three closely allied.

This is the most exquisite sponge that I have yet examined
as a whole and in its parts. Individually its spicules equal
any in beauty of form, and collectively surpass all. Its general
form has been shortly described by Dr. J. E. Gray, under the
name of Meyerella claviformis, in the last number of the
‘Annals’ (p. 76) ; but Dr. Gray has now changed “‘ Meyerella”’
to “ Meyerina,” having discovered that the former has been
already used for something else.

2. Crateromorpha (nov. gen.) Meyert, Gray.

Specific character.—Sarco-spiculous. General form globular,
wide, ovate, truncated, hollow, supported on a contracted stem,
goblet-shaped. Colour light sponge-yellow in its dried state.
Margin of the brim extemely thin, thickening towards the
base. Covered externally throughout with a fine reticular
structure of square meshwork, in the interstices of which the
pores are situated. Vents on the inner side of the cup enor-
mously large at the bottom, becoming smaller towards the
brim. Internal structure dense, permeated by inosculating
canals, which respectively open by the vents into the inner side
of the cup, and appear beneath the reticular structure exter-
nally. Stem long, round, contracted, compound, fistulous—
that is, consisting of a dozen longitudinal canals imbedded in
a felt-like disposition of the spicules, which canals open into
the vents at the bottom of the cup where the stem joins the
latter ; stem becoming dispersed at the other end, where it disap-
pears in a fibrous mass into the sandy mud in which the sponge
grew. Spicules of five kinds :—1st, of the head: a, straight,

from the Philippine Islands. 113

fusiform, inflated and spined at the ends, also inflated more or
less and smooth in the centre, where the central canal has a
hexaradiate cross, opposite to the ends of which there may be
two or four tubercles; this is the staple form of the spicule of
this sponge; and by intercrossing each other in bundles at
and about right angles they support the dermal reticular struc-
ture above; 0, nail- or crucial-headed, scanty ; arms smooth,
straight and pointed, the shaft a little longer than the rest—
among the foregoing, but chiefly visible at the base of the
sponge on the outside about the point where the stem joins the
cup—supporting, together witha, the dermal reticular structure;
c, hexaradiate, minute, smooth, each arm of the cross, imme-
diately after leaving the centre, separating into two long, diver-
gent spines, in myriads throughout the sponge. 2nd, of the
pore-area: d, nail- or crucial-headed, arms parting at right
angles from the centre, more or less inflated at the ends, and
spined throughout; shaft a little longer than the rest, also spined
and more or less pointed; arms of this spicule spreading out
horizontally to reach the centres of the adjoining crosses, and
thus together forming the rectangular dermal network. 3rd, of
the stem: e, the same as a, forming a felt-like mass, in the
midst of which are the long fistular canals; f, the nail-head
spicule 4, chiefly found about the part mentioned; g, large,
smooth, thick spicules 4-12ths of an inch in length, acuate,
inflated at both ends, fusiform and acerate respectively, dis-
tributed longitudinally over the surface of the stem.

Size of specimen: widest part of head 3} inches, aperture
22 by 1? inches; depth of cup 27 inches; length of head out-
side 3? inches ; greatest thickness of walls 14-12ths of an inch ;
length of stem 34 inches, diameter of stem 7-12ths.

Hab. Marine, growing erect in sandy mud.

Loc. Cebu, one of the Philippine Islands (Dr. A. B. Meyer).

Obs. This is entirely a new genus, although, as will here-
after be seen, some of its spicules are almost identical with
those of Rossella philippinensis, Gray (to be described here-
after), which comes from the same locality and is also cup-like,
but is fixed to the bottom by a number of bundles, or tail-
like extensions from the base, of long, stiff spicules, bearmg
at their extremities the four-armed recurved head which I
have already given (‘ Annals’ for June 1872, p. 414, pl. xxi.)
as an essential character of this genus.

114 Mr. J. Gould on two new Species of Birds.

XV.—On two new Species of Birds.
By Joun GOuLp, F.R.S. &e.

Asout twenty years ago I obtained two specimens of a
Diceum, one labelled Manila, the other Mindanao, which,
although not quite certain, I believe to be the opposite sexes
of an undescribed species, and now propose to characterize as

Diceum retrocinctum.

Male (from Manila).—Head, neck, back, wing-coverts, tail,
sides and centre of the throat, and a broad stripe down the
centre of the breast steel or bluish black; a semicollar at the
base of the neck behind, a small stripe down the chin, and a
broader and longer stripe down the centre of the abdomen
scarlet; under tail-coverts white ; wings slaty black ; sides of
the chest and the abdomen white, passing into silvery grey on
the flanks; bill black, lighter at the base; feet apparently
dark brown.

Total length 33 inches; bill 8, wing 2, tail 7, tarsi 3.

Female (from Mindanao).—Like the male on the upper sur-
face, but wanting the red at the base of the neck; chin and
throat white ; remainder of the under surface grey, fading into
white on the abdomen, down the centre of which is a stripe of
scarlet as in the opposite sex ; under tail-coverts white.

Size the same as that of the male.

Colluricincla parvissima, Gould.

Crown of the head, all the upper surface, including the
wing-coverts and tail, olivaceous brown; wings rufous, their
inner webs brown; over each eye a narrow line of buff; chin
pale buffy, with a very faint stripe of brown down each fea-
ther; all the under surface rich buff or fawn-colour ; bill light
horny, darker above ; legs and feet pale fleshy brown.

Total length 63 inches; bill Z, wing 33, tail 22, tarsi 4%.

Hab. Rockingham Bay, Eastern Australia.

Remark. 'This bird is by far the smallest species of the
genus I have yet seen, as is implied in the name I have
applied to it, in contradistinction to C. parvula. In colour it
differs from, the latter in the buff mark over the eye, in the
rufous colouring of the wings, and especially in the rich rufous
tint of the under surface, which is even deeper in hue than the
same part in C. rufigaster: the three species are, in fact, nearly
allied.

Dr. J. E. Gray on Red-Sea Echinoderms. 115

XVI.—List of Echinoderms collected by Robert M‘Andrew,
Esq., F.R.S., in the Gulf of Suez in the Red Sea. By Dr.
J. H. Gray, F.R.S. &e.*

SAVIGNY, who accompanied the French Expedition to Egypt,
drew and engraved in the most beautiful and elaborate style
the Echinoderms that were collected during that Expedition.

They form part of the plates of the magnificent imperial
but most useless work that is usually called the great work
on Egypt. This work, though published at the commencement
of the present century, is hardly known to scientific zoologists,
and is rarely to be seen out of the great public libraries. So
much is this the case, that on my showing the details of a
species figured in it to a well-known Scandinavian zoologist,
he inquired what work it was, he had never seen or even heard
of its existence.

There are many species figured in the zoological portion of
it that are as yet unknown and unnamed; and many of the
microscopic peculiarities of the species that are there figured
are being every now and then produced as modern discoveries ;
and there are yet others still to be described as new.

It is truly a “work of luxury” and not for scientific
utility, though it contains, as I have observed, most accurate
details which were far in advance of the scientific knowledge
of the period, and in some respects of the present timet; but
the great expense of the work and its immense size have
rendered it almost a closed book to scientific men.

Unfortunately M. Savigny became blind before he was able
to complete the descriptions of the animals and refer to the
details on the plates of the Echinoderms ; indeed he only pub-
lished the descriptions of the Annelides and the Ascidia.

Professor Victor Audouin published an “ Explication som-
maire des planches des Echinodermes ” and other divisions of
the animal kingdom that had been drawn and engraved under
Savigny’s directions.

Unfortunately he does not seem to have had at his disposal
the original specimens figured for sheet 1; and he observes,
“in comparant les figures 1, 2, et 3 aux especes représentées

* This manuscript was prepared and written soon after Mr. M‘Andrew’s
return; but being left on my writing-table during my temporary illness,
it was carefully put away by my attendant, along with a quantity of
manuscripts on Bats (where it was not looked for), and was only acciden-
tally found a few weeks ago.—J. E. G.

+ This is particularly the case with the Sponges, the texture of the
mass and the spicules of each species as seen under the microscope being
exhibited in detail.

116 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

par Miiller on leur trouve plusieurs fois des ressemblances
avec l’ Ophiura fragilis et ? Ophiura tricolor de M. de Lamarck,
mais il seroit difficile de donner une détermination positive ”
(p. 206).

Now that specimens have been obtained from the Red Sea
and the coast of Syria, it is found that many of the species
represented by Savigny are different from those to which Au-
douin referred them; but as yet I have not been able to com-
pare the species of that family with the published work on
them as carefully as I could have wished; and it is better
they should remain until Dr. Perceval Wright, who has
undertaken to make an examination of the Echinoderms in
the Museum, with some other naturalists who have paid special
attention to this group of animals, have examined and com-
pared them.

I here give a list of the plates and the explanations as far
as they are referred to:—

Savigny, Echinodermes de 0 Egypte.

Tab. 1. figs. 1, 2. Comatules. Maultiradiata, Aud. 105. Comatula
Savignil, J. Miller.
fig. 3. Ophiura echinata, Aud. 106. Ophiolepis dubia,
Miller & Troschel.
Tab. 2. fig. 1. Ophiures. O. fragilis, Aud. 106.
fig. 2. O. fragilis, Aud. 106.
fig. 3. ——. 0. tricolor, Aud. 106.
fig. 4. O.squamata, Aud.107. Ophiolepis Savignii.
Tab. 3. Asterias Savignii, dud. Lidia Savignii. B.M.
Tab. 4. fig. 1. Asterias aurantiaca, dud. 108. Astropecten.
fig. 2. A. calear, Awd. 108. Asteriscus pentagonus.
fig. 3. A. seposita, Aud. 108. Rhopia seposita. B.M.

Tab. 5. figs. 1, 2. A. mamillata, Aud. 109. Pentaceros mamillata.
Tab. 6. Oursins. Cidarites Savignul, Awd. 110.
aby. fig) i. C. baculosa, Aud. 110.

fig. 2, ——. Kchinus pallidus, Aud. 110.

fig. 3. ——. Scutella bifissa, dud. 110. B.M.

fig. 4. ——. Spatangus crux-Andree, Aud. 111.

fig. 5, 6. . S. canaliferus, Aud. 111.

Tab. 8. figs. 1-5. Holothures, sp.

I have made a list of all the species which I have found
recorded as inhabiting the Red Sea, and marked those that
have been collected by Mr. M‘Andrew, and those that are in
the British Museum from other sources.

I have added a few notes formed on the examination of
Mr. M‘Andrew’s specimens.

R. M‘Andrew in the Gulf of Suez. 117

Fam. Comatulide.
Comatulides et Comatuliens, Dujard. & Hupé, pp. 186, 191.
Comatula, Lamk.

Comatula Savignit, J. Miiller; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 203.

Echinoderme, Saviguy, Egypte, t. 1.
Comatula multiradiata, Aud. Expl. pl.
adeonea, Blainy. Man. d’Actin. p. 249, t. 26.

Arms twice or three times forked at the base, with more
than twenty secondary or tertiary arms.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Ophiuride, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 63.
Ophiurides, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 219.
Ophiolepis dubia, Miller & Troschel, p. 94; Dujard. & Hupé,
p: 240.
Ophiura, Savigny, Egypte, t. 1. f. 3.
Hab. Red Sea.
Ophiolepis Savignyt, Miiller & Troschel, p. 95; Dujard. &
Hupé, p. 240.

Ophiura, Savigny, Egypte, t. 2. f. 4, 5.
squamata, Aud. Expl. p. 107.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.
Ophiolepis annulosa, Miller & 'Trosch. p. 89, t. 8. f. 4; Du-
jard. & Hupé, p. 236.
Ophiura annulosa, Blainy. Man. d’Actin. t. 44 (not Lamk.).
Hab. Red Sea.
Ophiolepis cincta, Miller & Trosch. p. 90; Dujard. & Hupé,
p. 237.
Hab. Red Sea.

Ophiura brachyura.

Body smooth, without shield or spines, white-lined ; arms
short, thick, tapering ; lateral spines elongate.

Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M. no. 2.

Not in Savigny: arms much shorter than any there figured.

Ophiura ? (Not in good state.)

Disk with small spicules; lateral spines short, thick, not
larger than diameter of arms.

Hab, Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Not figured in Savigny’s ‘ Egypte.’

118 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

Fam. Asteride.
Asterides, D. & H. p. 807, 1862.

Rhopia seposita, Gray.
Asterias seposita, Retz. Vetensk. Akad. iv. p. 337; Aud., Muller and
Troschel.
Cribella seposita, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 354.
Asterias, Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 4. f. 3.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.
Linckia typus, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H.

Asterias levigata, Linn.
Ophidiaster miliaris, Miller & Troschel, p. 30, t. 2. f. 2; Dujard. & Hupé,
p- 360.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Gomophia egyptiaca, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi.
p- 286; see Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 62.

Hab. Red Sea. B.M.
Asteriscus pentagonus, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 878; Seba, t. 5.
flo(cop. Ha: 4.100. £031?)
Asterias calcar, Aud.; Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 4. f. 2.
Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Asterina Burtonii, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi. p. 289.
Asteriscus vermiculatus, Miller & Troschel.
Asterina gibbosa, Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 72.
Hab. Red Sea (J. Burton). B.M.

Pentaceros ——?, Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 5. figs. 1, 2.
Asterias mamillata, Aud. Expl. p. 209.
Oreaster mamillatus, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 48; Dujard. &
Hupé, Echinod. p. 383.
Back reticulated ; margin spinose.
Var. Reticulation of the back more obscure, more closely
covered with granulations; the margin not spinose.

Hab. Red Sea (Savigny); Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

? Pentaceros tuberculatus.
Oreaster tuberculatus, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 46; Dujard. &
Hupé, Echin. p. 381.
Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Goniaster Seba, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. vi. p. 28.

Goniodiscus Sebe, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 58; Dujard. & Hupé,
Kchin. p. 402; Seba, Thesaur. t. 6. f. 7, 8.

Hab. Red Sea.

R. M‘Andrew itn the Gulf of Sucz. 119
Astropecten polyacanthus, Miiller & Troschel, Syst. Aster. p.69
t. 5. £3; Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 417.
Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.
Astropecten Hemprichii, Miller & Trosch. Syst. Aster. p. 71 ;
Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 419.
Hab. Red Sea (Burton); Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

?

Genus Lurp1A, Forbes.
Hemicnemus, Miller & Troschel.

Luidia Savignii, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi. p. 183 ;
Miiller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 77, 1842; Savigny,
Echin. Egypte, t. 3. f. 1; Hupé, p. 482.

Asterias Savignii, Aud. Exp).

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Cidaride, Gray.
Cidarides, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 468.

Cidaris baculosa, Lamk. A.s. V.; Aud.111; Savigny, Echin.
Egypte, t. 7. f. 1; Michelin, Mag. Zool. 1845, p. 18, t. 4.
f.1-8; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 471; Martens, Wiegm. Arch.
1866, p. 141.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

‘The spines vary in form according to the age of the speci-
mens. In the young the spines are elongate, slender, fusi-
form, with the distal end attenuated to a more or less acute
tip, and the spines are twice or sometimes even more than
twice the length of the diameter of its body.

In the older specimens the spines are nearly cylindrical,
scarcely attenuated at the end, which is often truncated ; they
are rarely longer than the diameter of the body: the spines
near the vent have the apex deeply and irregularly grooved ;
those nearer the mouth. have the end truncated and more or
less dilated, with a more or less flat or concave end, which is
sometimes furnished on the margin with irregular lobes.

The spines on the upper surface of the body are often en-
tirely covered with tufts of Janda or a thin crust of Lepralia ;
and some of them have one or more small parasitic oysters
with a crenated and plicated margin affixed to them: such
parasitic growths were not present on the spines of any of the
other Hehind in the collection. The spines on the underside,
especially those nearer the mouth, are clear, and show the

120 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

spicules on the surface; these vary a little in shape at the
end.

A very young specimen, apparently of the same species, is -
brown, and the spines brown and white-ringed ; the spines are
quite clear, and covered with longitudinal series of rather large
rounded tubercles. The spines vary in shape: they are
generally cylindrical and truncated; but a few are fusiform
and tapering to a point.

Cidaris ornata (Gray, P. Z.S. 1855, p. 37) is perhaps a
variety.

Echinothrix Desorti, Bilsche, Archiv fiir Naturgesch. 1865,
p- 330.
Astropyga Desorit, Agassiz, Ann. Sci. Nat. 1846, p. 545.

Hab. Red Sea.

Diadema Savignii, Michelin, Mag. Zool.; Agassiz, A. R.
p- 349; Dujard. & Hupé, chin. p. 505; Savigny, Echin.
Egypte, t. 6; Bélsche, Arch. fiir Naturg. 1865, p. 227.

Cidarites mamuillata, Aud. p. 109.

Jun, D. Lamarckii, Agassiz.

Echinothrix calamaris, Peters.
turcarum, Peters, Bolsche.

Garetia turcarum, Agassiz.
Diadema Dujardinii, Michelin, Mag. Zool. 1845, t. 7.

Var. 1. The spines of the oral surface white.
Var. 2. Spines all pale.

Hab. Red Sea.

See :—Diadema (Echinothrix) calamare, Martens, Wiegm.
Arch. 1866, p. 150. Echinus calamarius, Pallas, Spic. Zool.
x. p. 38, t. 2. f. 4-8; Gmelin, Syst. Nat. p. 3173. Cidaris
calamarius, Leske, Lamk., Gray ; Michelin, Rev. Zool. p. 14,
no. 26. Astropyga calamaria, Agassiz.

The shell is covered with small black spines. The upper
part of the shell has a broad, smooth area, radiating from the
anal opening, as in Astropyga. The spines are very slender,
tubular, and covered externally with whorls of short, regular,
closely packed, adpressed spines. ‘The spines near the oral
region are slender, subcylindrical, striated, slightly depressed,
and clavate at the end.

I have not seen any specimen with such long slender spines
as that figured in the great work on Egypt. In all I have
seen the spines were thicker compared with their length, and
much shorter compared with the diameter of the body.

R. M‘Andrew tn the Gulf of Suez. 121

Temnopleurus toreumaticus, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 514;
Gray, P.Z.8. 1855, p. 39.

Cidaris toreumaticus, Wein.
Echinus sculptus, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea. Subfossil, Isle of Karrah (Dujardin).
Fam. Echinide.

Echinides, Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 440.
Tripneustes 4

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

‘* Pure red when alive”’ (M‘Andrew). B.M.
Tripneustes ry

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

“¢ White when alive” (M‘Andrew).

Fam. Echinometrida.

Echinometra lucunter, Gray ; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 538.
Echinus lucunter, Linn.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.
Tubercles very numerous, small.

? Echinometra heteropora, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 538.
Hab. Red Sea. Subfossil (Dujardin).

Acrocladia mamillata, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 539.

Cidaris mamillatus, Leske, t. 6, t. 39. f. 1.
Echinus mamillatus, Lamk.

Echinometra mamillata, Blainy., Martens.
Heterocentrotus mamillatus, Brandt.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

The spines vary greatly in shape; they are usually clavate,
but more or less three-keeled near the end, which is generally
rounded.

The short, broad, top spine in two of the specimens was
dark brown; in another paler.

Acrocladia planispina, Martens, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. in Wien,
1866, p. 381; Zool. Record, 1866, p. 617.

Hab. Red Sea (Martens).

Spines not triangular as in A. trigonaria, nor club-shaped
as in-A.mamillata, nor cylindrical as in another Red Sea species,

122 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

A. Blainvillei, but small and pointed, and the corona covered
with true spines.

Agassiz notices a small specimen from the Red Sea in the
Paris Museum, which he names A. Blainvillet.

See Dujardin & Hupé, Echin. p. 540.

I believe, from Mr. AE Mildrew's series, that the A. Blain-
villet is only a variety of A. mamillata.

Fam. Scutellide, Gray ; Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 170.
Clypeastroidea, Agassiz & Desor; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 554.

Echinanthus placunarius, Gray, Cat. Kchin. B. M. p. 7.

Scutella ambigena, Lamk.

albigena, Lamk.

placunaria, Lamk.

Clypeaster placunarius, Lamk.; Dujardin. & Hupé, p. 571; Martens,
Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 172.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).
Echinanthus scutiformis, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 5.

Clypeaster scutiformis, Lamk.

Laganum scutiforme, Gray, Ann. Phil. 1825; Desor, Syn. p. 329;
Dujard. & Hupé, p. 559; E. M. t. 147. f. 3.

Scutella clypeastriformis, Blainv.; Seba, iii. t. 15, f. 28, 24.

Laganum depressum, Lesson, Voy. Uran.; Agassiz, Mon. Scut. p. 110,
t. 23. f. 1-7.

Hab, Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).

Laganum attenuatum?, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 10.
Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Laganum ellipticum, Agassiz, Mon. Scut. t. 23. f. 13-15;
Dujard. & Hupé, p. 560.
Laganum attenuatum, Agassiz, Cat, Scut. p. 74; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 560.
Hab. Red Sea.

Echinodiscus truncatus, Gray, Cat. Eichin. B. M. p. 20.

Lobophora truncata, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 565.
Scutella bifora, var., Lamk.
biforts, Blainy.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).

Echinodiscus maurita, Gray, Cat. Echin. p. 21.

Lobophora bifissa, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 363; Martens, Wiegm.
Arch. 1866, p. 174; Savigny, Echin. t. 7. f. 3.

Scutella bifissa, Lamk. EF. M. t. 152. f. 1, 2.

Echinus inauritus, Gmelin, p. 3190.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

R. M‘Andrew in the Gulf of Suez. 123

Var. Lobophora aurita, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 365.

Scutella bifissa, var., Lamk. E. M. t. 151. f. 5, 6.
Echinoglycus auritus, Vauchel. p. 84; Bleeker.
Echinodiscus inauritus, var., Gray, Cat. Echin. p. 21.

Hab. Red Sea.

Fibularia craniolaris, Lamk.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 557.

Echinus craniolaris, Gmel. 8. N. p. 3198.
Fibularia nucleus, Lamk.

—— trigona, Lamk.

lathyrus, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Spatangide, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 38.

Brissus bicinctus, Val.; Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, Echin.
“ p. 608.

Hab. Red Sea (Valenciennes, Mus. Paris).
Lovenia hystrix, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, Kchin. p. 606 ;

Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p- 45; Savieny, Echin. Egypte,
tee tS

Hab. Red oe: Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Spatangus meridionalis, Risso, Kur. Mérid. v. p. 228; Gray,
Cat. Ech. B. M. p. 47; Duy. & Hupé, Kch. p. 608.

Spatangus siculus, Agassiz & eee

Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Periaster gibberulus, D’Orb.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 598.
Schizaster gibberulus, Agassiz; Savigny, Echin. Egypte, t. 7. f. 6.

Hab. Red Sea (Savigny).

Fam. Holothuriade.

Holothuria impatiens, Linn; Dujard. & pe 617; Forsk.
Egypt, p. 121, t. 39. f, B=E. M. t. 86. f. 1

Fistularia impatiens, en
Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Savigny figures eleven kinds of this family, viz. five in
tab. 8 and six in tab. 9. They are not quoted by Dujardin and
Hupé; so I fear that the specimens obtained by the French
naturalists and figured by Savigny no longer exist in the

124 Dr. J. E. Gray on Red-Sea Corals &e.

French Museum, like the specimens obtained by Quoy, Gai-
mard, and other French travellers. I have not had the
opportunity or time to examine the Red-Sea species.

Synapta reciprocans, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 615.
Fistularia reciprocans, Forsk. Egypte, p. 121, t. 30. f. 8=E. M. t. 87. f. 7.
Holothuria glutina, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea (Forskal).

Synapta vittata, Jeger; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 615.
Fistularia vittata, Forsk. Egypte, p. 223, t. 37. f. 26=E. M. t. 87. £8, 9.
Holothuria vittata, Lamk.
Tiedemannia vittata, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea (Forskal).

Aleyonoid corals and sponge from the Gulf of Suez, col-

lected by R. M‘Andrew, Esq., in 1868 :—

CORALS.
), 0. Sp.

Sarcophyton
On shells.

Ammothea virescens, Savigny, Pol. Egypte, t. 2. f. 6.

Nephthya Savignii, Ehrenb.

Xenea umbellata, Ehrenb.

Anthelia glauca, Khrenb.; Savigny, t. 1. f. 7.
Anthelia grandis, n. sp.

Alcyonium aurum, n. sp.

This is not Amocella; the coral is not fleshy, but crustaceous
externally, and with subcylindrical branches.

SPONGE.
Genus GRAYELLA, Carter, Ann.& Mag.'N. H. 1869, iv. p. 190.

Sponge massive, expanded or subglobular, attached by an
expanded base; outer surface covered with a smooth fleshy
skin, with numerous, regular, equal-sized, flat-topped, low
tubercles. Sponge fleshy, with spicules siliceous, fusiform,
elongate, of one form.

Grayella cyathophora, Carter.
Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Mr. A. G. Butler on a new Genus of Moths. 125

Corals collected in the Red Sea by R. M‘Andrew, Esq., in
1869, and given to the British Museum by Mr. W.S. Kent :—

JLeterocyathus cochlea. Fungia patella.
Stylophora pistillata. Cycloseris cyclolites.
subseriata. Madrepora corymbosa.
Husmilia fastigiata. Turbinaria cinerascens.
Lithophyllia lacera. Alveopora diedalea.
Mussa corymbosa. Porites conglomerata.
Trachypora Geoftroyii. Seriatopora lineata.
Pavia cavernosa. Tubipora musica.

Solenastraeea Hemprichiana.

XVII.—Description of a new Genus and Species of Hetero-
cerous Lepidoptera. By ARTHUR GARDINER BUTLER,
ead Zi,0-; OC,

[Plate VIIL.]

Tue following remarkable species is in the collection of the

Rey. 'T’. Cornthwaite. It presents the most wonderful modifi-

cation of the Lepidopterous scale that I have ever seen; and I

am much indebted to its possessor for the pleasure of describing

and figuring it.
Group BoMBYCITES.
amily Notodontide.
TARSOLEPIS (Tapaos, Nemris), Zen. NOV.

Gen. alis magnis, anticis elongatis, costa producta; antennis plus
quam bis triente pectinatis; corpore robusto, abdomine elongato,
squamis valde clongatis remiformibus analibus; valvulis dense
puosis ; subtus cristis ad basin abdominis clongatis, arcuatis, cocci-
neis, aliisque brevioribus, ochraceis. Generis typus 7’. remicauda.

Tarsolepis remicauda, sp.n. Pl. VEIL.

Wings above brownish grey; the cost and bases pale
ochreous: primaries with central area chestnut-brown, inter-
rupted between the nervures by double parallel lines uniting
at their extremities and bounded externally by an irregular
whitish line; two large subtriangular silver patches placed
obliquely on central area; outer margin sinuated and bordered
by a tricoloured band of black, ochreous, and chestnut; a very
indistinct, blackish, lunulate lime between margin and central
area: secondaries paler than primaries, with dusky spot at
end of cell; the margin externally chestnut-brown, mternally
pale ochraceous; fringe white: body above, with head, palpi,
and antenne, reddish brown, whitish in parts; collar ver
broad, silver-grey, with a transverse interrupted blackish stripe

Ann. & Maq. N. Hist, Ser. 4. Vol. x. 10

126 Mr. W. D. Rotch on a new Genus of Hydroid Zoophytes.

in front; thorax for the most part pale ochraceous, but with
the scales chestnut-tipped, and with two lateral pitchy streaks
uniting over the back; abdomen blackish grey, segments
somewhat ochraceous; a lateral series of six or seven black
spots; anus clothed with pale ochreous hairs and surrounded
by a zone of radiating, semitransparent, red-brown, paddle-
shaped scales, about half an inch long.

Wings below pale ochreous; a common waved dusky discal
line; margin narrowly edged with very light ochreous; a
series of submarginal black spots between nervures: primarics
with medio-discoidal area dusky; base, inner margin, and
basal half of second median interspace whitish ochraceous :
secondaries with large black spot at end of cell; fringe white,
spotted with brown: body below for the most part pale ochre-
ous; head, front and hind legs, and anus, except valves, red-
brown; two long curved tufts of carmine hairs at base of
abdomen.

Eixpanse of wings 3 inches 3 lines.

Hab. Java, Batavia. Coll. Cornthwaite.

The scales on the tail of this extraordinary moth are very
similar to those occurring on the bodies of many Lepidopterous
insects as seen under a high magnifying-power.

The genus comes nearest to Duduna.

XVII.—On a new Genus and Species of Hydroid Zoophytes.
By W. D. Rorcu, Esq.
STAUROCORYNE, nov. gen.
Gen. char.—Stem simple, rooted by a creeping filiform
stolon, the whole invested by a polypary. Polypites terminal,

clavate, with several verticils of capitate tentacula disposed
in the form of a cross.

Staurocoryne differs from Coryne in its mode of growth and
the disposition of its tentacles. Its mode of growth closely
resembles that of Cladonema; and it is equally slender and
hyaline.

In the cross-like disposition of its tentacles it nearly re-
sembles Stauridium. Its reproduction is unknown.

Staurocoryne Wortley?, nov. Sp.

Stem simple, of extreme tenuity; polypary hyaline and smooth;
polypites clavate, with 12 tentacles (when fully grown)
disposed in 8 whorls of 4 tentacles each; gonophores not
known.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Koala. 127

I have named this minute but beautiful hydroid after
Colonel Stuart Wortley, in whose tanks it was first found. It
grows along the glass sides of the tank, sending out long
creeping shoots, whence the polypites rise at intervals.

It has recently appeared suddenly in my tanks, and, I fancy,
is not uncommon, though liable to be overlooked through its
minute size.

XIX.—The Muscular Anatomy of the Koala (Phascolarctos
cinereus). By ALEXANDER Maca.istrer, M.B., Professor
of Zoology, University of Dublin.

A FINE female Koala was procured from Mr. Gerrard by:

Prof. Haughton for the Anatomical Museum of the Dublin

University ; and as it was in splendid condition for dissection,

we were enabled to examine its muscular system thoroughly.

As in its anatomical arrangements it is by far the most

aberrant form among the Marsupials, I have compiled the

following list of its peculiarities, from which it will be
perceived that the myology of this animal is full of interesting
features.

The specimen was a salted one; but its muscles were
exceedingly well preserved and easily dissected. She mea-
sured 26 inches in length; and throughout there was a
marked disproportion in the development of the two sides, the
left-side muscles being very much larger and stronger than
the right. There was an exceedingly strong panniculus
carnosus, which sprang from the outside of the arm, and the
fibres of which passed backwards in an arcuate manner to the
integument of the sides; and forward, forming a very thick
platysma myotdes in the neck ; this muscle had a thick rounded
anterior border, and terminated by being inserted into the
skin along the ramus of the mandible; and, stretching even
above this limit, the facial fibres formed an even sheet over
the front of the masseter and the facial artery to terminate in
the middle line of the lower lip, the margin of the mouth, the
ala of the nose, and the lower margin of the orbicular muscle
of the eyelids.

The platysma on the hinder part of the body displayed
nothing of importance ; its femoral attachment was weak.

The facial muscles were unusually strong, the orbicularis
palpebrarum being a simple thick ring, composed of several
thick fascicles; the occ¢pitalis arises from the occipital protu-
berance, and passes radiating forwards; the frontalis, quite

separate, arises from the mesial line of the scalp, and runs
ioe

128 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

downwards to the inner half of the upper edge of the orbicu-
laris palpebrarum, extending into the origin of the levator
labit superioris.

The large auricle had a powerful arrangement of muscles
for its motions, having three series of transverse intrinsic
fibres on the back of the concha, and a strong bilaminar
retrahens aurem, which came from the occipital protuberance,
external and attached to the occipitalis, and was inserted by
the superficial layer of fibres into the back of the auricle;
the deep layer bifurcated into two muscular bundles—an upper
to the upper and anterior part of the auricle, and a lower to
the inferior part of the same cartilage.

The attollens aurem was thin and wide; and the attrahens
was a very strong wide slip, inseparable from the platysma ;
a second special attrahens existed in the form of a flat fleshy
slip from the anterior half inch of the temporal crest behind
the postorbital process, which ran downwards and backwards
over the temporal fascia and zygomatic arch to the inferior
margin of the helix : the lowest third of this muscle is tendi-
nous. ‘The other facial muscles were a single-headed levator
labit superioris aleque nast, a depressor labii inferioris, and
levator menti. I found no muscles attached to the angle of
the mouth other than the wide continued sheet of the pla-
tysma. ‘The orbicularis oris was strong, but the buccinator
was very feeble. A depressor labii supertoris from the upper
alveolar arch completes the catalogue. There was no zygo-
matic or buccal salivary gland.

The masticatory muscles were arranged as in all the
Marsupials, and equalled the pectorals in weight (masseteres +
temporales =1°4 oz.).

The external pterygoid is an exceedingly small rudiment,
crossing and inseparable from the internal.

The sterno-mastoid was four times the size of the cle¢do-
mastoid, and was inserted fleshy into the outer side of the
elongated paroccipital process. The latter had a tendinous
insertion, and was attached more internally to the same pro-
cess; its origin was by a fine flat fleshy band from the inner
sixth of the clavicle.

The omo-hyoid arose far back from the preescapula near its
superior angle; it had no tendinous inscription, and was in-
serted into the hyoid body and into a tendinous line in the
angle between the digastric and sterno-hyoid muscles, to both
of which it is connected. he posterior belly of the digastric
is exceedingly small and short, and arises from the front of the
paroccipital process ; it ends in a tendinous inscription which
gives partial origin to the anterior belly; but this latter part

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 129

is treble the size of the posterior, gaining an additional origin
from the tendinous line in which the omo- and _ sterno-hyoid
muscles terminate. ‘The tendinous inscription is very short
and oblique.

Sterno-hyoid is monogastric, and has a strong origin from
the back of the clavicle as well as from the second and third
pieces of the sternum. Sterno-thyrotd is much shorter and
more narrow, and has likewise no inscription. Mylo-hyoid
has very short fibres, and extends down for a very considerable
distance, overlying the very long slender genio-hyorder. A
transverse band of. muscle, like an aberrant slip of the mylo-
hyoid, crossed beneath the genio-hyoidet and superficial to the
genio-hyo-glossi; this is on each side attached to the mucous
membrane. The styloid group of muscles formed a single
sheet, the hinder fibres of which passed to the pharynx, the
middle to the cerato- -hyal under the stylo-hyoid ligament; the
anterior passed to the side of the tongue. Genio-h yo-glosst,
the palatine muscles, and /inguales are very normal.

The trapeztus is an indivisible sheet extending from the
inner third of the occiput to the seventh dorsal spe ; its in-
sertion is into the acromion and spine of the scapula ; and,
partly crossing the former, some of its fibres are inserted into
the surface of the tendinous fibres of origin of the deltoid.
The latissimus dorsi arose from the fourth to the tenth
dorsal spines, and, by the lumbar fascia, from the four spines
below these ; it had no costal origin.

The trachelo-acromial (omo- -atlantic) occupied by its insertion
one half the length of the spine of the scapula, and was much
thicker than usual. The rhomboid muscle is single and large,
half the size of the trapeztus; it occupies one half the occipital
curved line, the middle line of the nucha, and the three
upper dorsal spines. Serratus magnus was a single muscle
consisting of thirteen slips, six cervical and seven costal, whose
insertion was indivisible ; serratus posticus superior extends
in its insertion from the second to the eighth rib; serratus tn-
fertor, quite continuous with it, only distinguishable by the
upward direction of its fibres, was attached to “the mth, tenth,
and eleventh ribs. Splenius ‘arose from the three upper dorsal
and five lower cervical spines, and was attached to the occiput
and three upper cervical transverse processes. Trachelo-mastoid!
is not digastric, and stretches from the five lower cervical
transverse processes to the occipital bone. The other spinal
muscles were invariable.

The great pectoral is large, having the usual attachments; be-
neath it there are the following three muscles:—pectoralis minor,
from the cartilages of the third and fourth ribs to the shoulder-

130 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

capsule ; pectoralis quartus, from the cartilages of the lowest
four ribs to the shoulder-capsule; and a third pectoral (pecto-
ralis minimus of Wenzel Grube), from the manubrium sterni
and cartilage of the first rib to the shoulder-capsule. The
subclavius, under a strong costo-coracoid membrane, stretches
to the posterior margin of the outer third of the clavicle.

The deltord is a smgle muscle, composed of its three parts
united inseparably, and sending an extensive offshoot at its
insertion, which is continuous into the origin of the supinator
longus. 'The capsular muscles are developed in the following
proportions :—deltoid=1, supraspinatus=1-11, infraspinatus
=1°69, teres minor (exceedingly thin, with a marginal tendi-
nous origin for one fifth the axillary costa of the scapula
and an unusually wide fleshy insertion) =-08, subscapularis
=2, teres major=1.

The biceps is, as usual in Marsupials, composed of a partially
united gleno-ulnar and a coraco-radial muscle ; the latter re-
ceives a large fascicle from the former; the brachialis anticus
is long; the triceps externus and internus are united; and the
muscles of this region have to each other the following propor-
tions :—biceps coracoidalis =1, glenoidalis = 0°68, brachialis
=0°8, triceps lonqus=2, triceps externus and internus=2°6,
dorst epitrochlearts (which is inserted into the inner condyle and
olecranon) =0'14. There aretwoanconet,external and internal.

The pronatox and supinator muscles are well-developed. The
round pronator has but one head; and the guadrate pronator
occupies the lower sixth of the forearm. Supinator longus,
besides an origin from the deltoid, is attached to the lower half
of the humerus ; end its tendon, passing under the tendon of the
abductor major pollicis and lying on the wrist synovial mem-
brane, was inserted into the scaphoid bone. ‘The swpinator
brevis occupies two fifths of the radius. These muscles are
developed in the following proportions :—Pronatores : supina-
tores:: 1:4.

The other muscles in the forearm are well marked. The
radial and ulnar flexors of the carpus and the palmaris longus
are simple and normal; the flewor sublimis digitorum arises
from the front of the deep flexor, and is exceedingly feeble ; its
tendon for the fourth finger is the strongest. ‘The deep flexor
consists of four heads—one condyloid, one olecranal, one
radial, and one ulnar; five tendons spring from this; but the
polliceal tendon is not from the radial border of the common
tendon, but springs from the front of the tendon inside the edge,
as is sometimes the case in the Quadrumana.

The extensores carpt radiales are as usual, and are inserted,
not into the carpal ends, but into the middle of the shaft of

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 131

their respective metacarpal bones. The extensor secundus
digitorum was attached to the fourth and fifth fingers. The
other extensors of the fingers, ulnar carpal extensor and extensor
secundd internodit pollicis, are as usual.

The abductor pollicis major has a radio-interosseal origin
and a double tendon of insertion into the trapezium and first
metacarpal. . The left ¢ndicator sent a filmy shp to the pollex.
There is a separate extensor medit digit’, with an ulnar origin.
The proportions of these muscles are as follows :—flexors of
the wrist (fic. Ty Pe l., fic.ul.) : extensors of wrist (ec. 7. l.
& 6., 2. ¢. ul.) :: 0°36: 0°75; flexors of fingers (fi d; 8.
foadup.): extensors (é'ds Ch @: d. Bi, 02 O88: hs D5 Cs 8. OLD.) C2 t.,
ennesth ese OF202 -O'56:

The hand-muscles are as follows:—For the pollex, an
abductor brevis, a single-headed flexor, an opponens, and an
adductor (from the third metacarpal). For the little finger
there are the following muscles :—abductor, opponens, and
jflecor muscles. The dorsal interossei are (1) a two-headed
abductor indicts, (2) a two-headed abductor medit, (3) a bici-
pital abductor medii, (4) an abductor quarti digiti; the
palmar interossei are (1) an adductor indicis from the second
metacarpal under the adductor pollicis, (2) a common adductor
of the third and fourth digits.

There is no scalenus anticus; the medius is attached to the
first rib and to the fourth to the seventh vertebre ; the posticus
from the fifth transverse process to the third rib. Longus colli
consists of three parts—one from the bodies of the upper five
dorsal vertebrae to the cervical transverse processes, a second
part from the transverse processes of the fourth to the seventh
cervical vertebrae extending to the cervical bodies (second to
fifth), and a third from the same origin to the occiput.

The external oblique is attached to the ribs from the third to
the eleventh; the ¢nternal oblique and transversalis are with
very great difficulty separable. The rectus abdominis has eight
linee transverse intersecting it, and is attached to the xiphi-
sternum and to the cartilages of the second to the sixth ribs.
Pyramidalis is very wide, covers the entire of the vectus, and is
attached to the linea alba. The lumbar, vertebree, besides the
ordinary guadratus lumborum (with its three usual component
parts), have attached to them anterior ¢ntertransversales, most
of whose fibres skip two vertebra. ‘The psoas parvus is "equal
to the psoas magnus and 0°37 times the size of the combined
psoas magnus and tliacus, whose elements are imperfectly sepa-
rable ; the latter part of this mass is bipartite, the portion most
closely united to the psoas magnus being separate from a part
of the muscle arising from the anterior superior iliac spine.

132 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

The sartor’us is wide, and inserted into the inner side of the
patella, as well as into the knee-capsule and tibia. The peeé?-
neus is double at its insertion, but has a single origin. The
adductor longus is inserted posterior and superior to the pecti-
neus, and is very small, but attached to the marsupial bone, as
Prof. Owen observes. ‘The rest of the adductor mass exhibits
a faint division into the three usual elements, the condyloid
and the anterior and posterior strata of magnus. CQuadratus
femoris has a narrow ischiatic and a very wide femoral attach-
ment occupying the upper sixth of the femur; it is, however,
with great difficulty separated from the adductor magnus.

The gluteus maximus is bilaminar, the sacral part over-
lapping the coccygeal ; its insertion is into the whole length
of the linea aspera. ‘The gluteus medius is bilaminar, and the
pyriformis is perfectly separate, arising from the front surface
ot three vertebra ; over this muscle passes the sciatic nerve.
Gluteus minimus arises from the acetabular margin and from
the surface behind it, as well as from the anterior margin of the
ilium. I could separate no tensor vagine femoris.

Rectus femoris had but a single head; and the other ele-
ments in the extensor mass formed but one continuous belly,
in which the vastus externus portion is by far the largest
factor. The hamstrings are the usual three ; and none of them
exhibits a trace of a tendinous inscription. iceps has a narrow
tendon of origin 1°25 in length from the sacrum, which is tied
down to and parallel with the great sciatic ligament; the in-
sertion is wide and fleshy. The proportionate development of
these muscles is as follows :—vrectus=1, biceps=1, semi-
membranosus = 1°45, semitendinosus= 0°80, rest of the guadri-
ceps extensor =3'58. ‘Thus the flexors : extensors :: 1°87 oz.
: 2:lloz. (I have included the gracilis with the flexors ; it
has a pubic origin and a slender insertion, and equals the sem-

tendinosus in weight.)
=

The popliteus muscle arises from the fibula alone, and is in-
serted into the tibia close to the tibialis posticus.

The outer head of the gastrocnemius has a sesamoid bone in
its tendon of origin; the inner head, which is only half its size,
has no such bone. Plantaris arises from the sesamoid bone,
inseparable from the outer head, and does not become distin-
guishable until about the lower third of the leg; its tendon is
inserted into the fascia of the foot on the inner side of the heel.
We could not separate any soleus from the gastrocnemius
externus.

The common flexor of the toes had an origin mainly fibular,
and sent off five tendons, those of the second and third toes
being closely joimed for the longest portion of their extent.

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 133

Tibialis posticus is double :—a larger muscle, placed rather more
superficially, and inserted anteriorly into the sesamoid at the
base of the hallux; a smaller, deeper muscle, inserted into the
entocuneiform and second and third metatarsals,

The perforated flexor of the toes was a very remarkable
muscle ; it lay, not in the foot as usual, but on the back of the
leg, arising from the surface of the ‘flewor profundus for the
lower half of the leg, exactly like its homotype the flexor sub-
limis in the forearm ; its fleshy portion does not extend below
the ankle; but its tendons pass to the second, third, fourth,
and fifth toes. There is no jlecor accessortus in the foot ; but
a muscle, evidently similar to this in nature, passes from the
caleaneum to the sesamoid at the base of the hallux.

There is a long peroneus which arises from the upper half of
the fibula and from the sesamoid bone of the g gastrocnemius exter-
nus; this is inserted as usual. Peronwusbrevis is alsonormal, and
quite separate from the peronceus quinti, below which it arises.
There is also a peroneus quarti metatars? in front of the quint?,
perfectly separate from it and placed behind the malleolus.

Tibialis anticus and extensor hallucts are normal. The ex-
tensor digitorum sends off four tendons; but those for the
second and third digits are connected until very close to their
insertion.

On the back of the leg there is a large pronator quadratus
like that in the leg of other Marsupials and the crocodile; this
occupied more than half the length.

The foot-muscles are the following :—lfor the hallux there
is an abductor, a bicipital flexor breve 2s, an opponens (from the
inner cuneiform to the metatarsal), and an adductor (from the
second metatarsal to the hallux) ; there is also an “ ¢nterosseus
primus volaris,” like Henle’s interosseous m the manus. For
the little finger there is an abductor proper and a separate ab-
TL ese ee digitt (Flower). There is no
lumbricalis for the second digit ; that for the third comes from
the tendon for the third digit alone; that for the fourth comes
from the third and fourth tendons; and that for the fifth comes
from the fourth tendon.

The cnterossed are arranged as follows :—The dorsal are:
(1) abductor indicts, bicipital ; (2) abductor medit, bicipital ;
(3) abductor quartz, also two- headed ; (4) abductor quar tt, with
only one head from the fourth metatarsal. . The palmar are :
(1) adductor halluctis, as before mentioned; (2) adductor
indicts ; (3) adductor (?) mediv, from the second metatarsal to
the fibular side of the third, whose metatarsal it crosses ;
(4) adductor minimi digiti. There is also a very small oppo-
nens minim digitt inserted into the metatarsal of the fifth toe.

134. Dr. J. H. Gray on some

Prof. Owen has said that among the Marsupials “the Koala
has the best claim to typical preeminence” (Todd’s Cyclop.
vol. iii. p. 329); and certainly from the foregoing account it
will be seen that this animal presents, in its muscular system,
a greater number of structural divergences from the general
placental type than, perhaps, any other Didelphian.

XX.—On a new Genus of Hexaradiate and other Sponges
discovered in the Philippine Islands by Dy. A. B. Meyer.
By Dr. J. BH. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Dr. Apot¥ BerNHARD Mryer has brought with him some

beautiful species of hexaradiate sponges, which he obtained

at ‘Talisay on Cebu, in March 1872, and they are now in the
collection of the British Museum.

the two principal sponges discovered by Dr. Meyer would
form two very distinct families according to the classification

published in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, June, p. 442.

They both belong to the order Coralliospongia. Before I pro-

ceed to define them I may remark that the order may be

divided into three groups:

I, The normal Coralliosponges have elongate subulate rays
to the hexaradiate spicules, which are generally smooth, but
one or more of them may be covered with spines or lobes
directed towards the tip. ‘This group contains the first ten
families in the paper above referred to. The genus Cratero-
morpha here described appears to belong to it.

I]. This group, which may be considered the abnormal
form of the order, has the hexaradiate spines with short uni-
form rays of equal length, each ending in a number of re-
flexed lobes, and forming in their completely developed state
a cube.

It will contain two families, and may be thus divided :—

A. Sponge sessile, attached.
Fam. 1. Carteriade.

B. Sponge free, attached to the bottom of the sea by tufts of

elongate anchoring fibres.

Fam. 2. Meyerinidz.

Sponge elongate, tubular, covered with a cobweb-like netted »
coat, with a circle of tufts of anchoring fibres at the base, which
extend more than halfway through the length of the body, and

Philippine-Island Sponges. i349)

then, by repetition of a shorter kind, are continued on to the
apex, where they also form a circle of tufts round the margin
of the apical aperture.

~ Genus 1. Meyerina.

III. This group, which is equally abnormal, has the hexa-
radiate spicules with very short cubic rays. The genus Awvos
alone belongs to this group.

I have described this sponge under the name of “ Meyerella
claviformis,”’ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for July 1872, p. 76;
but as I am told that the generic name of ‘‘Afeyerella” has been
used for a genus of small Lepidoptera, 1 propose to alter this
name to Meyerina claviformis.

Dr. Meyer brought a second specimen of this beautiful
sponge. ‘The club is rather smaller compared with the size
of the stem, which is considerably thicker than in the other
specimen. The elongate transparent spicules by which the
sponge is anchored to the bottom are placed in very numerous
cylindrical fascicles rather close together in a circle on the
edge of the truncated circular base of the stem of the sponge.
These cylindrical rope-like fascicles may be seen to extend
in the way above mentioned throughout the whole length of
the body, terminating in small tufts of naked spicules round
the apex of the club; while the whole surface appears covered
with hexaradiate spicules, like those of Moltenta—that is to
say, with the external end of the axis abortive.

Mr. Carter has kindly examined this sponge microscopically,
and in a note observes :—“ It is a true Oarteria, so nearly
allied in the form of the spicules that but for its general form it
might be a second species of the genus. ‘he net-like struc-
ture over this sponge is just that of Carterta in spicular com-
position, as already mentioned.”

The discovery of a second species of the genus, or rather
family Carteriade, decidedly shows that the sponge that is
found parasitic on the Hyalonema cannot be a part of that
genus, as Dr. Bowerbank, Dr. Wyville Thomson, and others
have supposed; for no one can believe tor a minute that the
free clavitorm Philippine Carteria is any part of a Fyalonema,
which it ought to be if the attached Japanese Carterta is only
a state of that genus, or that one species of the genus is only
a state of another most distinct genus, and the other species a
distinct genus by itself; for surely Meyerina claviformis is not
a state of Hyalonema! Indeed Mr. Carter observes that “Meyc-
rina is more nearly allied to Holtenia than Carterta; but thoy
are both allied in their spicules and differ chiefly in their

136 Dr. J. E. Gray on some

general structure and form.” Iam glad to state that Mr. Carter
has undertaken to examine this sponge more in detail.

The other sponge is of the shape and size of a large goblet,
with a cylindrical stem nearly as long as the cup, which I
propose to describe as |

CRATEROMORPHA.

Sponge attached to marine bodies, goblet-shaped.

Body hollow, vasiform, with a circular mouth, swollen at
the bottom, placed at the top of the stem, and of very different
structure from it, the line of demarcation being distinctly
marked. Vase rather dilated and thick at the bottom, very thin
towards the edge, which is terminated by a very thin mem-
brane-like margin. ‘he outer surface of the vase pierced with
cylindrical cavities, and the whole surface covered with a mi-
nute network formed of the four rays of hexaradiate spines,
which are so placed as to form square meshes. The internal
cavity large, reaching nearly to the bottom of the vase, and
furnished at the base with very large irregularly shaped oscules,
which become smaller, more regular, and oblong-lanceolate
about the middle of the walls, and circular in the upper part,
gradually diminishing in size as they approach the margin of
the cavity, where they are smallest.

Stem thick, cylindrical, with numerous parallel, similar,
longitudinal, cylindrical tubular spaces in a felt of spicules;
covered externally with a layer of short robust ones arranged
longitudinally, and on this, again, the minute network with
square meshes, like that on the club, finally ending below in
a multitude of spiculiferous filaments extending some way
into the mass of sandy mud at its base.

Crateromorpha Meyert.

Hab. Philippine Islands, Talisay, on Cebu, March 1872
(Dr. A. B. Meyer).

This sponge is like a large goblet, with the body about 34
inches long, and a thick stem of nearly the same length, which
is attached to a mass of hard mud. ‘The stem is pale reddish
brown, and the body greenish white; in its dry state, and
most probably bleached.

The cruciform central rays of the hexaradiate spicules are
short. and placed regularly perpendicularly—that is to say,
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the body—and the others
horizontally, or transversely with regard to the imaginary axis
of the sponge. The rays of each spicule are free from those of
ite neighbour, but overlap each other to their full extent, and
so form a regular network of square meshes, as in the genus

Philippine-Island Sponges. 137

Farrea, where the spicules are united by their rays but im-
bedded in glassy fibre; hence, as Mr. Carter observes, Dr.
Bowerbank’s mistake of calling it “ fistulous siliceous fibre ”’
(B.8.); whereas in the genus //o/tenta and allied genera the
cruciform rays of the hexaradiate spicules are placed obliquely
with regard to the axis, forming a network of rhombic meshes.

This sponge evidently belongs to the first group of the
Coralliospongia, and the first section of them, as defined in my
paper above referred to (p. 450), and will form a family distinct
from those there defined, which may be thus characterized :-—

Fam. Crateromorphide.

Sponge cup-shaped, attached by an elongated pedicel, formed
of numerous short spicules. Body of sponge covered externally
with hexaradiate spicules, the outer ray of which is aborted,
placed in longitudinal and transverse lines, making a square
mesh ; hollow, with large oscules, which diminish in size as
they reach the margin of the cup. Stem formed of numerous
cylindrical tubes, situated in a spiculous felt; ending in a

bunch of filaments sunk in the mud.

Rossella philippensis.

Dr. Meyer also brought from Cebu a sponge the size of a
moderately large walnut (that is, about 14 inch long), regular,
oblong, smooth, thick, spongy, truncated at the top, with
large circular apertures, and with a large deep cavity occupy-
ing nearly the whole of the body of the sponge. The hinder
half of the sponge has sundry distant cylindrical tufts of elon-
gated siliceous fibres spreading out from the sponge and then
directed backwards.

This is very like the Zetclla polywra of Schmidt (Atlantic
Sponge-Fauna, t. vi. f. 8), the type of my genus Lophurella ;
but the Philippine sponge is oblong, longer than broad, smooth
on the external surface, and truncated above, with a large
mouth, in fact like a round-based tumbler.

If this is the young state of another sponge of a different
form, which is possible, it is a giant of its kind. The Zetilla
polyura of Schmidt is only } inch long; and the young form
of Tethya antarctica described by Mr. Carter is much smaller, in
fact microscopic ; whereas this is more than an inch long and
comparatively broad, and resembles the goblet of Crateromorpha
Meyert. It is not the young of that sponge, as Mr. Carter
shows that the spicules are markedly different; and we have
no other Philippine sponge of which it could be the young.
Mr. Carter has kindly sent me the following account of his ex-
amination of the sponge :—

138 Dr. J. 1. Gray on some Philippine-Island Sponges.

“This is a Jtossella, as you will see directly, not 2. antare-
tica, simply because the arms of the surface or body in Lt. an-
tarctica ave spined; in the Philippine one they are smooth.

“ Dr. Wyville Thomson sent me a woodcut of this sponge,
noticing its resemblance to Schmidt's Tettlla polywra. 1
wrote back and said it was allied to Rossella antarctica and not
a Tethya at all, for all its spicules, of which there are only two
kinds apparent in the figure, are, or should be, fowr-armed. |

“No Yethya has more than three-armed spicules; but his
artist had put in three-armed at the end of the tailed ones.
Now I see how the artist has overlooked this important charac-
ter, just as Schmidt states, at the end of his preface to his
Adriatic sponges, ‘an artist by profession fails here.’

“There is no such spicule, fowr-armed recurved, in any other
sponge. Was I wrong in stating this as the peculiarity of
Rossella? Wave we not now found out a Philippine one by it ?

“ Tas not Thomson’s artist, because he did not know the
value of this fourth arm in the tailed spicules, omitted to put
in more than three, although he has put in four in the body-
spicules? And do we not here see the disadvantage under
which a professed artist labours, as Schmidt has stated ?

“T find the Philippine Rossella has been put into a bottle with
the two other species that you sent down in the box, or at least
with the goblet-sponge and the Muplectella®, because it contains
spicules of the latter. When the heads of spicules with recurved
spines get into other sponges they break off and remain there,
because being barbed like an arrow they easily go in, but never
come out again; and you can always tell that they do not be-
long to the species, because they have their heads where their
tails ought to be. No spicule has a head like this 7 the sponge :
it is always at the extremity of the long spicule, of course.
Hence it was that | found so many of the four-armed headed
spicules stuck into Tethya antarctica, and was thus able to
make out the antarctic deep-sea genus Lossella.

“There are several of the spicules of the goblet-shaped
sponge [ Crateromorpha] in the surface of the Philippine Mos-
sella, especially the minute spicules, somewhat like in structure
though not in form to those of Muplectella.”

Mr. Carter, in a subsequent note, states that the minute
spicules i Crateromorpha and Rossella ave very much alike,
and that they both contain crucial-headed ones which are
almost undistinetishable from each other.

He also adds that Dr. W.'lhomson has sent him the speci-
men of Rossella above alluded to, and that it turns out to be a

* (It was contained in the same bottle of spirits as Luplectella—J. Mi. G.)

Dr. J. E. Gray on Codiophyllum. 139

third species of that genus, being widely different from the
antarctic and Philippine ones.

Euplectella aspergillum.

Dr. A. B. Meyer has brought home, and-placed in the Bri-
tish Museum, two specimens Of this sponge in spirits from the
Philippines, which are entirely covered with a thick coat of
sareode like the bark on a Gorgonia, but softer, so that the
siliceous fibres are entirely hidden from view. No one would
suspect that this sponge had such a beautiful lace-like struc-
ture, but simply a netted or pierced tube, with irregular, cir-
cular, thicker hoops. The flesh or sarcode is of a dark Bravia

colour, but most likely is coloured by the action of the spirit.

Esperiade.—Along with these sponges were sent some frag-
ments of a sponge, according to Mr. Carter’s examination,
} ; : ihe : : J
“nearly allied to Halichondria incrustans, with three kinds of
spicules :—1, large, subulate, smooth; 2, bihamate; 3, equi-
anchorate, larger than the bihamate.”

Mr. Carter’s microscopical examination of Meyerina clavi-
formis and Crateromorpha Meyert will be found at pp. 110-118
of this Number of the ‘ Annals.’

XXI.—On Codiophyllum, a new Genus of Unicellular Green
Alge from Port Natal. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.
[Plate IX. ]

AMONG a large collection of corals and corallines from Port
Natal, sent by Colonel Bolton, I observed some specimens of
a green spongy alga of a thick cloth-lke texture, more or less
of a wedge-shape, and borne on a solid, cylindrical stem,
which is branched at the bottom, and may "be a distinct Rho-
dosperm Alga on which it is parasitic. ‘This stem pierces and
supports the broad, expanded frond, and is branched so that
the branches support the different parts of the expansion.
When the felt-like cloth is carefully examined, it is found to
consist of a very fine network of fine cylindrical tubular fibre,
which inosculates in every direction, leaving a minute mesh.
When looked at in a mass, the mesh seems to be arranged
in very obscure circles concentric to the outer margin, indi-
cating the lines of growth, the mesh of the outer edge ‘being
incomplete. The stem is tough and fleshy when soaked in
water, but becomes cartilaginous when dry; in the younger
specimens it is tortuous and slightly branched, each branch

140 Dr. J. E. Gray on Codiophyllum.

ending in a triangular, wedge-shaped frond, with the stem
extending a slight distance from its base; the stem is thick
and gradually tapers as it extends in length, and is affixed to
a rock by a rather extended base. The older fronds become
more or less semicircular, with one or two slight lobes on the
circumference, and the stem becomes divided at the base of the
frond into several branches, which spread out in a palmated
manner and thus support the different parts of the frond, which
rarely throws out a rounded lobe of a similar structure from
its surface.

The stem when wet is flesh-coloured, becoming dark brown
or blackish when dry; the frond is green, like the rest of the
chlorosperm Algz.

This plant evidently forms a new family ; and I do not know
to what existing group of the green Alge to refer it. The
filaments of which the felted net is composed are cylindrical,
all of the same size, and in external appearance like the fibre
of Cladophora; but they appear to be entirely destitute of
articulations, and they are very unlike the continuous fibre of
the Oscillatoria or Calothrix, and they seem to have most
alliance with Bryopsis.

This plant, when roughly dried with other seaweeds as it
comes out of the sea (and | have little doubt it is so when it is
growing), has a matted green frond which is thicker and more
opaque in the older and more developed specimens, when it
looks like a piece of felted cloth just showing the internal
stems through some parts of it; but when it is washed in fresh
water and dried between blotting-paper with just sufficient
pressure to prevent its curling, the frond loses a great part of
its thickness, becomes nearly transparent, shows the details of
the network and the internal part of the stem through the
substance, very unlike the living state of the plant.

The genus may be thus defined :—

Cobpi0PHYLLUM.
The frond expanded, formed of uniform, minute network,
_ matted together so as to form a cloth, and consisting of uni-
form cylindrical tubular fibres supported or parasitic on a car-
tilagimous solid stem, which pierces the base of the frond and
is affixed to the rocks by an expanded base.

Codiophyllum natalense. Pl. IX.

Stem branched, tapering, ending in a triangular wedge-

shaped frond, which becomes more or less semicircular, and
sometimes furnished with one or more lobes on the surface.

Hab. Coast of Natal.

Mr. H. J. Carter’s Answer to Dr. Bowerbank. 141

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.
Fig. 1. The adult frond.
Fig. 2. The worn stems of an adult frond; part of the network still
remaining.
Fig. 3. A young specimen with root dried after being soaked in fresh water.
Fig. 4. Part of the frond magnified, showing the imperfect meshes in pro-
cess of formation on the margin.

XXI.—Answer to Dr. Bowerbank’s “ Observations on Mr.
Carter's paper cc.” in the last Number of the ‘ Annals.’
By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &c.

In reply to Dr. Bowerbank’s criticisms on my paper “On
two new Sponges from the Antarctic Sea &c.,” in the ‘ Annals’
of last June, I can only state that I shall be quite satisfied
with the verdict that a perusal of our respective papers may
give. I employ no artist, make my own drawings, write my
own descriptions to the best of my ability, and with nothing
to compensate me but the hope that I am communicating the
truth, and, in many instances, saving future students from
losing time in labouring to understand that which too fre-
quently is imaginary, misconceived, or utterly unintelligible.

Truly it has been said, that “ of all extravagance, waste of
time is the greatest;’’ and what is this but a grievous waste
entailed upon posterity (if his works ever reach it) of an ig-
norant or unscrupulous author.

In criticising Dr. Bowerbank’s publications I am not criti-
cising Dr. Bowerbank (personally we should not know each
other in the street), but simply, as I have before stated, en-
deavouring to save time for those who may come after us in
similar inquiries.

Controversial disputes afford very little interest to any but
the parties immediately concerned, and therefore ought not to be
allowed to occupy the pages of a valuable scientific journal.

Dr. Bowerbank’s and my own descriptions are now before
the public; and a practical examination of them concerns the
public and posterity much more than it will ever concern us.

I have not time to make finished drawings, but my sketches,
I have no doubt, will serve, at least diagrammatically, with
my descriptions to convey the meaning I intend to an intel-
ligent naturalist.

Besides, however “talented and accurate a microscopical
artist”? may be, Dr. Bowerbank will hardly deny, I should
think, what Dr. Schmidt states on this subject at the end of
the preface to his work on the Adriatic Sponges, viz. :—‘‘ Ein
Maler von Profession wiirde die Charaktere vieler Species
kaum haben ausdriicken kénnen, &c.”’

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. iia!

142 Royal Society :-—

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
ROYAL SOCIETY.
May 16, 1872.—Francis Galton, M.A., Vice-President, in the Chair.

“Remarks on the sense of Sight in Birds, accompanied by a de-
scription of the Eye, and particularly of the Ciliary Muscle, in three
species of the order Rapaces.” By Rosert James Leg, M.A.,
M.D.

Ir is proposed in this communication to describe certain peculiarities
in the eye of the bird as compared with the eyes of other Vertebrata,
and, further, to examine to what extent those peculiarities enable us
to explain the remarkable powers of sight with which all species of
birds are more or less highly endowed.

Those who study the habits and modes of existence of the lower
animals, find great interest in applying to various phenomena con-
nected with them the results of anatomical investigation, and in
endeavouring to discover such causes, or means adequate to produce
such effects, as to render the supposition of the existence of an
indefinite property like instinct very frequently unnecessary.

This method it is my desire to apply in the explanation of those
high and distant flights which are performed by certain species of
birds in search of food or in their migrations to different localities.

For us it is difficult to form a clear conception of the power of
sight possessed by birds if we only use our own faculties in this
respect as the standard of comparison; by which I mean to imply
that the mind must be prepared for the consideration of the pheno-
mena referred to by observing in detail numerous important differ-
ences in the structure of the eye, which combine to facilitate a
conception of ideas otherwise beyond the reasonable limits to which
even imagination might extend. .

This field of inquiry will long engage the attention of the naturalist
and anatomist; indeed it may be said to be inexhaustible; and I
feel considerable hesitation in offering a contribution insignificantly
small to the elucidation of a subject of such magnitude.

We may acquire some idea of the sight of the bird by comparing
the dimensions of the eye with those of the brain or the optic lobes ;
and by arranging the measurements thus obtained, and referring
them to some fixed standard, we may estimate the relative and
individual powers of vision enjoyed by different species. In illustra-
tion of this we have an instance, in the case of one of the birds which
I propose to describe minutely in this communication, in which the
eye is actually considerably larger than in the human species; and
we have a still more striking example, considering the size of the bird,
in the Goura coronata.

Again, if we regard the eye as an optical instrument, we may
estimate its efficiency by examining the internal structures on which
the formation and perception of the image depend,—such as the

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 148

size and coefficient of refraction of the lens, the extent and character
of the retina, and particularly those differences of minute structure
which have relation to susceptibility to light, by which the night-
flying birds are distinguished from the day-flyers. Nor does the in-
quiry into the effects of domestication upon the sight appear less
interesting.

It is only to point out the various ways in which we may deal with
this subject that I have mentioned these different lines of research,
and in order that it may be understood that I have not overlooked
their importance. It is to one particular property of the eye that
my own observations have beeri chiefly directed, namely the power
of accommodation for distance; and I shall endeavour to show that
in birds great range of vision depends upon the development and
character of the ciliary muscle, to which all are agreed that the power
of adjustment is to be attributed.

It is chiefly, then, a comparison of the ciliary muscle in different
birds to which I invite attention, assuming the perfection of the sight
to depeud on this power of accommodation, and that again on the
character of the muscle. Let me first mention the general opinion
entertained by those who are best acquainted with the habits of
that class of birds which astonish us by the rapidity and duration
of their flights, namely the pigeons, in regard to the means by which
they accomplish them. In his interesting work on this subject Mr.
Tegetmeier gives his reasons for concluding that “ homing,” as it is
termed in the Antwerp pigeon, is not the result of “instinct,” but
of “observation.” ‘These pigeons require to be trained stage by
stage, or they are certain to be lost. ‘The best of them refuse to fly
in a fog or in the dark. They crave in new localities some known
landmark; and hence their gradually increasing gyrations, until
having descried some familiar object, they recollect their route and
fly straight ahead. The objection that no pigeon can possibly see
for two hundred miles ahead is met by the details of aéronautic ex-
perience. Mr. Glaisher, half a mile aloft in air, could embrace in
his “ bird’s-eye view” the course of the Thames from the Nore to
Richmond ; and Mr. Wheelwright, though puzzled to account for
the flying pigeons ‘‘ homing”’ across seas (as from London to Ant-
werp), which can offer no landmark, is disposed to attribute their
power of doing so to their habit of soaring round, circling, and
beating about until, sooner or later, they can descry their familiar
guide-posts.

My own observations entirely support Mr. Tegetmeier’s conclu-
sions. This part of my subject is one of general interest; and I
trust that I shall be pardoned for attempting to alleviate the tedious-
ness of anatomical details by this digression.

It must clearly be understood that perfection of sight for very near
objects is as important as very extensive range, and that the chief
function of the ciliary muscle is to adjust the sight for the former
rather than for the latter. When the eye is at rest (that is to say,
when the muscle is relaxed) vision of very distant objects is permitted ;
and it is when the distance is diminished to a very few inches, and

1s

144 Royal Society :-—

in small species of birds to considerably less than an inch, that the
action of the muscle is exerted.

The exact functions performed by the ciliary muscle in all those
vertebrata in which it exists are still undecided ; but it is not difficult
to reconcile the accounts which have been given by different anato-
mists of its structure, if we are aware of the fact that the muscle
does not possess the same characters in all classes of animals—
indeed, that it is not precisely the same in those that are very nearly
allied ; so that it is important, particularly in the case of birds, as
will be seen, to mention the species under consideration.

It may be stated generally that in birds it is developed in a re-
markable degree ; in fish it is entirely wanting; in the mammalia it
varies directly in proportion to the powers of sight possessed by the
species, except in the feline class and in those animals which enjoy
the power of nocturnal vision, and in which the ciliary muscle is
peculiarly large and differently developed from the same structure in
other mammals.

The three specimens which are to be described belong to the Eagle
Owl, the Egyptian Vulture, and the Buzzard. They were brought
from Egypt by a gentleman who shot the birds himself, and removed
the eyes while in the fresh state, preserving them in spirit of wine
till he sent them to me.

The eye of the Eagle Owl presents in the most striking degree the
peculiar characters of the class to which it belongs. The first of
these are its shape and size, too well known to require description,
adapted as they are to the very shallow cavities of the orbits.

In the Egyptian Vulture the pyramidal shape of the eye is less
remarkable, and a slight approach is observable in it to the spherical
globe. Inthe Buzzard this is still more marked, and the eye resembles
as much the eye of the Pigeon as it does that of the Eagle Owl.

In examination of specimens which have been preserved in spirit,
it is necessary to restore the pliancy of the tissues of the ciliary
muscle by allowing them to remain in water for some days; and I
may observe that as this condition must be obtained in order to
make satisfactory preparations, the method of using solutions of
chromic acid or bichromate of potash to enable the anatomist to
make sections is not to be recommended, if the object be to ascertain
the dimensions of the muscle and the elasticity of the ligament, which
will be presently described. It need hardly he stated that the best
mode of treating the eye is to freeze it and then make sections.

The strong plates of bone which exist in the sclerotic of birds
preserve the shape of the eye sufficiently well to allow of the dimen-
sions being ascertained after it has been preserved in spirit.

In the Eagle Owl the dimensions are as follow :—

in.
iamieter Of COMPA. st es... ee f
Wiameter’ot base Of CVE «eas. eres 135
Antere-postetior length ..25.-.-..........- 15%
ALPLETAiammetor OF fefigesemn. <. os. sae eer fh

nie

Antero-posterior diameter of lens ..........

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 145

The shape of the lens does not appear to be altered by the action
of alcohol; but the size is diminished, and the measurements just
stated are less than they would be found to be if the lens had been
perfectly fresh.

The eye is first to be divided into halves by cutting through
the sclerotic, choroid, cornea, and iris. We may regard the sclerotic
as a hollow case enclosing a sphere, of which the choroid is the
proper covering, and which sphere is attached to its case by tissues
of highly elastic and muscular properties, by which a certain amount
of movement is capable of being effected in the parts on which the
formation of the image depends. It is to be observed, however, that the
posterior surface of the choroid is kept in close apposition to the
inner and posterior surface of the sclerotic, so that movement of the
anterior parts is not communicated to that part on which the optic
nerve is expanded. In the eye of the Eagle Owl these conditions
are obtained in the following manner.

The whole of the posterior surface of the choroid which corresponds
to the optic disk is kept in close apposition to the sclerotic by the
direct attachment of the circumference of the part immediately
beneath the margin of the retina; it is also fixed where the nerve
passes through the sclerotic, while delicate fibres from the choroid
keep it in its position at other points.

The anterior part of the choroid, on the contrary, is not in contact
with the sclerotic, as the ciliary muscle and the structure I have termed
the posterior elastic ligament intervene.

This division of the choroid is not artificial, but is clearly defined
by a difference of structure. The posterior part is but slightly
vascular, is not elastic, is of considerable tenuity, and has greater
resemblance in its general characters to the choroid of fish than to
that of the mammalia.

The anterior portion is covered on its internal surface by the ciliary
processes, which extend to the angle of curvature of the posterior
part of the eye. The tissue of this part of the choroid is of peculiar
character ; it is dense, strong, and imelastic, and appears to be com-
posed of delicate fibrous tissue. The combination of these characters
enables it to preserve its symmetrical shape, and ensure to some
degree the preservation of the structures within it. It possesses a
rigidity which may be compared to that of ordinary writing-paper,
and is of about the same thickness. The anterior part of the choroid
is attached to the sclerotic by another structure—a system of fine
elastic fibres which pass from the corneal margin of the sclerotic to
the line of union between the iris and the choroid, and for which I
proposed the name of anterior elastic filaments. Between the an-
terior elastic filaments and the posterior elastic ligament (a distance
in the eye of the Eagle Owl of nearly five eighths of an inch) is
interposed the ciliary muscle. The body of the muscle is attached
to the line of union of the sclerotic and cornea, so that it may be said
to arise from the anterior angle of curvature. The greater part of the
posterior portion of the muscle is of delicate tendinous structure ; its
line of insertion into the choroid is the same as, but on the opposite

146 Royal Society :—

side of, the line of insertion of the posterior elastic ligament. The
breadth of the latter structure is about one eighth of an inch, while
the length of the anterior elastic filaments is nearly the same. Thus,
passing from before backwards, we have the anterior elastic filaments,
the body of the ciliary muscle, its long delicate tendinous portion,
and lastly the posterior elastic ligament. To exhibit the structures
satisfactorily, the best plan is to make a section of the choroid and
sclerotic of one sixteenth of an inch in thickness, and after fixing the
two ends of the section on a layer of cork with needles, to dissect the
muscle under water or aleohol—a very simple process if a magnifying-
glass of an inch focus is employed. It is only necessary to draw the
iris gently away from the sclerotic so as to extend the anterior elastic
filaments, fixing it with a needle, and then to do the same with the
choroid, taking care to hold that membrane at a point posterior to
the line of insertion of the posterior elastic ligament.

The length of the ciliary muscle is about three eighths of an inch.
I have attempted to preserve sections made in this way in Canada
balsam, but have found that rupture of the ligament usually takes
place, I presume from its tenacity being destroyed by the action of
the fluid. It is on that part of the choroid which hes between its
two lines of attachment, on its internal surface, that the ciliary pro-
cesses are developed, and to the anterior part. of those processes that
the crystalline lens is attached. Contraction of the ciliary muscle, it
is reasonable to suppose, would produce a change in the position of
the lens, and would take place when the object to which the sight
was directed was close to the eye—that is to say, the muscle is
employed in accommodation for short range of vision. The position
of rest is restored by the posterior elastic ligament, which acts in
direct opposition to the muscle.

The eye of the Vulture is smaller than that of the Owl, is not so
decidedly pyramidal in shape, and may be placed between the latter
and the eye of the Buzzard. The chief difference, however, between
them is in the greater degree of concavity which the posterior portion
of the sclerotic assumes; so that in the Owl the retina lies on a flatter
surface than in the Buzzard, while in that respect the Vulture is be-
tween the two.

The dimensions of the eye of the Vulture are as follow :—

in.
Diameter of cores 2 tk. Ce ee es ae 7
Lateral diameter of the sclerotic in its broadest part.... 15%
Antero-posterior diameter of eye ...........+...... 42
Meneth of-ciliary muscle*)-eopee es se. Se ee ene
Breadth of the posterior elastic ligament ..!......... ay

Length of the anterior elastic filaments approximately the same.

With regard to the anterior elastic filaments and the posterior
elastic ligament, it is unnecessary to make further remark, beyond
that they resemble those structures in the eye of the Owl.

In the Buzzard the dimensions of the eye and its structures are as
follow :—

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 147

in.
Diameter Gt comer. | hat bse. 150 Se alfele es sess) os zi
AiaternMainmmeterot eye sO SS 2.120%. ene Noa l
Antero-posterior diameter of eye .................. 3
Kener ciliary wrasele Yee 2 0,05) ae Gee sees a5
Length of posterior elastic ligament ................ } q
Length of anterior elastic filament ................ 16

In order to ascertain the mechanical effect produced by the ciliary
muscle, the simple experiment may be performed of applying traction,
by means of a pair of forceps, on the choroid, the dissection being
arranged and fixed as I have described. It will readily be seen that
the elastic ligament acts in direct opposition to the muscle, and in
the living eye has the power of restoring the parts to the condition
of rest.

The ciliary muscle is composed of striated fibre of very distinct
character. It varies, asis seen in the three examples described, in
length and amount of muscular tissue. The tendon in the Owl is
long and the body of the muscle short ; but in the other species, as
in most birds, the muscular fibres extend to a great length, if not
entirely from the origin to the insertion of the muscle. These minute
differences should be pointed out in detail in the case of each species
of bird.

The elastic ligament is composed of very delicate elastic tissue, the
microscopical character of which is well defined.

On the peculiar nature of the anterior elastic filaments I beg to
postpone any decided opinion.

With regard to the nerves which supply the ciliary muscle and
the iris, I have no particular remarks to offer, as the description
which I gave some years ago of the ganglia and plexuses on the
ciliary nerves in the eye of the Pheasant will apply generally to all
birds. Whether the contraction of the iris and the accommodation
of the sight be voluntary or involuntary actions on the part of birds
we cannot say positively ; I am inclined to believe that the latter is
the case.

For the sake of convenience, and to render any further researches
on the dimensions of the different parts of the eye in other species
of birds symmetrical with those contained in this communication, I
have arranged the principal facts in a tabular form (see p. 148).

From this Table we may draw the following conclusions :—
that in the Eagle Owl the range of vision is small, the power of
accommodation very rapid ; in the Vulture range of vision is great,
the power of accommodation considerable, but slower than in the
Owl ; in the Buzzard the range of vision is greater still, and the power
of accommodation capable of being readily and extensively exercised.

These conclusions, I think, will be found to accord with the obser-
vations of those who have had opportunities of making themselves
acquainted with the habits of the birds during life.

It has been usual for those who have devoted much attention to
the physiology of vision to propose some original and independent

148 Royal Society :-—

explanation of the means by which accommodation for distance is
effected, if their researches have been attended with the observation
of any previously unknown facts connected with the subject, either
experimental or anatomical. It appears to me that as yet we have
not sufficient data to afford a perfectly satisfactory explanation of
that remarkable property possessed by the eye, partly on account
of the difficulty of ascertaining the exact functions of different struc-
tures, and particularly by reason of the very various conditions which
the same structures assume in various species of vertebrate animals.
The line of investigation which is pointed out in this communication
it is by no means certain will assist in the solution of the problem
of the means by which adjustment for distance is effected ; but I am
inclined to think that we have not yet exhausted all the resources
which careful anatomical inquiry places at our command, and that
when a sufficient number of details have been collected, the subject
will be ina more suitable state for the application of optical laws than
it is at present.

f Egyptian
Eagle Owl. Vitanc Buzzard.
Diameter of cornea .................-4-- 875 506 4
Greatest diameter of sclerotic (trans-

WLS essere see es ssceeeee eee pete 1-312 1:182 1
Antero-posterior diameter ............ 1375 ‘932 ‘75
Diameter of lens (transversely) ...... 506 Not recorded. 343
Antero-posteriorly .............s0sce00 “Ona din il Abeta “22
Length of ciliary muscle ............... ‘375 3 187
Breadth of posterior elastic ligament "125 ‘1 063
Length of anterior elastic filaments . 125 i] 063
Character of ciliary muscle............ Body short, Muscular Muscular

tendon long. | fibres form | fibres extend
more than | from origin
three fourths} to insertion.

of it.

Supplement, containing a description of the Eye in Rhea Ameri-
cana, Phenicopterus antiquorum, and Aptenodytes Humboldtii :—

In the American Ostrich the eye is large, and the structures con-
cerned in the adjustment for distance are well developed. In the
Ostrich (Struthio camelus) the observation was first made by Sir
P. Crampton of the existence of the ciliary muscle; and as the views
of physiologists regarding the mechanical functions of the muscle in
the accommodation of sight were various, while numerous inquiries

Mr. BR. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 149

were made very soon after the publication of this new anatomical fact,
Iam gratified in having the opportunity of pointing out the cause of
the discrepancies in opinion which have continued to the present
time.

The description which Crampton has given is correct so far as it
goes, but it was limited to that part of the ciliary muscle which forms
the thickest portion of it—that is to say, the dense part which lies
closest to the margin of the cornea. The tendon of the muscle and
its insertion into the choroid were not observed by Crampton, and
the structure termed the posterior elastic ligament was overlooked.
It can thus be explained how it was that the deflection of the margin
of the cornea and consequent change in its curvature were advanced
as the means by which accommodation was effected.

The eye of Rhea americana appears to be very similar to that of
Struthio camelus, though not quite so large. The globe is of irre-
gular shape, and bulges out both laterally and vertically ; its diameter
in the former direction is an inch and two thirds, in the latter an inch
and a half, and antero-posteriorly an inch and one third.

The sclerotic is not particularly thick, and contains but slightly
developed osseous structure. The crystalline lens is about half an
inch in its lateral diameter, and one third of an inch in its antero-
posterior diameter. The ciliary muscle is large and strong, the body
thick, and the fibres diminishing in size as they become tendinous
near their insertion ; its length is 53; inch.

The anterior and posterior elastic ligaments are each about ;3,
inch in length, though it is to be understood that their elasticity is so
great that they might be stretched to a considerably greater length.

In the first part of this communication I expressed some doubt
regarding the microscopical character of the anterior elastic liga-
ments ; indeed the term ligament was not applied to them, as they
did not possess the same distinct character as the posterior elastic
ligament.

In all the species of birds which have come under my observation,
the microscopical character of the last-mentioned structure was the
same. In the Rhea the anterior elastic filaments are distinctly com-
posed of the same kind of elastic fibres ; their colour is a light grey ;
they coil up very readily when torn from one another with needles ;
they are to some extent covered with fine granular or spongy tissue,
which at first conceals their elastic character; they are continuous
and of equal diameter from their origin to their insertion, and are
united more closely than in most birds, so that the filamentous cha-
racter so clearly seen in the Owls is not observed.

A more complete investigation into the anatomy of this part of
the subject allows of the conclusion that the anterior elastic filaments
are composed of cellular and elastic tissue combined in different
proportions, and that the differences in their strength, elasticity, and
appearance depend on the collection of the filaments into fibres of
varying sizes, or their approximation so as to form a continuous sus-
pensory band between the iris and the cornea.

The iris in this bird is not composed entirely of muscular fibres

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 12

150 Miscellaneous.

as in many other genera, but is soft and spongy in its genera]
character, and more like the iris in mammalia than in birds.

As it is desirable to limit myself to those particular structures
which are concerned in the accommodation of the eye for distance,
deferring for the present certain general conclusions which fresh
observations are required to confirm, I shall leave to the considera-
tion of the naturalist the subjoined facts arranged in a tabulated form,
and which appear to me to be applicable to the explanation of the
habits of the birds by anatomical peculiarities.

Elastic ligament.

Cornea. | Sclerotic. Lens. ree
Posterior.| Anterior.
in, in. in. in. in, in.
( |vertical $3\vertical 14 jlateral 23 3s oh =e
eal
Rhea ameri- ;
Bi } lateral 43/lateral 134
\ ant.-post.1,%5 ant.-post. 34 fibres long.
vertical 3#/lateral 44Jateral ar er Fa
_|Phenicopterus
antiquorum ) \lateral 7 \ant.-post. 3§/ant.-post. 35,'gradually di-
more. minishing.
[ fillateral i4jlateral =% Yr +s ve
Aptenodytes
Humboldtii ant.-post. }#/ant.-post. ,8\gradually di-
| minishing.
MISCELLANEOUS.

On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spelling.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.RS. &e.

Lamarck established the genus 7ethya in the first volume of the
‘Annales du Muséum’ and in the ‘ Hist. Nat. des Anim. sans Vert.’
ii. p. 384 (1816). As usual in the latter work he uses the French
generic name Téthie and prints it in capitals, and the Latin generic
name J'ethia in common Roman characters: but the 7 is evidently an
oversight or misprint ; for to each of the six species he gives the name
of Tethya, and it is so in the second edition. This name so written
has been almost universally followed.

Dr. Johnston, in his ‘ British Sponges,’ p. 81, writes it ‘ Tethea,
Lamarck,” but quotes Tethia or Tethya, Lam., les T’hethyes, Cuv., and
Tethium, Blainy., and observes it is not the “ T'ethea of Pliny,” and
that Bohadsch has given the name of Tethyum to the Tethis of Linneus.

Dr. Bowerbank, in his ‘ British Sponges’ (i. p.181 and ii. p.6), adopts
Dr. Johnston’s name of Tethea, but quotes it as Lamarck’s, probably
from Johnston. In the next page he quotes Milne-Edwards’s edition

Miscellaneous. 151

of Lamarck, and gives Téthie as the French and Tethea erroneously
as the Latin name, and quotes Tethea lyncurium and T. cranium as
types, names not found in Lamarck.

Note on the Systematic Name of the Walrus. By Dr. W. Peters.

Although Steenstrup and Sundevall, nearly thirteen years ago,
showed that Linné, in the first edition of his Systema Naturee ’
(1735), applied the generic name Odobenus to the walrus, and that
at the same time the name 7’richechus had been given by Artedi and
Linné alike to the manatee, which they then considered to belong
to the class of fishes, it seems that these facts have not been so much
appreciated as they ought to be. Linné continued to apply the
name Z’richechus exclusively to the “ hairy” fish, which he after-
wards united with Hlephas, Bradypus, Myrmecophaga, and Manis
in his order Bruta. This may be seen even as late as the tenth
edition of the ‘ Systema Naturee’ (1758), wherein the walrus figures
at the same time as Phoca rosmarus amongst the Fere. Only in
the twelfth edition of his ‘Systema Nature’ (1766), p. 49, Linné
added the walrus, as a second species, to the manatee in Artedi’s
genus 7'richechus, upon the presumption that it had ‘ dentes pri-
mores nullos utrinque.”

It seems therefore quite clear that it is wrong to apply the generic
name T'richechus (belonging to the manatee) to the walrus.

We have another, quite analogous case in zoology of the mis-
application of a generic name, namely that of Ursus labiatus,
which, in consequence of losing its front teeth easily, was trans-
ferred from the Fere to the Bruta or Edentata, and stands as
Bradypus ursinus in the systematic arrangements of Pennant and
Shaw. But no one, I think, would contend that we ought to apply the
name Bradypus, previously used for the Sloths, to the Ursus labiatus.

The Clustered Sea-Polype (Umbellula greenlandica). By Dr. J. E.
Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Two specimens of this very rare and extraordinarily large Radiate
animal from Greenland were obtained during the Swedish expedition
of the frigate ‘Eugenia’ to the Northern Ocean. Only two speci-
mens had previously been seen, which were obtained by Captain
Adrians on the coast of Greenland, and described by M. Christlob
Mylius in 1754, and by Ellis in Phil. Trans. vol. xlvii. p. 305.
These specimens are believed to be no longer in existence; so that
the rediscovery of this animal is most important, and we await the
description of it in the zoology of the voyage with impatience. (See
Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1860, v. p. 25, and Cat. Sea-Pens
in Brit. Mus. p. 39.)

Ziphius Sowerbiensis.

Mr. William Andrews informs me that they have received a fine
perfect skeleton of this rare whale at the Dublin Museum. This is
the third specimen taken on the west coast of Ireland in the last few
years ; they were all males and have two large well-developed teeth
like the specimen figured by Sowerby.—Dr. J. E. Gray.

152 Miscellaneous.

Marine Sponges in the British Museum.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.RS. &e.

Mr. Carter has examined with the microscope, figured, and described
in a preliminary manner, the species of sponges in the British Museum,
and has determined that there are more than six hundred species of
that group in the collection, which he is now describing in detail.
Every day brings forward important additions to this immense class,
showing that at present we have a very imperfect knowledge of the
sponges in existence ; and as yet we have not received any sponges
from the Persian Gulf, the beautiful islands of the Pacific, or from the
shores of the northern parts of that ocean, and many other localities.

Habits of Terebratula truncata, By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Mr. Atherstone has presented to the British Museum a series of
specimens of Terebratula truncata from the 8.E. coast of the Cape
of Good Hope, showing that this species, unlike the Terebratule
from the Australian seas, which are generally found on stones and
rocks, lives in groups, composed of specimens of all ages, on the
stems of the larger Algze, and also on the larger species of Ascidia.
The shells vary greatly in the radiating grooves, some being very
distinctly ribbed and others smooth, even in the same group.

On the Reproduction and Mode of Life of the Phyllopoda.
By Dr. Frrepricu Braver.

The author observed these Crustacea in aquaria. He succeeded
repeatedly in rearing both sexes of Apus caneriformis, Linn., from
the ova, and in witnessing the act of fertilization. In this, the male
places himself upon the carapace of the female, and then strikes re-
peatedly and quickly with the part of his body which is free from
the carapace upon the ventral surface of the female, during which
process the seminal matter is evacuated. The male of Apus can-
criformis, Linn., and that of Apus numidicus, Grube, constantly
possess one footless segment more than their females. Thus the male
of Apus cancriformis presents seven, and the female six footless
segments at the extremity of the body; whilst the male of Apus nu-
midicus has nine, and the female eight. The author has also re-
peated the experiment made more than a hundred years ago by
Schiffer, and, taking a female in the Nauplius-stage, brought it up
in an isolated condition—by which means he obtained ova which
were certainly unfecundated, and from which only females were de-
veloped, the eggs of which again furnished only female Phyllopoda
a8 a third generation. In opposition to this he obtained chiefly
males from the ova of fecundated females. In conclusion, the
author refers to the breeding of these and other Phyllopoda in
aquaria in accordance with the method invented by Prazak, and
describes briefly the mode of life of Branchipus stagnalis, Linn., and
Estheria dahalacensis, Riipp.— Anzeiger der Akad. der Wiss. in
Wien, May 31, 1872, p. 100.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES.]

No. 57. SEPTEMBER 1872.

XXIIT1.—Note on some Fossil Monkeys found in Italy, preceded
by a Review of the Fossil (Quadrumana in general. By C.
J. ForsytH Masor, M.D.*

WE shall commence this review of the fossil monkeys hitherto
described with the monkeys of the Eocene strata.

As early as 1859 Messrs. Lyell and Owen indicated in the
London Clay of Kyson (in Suffolk) some mandibular teeth of
a quadrumanous animal which Prof. Owen at first named
Macacus eocenust and afterwards Hopithecus. In 1862 the
same author in a short note} declared that the fossils in ques-
tion ought very probably to be referred to a species of Hyra-
cotherium (H. cuniculus), a pachyderm of which orily the teeth
of the upper jaw were previously known. In a collection of
fossils from the above-mentioned locality, Pref. Owen had met
with, on the one hand, a series of upper molars of the type
of Hyracotherium, and on the other a series of lower molars
analogous to those previously described under the name of
Macacus eocenus, and likewise resembling the mandibular
teeth of Pliolophus, a genus allied to Hyracotherium leporinum.
From this circumstance it becomes probable that the upper
and lower teeth may have belonged to one and the same
species ; but as to the conclusion that all these remains origi-
nated from a pachyderm of the genus Hyracotherium, this

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Atti della Societa
Italiana di Scienze Naturali,’ vol. xv. pp. 79-95.
+ Annals of Nat. Hist. ser. 1. vol. iv. p. 189, Nov. 1839.;
{ “On the Hyracotherian character of the Lower Molars of the sup-
osed Macacus from the Eocene Sand of Kyson, Suffolk,” Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. x. p. 240, 1862.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 13

154 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

does not seem to me, at present at least, sufficiently well-
founded. The mandibular teeth of the supposed Hyracotherium
cuniculus certainly present more analogy with the Macaques
than with Pliolophus vulpiceps (and this, indeed, is admitted by
Prof. Owen himself) ; and as regards the upper teeth, as Prof.
Owen has figured and described them*, they appear to me to
present as many affinities with certain Quadrumana as with
the teeth of Hyracotherium leporinum to which Prof. Owen
compares them. +

In 1862 M. Riitimeyer described a fragment of a monkey
derived from the Jura of Soleure, from the siderolitic deposit
(Bohnerz) of Egerkingen, which, from the general character
of the remains of Mammalia composing its fauna, is regarded
as contemporaneous with the Calcaire Grossier of Paris. The
fossil in question, which consists of a fragment of the right
maxillary furnished with the three true molars, is ascribed
by M. Riitimeyer to a monkey which combined the form of
cranium characteristic of the Marmosets with the dentition
and size of a Mycetes, at the same time by its dentition
reminding us of the Lemuride f.

Among the fossil rodents derived from the same locality,
which were intrusted to me some time since by the interven-
tion of M. Riitimeyer, there was a left last inferior molar,
which I ascribe, although with some doubt, to Canopithecus
lemuroides, the name given by M. Riitimeyer to the monkey
from Egerkingen. ‘The difference between this tooth, which
I shall shortly publish, and the corresponding molar of My-
cetes is not greater than that between the upper molars of this
same genus and the teeth described by M. Riitimeyer. The
relative size likewise corresponds.

Miocene Monkeys.—The greater part of the fossil monkeys
known up to the present day belong to the Miocene deposits.
Dr. Falconer and Sir Proby Cautley were the first} who found
remains of monkeys in a fossil state; their communication
upon this discovery, which was made in the probably Miocene
strata of the Sewalik Hills in Northern India, bears date
November 24, 1836. The astragalus in question agrees per-
fectly in size with the same bone in Semnopithecus entellus ;

* A History of British Fossil Mammals and Birds, 1846, p. 424, figs.
170, 171.

+ L. Riitimeyer, ‘ ociine Siiugethiere aus dem Gebiet des schweiz.
Jura,’ p. 88 (Neue Denkschriften der alle. schweiz. Gesellsch. fiir die
ges. Naturwiss..Band xix. 1862),

{ See for what relates to the question of priority, Falconer, “ Note on
a Correction of published Statements respecting Fossil Quadrumana,”
Pal. Memoirs, &e. 1868, vol. i. pp. 309-314.

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana. 155

the differences between the two bones in details of form were
only appreciable by means of compasses *.

The second document attesting the presence of monkeys in
the Sewalik Hills is a right upper jaw found soon afterwards
by Baker and Durand near the Sutlej. According to these
authors it presents analogies with the genera Macacus and Cy-
nocephalus, but still more with Semnopithecus ; but it indicates
an animal of the size of the orang (Pithecus satyrus), far larger
than the Semnopithectt.

It is further to the researches of Falconer and Cautley that
we owe the knowledge of three other Quadrumana from the
same strata—namely, the upper jaw of a species allied to, but
larger than Semnopithecus entellust, two fragments of the
lower jaw of a species allied to Macacus rhesus§, and, lastly,
the extra-alveolar portion of a left upper canine, indicating a
species allied to the orang'||.

On the 16th of January, 1837, Lartet communicated to the
Academy of Sciences of Paris the discovery made by him, in
December 1836, in the Miocene freshwater deposit at Sansan,
of a quadrumane which he at first united with the living genus
Hylobates, but which he subsequently named Pliopithecus
antiquus, adopting the opinion already pronounced by Is.
Geottroy and M. Gervais].

An allied species was found about ten years ago in the
upper freshwater Molasse at HKlgg (in the canton of Zurich).
It is a very fine upper jaw, whilst from Sansan we know only
the lower jaw: it has been described by M. Biedermann** and
by M. Heert{; and the latter gives an excellent figure of it.

* Cautley and Falconer, “ Notice on the Remains of a Fossil Monkey
from the Tertiary Strata of the Sewalik Hills in the north of Hindustan ”
(dated November 24, 1856, read June 14, 1837), Trans. Geol. Soc. Lond.
2nd ser. vol. v. p. 499. Reprinted in Falconer’s Palzont. Mem. vol. i.
p- 292, figs. 6-9 (p. 294).

+ Baker and Durand, “Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the Dadoopoor
Collection,” Journ. Asiatic Soc. Nov. 1836, vol. v. p. 739. Reprinted in
Falconer’s Palzeont. Mem. vol. i. p. 298, pl. 24. figs. 1, 2.

{ Falconer and Cautley, “On additional Fossil Species of the order
Quadrumana from the Sewalik Hills,” Journ. Asiatic Society, May 1837,
vol. vi. p. 554, Reprinted in Falconer’s Palzeont. Mem, vol. i. pp. 800-807,
pl. 24. figs. 5, 4.

§ Ibid. pl. 24. figs. 5-8.

|| bed. tig. 11 (p. 304). Falconer “On additional Quadrumanous Re-

mains from the Tertiary Deposits of the Sewalik Hills,” Paleont. Mem.
vol. i. pp. 807-309.

| Lartet, ‘ Notice sur la colline de Sansan &e.,’ Auch, 1857; Comptes
Rendus, 1856, tome xliii. pp. 219-223. For the complete literature of
this species see Gervais, Zool, et Paléontol. Frangaises, edit. 2. p. 8.

** Petrefacten aus der Umgegend von Winterthur, Heft ii. Die Braun-
kohlen von Elgg (Winterthur, 1863), p. 14.

tt Die Urwelt der Schweiz (Zurich, 1865), pp. 418, 419, pl. 11. fig. 4.

156 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

M. Biedermann had given to the fossil the name of Pliopi-
thecus platyodon; M. Riitimeyer, on the other hand (Heer,
. c.), regards the j jaw from Klee as belonging to the same
species as those of Sansan, which he names //ylobates antiquus.
oe. considering how slight are the specific and even the
generic differences presented by the dentition of the living
monkeys, we shall be disposed rather to accept for the fossils
in question two distinct species and to refer them to a distinct
genus. The Pliopithecus antiquus of Sansan approaches the
anthropomorphous apes more than LP. platyodon, on account of
the blunter tubercles of its molars, which indicate a more
frugivorous diet. Lartet has demonstrated that the true molars
of the Sansan jaw even present more resemblance, apart from
size, to those of the gorilla than to those of /1ylobates, espe-
cially the last molar (mm), which is longer than the penultimate
one; and this is not the case in the Gibbons*. LP. platyodon,
on the contrary, diverges from the anthropomorphous apes by
the form of its molars, which are furnished with less rounded
tubercles and with more trenchant crests. ‘The differences pre-
sented by the incisors and canines of Pliopithecus platyodon when
compared with those of the genus /ylobates have been indicated
by M. Biedermann and by M. Riitimeyer himself (Heer, /. c.).

The second quadrumane of which Lartet presented a de-
scription to the Academy, in 1856 (/. c.), Dryopithecus Kontant,
also belongs to the anthropomorphous group. It was found i in
a bed of marly clay situated at the base of the plateau on which
the town of St. Gaudens (Haute-Garonne) is built, a locality
belonging to the same geological horizon as Sansan. The
remains consist of two halves of a lower jaw with the ascend-
ing rami truncated, together with the symphysary region of
the jaw and a humerus, the whole indicating an individual
still young but of large size. ‘The last molar on each side
was not yet in its place; nevertheless the jaw bears the teeth
of the second set: this is what occurs in the human species,
whilst among the monkeys in general, according to Lartet,
the cutting of the last molar always precedes the shedding
and replacement of the milk teeth. ‘The crowns of the hinder
molars present the five blunt points which characterize the
ed molars of the higher apes and those of man. ‘To sum

, this fossil, with characters of inferiority im certain points of
view, takes its ret in the group of anthropomorphous. apes,
which includes the Chimpanzee, the Orang, the Gorilla, the
Gibbons, and the species of the fossil genus Pliopithecus.”

* See the excellent figures which have been given of the dentition of
Hylobates syndactylus by Gervais (Hist. Nat. des Mamumiféres, 1854, p, 49)
and Giebel (Odontographie, pl. 1, fig. 8).

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fosst? Quadrumana. 157

Prof. Owen, on his part, is of opinion that the mode of suc-
cession of the teeth, as well as their conformation and relative
size, indicate the near affinity of Dryopithecus to the Pliopi-
thect and recent Gibbons, and that this is the only conclusion
we can justly draw from the examination of the fossils*. I
have betore me the skull of a Macacus rhesus that I myself
prepared. The teeth of the second set are in their places,
whilst the last molar, although perfectly developed, had not
yet pierced the gum, nor even the bone completely. This
mode of replacement, therefore, is by no means a proot of supe-
riority, the Macaques being very inferior to the anthropomor-
phous apes.

The paleontologists of Wiirttemberg also cite Dryopithecus
Fontan from several localities in the Suabian Alps (Salmen-
dingen, Ebingen)+, in what M. Quenstedt calls the second
mammalian fauna of the siderolitic strata; the isolated molars.
found were at first taken for human teeth f.

In his fine monograph of the Miocene fauna of Steinheim
in Wiirttemberg, which, like the preceding locality, presents
much analogy with Sansan, M. Fraas describes the remains.
of a quadrumane (/. c. pp. 150-153, pl. iv. fig. 1). He figures
’ the four posterior teeth of the left mandible, which belong,
according to him, to a species of Colobus (C. grandevus).
The Colobi, as is well known, are distinguished from the
Semnopithect only by the want of a thumb on the anterior
limbs ; A. Wagner was even unwilling to separate them from
the latter genus§. M. Gervais also says of the Colobi, in
comparing them with the Semnopithec?, that “their teeth present
the same characters so nearly as to be mistaken”’||. I cannot
but confirm these statements from two skulls (of C. guereza
and C. ursinus) which I have had the opportunity of com-
paring. ‘The posterior appendix which M. Fraas describes as
characteristic of the first and second true molars of the Colobz,
occurs likewise in the unworn teeth of several Semnopithect,
and still better developed in the Macaques, as well as on the
anterior side. The third lower molar of Colobus is described
by M. Fraas as furnished with a terminal bicuspid talon, which
resembles a third pair of ridges. In any case this division of
the terminal talon into two points could only be very shallow;

* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. part xxvii. 1859, p. 18.

+ Fraas, “ Die Fauna von Steinheim mit Ricksicht auf die miocinen
Siiugethier- und Vogelreste des Steinheimer Beckens,” Wiirtt. naturw.
Jahreshefte, Jahrg. xxvi. (1870), pp. 145-306.

{ Quenstedt, ‘Handb. der Petrefactenkunde,’2te Aufl. (1865), p. 32, fig. 1.

§ Schreber’s Saugethiere, Supplementband, 5te Abth. (1855), p. 36.

|| Hist. Nat. des Mammiteres, 1854, p. 64.

158 Droid. ®: Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

in the two species before me, of which the teeth are not much
worn, there is only an unpaired terminal talon.

I may remark here that the last lower molar of some species
of Macaques, such as Macacus (Inwus) ecaudatus, is charac-
terized by a terminal talon subdivided into three parts, whilst
in others there are only two divisions. With regard to the
Semnopithect it is only in young individuals that we see a
faint indication of a division of the terminal talon, which occurs
somewhat approximated to the inner side, whilst in Colobus
guereza it occupies more nearly the middle of the posterior
margin ; this is the only difference which I have been able to
detect in the dentition of the two genera. ‘Thus it would appear
that it is only with some reservation that the determination
given by M. Fraas must be accepted.

It is in the deposit of Pikermi, in Attica, that the most
numerous remains of Quadrumana have been found, but
always represented by a single species, Mesopithecus pentelict,
A. Wagn., which possesses the cranium and dentition of the
Semnopithect and the limbs of Macacus*. Of this M. Gaudry
sent to Paris the remains of twenty-five individuals; at
Munich there are also numerous remains of it, and the
Museum of Milan possesses some fine crania.

I will conclude the examination of the Miocene Monkeys
by referring to the discovery in the sands of Eppelsheim
(Rhenish Hesse) of a fossil ascribed to a monkey}. Eppels-
heim is of the same age as Pikermi; it is therefore possible
that the same species may occur in both localities ; neverthe-
less it would appear that the remains found at Eppelsheim
are not sufficient to allow of exact determination.

Monkeys from Deposits more recent than the Miocene.-—The
name of Macacus pliocenus was given by Prof. Owen to a
fragment of a maxillary containing the penultimate right upper
molar, most nearly resembling the corresponding tooth of
Macacus sinicus. ‘The deposit in which the specimen was
found is a bed of yellowish sand between two beds of brick-
earth situated near the village of Gray’s Thurrock, in the
county of Essexf. M. Beyrich thinks that the denomina-

* A. Gaudry, ‘ Animaux fossiles et Géologie de l’Attique,’ 1862, p. 18.
See also this work for the complete literature of Mesopithecus.

+ H. von Meyer, “ Die fossilen Reste des Genus Tapirus,” Paleeontogra-
phica, Bd. xv. (1867) p. 164.

{ Owen, “ Note sur la découverte, faite en Angleterre, de restes fossiles
dun quadrumane du genre Macaque, dans une formation d’eau douce
appartenant au nouveau pliocene,” ComptesRendus, tome xxi. Sept. 1845,
pp. 573-575. The specimen is figured in Owen’s ‘ British Fossil Mam-
mals and Birds,’ 1846, pl. xlii. figs. 1-3. I do not find Macacus pliocenus
mentioned in the enumeration given by Mr. Boyd Dawkins (Quart. Journ.

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana. 159

tion given by Prof. Owen is arbitrary, the tooth in question
presenting only insignificant differences in the genera Jnwus,
Cercopithecus, and Semnopithecus*. Nevertheless, as this tooth
possesses the general form and the mode of wear which
characterize Macacus and distinguish it from Semnopithecus,
I do not think that there is any reason to change the name
adopted by Owen into “ Semnopithecus pliocenus”’ (Beyrich, l.c.
p- 24), and the less as the occurrence of the genus Macacus in
the fossil state is now placed beyond doubt.

There is only a single point which leads to doubt in the
figure given by Prof. Owen, which shows the inner tubercles
ot the teeth distinctly separated, in a manner such as I have
not met with in any of the living species of Macacus. Nor is
it a peculiarity of the Semnopithect; in the molars of both
these genera the inner tubercles are united by well-marked
diagonal crests.

The few isolated teeth which M. Gervais has described
under the name of Semnopithecus monspessulanus were found
by him at Montpellier in the freshwater marls of the Pliocene
stagey. According to M. Gervais it is possible that Semno-
pithecus monspessulanus is of the same species as the monkey
from the marine sands which M. de Christol has named
Pithecus maritimust, comparing it especially to the genus
Cercopithecus, but without giving either a detailed description
or figure of it.

From the same deposits, according to M. Gervais, are
derived a series of four right lower molars, two canines, and
one incisor, named by him Macacus priscus §.

Lastly, the Danish naturalist Lund found in the Brazilian
caves five species of platyrrhine monkeys, one of which,
Protopithecus brasiliensis, found nearly at the same time
(July 1836) as the first remains of Quadrumana in Asia, sur-

Geol. Soc. vol. xxiii. 1867, p. 101, and vol. xxv. 1869, p. 199) of the fossil
Mammalia of these deposits at Gray’s Thurrock, which are as follows :—
Felis speleus, F. catus, Hyena spelea, Ursus?, U. arctos, Canis lupus, C.
vulpes, Lutra vulgaris, Bos primigenius, Bison priscus, Megaceros hibernicus,
Cervus elaphus, Elephas antiquus, E. priscus, Goldf., Equus fossilis, Owen,
Rhinoceros hemitechus, Fale., R. megarhinus, Christ. (=R. leptorhinus,
Cuv.), Sus scrofa, Hippopotamus major, Castor fiber, Arvicola amphibia.
We shall recur hereafter to the question of the age of the brick-earths of
the valley of the Thames.

* “Ueber Semnopithecus pentelicus,” Abhandl. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin
aus d. Jahre 1860, p. 25 (1861).

+ P. Gervais, “ Note sur une nouvelle espéce de Singe fossile,’’ Comptes
Rendus, tome xxviii. 1849, p. 699; and Zool. et Paleont. Frangaises,
2nd ed. 1859, p. 10.

t Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 2° sér. tome vi. p. 175.

§ Zool. et Paléont. Frang. p. 11.

160 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

passed in size the largest of the American monkeys now
living, the Mycetes, with which it had some relations. Sub-
sequently the same naturalist discovered successively remains
belonging to two species of Jacchus (J. grandis, J. aff. pent-
cillato), and to the genera Callithrix and Cebus*.

I cannot say whether the two species of monkeys allied to
the genera Mycetes and Cebus that P. von Claussen has also
discovered in the Brazilian caves belong to the Protopithecus
and Cebus described by Lund. They are known to me only
by the short note of the former naturalistt.

Summarizing the indications just given we get at the num-
ber, nineteen species, of fossil monkeys described in detail.
Of the two suborders of Primates the Lemuride shave as yet
no representatives in the fossil fauna. Nevertheless the Hocene
genus Cenopithecus is to a certain extent intermediate between
the Lemuride and the Simiade, combining at the same time
certain characters of two families of Simiade (Arctopithecint
and Platyrrhint). The first family of the Simiade, that of
the Arctopithecini, is represented by the two species of Jacchus
from the limestone caves of Brazil. To the second, that of
the Platyrrhini, belong the other monkeys discovered in these
same caves, to the number of three, or perhaps of five species.

All the other fossil remains belong to the family of the
Old-World monkeys, the Catarrhini—the majority to the
Cynomorpha, represented by three or four species of Semnopi-
thecus, three species of Macaeus, and the Mesopithecus of
Pikermi (which is, so to speak, intermediate between the other
two genera mentioned)§. Lastly, the Anthropomorpha are
represented by four species, three of which belong to two
extinct genera allied to Hylobates, whilst an animal very
similar to the Orang is indicated by a single canine.

The following is the geographical distribution of the fossil
Quadrumana :—

In South America, from five to seven species, belonging to
at least four genera, one of which is extinct: Protopithecus,
Jacchus, Cebus, Callithrix.

In India (Sewalik Hills), four or five species, referable to
three living genera: Macacus, Semnopithecus, Pithecus satyrus.
In Greece, one species of an extinet genus, JJesopithecus.

* Lund, “ Blik paa Brasiliens Dyreverden for sidste Jordomveeltning,”
in Kongl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Naturv. og Math. Afhandl. 8-12 Deel,
Copenhagen, 1841-1845,

t+ Neues Jahrbuch fiir Miner. &e. Jahrg. 1845, p. 174.

{ See, for the subdivisions of the order Primates, Huxley, ‘A Manual
of the Anatomy of Vertebrate Animals,’ 1871.

§ I have passed over Colobus grandevus, Vraas, the determination of
which appears to me still doubtful.

Monkeys found in Italy. 161

In Germany, two or three species, belonging to at least
two genera: Dryopithecus Fontant (genus extinct), Colobus ?
grandevus.

In France, four species, belonging to four different genera,
two of which are extinct : Pliopithecus antiquus, Dryopithecus
Fontani, Semnopithecus monspessulanus, Macacus priscus.

In Switzerland, two species, belonging to two extinct
genera: Coenopithecus lemuroides, Pliopithecus platyodon.

In England, one species of a living genus: Macacus plio-
cenus.

The Hocene deposits have hitherto furnished a single species
of which the determination appears to be certain, the Mvocene
nine or ten, the Pliocene two, and the Postpliocene a single one,
leaving out of consideration the fossils buried in the caverns
of Brazil, which probably also belong to the Postpliocene.

Fossil Monkeys discovered in Italy.—Until quite recently
fossil monkeys were unknown in the different fossiliferous for-
mations of Italy. The specimen which I lay before the
Society belongs to the paleontological collection of the Civic
Museum of Milan (Cat. no. 849). Derived from a private
collection, this fossil was sent to the Marquis C. Ermes-
Visconti, who presented it to the Museum. Prof. Cornalia,
Director of the Museum, has been kind enough to allow me
to examine it; and I take advantage of this opportunity to
express my thanks to him for this. Unfortunately the exact
derivation of this interesting specimen is unknown; the ticket
which accompanied it was inscribed ‘ Val d’Arno inferiore.”’
Inquiries made to ascertain its origin were without result;
nevertheless, for various reasons, it 1s more probable that the
fossil is derived from the upper Val d’Arno. We shall have
to recur to the reasons which lead me to accept this suppo-
sition ; I shall only remark here that fossils of terrestrial Mam-
malia are rare in what is called the lower Val d’Arno.

The specimen in question, which is imbedded in a kind of
greenish and very soft marly grit, consists of a fragment of a
right upper jaw containing the three true molars in position.
Of the premolars there is no other trace than three alveoli,
which, judging from their respective situations, belonged to
the two outer roots of the last premolar and to the postero-
external root of the first; in the middle alveolus there is a
small fragment of the root. ‘The enamel of these molars is of
a greenish-grey colour, which in the neighbourhood of the
roots acquires a darker and bluish tint.

I will not take up the time of the Society by repeating the
detailed description, which I give in the memoir of which the
present communication is only a summary. I shall content

162 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

myself with saying that the form of the teeth and their mode
of wearing leave no doubt that they have belonged to a
monkey of the genus Macacus, nearly allied to the MM. (Inuus)
ecaudatus, which now inhabits the coast of Morocco and the
Rock of Gibraltar.

I am led to assume for the MW. priscus of Montpellier a size
rather superior to the fossil before us, having measured the
three true molars of a living species of Macacus, in which the
length of the lower teeth corresponds with the figure given by
M. Gervais for the Montpellier fossil. Nevertheless it is well
known that differences of size are often considerable in the
different individuals of the same species of Quadrumana, and
especially as regards the Macaques. ‘The figure given of the
specimens referred to M/. priscus is not sufficiently accurate to
allow of the discussion of the possible differences of the two
specimens ; and, taking all this into consideration, I prefer
retaining, at least for the present, the designation J. priscus
for the fossil of the Val d’Arno: fresh specimens will perhaps
hereafter give rise to a new name, which I cannot justify at
the present moment.

Every thing leads us to believe that we shall not have to
wait long for fresh evidence. During my visit to Florence
M. Cocchi was kind enough to show me a fine mandible of
a fossil monkey, which he ascribes to an Jnuus (Macacus),
and which had been found a few months ago near Monte
Varchi, in the upper Val d’Armo. M. Cocchi has already
spoken briefly upon this at the meeting of the Italian Society
ot Anthropology at Florence *.

The dental series of this fine specimen is tolerably complete ;
there are wanting only the nght canine and three incisors.
The enamel of the teeth presents absolutely the same shades
of colour that I have indicated in the fossil from the Museum
of Milan, which seems to show that the two specimens are
derived from the same deposit. From a hasty examination I
do not think that these two specimens can be separated spe-
cifically. However, it is to M. Cocchi that it belongs to
describe the mandible of the Florence Museum.

What is the relative age of these Macaques of the Val
@Arno? The locality “Val d’Arno” has long been with
paleontologists synonymous with Pliocene. MM. Gaudin and
Strozzi first commenced, by their “ Contributions a la flore
fossile Italienne’’}, to disentangle the question of the relative

* Meeting of the 20th February of the present year. See the ‘Nazione,’
27th February, 1872.

t+ Neue Denkschriften der allgem. schweizer. Gesellsch, fir die ges.
Naturwissensch. vol. xvii. 1860.

Monkeys found in Italy. 163

age of these strata. Molars found by the Marquis Strozzi
himself near San Giovanni are referred by him to Mastodon
angustidens, Cuv., and M. pyrenaicus, Lartet. If this deter-
mination is correct *, these two species incontestably indicate
the presence of Miocene deposits in the Val d’Arno; and the
study of the flora, which we here pass over, led to the same
result. Mast. angustidens especially is eminently characteristic
of the middle Miocene of France, Switzerland, Southern
Germany, and Austria, such as Sansan in the Pyrenees,
Kiipfnach in the upper freshwater Molasse of Switzerland,
Georgensgmund in Bavaria, Eibiswald in Styria, &e. It is
not, therefore, as M. Stéhr thinksT, to the Eppelsheim deposit
that the blue marls in which these two species have been
found correspond; at Eppelsheim only the MJ. longirostris,
Kaup (which belongs to the subgenus Tetralophodon), has
ever been met with.

The numerous remains of Mammalia buried in the Val
d’Arno, in the beds superior to those just mentioned, are
reterred to the Pliocene. Among those which have been
well determined we may cite, above all, three species of Rhi-
noceros.

1. Rhinoceros etruscus, Fale., is frequent in the upper Val
@ Arno, of which, according to Dr. Falconer, it characterizes
the lower bedsf{. In the preglacial forest-bed of Norfolk it
occurs, together with eighteen well-defined mammals, taking
no account of others, the determination of which is not certain.
I will cite as examples :—2hinoceros leptorhinus, Cuv., Bos
primigenius, Hippopotamus major, Hlephas antiquus, Elephas
meridionalis, Ursus arvernensis, two species of Cervus now
extinct, and Trogontherium Cuvier, besides six still living
species of mammals, namely Mygale moschata, Talpa europea,
Cervus capreolus, Cervus elaphus, Arvicola amphibia, and
Castor fiber§. If Rhinoceros etruscus is really the same
species as Lt. Merckit, Jeg., as Lartet|| and Boyd Dawkins {j

* M. Cocchi does not mention these fossils in the enumeration which
he gives of the fossils of the Val d’Arno :—* L’uomo fossile nell’ Italia
centrale,” Memorie della Soc. Ital. di Sci. Nat. tomo ii. no. 7, 1867. At
p: 15 we read as follows :—‘ If Mast. arvernensis probably did not share
our soil with other congeners, this was not the case with the elephant,”
Xe.

+ “Intorno ai Depositi di Lignite che si trovano in Val d’Arno superiore,
ed intorno alla loro posizione geologica,’’ per Emilio Stiéhr (Annuario della
Soc. dei Naturalisti in Modena, anno y. 1870, p. 95).

{ Paleontological Memoirs, vol. ii. p. 310.

§ Boyd Dawkins, “On the Distribution of the British Postglacial
Mammals,” Quart. Journ, Geol. Sot. vol. xxv. 1869, p. 210.

|| Ann. des Sci. Nat. vii. 1867, p. 27.

| Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. 1870, p. 468.

164 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

have supposed, it is met with in Switzerland, together with
Elephas antiquus, Bos primigenius, Cervus elaphus, &c., in
the foliated coals of Diirnten, which were preceded and suc-
ceeded by a glacial epoch*. In Germany Rhinoceros Merckit
preceded &. tichorhinus, and, according to H. von Meyer,
occupies the lower part of the Diluvian, whilst 2. tichorinus
occurs in the upper part, which, however, does not preclude
that in some places the two species may have coexisted.

2. Rhinoceros leptorhinus, Cuv., the principal representative
of which is the celebrated Cortesi skull preserved in the Mu-
seum of Milan, does not appear to be very frequent in the
Val d’Arno. Falconer regarded this species as characteristic
of the upper Pliocene formation of the Val d’Arnof. In
England, as we have already said, it was first met with in the
Norfolk forest-bed. The lower brick-earths in the valley of
the Thames, according to Mr. Boyd Dawkins, unite the pre-
glacial to the postglacial—that is to say, to the faunaof the caves
and fluviatile deposits§. We have already (p. 159, note) given
the list of the mammals found in one of these localities (Gray’s
Thurrock) ; to this must be added, to complete the fauna of
the brick-earths in general, the following Mammalia met
with in other localities in the valley of the Thames :—
Cervus capreolus, Ovibos moschatus, Ursus ferox, Hlephas
primigenius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus||. In these earths, there-
tore, Rhinoceros leptorhinus occurs associated with a partially
arctic fauna. Moreover its presence has, not long since, been
demonstrated by Mr. Busk in the Oreston cave].

3. Rhinoceros hemitaechus, Fale., which has generally been
regarded as characteristic of the epochs posterior to the
two species already cited, but anterior to L. tichorhinus**, has
been met with in England in certain caves, together with

* Heer, Urwelt der Schweiz, p. 498.

+ H. von Meyer, “ Die diluvialen Rhmoceros-Arten,”’ Palzeontographica,
Bd. xi. 1864, p. 282.

t Falconer, J. c. p. 810. “ With this species [R. leptorhinus, Cuv. ]
also I have identified the rhinoceros remains found in the Subapennine
beds of Piacenza, in the Val d’Arno upper beds, at Montpellier and Lyons,
and at Gray’s Thurrock in Essex.”

§ “On these grounds the deposits in question have been separated from
the ordinary postglacial series. They probably form the first terms of
the postglacial series, and point back to a time when the postglacial in-
vaders had not taken full possession of this district ” (W. Boyd Dawkins,
“On the Distribution of the British Postglacial Mammals,” Quart. Journ.
Geol. Soc. vol. xxv. 1869, p. 214).

|| Boyd Dawkins, /. c. p. 199.

] Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. 1870, p. 457.

** Boyd Dawkins, “On the Dentition of Rhinoceros leptorhinus, Owen,”
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxiii. 1867, p. 215 et segg.

Monkeys found in Italy. | 165

Elephas antiquus and Hippopotamus major. We have already
cited it among the Mammalia of the brick-earths of the valley
of the Thames. In another cave it also occurs side by side
with nearly all the species characteristic of the Pleistocene
period in England, and especially with R. tichorhinus (Boyd
Dawkins, /. c. p. 225). Finally, in a particular case, at Peck-
ham, the remains of &. tichorhinus have been found in a peat-
bed below the bed of clay which contained R. hemitechus.

4. Elephas meridionalis occurs in England in the forest-bed,
but does not appear to have in that country survived the
glacial epoch*. In Lombardy it has been found in abundance
in the lacustrine basin of Gandino, which M. Stoppani main-
tains to be of glacial origint, and the fauna of which is known
to us by the work of M. Balsamo Crivelli, and especially of
M. Cornalia f.

I might further name the Hippopotamus major, which is
cited in the Pliocene fauna of the Val d’Arno, and which
everywhere else occurs in indubitably quaternary deposits ;
but it seems to me that the identity of the species of the Val
d’Arno with that which occurs so abundantly in the alluvia of
rivers and in caves has not yet been satisfactorily demonstrated.
Most of the other species buried in the rich ossuary of the Val
d’Arno likewise require to be carefully studied.

Nevertheless the few examples which I have just cited
appear to me to demonstrate satisfactorily that the proofs (if
there are any) in support of the assertion that the beds in which
these Mammalia occur belong to the Pliocene must be sought
in the Val d’Arno itself; we must not, as has been done,
call in the testimony of their places of deposition in other
countries ; for, as we have just seen, these furnish no evidence.

I will, however except a single species among those which
are well-determined and called Pliocene of the Val d’Arno,
namely Mastodon arvernensis. For France we have the tes-
timony of two highly esteemed authorities, Lartet§ and M.
Gervais||, that Mastodon arvernensis did not coexist with
Elephas meridionalis (as had generally been supposed), but that
the latter always occurs in more recent deposits. Moreover,

* Nevertheless M. Gaudry, in his ‘ Considérations générales sur les
animaux fossiles de Pikermi,’ 1866, p. 38, cites Elephas meridionalis as
occurring in the quaternary deposits of the valley of the Thames.

+ A. Stoppani, ‘ Note ad un Corso annuale di Geologia,’ 1867, part ii.

. 210.

: t E. Cornalia, ‘Sull’ Elefante trovato nella Lignite di Leffe,’ Milan,
1865. Also “ Mammiféres fossiles de Lombardi,” Milan, 1858-71, in the
‘ Paléontologie Lombarde’ of A. Stoppani, 2° série.

§ Bull. Soc. Géol. France, 2° sér. tom. xvi. 1859, p. 494.

|| Zool. et Paléont. Frang.

166 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Monkeys found in Italy.

of late, voices have been raised in England which admit that
the same thing may be true for that country also*.

As to the Val d’Arno, at present, incontestable evidence in
support of the assertion that these two genera of Proboscidia
coexisted is still wanting.

With regard to the Macacus of the Val d’Arno, I think I
may assume that it was contemporary with Rhinoceros etruscus,
Elephas meridionalis, Bos etruscus, Fale., and a horse which
I cannot distinguish from Lguus fossilis, Owen—at least as it
is described by M. Riitimeyer, from the voleanic alluvia of
Auvergne}. The same marly grit in which the fragment of
the jaw of Macacus belonging to the Museum of Milan is im-
bedded covers and fills the remains of the above-cited Mam-
malia preserved in several museums.

Fossil Monkey from Monte Bamboli.—At the meeting of the
Geological Society of France, in November 1871, M. Gervais
mentioned a monkey found in the lignities of Monte Bam-
boli, in the Maremmas of Tuscany}. The mandible in
question is deposited in the Museum at Florence; according
to M. Cocchi it seems to belong to the genus Cercopithecus§.
We are expecting its publication by M. Gervais.

Fossil Monkey from Mugello.—tLastly there are in the
Museum of Pisa some separate teeth of the lower jaw, a
_ hasty examination of which seemed to me to indicate a species
of Macacus which might be different from the two specimens
from the Val d’Arno of which I have just been speaking ;
as to the determination of the genus there can be no doubt.
These specimens consist of two last lower molars, right and
left, a first or second lower molar, a premolar, and a frag-
ment of a canine, the whole having probably belonged to the
mandible of the same individual. ‘These teeth are derived
from Mugello, in the Val d’Arno, from a lignite that M.
Meneghini considers to belong to the Pliocene. By M.
Meneghini’s permission I shall shortly be able to give a de-
tailed description of these remains in the Memoirs of the
Society.

* KE. Ray Lankester, ‘“‘ Contributions to a knowledge of the newer Ter-
tiaries of Suffolk and their Fauna,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi.
1870, p. 498.

+ L. Riitimeyer, “ Beitriige zur Kenntniss der fossilen Pferde und zu
einer vergleichenden Odontographie der Hufthiere im Allgemeinen,” p. 91
(Verhandl. der Naturforsch. Gesellsch. in Basel, Bd. iii. Heft 4, 1863),

t See ‘ Revue Scientifique,’ No. 25, Dec. 16, 1871.

§ See ‘La Nazione di Firenze,’ February 27, 1872.

Dr. J. E. Gray on a new Genus of Escharide. 167

XXIV.—On Flustra marginata of Krauss and an allied
Species, forming anew Genus (Flustramorpha) of Escharide,

from Natal. By Dr. J. EH. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

In the collection of corallines contaiming a few seaweeds,
especially the one described in the August number of the
‘ Annals,’ received some years ago from Port Natal as a pre-
sent from Colonel Bolton, I observe several specimens of the
Flustra marginata described by Dr. Krauss in his ‘ Corallines
and Zoophytes of the South Sea,’ p. 35, tab. 1. fig. 3. The
figure of this coralline has always been a matter of curiosity
to me; and therefore it was with great pleasure that I found
several specimens of this and an allied species in the collection.
Their formations are very peculiar, having the frond-like
form of a Flustra, but supported by horny, often inosculating
fibres, that margin the frond and also traverse it in various
directions so as to break it into several sections, as is well
represented in Krauss’s figure. One might be inclined, as
it often grows among the dead denuded stems of zoophytes,
to believe that those zoophytes formed the margin of the frond ;
but a study of numerous specimens has convinced me that this
cannot be the case; for the thickened horny margins do not
stand out from the ends of the fronds, as they would do if they
were the denuded stems of other species, but they are evidently
developed on the edge and across the frond as the frond grows.
The substance of the coral is calcareous and exactly like
those of Lepralia and Eschara; and it forms a frond with a
series of cells on each side like the latter genus. The fronds
are expanded, repeatedly and furcately branched like the com-
mon flustra, but they are known from that genus by the cells
being much more calcareous and covered with a calcareous
coat. ‘The two species have a general external resemblance
to the two common European Flustras 7. foliacea and F, trun-
cata; I therefore propose to call the genus F'lustramorpha.
Krauss, when describing Flustra marginata, observes that
“perhaps it may become the type of a separate genus on account
of the thickened edges, which, standing out from the calcareous
structure, border the two margins of the frond. Where the
frond divides, the thickened edge of the upper margin turns
across it; and consequently it appears that the growth of the
branch is continuous ; but here a pause occurs, during which the
thickened margin is forming, which after a time constitutes the
foundation of a new lobe. These cross lines show the different
epochs of growth, like the varices on Murices and Casside
and other genera of shells. ,
“These thickened ribs give the strength and firmness whiel

168 Dr. J. EH. Gray on a new Genus of Escharide.

are necessary to support the extremely fine and brittle cell-
structure of the frond. The whole zoophyte can therefore
only be dried and preserved with great care; but if it dies in
the sea the calcareous matter soon after death dissolves in the
sea-water, and, instead of the stiff light bluish grey-brown
zoophyte, one only finds a pale brown, horny, shining skeleton
with more transparent cells; a similar skeleton may be ob-
tained by placing a frond in very weak acid. ‘The ribs of the
frond are then visible; and one recognizes on these teeth the
points by which the bordering seam is connected with it.”

Dr. Krauss describes both sides of the frond as covered with
blunt rhomboidal cells; ‘‘at the upper end of each cell is a
rounded, four-cornered, untoothed, oblique oral opening, and
on the side of the opening there is a small circular anal
aperture. ‘This second opening is always directed sideways
towards the edge of the frond; that is to say, if a perpendicular
line is drawn from the middle of the frond, it is found to be on
the right side of the line on the mght side, and on the left of
it on the left side of the oral aperture. Immediately below
the oral aperture is to be observed a second, very small opening,
the use of which is not known.” Similar openings are to be
seen in several species of Lepralia.

It is curious that Dr. Krauss, who observes so accurately
the structure of the cell, did not see that the coralline was
much more closely allied to Hschara and Lepralia than to
Flustra.

The other species is perhaps described by Mr. Busk as
Eschara; but he does not mention the margin or divisions.

Fam. Escharide.

Genus FLUSTRAMORPHA.

Polyzoarium frondose, flabellate, furcately divided; cells
disposed on both surfaces back to back, immersed, coalescent,
parallel to the plane of the axis. Oral opening with a small
tubular opening on one side of it and a smaller aperture be-
neath. The frond supported by cylindrical horny fibres, which
traverse it in various directions and edge the two margins
of the lobes.

1. Flustramorpha marginata. B.M.

The polyzoarium grey-brown, rather thin; the stem and
branches strap-shaped, with nearly parallel sides, regularly
furcately branched, and margined with a thickened mb.

Flustra marginata, Krauss, Beitr. Corall. und Zooph, der Siidsee, 1837,
p. 35, tab. 1. figs. 3 a-d.

Hab. Port Natal.

Dr. Krefft on Thylacoleo. 169

2. Flustramorpha flabellaris. B.M.

The polyzoarium pale reddish brown; the frond widening
upwards, rather irregular ; the terminal lobes broad, fan-shaped
or irregular, much broader at the end.

Eschara flabellaris, Busk, Cat. of Marine Polyzoa, ii. p. 91, tab. 107.
figs. 7, 8, 9, 10.

Hab. Port Natal.

This species much resembles Flustra marginata in external
appearance, but is much more calcareous and supported by
marginal and transverse horny ribs, which are stouter but do.
not form such a regular margin to the frond as in the other
species ; and the frond is broader, and more irregularly divided,
the terminal lobes being very irregular in shape, very unlike
the regular strap-shaped furcate fronds of the former species.

Mr. Busk, to whom I had sent a small specimen of this
species, informs me that it is the one he described and figured
in the ‘Catalogue of Marine Polyzoa’ under the name of
Eschara flabellaris ; but in neither the figure nor description is
there any mention of the lobes being divided and supported
by a cartilaginous margin; in other respects the figure is a
very good representation.

XXV.—A Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology, tested by
evidences of an extinct Leonine Marsupial (‘Thylacoleo
carnifex), by Professor OwEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Foreign
Associate of the Institute of France. Reviewed by GERARD
Krerrt, F.L.8., C.M.Z.8., M.F.D.H., &.*

[Plates XI. & XII.]

Proressor Owen spoke boldly when he thus headed his last
treatise on the Extinct Mammals of Australia,—too boldly, in
fact—because if the ‘‘Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology” is
once found wanting, it must be reduced in value ever after-
wards. ‘The founder of a science is not always able to provide
at first for all the exigencies which may arise out of a careful
investigation of his system; and the worship of learned men
may go a little too far. It is right to love the master who
taught us, and I admire Professor Owen on that account; but
when anatomists like Flower, Falconer, and Huxley differ
from Cuvier as they differ from Buffon and Linneus, Professor
Owen will probably reconsider his verdict and make the
amende honorable. Cuvier and his principles cannot always
be depended on in the classification of Australian fossils; and

* From the ‘Sydney Mail,’ May 18, 1872, with corrections and the
illustrations communicated by the Author.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 14

170 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuviertan

I refer those interested to Sir Thomas Mitchell’s ‘ Three Expe-
ditions,’ where, on plate 32 of vol. i1., the author remarks,
“The two figures 12 and 13 represent, on a reduced scale,
the large bone which M. Cuvier supposed to have belonged
to a young elephant.”

It was evidently M. Cuvier who could not distinguish
between the femur of a “ gigantic kangaroo” and that of an
elephant; and we are justified in discarding Cuvierian prin-
ciples as far as fossil marsupials are concerned.

Professor Owen may say that the bone figured by Sir
Thomas Mitchellis not a kangaroo-bone; but it never was the
femur of an elephant, and if not a kangaroo it certainly belongs
to a marsupial animal closely allied to it. All the other
objects represented on the same plate are either wrongly named
or not named at all. Did M. Cuvier inspect these bones
also? Did Professor Owen notice what they really are?
Fig. 1 is the ulna of a wombat; fig. 2 a block of limestone
nodules with a few wombat-phalanges (toe-bones) in it; fig. 3
is a much-worn lower incisor of a gigantic kangaroo; figs. 4
and 5 are two views of a right upper first incisor of a Thyla-
coleo; figs. 6,7, 8, and 9 are different views of the right lower
incisor of Thylacoleo; fig. 10 represents the much-worn right
third premolar of a Thylacoleo, the very tooth which the author
of the “‘ extinct leonine marsupial” constantly terms the great
carnassial, and which was of so little importance to him in
1836 that he never referred to it in his report on the Welling-
ton fossils.

If these teeth did not strike Professor Owen in 1836 as
uncommon, why are they considered valuable evidence of car-
nivority in 1858 or 1859? In that year I think the first
attempt was made to fit some fragments of a Thylacoleo’s
skull into such a shape as to produce a cat-like head (‘ Cyclo-
pedia Britannica,’ art. Paleontology, p. 175, fig. 115). Let
any unprejudiced person examine the impossible restoration of
that head (Pl. XI. fig. 4), and he will at once see that the
author had a preconceived opinion about it, evidently trying to
form the remains into the skull of a carnivore.

I consider these remarks necessary before reviewing Pro-
fessor Owen’s paper; and they will show :—1st, that the chief
part of the Thylacoleo’s dentition was known to him as far
back as the year 1836; 2nd, that there was nothing very ex-
traordinary in the size or formation of the teeth, otherwise
Professor Owen would have noticed them long before; 3rd,
that, having once pronounced a certain opinion, the author has
been reluctant ever since to modify or alter it; 4th, and last,
that the principle in paleontology laid down by the great

Principle in Paleontology. . 171

Cuvier cannot be applied with confidence or successfully in
the classification of our fossil marsupial animals, which were
not discovered when Cuvier wrote.

The authorities against Professor Owen are Professor
Flower, F'.R.S., the eminent lecturer at the Royal College of
Surgeons, the late Dr. Falconer, Mr. Boyd Dawkins, and the
discoverer of the missing teeth, who first pointed out their real
position in skull and mandible, myself.

It is a well-known fact that in highly carnivorous animals
the exposed portion of a tooth is completely covered by enamel.
This is not the case with the Thylacoleo’s incisors, which
Professor Owen considers designed to “pierce, retain, and
kill”! They are almost destitute of enamel on their flat inner
surface, and are, comparatively speaking, less formidable than
the upper and lower front incisors of the striped phalanger
known as Dactylopsila trivirgata (PI. XI. figs. 6 &7), the nearest
ally (as far as incisors are concerned) to the Thylacoleo.

The corresponding pair of front teeth in the Belideus flavi-
venter, or “ yellow-bellied flying squirrel,” are more like the
Thylacoleo’s teeth in their structure ; but they are not so largely
developed as the teeth of the Dactylopsila, which, comparatively
speaking, has the largest incisors of any marsupial animal living
or extinct, though only a fruit- and leaf-eating phalanger.

The dental formula in Thylacoleo is as follows :—

Incisors. Canines. Premolars. Molars.
6 1—1 3—3 i 98
Pe 0—0 Sas Vy ;

Professor Owen, to suit his peculiar system, arranges these
teeth in this manner :—

Incisors. Canines, Premolars. Molars.
a5 ia 4—4 1-1 | gos
Si 0—0 4—4 pa) ;

If the author will kindly examine the upper incisors of a com-
mon bettong (Bettongia rufescens, Pl. XI. fig. 8) and compare
therewith the Thylacoleo incisors which I sent him, and which
he figures under wrong names, he will at once perceive that the
“‘leonine marsupial” had a large pair of front incisors (which
correspond, as before stated, with those of Dactylopsila or Beli-
deus), and a second and third pair behind the first, which are
almost identical in form with those of the bettong just men-

* The two or three little teeth which occupied the empty sockets be-
hind the anterior part of the third incisor are still unknown ; we do not
even know whether they were two or three in number. These teeth are
met with in all phalangers proper, but are seldom found perfect.

14*

172 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuviertan

tioned. The first tooth in each upper ramus is curved, com-

ressed, and almost destitute of enamel on the inner side; the
second tooth is conical, with a short thick produced crown,
showing a transverse mark made by the lower incisor; the
third tooth, again, is curved, three-sided, and inserted in such a
manner that the sharp angle stands inwards. Professor Owen,
disregarding my careful investigations, freely communicated to
him, figures it constantly as a “canine ”’ (pl. x1. figs. 10, 11,
and 12). The conical second incisor (fig. 13 of the same plate)
he names the “ first upper premolar, outer side,” though he
figures the small tubercular premolars with their nail-headed
crowns (pl. xi. fig. 2, pp. 2, 3) right enough.

The upper canine puzzles Professor Owen considerably, as
it did myself when I first found loose specimens of it. This
tooth, which encroaches further into the palate than is usual
(and is sometimes almost covered by the first premolar and
fast incisor), has a curved tapering fang and a heart-shaped
flattened crown. Mistrusting my observation, the author
again calls it ‘the second incisor” in one instance, and “ the
second upper premolar” in another (figs. 9 and 14 of pl. xi.).

I make these statements with confidence, and will explain
why.

Teel tooth which Professor Owen figures on pl. xi., from
no. 9 to 14, was collected by myself and transmitted to him,
as my list and photographs will prove. These teeth are not
from a breccia cave, but from “ the breccia cave of Welling-
ton valley,” and they are what I stated them to be, and not
what Professor Owen designates them in his treatise.

I have known the teeth for years to be those of Thylacoleo, and
I reconstructed the skull with all the teeth in it in 1869 (Pl. XI.
fig. 3). This plate, lithographed by Mrs. Forde, was printed
at the Government Printing Office in 1870, with seventeen
other plates of fossil remains (by Miss Scott and Mrs. Forde),
which, however, for want of funds, have never been published.
I was desired to give Professor Owen all the information I
could; and I kept nothing back; but for some reason or other
the most typical specimens, of which I could send photographs
only, are not figured in his paper.

The illustration of a tooth (pl. xi. no. 6) named “ crown of
a less worn upper laniary, outer side,” which means “a left
first upper incisor,” should have been drawn from the cnner
side as well, so as to show the absence of the enamel. Com-

ared with Sir Thomas Mitchell’s figure in the ‘Three Ex-
peditions’ (fig. 5. pl. 32), the fallacy of Professor Owen’s
argument as to its laniary (¢. e. flesh-cutting) character becomes
at once apparent.

Principle in Paleontology. 173

Professor Owen is careful to give us three views of a much
fractured specimen of the right upper jaw from Queensland,
in which the most interesting teeth (the second and third
incisors) are missing, and the canine is fractured. He uselessly
figures also a fractured mandible (pl. xiii. fig. 2), a more com-
plete one having been given above it (fig. 1). He carefully
avoids enlightening his readers by supplying a sketch of the
upper teeth belonging to fig. 2, of which the canine and two
hinder incisors were almost perfect; these teeth are figured
exactly in the position in which they were found imbedded in
stiff moist loam. Having unfortunately broken the skull and
mandible into fragments with my pick, I called Dr. Thomson
and Harry Barnes to my aid, and pointed out the position in
which the teeth lay imbedded, asking friend Thomson to take
notice of it, so that there should be no dispute about the matter
hereafter. ‘To myself the arrangement of the teeth was known
from other specimens obtained on former occasions; but Dr.
Thomson had never seen them together ; and we both sketched
their position.

There is nothing wrong in the arrangement of the teeth in
the rejected photograph, except that the sharp edge of the third
incisor should be more inward, and the canine should, of course,
be partly hidden by the third incisorand the first small premolar.
We had just removed the teeth, when Harry Barnes blew the
candle out to prevent some uninvited visitors from coming
down the shaft. These inquisitive ‘‘ gentlemen” were too far,
however, for retreat, and, bewildered by the sudden darkness,
brought their bodies and some ten tons of loose breccia on the
top of our “ diggings,” and so prevented us from finding the
rest of the skull. Professor Owen’s left incisor (no. 6 of plate
x1.) looks very much like the fellow to my right-hand one.
Having carefully removed the dirt and the “ dirty visitors” I
had another examination of the moist clay, and found the con-
dyle, which resembles that of a koala or native bear*.

It is necessary to go thus into particulars; and as Pro-
fessor Owen will not believe me, | must speak out myself.
Twisting or turning will not alter what I stated to be the
truth; and I feel confident that time and Professor Flower
will prove the correctness of my observations.

I have been in the habit of consulting Professor Owen’s
works on our marsupials, and I have always found he has

* A cast of a similar condyle, with a portion of the inflected angle, was
dispatched to Professor Owen as far back as 1863 or 1864, A year or two
afterwards I pointed out that the cast sent must be that of the missing
part of the Thylacoleo’s mandible. I had good proof of my assertion; but
the proposition was not entertained by Professor Owen.

174 Dr. Gerard Kvrefft on a Cuvierian

given it as his opinion that the first tubercular tooth behind
the lower incisor of a phalanger must be considered to repre-
sent the canine. As late as the year 1868 he teaches this; and
he gives examples of such teeth in the ‘Anatomy of Verte-
brates,’ vol. i. p. 289, figs. 228 and 229: the last represents
the dentition of Phalangista Cookii (our “red ringtail opos-
sum”), In this figure the large incisor is the first tooth of
the series, then follow three small tubercular teeth, the first of
which is distinctly marked “ canine.”

It has been proved that all phalangers proper have three
premolars above and below at some time or other of their
existence ; but in the face of this evidence laid down by Pro-
fessor Owen, as well as by Flower and others, the great ana-
tomist now turns these three little teeth into ‘‘ premolars,” and
alters the premolar formula of Phalangista to four below,
whilst he retains only three above. (See ‘A Cuvierian Prin-
ciple &c.’ p. 254, fig. 19, right mandible of Phalangista
Cookit with four premolars, and without a canine.)

I make no comments on this strange alteration to suit a
certain purpose, which, if accepted by anatomists, will confuse
every thing Professor Owen has taught about the dentition of
the genus Phalangista. The first tooth after the incisor in the
mandible of a phalanger is most undoubtedly a canine, and it
will remain a canine as long as there is truth in comparative
anatomy. Even if every other tooth is marked with a “p”
(premolar); it will never be believed by those who understand
these things, and the teeth will be called, as hitherto, by their
right names given by Professor Owen himself. If we examine
the depressions, two or three in number, on the front inner side
of the large premolar of Thylacoleo, it will be observed at once
that they probably contained two or three little teeth, like
other phalangers, the first of which would of course represent
the lower canine.

Thus far the herbivorous principle is prevalent; but with
the true molars reduced to a pair below, one of which is tuber-
cular, and to a single transverse tooth above, the somewhat
carnivorous character of the animal becomes manifest. The
carnivority is still further expressed in the position of the line
of mandibular teeth, which exactly fronts the ascending ramus ;
but there, again, the carnivorous proof ends.

From the shape of the condyle, placed moderately high, and
from the broad, scoop-like inward process of the lower jaw, we
conclude the T’hylacoleo to have been a mixed-feeding or her-
bivorous animal.

On page 236 of the treatise ‘A Cuvierian Principle in
Palaontology,’ we read in plain words, “The rotatory grinding-

Principle in Paleontology. 175

movements of the mandible are commonly associated with a
high position of the condyle and vegetable diet; the vertical
biting-movements are commonly associated with a low position
of the condyle and animal diet.” This is not quite correct,
the condyle of the herbivorous phalanger known as Dactylo-
psila trivirgata being lower than the row of grinding teeth.

On April 19, 1870, I wrote to Professor Owen, saying,
“The carnivorous character of our friend Thylacoleo is greater
than I first thought it was. I firmly believe the cast of a con-
dyle I sent you is that of this animal.”” These remarks were
made when [I had noticed the row of teeth to be in a line with
the ascending ramus, which is a more or less carnivorous cha-
racter in marsupials.

June 13, 1871 (evidently too late for the paper under dis-
cussion), [ wrote again :—“ Regarding the Thylacoleo I wish to
assist you as much as possible to arrive at a correct determi-
nation of the animal’s character. I sent you already what I
consider the condyle and angular process, in fact the very part
which is missing. Jf you choose to believe me, it is the iden-
tical left posterior portion of the jaw, whereof we possess the
right anterior one also. The jaw is very much like that of a
koala; and the condyle resembles it more than that of any
other animal.”’ With this letter I despatched a series of careful
tracings of my sketches, including one of an upper canine of a
tiger and the lower incisor of a Thylacoleo, for comparison.

Nearly a year has passed since this letter was written; and
my opinion that the animal under discussion is a mixed feeder,
allied to the phalanger tribe, is more and more confirmed.
There is no occasion for me to fall back upon the Purbeck
fossils, or to ransack all the countries under the sun for allied
forms; I have only to examine the numerous recent skulls of
our marsupials collected for a purpose like the present during
the last twelve years, and I am adle to form a very good idea
of the “‘leonine marsupial.”

I believe, and am ready to prove presently, that the Thyla-
coleo contained in its structure certain characteristic parts from
each of our principal marsupial groups. Let me describe the
upper jaw :—The first pair of curved incisors (Pl. XI. fig. 2,
and Pl. XII. fig. 1,a) resemble those of the Belideus flaviventer
or ‘ yellow-bellied flying phalanger.” The next pair (0), as
well as the third (c), are as near in shape to those of the
“bettong ” as can possibly be imagined. The canine (d), with
its compressed crown, is also “‘ bettong-like,” and differs con-
siderably from that of the phalangers proper. The disposition
of the incisor teeth is the saine as in the “ bettong” (Pl. XI.
fig. 8), the curved first incisor arching above the close-packed

176 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

second and third one. All these teeth vary considerably, and
indicate several distinct species; the canines are as irregular
in their structure, and lead to the same conclusion. The short
functionless first and second premolars (e, f) do not indicate
great carnivorous propensities, and they are not near so for-
midable-looking as those of our phalangers.

I mentioned before that the upper canine stands far back
into the palate, and is often completely covered by its neigh-
bours. With regard to the third premolar (g), Owen’s “ car-
nassial tooth,” it will be found, in form, position, and function,
to be identical with the third premolar in the common Phalan-
gista vulpina, in Cuscus maculatus, and in other more or less
carnivorous phalangers. This tooth is often worn in a far
greater degree than Professor Owen imagines; and specimens
now in his hands will sufficiently prove it. No ‘ formidable
carnivore” would be able to make an impression on “ hide and
flesh’ with such “ grindstones:” I have no more appropriate
word to offer when describing the worn condition of some of
the many specimens examined by me. The upper first and
only molar (PI. XII. fig. 20) is a shallow-rooted, distorted, flat,
rugged tooth, with a depression in the middle, and evidently
designed for grinding or crushing, never for lacerating flesh.

Looking at Professor Owen’s figure on plate xiv. (Phil.
Trans. 1871), I notice the old tendency to make the animal as
carnivorous as possible. The first upper incisor has the form
of a “ parrot’s beak,” and is probably noé quite true to nature ;
the indicated second incisor is far too small; and the tooth
which he terms a “canine” is out of shape and out of place
where Professor Owen has put it. The upper front teeth of
a Thylacoleo are closely packed, there is not a line of space
between them; the canine is perfectly crowded out, and stands
back into the palate, as Professor Owen’s drawing plainly
shows; but he will call this real undoubted “canine” the
“first premolar,” and I shall say no more.

Description of the lower jaw (Pl. XI. fig. 1):—This part settles
all our disputed points, and turns the supposed “lion” into a
leaf-eating phalanger. The front view of it, given on plate xiii.
fig. 3, is too broad; the incisors should not close together at
the tip, but remain considerably parted, as their marks against
the second pair of premolars clearly indicate. Professor Owen
says, to illustrate the power of these weak incisors (p. 228) :—
“Were a pair of bayonets cemented side by side, and the force
of two brawny arms concentrated on the thrust, their perfora-
ting and lethal power would be increased.” The Professor is
right enough in his conclusion; but his premises are wrong.
The flat lower incisor teeth of our animal (Pl. XI. fig. 1, a,

Principle in Paleontology. 177
fig. 2, h, and Pl. XII. fig. 1, 4) are not cemented close together ;

on the contrary, their attachment is remarkably weak; and
the symphysis of the mandibles is not firm and compact like
that of a koala or a wombat. We find plenty of wombat-
jaws in a fossil state with both incisors present; even perfect
jaws are “not uncommon; and wombat-jaws, as a rule, seldom
part at the symphysis: but not a single Thylacoleo jaw
has ever been found under such conditions. The wombat
is the only marsupial animal which in compactness, shape,
and biting-power can at all be compared with our “ lionized
friend ;’’ and the “ formidable carnivore” was only as large
again as a common wombat. We know fossil wombats con-
siderably larger than the Thylacoleo; and having experienced
the impressions of the teeth of some recent ones, I make con-
fession that they bruised the part nipped considerably, but
did not draw much blood; they crush, but do not tear. The
koala bites sharper, and resembles the Z'hylacoleo more; but,
like the wombat and unlike the “marsupial lion,” it has much
firmer jaws, and, were it as large as the T’hylacoleo, would be
more formidable. The average form of a koala’s lower incisors
differs considerably from the blunt specimens specially selected
by Professor Owen, probably for other than Australian readers,
and figured on page 233, no. 6, of his treatise. The real car-
nivorous marsupials have always a series of small incisor teeth
inserted between the canines, which resemble those of ordinary
placental carnivores. ‘The most formidable, the Thylacine, or
Tasmanian tiger, and the black Dasyure, were numerous in
Postpliocene times; and that they did their duty well in
checking the increase of the great herbivores (which were
“‘calves”’ at some time of their existence) is evident enough
from the marks which their strong teeth left on some of the
fossil bones. Animals with Zhylacoleo-dentition could not
make such impressions.

If dingoes find no difficulty in destroying cattle, the great
Dasyures were as able to overpower Diprotodons of respectable
size ; so that the Thylacoleo was not required for that purpose.
But I am not going to speculate.

The general form of the lower jaw of our marsupial friend
is undoubtedly that of a phalanger. The flattened and but
partly enamelled lower incisors are exactly represented by the
incisors of Belideus and Dactylopsila (Pl. XI. fig. 7), even to
their serrated edges; the diminutive canine and one or two
premolars are the old story of the phalanger dentition over
again; and the great third “ carnassial”’ premolar (Pl. XI.
fig. 1,c, fig. 2, and Pl. XII. fig. 1,7) resembles, as in the upper
jaw, the outwardly produced formidable tooth of the common

178 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

phalanger. No person who applied the laws of comparative
anatomy correctly would fall into the mistake of supposing the
Thylacoleo’s large premolar to be more closely related to that
of the rat kangaroo than to the phalangers ; and if I once men-
tioned Thylacoleo carnifex as a “ gigantic kangaroo rat” in
one of the Trustees’ Annual Reports (as Professor Owen is
careful to point out), I beg to assure him that this was done
to give the general reader of such documents some idea of
what was meant. I must try and speak in terms which the
public can understand, and avoid as much as possible all
scientific names for which English equivalents are at hand.
The remaining teeth in the lower jaware a triangular, posteriorly
depressed molar (d andi), and a very small functionless tuber-
cular tooth (e and 7), which closes the series. The line of teeth
is in a line with the rising ramus; and in this and in the form
of the first molar I discern relationship with the Dasyuride.
Several of the mandibles in the Museum collection show clearly,
at the point where they are broken off, that the jaw widened out
inwards and upwards like that of a wombat, to which, in this
respect, the Thylacoleo was also related. The upward direction
of the wombat’s jaw from the base of the ascending ramus is
very abrupt; and it may have been the same with the Thyla-
coleo. ‘here is a foramen (small opening) at the base of the
ramus, which also occurs in the wombat and koala and in all
the kangaroos in a larger degree, but is never found in a true
marsupial carnivore. The articulating condyle is irregular,
large, rugged, and rounded; it resembles the condyle of the
native bear or koala, and will be found (when discovered at-
tached to a perfect ramus) to be a moderately high-placed con-
dyle associated with the rotatory movements of the jaw, just
as in herbivorous marsupials and herbivorous placentals (see
Owen’s ‘Cuvierian Principle,’ p. 233). I do not see the
use of discussing the arguments of Professor Owen in favour
of the existence of a “ leonine marsupial” any further; I only
remind him of the fact that our really carnivorous marsupials,
from the smallest Antechinus to the largest Thylacine, resemble
each other—that all have six lower incisors like the placental
carnivores, “ which hold the canines well apart,” and streng-
then them for the purpose for which they were designed—that
all possess a low condyle, and always a sharp-pointed (never
a broad and rounded) inflected angle below it. In not one
of them has a foramen been noticed at the base of the coronotd ;
and all have rounded strong canines, which, in particular the
upper ones, are covered with thick enamel; whilst the teeth
of the Thylacoleo are compressed, and the upper incisors pos-
sess little or no enamel on the inner and lower surface. The

Principle in Paleontology. 179

true carnivorous type is always the same, whether we consider
the placental or the marsupial orders. There is no more dif-
ference between a small marten cat and a tiger than there is
between the minute Antechinus and the largest Thylacine ;
teeth and jaw are constructed on the same principle; and no
teacher knows this better than Professor Owen.

But the Thylacoleo stands not isolated. I can prove several
distinct species ; and I have already discovered a much smaller
allied form, described under the generic term of Plectodon. Of
this genus I can also demonstrate three species at least.

On the 2nd April, 1870, I dispatched, by direction of the
Trustees, two cases of specimens (2100 in number) to Profes-
sor Owen, no. 846 of which was the right lower incisor of a
Plectodon. Professor Owen never mentions this, the most
interesting specimen in the whole series, though it bears con-
siderably on the question at issue, and I doubt not we shall
hear of 1t at some future time. I kept photographs of it to
prove its identity with my duly established genus Plectodon ;
whenever this becomes necessary.

I must bring my remarks to a close, however, though there
are numerous errors yet to be corrected.

Making every allowance for Professor Owen’s want of spe-
cimens, I am surprised to read the following sentence (p. 243):
—“In the Bettongia penicillata, with such worn incisors, and
with all the molars in place and showing an habitual use, the
trenchant premolar retains its vertical groovings to the cutting-
edge of both the outer and inner sides. They have been used
to divide the grass-blades and leaf-stalk or other tough part
or fibre of the vegetable food; but the more important and
continuous work of mastication has had grinders im number,
size, massiveness, and complexity of horizontal area fitted to
perform it. Old age is attended with seeming exceptions to
this rule in both human incisors and hypsiprymnal premolars,
which then show the wear or work of life.”

I draw the attention of Australians to table case A, section
A, in the new wing of the Museum, where “hypsiprymnal” and
“bettongial” (fossil and recent) premolars may be seen, in
which not only the premolars, but the following three molars,
are worn ‘ Thylacoleo fashion,” leaving not a vestige of the
vertical grooves.

Much-worn human incisors are by no means rare in the
skulls of our collection; and in a particular one, found at
Bondi, all the teeth are ground down to the roots. ‘This re-
markable wear is caused by the chewing of certain reed or
bulrush-roots (Typha Shuttleworthit), for the purpose of get-
ting at the starch between the fibres and to obtain the fibre

180 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

itself, which, spun or twisted, was used by the aborigines to
prepare fishing-, duck-, and wallaby-nets.

I can guess pretty well the age of native skulls, often
brought here, by examination of the teeth, because the practice
of chewing typha-fibre has ceased with the introduction of
twine. I may have misunderstood Professor Owen regarding
the wear and tear of incisor teeth ; if he means to say that they
do wear with age my remarks are superfluous. I regret that
Professor Owen has so little faith in my observing-power, and.
more so that it is so difficult to convince him of his errors. I
have explained to him, by way of long letters, photographs,
casts, and original specimens, that the genus Zygomaturus,
established by the late Mr. W. 8S. Macleay, must be retained,
because the mandibular teeth of the animal which he has
named Notothertwm are totally different in shape and structure
from those of Mr. Macleay’s creature. Those who are able to
do so may compare them (Cat. Royal Coll. Surgeons, Mamm. &
Aves, plate 8. fig. 5, Notothertwm, and Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. xv.
plate 7. fig. 1). Professor Owen again and again refers to
Mr. Macleay’s genus under the designation of Nototherium ;
and as my own generic and specific terms have been super-
seded, sometimes in the most off-hand manner, by badly in-
formed naturalists, I consider it my duty to keep facts such
as these before the public. Professor Owen says (p. 263) :—
““ No evidence of a megatheroid or other edentate animal has
been had from any cave or fossiliferous deposit in Australia.
The ungual phalanges (plate 13. figs. 11, 12, 13, 14) are too
small for Notothertwum and Diprotodon, if even one were to
entertain the ideaof those huge marsupial Herbivora having had
sheathed, compressed, decurved, pointed claws like those which
the phalanges in question plainly bore. These phalanges are
much too large for the Thylacinus and Sarcophilus. But there
is no other associated carnivore corresponding in size with
that of the animal indicated by them save the Thylacoleo.”

When sending the photographs and casts of these “ claw-
bones,” I said to Professor Thomson :—“‘ We shall have some
fun, depend upon it; Owen will claim them as ‘ Thylacoleo-
claws,’ just as he claims Macleay’s Zygomaturus to be the
part to which the Nototherium’s mandibles belong.” Good,
clever, liberal, and obliging Professor Thomson is gone to
his long home, and Professor Owen has not disappointed my
expectations.

The claw to which I more particularly refer as being that
of a ‘‘megatheroid animal,” and which, with its next joint,
is deposited in the Australian Museum, where it may be in-
spected (table case C), is what I stated it to be— the ungual

Principle in Paleontology. 181

or terminal phalanx of a creature allied to the Mylodon.” The
upper face of the sheath is naturally open; and the next joint
is short and thick, like some of the phalanges of Professor
Owen’s Mylodon (see ‘ Memoir of Mylodon,’ plates 15 and 16).

I am not going to try and prove what this claw is not like, as
Professor Owen does. I only draw attention to the probability
that there were in olden times, as at the present day, small
Edentata as well as large ones; and as I first discovered the
presence of fossil edentate Monotremes in this country, I may
be allowed to say, with the evidence before me, that animals
allied to the Mylodon will yet be found. I am very careful in
my statements: I respect Professor Owen, and am ready to
serve him at any time, whatever difference there may be in our
opinions. I have cast my lot with Australians these twenty
years; I have had opportunities like few persons living to
study our fauna, and will not give in, because it must be proved
first that I am wrong. I shall always strive to deserve the
high compliment which Professor Owen, as well as Professor
Flower, have paid me regarding my ability as the Curator of
the Australian Museum; and I hope that, like the tattoo-
marks in “Tichborne v. Lushington,”’ my postscript will
settle the disputed point.

Postscript.—In ‘drawing a few of the lower incisors of
“ Thylacoleo”’ last night for the purpose of giving illustrations
of them in a future issue of the ‘ Sydney Mail,’ I noticed, to my
astonishment, clear evidence of attrition on the inner side of
several. ‘There was no doubt about it, they had touched each
other during the lifetime of the animal (as kangaroo-teeth do),
but generally at the tip only. In one specimen, however, the
surface of the inner side was observed to be quite smooth to
the extent of one inch on the lower margin. The ridge so
prominent in young or immature specimens had totally disap-
peared, and my supposition that the jaws were loosely attached
1s Clearly borne out. Professor Owen lays great stress on the
sharp points of all the lower incisor teeth found in a perfect
state; and as he makes this an argument in favour of the car-
nivority of our now “unmasked”’ friend, I may as well state
why the teeth are not worn down. [very one of our upper
incisors of Thylacoleo has the under surface, against which
the lower teeth work, scooped out; and even in young ani-
mals the teeth-marks are plainly visible, and not a vestige of
enamel can be seen. Is it a wonder that the lower incisor
teeth keep perfect so long as they are not violently broken off ?
and will Professor Owen continue to call this probably hand-
some and certainly harmless creature, with “ trembling jaws,”

182 On a Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology.

the fellest of savage carnivores? How bears “the Cuvierian
principle ”’ an ordeal with animals which Cuvier did not know
and did not dream of? The test has been applied, and human
vanity is exposed again.

Sydney, May 15th, 1872.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate XI.

Fig. 1. Lower jaw of Thylacoleo, showing the position of the broken
ramus and coronoid process, restored from fragments in the Aus-
tralian Museum at Sydney: a, incisors; }, two or three tuber-
cular teeth, representing canine and_ first and second premolars ;
ec, third premolar; d, first molar; e, second molar; f, base of
fractured ascending ramus and coronoid process.

Fig. 2. Skull of Thylacoleo from the side, restored: a, first, 6, second, e,
third upper incisor ; d, upper canine; e, first, f, second, g, third
upper premolar; , lower incisor; 2, two or three tubercular
teeth representing canine and premolars; j, third lower pre-

_ molar; &, first, 7, second lower molar; m, inflected angle of lower
jaw; 2, condyle.

Fig. 3. Skull of Thylacoleo as restored by Krefft in 1869.

Fig. 4, Skull of Thylacoleo as restored by Prof. Owen in the Encyel,
Brit. vol. xvii. p. 175 (1859).

Fig. 5. Lower jaw of Cuscus maculatus, showing close relationship to
Thylacoleo.

Figs. 6,7. The skull and lower jaw of Dactylopsila trivirgata, to show
the powerful incisor teeth of a vegetable- or mixed-feeding pha-
langer.

Fig. 8, Canine and upper front teeth of Bettongia rufescens : a, first in-
cisor; 6, canine.

*,%* All, except fig. 8, reduced about one half.

PLaTE XII.

Fig. 1. The dentition of Thylacoleo, reduced about one half. The letters
as in Pl. XI, fig. 2.

Fig. 2. Left lower incisor, showing the extent of the enamelled portion.

Fig. 3. Right lower incisor, outer surface.

Fig. 4, First right upper incisor: a, inner, and b, outer view, showing the
extent of the enamelled part.

Fig. 5. First left upper incisor, inner view.

Expeditions,’ 1856.

. Right lower incisor, with fractured crown, from Sir T. Mitchell,
1836.

Fig. 8. Left lower incisor of a young Thylacoleo.

Figs. 9, 10. Second upper incisors.

Fig. 11. Right upper canine of a new species of Thylacoleo,

Fig. 12. Fractured upper canine.

Figs. 18, 14. Upper canines.

Figs. 15-18. Four premolars.

Fig. 19. aa lower third premolar, much worn, from Sir T, Mitchell,

5
Fig. 6. First right upper incisor, two views, from Sir T, Mitchell’s ‘ Three
Fig. 7

Fig. 20, Upper molar, right side.
Fig. 21. Upper canine of a tiger.

Dr. A. Giinther on two new Fishes from Tasmania. 183

XXVI.—Description of two new Fishes from Tasmania.
By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

In a collection of Tasmanian fishes presented by Morton
Allport, Esq., to the British Museum, two fishes were con-
tained which appear to have hitherto escaped observation.

LANIOPERCA, g. 1.

This genus would appear to be allied to the Percoid group
of Apogonina, and more especially to Scombrops, as far as we
are able to judge from external characters.

Body compressed, rather elongate, covered with thin deci-
duous scales of moderate size. Head with the snout produced
and pointed, entirely covered with small scales. Cleft of the
mouth wide, with the lower jaw projecting. Jaws, vomer,
and palatine bones with narrow bands of villiform teeth, and
with an outer series of stronger teeth. A pair of very strong
canine teeth in the upper jaw. Tongue smooth. Hye of
moderate size. Branchiostegals seven ; pseudobranchie. ‘Two
dorsal fins, the first composed of a few feeble spines; the soft
dorsal and anal with rather numerous rays; the latter with
two spines. No denticulations on the cranial bones, the oper-
cular margins. being very thin and membranaceous.

Lanioperca mordax.
D.5 | = A. a L. lat. 66.

The height of the body is contained five times in the total
length (without caudal); the length of the head thrice and one
fourth. The eye is nearer to the end of the opercle than to that
of the snout, its diameter being two elevenths of the length of
the head, and equal to the width of the interorbital space. The
maxillary does not quite reach the vertical from the front margin
of the eye, which is immediately below the upper profile. The
teeth of the outer series in the upper jaw are subequal in size, and
much smaller than those in the lower, the four or five posterior
of which are enlarged, distant, and canine-like. Posterior
margin of the preoperculum deeply emarginate. Pectoral
fin not quite half as long as the head, the upper rays the
longest; root of the ventral fins at a very short distance
behind that of the pectorals. Dorsal spines very feeble.
Caudal forked. Coloration uniform.

One specimen has been sent, 11 inches long. Mr. M. All-

ort says that it is of medium size and called “ Pike” or
* Jack” by the colonists.

184. Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Chilodactylus Allporti.
iG); ae Ay Sei lat. 55-56.

a)

Allied to Chilodactylus nigricans, but with the body more
elevated and with the ventral fin reaching to or even slightly
beyond the vent.

The height of the body is contained twice and a half or
twice and two thirds in the total length. Six simple pectoral
rays, the second of which is the longest, but projects only a
little beyond the membrane. Dorsal spines strong, the fifth,
sixth, and seventh being the longest, not quite one half of the
length of the head. The spinous and soft dorsal fins of nearly
equal height; but the last spines are much shorter than the
first rays. Scales very rough. ‘There are five longitudinal
series of scales above the lateral line; and a band of minute
scales runs along the base ofthe entire dorsal fin.

Purplish brown, with six broad, slightly oblique, blackish
cross bands; fins and opercular membrane deep black.

Mr. Morton Allport has presented to the British Museum
two specimens, 11 inches long; but the species grows to a
much larger size, as we possess from another collection a third
example which is two feet long.

XXVII.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.
K. Parker, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jonss, F.G.S.

Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg.
[Continued from yol. ix. p. 303.]

XIV. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Isle of Moen,
Denmark. (Monatsberichte, 1838, p. 192; Abhandlungen,
1838, table 111. pl. 4. fig. 11.)

Pl. xxrx. figs. 1, a, b,c, Rotalia laxa, and fig. 2, R. perfo-
rata, must both be referred to the subdiscoidal variety of
Globigerina bulloides known as Gl. eretacea, D’Orb. Figs. 3
to 7 are neatly grown, young or arrested Planorbuline, with -
globose chambers, comparable with the early stages of growth
in Pl. farcta. They may for convenience be grouped as Pl.
globulosa (Khr.). Such are figs. 8, a, b,c, Rotalia densa;
fig. 4, R. senaria; fig. 5, R. quaterna; fig. 6, R. globulosa?,
1838 ; fig. 7, R. leptospira. ~

Fig. 8, Lotalia? (Planulina?) monospira, is a rotiform
Pulvinulina (?), with thick marginal wall and strong straight
septa, and with a curious symmetrical set of holes, one at the
base of each chamber, around the large, convex, central cham-

the Nomenclature of the Foramin¢fera. 185

ber. It seems to belong to the subtype Pulvinulina elegans,
with its subquadrangular chambers ; and it may be P. Orbignyt
or P. caracolla (Roemer), showing the high umbonate face.
Fig. 9, Rotalia crete, is a relatively large Planorbulina, an-
swering to Reuss’s P/. ammonoides. Fig. 10, Planulina tur-
gida, and fig. 11, P/. sicula (1838), are Planuline, near to, if
not the same as, Pl. ariminensis, with falcate chambers. So
also the much larger (fig. 12) PJ. ocellaris ; but its large scat-
tered foramina may, like those in fig. 8, possibly be due to
parasitic borings*. |

Figs. 13, Pl. ampla, and 14, Pl. angusta, are thick-margined
and strongly septated, with triangular and oblong segments,
as in fig. 8, and may be flat-face views of Pulvinulina cara-
colla, P. ornata, or some other of the P. elegans group. (See
Phil. Trans. vol. clv. p. 890 &e.) . Fig. 15, Planulina spatiosa,
a young form of Pl. spatiosa, Khr. (from the tripoli-shale of
Oran, Africa), Monatsb. 1844, pp. 67 & 94, and ‘ Mikrogeol.’
pl. xxi. fig. 95, is a variety of Pulvinulina repanda, near vay.
pulchella.

Fig. 16, Textilaria sulcata (“ Text. striata, 1838”) may
well pass as 7. striata, Khr. Figs. 17, a, b, Text. globulosa
(1838), is the common minute (arrested) form of 7. gibbosa.
Figs. 18, a,b, Text. linearis (“ T. aciculata, 1838 ; see Stropho-
conus”) 1s Bolivina punctata. As all Ehrenberg’s Strophocont
‘are either Bolivine or closely allied Virguline, the allusion to
-Strophoconus here might have been carried further with justice
to our author’s perspicacity. Fig. 19, Text. dilatata (1838), is
a good T. gibbosa. Figs. 20, a,b, Text. aculeata, are separa-
ble,—20 a as a coarse aculeate Text. gibbosa, and 206 as a
thick-shelled variety of Bolivina punctata, bluntly aculeate on
the outer margin of each chamber, and as such might be
registered as B. aculeata; whilst the Textilaria falls to T.
subangulata, D’Orb., 1846. Fig. 21 a, Text. pachyaulax
(“compare T. brevis”’), and fig. 21 6, T. sulcata, come under
T. striata, Ehr.

Fig. 22, Grammostomum polystigma, is either a young spe-
cimen or the early chambers of a very broad strong-shelled
Bolivina dilatata, Reuss, with short but transversely broad
and faleate chambers; 23, Gr. dilatatum, is also a_thick-
shelled Bolivina dilatata, but with less curved and more
quadrangular chambers; 24, Gir. pinnula, is a common Texti-
laria of the gibbosa type, with a smooth and evenly tapering
subarcuate shell; 25, Gr. convergens, is probably a long-ovate
well-grown Bolivina punctata (?), but without visible pores ;
_ _* In specimens from the Chalk of Meudon there are frequent borings

(figs. 20, 37, & 38 of pl. xxvii.).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 15

186 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

26, Gr. divergens, is a subconical delicate B. punctata ; 27, Gr.
lineare, is a delicate subcylindrical B. punctata of typical
character; 28, Gr. rhomboidale, is a relatively large Virgulina
squamosa. Virgulina is a subgenus of Bolivina, having
flattish, smooth, and delicate shells, with extremely fine pores,
and with the chambers built up more or less regularly anglewise ;
whilst Bolivina is coarser in shell-structure, and its chambers
are rounder, or at least shorter transversely. Vérgulina squa-
mosa comprises the very regularly Textilariform varieties ;
V. Schreibersti takes those that have long inflated chambers,
variously arranged, parallel with the axis of the shell, or nearly
so—sometimes resembling a Polymorphina, sometimes modi-
fied by a partial twist of growth and passing towards Bulimina
proper, of which genus both Bolivina and Virgulina are

sections.

Fig. 29, Proroporus verrucosus, is a tuberculated or coarsely
granular entosolenian Polymorphina tuberculata, and may be
added to the synonymy of that species in the ‘ Monograph of
Polymorphina,” Linnean Soc. Transact. vol. xxvil. p. 242.
Fig. 30, Polymorphina glabra, is Virgulina squamosa; and 31,
P. asparagus, is a narrow subyvariety of the same. Figs.
32-86 are various small individuals of Virgulina Hemprichii
(Ehr.), described more fully in the ‘Geol. Mag.’ no. 89,
p- 509; and they represent forms that may be said to be trans-
itional between V. Schretbersit and Bulimina proper (32, Stro-
phoconus ovum; 33, Str. cepa; 34, Str. flosculus; 35, Str.
gemma; 36, Str. gracilis). Fig. 37, Guttulina turrita, = Ver-
neuilina pygmea (Kigger) ; 38, Pleurites turgidus, = Virgulina
Hemprichit (see above) ; an aperture, visible on the inner side
of the terminal chamber, is diagnostic, as in pl. xxviii. f. 30,
showing the really Bulimine character of the shell, and indi-
cating the passage of the Virguline into the Cassiduline section
of this genus.

Fig. 89, Vaginulina linearis (fragment), =Marginulina
ensts, Reuss (‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ 1. pl. 18. fig. 27). Fig. 40,
Vaginulina acuta (fragment), belongs to the Citharina section
of the subgenus. Fig. 41, Planularia tenella, is a delicate
young or arrested Cristellaria, such as in the full-grown state
would arrive at either the Planularian or the Marginuline con-
dition.

Fig. 42, Nodosaria aculeata, is a very interesting thick-
shelled and elongate variety of N. radicula, having numerous
prickles, chiefly but not wholly on the base of the chambers,
pointing backwards. Oblique and tapering (Dentaline) sub-
varieties of this form have been plentifully met with in Ter-
tiary strata, as Dentalina Adolphina D’Orb. (almost straight

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 187

as figured by Bornemann, from Hermsdorf), D. scabra, Reuss,
D. spinescens, Reuss; and Nodosaria hispida, D’Orb., and
Nod. conspurcata, Reuss (both Tertiary), are straight forms
very near to Ehrenberg’s NV. aculeata; and the first takes pre-
cedence. Figs. 43, a, 6, N. vulgaris, and fig. 44, NV. truncata,
belong to the simple elongated N. radicula type, with short
and close-set chambers. Herein they resemble N. glabra,
D’Orb., and the almost straight Dent. filiformis, D’Orb.*,
still more closely, as also does the foregoing N. aculeata,
excepting as to its prickles and straightness. Nod. subulata
(Reuss, ‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ ii. pl. 13. fig. 11), however, is the
earliest published form with which figs. 43 and 44 most
nearly correspond. Indeed, as often stated already, the differ-
ences above alluded to are not of essential value in a zoological
point of view.

Fig. 45, Miliola ovum, =Lagena globosa. Fig. 46, Miliola
caudata, =Lagena apiculata, Reuss (1851). Fig. 47, Syn-
spira triquetra, seems to be the spiral, non-segmented com-
mencement of some Spirilline form, assuming a triangular
outline externally as it advances in growth.

Xanthidia and Coccoliths are also figured on this plate as
occurring in the Chalk of Méen.

Such Foraminifera as the above are found at about 100
fathoms depth.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Moen, figured
by Ehrenberg.

. Lagena globosa (Montagu).

apiculata, ss.

. Nodosaria hispida, D’ Ord.

subulata, Fss.

. Vaginulina acuta, Hhr.

. Marginulina ensis, 2ss.

. Planularia tenella, Lhe.

. Polymorphina tuberculata, D’ Ord.

- Bolivina punctata, D’ Ord.

10. —— dilatata, Rss.

COCO ND OP Oboe

dt aculeata, Hhr.

12. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Orb.
13. asparagus (Lhr.).

14. —— Hemprichu (Zhr.).

15. gemma (Hhr.).

16. Textilaria gibbosa, D’ Orb.
subangulata, D’ Ord.

* After Soldani, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. viii. p. 156,
15*

188 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

18. Textilaria pinnula, Hhr.

19. striata, Hhr.

20. globulosa, Hhr.

21. Verneuilina pygmea (Hgger).
22. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.
23. Planorbulina ammonoides, /’ss.
24. globulosa (Lhr.).

25. Planulina ariminensis, D’ Orb.
26. Pulvinulina elegans (D’ Ord.) ?
27. Orbignyi (Ram.)?

28. spatiosa (/hr.).

29. Synspira triquetra, Hhr.

XV. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Island of Rigen,
Baltic. (Monatsber. 1838, p. 192; Abhandlung. 1838, table
i. pl. 4. fig. 111.)

Pl. xxx. fig. 1, Miliola (Monocystis) arcella (“ Orbulina
universa, D’Orb.?”),1s Orb. universa. Fig. 2, Nodosaria
monile, a few joints of a short-chambered N. ovicula (or elon-
gated N. radicula) ; probably the straight form of Dentalina
monile, Hagenow, from the same Chalk. Figs. 3, a, 6, Tex-
tilaria globulosa (1838), =6, T. gibbosa and, a, its young form
or early chambers. Figs. 4, a,b,c, Text. sulcata (‘‘ T. striata,
1838”’), and figs. 5, a, b, T. pachyaulax (“ compare T. brevis”’),
are strongly marked specimens of 7. striata, which, though
differing from 7’. gibbosa only in its ornament, is a convenient
variety. Fig. 4¢ shows that the septal apertures, otherwise
normal, are slightly lipped. Figs. 6, a, b, c,d, Text. linearis,
is a typical Bolivina punctata. Fig. 7, Text. acuta, is also
Bolivina punctata, but somewhat irregular in shape; it well
matches in outline Virgulina Reussii, Geinitz, as figured by
Reuss, ‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ 1. pl. 8. fig. 61: figs. 9 & 10 of pl. xxvu.
(Meudon Chalk) are very similar, but with thicker shell-walls.
Fig. 8, Text. subtilis, is another B. punctata, small and regular,
of a common elongate-ovate shape. Fig. 9, Grammostomum
gracile, is a rather coarse Virgulina Schreibersti. Figs. 10,
a, b, Gram. platytheca, is Textilaria sagittula. Fig.11, Gram.
millepora, is a well-grown bolivina dilatata (see also fig. 15).
Fig. 12, Text. inflata (“ T. aspera, 1838, partly”’), is a coarse-
shelled 7. gibbosa, with slight marginal prickles, like 7. sub-
angulata from Moen, p. 185; and fig. 13, Gram. aculeatum
(““ Text. spinosa, 1838, partly”’), is a smaller individual with
more abundant and coarser prickles on the outer edges of the
chambers. These two are rough relatives of the beautifully
neat and simply aculeate Text. Marie, D’Orb. Fig. 14, Gram.
pinnula, seems to be the tapering subarcuate apex of a Lolivina

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 189

dilatata. In outline it much resembles fig. 24, pl. xxix., which
is also named Gram. pinnula; but the latter is Textilarian in
the arrangement of its chambers... Fig. 15, Proroporus? cla-
vulina, is a strongly built Bolivina dilatata, corresponding
with Bolivina incrassata of Reuss, which he has found in the
Chalk both of Lemberg and of Riigen,

‘Fig. 16, Sagrina crete, is a large, pouting, lipped Bigenerina,
with a rough shell of globose chambers. It presents a stage
of growth further than that of “ Loxostomum tumens,” pl. xxvii.
fig. 25 (Geol. Mag. no. 89, p. 508), having become quite
uniserial, and thus passed into the subgenus Bigenerina; but
its necked and rimmed aperture gives it the further distinctive
characters of the subgenus /Teterostomella, Reuss. The slight
tuberculation visible on the edge of the figure indicates suf-
ficiently the habit of growth so much more fully exposed in
the blunt spines of HH. aculeata (Ehr.), to which we refer also
pl. xxvii. figs. 21 & 22, and pl. xxvii. figs. 25 & 26, on ac-
count of the tendency they show to take on the extension of
the neck and its marginal thickening.

Fig. 17, Grammostomum? decurrens, is a beautiful and
characteristic Virgulina squamosa. Fig. 18, Polymorphina
nucleus*, is a variety of Virgulina Hemprichiit, having a
tendency towards Cassidulina, Fig. 19, Pleurites calciparus,
is a Textilariform variety of Virg. Hemprichit. Figs. 20, a, b,
Strophoconus ovum, is a small Virg. Schretbersit. Fig. 21,
Str. cepa, being dark-shelled, is probably Virg. Hemprichii,
young. Figs. 22, a,b, Spheroidina gemmula,= Sph. bulloides,
well figured. Figs. 23, a, 6, Rotalia globulosa (1838), figs. 24,
a, b, R. leptospira, and fig. 25, L. pertusa, are either young
Planorbuline or young Globigerine ; in this state they are
with difficulty distinguishable. Figs. 23 & 25 resemble the
early chambers of G'lobigerinew, as shown in figs. 26 & 38;
fig. 24 may be Pl. globulosa (Khr.). Figs. 26, a, b, Phanerosto-
mum asperum, is decidedly Globigerina cretacea of the sub-
discoidal type. Fig. 27, Rotalia obscura, = Cristellaria rotulata,
or a feebly keeled Or. cultrata, like Cr. producta, Von Hagenow,
from Riigen. Fig. 28, Platyacus? squama, seems to be a
variety of Pulvinulina repanda, and near to Pulv. spatiosa
(Ehr.), pl. xxi. fig.95, and pl. xxix. fig. 15. Fig. 29, Planulina

annulosa, = Planorbulina ammonoides. Fig. 80, Planulina po-

* This is entered with doubt among the synonyms of Polymorphina
rotundata in the “ Monograph of Polymorphina,” Linn. Soc. Trans. vol.
xxvii. p. 234; but, together with several other Ehrenbergian species re-
ferred to in that Monograph, will have to be erased.

+ For an account of this species, see also ‘Geol. Mag.’ no. 89, pp. 508,
509.

190 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

merana, = Pulvinulina Micheliniana, seen from the flat top.
Fig. 31, Pl. umbilicata, looks somewhat like an umbonate Cris-
tellaria cultrata, or rather Cr. rotulata with pinched edge; but it
is doubtful. Fig. 32, Nonionina? spira, is also Cristellarian in
most points, like the foregoing ; but the speckled appearance is
peculiar, Fig. 33, Planulina ampliata, =Planorbulina am-
monoides. Fig. 34, Cristellaria porosa, is a fragment of some
neatly grown Planorbulina. Fig. 35, Cristellaria rota, be-
longs to a limbated Cr. cultrata, such as Or. planicosta, Von
Hagenow, from Riigen.

Fig. 36, Lenticulina discus, is Planorbulina Haidingert,
seen with the umbilical or lower face upwards. Fig. 37, He-
terostomum alternans, 1s Virgulina Hemprichii in a fme
condition, showing the characteristic notch-like infolded aper-
tures in two chambers, and exhibiting a transition of form
towards Cassidulina.

Fig. 38, Globigerina crete, is a full-grown Gl. cretacea,
having the later chambers relatively large, globose, and nearly
equal (compare D’Orbigny’s figure 18, pl. ii. ‘ Mém. sur la
Craie blanche,’ &c.).

Coccospheres, Coccoliths, Pyaidicula prisca (?), Gallionella
aurichalcea (1838), and Spongoliths are also figured on this
plate, from the Chalk of Riigen.

The foregoing lived at about 100 fathoms depth.

In 1842 Herr von HAGENow contributed a memoir on the
fossils of the Chalk of Riigen (3rd part, Mollusks) to the
‘Neues Jahrbuch fiir Min., Geol. u. Paleont.’ 1842, pp. 528-
575; and at pages 568-574, and in pl. ix. figs. 20-26, are
described and illustrated the Foraminifera he met with. In
1861 Prof. Dr. A. E. Reuss treated of all the Foraminifera
known to him from the soft Chalk of Riigen, in ‘ Sitzungs-
berichte math.-nat: Cl. Kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien,’ vol.
xliv. pp. 324-333,) pl. v. figs. 6-9, pl. vi., and pl. vu. figs.
1&2. In cases where the species were merely mentioned by
Von Hagenow in 1842, but figured and described by himself
subsequently, he has decided to adopt the names given with
the later and full account of the species. The following are
recognized by Reuss :—

Lagena simplex, Fss.

apiculata, Lss.

Nodosaria monile, v. Hag. Dentalina, Rss. [= Nodosaria
montle, Khr.|

Dentalina sulcata, Nilsson.

Steenstrupi, ss.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 191

Frondicularia solea, v. Hag.

capillaris, Rss. (Hr. lineata, v. Hag.).

Flabellina lingula (v. Hag.).

reticulata, Rss.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.). [? Pl. xxx. figs. 31, 32, ‘ Mi-
krogeol.’]

exarata, v. Hag.

planicostata, v. Hag. [=Pl. xxx. fig. 35, ‘ Mikro-

geol.’]

Spachholtzi, Rss. (Cr. producta, v. Hag.). [Compare
pl. xxx. fig. 27, ‘ Mikrogeol.’]

— umnbilicata, Rss.

— Willamsoni, Rss.

navicula, D’ Orb. (Cr. obliqua, v. Hag.).

retroflexa, v. Hag.

— Marcki, Rss.

multiseptata, Rss.

nuda, Liss. i

Haplophragmium ovatum (v. Hag.).

Nonionina quaternaria, fss. [Pullenia.|

Planorbulina involuta (/ss.). [A plump variety of Pl. Un-
geriana, D’Orb.]

constricta (v. Hag.). [A scarcely distinct subvariety

of Pl. ammonoides (Rss.). |]

ammonoides (fss.) (Planorbulina angulata, v. Hag.).

[Pl. xxx. figs. 29 & 33, ‘ Mikrogeologie.’]

complanata (Lss.) (Planorbulina umbilicata, v. Hag.).

[= PI. rotula, (D’Orb.).*]

(Truncatulina) convexa (fss.) (Trunc. sublevis, v.
Hag.). [A thick subvariety of Truncatulina lobatula.]

Rotalia umbilicata, D’ Orb. (R. turgida, v. Wag.).

globosa (v. Hag.). [Near R. wmbilicata, D’Orb.]

Ataxophragmium obesum, fss. (Globigerina confluens, v.
Hag.).

oe Rss. (Bulimina amphiconica, v. Hag. in parte).

obliquum (Bulimina, D’ Orb.), Rss.

Bulimina gibbosat (Valvulina, D’Ord.), Rss. (Valvulina
quadribullata, v. Hag.).

intermedia, Rss. (Valvulina tribullata, v. Hag.).

* In this case the name given by D’Orbigny in 1846, yields precedence
to that applied by Von Hagenow in 1842, unless the want of full informa-
tion about the species when mentioned by the latter interferes.

+ Dr. Reuss observes that the Riigen specimens have no mouth-valve,
but otherwise resemble D’Orbigny’s Valvulina gibbosa. We are satistied
that the latter is a true Valvulina, as well as Reuss’s Valvulina spcula
from the Bohemian Chalk.

192 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Bulimina brevis, D’ Orb.

ovulum, Jss. (Bul. amphiconica, v. Hag. in parte).
—— Puschi, ss.

Guttulina cretacea, Alth.

Bolivina incrassata, Rss. (Textularia elongata, v. Hag.).

[Pl. xxx. figs. 11 & 15, ‘ Mikrogeologie.’]

The following, mentioned by Von Hagenow in 1842, are
not noticed by Reuss in 1861. Under the circumstances of
the case, they cannot be regarded as important elements in the
fossil Foraminiferal fauna of Riigen.

Nodosaria linearis (?), Ramer.

Marginulina nitida, v. Hag.

Planularia nodosa, v. Hag. op. cit. pl. 9. f. 21, p. 569.
compressa, v. Hag.

Globigerina globosa, v. Hag.

Robulina Comptoni (Sow.).

sublevis, v. Haq.

crenata, v. Hag.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Riigen,
Jigured by Ehrenberg.

. Orbulina universa, D’ Orb.

. Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Orb.

. Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.).
eultrata (Montf:).
Bolivina punctata, D’ Ord.
Reussii (Gentz).

. —— dilatata, Rss.

incrassata, iss.

. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Ord.
Schreibersii, Czjzek.
Hemprichiu (£hr.).
nucleus (Lhr.).
calcipara (Zhr.).

. Textilaria sagittula, Defr.

. —— gibbosa, D’ Orb.
subangulata, D’ Ord.
striata, hr.

globulosa, Hhr.

. Heterostomella aculeata (Zhr.).
. Spheeroidina bulloides, D’ Ord.
. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Ord.
2. Planorbulina ammonoides, Fss.

23. —— Haidingeru (D’Oré.).

——_

De Hee eee ee
SODNADNEWNRODDNAMP WN

bo bo
No

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 193

_ 24, Planorbulina globulosa (Ehr.).
_ 25. Pulvinulina Micheliniana (D’ Orb.).
26. squama (LHhr.).

XVI. Foraminifera from the Chalk of Volsk, on the Volga,
Russia. (EHRENBERG, ‘ Das unsichtbar wirkende organische
Leben,’ 1842, p. 52.)

_ Pl. xxx. figs. 1, a, b;¢, Miliola spherula, = Orbulina uni-
versa. Figs.2&3, M. paradoxa, and fig. 4, M. ovum, appear
to be isolated chambers of Globigerina. Fig. 5, M. levis, is
the Lagena emaciata, Reuss. Fig. 6, M. stiligera, is a Lagena,
exactly like a recent one we have from the Abrolhos Bank,
flat, elongato-lanceolate, and marginate, with a bimucronate
base, due to the wing-like ends of the keel on each edge; ex-
cepting in the last-mentioned feature, it resembles fig. 46,
pl. xxix. Fig. 7, Vaginulina rotundata, the first three chambers
of a strong simple Vaginulina like V. marginata, D’Orb. Fig.
8, Nodosaria monile, 1s a rather thick-set N. ovicula.

Fig. 9, Textilaria striata, and fig. 10, T. sulcata? (“ T. stri-
ata?’’), are T. striata, Ehr. Fig. 11, Text. amplior, and figs.
12 & 13, T. globulosa ampliata, are T. globulosa, Ehr. (small
arrested 7. gibbosa). Figs. 14 & 15, Test. linearis, and fig. 16,
Grammostomum angulatum, are small specimens of 7. agglu-
tinans. Fig. 17, Text. aculeata, is a coarse T. gibbosa with
apiculate chamber-walls, like fig. 20 a, pl. xxix., and figs. 12,
13, pl. xxx., = 7. subangulata, D’Orb. Figs. 18, 19, Gram.
rossicum, and fig. 20, Gr. secundarium (?), are various speci-
mens of Text. sagittula. Fig.21, Gr.incrassatum, is a thick-
shelled Virgulina Schreibersti. Fig. 22, Gr. attenuatum, is
Bolivina dilatata with a strong shell. Figs. 23 & 24, a, b,c,
Gram. pachyderma, and tig. 25, Gr. thebaicum (?), are coarse-
shelled Virg. Schreibersti. Fig. 26, Gr.laxum (?), is Poly-
morphina lactea. Fig. 27, Gr. megaloglossum, is a fragment of
a large Virgulina squamosa.

Fig. 28, Sagrina crete, represents a strong but somewhat
ill-grown individual of the pouting Bigenerina, with slightly
dentate chamber-margins, referred to Heterostomella aculeata
(pl. xxx. fig. 16) at page 189. Fig. 29, Loxostomum tumens,
is a fine, free-grown, smooth-shelled individual of the same
species. Fig. 30, Polymorphina acanthophora, and fig. 31,
P. obtusa, appear to be young Bigenerine specimens allied to the
last mentioned, but with longer and straighter flask-like cham-
bers, nearly parallel to the axis of the shell. A spike on the
base of the shell gives the name to the larger specimen ; but
this feature is indicated on the other also. They nearly con-
form with B. (Gemmulina) digitata, D’Orb.

194 Messrs. Parker and Jones on
Fig. 32, Strophoconus ovum, and figs. 33 & 34, St. spicula,

are small coarse-shelled Virguline Schreibersii. Figs. 35 & 36,
Pyrulina ovulum, =Polymorphina lactea. Fig. 37, Pleurites
turgens, probably Virgulina Hemprichit, but doubtful; it may
possibly be a Polymorphina. Figs. 38-53 represent different
ages, stages, and conditions of G'lobigerina cretacea (fig. 38,
lotalia perforata; fig. 39, R. quaterna ; figs. 40, 41, 43, ft. glo-
bulosa; fig. 42, f. laxa; fig. 44, Reaspera; fig. 45, 49, R.
leptospira; figs. 46, 47, Lt. senaria; fig, 48, Lt. glomerata;
figs. 50, 51, 2. wolgensis ; fig.52, Planulina incurvata, showing
the diagnostic aperture; and fig. 53, Pl. ocellata).

Vig. 54, Lenticulina? pachyderma, = Pulvinulina caracolla
(Rem.). Fig. 55, Planulina umbilicata (?), represents the
central chambers of a Planulina; compare fig. 60 for instance.
Fig. 56, Pl. porophena, and fig. 57, Pl. pardalis, are relatively
large specimens of probably Planulina ariminensis. Fig. 58,
Lenticulina discus, = Planorbulina Haidingerit, almost of the
typical form. Fig. 59, Planulina micromphala, fig. 60, PI.
ampliata, and fig. 61, Pl. ampla, are all probably Planuline
Eteine to the Pl. ariminensis type.

Fig. 62, Pl. turgida, seems to be a small Operculina. This
subgenus of Nwmmulina is rare in the Cretaceous strata, and
therefore the Russian specimen is of great interest. ‘Two
Operculine (one described and figured by Reuss as Amphi-
stegina Hlewriast, D’Orb., and the other as Op. eretacea) occur
in the Maestricht Chalk, ‘ Sitzungsber. Akad. Wien,’ vol. xliv.
pp. 308, 309, pl. i. figs. 10-12, and pl. ii. fig. 1, a,b. Another,
described and figured by Reuss as Amphistegina clypeolus
(Zeitschr. Deutsch. geol. Gesellch. vol. vil. pl. ix. fig. 9), was
found,in Upper Chalk of the same age as that of Maestricht,
at Mecklenburg. From the Lower Cretaceous formation in the
Haute-Marne, France, M. Cornuel has a somewhat doubtful
Operculina (Op. angularis), Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 2,
vol. ii. part 1, Mém. no. 3, pl. 2. figs. 20-22.

Coniostylis and Coccoliths are also figured on this plate.

The group of Foraminifera here represented belonged to a
fauna inhabiting a shallower part of the sea than that with the
western Chalk, probably from 50 to 100 fathoms in depth.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Volsk, Russia,
jigured by Ehrenberg.

1. Orbulina universa, D’ Ord.
2. Lagena emaciata, Liss.

3. —— stiligera (Lhr.).

4, Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Orb.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 195

5. Vaginulina marginata, D’ Orb.
6. Polymorphina lactea (W. & J.).
7. Bolivina dilatata, ss.

8. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Orb.

9
10

Schreibersu, Czjzek.

. —— Hemprichii (Ehr.)?
11. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Ord.
sagittula, Defr.
13. —— gibbosa, D’ Orb.
subangulata, D’ Orb.
globulosa, Lhr.
16. Bigenerina acanthopora (Lhr.).
17. Heterostomella tumens (Lhr.).
18. —-- aculeata (Zhr.).
19. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.
20. Planorbulina Haidingeri (D’ Ord.).
21. Planulina ariminensis, D’ Orb.
22. Pulvinulina caracolla (emer).

23. Operculina turgida (Lhr.).

XVII. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Upper Missour?,
North America. (Monatsber. 1842, p. 187; Abhandl. 1841,
pp- 365, 398, 429, 433 [1843].)

In the ‘American Journal of Science and Arts,’ vol. xli.,
October 1841, pp. 400-402, the late Prof. J. W. Bailey gave
an account of some ‘‘ American Polythalamia from the Upper
Mississippi, and also from the Cretaceous Formation on the
Upper Missouri ;” and in vol. xlvi. p. 297, &c., the researches
of Ehrenberg in these Cretaceous Foraminifera of America are
treated of in connexion with a résumé of the results of his ex-
amination of large quantities of both North- and South-Ame-
rican Microzoic deposits, recent and fossil*. At page 307 a
woodcut outline of Textilaria missouriensis, Ehy., is inserted
ina footnote. Inthe Am. Journ. Se. vol. xlvii. (1845), p. 341,
Prof. Bailey gives a list of the American rocks in which
Foraminifera had been found, and from which specimens had
been sent to Dr. Ehrenberg.

Pl. xxxui. 1. figs.1, a, 6, Miliola? (Vaginulina?) bursa, are
obscure ; possibly Huglypha or Protocystis. Fig. 2, Nodosaria
vulgaris, two chambers of N. glabra, D’Orb. Fig. 3, Nod.
acus, is the early portion of an extremely attenuate and scarcely
segmented variety of N. ovicula. A similar specimen has been
figured by Prof. Bailey from the deep soundings off New Jersey
and Delaware (‘ Smithsonian Contrib.’ 1861, fig. 8). Fig. 4, a,

* Abhandlungen Akad. Berlin for 1841 (1843).

196 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Textilaria americana (“ 1843, pp. 398, 429”), is a variety of
T. striata, with the outer margins of the younger and larger
chambers more or less produced and aculeate. Fig. 4b, 7.
striata, is the early portion of 7. americana, simply T. striata
with pores in the fine furrows*. Fig. 5, 7. missouriensis, 1s
T. gibbosa becoming laterally aculeate, as in fig. 4a, but
without strie. Fig. 6, 7. proroconus, is simply T. gibbosa
with bored holes. Fig. 7, 7. americana (?), young, is the same
as fig. 4b, with thicker shell. Fig. 8, 7. globulosa, is a small,
stout, oblong 7. gibbosa. Fig. 9, T. ewryconus, is a much
larger 7. gibbosa. Fig. 10, 7. gomphoconus, is a neat, narrow,
tapering 7. gibbosa. Fig. 11, Grammostomum americanum,
is Virgulina Schreibersii. Fig. 12, Gr. validum, is a small,
stout, squarish Textilaria of the gibbosa type. Figs. 138, 14,
Spiroplecta americana (“ Heterohelix, 1843, p. 429”), is the
same as 4a, excepting that the first segments have a spiral
growth. This variation is common in the Textilaride, and,
like analogous differences in growth, has been accepted as the
basis for subgeneric division.

Figs. 15, Phanerostomum porulosum, fig. 16, Ph. dilatatum,

figs. 17 & 18, Ph. lacerum, fig. 19, Ph. leve (small and round),
and fig. 20, Ph. quaternarium, are stages and conditions of
Globigerina hirsuta, D’Orb., a subdiscoidal variety of Gl. bul-
loides, which is extremely acerose, and has very wide septal
apertures. This is the Globigerina that abounds in the Red
Sea and Indian Ocean; it is often outspread and very prickly,
sometimes having its apertures closed over with the projecting
and interlacing needles. Fig. 21, Rotalia globulosa-protolepta, is
a small arrested or young Planorbulina vulgaris (Pl. globulosa).
Fig. 22, Phanerostomum hispidulum (small and roughish),
fig. 23, Ph. hexaleptum (small and smooth), fig. 24, Ph. asperum
(tuberculate), fig. 25, Ph. senarium (aculeate), fig. 26, Planu-
lina globigerina (large and tuberculate), fig. 27, Ptygostomum
senarium (small and aculeate), fig. 28, Pt. quinartum (small
and smooth), fig. 29, Phanerostomum hispidulum (small and
tuberculate), fig. 30, Ph. dilatatum (aculeate), and fig. 31, Ph.
hexacyclus (tuberculate) are also specimens of G'lobigerina
hirsuta, D’Orb., ‘ Foram. Canaries,’ pl. 11. figs. 4-6.
_ Fig. 32, Rotalia lenticulina, is possibly a Cristellaria ; or it
may be a Nonionina; but its scattered granules constitute a
doubtful character, and the position of the septal apertures is
not indicated. Other specimens referred to “ Rotalia lenticu-
lina,” in other plates, appear to be Planorbuline.

* Dr. J.G. Egger figures and describes a Miocene Tertilaria like this

from Lower Bavaria ; Tezt. striato-punctata, Kg. ‘ Neues Jahrb.’ 1857, pl.8.
figs. 27-29.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 197

Coccoliths are also given on this plate in fig. I. B.
This Chalk was probably formed in about 50 to 100
fathoms.

Species and noticeable Varieties from the Chalk of the ee
Missouri, figured by Ehrenberg.

. Nodosaria glabra, D’ Orb.
—— acus, Hhi

. Cristellaria ?

Virgulina Schreibersu, Czjzek.
. Textilaria gibbosa, D’ Orb.
missouriensis, “hr.

—— striata, hr.

(et Spiroplecta) americana, Lhr.
—— striato-punctata, Hgger.

. Globigerina hirsuta, D’ Orb.

. Planorbulina globulosa (Zhr.).

SO NI OUR OY NO

—

XVIII. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Upper Missis-
sippt, North America. (Monatsb. 1842, p. 187; Abhandl.
1841, pp. 365, 433 [1843].)

In the ‘Americ. Journ. Sc.’ vol. xli. p. 400, the material
examined by Dr. Ehrenberg is described as “a light cream-
coloured marl from a Mission-station on the Upper Mississippi,
called there ‘ prairie chalk,’”” and some unnamed woodcut Ui
lines of the Foraminifera are given (p. 401), namely :—figs. 1
& 2, Textilaria gibbosa; fig. 3, Cr istellaria cultrata, with
narrow falcate chambers ; fic. 4, 4 small Planorbulina,

Pl. xxxu. U1. fig. 1, Miliola striata, = Lagena costata, Wil-
liamson. Fig. 2a, M. levis, =L. emaciata, Reuss. Fig. 2 3,
Ovulina clava, = L. clavata, ‘D’Orb. Fig. 3, Dentalina ameré.
cana, = D. Boueana, D’ Orb. Fig, 4, Nodosaria tumescens,
= N. ovicula, D’Orb. Figs. 5, N. vulgart zs, and 6, N. ampla,
= N. glabra, D’Orb. Fig. 7, Vaginulina calcipara, fig. 8,
V. crete, and fig. 9, V. subacuta, = V. leguminiformis (Batsch).
Fig. 10, ’ Planularia elongata, isa simple subcarinate Planula-
ria, or an elongate Marginuline Cristellaria cultrata, and is
known as Pl. crepidula (F. & M.).

Fig. 11, Textilaria striata, is a thick-shelled 7. striata.
Fig. 12, Tet. globulosa, is the common small form of T. gib-
bosa, and so is fig.13. Fig.14, 7. striata, is a rather narrow
T. striata, Fig. "15, Grammostomum amer icanwm, is Bolivina
dilatata, with a faintly reticulated surface. Fig. 16, Gr,
phyllodes, = Virgqulina squamosa._ Fig. 17, Gram. “invalidum,
is a small Textilaria of the agglutinans type. Fig. 18, Gr.

198 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

tessera, is an outspread, rhomboidal, Textilariform Virgulina
Hemprichii. Fig. 19, Gr. rhombotdale, = Bolivina dilatata.
Fig. 20, Pleurites? americanus, is a suboblong Textilariform
Virgulina Hemprichii. Fig. 21, Strophoconus spicula?, is a
young Virg. Schreibersii, with a mode of growth approaching
that of Bulimina ig sae

Fig. 22, Sagrina longirostris, is “ Loxostomum tumens,” the
smooth form of Heterostomella aculeata, not having grown gross
enough to produce exogenous shell-matter. Fig. 23, Proro-
porus obtusus, is Polymorphina compressa. Fig. 24, Pr. ob-
tusus?,is a Bigenerine Textilaria, near to Bigenerina acantho-
phora, pl. xxxi. figs. 30, 31,:and may pass as B. digitata.
Fig. 25, Spiroplecta americana (“ Heteroheliz, 1843, p. 429”),
is Text. gibbosa with a spiral commencement, but without the
ornament of figs. 13 & 14 on the upper portion of this plate.
Fig. 26, Spiroplecta rosula, is a straight-sided Textilaria of
the agglutinans type, but commencing its growth with a large
coil of chambers. This species lives in the Atlantic, and in
its sandy condition has of late years been named by us Tezt.
biformis*, and in the clear-shell state has received the name
of T. complera from Mr. H. B. Bradyt; but Ehrenberg’s
name has precedence.

Fig. 27, Dimorphina saxipara, is an interesting specimen
of Virgulina Schreibersii that has formed the latter part of its
shell in a uniserial manner, and has thus become Dimorphine ;
but the name “ Dimorphina” is limited to the Dimorphous
forms of Polymorphina. In Cassidulina, which is a very close
ally of Virgulina, we occasionally see evidences of weak and
rapid growth in one-sidedness and linear direction of the seg-
ments (Ehrenbergina). In accordance with the plan of no-
menclature among Foraminifera, the dimorphous varieties of
Buliminat, Virgulina, Bolivina, and Cassidulina require one
or more subgeneric appellations. We propose Bifarina for the
dimorphous Virgulina; and Bf. saxipara is the name with
which the interesting American specimen under notice will be
registered.

Fig. 28, Guttulina turrita, = Verneuilina pygmea (Egger).
Fig. 29, Frondicularia? strophoconus, is a small, smooth,
acute-ovate Glandulina levigata, looking flat by reason of its
transparency.

Fig. 30, Rotalia senaria, fig. 31, R. globulosa-protolepta, and

* Philos. Trans. 1862, vol. clv. p. 370, pl. 15. figs. 25, 24.

+ Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumberland and Durham, vol. i. part 1, 1865,
pl. 12. fig. 6, p. 101. é
- { Bulimina variabilis, )’Orb., may be said to be dimorphous in this
sense.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminiyera. 199

fic. 32, R. leptospira, are smooth, polished and apparently
poreless, and, with their numerous globose limbate chambers,
are readily identified as Pulvinulina canariensts (D’Orb.), ‘ Hist.
Nat. Canaries, Foram.,’ pl. 1. figs. 34-36. Fig. 33, Rotalia
caleipara, and fig. 34, Omphalophacus? tenellus, belong to a
somewhat prickly variety of Pulvinulina Menardii, D’Orb.
Fig. 35, Planulina nebulosa, is obscure; perhaps a Planorbu-
lina.

Fig. 36, Rotalia nonas (?), may be an umbonate and limbated
Cristellaria rotulata (?). Fig. 37, Cristellaria alta, is a young
Cristellaria cultrata. Fig. 38, Aspidospira saxtpara, is Pla-
nulina ariminensis with large scattered foramina. Fig. 39,
Robulina? denaria, seems to be an umbonate Cristellaria ro-
tulata. Fig. 40, Rotalia heptas, is probably the same as fig. 36.
Figs. 41, Planulina mississippica, 42, Phanerostomum asperum,
43, Planulina oligosticta, 44, Phan. globulosum (young), 45,
Rotalia globulosa-protolepta (young and smooth), and 46, Phan.
quaternarium (young and smooth), are subvarieties and con-
ditions of a large, outspread, tuberculated Globigerina of the
cretacea subtype; and not nearly so acerose, nor with such
patulous apertures, as the fossil Globigerina from the Upper
Missouri, figured in the upper part of this plate. Fig. 47, Ro-
bulina ocellus, is a young Cristellaria cultrata. Fig. 48, Pla-
nulina suboctonaria, is Planorbulina ammonoides.

Coccoliths also are indicated in the text.

The group indicates about 50 to 100 fathoms depth.

Species and noticeable Varieties from the Chalk of the Upper
Mississippi, figured by Ehrenberg.

. Lagena costata, Williamson.

emaciata, /ss.

clavata, D’ Orb.

. Glandulina levigata, D’ Orb.

. Dentalina Boueana, D’ Ord.

Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Ord.

glabra, D’ Ord.

. Vaginulina leguminiformis (Datsch).

. Planularia crepidula (Ff. & JZ).

. Cristellaria rotulata (Lamk.).

cultrata (Montf:).

. Polymorphina compressa, D’ Ord.

. Bolivina dilatata, 2ss.

americana, Hhr.

. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Ord.

Schreibersii, Cz., var.

free ped fed feed ped teed fed
DOPE WHE OODNAOP wre

200 Mr. A. G. Butler on the genus Thelyphonus.
17. Virgulina Hemprichii (Hhr.).

—— tessera (Hhr.).
americana (Hhr.).
20. Bifarina saxipara (Hhr.).

21. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Orb.

22. gibbosa, D’ Orb.
23. striata, Hhr.
24. globulosa, Ehr.

25. Spiroplecta americana, Hhr.

rosula, Hhr.

27. Bigenerina digitata, D’ Orb.

28. Heterostomella tumens (Hhr.).

29. Verneuilina pygmea (Hgger).

30. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

31. Planorbulina ammonoides (£fss.).

32. Planulina ariminensis (D’ Ord.).
(To be continued. }

Roy 4 Monograph of the Genus Thelyphonus.
By Arruur G. But er, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.
[Plate XIII.]

THE first monograph of this genus was that by M. Lucas in
the ‘Magasin de Zoologie’ for 1835, in which six species
were recognized, five of them being then described for the
first time.

In 1843 Koch added five new forms in his ‘ Arachniden,’
since which time three others have been diagnosed, one of
them being probably the adult type of a previously described
species.

I have now to add eight more species, which, considering
that one of those described by M. Lucas is apparently a young
form of the 7. proscorpio of Latreille (hitherto confounded
with J. caudatus, Linn.), will bring the number of known
Thelyphont up to twenty-one.

In the present paper I have separated the species into three
sections according to the number of teeth on the second joint
of the cheliceres. This important character, which appears to
be very constant, has been much neglected in descriptions,
and still more so in figures of the various species; very little
attention has also been paid to the amount of rugosity, or the
hairiness of the cheliceres, legs, &c., though in the order Coleo-
ptera such characters are considered of the utmost importance,
as, indeed, they may be shown to be in the present order.

The species of Uhelyphonus in their general appearance
remind one strongly of the two genera Lucanus and Nepa.

” Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 201

Fam. Thelyphonide, Wood.
Genus THELYPHONUS, Latreille.

Section a. Species with five spines on upperside of second
Joint of cheliceres.

1. Thelyphonus giganteus.

Thelyphonus giganteus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 8
(1835); Koch, Arachn. x. p. 21, pls. 331, 352, figs. 767, 768 (1845).
Thelyphonus excubitor, Girard, Marcy’s Report of Expl. of Red River,

p. 265, fig. xvii. 1-4.
Hab. Mexico (Oaxaca). Obtained 1858, from M. Sallé.
B.M.

2. Thelyphonus mexicanus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 1.

Colour chocolate-brown.

Allied to T. giganteus, one third smaller; cephalothorax
narrower, more pointed in front and less rugose; abdomen
with the sides much more parallel; the stigmatiform spots
much better defined; the granular rugosities less distinct ; che-
liceres, excepting the second joint, more rugose and pilose, the
latter joint broader; the teeth above quite different in arrange-
ment, five in number, the first two and the fifth very short and
blunt, the fourth slightly longer, the third twice the length of
the fourth ; a space between the second and third; third joint
with external rugosities lengthened, rendering it distinctly
spinous; fourth joint more pilose; legs less rugose, more
pilose.

Length of cephalothorax and abdomen 1 inch 93 lines.

Hab. Mexico. B.M.

3. Thelyphonus brasilianus.
Thelyphonus brasilianus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 24, pl. 333. fig. 770 (1843).
Hab. Brazil. B.M.

4, Thelyphonus amazonicus, nu.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 2.

Seems allied to 7. spinimanus and T. antillanus, but may
be at once distinguished from both by its more cylindrical
abdomen, which has no marginal ridge as in those species.

Colours: cephalothorax above black, somewhat shining ;
abdomen dull black; cheliceres shining, pitchy, last joint
reddish; legs and caudal appendage reddish, varied with
greyish black ; entire central region below shining red.

Cephalothorax very slightly rugose, oblong, triangular in
front ; abdomen half as long again, subcylindrical ; stigmati-
form depressions ill-defined ; tail setose throughout its entire

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 16

202. = Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus.

length: cheliceres quite smooth; second joint with five short
teeth above, the second broad and prominent, the fifth very
minute; third joint with one short tooth on its inner margin
below ; fourth joint with inner edge of terminal spine and outer
edge of fixed finger of chele distinctly serrated; legs smooth.
Length 7} lines.
Hab. Santarem, Alter do Chao (Bates). B.M.

5. Thelyphonus antillanus. -

Thelyphonus antillanus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 29, pl. 334. fig. 773 (1843).
Theliphonus caudatus, Guérin (nec Linn.), Cuvier’s Régne Anim. Arach.
. 11, pl. 3. fig. 3 (1829-44),
Thelyphonus antillianus, Lucas, in Ramon de la Sagra’s Hist. de Vile de
Cuba, pl. 5. figs. 4, 4a (1857).

Hab. Haiti. B.M.

6. Thelyphonus rufimanus.

Thelyphonus rufimanus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 8.
fig. 1 (1835).
Adult. Thelyphonus assamensis, Stoliczka, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,
XXXviil. p. 205, pl. 19. fig. 1 (1869).
Hab. “Java” (Lucas); “Assam” (Stoliczhka); Silhet (Stains-
forth); “India,” from Mr. Argent. B.M.
Young specimens agree precisely with M. Lucas’s figure ;
but I doubt the occurrence of this species in Java. It seems
the commonest of all the Thelyphont.

7. Thelyphonus proscorpio.

Thelyphonus proscorpio, Latreille, Gen. Crust. & Ins. i. p.180.n.1; Koch,
Avachn, x. p. 26, pl. 833. fig. 771 (1843).

Thelyphonus caudatus, Lucas (nec Linneeus), Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de
Zool. pl. 9. fig. 1 (1835).

? Young. Thelyphonus angustus, Lucas, loc. cit. pl. 10. fig. 3 (1835).

Hab. Bengal, presented by Gen. Hardwicke. B.M.

8. Thelyphonus linganus.
Thelyphonus linganus, Koch, Arachn, x. p. 31, pl. 335. fig. 774 (1848).
Hab. “ Linga” (Koch); Borneo, from Mr. Stevens. B.M.

9. Thelyphonus australianus.
Thelyphonus australianus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 33, pl. 335, fig. 775 (1848). -

Hab. Australasia, from Sir J. Liddell (Voy. Herald) ; Anei-
teum, New Hebrides, from Mr. Cuming. B.M.

10. Thelyphonus rufipes.

Thelyphonus rufipes, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 9. fig. 2
(1835); Koch, Arachn, x. p, 23, pl. 332. fig. 769 (1843),

Hab. ? BM.

Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 203

11. Thelyphonus manilanus.
Thelyphonus manilanus (sic), Koch, Arachn. x. p, 28, pl. 384, fig. 772
(1843).
Hab, Philippines. B.M.

12. Thelyphonus proboscideus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 3.

Colours: black above, with legs, tail, and apex of cephalo-
thorax chestnut-red; cheliceres shining chocolate-brown ;
below shining pitchy, with basal joint of cheliceres, legs, tail,
base and central region of abdomen more or less red.

Cephalothorax elongate, somewhat rugose, triangular in
front, where it culminates in a depressed, well-defined, red
tooth or spine; abdomen covered with minute granular rugo-
sities; the segments minutely serrated, the last segment before
the tail strongly excavated; stigmatiform depressions well
defined: cheliceres varying in length, slightly wrinkled trans-
versely ; basal joint termmating anteriorly in an enormous
spine, toothed internally at its base and pilose; second joint
with five teeth above, the first and second large, separated by
an interval from each other, the third, fourth, and fifth about
half the length of the others, situated upon the interior margin,
which is also somewhat pilose, interior surface bearing several
denticulate rugosities, inferior margin bearing two teeth;
third joint elongate, cylindrical, with one spine below; fourth
joint distinctly rugose, with a large blunt protuberance on its
lower surface ; terminal spine very prominent, blunt, somewhat
curved, and ending abruptly in a short conical tooth: chele
pilose, dentated internally, the fixed finger, which is very
short and spine-like, externally ; when closed with the terminal
spine of third joint they appear as a compact, quadrate, com-
pressed plate, terminating above in two diverging teeth: legs
and caudal appendage slightly rugose and pilose,

Length 1 inch.

Hab. Ceylon (£. L. Layard). B.M.

A very remarkable new species, and unlike any thing pre-
viously described in the genus.

Section b. Species with two spines on upper surface of second
joint of cheliceres.

13. Thelyphonus formosus, n.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 4.

Allied to 7. proboscideus ; colours the same; cephalothorax
without apical spine, otherwise very similar; cheliceres some-
what long, nearly smooth, sparsely but distinctly punctured ;
basal joint of ordinary type; second joint slightly wrinkled,
with only two minute teeth above, its ner surface somewhat

16%

204 Mr. A.G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus.

denticulate and pilose; third joint with one small tooth below ;
fourth joint with large, curved, terminal spine, terminating
above in a minute blunt fork, one tooth of which is bifid, and
below in a rounded protuberance; chele short and rounded,
fixed finger short and somewhat conical, serrate and pilose
externally ; moveable finger long, curved, pilose ; legs covered
with granular rugosities.

Length 11 lines.

Hab. Moulmein (Archdeacon Clerk). B.M.

Section c. Species with six spines on upperside of second joint
of cheliceres.

14. Thelyphonus pugnator, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 5.

Allied to T. manilanus and T. proboscideus. Form of
eephalothorax and abdomen as in the former; colours as in
the latter species ; cephalothorax less rugose thanin 7. mant-
lanus ; abdominal segments not serrated ; cheliceres very long,
nearly smooth, shining, clothed internally with long lake-red
hairs; basal joint with short blunt spine, terminating in a
small conical tooth; second joint with six small teeth above,
an interval between each of them, the first smallest, the third
largest; two minute teeth below; inner surface denticulate ;
third joint cylindrical, without tooth*; fourth joint rather
short, with very long terminal spine; chele long, flattened
externally ; the fixed finger broad, compressed, and strongly
curved, serrated internally; movable finger long, nearly
straight, bifid at its extremity, serrated on both edges, but
most coarsely externally; legs covered with granular rugo-
sities. :

Length 1 inch 5 lines.

Hab. Philippines. B.M.

The most remarkable of all the species of Thelyphonus.

, 4b: Thelyphonus spinimanus.

Thelyphonus spinimanus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 10.
fig. 2 (1835).

Probably a New-World species.

16. Thelyphonus Stimpsonii.
Thelyphonus Stimpsonii, Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. p. 312 (1861).
Hab. “Japan” (Wood); Hongkong (J. Bowring, Esq.).
B.M.

_ * On the left-hand chelicere there isa minute tubercle, which probably
represents the missing tooth.

Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 205

In our example the first tooth on the inner edge of the
second joint (first jomt of Wood) is almost imperceptible; so
that there seem at first sight to be only four, instead of five
teeth.

; 17. Thelyphonus seticauda.
Thelyphonus seticauda, Doleschall, Natuurk. Tijdschr. voor Nederl. Indié,

xi. p. 404 (1857).

Hab. “ Amboina” (Doleschall); Ceram (Madame Ida
Pyeger). BM: ae

18. Thelyphonus lucanoides, sp.n. Pl. XIII. fig. 6.

Closely allied to 7. seticauda, but considerably larger and
darker ; the cephalothorax comparatively longer and narrower,
with the fork of the median depression terminating also much
further from its imferior edge ; the abdomen more cylindrical
and with less distinct marginal ridge; the cheliceres more
distinctly punctured.

_ Length 1 inch 1 line.

Hab. Corea (Arthur Adams, Esq.). Two specimens. B.M.

A local representative of T. seticauda.

19. Thelyphonus caudatus.
Phalangium caudatum, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. 1, ii. p. 1029, n. 8 (1766)
Sulzer, Gesch. Ins. pl. 29. fig. 11 (1776).
Tarantula caudata, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ii. p. 433. n. 2 (1798).
Hab. Madras (French rocks) (Mrs. Hamilton, Vigors’s coll.,
Mr. Jerdon) ; Bengal (Gen. Hardwicke) ; 'Tenasserim (J. C.
D. V. Packman) ; Ceylon (H. W. Janson). B.M.

A broad, well-marked form, having six teeth on second
joint of cheliceres and a very depressed abdomen ; it has been
confounded with two, if not three, other species.

20. Thelyphonus sinensis,n.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 7.

Allied to T. caudatus, but larger and blacker; cephalothorax
comparatively longer; cheliceres duller and less rugose, second.
joint with all the teeth considerably longer, the third being
most prominent. ,

Length 1 inch 7 lines.

Hab, Hongkong, from J. C. Bowring, Esq. B.M.

Unquestionably 1a local form of 7. caudatus, but sufficiently
different to require a distinctive name.

21. Thelyphonus rufus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 8.

Allied to J. rufipes, but much larger and entirely of a
reddish-chestnut colour; the cheliceres much more coarsely

206 Dr, J. E. Gray on a new Propithecus and the Fossane.

punctured, and with the external edge very setose; terminal
segment of abdomen more transverse.

Length 1 inch 6 lines.

Hab. Locality unknown, B.M.

Looks, at first sight, like a red specimen of 7. sinensis; but
the sculpture, pilosity, and dentation of the cheliceres are quite
different.

XXIX.—WNotes on a new Propithecus and the Fossane from
Madagascar. By Dr. J. EK. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Tue British Museum has lately received a number of mam-
malia from Madagascar collected by Mr. Crossley. ‘The two
following are quite new to the Museum collection, and, I
believe, new to modern science,

1. Propithecus bicolor,

Black ; middle of back and loins white, with a central black
streak ; brownish on the margin.

Madagascar.

The white on the back is marked with a more or less di-
stinct, central, longitudinal black line, which is most distinct
and extends nearly to the rump in one of the specimens.

In the other specimen, that has not this line so distinctly
marked, the middle of the back is brownish. In both speci-
mens the hinder part of the thigh is rather brown; the tail is
slender, of an intense black, and about the length of the body.

The two specimens are very much alike in size and colour,
and very different from the other three species in the Museum.
They are very like Indris brevicaudatus ; but they have a di-
stinct tail, like the other Propithect.

2. I have no doubt that this is the animal described by
Buffon (Hist. Nat. xiii, p. 163, t. 21), received from M.
Poivre, who sent it to the Academy of Sciences in 1761, but
which of late has been unknown to naturalists. I was so
satisfied from the description and figure that it was separate
from the other known Viverre, that in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soe.’
for 1864 I established for it a genus of the name of Yossa; and
this is repeated in the ‘Catalogue of Carnivorous, Pachyder-
matous, and Edentate Mammalia in the British Museum ;’ but
various zoologists have decided that this was amistake. The
Museum has now received a male and a female and a skeleton
of an animal that I have no doubt is the Fossane; and it
proves to be a very distinct genus, having the soles of the

Dr. J. E. Gray on Ceratorhinus. 207

hind feet entirely hairy, like the Viverricola; but it differs
from that animal in having no lunate mark on the front of the
chest ; and the tail is only marked with a series of spots on
each side of the upper part, very unlike the distinct rings of
Viverricola. It ought to be arranged in the tribe Viverrina,
next to Viverricola, and not, as placed in the Catalogue, after
Genetta, in the tribe Genettina.

Fossa, Gray, P. Z. 8S. 1864, and Cat. Carn. Mam. Brit. Mus.
p: 02.

Head tapering. Throat pale, without any lunate bands.
Body elongate; back not crested. Legs moderate, equal.
Tail shorter than the body, grizzled, with a series of dark
spots on each side of the basal half, and very indistinct inter-
rupted dark rings on the hinder half; underside not ringed or
spotted. Soles of the hind feet entirely hairy, without any
naked streak, extending from the base of the toes to the heel.

1. Fossa Daubentonii, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 518; Cat. Carn.
Mam. B. M. p. 62.

Fossane, Bufton, Hist. Nat. xiii. p. 163, t. 21.

Viverra fossa, Schreb, Saugeth. t. 114 (from Buffon).

Hab. Madagascar. B.M. .

I will on a future occasion give a longer description, with
an account of the dentition and skeleton, of this long-lost and
much misunderstood beast.

Buffon and Daubenton described a specimen brought home
by M. Poivre in 1761, which was afterwards in the Museum
of the Jardin des Plantes. When I have been in Paris I
have searched for it two or three times without being able to
discover it; so that I fear the original specimen has been
lost; and I regard the rediscovery of the animal as quite as
important as the finding of a new species. Daubenton’s
description is very accurate. It is at once known from Viver-
ricola malaccensis and Grenetta, with which some zoologists
have confounded it, by having no lunate bands on the throat.

XXX.— On the double-horned Asiatic Rhinoceros (Cerato-
rhinus). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

THE Zoological Society has, within this last year, received
two specimens of the double-horned Asiatic rhinoceros (Cera-
torhinus). They are very unlike one another, and come from
different but neighbouring parts of South Asia, both being
females and nearly adult. ‘There is every reason to suppose

208 Dr. J. E. Gray on Ceratorhinus.

that they are distinct species. Both have been called the hairy
rhinoceros, or Rhinoceros sumatrensis. The one comes from
Chittagong, and the other from Malacca; and Mr. Blyth sup-
poses that the one inhabits the east coast of the Bay of Ben-
gal and the series of islands extending to Sumatra, and the
other the Malay peninsula and Tenasserim, separated in Bur-
mah by the Irrawaddy river.

The one from Chittagong is covered with soft hair, and the
ears are surrounded by a fringe of long hairs; I have no doubt
this is the double-horned rhinoceros of Sumatra, described by
W. Bellin the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ January 10, 1793.
Mr. Bell describes the “general colour as brownish-ash.
Underside of belly between the legs and folds of skin dirty
flesh-coloured. Ears small and pointed, lined on the edge with
short black hair. Upper lip pointed and hanging over the
under, Whole skin rough, and covered very thinly with
short black hair.”

The figure represents the ears fringed with longer hair, and
the tail covered with longer hair and reaching two thirds of
the distance to the hocks.

The following names have been applied to this species :—

The double-horned Rhinoceros of Suntatra, Bell. Phil. Trans. 1793, p. 8, t. 2
(animal), t.3 & 4 (skull); Home, Phil. Trans. 1821, p. 270, t. 21
(skeleton), and t. 22 (skull). i!

Rhinocéros bicorne de Sumatra, Cuvier, Oss. Foss. vol. ii. p. 27, t. 4, vol. iii.
p. 49, t. 7 & t. 8. f. 8 (skull, from Bell).

Rhinoceros sumatranus, Raffles, Linn. Trans. xiii. p. 268; Miiller, Verh.
t. 35 (old and young); Blyth, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 806, 1862, p.1; Journ.
Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, xxxi. 1869, p. 151, t. 3.

Rhinoceros sumatrensis, Cuv. R. A.; Blainv. Ostéogr. t. 2 (skull), t. 7
(teeth) ; Anderson, P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 129; Sclater, P. Z.S. 1872,

. 185.

Goioninns sumatranus, Gray, P. Z.S. 1867, p. 1021; Cat. B. M. p. 3138.

The Sumatran or Hairy Rhinoceros, Tegetmeier, ‘ Field,’ March 16, 1872.

The Sumatran Rhinoceros, P. U.S. ‘Nature,’ March 18, 1872, p. 427, f. 1.

Hairy Rhinocercs from Chittagong, Buckland, ‘ Land and Water,’ August
10, 1872.

Rhinoceros lasiotis, Sclater, fide Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ August
10, 1872.

Hab. Chittagong and Sumatra.

I cannot conceive how the idea originated of giving another
name to this species.

The length of the hairs on the margin of the ears appears to
vary in the different specimens; and those in the specimen in
the Zoological Gardens appear to be much longer than usual.
Thus Dr. Anderson states that in the adult males and females
from Burmah the margin of the ears is fringed with strong,

Mr. W.S. Kent on Tethya muricata. 209

erect, black hairs tipped with brown, almost an inch or rather
more in length; but in this individual the hairs are nearly 5
inches long (P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 130), so that the character from
which it has been named may be only an individual pecu-
liarity.

The species from Malacca has the hair on the body “ thick,
black, which stands erect like the hog-mane of a horse ;”” and
further on, Mr. Buckland says the hair is stiff like “hedgehog’s
bristles.”

The skin is “ very rough, the tail long and thin, and comes

nearly to the hocks.”
Hairy Rhinoceros from Malacca, Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ Aug. 10,
1

Rhinoceros sumatrensis, Sclater, fide Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ Aug. 10,
1872.

Rhinoceros sumatranus from Tavoy, Blyth, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,
1862, t. 4. f. 1 & 2 (skull).

Rhinoceros sumatranus from Tenasserim, Blyth, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,
1862, p. 156, t. 3.£.1,2,3,& 442 & 3.

Rhinoceros Cross, Gray, P. Z.S. 1854, p. 250, fig. (horns).

Hab. Malacca (Zool. Gard.) ; 'Tavoy, northern frontier of
Siam; Pegu (Theobald, B. M.).

I think, from Blyth’s figure of the skull from Tavoy, that
the name of Ceratorhinus Crossii should be attributed to this
species.

It is clearly not the Sumatran Ceratorhinus figured and
described by Bell, Miiller, and other zoologists, who would
not have overlooked the hedgehog-like bristles and long slender
tail.

XXXI.—WNote on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, and Dor-
villia agariciformis, Kent. By W.SAvILLE KEnT, F.Z.5.,
_ F.R.M.S., Geological Department, British Museum.

In Part I. of the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for
this year, just issued, Dr. Bowerbank comments upon a sponge
described and figured by myself in the ‘Transactions of the
Royal Microscopical Society’ for 1870, under the name of
Dorvillia agaricrformis, referring it to his hitherto manuscript
species Tethya muricata. The singular mushroom-like form
which suggested the specific title attached to this sponge in
my description, Dr. Bowerbank thinks fit to regard as an
abnormal and imperfect condition, and summarily disposes of
it as a “ mutilated specimen ”’ of his own species, having “ the
upper portion evidently torn away from its basal one, causing

210 Mr. W.S. Kent on Tethya muricata

the part described to assume a form very much like that of an
Agaric.” Referrmg next to the types of spicula figured in
my plate, Dr. Bowerbank assumes that I have “fallen into
the error of describing some of those organs (?) that do not
belong to the species under consideration,” and enumerates in
consecutive order such ones as he condemns as being derived
from extraneous sources.

Dr. Bowerbank’s foregoing adverse criticisms being rather
calculated to mislead those interested in the structure of the
Spongiade, I feel it incumbent upon myself to reply briefly
to them. ;

In the first place I must express the most unqualified dissent
from Dr. Bowerbank’s proposition that the specimen from which
my description was derived is a “mutilated” one: another
example, accompanying the individual figured, furnished the
same characters; and the same may be said of a fine series
obtained by Dr. Carpenter and Professor Wyville Thomson
during their earlier dredging expeditions to the North Atlantic
in H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’ The last-named gentleman, singu-
larly enough, independently adopted the same specific title of
agariciformis for this remarkable sponge, in reference to its
striking contour, while at the same time he further generically
distinguished it by the title of T%s¢phonia.

Had Dr. Bowerbank referred to his last year’s volume of the
‘Annals,’ he would have discovered that in the January
number I contribute additional remarks on this same sponge,
discarding those spicula of the hexaradiate type objected to by
himself as having been derived from contact with other species,
and correlate it with the true Tethyade. The question now
remains whether the form is identical with Dr. Bowerbank’s
Tethya muricata, or whether it must rank as distinct a species.
In the former case Dr. Bowerbank’s specific title will have to
be expunged, as, until this last issue of the Zoological Society’s
‘Proceedings,’ no recognizable diagnosis of Tethya muricata
has been published. One or two of the spicula have been
figured by its author in his “ Physiology of the Spongiade ”
in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for 1858 and 1862, and
in his ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiade,’ published by
the Ray Society, these being in both places referred to Tethya
muricata of his own MS.; so vague a reference, however, is
totally inadequate for the purpose of establishing it as a species.
On the other hand, the evidence in favour of its being a well-
established deep-sea form, closely allied to, but possessing
constant characters of specific value distinct from Dr. Bower-
bank’s 7. muricata is of the most satisfactory description.
Both Professor Wyville Thomson’s specimens and my own

and Dorvillia agariciformis. 211

show in common the characteristic agaricine contour, and
vary from all hitherto described Tethyade in the possession
of the dependent fascicles of long anchoring spicula by means
of which it rests secure on the treacherous surface of the
yielding ooze which constitutes its habitat. Dr. Bowerbank
has thought fit to assume that these dependent fascicles are
“‘ skeleton-fasciculi of the sponge drawn out of the basal por-
tion”’ at the time of his supposed mutilation, an error of
judgment only explicable by his over-anxiety to identify the
species with his own. On equally slender grounds, because
he cannot find them in his own example, he considers himself
justified in condemning as “ extraneous ”’ in mine certain very
characteristic three- and four-rayed tension-spicula of the sar-
code, figured and alluded to in my description (M. M. J. 1870,
pl. Ixvi. figs. 16-18 and p. 294). Since perusing his comments
I have reexamined carefully mounted sections of the sponge,
and am perfectly satisfied as to the correctness of referrmg
these spicula to the position already indicated, which again
constitutes valuable evidence in support of its being a species
perfectly distinct from Dr. Bowerbank’s. - It is also most
satisfactory to remark that Prof. Wyville Thonison has de-
tected these same types of spicula in his specimens and figured
them in his unpublished plates, which have again been repro-
duced in Dr. Oscar Schmidt’s ‘ Spongienfauna des atlantischen
Gebietes,’ where they may be readily recognized at pl. vi.
fig. 12. The anchoring filaments in Prof. Thomson’s speci-
mens exceed mine in length and abundance.

The nomenclature of this sponge, which has proved itself
a very “apple of discord” among spongologists of the day,
will now admit of definite solution. Allowing, with Oscar
Schmidt, that the character of the dependent anchoring fila-
ments, in which it differs from all Tethy@ hitherto described, con-
stitutes a modification and adaptation to its natural habitat,
scarcely justifying its being promoted to the rank of a distinct
genus, the generic title of Zethya is still retained, with the
specific one of agariciformis already bestowed upon it by Pro-
fessor Wyville Thomson and myself, the following being
offered as a brief summary of its technical characters already
more comprehensively treated of in the two journals here
quoted.

Tethya agariciformis, Kent.

Dorvillia agariciformis, Kent, Monthly Microscopical Journal, December

_ 1870, p. 293, pl. Ixvi. (excepting figs. 10-12, 14, 15, & 19); Ann. & Mag,
Nat. Hist. Jan. 1871, vol. vii. ser. 4. p. 37.

Tisiphonia agariciformis, Wyville Thomson, MS. Porcupine Exp. 1870.

Stellata agariciformis, Oscar Schmidt, Spongienfauna des atlantischen
Gebietes, p. 68, pl. vi. fig. 12, 1870.

212 = Prof. O. C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

Wyvillethomsonia Wallichii (?), Perceval Wright, Quarterly Journal of
Microscopical Science, p. 8, pl. ii. 1870*.
Not Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 117, 1872.

Sponge subconical, agariciform, having an expanded upper.
portion or hood, at or around the summit of which are
located the exhalent apertures or oscula, and a lower or
basal portion bearing numerous fasciculi of attenuate ace-
rate and anchorate spicula, the two regions being distinctly
marked off from one another by the overlapping of the hood.
Spicula of the skeleton large, fusiformi-acerate, expando-
ternate, recurvato-ternate, and bifurcate expando-ternate 5
spicula of the sarcode abundant, minute attenuato-stellate,
with occasional larger triradiate and quadriradiate types.

Hab. Atlantic, dredged at a depth of 500 fathoms and upwards.

XXXII.—Description of Hesperornis regalis, with notices of
four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. By Professor
O. C. Marsuf.

THE few remains of birds hitherto described from the Creta-
ceous deposits of this country, although of much interest, all
pertained to comparatively small species, and belonged, appa-
rently, to families still existing}. It is fortunate, therefore,
that the existence of a fossil bird so large and remarkable as
the one that forms the subject of the present description should
first be made known by the discovery of such important parts
of a skeleton as to afford ample material for the determination
of its affinities. This interesting discovery has already been
announced in this Journal, and the name Hesperornis regalis
proposed by the writer for the species thus represented§. The
present paper is preliminary to a full description, with illustra~
tions, now in course of preparation. The other species briefly
described in this article are likewise of interest, as they add
some new forms to the limited avian fauna heretofore found in
the Cretaceous beds of the Atlantic coast.
Hesperornis regalis, gen. et sp. nov.

The remains of this species at present known consist of por-
tions of one skeleton, including the nearly entire posterior
limbs, from the femur to the terminal phalanges, parts of the

* Possibly the embryonic condition of Tethya agariciformis.

_ + From the ‘American Journal of Science and Arts,’ n. s. vol. iii. May,
1872.
} Ibid. vol. xlix. p. 205, March 1870.

§ Ibid. n. s. vol. iii. p. 56, January 1872; Ann. & Mag, Nat. Hist. April
1872, p. 526.

four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 213

pelvis, several cervical and caudal vertebre, and numerous
ribs, all in excellent preservation. Fragments of four other
individuals were also found by the writer, which agree essen-
tially with the corresponding parts of the more perfect skeleton.
An examination of these various remains soon makes it
evident that they represent a gigantic swimming bird, having
its nearest living allies probably in the Colymbide, but difter-
ing widely in many respects from that group, and from all
other known birds, recent and extinct.

The femur is unusually short and stout, much flattened
antero-posteriorly, and the shaft curved forward. It some-
what resembles in form the femur of Colymbus torquatus,
Briinn., but the great trochanter is proportionally much less
developed in a fore-and-aft direction, and the shaft is much
more flattened. The tibia, or tébia-tarsus, is straight and
elongated. Its proximal end has a moderately developed
cnemial process, with an obtuse apex. The epicnemial ridge
is prominent, and continued distally about one half the length
of the shaft. The distal end of the tibia has on its anterior
face no ossified supratendinal bridge, differing in this respect
from all known aquatic birds. The fibula is well developed,
and resembles that of the Divers.

The tarso-metatarsal bone is much compressed transversely,
and resembles in its main features that of Colymbus. On its
anterior face there is a deep groove between the third and
fourth metatarsal elements, bounded on its outer margin by a
prominent rounded ridge, which expands distally into the free
articular end of the fourth metatarsal. This extremity projects
far beyond the other two, and is double the size of either, thus
showing a marked difference from any known recent or fossil
birds. There is a shallow groove, also, between the second
and third metatarsals, which, taken in connexion with the
deeper one, made the specimen appear, while still in the rock,
as if its main elements were separate. The second metatarsal
is much shorter than the third or fourth ; and its trochlear end
resembles in shape and size that of the former. The ex-
istence of a hallux is indicated by an elongated oval in-
dentation on the inner margin above the articular face of the
second metatarsal. The free extremities of the metatarsals
have the same oblique arrangement as in the Colymbide, to
facilitate the forward stroke of the foot through the water.
There are no canals, or even grooves, for tendons on the
posterior face of the proximal end, as in the Divers and most
other birds ; but below this there is a broad shallow depression
extending rather more than halfway to the distal extremity.

The phalanges of the large external toe are very peculiar,

214 ~— Prof. O. C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

although an approach to the same structure is seen in the
genus Podiceps. On the outer inferior margin they are all
deeply excavated. ‘The first, second, and third have, at their
distal ends, a single oblique articular face on the inner half
of the extremity; and the outer portion is produced into an
elongated obtuse process, which fits into a corresponding
cavity in the adjoming phalanx. This peculiar articulation
prevents flexion except in one direction, and greatly increases
the strength of the joints. The terminal phalanx of this toe
was much compressed. The third or middle toe was greatly
inferior to the fourth in size, and had slender compressed
phalanges, which correspond essentially in their main features
with those of modern Divers. The phalanges of the first and
second toes of the present specimen are wanting.

Portions of the pelvis, found with the posterior limbs in
three of the specimens, indicate that the ilia were separated
from each other, and not very firmly ossified to the sacral
vertebree. The acetabulum was covered with a thick cushion
of cartilage, as in Apteryx; and at its upper margin the
anterior and posterior extensions of the ilia, if both existed,
were disconnected, or unossified at their union.

The cervical and caudal vertebrae preserved present no fea-
tures deserving of special mention in this preliminary notice.
The latter are numerous, but apparently not much in excess
of those in some modern birds. Unfortunately, no portions
of the skull were recovered. The femur and tibia have very
thick compact walls, but appear to have been more or less
pneumatic. ‘The tarso-metatarsals and the phalanges were
nearly or quite solid.

millims.
Monethtol tight femurs. al Sileples v letd anew sls Mice elauiee 98
Transverse diameter of proximal end ................ 53
Diameter ofanticular Wead.y, © oi iahssen whe 1514 Gon) wee 18°5
Transverse diameter of shaft at middle .............. 22
Anteno=pasterior GIgMeper so .celeral pierces nia\e! ore meee 19-2
Transverse diameter of distal end ............+5005. 53°5
Mene tot ciSht tia puesto ie eile ies sun's nips ape taereeeys 316
Transverse diameter of proximal articulation.......... 38
Ikenioth of chenilal NrOtens gcse ta sua 50 (eke te eeorere 22
Transverse diameter of shaft at middle .............. 29
Transverse diameter of distalend .................. 32
Antero-posterior extent of outer condyle ............ 32
Antero-posterior extent of inner condyle ............ 22
Length of right tarso-metatarsal..................6. 137
Length to distal end of third metatarsal.............. 130
Length to distal end of second metatarsal ............ 116

Transverse diameter of proximal articulation.......... 36

- four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 215

millims
Least transverse diameter of shaft .............20005 a3)
Transverse diameter of distal end of fourth metatarsal... 16
Transverse diameter of third. metatarsal .............. ~ 85
Transverse diameter of second metatarsal ............ 8
Length of proximal phalanx of fourth toe ............ 45
Bone oe secand phalanx 5 655. 200,320 ls este oe 39-5
Hesoaneet third phalanx 72. oats. eka ee ce es ee eee 40
Length of proximal phalanx of third toe ............ 41

The various remains of the present species already dis-
covered belonged to five individuals, which differed but little
in size or in any important particular. ‘Taking the great
Northern Diver (Colymbus torquatus, Briinn.) as a standard of
comparison for the portions that are wanting, the skeleton of
Hesperornis regalis would measure about 5 feet 9 inches
from the apex of the bill to the extremities of the toes.

The affinities of Hesperornis have already been mentioned.
The characters given in the above description show plainly
that, although a comprehensive type, it belongs to the Palmi-
pedes ; and while most nearly allied to the Colymbide, it still
differs so widely from that group in the structure of the pelvis
and posterior limbs as to demand a place in at least a separate
family, which may be called Hesperornide.

All the remains of the species now known were found by
the writer, last summer, in the grey shale of the upper Cre-
taceous, near the Smoky-Hill River, in Western Kansas.

Graculavus velox, gen. et sp. nov.

Among the vertebrate remains in the Yale Museum, from
the Cretaceous greensand of New Jersey, are fragments of the
skeletons of two aquatic birds, which apparently belong to
the same genus, although to quite distinct species. Both of
these differ essentially from all recent birds, but are evi-
dently most nearly allied to the Cormorants. The largest
ot these birds, to which the above specific name may be given,
is mainly represented, at present, by the proximal half of a
left humerus, in perfect preservation, and hence a very cha-
racteristic specimen. In its general features this humerus
resembles that of the Common Cormorant (Graculus carbo,
Linn.), although indicating a somewhat smaller species.
The articular head is much more compressed transversely, its
apex is more prominent, and its anconal margin is strongly
deflected. The median ridge on the anconal side, below the
head, is rounded instead of angular, and the ulnar crest is
much less produced distally.

216 ~=—Prof.O.C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

millims
Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus........ 23°75
Vertical diameter of articular head ................ 13
Hiramsyerse diameter aeseiisalatsls tes oie aie sse si brat Oates 6
Proximal extension of head beyond ulnar crest ...... 4:6
Least diameter of shaft below proximal extremity .... 6

The specimens on which this species is based were found by
John G. Meirs, Esq., at Hornerstown, New Jersey, in the
greensand of the upper Cretaceous, and by him presented to
the museum of Yale College.

Graculavus pumilus, sp. nov.

The present species, which is hardly more than one third
the size of the preceding, is likewise represented by the
proximal end of a humerus, as well as by some other cha-
racteristic remains. The articular head in this specimen is
equally compressed, and shows the same prominent apex, but
is without the anconal deflection which distinguishes the
larger species. The lower half of the head is narrower trans-
versely, and separated from the internal trochanter by a wider
notch. The median ridge, moreover, on the anconal face is
much more acute.

millims
Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus........ 13°25
Vertical diameter of articular head ................ 8
remisyersesdrameber sid) 4} 08h. Jl APE R A RNAs 4
Least diameter of shaft below proximal end.......... 31
Greatest diameter of metacarpal at distal end ........ 55
JUGUAS RG DEHnYc1 21 OBOE EMBL ent TE mae RAY oR EUSP ra aT 3°75

The known remains of this species are from the same locality
and geological horizon as the preceding, and were also dis-

covered by John G. Meirs, Esq.

Graculavus anceps, sp. nov.

The only fossil bird-remain secured during the explorations
of the Yale-College party of 1870 in the Cretaceous beds of
Kansas, although special search for them was made, was the
distal extremity of a left metacarpal, which is so well preserved
and so characteristic a part of the skeleton, that it indicates
with considerable certainty the affinities of the bird to which
it belonged. A careful comparison of this specimen with the
corresponding bone in recent birds has made it apparent that
the species was a near ally of the Cormorants; and it may
therefore be referred provisionally to the genus G'raculavus,
until further discoveries determine its position more accurately.
The specimen implies a species about the size of the Violet-

four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 217

green Cormorant (Graculavus violaceus, Gray), of the Pacific
coast, and one somewhat larger than Graculavus velox, de-
scribed above. From the metacarpal of the former it differs
essentially in having the articular face for the external digit
broader and nearly flat, the face for the small inner digit con-
siderably smaller and oval in outline, and the intervening
tubercle much more prominent.

millims,
Greatest diameter of distal end. ..,... <0 tie eee em enee ee 6°75
MeastsGiaMeLen OL CISbAl GIG: ois c/aidiasislepa sfole ode oes 45
Transverse diameter of outer articular face .......... 5
VIET ELCA AA PATNE ECT: \, iad sytare alas enw radars aus Pit there te ace

This specimen was found by the writer in the grey Upper
Cretaceous shale, on the north fork of the Smoky-Hill
River, in Western Kansas.

Paleotringa vagans, sp. nov.

The existence of a new Wading-bird in the Cretaceous
greensand of New Jersey is plainly shown by an interesting
fossil recently presented to the Yale Museum. ‘The specimen
is the greater portion of the shaft and distal end of a left tibia,
somewhat injured, but with its more characteristic portions
still preserved. It indicates a bird somewhat smaller than
Paleotringa littoralis, described by the writer from the same
locality*, but is probably a closely allied form. From the
tibia of that species, the present specimen may readily be di-
stinguished by the proportionally more narrow and shallow
tendinal canal, on the anterior face of the distal end, and by
the more depressed supratendinal bridge. The trochlear sur-
face also, on the posterior side, contracts more rapidly, and at
\e epeiee margin passes directly, and not abruptly, into the
shait.

millims.
Length of portion preserved ..... SAR eae ss anh teat Ane 62
Approximate width of condyles in front ............ 8
Wi reloteou bridweratccertice t...) Sian oS gta ec 4 Neo cbabesns 2:15
Transverse diameter of lower outlet ...............- 15
Transverse diameter of shaft where broken .......... 5
AmMbero—posterlor OcaMeter . 4) sices'sl « ofs-ef lie! esq wenn es 4

This unique specimen was discovered at Hornerstown, New
Jersey, about ten feet below the surface of the marl, and was
presented to the Yale Museum by John G. Meirs, Esq.

Yale College, Newhaven, April 10th, 1872.

* Silliman’s Journal, vol. xlix. p. 208, March 1870.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 17

218 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Genera Manouria and Scapia.

~ XXXITII.—On the Genera Manouria and Scapia.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Dr. ANDERSON, in the just published part of the ‘ Proceedings
of the Zoological Society’ for 1872, has written a paper
to prove that Testudo Phayret, the type of the genus Scapia,
and Testudo emys, the type of the genus Manouria, are
only varieties or sexes of the same species, and has illustrated
it with eight figures of the sternum of different specimens (pp.
134 to 137)—five belonging to Scapia, and the other three to
Manouria. There is a slight modification in the form of the
pectoral plates in the different specimens; but I do not think
that, either in the plates or text, he proves the identity of
the two genera, which doubtless are allied, and which, in the
‘Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ I have
placed together in the same group of land-tortoises. And I
do not think that he has proved his case, as it would be very
unlike all that was previously known of the form of the pec-
toral shields in ‘Tortoises.

Because the three specimens of Manourta which Dr. An-
derson examined have the sternum concave, and his five
specimens of Testudo Phayret have it flat, he concluded that
the former were the male and the latter the female of the same
species, which he calls Testwdo emys; and he gives a number
of names as its synonyms, without defining which of them
belong to the male and which to the female. I think if he
had done so he would have avoided that mistake.

1. Testudo emys, described by Miiller and Schlegel in Ver-
hand. Nat. Gesch. Nederl. Ind. Rept. 1839, xliv. pp. 30, 34,
tab. 4, the type of the species of M/anouria, has a flat sternum,
and is, according to Dr. Anderson’s theory, a female.

2. The specimens in the British Museum, which are described
and figured under the name of Manouria fusca (Shield Rept.
p- 16. pl. 3), being the types of that species, also the specimen
said to have come from Australia with the animal figured in
the Proc. Zool. Soc. 1860, p. 395, t. 81. have a flat sternum, and
are, for the same reason, females according to Dr. Anderson.

3. Leconte, who describes the species under the name of
Teleopus luxatus (Philad. Proc. 1854, p. 187), does not men-
tion the form of the sternum, which, I think, he most likely
would have done if it had been concave.

I think we may therefore conclude that the two sexes of
Manouria are known, that the specimens described by Schlegel,
myself, and Leconte were females, and that those examined
and figured by Dr. Anderson were males, according to his
theory, and therefore both sexes of this genus are known,

Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier. 219

Unfortunately I do not know of any specimens of Testudo
Phayret (the type of Scapia) being in Europe, and IT have
never had the opportunity of examining any; but as it appears
that all the specimens that have been examined have a flat ster-
num, probably this species has the sternum flat in both sexes,
as is the case in many land-tortoises, and the concavity of the
sternum in males of Manowria would be a peculiarity of that
genus.

Until the skull on which Scapia was founded was deter-
mined to be the skull of Testudo Phayre?, it was not known
that the animal was so like that of Manowria; but since that
time the two genera have been arranged in a special section
(see Appendix to Catal. Shield Reptiles, 1872, p. 7). The
animals of both resemble that of Testudo sulcata of Africa in
form and in the scales on the legs and thighs; but that has
only a single caudal plate and a shorter head.

XXXIV.—On Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Trionyx hurum,
B.H. and Dr. Gray. By Dr. ANDERSON, Calcutta.

Dr. Gray’s characteristic reply* to my stricturest on his
understanding of the two species of Gangetic mud-tortoises
seems to indicate that his present knowledge of these species,
instead of being an advance on his ‘ Synopsis Reptilium,’ is a
relapse into confusion and unreliability. It is not surprising,
therefore, that Dr. Gray and his friend conjointly were unable
to follow the drift of my remarks. But, although I may not
carry conviction to Dr. Gray’s mind, I hope to be able, in the
the following observations, to prove satisfactorily to unpre-
judiced minds that the skull figured by Cuvier under the
name of Trionya gangeticus, and referred by Dr. Gray to the
Trionyx hurum} of Buchanan Hamilton, described at p. 47
in the ‘ Synopsis Reptilium,’ redescribed in the ‘ Catalogue of
Shield Reptiles,’ p. 66, under the name of Zrionya gangeticus,
Cuvier, and again brought forward under the same name at

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. no. 54, p. 478. + Ibid. no. 53, p. 382.
} Dr. Gray, in his ‘Synopsis Reptilium,’ under the name of 7. hawn,
announces the brilliant discovery that “ Cuvier’s specimen appears to
have a peculiarity, in the web between the second and third fingers of
each foot being pierced with a hole;” and he further observes that these
remarkable solutions of continuity “are not noticed in any of Dr. Hamil-
ton’s or General Hardwicke’s figures from living animals.” These holes,
which evidently suggest to Dr. Gray’s mind a wide and interesting field
for further research, are made by the fishermen, who pass a cord through
them and tie the feet together to prevent the animals escaping !

Lv

220 Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier.

p- 97 in the Supplement to the latter work, is not the skull
of that species.

The confusion that exists in Dr. Gray’s Catalogues regarding
the foregoing species (7. hurwm) and his so-called Trionyx
javanicus, Schweigger, MS., ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology,’
(7. javanicus, Geott.) ‘Synopsis Reptilium,’ p. 48, and ‘ Cat.
Shield Rept.’ p. 67, and Potamochelys stellata, Geott., ‘ Suppl.
Cat. Shield Rept.’ p. 104, is alone explicable on the justifiable
supposition that Dr. Gray is more anxious to catalogue the
specimens under his charge than to work out their natural
affinities by a careful consideration of the characters of the
materials at his disposal. It would be well if Dr. Gray would
carefully ponder the admirable advice which was so ably ten-
dered to him by M. Brunner de Wattenwyl*, and remember
that “les especes sont des entités de la nature dont l’observa-
tion est du domaine de la philosophie.”

The pernicious practice of creating new genera on characters
derived exclusively from single skulls or from drawings of
skulls without any knowledge whatever of the animals that
yielded them, has resulted in this, that we find animals de-
seribed by Dr. Gray in his Catalogues with their skulls and
tails allocated in widely apart genera. ‘The confused maze of
synonyms which this practice has elaborated can be better
imagined than described.

The facts connected with the two Gangetic mud-tortoises
are these :—Dr. Gray’s figure in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian
Zoology,’ bearing the name Trionyx javanicus, Schweigger,
MS., represents the most prevalent species. Its skull is iden-
tical with the skull figured by Dr. Gray at pl. xli. fig. 1 of
his ‘ Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ and which is there correctly
named Trionyx gangeticus. ‘This skull, however, is referred
by Dr. Gray to the other species of Gangetic mud-tortoises,
which was originally described by him in his ‘ Synopsis Rep-
tilium,’ p. 47, under the name 7rionyx hurum, but which in
his ‘Suppl. to the Cat. of Shield Rept.’ p. 97, is reproduced
as 7. gangeticus, Cuvier. This species (7. hurum), however,
does not yield a skull like the skull figured by Cuvier as 7.
gangeticus ; but if Dr. Gray will turn to pl. xhu. fig. 2 of his
‘Cat. of Shield Rept.’ he will find a skull figured, but without

-a name, which is very closely allied to the skull of 7. hurwm.
The differences that exist between the skulls there figured in-
dicate those that exist between Trionyx gangeticus and Trionyx
hurum. But, although it is impossible to separate generically
the skulls figured on that plate, Dir. Gray makes the unguarded
statement that the two mud-tortoises of the Ganges, in question,

* Rey, et Mag. de Zoologie, Mars 1870.

Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, 221

belong to two genera. It should be borne in mind, however,
that Dr. Gray “has no practical acquaintance with the skull
of his 7. javanicus, Geoff., which is the last name but one
which he has adopted for the Testudo gotaghol of Buchanan
Hamilton, and which he named in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian
Loology’ Trionyx Jjavanicus, Schweigger, although he now
states that Schweigger ‘‘never uses such a name.” In the
; Synopsis Reptilium,’ p- 48, and in the ‘ Catalogue of Shield
Reptiles,’ p- 67, the same species appears under the name 7’
javanicus, Geoff. ; but Dr. Gray’s knowledge of the species
had apparently undergone a change in the interval between
the publication of the Catalog ue and its Supplement, because
in the latter (p. 104) the species is brought on the stage as
Potamochelys stellata, Geoft.

Dr. Gray remarks of the skull of Emyda punctata (Suppl.
Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 117) that it is very like that of Potamochelys.
I have before mea skull which I removed with my own hands
from an adult specimen of the common yellow-spotted Hinz yaa
of the Ganges. This skull, although it is hee er than Dr. Gray’s
figure of Potamochelys stellata, Geoff, I am prepared to prove
is generically identical with the skull which that figure repre-
sents; in other words, Dr. Gray’s figure of the skull of Pota-
mochelys stellata, Geoff., is the skull of an Hmyda closely
allied to Hmyda punctata.

It is to be desired that Dr. Gray should state whence he
obtained the figure of the skull of his so-called Potamochelys
stellata, Geoff., because in writing of the species he distinctly
states, “I have not been able to examine any skulls of it.”
Has Dr. Gray copied the skull from Prof. Wagler’s figure
without any acknowledgment, and without. any grounds that
justified him in referring the skull of an L’myda to the body of
a true Trionyx, the skull of which had been already figured
and described by Cuvier as Trionyx gangeticus ?

The foregoing insight into the character of the ‘ Supplement
to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles in the Collection of the
British Museum’ is unfortunately not an isolated instance of
the many inaccuracies which distinguish it. Only a very
short time ago I pointed out that Dr. Gray’s genera Manouria
and Scapia refer to one animal, the shell constituting the former
and the skull the latter eens, the two genera being the
equivalent of the genus Zestudo*! The correctness of what

* A paper of mine appeared in this Journal, vol. viii. p. 524 (1871),
under the misnomer, ‘ On Testudo Phayrei, Theob. and Dr. Gray,” whereas
it should have been “On Trionyv Phayrei” &e. The whole internal
evidence of the paper proved the absurdity of the title, which I believe
was drawn out by the editors of the ‘Annals.’ [Whatever Dr, Anderson

222 Royal Society :—

I then stated has been allowed by Dr. Gray, as he has returned.
the skull of Scapia Falconer? to this museum on the strength
of my representation,

Before concluding, I may observe that I have never asked
Dr. Gray, on any occasion, for his opinion of Dr. Fleming, and
that I never had the privilege, while a student, to be a regular
member of Dr, Fleming’s class ; and under these circumstances
I object to Dr. Gray’s Chelonian method being applied to me.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES,
ROYAL SOCIETY.

May 30, 1872.—George Biddell Airy, C.B., President,
in the Chair.

**On the Structure and Development of the Skull of the Salmon
(Salmo salar, L.)”’* By Wiiitam Kircuen Parker, F.R.S.

A few years ago Mr. Waterhouse Hawkins put into my hands
some newly hatched salmon and also three of the first summer.
Seeing their fitness for embryological research and the interest attach-
ing to the formation of an osseous fish, I applied to my friends
Messrs. Frank Buckland and Henry Lee, and these gentlemen most
liberaily supplied me with alarge number of unhatched embryos and
of the “fry” of this large fish.

My last subject, the frog, being fairly out of hand, I set myself
last summer to this newer and more easy task,—more easy by far ;
for the translucency of the young salmon contrasts most favourably
with the obscurity of the embryo frog.

I found that the two types at the time of hatching did not start
fairly, but that the salmon had hastened to finish its fourth stage
before emerging from the egg; this, however, is partly in conse-
quence of the difference of the envelope in which the embryos are
contained ; for in the salmon this is a leathery ‘chorion,’ and in
the frog a mere gelatinous bleb.

Moreover it soon became apparent that these two “ Ichthyopsi-
dans”’ are in no wise near akin to each other. In the very first stage,
where there is an essential agreement, in one important particular
they greatly disagree ; for the embryo of the salmon has two arches
in front of its mouth, while the tadpole has but one; there is also an
additional gill-arch in the osseous fish.

In the earliest stage of the salmon worked out by me I found a

may believe, and however absurd the Title, we can assure him it stands
in his own hand-writing—at the head of the MS. The only alteration,
fortunately, which I ventured to make was the substitution of a P for p
in Phayrei.—W.F. | :

* Being an abstract of the Bakerian Lecture.

Mr. W. K. Parker on the Skull of Salmo salar. 223

much more distinct condition of the parts than in frogs at the same
stage; the differentiation of the latter is obscure as compared with
the fish, and this not merely because of the quantity of pigmentum
nigrum in its tissues.

Then, in addition to other causes of obscuration, the mouth of the
tadpole is strangely modified in harmony with its ‘suctorial’’ cha-
racter and affinities (showing a remarkable affinity to the mouth of a
lamprey), so that a whole system of cartilages has to be eliminated
from the lips before the mouth (proper) can be understood. The
labial system is slightly and slowly developed in the salmon, and its
mouth is thus much more in harmony with that of the embryo reptile
or bird than with that of the tadpole.

After the simple stage is passed, the development of the facial
arches is very different in the two types—as different, indeed, as in
any two possible examples that could be given in the whole vertebrate

roup.
P The facial arches behind the mouth now undergo segmentation—
first the hyoid, and then the mandibular. The hyoid is cloven from
top to bottom and also has a single distal piece separated off.

At this stage we get an explanation of what is seen in certain rays,
where the hyoid suspensorium is permanently double; and also ascer-
tain that this second postoral arch, which retains the anterior piece
in relation to the skull as the great “ hyomandibular”’ pier, does not
need the saw of the transcendentalist to put it into proper relation to
its surroundings. Nature’s invisible wedge has done what was needed,
and the supposed double rib turns out to be half a visceral arch.
On the whole, this second stage is extremely ‘‘ Plagiostomous,” for
the details of which I must refer to the main paper.

While in the egg the head of the embryo is flattened, and so
twisted that one of the eyes (it may be the left or the right) looks
upwards towards the ‘‘chorion,”’ the other having a visceral direc-
tion.

The facial bars, at first having all a simple sigmoid form, rapidly
change towards the time of hatching ; and when the head gets free,
the cerebral vesicles speedily swell, taking on the form so familiar to
the embryologist ; and the head now gains the ‘mesocephalic
flexure.”

After this an approach is made to the Teleostean type of struc-
ture; but this is not done at a stride. The intermediate condition
is thoroughly “Ganoid,”’ and, happily, comes in to explain the related
structures of the older and newer “Orders.” Iam not aware that
any stage of the heart or of the intestines shows either the many
valves of the “aortic bulb” or the intestinal spiral valve ; this must
be seen to ; yet if these never show themselves in the “fry” of the
osseous fish, their absence does not affect the general skeletal mor-
phology.

The salmon amongst fishes, like the fowl amongst birds, never
attains to the greatest degree of special class-modification; it re-
mains subtypical, with a dentigerous maxillary, a ductus pneumaticus,
avery chondrosteous state of the skull, and a very heterocercal tail.

224 Royal Socvety :—

Yet, from an ichthyological point of view, this fish is an immense
height above the Sharks and Rays, and is far in advance, as a fish,
of the whole group of ‘ Ganoids.”

The results of the gradational study of the fish-forms by the
zoologist, and of their secular study by the paleontologist, are both
in harmony with morphological facts. Although the light obtained
is but as the first streak of dawn, yet it is a pleasant light, and quite
sufficient to show each kind of worker where and how to renew his
own special toil.

I cannot close this brief abstract without remarking that my re-
searches in these, the highest types of animals, seem to me to be in
perfect accordance with the results obtained by long study of the
very lowest, the Rhizopods—namely, that they both yield increasing
evidence in favour of the doctrine of Evolution.

Researches of this kind show what the life-processes can accom-
plish in the history of one individual animal, and also that the mor-
phological steps and stages are not arbitrary, but take place in a
manner in accordance with all that has of late been revealed to us of
the gradation of types in the ages that are past.

June 20, 1872.—Sir James Paget, Bart., D.C.L., Vice-President,
in the Chair.

‘Notice of further Researches among the Plants of the Coal-
measures.”” By Professor W. C. Wiitiamson, F.R.S. (in a Letter
to Dr. SHarrry, Sec. R.S.

Fallowfield, May 3, 1872.

My prar Dr. Suarpry,—In my memoir on Calamites, published
in the last volume of the ‘Philosophical Transactions,’ I gave two
ficures of sections of a plant (plate 25. fig. 16 and plate 28. fig. 39)
supposed to be a Calamite, but respecting the Calamitean nature cf
which I expressed my doubts in a note at the foot of page 488. I
have now got numerous examples of this plant; and it proves, as I
surmised, to belong to a distinct type. It has a branching stem, no¢
jointed, and having a remarkable pith. Since the latter organ, when
divided transversely, gives a star-shaped section, closely resembling
that of a Calamite, except that it has not been fistular, I propose
to give to the plant the generic name of Astromyelon. [have further
examined a series of curious stems which I described briefly at the
Edinburgh Meeting of the British Association under the name of
Dictyoxylon radicans; this plant I also find must be placed in a
new genus. It is characterized by possessing an exogenous, wocdy,
branching stem, composed of reticulated vessels. It has no pith;
and its bark consists of cells arranged in columns perpendicular to
its surface. I think it not improbable that this has been the sub-
terranean axis of some other plant, since I have succeeded in tracing
its ultimate subdivisions into rootlets. I propose for the present to
recognize it by the generic name of Amyelon. My specimens of this
plant are very numerous, some of them having been kindly sup-
plied to me by Messrs. Butterworth and Whittaker, of Oldham.

SE —————

Prof. W. C. Williamson on Plants of the Coal-Measures. 225

They may prove to be rhizomes and roots of the Asterophyllite de-
scribed in my last letter to you.

Of this last genus I have just got an additional number of ex-
quisite examples, showing not only the nodes but verticils of the
linear leaves so characteristic of the plant. These specimens place
the correctness of my previous inference beyond all possibility of
doubt, and finally settle the point that <Asterophyllites is not the
branch and foliage of a Calamite, but an altogether distinct type of
vegetation having an internal organization peculiarly its own. This
organization is identical in every essential point with that of my
Volkmannia Dawsoni already referred to in my previous letter, and
which I now do not hesitate to designate Asterophyllites Dawsoni.
The peculiar triquetrous form of the young vascular axis of this
genus is too remarkable and too distinct from that of all other Carbo-
niferons types to be mistaken for any of them, and especially for
that of Calamites, with which it has not one single feature of real
affinity.

I have also obtained, partly through the assistance of Messrs.
Butterworth and Whittaker, but especially the latter, an instructive
series of specimens of the genus Zygopteris, which has recently been
made the subject of an important memoir by M. B. Renault, pub-
lished in tome xii. of the ‘Annales des Sciences Naturelles.’ Our
Lancashire specimens are of the type which he describes under the
name ef Z. Lacattii. The French savant has found these plants, in
one instance, connected as petioles to a rhizome which he believes
to be that of a fern. Our specimens supply some information
additional to that published by M. Renault: they appear to me to
sustain his idea that they are petioles; and I have traced in them the
origin of the two vascular bundles which he refers to as pores existing
in the bark. I find much reason for concluding that they are, as he
surmises, the vessels going to the secondary rachis of the pinnules.
Our Lancashire specimens are covered with sparse but very distinct
hairs that, unlike the ramentaceous form common amongst ferns, are
perfectly cylindrical. Whilst I am thus inclined to express my
conviction that M. Renault is correct in his views respecting Zygo-
pteris, I find it increasingly difficult to distinguish fragments of ferns
from those of Lycopods, as also fragments of petioles from those of
roots.

Mr. Nield and Mr, Whittaker, of Oldham, have just supplied me
with two magnificent stems of Calamites of large size. The pith
is absent from both, except some slight traces at the node of one
of the specimens. I find on dissecting these matured stems that the
remarkable arrangements of the vascular structure seen in plate 23.
figure 2 of my memoir on Calamites almost entirely disappear in the
more external of the exogenous growths. The conspicuous vertical
laminee of cellular parenchyma (my primary medullary rays), which
separate the woody wedges, rapidly diminish in size as they proceed
from within outwards, becoming more or less like the secondary
or ordinary medullary rays represented in my fig. 5. Many of them,
however, retain the evidence of their primary medullary origin in

226 | Royal Soctety.

their unusual length, and in’consisting of two, or even three, vertical
series of cells instead of one, as is usual with the secondary rays.
The vessels pursue their longitudinal course across the node unde-
‘flected in any direction, save where they bend aside to allow the passage
outwards of vascular bundles going off to the aérial branches*, as
represented in my figures 13 and 38. Thus in the exterior parts of
these large stems the ligneous zone exhibits little or no indication of the
presence of a node, except what these divergent bundles afford. I
find that these bundles slightly increase in size as they proceed from
within outwards, showing that they share in the exogenous additions
made to the exterior of the ligneous zone; in one of my stems that
zone has a circumference of seven inches, and in the other of six
and three quarters. It is in the former one that I find the nodal
bundles; but I have not seen one of these organs whose actual dia-
meter exceeds three sixteenths of an inch, confirming my previous
statements respecting the comparatively small size of the aérial
branches. As in my previously described examples, these bases of
branches exhibit no separation of the vessels into a circle of wedges
like those of the parentstem. The persistent growth of the vascular
bundles just described seems to indicate more permanent relations
between them and the central stem than I once thought probable.
There appears to be a close approximation to uniformity in the
number of the woody wedges of these large stems; one of mine
contains 85, and the other 83 such. Mr. Binney counted 73 in his
large specimen (loc. cit. pl. 2. fig. 1). In the thin, young woody
cylinder represented in my fig. 19, the mean diameter of which was
slightly over an inch, the number was also about 80. This close
resemblance between stems so different in age and size again illus-
trates another of my previous statements, viz. that age produces no
increase in the number of the woody wedges, but that each one of
the latter enlarges by successive additions to its peripheral portions
of new laminee, which latter partly fill up the increasing area of the
enlarging circle, and partly encroach upon the primary medullary
rays, as represented in my figure 17, in addition to some interstitial
growth.

We thus learn that as the ligneous cylinder of a Calamite in-
creased in age and size it gradually exhibited less and less of the
Calamitean peculiarities seen in young stems ; its external portions
assumed a generalized, unsulcated form, which recurs with remarkable
uniformity in several otherwise different plants of the Coal-measures.

Amongst the Burntisland fossils sent to me by Mr. Grieve I
find two very curious stems, probably of the same general nature
as Zygopteris. Both have a dense outer cortical layer, with vascular
bundles in the interior. In the simpler of these plants the transverse
section of this bundle is crescentic ; but in the concave border of the
crescent are two small projecting capes dividing it into three minor bays
(fig. 2). In the other the vascular axis is a double one, lodged in a
somewhat elliptical stem: one of these is a simple crescent, the con-

* This condition is very correctly represented in plate J. fig. 3 of Mr. Binney’s
memoir on Calamites (Palaont. Soc.).

Miscellaneous. 227

eavity of which is directed inwards; the other has a very elegant
transverse section (fig. 1). It is shaped like adumb-bell, one head of
which rests within the concavity of the crescentie bundle, and the
other turns in the opposite direction; at each of these two extre-
mities the margin of the dumb-bell is excavated into a small bay, as
if a vertical canal had existed at each point; but these seem to have
been merely columns of cellular tissue encroaching upon the rounded
outline of the vascular structures. I propose provisionally to recog-
nize these two forms under the generic name of Arpexylon.

ee

Fig. 1. Arpexylon duplex. Fig. 2. Arpexylon simplex. Fig. 5. Edraxylon.

Fig. 3 represents a stem or petiole in which the section of the vascular bundle
presents the form of a chair or seat, and to which I propose to assign
the name Edraaylon. This form exhibits numerous modifications of the
pattern represented in the outline, down to a single central vascular bundle.
It may prove to belong to Dictyorylon Oldhamium.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Specific Name of the Black Redstart.
By Atrrep Newron, M.A., F.R.S.

Dr. Gray’s note “On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spell-
ing” in the last Number of the ‘Annals’ (p. 150) reminds me
of a still greater diversity which has long existed among ornitho-
logists as to the spelling of a name which at first sight looks as if it
might have something in common with that of Tethya.

In 1769 Scopoli (Annus I. Historico-naturalis, p. 157) charac-
terized a now well-known bird as “ Sylvia tithys,” with a reference
to “ Linn. 8. N. XI. n. 23.” The eleventh edition of Linnzeus’s great
work is not at present accessible to me ; but it was notoriously a mere
reprint of his tenth edition (1758), of which a copy is now before
me. Here (i. p. 187) we have the 23rd species-of the genus Mota-
cilla designated “ Tvtys,” and a reference to “ Fn. svec. 227;” but
this, as Linneus in his twelfth edition (1. p. 335) allowed, was the
female of his MZ. phenicurus, and Scopoli was unconsciously the first
to give a binomial title to the species we now know as the Black
Redstart; in so doing, however, he misspelt the word, introducing
an A into the name, and in consequence opened a door for a great
number of future errors, while puzzling naturalists to account for it.

Linneus, in his mode of spelling, copied Gesner, who in’ 1555
(Hist. Anim. iii. p. 719) has ¢itys; but the latter also mentions that

228 Miscellaneous.

Dionysius writes titis; and this. seems to be the correct form of the
word. Turning to Liddell and Scott’s ‘ Lexicon,’ based on that of
Passow, we have :—

“ riris, (dos, i), like rex, a small chirping bird, Phot.”

Now Photius flourished somewhere about a.p. 850; and looking
to his dictionary, printed in 1822 from the Gale MS., and edited by
Porson and Bekker, we see (il. p. 592) :—

““ruris: Bpaxv dpvibioy’ onpaiver kat To yuvatKkeloy aidotov" TiTis Kat
}) Képxos.”

Stephanus also shows that titis is the correct form. In his ‘ The-
saurus’ (ed. Paris: 1848-1854, vii. p. 2241) we have “ rizis, ios, i),
avicula,” &c., and the sentence “ éuPibalecOar eis Tas Kadovpévas
rirédas,” Which settles the mattcr. Moreover he adds “ rirvs in vy.
LL. affertur pro cir.”

Photius and others after him derive the word riris from ririZeu,
otherwise written wumiZecy, to chirp.

Hence we may conclude that ¢it’s was originally a general name
for a small chirping bird, that in time it became specially applied to
some bird with a red tail, that as such it had one or more figurative
meanings (in the sentence above quoted we might perhaps trans-
late it by “ Firetail”), concerning which we need not now trouble
ourselves, and that titys is an erroneous form, which has been still
further corrupted into tithys, tethys, thytis, and I know not how
many other misspellings.

Lastly, I may perhaps venture to hint that the root of titis exists
in the prefix “ Tit” of the English “ Titlark” and ‘‘ Titmouse,” and
the first syllable of the Icelandic Zithingur, where it retains its pri-
mitive generalized meaning.

In excuse for occupying all this space, I may mention that natu-
ralists like Hemprich and Ehrenberg (Symb. Phys. fol. 64) and Von
Heuglin (Orn. Nordost-Afr. 1. p. 334) have not thought it beneath
them to attempt an explanation of this word, referring it to rizns,
ultor, with which it has nothing whatever to do,

3 August, 1872.

New Names for a long-known Lepidopteron. By C. Rrrsema.

In the last Number of the ‘ Annals,’ Mr. A. G. Butler describes
and represents a new genus and species of the family Notodontide.
The genus is named Jarsolepis, the species 7’. remicauda.

The same insect, however, was figured as far back as 1806 by J.
Hibner, in the second volume (plate 197) of his ‘Sammlung exotischer
Schmetterlinge,’ under the name of Crino Sommeri, and as belonging
to the Noctue genuine. Herrich-Schiffer (Sammlung neuer oder
wenig bekannter ausser-europiiischer Schmetterlinge, p. 11) changed
the generic name as used before into Crinodes, and placed the insect
in the family Notodontina. Walker, on the other hand, in his
‘ List-of the Specimens of Lepidopterous Insects in the Collection of
the British Museum,’ part xiy. (1858), p. 13846, places the genus

Miscellaneous. 22
Orino, Hiibner, in the Noctuide family Ophiuside, which, however,
is rectified in the ‘Stettiner entomologische Zeitung’ for 1862
(p. 477) by K. Dietrich, who regards it, and most justly, as a Noto-
dontide genus, nearly allied to the genera Phalera, H.-Sch., and
Datana, Walk.

I have seen five specimens of Crinodes Sommeri, Hiitbn.—four
females in the collection of the Royal Museum at Leiden (placed
under the name bilaminata, De Haan, I. L., in the genus WVystalea,
Gn., at present also a Notodontide genus), and one male in Mr.
P. C. T. Snellen’s collection at Rotterdam, all sent over from Java.
Walker (/. c. p. 1348) makes mention of a specimen from Rio Janeiro
in Mr. Fry’s collection.

Leiden, August 10, 1872.

Note on Intelligence in Monkeys. By Prof. Corn.

T have two species of Cebus in my study, C. capucinus, and a half-
grown C. apella. The former displays the usual traits of monkey
ingenuity. He is an admirable catcher, seldom missing any thing,
from a large brush to a grain, using two hands or one. His cage-
door is fastened by two hooks, and these are kept in their places by
nails driven in behind them. He generally finds means, sooner or
later, to draw out the nails, unhook the hooks, and get free. He
then occupies himself in breaking up various objects and examining
their interior appearances, no doubt in search of food. To prevent
his escape I fastened him by a leather strap to the slats of the cage ;
but he soon untied the knot, and then relieved himself of the strap
by cutting and drawing ou; the threads which held the flap for the
buckle. He then used the strap in a novel way. He was accus-
tomed to catch his food (bread, potatoes, fruit, &c.), with his hands
when thrown to him; sometimes the pieces fell short three or four
feet. One day he seized his strap and began to throw it at the
food, retaining his hold of one end. He took pretty correct aim, and
finally drew the pieces to within reach of his hand. This perfor-
mance he constantly repeats, hooking and pulling the articles to him
in turns and loops of the strap. Sometimes he loses his hold of
the strap. If the poker is handed him he uses that with some
skill for the recovery of the strap. When this is drawn in, he
secures his food as before. Here is an act of intelligence which
must have been originated by some monkey, since no lower or
ancestral type of mammals possess the hands necessary for its
accomplishment. Whether originated by Jack, or by some ances-
tor of the forest who used vines for the same purpose, cannot be
readily ascertained.

After a punishment the animal would only exert himself in this
way when not watched; as soon as an eye was directed to him he
would cease. In this he displayed distrust. He also usually exhi-
bited the disposition to accumulate, to be quite superior to hunger ;
thus he always appropriated all the food within reach before be-

230 Miscellaneous.

ginning to eat. When different pieces were offered to him, he trans-
ferred*the first to his hind feet to make room for more; then filled
his mouth and hands, and concealed portions behind him. With a
large piece in his hands he would pick the hand of his master clean
before using his own, which he was sure of.—Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
April 1872, p. 40.

Curious Habit of a Snake. By Mr. Corn,

Mr. Cope made the following remarks:—I had for some time a
specimen of Cyclophis estivus, received from Fort Macon, N.C.,
through the kindness of Dr. Yarrow, living ina Wardian case. The
slender form of this snake, and its beautiful green and yellow colours,
have led to the opinion that it is of arboreal or bush-loving habits.
It never exhibited such in confinement, however, and instead of
climbing over the Caladia, ferns, &c., lived mostly under ground.
It had a curious habit of projecting its head and two or three inches
of its body above the ground, and holding them for hours rigidly in
a fixed attitude. In this position it resembled very closely a sprout
or shoot of some green succulent plant, and might readily be mis-
taken for such by small animals.—Jdid.

Eggs and newly hatched Young of Ixodes Dugesii and Argas reflexus.
By Grorcr Guiiiver, F.R.S.

Seeing the dreadful ravages committed of late by the Zwodes on
sheep and pheasants, and the novelty of Argas as a British Arachnid
(Ann. Nat. Hist. March 1872), any contribution towards the economy
of these Acarina may be important or interesting. And now we are
able to determine pretty nearly the time and manner in which both
these species are hatched. At the meeting of the East Kent Natural-
History Society at Canterbury, August 15, 1872, my son exhibited
(as reported in the ‘ Kentish Gazette’ newspaper four days after-
wards) specimens of the eggs and recently hatched young of both
these so-called ticks. The eggs of the Zvodes were smooth, regularly
oval, about 1, of an inch long, and ;), broad, and of a shining
chocolate colour; those of the Argas were larger, occasionally sub-
oval, but the majority of them globular, about > of an inch in
diameter, of a greyish colour, and slightly rough on the surface.
Adults of the Jwodes and Argas were confined in separate boxes
early in June, and were seen to be lively and unchanged at the end
of that month; but the eggs were laid in clumps some time after-
wards, and on the 1st of August most of them, both of Jaodes and
Argas, were found to be hatched. The young broods of both species
were in most respects miniatures of their parents—only, as is already
known of some other Acarina, with but six legs—and running about
with great activity; and the newly hatched specimens of Argas
were hairy, especially at the hinder part, where there is a fringe

a are

Miscellaneous. 231

of hairs. The Jvodes is very prolific. A single female confined in
a pill-box produced no less than 143 eggs, of which, on August 9,
all but six were found to be hatched, and the young swarm actively
trying to escape from their prison. The egg-shells, both of Jaodes
and Argas, are composed of tough chitine. The husbandmen, in
trying to relieve their suffering flocks and to destroy the ticks,’
have employed men to pick them off the sheep, throwing the ticks
on the ground; but this practice is now shown to be simply pro-
pagating the eyil by sowing the pregnant vermin broadcast.

Canterbury, August 20, 1872.

On the Embryonic Form of the Gordii, By M. A. Vittor.

The embryo of the Gordiz, which has hitherto remained unknown,
has no resemblance to the adult form. It is a microscopic cylin-
drical worm, scarcely 0-205 millim. in length, and 0-045 millim. in
breadth, in which we may easily distinguish a head, a body, and a
tail.

The head is as broad as the body and entirely retractile ; it is armed
with a triple circlet of stout prickles, and terminates in front in a sort
of trunk or sucker. ‘The trunk is rigid, owing to the four strong
styles which serve it as a framework. The prickles of the first two
rows (that is to say, those near the base of the trunk) are of the same
form, arrangement, and size; they are six in each row, the upper
ones slightly covering the lower ones; and they are partly inserted
into a triangular sheath, which gives them the form of a lance-head.
Those of the third row are implanted at the base of the head. They
alternate with those of the first two rows, and do not resemble them
either in number or in form; their sheath is nearly quadrilateral,
and their free extremity is much longer; they are also stouter and
more resistant; lastly, we count seven of them instead of six, as one
of the sheaths bears two. The head, in its movements of protrusion
and retraction, behaves like the trunk of the Echinorhynchi ; it turns
back upon itself from its apex to its base, and from its base to its
apex, causing its prickles to describe an are of 180 degrees. When
it is out of the body, the points of the prickles are directed backwards ;
in the contrary case the opposite. ‘Their arrangement is then com-
pletely inverted: the trunk, which was in front, is thrown completely
to the back ; then come successively the prickles of the first, second,
and third rows, united in bundles and constituting with the trunk a
solid rod in the centre of the body ; the extremities of the prickles
of the third row slightly project beyond the extremity of the body,
which is then armed with a short but very resistant dart.

The bedy presents numerous transverse folds, very close together
and very regular, so that it might be thought to be composed of true
rings.

The tail, which is a little narrower than the body, is separated from
it by a deep constriction; it is also very distinctly annulated, and

ris Pe Miscellaneous.

bears towards its posterior extremity, which is obtuse, four appen-
dages—two very small ones in the centre, and two larger at the
sides.

After its escape from the egg, when free in the water, where it is
at first called upon to live, the embryo of the Gordii has not at its
command any great means of locomotion. Its cylindrical and not
very mobile tail cannot serve it for swimming. At the utmost it
might make its way through the mud by means of the hooks with
which its retractile head is armed. It must also be easily carried
along by even the weakest current. Those which I kept in glass
vessels finally adhered to the walls, and formed there, by their
numver, a sort of pulverulent coating. In the natural state they
must fix themselves in the same manner to pebbles and the roots
and stems of aquatic plants; and it is there that they lie in wait for
the larvee of which they are the predestined parasites.

This is not an hypothesis; for the experiment has been made,
Having placed a certain number of the embryos in the presence of
various larve of culiciform Tipularia (Corethra, Tanypus, Chirono-
mus), I have had the satisfaction of seeing them encyst themselves.
The little worm penetrates into these larvee, whose integuments are
but slightly resistant, by means of its cephalic armature, which it
causes at first to project suddenly; its prickles becoming reversed
catch in the tissues of the larva, fix themselves there, and allow the
trunk to bury itself deeply ; then it withdraws the whole, to recom-
mence the same manceuyre. As soon as the embryo has found a
resting-place to suit it, it remains motionless ; then the fluids which
bathe it all round become coagulated and form for it an investment
which, by hardening, becomes a true cyst. This cyst, the outer surface
of which seems to be covered with small irregular concretions, is at first
transparent and exactly applied to the embryo; but if we reexamine
it in a few days, we find that it has become brown and elongated,
and that the embryo only occupies the anterior part of it, which
probably is never completely closed. ‘Thus the little parasite, after
its encystation, still travels in the tissues of the larva, constantly
elongating its cyst and leaving behind it an empty space, which
becomes larger and larger, until the moment when itself passes into
the larval state. Such are in fact the conditions of its existence ; and
such is the use of the complex armature which it has received from
nature.

The Gordii are therefore subject, in the course of their develop-
ment, not only to necessary migrations, but also to complete metamor-
phoses. This fact, which we were far from anticipating, shows that,
as regards the first phases of evolution, there is no analogy between
Mermis and Gordius, and that the latter, in the embryonic state, have
a certain resemblance to the Acanthocephala.—Comptes Rendus, 5th
August, 1872, p. 363,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

No. 58. OCTOBER 1872.

XXXV.—On Callograptus radicans, a new Dendroid Grap-
tolite. By JoHN Hopkinson, F.G.S., F.R.M.S.

[Plate X.]

THE genus Callograptus belongs to a group of organisms
which are frequently classed with the Graptolites, but which
present sufficient points of difference to warrant their sepa-
ration as a distinct sub-order, for which the name DEn-
DROIDEA has been proposed by Prof. H. A. Nicholson. In it
are included the genera Péilograptus, Dendrograptus, Callo-
graptus, and Dictyonema. These forms, while nearly allied
to each other, differ considerably from the true graptolites.
The slender chitinous rod or “ virgula,” from the invariable
presence of which in the true graptolites Prof. Allman has
recently proposed for them the name RHABDOPHORA, is not
present in these forms; and the slender “ radicle,” forming in
the true graptolites the proximal termination of the virgula, is
also absent. ‘The DENDROIDEA, all of which are branching
forms, differ also from the RHABDOPHORA in their mode of
branching, and there seems to be a slight difference in their
hydrothece.

There is yet another and a very important point of differ-
ence between the two groups. ‘The new species of Callo-
graptus, which I propose to name C. radicans, seems to fur-
nish conclusive evidence of the fixedness of the forms to
which it belongs, while the slender tapering radicular process
of the Rhabdophora shows that they could not have been
similarly attached to foreign bodies.

CALLOGRAPTUS agrees with its near allies, Dendrograptus
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 18

234 Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite.

and Dictyonema, in having ‘a common trunk or stem, or
growing in sessile groups of stipes from a common origin,
without distinct bilateral arrangement of the parts,” and also
in having its hydrothece “ in single series on one side of the
stipes or branches, and arranged along a common canal or
axis,” and differs from them in having its branches “ untre-
quently and irregularly connected by transverse processes ”’
(Hall).

CALLOGRAPTUS RADICANS has a diffuse flabelliform polypary,
with an elongated erect and robust hydrocaulus, terminating
proximally in a spreading fibrous hydrorhiza. 'The polypary,
in the only specimen in which this rooting termination or
hydrorhiza has been seen, is at least six inches long ; and its
extreme width, where the branches terminate distally, appears
to have been about the same. The hydrorhiza covers a
space about half an inch square, but is very irregular in shape.
It appears as a series of interlacing or anastomosing fibres
which must have formed a kind of network over the surface to
which it adhered. ‘The hydrocaulus or main stem is about
1-10th of an inch in width at its junction with the hydrorhiza,
Increasing to twice this width where the first indication of
branching occurs, its length between these two points being
exactly one inch. It has a striated surface and an irregu-
larly crenate outline. The branches bifureate frequently
and continuously throughout their length, diverging only
slightly at first; but after the first few bifurcations the whole
polypary rapidly widens out, and towards its distal extremity
the branches frequently diverge from each other at a wide
angle. They vary from 1-50th to 1-30th of an inch in width,
but, being much compressed, must have been originally of
greater tenuity. They frequently anastomose; but this, as in
O. Salteri, Hall, does not appear to be a constant character.
Unfortunately the state of preservation im which this species
occurs does not allow the form of its hydrothece to be di-
stinctly made out. Some of the branches show minute oval
impressions arranged in a single series along their centre, the
longer diameter or major axis of the oval being parallel with
the margins of the branches. These impressions, of which
there are about twenty to the inch, most probably indicate the
apertures of the hydrothece.

This species is very distinct from the two previously de-
scribed species of Callograptus. It is much larger and more
robust in all its parts than C. elegans, Hall; and its branches
originate from the main stem in a very different manner. ‘To
C. Salteri, Hall, it is more nearly allied; but its branches
bifurcate in a more irregular manner than in that species, they

Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite. 235

have not the same zigzag direction, and the whole polypary
is more diffuse and irregular in form.

But the distinctive feature in the specimen of Callograptus
radicans described above is its possession of a hydrorhiza, or
rather, I should perhaps say, the preservation of its hydro-
rhiza; for the presence of this organ in a single specimen of
one species should suffice to prove its former presence in all
—to show, in fact, that it is an essential organ of the genus
Callograptus.

From the imperfect manner in which these Silurian fossils
are usually preserved, we cannot wonder that a delicate organ,
whose function it was to attach to some other substance the
more durable portion of the organism of which it formed a
part, has not before been found in connexion with this portion.
None of these dendroid graptolites has yet been found
attached to any other body. ‘Their proximal termination is
usually imperfect, and often has an irregular margin as if it had
been broken. Such fracture, when the polypary was severed
from the substance to which it was attached, would most easily
take place at the junction of the hydrocaulus with its hydro-
rniza.

In the rocks in which graptolites occur, other fossils are
seldom found; but in the graptolite beds from which this
specimen was obtained a large Conularia (C. Homfray?)
abounds, and in a thin zone in which this and other species of
Callograptus and Dendrograptus occur in profusion. it is
especially abundant. Upon this Conularia, which is some-
times covered with graptolites, and also upon other fossils
which are occasionally associated with it, some of these dendroid
forms may perhaps have grown; but no connexion has yet
been clearly seen.

We are not without evidence that the other genera of the
Dendroidea were similarly attached to foreign bodies or to the
sea-bottom. Even if this were wanting, these dendroid grap-
tolites are so nearly allied to each other (Callograptus forming
an intermediate link between Dictyonema and Dendrograptus,
to which also Pti/ograptus is nearly allied) that we might safely
have inferred that the mode of existence of all these forms was
the same. But the genus Dendrograptus has already furnished
evidence of the fixedness of these dendroid forms. Professor
James Hall, after expressing his belief that the true grapto-
lites “in their mature condition were free floating bodies in
Silurian seas,” thus treats of the mode of existence of the den-
droid graptolites :—

“In regard to another group, including Dendrograptus,
Callograptus, and Dictyonema, as well as one or two other

18%

236 Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite.

forms, we have some evidence indicative of a different mode
of existence. The stems of Dendrograptus are enlarged towards
their base, and sometimes present a sudden expansion or bulb,
which I have inferred may be the base or root, once attached
to another substance, or imbedded in the mud or sand of the
sea-bottom.” ..... . “In those which I have termed Cal-
lograptus, the bases of the fronds are imperfect, but indicate,
according to analogy, a radicle or point of attachment like Den-
drograptus. In the more nearly entire forms of Dictyonema
known, we have not been able to observe the base; but, from
their similarity in form and mode of growth to Fenestella and
Retepora, we have inferred their attachment either to the sea-
bottom or to foreign bodies.” (20th Rep. New-York State Cab.
Nat. Hist., p. 238, ed. 1870.)

The bearing of this on the question of the systematic posi-
tion of the Dendroidea alone remains for consideration. It
has already been shown that the Rhabdophora differ from
our recent Sertularian Hydroida only in their possession of a
slender rod or virgula, and in their having apparently been free.
The Dendroidea offer no such points of difference, being essen-
tially similar to the recent Sertularian zoophytes in their mode
of growth, as well as in their general form, and, as far as their
imperfect state of preservation enables us to determine, in their
intimate structure also. On this last and most important
point, however, we have no certain knowledge: while we
know of no characters whereby the Dendroidea can be sepa-
rated from the Hydrozoa, we are equally destitute of decisive
evidence of their structural difference from the Polyzoa; nor
can we wonder at this when we consider how long these two
classes were grouped together under the general term of Zoo-
phyte or Coralline.

Dictyonema certainly seems more Polyzoan than Hydrozoan
in its affinities, while Péelograptus, on the other hand, seems
to be far more nearly related to the Hydrozoa than to the
Polyzoa; and analogy with the true graptolites, which are
certainly Hydroids, would lead us to inter that the Dendroidea
have the same internal structure as they have. If this should

rove to be the case, the genera Ptilograptus and Dendrograp-
tus would fall naturally into families already existing in the
sub-order Thecaphora (or Sertularina), while for Callograptus
and Dictyonema, which have their branches more or less re-
gularly connected together by transverse processes, a new family
would have to be instituted. At present we do not know of
any tangible character whereby the Dendroidea, considered as
a single group, can be separated as a distinct sub-order from
the Thecaphora. In the mean time the term G'raptolite may

On the Mollusca of Eastern North America. 237

still be used as a general term for all the forms to which the
name has been applied, as the term Zoophyte was formerly used
for such different beings as the Hydrozoa, the Actinozoa, and
the Polyzoa,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Callograptus radicans, Hopk., natural size. Photo-lithographed from a
specimen collected by the author in the Arenig rocks, Ramsey Island,
St. David’s, South Wales.

XXXVI.— The Mollusca of Europe compared with those of Eas-
tern North America. By J. GWYN JEFFREYS, F.R.S.*

AFTER mentioning that he had dredged last autumn on the
coast of New England in a steamer provided by the Govern-
ment of the United States, and that he had inspected all the
principal collections of Mollusca made in Eastern North
America, the author compared the Mollusca of Europe with
those of Massachusetts. He estimated the former to contain
about 1000 species (viz. 200 land and freshwater, and 800
marine), and the latter to contain about 400 species (viz. 110
land and freshwater, and 290 marine); and he took Mr.
Binney’s edition of the late Professor Gould’s ‘ Report on the
Invertebrata of Massachusetts,’ published in 1870, as the
standard of comparison. That work gives 401 species, of
which Mr. Jeffreys considered 41 to be varieties and the
young of other species, leaving 3860 apparently distinct species.
About 40 species may be added to this number in consequence
of the recent researches of Professor Verrill and Mr. Whiteaves
on the coast of New England and in the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
Mr. Jeftreys-identified 173 out of the 360 Massachusetts
species as Huropean, viz. land and freshwater 39 (out of 110),
and marine 134 (out of 250), the proportion in the former
case being 28 per cent., and in the latter nearly 54 per cent. ;
and he produced a tabulated list of the species in support of
his statement. He proposed to account for the distribution of
the North-American Mollusca thus identitied, by showing that
the land and freshwater species had probably migrated from
Europe to Canada through Northern Asia, and that most of
the marine species must have been transported from the Arctic
seas by Davis’s-Strait current southwards to Cape Cod, and
the remainder from the Mediterranean and western coasts of
the Atlantic by the Gulf-stream in a northerly direction. He
renewed his objection to the term “representative species.”

* An abstract of a communication made by the author to the Brighton
Meeting of the British Association, and now published at his request.

238 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

The author concluded by expressing his gratitude for the kind
hospitality and attention which he received from naturalists
during his visit to North America last year.

Mollusca of Eastern North America, according to Binney’s
edition of Gould's ‘ Invertebrata of Massachusetts.’

ad
55
ea oe
wo | §
: Name of Species. a oO 2 Synonyms and Remarks.
&% oan | oe
a ° =i
a A ea
28| Teredo navalis, Linné ......... N E_ | Wood’s Hole, Mass. (J. G. J.).!
29 Norvagica, Spengler N E |
30 megotara, Hanley ...... N E
31| —— Thompsoni, TZryon...... 8
32 dilatata, Stimpson ...... IN eee stone T. megotara, variety.
30 chlorotica, Gould (1870).| N EK | 7. pedicellata, Quatrefages
34) Xylotrya fimbriata, Jeffreys...) S (1849), var.
36| holas costata, U2... osc.ccccssse s
38 truncata, SAY). 222.50... S)
39) Zirfea crispata, LE. ............ N E_ | Genus Pholas.
40) Solen ensis, Z. ...........-...-- N 1D)
43, Solecurtus gibbus, Sp. ......... 8
44 GivaSUS, Spree. ccc SS)
46 Machzxra squama, Blainville .| N | ...... G. Siliqua.
47 costata, Say .......02...2.- N G. Stliqua.
48 Solemya velum, Say (1822)...) N | ...... S. togata, young.
50. borealis, Totten (1834) ..| N E_ |S. togata, Poli (1791).
51, Panopeea arctica, Lamarck
(Gite) sake oaereconare conobacnee N E_ | Saxicava Norvegica, sp. (1793).
53 Glycymeris siliqua, Chemnitz .| N E | G. Curtodaria.
55) Mya arenaria, L. ..............- N E
58 iruameatian 7.) .. eacensstece N E
60, Corbula contracta, Say......... S
61| Nezra pellucida, St........... N E
62| Pandora trilineata, Say ...... N
64 Lyonsia hyalina, Conrad ...... Nag | eae Allied to L. Norvegica.
65 arenosa, Moller ......... N EH
66| Anatina papyracea, Say ...... N
68} Cochlodesma Leanum, Conr..| N | ...... Allied to Thracia pretenuis,
which is Huropean.
69 Thracia Conradi, Couthouy
(ESBS )oact cece ttre eaeteceaa: ING silage T. inflata, J. Sowerby (1845). |
71| —— myopsis (Beck), Moll.
(Cet 0) aarepececae sncoccecsdoroce N E | 7. truncata, Brown (1827).
72 truncata, Mighels& Adams
(tee eA ser aniebenseacasceeancte N E |Not 7. truncata, Br. T. sep-
tentrionalis, Jeftr. MS. |
73) Mactra solidissima, Ch. ...... IN eters jaic Lovén received a single valve’
from Finmark.
75 OValis.) Goudy estes ONDE Bea cis. M. solidissima, var.
77 lateralis, Say ...........- INE toda Allied to M. subtruncata, which
is European.
79| Cumingia tellinoides, Conr....| §
80) Ceronia arctata, Con7. ......... 1. (| a Mesodesma deauratum, var.
81} —— deaurata, Turton......... Tie ' | haameed G. Mesodesma.

Kurope and Eastern North America.

239

&

121
123
124
125
126

| Tellina tenta, Say

Name of Species.

| Kellia planulata, S¢.............

suborbicularis, Montagu.
Turtonia minuta, Mabricius...

}} Montacuta elevata, S¢..........

Saxicava rugosa, Pennant
—— arctica, L
Petricola pholadiformis, Lam.
dactylus, Say ...:........
Macoma fusca, Say (1826) ...
proxima, Gray (1839)...

tenera, Say
Lucina filosa, S7¢. (1851) ......
——— dentata, Wood ............

| Cryptodon Gouldii, Philippi

(lle? <3) Glanneaseaaea eqn arec neater
Sphezrium simile, Say (1816).
—— partumeium, Say (1822)
rhomboideum, Say

Vermontanum, Prime

(1861)

truncatum, Linsley
tenue, Prime
securis; Prvmeé .......--...
occidentale, Prime ......
Pisidium dubium, Say (1816)
Adamsii, Prime (1851)...

compressum, Prime
xquilaterale, Prime

ferrugineum, Prime......
abditum, Haldeman

(1841)
variabile, Prime .........
— yentricosum, Prime

Bete meee eee we eee eee eenne

Astarte castanea, Say

suleata, Da Costa

—— semisulcata, Leach (1817)
—— quadrans, Gould .........
elliptica, Hanley .........
Banksii, Leach (1817)...
crebricostata, Yorbes

(1847)

eee ween tere eters ce eee

North or South

of Cape Cod.

A'A'z

AiaiAs

AAA iaiazag

AA

| European.

eeccce

Synonyms and Remarks.

| G. Lasea.

|G. Cyamium.

Linné instead of Pennant.

S. rugosa, var.

Valentia, Ireland; a fragment.
P. pholadiformis, var.

Tellina Balthica, L. (1766).
T. calearia, Ch. (1782).

Allied to Z. zenwis.
L. borealis, L. (1766).

Axinus flezuosus, Mont., vay.
(1803).

S. striatinum, Lam. (1818).

S. lacustre, Miller (1774).

Allied to 8. corneum, which is
European.

S. pisidioides, Gray (1856).
Perhaps introduced into
England.

S. lacustre, var.

S. lacustre, var. Rykholtii.

P. amnicum, Mill. (1774).
P. fontinale, Draparnaud
(1805).

Allied to P. nitidwm, which is
European.
P. pusillum, var. obtusalis.

P. pusillum, Gmelin (1788).

Possibly some of these North-
American species may be re-
duced in number.

Perhaps a variety of A. borea-
lis, Ch.

Including A. wndata, Gould=
A. Omalii, J. Sow.

A. borealis, Ch. (1784), var.

A. castanea, var. nana.

A, sulcata, var.

A. compressa, Mont.(1803),var.

A, depressa, Br. (1827).

240

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

Name of Species.

Astarte Portlandica, Mighels .

128) Gouldia mactracea, Lins/ey ...
129| Cyprina Islandica, L. .........
131| Cytherea convexa, Say.........
133) Venus mercenaria, J. .........
135 INOHENEy ISLE doqneononneanae
136) Tapes fluctuosa, Gowld.........
137| Gemma gemma, Totten ......
138 Manhattensis, Prime
139) Cardium Islandicum, JZ. ......
141 elegantulum (Bech),
TVEOUGS 1 Rickiate ol Motte award eset
148) Liocardium Mortoni, Conr....
144) Aphrodita Groenlandica, Ch. .
146) Cardita borealis, Conr. (1836)
147| Arca pexata, Say ..............-
148 transversa, Say...........-
149) Nucula tenuis, Mont.
150) —— proxima, Say ............
152 expansa, [eeve............
153 delphinodonta, Migh. ...
154) Yoldia limatula, Say (1831)...
55 ——fobesa, St. see.sleccescse eons
156| —— siliqua, Reeve (1855) ..
157| —— thracixformis, Storer ...
159; —— sapotilla. Gould (1841).
160 miyalis, Couth. ...........:
161| Leda tenuisulcata, Cowth.
(CS 1e))) gocooeonobeeane sdoceHenou
163 Jacksonii, Gould .........
(34) = sroivavery Ji Seonenoneooe
165 caudata, Donovan.........
167| Unio complanatus, Solander ..
169 MASUAAS; OLY wae tenia telerteet
7OV=————sradliabusn Gis esecsescens
172 CamiOsus; S07) Seces--.-0¢
173 ochraceus, Say............
174| Margaritana arcuata, Barnes
(IS23) ie doece sence te. teos-tsnere
176, —— undulata, Say .........+4
tia marginata, Gould.........
178 Anodon fluviatilis, Zea.........
180 implicata, Say ............
182 undulata, Say .........0.
183) Mytilus edulis, Z................
186 Modiola modiolus, LJ. .........
188 plicatula, Lam.............
190 Modiolaria nigra, Gray ......
192 GURCOUB Reser iasceca ted

orth or South
of Cape Cod.

|

AAAAAAAn AAAA AnAaBaaasaAaas | x

Z2AAA

RM RIA IA A 7 tA A

| European.

Synonyms and Remarks.

A, compressa, var.

G. Crassaitella.
G. Venus.
V. mercenaria, var.

G. Venus.
V. mercenaria, young.

G. Cardium.

C. sulcata, Bruguiére (1792).
var.

A, pexata, var.

N. tenuis, var.

Y. arctica, Sars. G. Leda.

Allied to Leda lucida, which
is Huropean.

L. arctica, Gray (1819).

G. Leda.

L. hyperborea, Loy. (1846).

G. Leda.

L. pernula, Mill. (1770), var.
L. pernula, var.

Mull. instead of Fabr.

I. minuta, var.

Perhaps U. cariosus, var.

Unio margaritifer, L. (1766).

G. Unio.

G. Unio.

Dillwyn (1817) instead of Lea,
Anodonta cygnea, L. (1766).

G. Anodonta, A. cygnea, var.

G. Anodonta.

G. Mytilus.
G. Mytilus.

Europe and Eastern North America. DAT

22) Bulla incincta, Migh,

Name of Species.

3, Modiolaria corrugata, Sé.......

Crenella glandula, Zoz?. .....

pectinula, Gould (1841).

Pecten tenuicostatus, Migh. §
A

Je OOO eee nee eae ns ane ee ees eeeees

Islandicus, Miill..........
ILTACLANIS | OMe tees es eel
MUS CUS ARIZ S/o mes uaeaees
2| Ostrea Virginiana, Lister......
DOreaiss 070) weeasneses

Anomia ephippium, Z..........

—— aculeata, Gi. ........008
alkerourmuee), Yor seosouacoadnoce
Sqamanal ayy Lee sete. esate

Terebratulina septentrionalis,

CottW UBB) A teaseca seo,

Rhynchonella psittacea, Gm. .

Waldheimia cranium, Gm. ..

oleinlime sinuata;, Ste case. sce.

Seaphander puncto-striatus,
Migh. § Ad. (1842) .........

Diaphana hiemalis, Co uth,
CE ie Ae ee

debilis, Gould (1840) ...

Utriculus Gouldii, Couth.
(WS39) eosesccshackedsstwecenes

pertenuis, Migh. .........

—— canaliculatus, Say ......

220) Cylichna alba, Br...............-

oryza, Tott. (1835) ......
solitaria, Say at eee
a, Migh. & Ad.
(CUES?) ee eo Oe Se
Tornatella puncto-striata, Ad.

Polycera Lessonii, D’ Orbigny.
Doris bilamellata, L.
tenella, Agassiz

pallida, Ag. (1870) ......

diademata, 4g. (1870)...
—— planulata, S¢. (1853) ..
GRISEA OG eciaaseeemeneeaee

North or South
of Cape Cod.

European.

1A 1A A
& &

AAIAAniAAA Ain

A

ZA Ala

Teel: Co ihe 888) :

Synonyms and Remarks.

C. faba, Fabr. (1780).

P. irradians, young.
O. Virginiana, var.

A, ephippium, vay.
A, ephippium, var.
A. ephippium, young.

Terebratula caput-serpentis, L.
(1764), var.

Miill., instead of Gm. G. Te-
rebratula.

Allied to P. nitida, which is
European.

P. lima, Br. (1827).
S. librarius, Lov. (1846).

Utriculusglobosus, Lov.( 1846).
Utriculus hyalinus, Turt.
(1834).

U. turritus, Moll. (1842).
U. Gouldii, young.

Bullautriculus,Brocchi(1814).

Cylichna striata, Br, (1827).
Perhaps Actgon pusillus. G.
Acton.

Perhaps D. inconspicua, which)
is European.

D. aspera, Alder & Hancock
(1842).

_D. tuberculata, Cuvier (1802).

D. repanda, A. & H. (1842)

| Very closely allied to D. in-

conspicua.”

|
|
|
|
\

242 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of
| Grd |
28
Peel
of |
‘ Name of Species. ad 2 Synonyms and Remarks.
So eee ah 1S
SS 2 2
Ay a &
233) Ancula sulphurea, S¢. ......... INFOS | aeees “Very lke to Ancula cristata,”
which is European.
234) Dendronotus arborescens,
THO tags ater Geer Coe N E
236] Doto coronata, Gm. ............ N E
238} Afolis papillosa, L. ......... N E
240 salmonacea, De Kay
(CIRCE) hoconosbdcurcocensagsods ING) creas | Eolis bodoensis, MOll. (1842).
241! —— Bostoniensis, Couth....... Nigga cseese “ Approaching closely E. coro-
nata of Forbes,” which is!
European.
242 rufibranchialis, Johnston.| N E
243 pilata, Gould ...:.......- N
245 Buell atew Ste pce seeaies stn N
246 PU PULCA WSC: mene ncesie ees HN
246 poletaeds juele encsene essere N
|= viersas COUWL/ts cs e.cccsees N
248 despecta, Johnst. ......... N EH
249| —— gymnota, De Kay......... IN) | Raasace “Nearly allied to E. concinna,”
which is Kuropean.
250| Calliopsea (?) fuscata, Gould...| N
251) Embletonia fuscata, Gould ...| N
252 remigata. Gould ......... N
253) Hermeza cruciata, Alex. Aq....| 8
254) Alderia Harvardiensis, 4g ...| N
255) Hlysia chlorotica, Ag. ......... N
256) Placobran chus catulus, 4g....| N
258) Limapontia zonata, Sz..........| N
258| Chiton apiculatus, Say......... s
259 (@QbaG EWES Ibs pospennncaeedon Ss H C. marginatus, not C. cinereus.
Asinglespecimen only ; ques-
tionable.
260 MUDEY) LOWE: wees ceavesee es: N E
261| —— marmoreus, Fabr. ...... N E
263 albus, Mont. . N E |L., not Mont.
263 mendicarius, Migh. § Ad.
((isi52)) re oseonoesccddeBeee a nnneTs N E |C. Hanleyi (Bean), Thorpe
(1844).
264, Amicula Emersonii, Cowth. ...| N
266) Dentalium dentale, L. ......... ING lee D. striolatum, var.
266 Entalis striolata, Sz, (1851)...| N Es Dentalium abyssorum, Sars
(1858), var.
267| Tectura testudinalis, Miil/. ...) N aD)
269 PR awh (CO Pyannosonnoncon 3 INNER esas T. testudinalis, vay.
270) Lepeta cxeca, Mill. ........ ... N EK
271) Crepidula fornicata, Z.......... N E
272 pla SW aes cepts nee Na ieee < C. fornicata, var.
273) —— convexa, Say ............ N
274 PENG, ISO) Gongon spacosese INIA lier eos C. fornicata, var.
275 Crucibulum striatum, Say ...| N
276, Cemoria noachina, L. ......... N E_ |G. Puncturella.
277| Ianthina fragilis, Deshayes ...| N E | Lam.,not Desh. Specifiename
changed to communis (1822).

Europe and Eastern North America.

243

Name of Species.

Adeorbis costulata, Moll. ......
Margarita cinerea, Couth. ...
undulata, Sowerdy (1838)

helicina, Fabr.............
argentata, Gould (1841).
obscura, Couth. .........
acuminata, Migh. & Ad..
varicosa, Migh. § Ad.
(1842)

pupoidea, Gould
Melantho decisa, Say

2) Amnicola pallida, Haldeman .

iibanayees ISI? Concecenmeoacee
PLANOM SAY seo. noses

295 Pomatiopsis lapidaria, Say ...

Skenea planorbis, Fabr. ......

North or South
of Cape Cod.

AA

297| Rissoella? eburnea, Sf..........
297 Sulcosa,Miglint accesses
298) Rissoa minuta, Zozt. (1834)...
299, —— latior, Migh. & Ad. ......
299 aculeus, Gould (1841)...
300) ———-- mu | tilimeata, (SH. .<-.2.-..
301; —— Mighelsi, S¢................
301 XH baat aa eee neteen:
301; —— carinata, Migh. § Ad....
302) Lacuna vincta, Mont. (1803)..
303 neritoidea, Gould (1840)
304) Littorina rudis, Don. .........
306 tenebrosa, Mont. .........
308 Ritoneas sees as. ass cos tes:
309) —— palliata, Say (1822)
311 IEROLAtAUOCY- cep eeearescses
311) Scalaria Nov-anglix, Cowth....
312 lineata; SayG.Pi sees. -2--%-
313 multistriata, Say.........
314 Greenlandica, Ch..........
815) Cxcum pulchellum, Sé. ......
816) Vermetus radicula, S7..........
317) Turritella erosa, Couth.
(ASSO) baleniowsinsoucjanestscaences
318) reticulata, Migh. § Ad.
Ce ea ee
319 acicula, SUM <<. .eeacosces
320) Aporrhais occidentalis, Beck. .

Bittium nigrum, To??. .........

European.

Hee Fee

leoflcohcocoilcolc>|

Synonyms and Remarks.

G. Molleria.

|G. Trochus.

Trochus Grenlandicus, Ch.
(1781). |

G. Trochus. |

Trochus glaucus, MOll. (1842).

G. Trochus.

Trochus varicosus, young.

M. elegantissima (Bean), S.
Wood (1848). G. Trochus.

V. piscinalis, Mill. (1774), var.

G. Hydrobia.
G. Hydrobia.
G. Hydrobia.

G. Rissoa.

G. Rissoa, One specimen only.

Hydrobia ventrosa, Mont.
(1803), var.

R. striata, J. Adams (1795).
R. striata, var.

L. divaricata, Fabr. (1780).
L. pallidula, Turt. (1827), var.
Maton, instead of Don.

LL. rudis, var.

L. obtusata, Lu. (1766), var.
= L. limata, Low. (1846).

S. multistriata, var.

T. polaris, Méll. (1842).
T. lactea, Moll. (1842).

G. Cerithium.

244

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

' Name of Species.
3
=
322) Bittium Greenii, Ad. (1839)...
325) Triforis nigrocinctus, Ad...
325, Odostomia producta, Ad.......
325) AUSCAMEA CS tet tok cee siacta
327 eaibataesta ec: eascne:
327| —— modesta, Sz.......... cess.
327 bisuturalis, Say .........
328 inabatel,. ales, eandcceaeeseee
329 semimuda, Ad. \..0.c.+e-
330 impressa, Say (1822) ...
331) Turbonilla interrupta, Zod¢.
(SBA reese endeate case atseee
331 TUUVCR MO Coneeen ena qcoecte.
382) Eulima oleacea, Kurtz § St...
333} Menestho albula, Mod/..........
334) Velutina haliotcidea, abr.
(CULO) esac ad anonaya eno cee neces
339 zonata, Gould (1841) ...
3387, Lamellaria perspicua, LZ. ......
388) Lunatia heros, Say (1822
340 triseriata, Say ............
341 Greenlandica, Mol/. ......
342) Natica clausa, Broderip §& Sow.
(LSA ONE tendeets uevonwrsenctes
44 TOUSEN, ISH), 3865 ponecdee
344) Mamma? immaculata, Jof¢...
345) Neverita duplicata, Say ......
347) Culbus flavus, Gould (1840)...
348) Amauropsis heliccides, Johnst.
(VIGBE As ae ape ae a
349) Pleurotoma bicarinata, Cowzh.
350) —— plicata, Ad. (1842) ......
351| Bela turricula, Mont. .........
302 harpularia, Cowth. ......
309) violacea, Migh. § Ad.
CISA? \eeeeescneineuee cerecee tenes
304, —— decussata, Couth, (1841).
305 cancellata, Migh. § Ad.
USE) ts sche ce cseblnan tastes
355 pleurotomaria, Cowth.
(CLS) ES a np a
356) Columbella avara, Say.........
oo7 rosacea, Gould (1840)...

North or South
of Cape Cod.

European.

&

teenee

EEE S|

& &

&

&

Synonyms and Remarks.

Cerithiopsistubercularis, Mont.|

(1803).

O. impressa, var.
O. celata, Cailliaud (1865).

Melania rufa, Ph. (1836), var.
G. Odostomia.
Perhaps Turbo lacteus, L. G.
[ Odostomia.
Apparently not this species,
which is European.

V. levigata, Pennant (1777).
V. undata, Brown (1827).

Natica catenoides, 8. Wood)

(1848).
Natica heros, young.
Beck, fide Moll. G. Natica.

N. affinis, Gm. (1790).

G. Natica,

G. Natica.

Natica Smithii, Brown (1839)
=N. aperta, Loy. (1846).

Natica Islandica, Gm. (1790).

P. declivis, Loy. (1846).
G. Pleurotoma.
G. Pleurotoma.

Defrancia Beckii, Moll. (1842).
G. Pleurotoma.

Pleurotoma Trevelyana, Turt.
(1834).

Defrancia Pingelii, Moll.
(1842). G. Pleurotoma.

Buccinum pyramidale, Strom
(179—). G. Pleurotoma.

C. Holboltit (Beck), Mall.
(1842).

Europe and Eastern North America.

245

; Name of Species.
a
Ey
a
358) Columbella dissimilis, S¢.
359, —— lunata, Say ............00
360} Purpura lapillus ...............
362)| Nassa obsoleta, Say ............
364 trivittata, Say (1822) ...
365 VAN OEE ISO PeodoneneeeccesOnee
866) Buccinum undatum, Z. ......
368) ciliatuns hohe sno ee
369; —— Donovyani, Gray (1839).
370 cinereum, Say ............
371| Fusus Islandicus, Gm..........
372 jonyeeEbeich YS) Geoeeenceeas
373 ventricosus, Gra7........-
374 tornatus, Gould (1840) ..
375 decemcostatus, Say ......
377, Trophon clathratus, Z. ......
378) —— scalariformis, Gouw/d
(ISAO aetewe cckecmceineacascens
379 muricatus, Mont.... .....
380) Busycon canaliculatum, J. ...
383 (Ente (GWZ0s Sonocbnancre Hee
385) Fasciolaria ligata, Wigh. § Ad.
386) Ranella caudata, Say .........
387) Cerithiopsis Emersonii, Ad....
389 terebralis, Ad. (1841) ...
390) Trichotropis borealis, Sow. ...
391) Admete viridula, Fatr..........
394) Vitrina limpida, Gould (1850)
395| Hyalina cellaria, Miid/..........
396 anboreay Sy ieweqse-e aoe
397 electrina, Gould (1841) .
398) indentata, Say ...........
399) minuscula, Binney ......
400, —— Binneyana, Morse ......
401; —— milium, Morse ............
401 fernea, MOnSe,csccssere ssc
402 chersina, Say (1821) ...
403 —— minutissima, Lea (1841)
404, —— multidentata, Binney ...
404 limentia, Sz), s.dreseenetes
406 Macrocyclis concava, Say......
407| Limax maximus, JZ. ............
408 BOTESUIS, is Fsuceeecencetee|
409 campestris, Binney (1841)

North or South
of Cape Cod.

European.

eeeces

esfles|

coe]

Be &

Synonyms and Remarks.

Subgenus Desmoulea.
N. propinqua, J. Sow. (1824).

| Not that species, but B. wn-
dulatum, Moll.

B. glaciale, L. (1766).

G, Urosa’pina, allied to Pur-
pura.

Not that species, but F. curtus,
Jeffr.

Not Buceinum Sabinii or Fu-|
sus Sabini, Gray.

F. despectus, lu. (1766).

Not that species, but 7. trun-
catus, Str.

T. clathratus, L. (1766).
Doubtful as American.

G. Cerithium, not Cerithiopsis.

C. trilineata, Ph. (1836).

Broderip and Sowerby’s. spe-
cies.

V. pellucida, Mull. (1774).

G. Zonites.

Closely allied to Z. excavatus,
but umbilicus much less open.

Zonites radiatulus, Alder
(1830), var. alba.

| Zonites fulvus, Mill. (1774).
| Helix pygmea, Drap. (1805).

L. levis, Mill. (1774).

246

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

Name of Species.

o

=

am |

210) Snax Havas, 0h) vc.ccascsncas0e
412) Helix alternata, Say ............
413 striatella, Anthony ......
415) asteriscus, Morse .........
415 labyrinthica, Say ...... :
417; —— hirsuta, Say ...........-...
418} —— monodon, Racketé ......
420 Palliata, SOY -..25-..rcnece-
422) —— tridentata, Say.........-.-
423] —— albolabris, Say............
424 dentifera, Binn. .........
425| —— thyroides, Say............
426 SER ZU J2x00/0> sean anoosaaodbe
427 ——— ? harpa, SAY .s.-....r0c.00.
428 pulchella, Mii/l. .....
429 hortensis, iil. (1' 774).
431 Cionella subeylindrica, vbeermned
433 Pupa muscorum, L. ........-..-
433) —— Hoppii, Mill. ............
434 pentodon, Say ............
435) decora, Gould .........00+
436 alll Oe 817 soenbocnobsoecdos
437 GhecaWNeThy (SLA) Goodeoonsabe
438 contracta, Say ............
439 TAMONCOEL, NAA goccosaosece
439 corticaria, Say ............
440) Vertigo Gouldii, Binn. (1843)
441 milium, Gowld ........+s.-
442) —— Bollesiana, Morse (1865)
442 ovata, Say (1822) ...... |
443) —— ventricosa, Morse (1865).
444 simplex, Gould (1840)...
445 Succinea ovalis, Gould (1841).
446, AVAL, WSU acceerciesesee oe
447 obliqua, Say (1824)......
448 Totteniana,, 6d yessseeee
451 Arion fuseus, Mill. (1774) ...
453, Zonites inornata, Say .........
454 suppressa, Say............
454) fuliginosa, Griffith ..

457 Tebennophorus dorsalis, Binn.
465 Alexia myosotis, Drap.......... |

of Cape Cod.

| North or South

N

N

AA IAA AAA

AAA

424444 4% Aaa

466 Camghiam exiguum, Say

(1822)

European.

&

espeaiesiics|

feeeee

S

Synonyms and Remarks.

| Sweden.

|

|. nemoralis, L. (1766), var.

Perhaps that species, but de-
scribed as inhabiting fresh
water. Cochlicopa lubrica,
Mill.

Linné’s species is unascertain-
able. P. marginata, Drap.

V. alpestris, Ald. (1830).

V. pygmea, Drap. (1801).

V. antivertigo, Drap. (1801).

V. Moulinsiana, Dupuy
(1843).

V. edentula, Drap. edt

S. elegans, Risso (1826).

jeed to S. putris, var. ochra-

° aie L. (1766).

S. putris, var.

Perhaps that species. A. hor-
tensis, Férussac (1819).

Zonites is masculine; see De
Montfort.

G. Melampus.

| C. minimum, Mill. (1774).

Europe and Lastern North

America.

(247

Ho Name of Species.
Sp
os}
at
467| Melampus bidentatus, Say ...
471) Limneza columella, Say (1817)
473| —— decollata, ue antecaee
474 ampla, Migh. ......00.4.
475 elodes, Say (1821) ......
478} desidiosa, Say ............
479 catascopium, Say.........
480 umbilicata, Ad............-
481 palllrdastAd: Masceeeoakee ss
482 humilis, Say (1822) ......
483) Physa heterostropha, Sav
485) —=——sencillaria. S44) ccdeest- ese
486 Bulinus elongatus, Say (1821)
488 Planorbis trivolvis, Say ......
490 svannbey SYH07 So coaaasosee eee
491 bicarinatus, Say .........
492) —— campanulatus, Say ......
493; —— hirsutus, Gould (1840)..
494| —— deflectus, Say .........+.
495| —— exacutus, Say ............
497 parvus, Say (1817-19) ..
498 dilatatus, Gould .........
499) Segmentina armigera, Say .
501} Ancylus parallelus, Ha/d.......
502) —— fuscus, Ad. ...............
504) Diacria trispinosa, Lesweur ...
504) Psyche globulosa, Rang ......
505) Heterofusus balea, Moll/. ......
505 retroversus, Fleming AN
507| Clione limacina, Phipps (1773)
509) Loligopsis pavo, Les. .........
510 Ommastrephes sagittatus, Fé.
UEMNGROS _ Saccekemena tess snces
513 Loligo punctata, De Kay......|
514 TREAT Goobostobaacdes
516 Spirula fragilis, S¢. (1860) .

North or south

'Z

of Cape Cod.

weeeee

eeeee

Synonyms and Remarks.

Specific name preoccupied. M.
corneus, Desh.
L. peregra, Mill. (1774).

L. catascopium, var.

L. palustris, Mill. (1774).
L. truncatula, yar.

Allied to ZL. truncatula.

L. truncatula, var. elegans.

L. truncatula, Mill. (1774).

More nearly allied to P. riva-
lis, Mat. & Rack. than to P.
fontinalis.

Physa hypnorum, WL. (1766).

P. trivolvis, var.

P. albus, Mill. (1774).

P. albus, var. Draparnaldi.

Allied to P. nitidus.

P. glaber, Jeffr. (1828)

Perhaps introduced into Eng-
land and naturalized.

G. Planorbis.

Allied to A. lacustris.

G. Cavolina.

G. Spirialis.

G. Spirialis.

C. papilionacea, Pallas (1766).

Lamarck’s species. G. Om-

matostrephes.

S. australis, Brug. (1789-92).

248 Messrs. Davidson and King on the Genera

XXXVII.—Remarks on the Genera Trimerella, Dimobolus,
and Monomerella. By 'THomas Davipson, F.R.S., F.G.8.,
&e., and WiLLIAM KiNG, Sce.D., Professor of Mineralogy
and Geology in Queen’s College, Galway.

THE genera named in the title constitute, in our opinion, a
new family, belonging to the helictobrachial section of the class
Palliobranchiata or Brachiopoda. We propose to designate
it Trimerellide, after the type genus. Although more or less
treated of by other writers, we have been induced, especially
by the desire of several intimate friends, who have kindly sup-
plied us with the loan of some valuable series of specimens, and
presented us with others, to undertake the further elucidation
of a most difficult and enigmatical group of shells; and for this
assistance our thanks are especially due to Lindstr6m, Walm-
stedt, Billings, Hall, Whitfield, Meek, and others. These
“‘ Remarks,” it is necessary to state, are merely preliminary to
a detailed memoir we have been preparing for some time past,
and which we hope to have completed for the Geological Society
in the early part of next session.

The Trimerellids differ much from all others of their class ;
though their proximate alliance to certain forms seems to admit
of determination. We think there is little doubt of their being
not only structurally related to the Lingulide *, but also gene-
tically connected with this family. The first point is of con-
siderable interest, inasmuch as the Lingulids are the earliest
Palliobranchs that geologists are acquainted with, occurring
in Cambrian rocks; while the Trimerellids do not seem to
have been in existence prior to the next systemal group, all
the forms belonging to the Lower and Upper Silurians. It
would therefore appear that the Trimerellids, adopting the
doctrine of genetheonomy (by which we mean evolution of
species effected mainly through the operation of Divine laws,
and not by purposeless or accidental modificationst), have
been produced out of the Lingulids. Moreover, considering
that the earliest Palliobranchs, taking them to be represented
by the existing aniferous Lingulas, are of a simpler type than
the non-aniferous Terebratulids and Rhynchonellids that suc-
ceeded them, the conclusion suggests itself that the latter
and simpler groups are the degraded successors of a type
that existed in the earliest known Life-period of our planet.
Another matter for consideration is the fact that the Cambrian
Lingulids were furnished with a framework of a horny or

* For the present we include Obolus and other related genera in the
Lingulide—though we are strongly inclined to regard the genus named
as typical of another family, Obolide.

+ See ‘Geologist,’ vol. v. p. 254.

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monomerella. 249

slightly calcareous nature, as was generally the case with
their contemporaneous Ccelenterates and Crustaceans, making
it doubtful that ordimary marine calcium compounds were
important solutions in the seas of their period; while the
fact that the Trimerellids had essentially a calcareous frame-
work, as was the case with a vast number of their coeval orga-
nisms, seems to show not only that such compounds had
increased in the Silurian seas, but further to support the con-
clusion that the family we are engaged with is a post-genetheo-
nomic branch of the Lingulids. With the physical changes
indicated, the shells of the present family underwent i important
modifications compared with the group from which they pre-
sumedly originated.

The ‘Trimerellids are strongly differentiated by the variety
and form of their parts. ‘The species, in general remarkably
distinguished by their massive umbonal region, have, speaking
subject to correction, the ventral or rostral valve characterized
by possessing twenty-four different parts, their dorsal one
having sixteen. Many of the parts are so unlike what are seen
in other families as to defy all attempts to determine their uses
or functions. One consideration that strikes us forcibly is that
such parts as the teeth and cardinal process (essentials in other
Palliobranchs) are exceedingly mutable, not only in a genus,
but in a species: besides, they are rarely well defined. The
teeth may be large and crude in certain individuals, but rudi-
mentary or obsolete in others of the same species. The car-
dinal process may be a thick projecting lamina, or rude in
shape and massive, or absent altogether. The deltidium
seems to be less lable to modifications: situated on a well-
developed area, it is bounded by two rather prominent ridges,
one on each side, with their inner and projecting terminations
serving as teeth. ‘The usual areal border hes on the outside
of each of the deltidial ridges. The deltidium itself is, in
general, wide and transversely marked with strong lamina-like
lines: it presents the appearance of being excavated out of
the areal face (or underlying solid portion) of the beak, agreeing
in this respect with what obtains in Lingula. In our forth
coming memoir it will be shown that another part, the deltidial
slope, further testifies to the close affinity between the Trime-
rellids and the last-named genus. The hinge or cardinal
plate, which requires more explanation than can be given on
the present occasion, is so variable in one species (77 rimerella
Lindstrémz) as to be with difficulty recognized in some indi-
viduals, The hinge-wall, as will shortly be seen, is equally
subject to variation. The umbo or beak, which is usually
prominent, presents itself under different appearances. Some-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 19

250 Messrs. Davidson and King on the Genera

what constant in form, it may, according to the species, be sub-
conical and massive, or compressed into a thin V-shaped
plate: in one genus it is obtusely rounded. In the first of
these conditions it may be solid or double-chambered: the
chambers are separated by either a thick or a thin partition ;

and they are shallow and. wide-mouthed, or long and tubular.
We are not acquainted with any thing strictly resembling the
pattition in other Palliobranchs. In Pentamerus, itis true, the
umbonal cavity is divided by a medio-longitudinal plate, giving
rise to two lateral chambers: in this last genus, however, the
dividing plate is double, causing it, when a specimen is suitably
struck with the hammer, to split lengthwise into two halves ;
but no such division has occurred to us in any specimens of
Trimerellids. The undivided condition of the partition seems
to be explained on the view that this part is a modified form
of the hinge-wall. Passing to the parts seen in the general
or valvular cavity of the Trimerellids, the principal are the
great muscle-bearing platforms, of which an example occurs
in each valve. A similar homologous duplication characterizes
other families—Pentamerids, Lepteenids, &e.; but the myo-
phores generally occur under a widely different shape. In the
typical genus of the present family the platforms are elevated
and doubly vaulted, the vaults bemg tubular and separated by
a partition. ‘The latter part is continued beyond or in advance
of each platform, where it becomes the ordinary medio-longi-
tudinal septum. A tendency to double-vaulting may be ob-
served in the myophores of some other Palliobranchs, particu-
larly Leptena Dutertric; in which the ventral one curves over
and rests upon the medio-longitudinal septum, forming thereby
a doubly vaulted arch. But the nearest approach to this
peculiarity, as pointed out by Billings, is undoubtedly pre-
sented by the genus Obolus, in which certain muscle-bearing
scars, usually excavated, have an overlapping posterior margin :

in Crania something similar is seen. The platforms, with their
tubular vaults and biconvex. surface, remind one of a double-
barrelled pistol. With a pair of this kind associated, as is often
the case, with a couple of tubular umbonal chambers, the inte-
rior of Trimerella presents a singular appearance. In Mono-
merella both platforms are solid and slightly raised ; and con-
sequently the absence of vaults gives the interior of this genus
a totally different aspect: the umbonal cavity, however, con-
tains two large chambers. Dzenobolus has neither a vaulted
platform, nor a chambered umbo. Lach of these three genera
contains species in which the myophores vary considerably,
being reduced to so rudimentary a condition that it is difficult
to allocate the species generically. Hall has been induced to

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monomerella. 251

raise an aberrant species of the kind to the rank of a genus,
Ehynobolus; but this step appears to us to be attended with
considerable disadvantage, as it would necessitate instituting
a genus for every aberrant form. ‘The scars are numerous
and exceedingly complicated by the modifications of the dif-
ferent parts, as just pointed out. After some consideration we
have abandoned the attempt to homologize them, except in a
few cases. We think the posterior crescent, with its loop and
lanceolate scars, corresponds to the post-aponeural impressions
in Lingula and Discina. We are unable to specify which
scars have been produced by the valvular muscles, except
some situated on the platforms: and with respect to the latter,
our efforts to identify them with the valvulars of Lingula (the
nearest living representative, as we believe) have not, it is to be
apprehended, been attended with much success. We have,
for the reasons stated, refrained as far as possible from em-
ploying terms for the different scars implying their uses, and
have, instead, simply given them names denoting their relative
position, distinguishing the group in the dorsal valve from
that of the ventral one by a different type. Certain scars, or
other parts, apparently occupying the same relative positions
in the two valves, and which appear to be analogous, bear
the same letter, but in a different type: nothing more is meant
by this mode of lettering.

The geographical distribution of the Trimerellids is a matter
of some importance. [minently a Silurian group, one might
have expected the well-explored region which the labours of
Murchison have made classical would have yielded an abund-
ance of examples; but it is remarkable that only a few speci-
mens of a single genus, Dinobolus, and apparently the last of
their race, have been met with, in the Wenlock limestones
and shales near Dudley, and discovered for the first time in
1852. Identical deposits in Gothland contain the same species ;
but a greater variety of the family occurs rather abundantly
in rocks of the “ Aymestry ” age of that remarkable locality.
Canada and adjacent districts in the United States have yielded
the greatest variety of species, all of which, with the exception
of Dinobolus canadensis and D. magnifica, are referable to
the Upper Silurians. The two species last named occur in
the Black-River limestone, a rock which appears to be equi-
valent to the Upper Llandeilo, or to the base of the Caradoc
of this country. A species of Monomerella has also been found
in Livonia (Russia) in rocks corresponding in age with those
in which the same genus occurs in Gothland.

Our labours on the Trimerellids have enabled us to confirm,
for the most part, the conclusions of previous writers as to

19%

252 On two new Philippine-Island Birds.

the number of species, and to determine the existence of some
others. The three genera are severally constituted in species
as follows :—

Trimerella grandis, Bellings. Dinobolus galtensis, Billings.
acuminata, Billings. Davidsoni, Salter.
— Lindstrémi, Dall. transversus, Salter.

—— Billingsii, Dall. — Woodwardi, Salter.
ohioensis, Meek. magnifica, Billings.
Dalli, Dav. & King. Monomerella Walmstedti, Dav. &
wisbyensis, Dav. § King. King.

Dinobolus Conradi, Hall. —- prisca, Billings.

canadensis, Billings.

orbicularis, Billings.

With one or two exceptions, all the species will be fully
illustrated in five lithographic plates in our forthcoming
memoir; in addition to which there will be two woodcut
plates of diagram figures explaining the various parts briefly
noticed on the present occasion, and another showing the
relationship of Lingula to the family.

XXXVIII.—On two new Species of Birds from the Philippine
Islands. By Artuur Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.8., F.R.S.

Hyloterpe philippinensis, n. sp.

Feathers of the chin, cheeks, throat, and upper breast silky
white, edged more or less with cinereous, a dingy sordid aspect
being thus given to these parts; an indistinct obscure zone
crossing the breast and bordering the upper breast-plumage,
consisting of feathers which are dark ashy at their base, then
pure white, tipped with dirty yellow; the remainder of the
under plumage with the flanks and under tail-coverts sulphur-
yellow, each feather, however, being iron-grey at the base
and then white; entire head dark smoke-brown, lighter on
the ear-coverts; remainder of upper plumage olive green,
rather darker on the outer edges of the quills and on the
rectrices ; under carpals and axillaries pale lemon-white ; tail
slightly forked; bill horn-brown.

Longitudo
Rostr. a nar. Alea. Caudee. Tarsi.
0:32 3°25 ole 0:75

From an example obtained in Luzon by Dr. B. Meyer and
labelled a ‘‘ male,”

Orthotomus castaneiceps, n. Sp.

Entire head, lores, streak under the eyes, and the ear-coverts
chestnut; nape and interscapulary region dark ashy, with

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 253

scarcely a tinge of olive-green ; feathers of the middle of back,
uropygium, and upper tail-coverts dark ashy at base, with
yellowish olive-green tips; quills brown, with bright yellowish-
green outer edges; rectrices above paler brown, edged near
their insertion and more or less throughout their length
with the bright yellowish green of the quills; outer rectrices
decidedly darker brown than the middle pair; the middle pair,
which is longest, with a faint subterminal bar or drop; the
next pair with an obvious dark subterminal drop, which is
still more evident in the remaining rectrices; all the rectrices
with a narrow albescent terminal fringe; on their under sur-
faces the green edgings appear brighter than when seen from
above; a few of the chin-feathers fulvous; throat and cheeks
ashy white; feathers of the breast pale ash, with broad luteous
or yellowish-white centres, giving the breast a striped appear-
ance; the remainder of the feathers of the under plumage silky
white, ashy at the base; those of the flanks with a faint yel-
lowish tinge ; shoulder-edge and under carpals yellowish white ;
axillaries silky white, tipped with yellowish green; thigh-
coverts pale ferruginous ; maxilla pale horn-brown ; mandible
yellowish white; legs like the maxilla, only paler. A large
species with a long and stout bill.

Longitudo
Rostr. a nar. Ale. Caudee. Tarsi.
0:50 2 2:20 0°85

Obtained in the Philippine island of Guimaras by Dr. B.
Meyer during the month of March. The single example pro-
cured is labelled a “ male.”

XXXIX.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.
K. Parker, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S.,
Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg.

[Continued from p. 200. |

XIX. MiscELLANEOUS RECENT FORAMINIFERA.

§1. Tripoli from San Francisco. (Monatsber. 1853, p. 216.)
Pl. xxxin. xin. fig. 27, Grammostomum simplex, seems to be

a young Bolivina dilatata (?).

§2. Blown Sand, Libyan Desert.
Pl. xxxiv. x. A. 6. Zriloculina? Indeterminable.

§ 3. Blown Sand, Baltic, near Wismar, Mecklenburg.
Pl. xxxrv. x. B. 1. Rotalia globulosa = Planorbulina globulosa.

254. Messrs. Parker and Jones on

§ 4. Deep-sea mud, Afgean Sea; 1200 feet (H. Forbes, 1842).
(Monatsb. Berl. Akad. Wiss. 1854.)
PL. xxxyv. A. xx. A. 6. Rotalia globulosa? = Planorbulina glo-
bulosa (Khr.), or Globigerina ?
With Spicules, Diatoms, Polycystines, and sand *.

$5. Anchor-mud, Cape Blanco, West Africa.
Pl. xxxv. A. x1x. B. 3. Calcarina atlantica = Planorbulina?
With Spicules and Diatoms.

§6. Anchor-mud, Spitzbergen. (Monatsh. 1841, p. 206;

Abhandl. 1841, p. 364.)

Pl. xxv. A. xx. 9. Uvigerina? borealis. Indeterminable ; but
it may be four chambers of a Planorbulina (Truncatu-
lina) ?

With Spicules, Diatoms, and sand.

$7. Deep-sea Mud, South Pole; 1620 feet, S. lat. 62° 42/,
W. long. 55°. (Monatsb. 1844, p. 191. Sir James Clark Ross,
‘Voyage in the Southern and Antarctic Regions,’ vol. 1. p. 344,
1847. Ann. Nat. Hist. no. 90, vol. xiv. p. 169.)

Pl. Xxxv. A. Xxil. 22. Guttulina? divergens (=“ Grammo-
stomum, 1844”). Indeterminable; it may perhaps be
a Bulimina.
With Diatoms, Spicules, Polycystines, and sand.

§8. Sea-life of the Deep Atlantic. (Monatsb. 1853, p. 782 ;

1854, pp. 54-75, 236-250.)

Pl. xxxv. B. Iv. A. Group of Foraminifera, Spicules, Diatoms,
Polycystines, and sand; from 10800 feet depth: mag-
nified 100 diameters.

e,f, m. Globigerina, sp.? Globigerina bullordes.

g. Glob. bulloides.

h. Pulvinulina Menardit.

t. —— { eal \ Small thick-set Globigerina bulloides.
porosa. .
fet. ,sp-2? Globigerina (small).
n. Rotalia, sp.? Small Cristellaria or Nonionina?
o. 'Textilaria, sp.2 Small stout Zext. gibbosa.
p. Grammostomum aculeatum. Vulvulina aculeata (Ehr.).
With Spicules, Polycystines, Diatoms, and sand.

g, h. Planulina, sp.? ‘

* Tn the ‘ Monatsberichte’ for 1858 (1859, pp. 10-30) Dr. Ehrenberg
has given short descriptions of eight ‘‘new genera” and seventy-one
“new species ” of Foraminifera from the Aigean Sea and the deep water
of the Mediterranean. Unfortunately this interesting catalogue is not
illustrated.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera, 255

Magnified 300 diameters :—

Figs. 1 & 2. Ptygostomum Orphei. From 840 feet. = Gobi-
gerina bulloides, rough shell.

Figs. 3 & 4. Phanerostomum atlanticum. From 6480 feet.
Glob. cretacea, smooth.

Figs. 5& 6. Globigerina ternata. From 840 feet. Glob. bul-
loides, ordinary heaped var.

Fig.7. Spiropleurites nebulosus. From 10800 feet. Pulvi-

r;

_

nulina repanda, outspread form.

g. 26 represents a small G'lobigerina on a living Conferva
(Hygrocrocis Hrebi) from 12000 feet (about 21 miles)
depth.

§9. Volcanic May-dust, of May 1812; Barbadoes, West
Indies. (Monatsb. 1850, p. 359.)
Pl. xxxviil. XXxt. fig. 22. Rotalia globulosa. This appears to
be a Globigerina.

$10. Halibiolithic Volcanic Mud, Moya, Scheduba, Eastern
Archipelago. (Monatsb. 1846, pp. 171, 207.)
Pl. XXXVI. XXII. fig. 1. Rotalia globulosa. Planorbulina.
fig. 2. Textilaria leptotheca. Vargulina
Schreibersi?, Cz.
fig. 3. T. globulosa. Test. globulosa, Khy.
fig. 4, Textilaria. 7. gibbosa, D’Orb.
fig. 5. T.aculeata. 7. subangulata, D’Orb.

$11. Storm-dust.
Pl. xxxix. fig. 140. Textilaria globulosa. Small 7. gibbosa or
T. globulosa.
§ 12. Sirocco-dust in Malta, 1830.
Pl. xxx1x. m1. e. Rotalia globulosa (senaria ?). This is proba-
bly a Globigerina ; but perhaps it 1s Planorb. globulosa.
$13. Coloured Rain in Ireland, April 14, 1849. (Monatsb.
1849, p. 200.)

Pl. xxxix. xiv.g. Textilaria globulosa? This seems to be
either a small rough-shelled 7. gibbosa, or a G'lobigerina
of irregular shape.

i

XX. MIscELLANEOUS Fosst, FORAMINIFERA.

$1. Polycystina-deposits of Barbadoes and Nicobar Islands*,

* We refer the student to the beautiful plates of Dr. Conrad Schwager’s
memoir on the fossil Foraminifera of Kar Nikobar (‘ Novara-Expedition,
Geol. Theil, vol. ii. 1864, and ‘Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc.’ vol. xxviii. p. 125)
for more abundant illustrations,

256 _ Messrs. Parker and Jones on

(Monatsb. 1846, p. 382, with illustrations; 1847, pp. 40-60 ;
1850, p. 476, &e. Schomburgk, ‘ History of Barbadoes,’ 1848,
p- 556, pls. 1, 2, p. 560.)

Pl. xxxvi. fig. 67. Planulina mica. Young Planorbulina.
fig. 68. Rotalia? Planorbulina ammonotdes.

§2. Nummulitic Limestone of Traunstein, Bavaria. (Mo-
natsb. Juli 1854.) Magnified 300 diam.
Pl. xxxvu.tv.1. Guttulina turrita? Verneuilina pygmea
(Egger).
2. Mesopora chloris. (A green internal cast.)
Some early segments of a Haplophragmium.
3. Planulina ammonis. Operculina. Compare
Op. levis, Giimbel, 1868, ‘ Foram. nord-
alp. Hociingeb.’ pl. 1. fig. 113.
4. Rotalia rudis. Obscure; probably a prickly

Globigerina coated with calcareous granules.

§3. Pliner (Lower Chalk) Limestone, Teplitz, Bohemia.
(Monatsh. 1844, p. 414.) Magnified 300 diam,
Pl. xxxvu. vi.1. Cenchridium oliva. An entosolenian La-
gena globosa.

2. Proroporus crete? Probably a Polymor-

hina.
3 & 4. Rotalia globulosa tenuior. mee:
5 SEs Globigerina.
pertusas
6. Textilaria ¢lobulosa.
7 ca ee Text. globulosa.

§ 4. Hornstone (Cretaceous) pebble, Delitzsch, Saxony. (Ab-
handlungen, 1836, p. 110 &c. pl. 1.)
Pl. xxxvu. vit. 12. Textilaria globulosa. (A cast; magn.
100 diam.) Indeterminable.
Together with Xanthidia, Peridinia, &c.

§5. Hornstone of the Coral-rag, Cracow. (Monatsb. 1836,
p- 196; 1843, p. 161; Abhandl. 1838, pp. 39, 76, 78.) Mag-
nified 300 times linear.

Pl. xxxvu. vu. 5. Nodosaria urceolata, 1838. A cast. No-
dosaria.
6. Soldania elegans, 1838. A cast. Cristel-
laria.
Together with Xanthidia &e.

§6. Yellow Jurassic Melonia-limestone from the Kaiserstuhl,

Baden. (Monatsb. 1843, p. 105.)

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 257

Pl. xxxvu. rx. A. A small piece, of the natural size, consisting
of minute, globular, uniform bodies, lying in ‘contact
without calcareous cement. Fig. 1, Borelis (Melonia)
spheroidea (1842); figs. 2 & 3, sections. Magnified 20
diam. These have externally the appearance of Alveoline,
prolately spheroidal in shape; the internal structure,
however, though obscure, is not that of Alveolina (Borelis
of Montfort and Ehrenberg), but is like that seen in Fu-
sulina, Endothyra, and Involutina. Regarding Ehren-
berg’s specimens as Hndothyra, and taking the rock for
Jurassic, these are the youngest known of that genus*.

$7. Yellow Jurassic Melonia-limestone, York, England.

(Monatsb. /. c.)

This is said to have the same appearance as IX. A., but to differ
by containing some few extraneous objects, such as B. 1,
Nodosaria, sp.? ; 2, Textilaria, sp.?; 3, Cypris? These are
figured of the natural size. Figs. 1 & 2 are clearly as
stated. Fig. 3 is a simple, convex, oval object, possibly
a Cytherella (2). As to the presumed Alveoline character
of this Oolite we have no further evidence than the state-
ment quoted above.

§ 8. Pl. xxxvir. rx.c. A brown ‘ Melonia-limestone” from
the Oolites of Bath is also alluded to, and a minute Z7o-
chus or Pleurotomaria? is figured from it (c.1). There is,
however, no figured evidence of the presumed Alveoline
character of this rock.

§9. Melonia- and Alveolina-limestones and hornstones of
Russia. (Monatsb. 1842, p. 273; 1843, pp. 79, 106.) A white
Sriable Bellerophon-limestone from Witegra on the Onega Lake.
Pl. xxxvu. x. A. A piece figured nat. size. Figs. 1-4, Tex-

tilaria paleotrochus, nat. size and 4 diam. This is a Val-
vulina (compare xt. 12 & 13). Together with small
Polyzoan(?) stems (figs. 5 & 6).

X.B is a similar rock, with minute helicoid shells (B. 1,
EKuomphalus? nanus, and B. 2, Hu.? inversus), which are
much like Spirorbis.

§ 10. Melonia- and Alveolina-hornstone of the Mountain-
limestone of the Pinega (Dwina), Archangel. (Monatsh. 1842,
p- 273; 1843, p. 106.)

Pl. xxxvit. x. c. A piece, nat. size. ©. figs. 1-4, Borelis prin-

* In a sketch of the range of Foraminifera in time, by one of us, in the

‘Proceed. Geol. Assoc.’ vol. iii. pp. 180 & 182, Fusulina was inadvertently
made to take the place of Endothyra in this Jurassic stage.

258 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

ceps, nat. size and magn. 4 diam. Ovoidin shape. Figs.
5, a, b, Alveolina montipara, nat. size and magn. 4 diam.
Fusiform. [In the plate, fig. 5, outline or longitudinal
section, nat. size; fig. 6, longitudinal section, opened by
weathering, magn.] ‘There can be no doubt of these shells
being (fig. 5) Husulina cylindrica, Fischer, and (fig. 4)
its short spheroidal variety.

$11. Melonia-hornstone of the Mountain-limestone of

Witegra.

Pl. xxxvul. x.p. A piece, nat. size. oD. figs. 1-4, Borelis
spheroidea? (1842), nat. size, and views and _ section
magn. Very small, oblately spheroidal, deeply and evenly
furrowed longitudinally ; chambers small (or nearly filled),
decidedly Fusuline in character. Figs. 5, 6, B. constricta,
nat. size and magn. Such a /usulina as this has been
found fossil in the Arctic Regions*. Figs. 7-9, Alveolina
prisca (1842); nat. size and magn. This is a Fusulina
like c.5. Figs. 10, 1 a—-f, represent Borelis (Melonia) melo,
from the Karst, near Trieste, for comparison. This is a
true simple Alveolina, with a section very different from
that of any of the above.

$12. Hornstone of the Mountain-limestone, with Spirifer

mosquensis, from Tula, Russia, (Monatsb. 1843, pp. 79, 106.)

Pl. xxxvil. x1. A—D. The material variously shown.

Figs. 1, 2. Alveolina prisca? ‘These are internal casts of Fu-
sulina cylindrica; but the shape of the chambers is not
so definitely quadrangular as in figs.5 & 8. This may be
due either to mineralization or to some obliquity in the
section.

Fig. 3. Borelis labyrinthiformis (1843). A vertical section of
the internal cast of a Husulina, of an oblate-spheroidal
shape.

Figs. 4,5. B. paleophus. Casts of a Pusulina, with short alar
prolongations of the chambers, and therefore to some ex-
tent Nummuline in shape, being discoidal with keeled
edge.

Fig. 6. B. paleophacus. A cast of a similar but thicker Fw-
sulina.

Figs. 7, 8. B. paleosphera. Casts of a somewhat similar
Fusulina, but barrel-shaped, having considerably produced
ale. In shape it corresponds with x. p. 1-4.

* Fusulina hyperborea, Salter, in Belcher’s ‘ Arctic Voyage,’ 1855, vol. ii.
p. 380, pl. xxxvi. figs. 1-3,

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 259

Fig. 9. Grammostomum bursigerum. Embedded cast of a
Textilaria (to all appearance), with oval segments.

Fig. 10. Nodosarta index. Chamber-casts of a doubtful Fora-
minifer, in a row, with indications of a narrow straight
shell, but showing no stolons.

Fig. 11. Rotalia antiqua. <A_ rotaliform Endothyra; with
chamber-easts like those of small Planorbuline (Mantell,
Philos. Transact. 1846, pl. xxi.), and at the same time
like those of Phillips’s Endothyra Bowmani (Proc. Geol.
Polytech. Soc. W. Riding Yorkshire, 1846, vol. ii. p. 277,
pl. vii. fig. 1).

Fig. 12. Tetrataxis conica (1843); fig. 13. T. conica?, side
view (“compare Teaxtilaria paleotrochus”). As before
intimated, this is a Valvulina, or at least a Valvuline
modification of Trochammina.

Fig. 14. Textilaria falcata. Probably the edge view of fig. 17.

Fig. 15. 7. lagenosa. ‘The same as fig. 9.

Figs. 16 & 16*. 7. dunata (1843). Apparently a broad pyra-
midal Textilaria.

Fig. 17. 7. recurvata. Side view of 7. falcata, fig. 14.

Forms similar to figs. 11,12, 13, 14, and 17, besides others,
have been found in the Mountain-limestone of England and
Scotland by Messrs. Tennant, Darker, Phillips, Sorby, Hark-
ness, Holl, Young, Moore, and Brady. ‘The last-named has
made a preliminary notice of them in the Brit. Assoc. Report
for 1869, Trans. Sect. p. 881, and has elaborated one form in
particular (Saccammina Carter?) in the Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,
vol. vu. p. 177 &c., pl. xii. See also “‘ Monogr. Polymorph.,”
Linn. Soe. Trans. vol. xxvu. p. 199.

Fusulina.—With regard to the Fusuline specimens, Prof.
Ehrenberg has evidently taken Alveolina melo, var. 8 (F.& M.),
the Melonia spheroidea of De Blainville (1824), as the type for
those having a prolately spheroidal shape. This is also the
Borelis melonioides of De Montfort (1808) ; hence the use also
of the latter generic termt. But the Carboniferous specimens
are not of this genus, and had been rightly discriminated by
Fischer de Waldheim f.

+ For a bibliographic history of Alveolina, see our memoir in Ann. Nat.
Hist. ser. 3, vol. vi. pp. 161 &e.

¢ ‘Oryctograph. Moscou,’ 1830, p. 17, pl. xiii. Figs. 1-5 illustrate his
Fusulina cylindrica ; and figs. 6-11 are devoted to his /. depressa, which
is the same as F. cylindrica, but showing a different aspect of interior,
being opened at a different portion of the surface by weathering. See
also ‘Grbigny in ‘Geol. Russia, &c. vol. ii. p. 15; and D’Eichwald’s ‘ Le-
thea Rossica,’ 5° livr. 1859, pp. 349 &e.

260 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

In treating of Fusulina in the Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol.
viii. p. 166 (1861), we regarded it as an Alveolina; but Dr.
Carpenter’s researches have settled its higher rank as a hyaline
and tubuliferous shell near Nonionina and Nummulina*, as
intimated by D’Orbigny. Prof. Ehrenberg seems to have
adopted the terms ‘ Alveolina” and “ Borelis” for the long and
short Fusuline respectively t. If arranged in order, according
to the amount of compression or the diminishing length of
axis, the Fusuline figured in the plate before us would stand
thus :—

i Hts tar
1. Alveolina prisca. x. D. 7-9. Pee ae oP
ee montipara. X.C. 5, a, b. Brera nme tet: IGE IS
at lindrica and Ff’, depressa.
3. prisca? x1.1, 2. Long barrel-shaped.
4, Borelis constricta. x. D. 5,6. Cylindrical, but con-
stricted in the middle.
3. princeps. x.c. 1-4. Ovoid.
6. spheroidea. x. D. 1-4. \ Oblately spheroidal ;
fs paleosphera. XI. 7, 8. barrel-shaped.
8. —— labyrinthiformis. x1. 38. Deeply oblate; thick
disk with rounded edges.
9. paleophacus. x1. 6. Biconvex, with flattened
faces; a disk with attenuate margin.
10. —— paleophus. x1. 1-5. Lenticular.

Thus, with every possible gradation of shape between them,
the longitudinal section of the first is of the same outline as the
vertical cross section of the last; whilst all present the same
spiral arrangement of chambers (subquadrangular in section)
when exposed by a median section across the long specimens,
and parallel to the two faces in the discoidal and lenticular
forms.

Fusulina cylindrica has been found in the Carboniferous
rocks on the Ohiof and of Upper Missouri (Marcou, ‘ Geol. Map
U.S. and Canada,’ text p. 86, 8vo, Boston, 1853; and Meek
and Hayden, ‘ Paleontol. Upper Missouri,’ 1865, pl. 1. figs.

* “Introd. Study Foram.’ 1862, p. 804 &e.; ‘Month. Microscop. Journ.’
1870, p. 180.

+ We are obliged to come to this conclusion, although our respected
author had a decidedly different opinion in 1842. In the Monatsb. 1842,
p- 274, he states that “1. Melonia (Borelis) spheroidea, 2. B. constricta,
3. B. princeps (2 lines long), and 4. Alveolina prisca (1 line long, fusiform),
occurring mixed up together in the white Carboniferous Miliolite-limestone
of the Oneida Lake, are very different as to species from the evidently
allied Fusuling of Russia.”

t De Verneuil, ‘Silliman’s Amer. Journ.’ ser. 2, vol. ii. 1846, p. 293 ;
Bullet. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 2, vol. iv. pp. 682, 684, & 708.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 261

6a-67). Also in California (Meek and Gabb, ‘Geol. Surv. Cali-
fornia, Paleont.’ vol. i. 1864, p. 4, pl. i. fig. 2), together with 7’.
gracilis (fig. 1, p.4) and F. robusta (fig. 3, p. 38). Abich found
his Fusulina spherica in the Caucasus: “ Vergleich. Grund-
ziige Kaukas.” &c., Mém. phys.-math. Acad. St.-Pétersb. vol.
vu. pl. ii. fig. 18. B. F. Shumard found a Permian Fusulina
(Ff, elongata) in New Mexico and Texas: Transact. Acad.
St. Louis, vol. i. no. 2, 1858, p. 297; see also Hayden’s ‘ Re-
ports.’ /. robusta has also been found in the Upper Carbon-
iferous Limestone of the Southern Alps (Canal-Thal, Uggo-
witz). Prof. Suess regards it as the same as J. spherica,
Abich, and notes its occurrence, with £. cylindrica, in Russia*.

There can be little doubt, with the evidence of gradational
forms given in the ‘Mikrogeologie,’ pl. xxxvii., that all these
and even other Husulinw may belong to one and the same
zoological species. It is highly probable also that, on strict
comparison, one and the same variety would be found to have
claim to two or more of the names quoted above and in the
foregoing list, made from the ‘ Mikrogeologie.’

In a specimen of white /usulina-limestone, brought from
Russia by the late Sir R. I. Murchison, we have found well-
characterized fragments of Dentalina communis and a conical
Valvulina. Such a form, recent, passes into Trochammina
squamata; and T’r. inflata passes into Lituola; and Lituola,
through Zrochammina, becomes Involutina and Endothyra t.
This low Rotaluform shell (Hndothyra) occurs in specimens
collected by Dr. Holl from some clay-seams of the English
Carboniferous Limestone, in sections of Carboniferous Lime-
stone made by Prof. Phillips, of oolitic Mountain-limestone
made by Mr. H. C. Sorby, and in several other collections.
As Valvulina passes gradually into Trochammina by traceable
links (Brady), and as the last and Jnvolutina are closely related,
we are not surprised to find a variety of modifications, even
Textilariiform, of this low group in the Paleozoic strata, and,
on the other hand, Kndothyran modifications higher up in the
series, as Khrenberg’s Jurassic “‘ Borelis spheroidea”’ (IX. A.
1-3) above noticed (p. 257).

Miscellaneous Fossil Foraminifera figured by Ehrenberg in the
‘ Mikrogeologie.’
1. Barbadoes (late Tertiary).
Planorbulina (young), and Pl. ammonoides (fss.).

* See Suess’s valuable note on the distribution of Fusulina in America,
Europe, and Armenia, Proc. Geol. Inst. Vienna, Jan. 4, 1870; Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. Miscell. p. 3.

+ See above, p. 259; also H. B. Brady’s notes on these Foraminifera,
Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. vi. pp. 50-52.

262 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

2. Nummnulitic Limestone, Traunstein, Bavaria.
1. Haplophragmium.
2. Verneuilina pygmeea (Lgger).
3. Globigerina ?
4, Operculina ammonis (hr.).
3. Pliner-Kalk, Teplitz, Bohemia.
1. Lagena (Entosolenia) globosa (Monitaq.).
2.. Polymorphina ?
3. Textilaria globulosa, hr.
4, Globigerina.
4. Hornstone (Cretaceous), Saxony.
1. Textilaria globulosa, Ehr.

5. Coral-rag, Cracow.
Nodosaria and Cristellaria.

6. Jurassic Limestone, Kaiserstuhl, Baden.
1. Endothyra spheroidea (Hhr.).

7. Jurassic Limestone, York, England.
Nodosaria and Textilaria.

8. Jurassic Limestone, Bath, England.

g. Carboniferous Limestone, Witegra, Russia.
1. Valvulina (Tetrataxis) paleotrochus (Zhr.).

10. Carboniferous Hornstone of the Pinega, Archangel.
1. Fusulina cylindrica, ischer.
2. princeps (Zhr.). This is probably the same as F,
spherica, Abich, and F. robusta, Meek.

11. Carboniferous Hornstone, Witegra, Russia.
1. Fusulina cylindrica, isch.
2. constricta (Lthr.).
3. —— spheroidea (Hhr.).

12. Carboniferous Hornstone, Tula, Russia.
Nodosaria ? index, Hhr.

Fusulina cylindrica, Misch.

—— paleosphera (Hhr.).
labyrinthiformis (Lhr.).
paleophacus (Hhr.).

—— paleophus (Zhr.).

. Textilaria bursigera, Hhr.

falcata (vel recurvata), Khr.

; lunata, Hhr.

DO AAR OR obo

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 263

10. Valvulina (Tetrataxis) paleotrochus (Zhr.).
11. Endothyra antiqua (Lhr.). Possibly the same as LE.
Bowmant, Phil.

We have now finished the critical examination of the illus-
trated Foraminifera so liberally and magnificently set forth in
the ‘ Mikrogeologie.’ There remain, however, some equally
beautiful drawings and coloured engravings of Foraminifera
and their internal casts in the ‘ Abhandlungen’ of the Berlin
Academy, illustrative of the great microscopist’s researches in
green sand resulting from the infillings of these minute shells
and other little cavernous organisms and the subsequent decay
of the enclosing tissues, and of his successful work in the
artificial production of analogous casts. In the ‘ Monatsberichte’
for 1858 are still later researches on such siliceous casts,
with some illustrations. We proceed, therefore, with the ex-
amination of these plates, as part of the Miscellaneous Fossil

Foraminifera figured by Dr. Ehrenberg.

§13. On Green Sand* and its elucidation of Organic
Life. (Abhandl. preuss. Akad. Wiss. aus dem Jahre 1855, 4to,
Berlin, 1856, pp. 85-176; read in July and August 1854, and
in February, March, May, and July 1855.)

In this memoir are described foraminiferal shells and internal
casts from :—

I. & Il. 1. Tertiary glauconitic sand of Pontoise, France,
p- 104; 2. Tertiary glauconitic sand of Pierre-Laie, near Paris,
p- 105; 3. Tertiary green sand from Westeregeln, Hanover,
p- 105; 4. Nummulitic Limestone of Traunstein near the
Chiem-See, Bavaria, p. 105; 5. Nummulitic Limestone of
Montfort, Département des Landes, France, p.106; 6. Num-
mulitic Limestone of Fontaine-de-la-Medaille, near Montfort,
p- 107; 7. Green sand from beneath the Zeuglodon-limestone,
Alabama, North America, p. 107; 8. Chloritic Limestone of
the Pliner, near Werl, Westphalia, p. 107; 9. Upper Gréen-
sand, Compton Bay, Isle of Wight, p. 109; 10. Greensand of
Haldon Hill, Exeter, p.109; 11. Upper Greensand, Handfast
Point, Swanage Bay, England, p.109; 12. Lower Greensand,
Handfast Point, p. 110; 15. Gault, Escragnolles, Dép. du Var,
France, p. 110; 14. Neocomian, Lales, Dép. du Var, p. 110;
15. Loose green sand of the Middle Jurassic beds near Moscow,
p- 111; 16. Compact green sand of the Jura, near Moscow,
p- 111; 17. Lower Silurian green sand of St. Petersburg,
Pep ul 2.

* See also Prof. J. W. Bailey’s Memoir “On the Origin of Green Sand,
and its formation in the Oceans of the present Epoch,” in the Quart, Journ.
Microsc. Soc. no. xviii., 1857, pp. 83-87.

264 _ Messrs. Parker and Jones on

ILI. “ Remarks on the green sand of the Zewg/odon-limestone
of Alabama” (read February 1855), pp. 112-116. IV. “New
advance of knowledge of the green sand, and on the abundant
brown-red and coral-red stone casts of the Polythalamian
Chalk of North America” (read March 1855), pp. 116-129.
V. “Further recognition of the higher organization of the Poly-
thalamia by means of their ancient stone casts” (read May
1855), pp. 130-145. VI. “ The successful exposition of perfect
stone casts of Nummulites, with abundant organic structure”’
(read July 1855), pp. 146-148. VII. “ The successful trans-
parent colouring of colourless organic siliceous bodies for micro-
scopical purposes” (read July 1855), pp. 148-157. The expla-
nation of plates, pp. 158-176.

Plate I. figs. 1-111. represent chlorite Kc.

Fig. rv. A group of green siliceous casts and portions of casts
from the Nummulitic Limestone of the Traunstein. They are
numbered (1-11) in the text, p. 159, and lettered (a—/) in the
plate and its explanation, p. 160: fig. a (‘‘ Rotalia”) probably
belongs to an Operculina; fig.g (‘ Rotalia”) may be part of
the cast of asimple Alveolina. The others are very uncertain.
Fig. v. (p. 160), Nodosaria, Zeuglodon-limestone, Alabama.
Fig. vi., Nodosaria monile (Glauconitic Limestone, Montfort),
=N. pyrula, D’Orb. vit. & vitt., Nodosaria javanica (Gua
Linggo-manik, Java), has parallel grooves in each segment,
and is a Bigenerina that had a set of imternal ribs on the
chamber-wall (incipient labyrinthic structure) : seealsoa grooved
east in Textilaria trilobata, pl. IV. figs. xv., xvi. Fig. Ix.
Vaginulina, Zeuglodon-limestone. Fig. x. Vaginulina subu-
lata, Glauc. Limestone, Montfort.

Pl. I. fig. 1. (p. 161), Zeaxtilaria globulosa, Num. Limest.
Traunstein. Fig. 11., Grammostomum attenuatum, and fig. II.,
Gr. angulatum (Num. Limest. Montfort), are Teaxtilaria sagit-
tula. Fig. 1v., Text. euryconus? (Zeugl.-l.), is Teat. agglutinans.
Fig. v., Grammostomum (Zeugl.-l.), is Text. sagittula. Fig. V1.,
Oncobotrys buccinum (Zeugl.-|.),1s the cast of probably a Poly-
morphina, possibly of a Bulimina. Fig. vu., Rotalia umbilicata
(Glauc. L. Montfort), is a young nautiloid form possibly Ro-
taline, probably Operculine. Fig. vitt. (p. 162), Mesopora
chloris (Traunstein), is an Operculina, and not the same as is
figured in the ‘ Mikrogeologie,’ which is a Haplophragmium
(Lituola). Fig. 1x., Planulina micromphala (Zeugl.-l.), is
Rotalia Beccarti. Fig. x., Phanerostomum?, and fig. x1., Pla-
nulina polysolenia (Zeugl.-l.), are Planorbulina vulgaris. Fig.
xit., Cristellaria eurythalama (Zeugl.-l.), is a Lituola (Haplo-
phragmium). Fig. X11. (p. 163), Globigerina crassa (Zeugl.-l.),

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 265

is Glob. bulloides. Fig. xiv. Geoponus zeuglodontis (Zeugl.-l.,
is Planorbulina vulgaris*.

Pl. ILI. (p. 164), fig. 1.-1v., Nonionina? bavarica (Traun-
stein), isa young Amphistegina. ‘This is the earliest recorded
appearance of the genus in the geological series. Fig. v.,
fotalia (Zeugl.-l.), 1s a young Operculina or Nummulina?
Fig. vi., peculiar triangular dentate cast (Zeugl.-L.), is like the
septal plane of a Polystomella. Figs. vi1.-1x. (p. 165), Am-
phistegina javanica, and fig. x., Heterostegina clathrata, both
from the Orbitoidal Limestone of Gua Linggo-manik, Java, are
both the same Amph. javanica.

Pl. IV. (p. 166), fig. 1. (p. 167), not named, is an Amphi-
stegina with parasitic borings. Figs. 11.-vi1. (p. 168), Ordi-
toides Prattii?. Figs. viit.—x., Orbitotdes javanicus, and fig. X1.,
Orbitoides microthalama, both from Java, are thesame Orbitoides.
Fig. xu., Cyclosiphon?, from Java, is part of an Orbitoides
(referred elsewhere by Ehrenberg to Orb. Mantelli). Fig. x11.
(p. 169), Spiroplecta? (Zeugl.-l.), is a Sptroplecta. Figs.
XIV.-XVL., Textilaria trilobata (Java, Orb. L.), is an interesting
sublabyrinthic Text., already referred to (p. 264). Fig. Xvu.,
Spiroloculina ? (Traunstein), seems to be a Qudnqueloculina.
Fig. xvitt., Quinqueloculina, and fig. XIx., Quinqueloculina
(Traunstein), are undeveloped young Miliole. Vig. xx.,
Quing. saxorum (Calcaire grossier, Pontoise), is a Quinquelo-
culina, but not of that species which has a thick shell grooved
within. Fig. xx1., Triloculina (Orb. L., Java), has been
parasitically bored. Fig. xx1t., Spiroloculina (Orb. L., Java),
is very interesting in having lateral stolons from segment to
segment, showing a prolepsis of the more complicated and
closely related Orbitolites, the outside of the quasi-annular
segments being multistoloniferous. These supernumerary
stolons begin by few and become many in later segments.
Fig. xxi. Cerithium? (Zeugl.-l.). Fig. xxiv. Spirillina?,
or young Mollusk?, or Spcvorbis? (Alabama); decidedly a
young Mollusk.

Pl. V. figs. I-vi1. Nummulites striata (Couizac, Dép. de
VPAude) ; fig. vi1.is Nummulina planulata (Lam.). Figs. 1x.,
x. (p. 171), NV. Murchisoni (‘Traunstein). Fig. x1. N. Dufrenoyt
(Traunstein). Fig..xut., Polystomatium? (‘Traunstein), is a
Polystomella. Figs. X111.-xv., Polystomatium lepactis (Orb. L.,
Java), is Polystomella craticulata (compare pl. xvi. fig. 9, of
‘Introd. Study Foram.’ 1862). Fig. xvi. (p. 172), Physom-
phalus porosus (Orb, L., Java), is Operculina. Fig. Xvit.
Alveolina (Java),

* Two casts of this species from North-American Tertiary beds were
figured by Prof. Bailey in Amer. Journ. Sc. 1845, vol. xlviii.no. 2, pl. iv.
figs. 30, 31.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 20

266 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

I. Foraminifera from the Nummulitic Limestone, Traunstein,
Bavaria. See also above, page 256.

. Textilaria globulosa, Khr.

. Polystomella.

. Operculina.

. Amphistegina.

Nummulina Murchisoni.

—— Dutrenoyi.

. Alveolina.

» Quinqueloculina ?

CO ISD SUS GO NO

Il. Nummulitic Limestone, Montfort, France.
. Nodosaria pyrula, D’ Orb.

. Vaginulina subulata, Lhr.

. Textilaria sagittula, Defr.

. Operculina ?

—_
—
Baie H OO DO

. Nummulitic Limestone, Couizac, France.

. Nummulina striata, D’ Ord.
planulata (Lam.).

ate Zeuglodon-beds, Alabama.

. Nodosaria.

. Vaginulina.

. Polymorphina.

Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Orb.
sagittula, Defr.

; Spiroplecta.

. Globigerina bulloides, D’ Orb.
. Planorbulina vulgaris, D’ Ord.
. Rotalia Beccari (Lin.).

10. Polystomella ?

11. Operculina ?

12. Haplophragmium.

CONAN POH.

V. Orbitoides Limestone, Java.

. Textilaria trilobata, hr.

. Bigenerina javanica (Hhr.).
Polystomella craticulata (/. & M.).
. Orbitoides javanicus, Lhr.
Mantelli ? (Morton).
Operculina.

. Amphistegina javanica, Hhr.
Alveolina,

. Spiroloculina (stoloniferous).
. Triloculina.

SOMDNADOAP wre

—

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 267

Pl. VI. Lower Silurian green sand of Petersburg. Fig. 1. a
(p. 173), Textilaria globulosa?, in a piece of brownish siliceo-
calcareous green sandrock (treated with acid), from under
the Orthoceratite Limestone, Narwa, and fig. 6, Gutiulina,
are both small Textilarie. Fig. c, Rotalia, from the same ;
a Rotaline or Endothyran form. Fig. 11. (p. 174), athin slice
of the same rock (green), showing minute shaped bodies ;
19, Solenolithis simplex; 20, Dermatolithis subtilis; 21, D.
granulatus: said to be brownish calcareous and microscopic,
belonging to the structure of Obolus, and abundantly scattered
throughout the green sandstone of Narwa.

Pl. VII. Yellow, red, and brown sand casts of the yellowish
Chalk of Alabama, equivalent to that of the Mississippi.
Figs. 1, 2 (p.175), Textilaria americana. Fig. 3, T. striata.
Figs. 4,5, Guttulina turrita a, B, are Verneutlina pygmea. Vig.
6, Spiroplecta americana? Fig. 7, Textilaria americana?
Fig. 8, 7. euryconus ?, is T. agglutinans. Fig. 9, T. globulosa?
Fig. 10 (p. 176), Dimorphina (Text.?) saxipara, is Text. glo-
bulosa. - Fig. 11, Phanerostomum hispidulum, and fig. 12, Ph.?,
are Globigerina cretacea. Fig. 13, Rotalia?, is a young lim-
bate Planorbulina. Fig. 14, Phanerostomum senarium ?, fig.
15, Ph. porulosum ?, and figs. 16, 17, Ph. dilatatum, are Glo-
bigerina cretacea. Figs. 11 & 12 have more chambers than
figs. 14-17, but belong to the same species.

Foraminifera from the Chalk, Alabama.

. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Ord.
globulosa, Hhr.

striata, Hhr.

americana, hr.

. Spiroplecta americana (?), Hhr.
. Verneuilina pygmea (Egger).
. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

. Planorbulina, young.

OO NI S? Or Oo NO

§ 14. “On organic siliceous sand, and Herr Ignatz Beissel’s
observations on such beds near Aix-la-Chapelle” (Monatsber.
1858, pp. 118-128). See also ‘Literary Gazette,’ 1857,
p- 1220, for a notice of Herr Beissel’s researches on the Glau-
coniferous sand-grains of Aix-la-Chapelle.

§ 15. I. “On the progress of knowledge of important micro-
scopic organic forms in the lowest Silurian clay-beds near St.
Petersburg” (Monatsber. 1858, pp. 295-311). See also ‘ Neues
Jahrb. fiir Min.’ &c., 1858, 5. Heft; Murchison’s ‘ Siluria,’

20*

268 . Messrs. Parker and Jones on

edit. 1867, p. 356; Bigsby’s‘ Thesaurus Siluricus,’ 1868,

p-6; and“ Monogr. Polymorph.,” Trans. Lin. Soc. vol. xxvii.
. 199.

II. “ On further important microscopic organic forms from

the oldest Silurian clay near St. Petersburg.” With a plate.

(Monatsber. 1858, pp. 328 &c., pl. i.)

A (p. 306). White marl-casts or marl-morpholites. 1.
Miliolina?, and 2. Textilarina ?

B. Green siliceous internal casts.

3. Vaginulina?, in pl. I. fig. 1.

4 (p. 307). Nodosaria ?, fig. 1.

5. Textilaria ? imitatrix, fig. 111.

6. Polymorphina abavia, fig. Iv.

iene avia, tie, Vv.

8 (p. 308). Guttulina silurica, fig. vi.

9. Rotalia paleotrias.) Figs. vit. & vit. No. 9 is omitted

10. R. paleeotetras. in the later list.

11 (p. 309). R.? paleeoceros. (“ Like R. Hemprichii,” ‘Mi-
krog,’ pl. xxxaiv. f..62.) Fig. 1x.

12. Dexiospira triarchea, fig. x.

13. D. hexarchea, fig. x1., a, d.

14 (p. 310). Aristerospira octarchea, fig. XII.

15. Nonionina? archetypus, fig. XII.

16. Spirocerium priscum. (‘‘ New genus near Spirobotrys,
but has not the two openings in the later chambers.’’)
Fig. XIv.

These figured glauconitic grains are magnified 56 diam.
Their relationship to Foraminifera is very uncertain. They
are not nearly so clear and definite as the usual inner moulds
of foraminiferal shells; but, like the green grains in our Upper
and Lower Greensand, some may be such casts, and many are
probably of concretionary or derivative origin. As Dr, Ehren-
berg at first stated, little can be said of them except that they
have Rotaline and Textilarian appearances. Some may have
belonged to Hozoon (as fig. 1.). Figs. Iv., v., vi. look Buli-
mine; VII., VIII, X. look Globigerine ; 1x. somewhat Nonio-
nine ; XI., XI., more or less Rotaline. They are all doubtful.

C (p. 311). “Calcareous shale casts from the Devonian
strata near St. Petersburg.”

17. Miliola (Holococeus) Panderi. (‘‘ Trochiliscus, Pander :
orbicular or oval; hollow ; compressed in the middle or
on the side; with a single opening ; furrowed longitu-
dinally with 18-20 sulci, which in some cases are
spiral.”) =Lagena?

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 269

APPENDIX.

Generic names of Foraminifera used by Ehrenberg, and their
probable equivalents.

Allotheca, 1854. G'lobigerina?

Alveolina, D’Orb. Alveolina; Fusulina.

Amphisorus, 1838. Orbitolites (old).

Aristeropora, 1859. Planorbulina?

Aristerospira, 1859. Planorbulina?

Aspidospira, 1844, Planulina.

Asterodiscus, 1838. =?

Bigenerina, D’ Orb. Polymorphina.

Biloculina, D’ Orb. Adesoline Quinqueloculina. Biloculina?

Borelis, Mtft. Alveolina; Fusulina; Endothyra.

Calearina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina?

Cenchridium, 1843? Entosolenian Lagena.

Ceratospirulina, 1859. Dimorphous Miliola?; Vertebralina?

Cimelidium, 1859. Valvulina?

Clidostomum. Textilarian [Reuss].

Colpopleura, 1844. Planorbulina.

Coscinospira, 1838. Peneroplis and Lituola.

Cristellaria, Lamk. Cristellaria; Planulina; Haplophrag-
mium.

Cyclosiphon, 1856. Orbitordes.

Dentalina, D’ Orb. Dentalina.

Dexiospira, 1859. _Indeterminable.

Dimorphina, D’Orb. Dimorphine Virgulina.

Encorycium, 1859. Nodosaria.

Frondicularia, Defr. Nodosaria; Glandulina.

Geoponus, 1838. Polystomella; Planorbulina.

Globigerina, D’ Orb. — Globigerina.

Grammobotrys, 1854. Virgulina; Spheroidina.

Grammostomum, 1839. Textilaria; Vulvulina; Bolivina ;
Virgulina; Polymorphina.

Guttulina, D’Orb. Verneuilina; Textilaria.

Heterohelix (1843) changed to Spiroplecta (1844).

Heterostegina, D’ Orb. Amphistegina.

Heterostomum, 1854. Textilaria; Virgulina.

Holococeus, 1859. Lagena?

Lenticulina, Lamk. Planorbulina; Pulvinulina.

Loxostomum, 1854. Heterostomella; Vulvulina; Polymor-
phina.

Megathyra, 1854. Mentioned in ‘Mikrogeol.’ p. 13, without
figure or description.

Melonia, Blainv. Fusulina; Alveolina.

270 On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.

Mesopora, 1854. Lituola (Haplophragmium) ; Operculina.

Miliola, Lamk. Lagena; Orbulina.

Monetulites, 1856. Nummulina.

Nodosaria, Lamk. Nodosaria; Bigenerina.

Nonionina, D’Orb. Nonionina; Rotalia?; Planorbulina? ;
Cristellaria?; Amphistegina.

Omphalophacus, 1838. Pulvinulina.

Oncobotrys, 1856. Polymorphina?

Ovulina. Lagena.

Phanerostomum, 1854. Globigerina.

Physomphalus, 1856. Operculina.

Planularia, Defr. Planularia.

Planulina, D’Orb. Planorbulina, including Planulina and
Truncatulina; Globigerina; Rotalia; Pulvinulina; Nonio-
nina?; Operculina; Cristellaria.

Platycecus, 1854. Pulvinulina?

Pleurites, 1854. Spheroidina?; Virgulina; Polymorphina?

Pleurostomum. ‘Textilarian [euss].

Pleurotrema, 1838. Calcarina?

Polymorphina, D’Orb. Polymorphina; Bolivina; Virgulina;
Teatilaria.

Polystomatium, 1856. Polystomella.

Proroporus, 1844. Polymorphina; Bolivina; Textilaria.

Prorospira, 1844. Planorbulina.

Ptygostomum, 1854. Planorbulina; Globigerina.

Pylodexia, 1859. Globigerina.

Pyrulina, D’ Orb. Pyrulina (Polymorphina).

(Quinqueloculina, D’ Orb. Quinqueloculina.

Rhynchoplecta. ‘T'extilarian [ Reuss].

Rhynchopleura, 1856. ‘Textilarian ?

Rhynchospira. Globigerine [Reuss].

Robulina, D’ Orb. Cristellaria.

Rosalina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina; Globigerina.

Rotalia, Lamk. Globigerina; Planorbulina and Planulina ;
Pulvinulina?; Cristellaria; Operculina?

Rotalina, D’ Orb. Pulvinulina.

Sagrina, D’ Orb. Heterostomella.

Selenostomum, 1859. Rotaline ?

Siderospira. Calcarina | Reuss}.

Soldania, D’Orb. Cristellaria.

Sorites, 1838. Orbitolites.

Spheroidina, D’Orb. Spherotdina; Virgulina.

Spirillina, 1841. Spirillina; Cornuspira?

Spirobotrys, 1844. Planorbulina ?

Spirocerium, 1859. Indeterminable.

Spiroloculina, D’ Orb. Spiroloculina; adelosine Quinqueloculina.

On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. 271

Spiroplecta, 1844 (olim Heterohelix). Spiroplecta.
Spiropleurites, 1854. Pulvinulina.

Strophoconus, 1844. Bolivina; Virgulina.
Synspira, 1854. Synspira (?).

Tetrataxis, 1854. Tetrataxis (Valvulina).
Textilaria, Defr. Textilaria; Bolivina.
Triloculina, D’ Orb. Miliola?

Uvigerina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina ?

Vaginulina, D’Orb. Vaginulina.

XL.— On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders.
By Freperick Potiock, Esq.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,

In the number of your Magazine for June 1865 there
is an article by me on the Hpeira Aurelia spider.

I had some doubts, at the time I wrote it, upon one fact
therein stated; and having had the opportunity of making
further observations, in the season just passed, in Madeira, I
find that I was mistaken in what I originally supposed to
occur.

As it is an important point in arachnology, and as it differs
from all Mr. Blackwall’s observations, [ should like to be able
to contradict my former statement in the same publication in
which it was made, and to add a few remarks on the economy
of two other sorts of Madeiran spiders, which, if you will allow
me, I will now proceed to do.

Epeira Aurelia, now called Nephila Aurelia.

In the article above alluded to I said that the spider changes
its skin for the last time about a week after making its fifth
cocoon ; but from more recent observations I have come to the
conclusion, that there is no change of skin at all, after the
spider becomes adult. This reduces the number of changes
of integument to nine, in the female, viz. one in the cocoon
and eight after leaving it. The male, on the other hand, has
only four changes of integument after leaving the cocoon,

Unlike most spiders of the Nephila (Kpeira) kind, N. Aurelia
does not make for itself any chamber to retire to when wishing
to escape observation, but remains constantly in the centre of
its web, and is therefore very easily watched. I have men-
tioned (in the previous article on this subject) that in the
construction of this web there is always a space left between
the adhesive spiral line, which extends from the circumference

272 Mr. Frederick Pollock on the

to tolerably near the centre, and the inadhesive centre part ;
and I have frequently seen the spider scramble through this
opening, when frightened or anxious to get hurriedly from one
surface of the web to the other. Various opinions and doubts
have been advanced by arachnologists, upon the specific pur-
pose which this open space is meant to subserve; but in this
case the object appears plain enough—namely, to give a short
cut, near the centre, between the opposite surfaces of the web.

But there is another reason which, I think, may account for
spiders of the geometrical kind leaving the space just alluded
to; and I will endeavour to explain it.

When any comparatively large insect is caught in their
webs and carried away to be eaten, the spider generally bites
away the lines surrounding the insect (in order to get it free) ;
and thus a rent or hole must, of necessity, be made where the
insect became entangled.

Now the strength of these webs depends mainly upon the
radial lines, which are, of course, much closer together near
the centre than near the circumference.

If a fly is caught near the latter, perhaps no radial line, or
only one, need be broken, to get the creature away ; whereas if
it were caught very near the centre, two or three, at least, of the
radial lines might have to be cut, and the web would be
greatly weakened thereby. This may be the reason why the
spiral adhesive line is not carried nearer to the centre.

The central space, which is devoid of adhesive lines, and in
which it is undesirable that any thing should be caught, is
much larger than is requisite for a resting-place for the spider.
The real resting-place of inadhesive lines does not occupy the
whole of this space ; and hence the void; which there would be
no use in filling up, apparently.

I may here remark that, owing to the adhesive property of
the spiral lines so soon disappearmg in Madeira, NV. Aurelia
makes, on an average, about two webs in every three days.

Lycosa Blackwalliz.

This spider is described by Mr. J. Y. Johnson in the
August and November Nos. of the ‘Annals’ for 1863. On
the 6th of January, 1870, I dug out of a hole (of its own
making, probably), in a soft sloping: bank of earth, at an ele-
vation above the sea of about 2000 feet, in Madeira, a half-
grown female of L. Blackwallii; and none were ever found by
me at a lower elevation, though I repeatedly searched for them
in every direction. On the 9th of March it changed its skin ;
and in April I brought it to England, where it changed again

Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. 273

on the 25th of that month, and again on the 30th of July, at
which latter date it became adult.

It may here be seen that sixty-two days elapsed between
the time of capture and the ensuing change; and how many
days should be added to this, for the entire number between the
two consecutive changes, it is impossible to determine. Only
forty-seven days elapsed before another change took place, and
ninety-six before the last one occurred. Now, during the time
of the short interval (forty-seven days), the spider had less to
eat than at any other period whilst in my possession (for it
was shut up in a box in the hold of the ship during the voyage) ;
and this diminution of food ought to have prolonged, I think,
instead of shortening the time; and as all other circumstances
during its captivity remained much about the same, the only
way in which I can account for the shorter period, is from
fright occasioned by the sea voyages, the transhipment at
Lisbon, and the vibration on the railway and cab journeys.
After it became adult, nothing particular occurred for a year
and seven days, or till the 6th of August, 1871, when the
spider made a cocoon, scantily supplied with yellow eggs,
agglutinated together. This cocoon it attached to its abdomen,
which it kept constantly elevated from the ground. It like-
wise encircled the cocoon with its fourth pair of legs, thus ten-
derly preventing its coming into contact with any thing. As
this female had been in solitary confinement ever since it was
half-grown, the eggs were not fecundated, I imagine.

. On the 28th of September the creature dropped the cocoon
from the abdomen ; and this was just about the time that the
young ones should have made their appearance, if the eggs had
been good.

On the 15thof October I landed the spider again in Madeira ;
but, unfortunately, forgetting the mischief that ants are always
ready to do there, I made no provision for protecting the crea-
ture from them, and the next morning I found that they had
killed the spider and were busy in walking off with the eggs.

Lycosa ingens (Blackw.).

Having procured from the Deserta Grande some fine spe-
cimens of this large and handsome spider, in the early part of
this year, and having provided suitable cages, with glass lids,
for them, I was anxious to ascertain how large an animal the
largest spider would take; and for this purpose I obtained
some lizards about 3 inches long, including the tail. Three
of these lizards were killed and devoured by one spider during
the time I kept it.

274 Mr. A. G. Butler on

They were eaten, bones, and head, and claws and all, the
only remnant of the feast being a small ball about + of an
inch in diameter, which was cast aside at the bottom of the
cage.

The islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and Deserta Grande
all lie within an area about fifty miles across. ‘They have
each its own peculiar large Lycosa, no two being alike; and
it is a very remarkable fact that these Lycose vary in size in-
versely with the magnitude of the island in which they are
found,—Madeira, the largest island, having the smallest
Lycosa, and Deserta Grande, the smallest island, having by
far the largest spider.

The mode of defence of all these varieties of Lycose is pre-
cisely the same. They elevate the thorax, raise the first pair
of legs high up, and, opening wide asunder their falces, strike
at and seize any object, such as the end of a pencil, which is
presented to them, in a most formidable manner.

Circumstances unfortunately prevented my bringing this
splendid spider away with me from Madeira, or I should have
tried to watch and record the remainder of its existence.

Yours truly,
FREDERICK POLLOCK.

Thurlow, Clapham, 8, W.
Sept. 12, 1872.

XLI.—Remarks on Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remi-

cauda. By A. G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

In the last Number of the ‘ Annals’ C. Ritsema, of Leyden,
accuses me of renaming an old and well-known species of
moth, Crinodes Sommeri, with the new generic and specific
names of Tarsolepis remicauda.

C. Sommer? is figured by Hiibner in the second volume of
his ‘Sammlung,’ pl. 197; on pl. 196 both sexes of another
species (C. Besckit), of which we possess a series in the British
Museum, are correctly figured. The latter is therefore the type
of the genus Crino, subsequently altered to Crinodes, and is
evidently so considered in Mr. Walker’s catalogue.

Hiibner states his figure to be a representation of a male
insect, as we should naturally conclude from the fact of its
possessing the male character of a well-developed anal tuft of
radiating scales. My insect is also a male, and differs from
C. Sommeri, as figured by Hiibner, in the following generic
and specific ‘characters :—

Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda.

275

Generic differences.

Crinodes Sommeri, Hiibner.

1. Male antennz feebly pectina-
ted, as‘in the other species of Cri-
nodes.

2. Palpi long, slender, projecting
considerably beyond the head.

3. No abdominal tufts.

4, Body slender; abdomen ap-
parently spinous, as in Checupa
(Hadenide), P. Z. S. 1867, pl. vi.
fig. 5.

Tarsolepis remicauda, Butler.

1. Male antenne bearing about
forty-three well-developed pectina-
tions.

2. Palpi short, robust, scarcely
projecting beyond the head.

3. Two long tufts of carmine
hairs at base of abdomen, beneath
wings.

4, Body very robust, almost
clumsy ; abdomen not spinous.

Specific differences.

1. Pale costal band of front wings
restricted to centre of costa.

2. Pale basal patches represented
only by usual elongation of basal
scales.

5. Inner margin of front wings
waved as in the allied C. fulguri-
fera.

4, Hind wings comparatively
short and rounded, with well-
defined central black spot and three
distinct continuous marginal lines.

5. Underside of wings dark, all
the markings sharply defined.

6. Transverse band of front wings
strongly angulated, so as almost to
touch discoidal cell.

7. Fringe of all the wings long.

1. Pale costal band continuous
from base to apex.

2. Two distinct
patches.

pale basal

5. Inner margin of front wings
slightly convex, not waved.

4, Hind wings comparatively
long and ovate, with ill-defined cen-
tral spot; central marginal line
converted into spots, none of the
lines continued round margin.

5. Underside of wings pale, all
the markings ill-defined.

6. Transverse band of front wings
scarcely waved, nearly parallel to
outer margin.

7. Fringe of all the wings short.

The conclusion that I arrive at from the above comparison
is that my insect is not identical either generically or specifically
with Hiibner’s. It certainly is not a Crinodes ; for it does not
agree generically with the type, C. Besckii; and inasmuch as
all the members of the genus Crinodes, so far as we know them
are from the New World, it is not at all improbable that the
example from Rio Janeiro in Mr. Fry’s collection may be the
true OC. Sommer?z, and the Javan species a totally different
insect, belonging to an allied genus, and on that account some-
what similar to it in pattern and coloration.

I therefore feel myself fully justified in retaining the
generic and specific names Tarsolepis remicauda for Mr.
Cornthwaite’s insect ; and I should recommend that this name
be also attached to the Javan specimens examined by Herr
Ritsema. '

276 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

XLU.—Preliminary Report on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.
By H. Atteyne Nicnorson, M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E.,
Professor of Natural History in University College, Toronto.

In consequence of the interesting discoveries made in the
dredgings carried on in Lake Superior in the summer of 1871
in the U.S. steamer ‘Search’ (Reports of the Sec. of War,
U.S. vol. i1.), I was induced to apply to the government of the
Province of Ontario for a grant to be expended in prosecuting
a similar series of dredgings in Lake Ontario, a lake which
had hitherto never been explored by the dredge. With a
praiseworthy appreciation of the value of such scientific re-
searches, the necessary assistance was generously granted to
me by the Provincial Government; and the results obtained
are of a very satisfactory character. The short time, however,
which has elapsed since the dredging was completed has not
permitted more than the most hasty examination of the mate-
rials collected. In the following preliminary report, therefore,
I shall merely state the general results which were obtained,
reserving for a future occasion a detailed account of the animals
which were collected.

The dredgings were all carried on in the later part of June
and the early part of July, and were made partly from the
yacht ‘Ina’ and partly from the steamer ‘ Bouquet.’ They
were entirely carried on by hand; and the dredges employed
were such as are ordinarily used in sea-dredging. In dredging
in deep water, however, a bag of embroidery canvas was
attached outside the ordinary net—an addition rendered neces-
sary by the extremely fine nature of the mud at great depths.
Even with this precaution the dredge not unfrequently came
up nearly or quite empty from great depths, its contents having
been completely washed out. In deep water, also, a fifty-six-
pound weight was attached to the rope, at a distance of about
12 feet above the dredge; and the same was necessary in
shallow water where the weeds were.very thick, in order to
secure that the dredge should reach the actual bottom.

The dredgings were all carried on within a radius of ten
miles from Toronto; and the following will show the general
nature of the bottom at different depths, and the chief loca-
lities at which the dredgings were prosecuted.

In Toronto Bay itself numerous hauls were made, both from
the yacht and the steamer, and the bottom proved very varied,
though the depth is almost constantly from 2 to 3 fathoms.
The greater portion of the bay, comprising the central part
of its area, has a bottom which appears to consist uniformly
of a tenacious, exceedingly fine, clayey mud, the temperature

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 277

of which is comparatively low. All the shells in this clay
are dead, but it contains numerous small Annelides of the
genus Senuris, along with many larve of a Dipterous insect
allied to Chironomus or Corethra, the latter being very con-
spicuous from their brilliant red colour. The muddy bottom
seems to be wholly destitute of weeds, and does not appear to
encroach upon depths of less than 2 fathoms.

Towards the edges of the bay, where the depth diminishes
to one and a half fathom or less, the bottom consists of sand,
covered over considerable areas by a dense growth of weeds
of different kinds. The chief varieties of bottom in this
shallow zone are these:—1. Pure siliceous sand with dead
shells, almost destitute of life. 2. Sandy mud with a dense
growth of Charas, containing numerous Gammart, small
leeches, larvee of Chironomus and Ephemerids, with shells of
Unio, Cyclas, Paludina, Planorbis, Valvata, Melania, Pisi-
dium, and Physa. 3. Sandy mud, sometimes with peaty
layers, supporting a dense vegetation of Anacharis canadensis
and Charas. ‘The life in these portions of the bay consisted
of much the same animals as in the preceding, except that the
Gammarti were absent, unless in the occasional patches of
Charas brought up by the dredge. In some places, in from
one to one and a half fathom of water, the sand was crowded
with Uniones, the dredge coming up completely packed with
diving and dead shells. This was especially the case at several
points under the lee of the “island,” a long, flat, insulated
strip of land which forms the southern boundary of the bay,
running parallel with the shore on which Toronto is built, at
a distance of about a mile and three quarters from it.

Another series of dredgings was carried on from a point in
the open lake, about eight miles to the south of Toronto, on a
line extending to the Toronto rolling-mills, the depth varying
from 40 fathoms at the southern end of the line to 3 fa-
thoms at its northern extremity. The deep dredgings along
this line were only partially successful, the dredge bringing
up nothing but good-sized pebbles, all the finer materials
having been washed out before it reached the surface. In
about 15 fathoms the bottom was found to consist of a tena-
cious blue clay, distinctly laminated, and containing numerous
broken-up stems of plants, along with small pebbles. No
traces of life could be detected beyond a few minute Anne-
lides belonging to the genus Senuris. Another haul in 10
fathoms brought up the dredge full of sand and pebbles with
no traces of life; and another in 8 fathoms showed a bottom
of clear sand with dead shells of Cyclas and Pisidium, but
devoid of all vestiges of animal or vegetable life.

278 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

Another series of dredgings was taken along a line extend-
ing in a south-west direction, from Toronto Point to a point
about five miles out in the lake, the depths varying from 8
to 15 fathoms. In this case the bottom was found uni-
formly to consist of an exceedingly fine, bluish-grey, clayey
mud, with numerous patches of a small bushy Alga (a species
of Cladophora). 'The mud contained very numerous minute
Annelides of the genus Senuris, along with dead shells of
Cyclas, Pisidium, and Planorbis; and the bunches of Clado-
phora yielded a large number of little Ostracode Crustaceans,
and a few beautiful little Amphipods which are as yet unde-
termined.

Another series of dredgings was carried on still further to
the south-west of the ground examined, in the series just men-
tioned, at a distance of about eight miles from the shore. The
depth here varies from 30 to 45 or 50 fathoms ; and the bottom
was found to consist uniformly of a fine greyish mud, some-
times highly argillaceous, sometimes more or less arenaceous,
with many small pebbles disseminated through it, and con-
taining a few dead shells of Planorbis and Pisidium, and
much broken-down vegetable débris. very haul also brought
up numerous specimens of a beautiful flesh-coloured Amphi-
pod and a few minute Annelides; but no other traces of life
were obtained. The Amphipods are referable to Pontoporeta,
being apparently undistinguishable from P. affinis of the Swe
dish lakes; and I shall speak of them at greater length imme-
diately.

Another series of dredgings were taken in Humber Bay,
about four miles to the west of Toronto. Here the bottom,
except close to the shore, consisted of a tenacious bluish-grey
clay, sometimes with reddish patches in it. Vegetable fife was
very scanty ; and animal life consisted entirely of many minute
Annelides.

Lastly, an examination was made, partly with the dredge
and partly by means of a hand-net, of the shallow water in
the immediate neighbourhood of the “ island”’ and of the ex-
tensive ponds which communicate with the lake. The bottom
here consisted, for the most part, of a black mud composed
almost entirely of decayed vegetable matter, and supporting a
dense growth of Charas, Vallisneria, Anacharis, Pontederia,
Nymphea,and Nuphar. Animal life was naturally extremely
abundant, comprising numerous examples of Limnea, Physa,
Planorbis, Paludina, Cyclas, Pisidium, and Anodon, along
with two species of Gammarus and many small Ostracode
Crustaceans, a few leeches (Clepsine), very many large scarlet
’ water-mites, numerous aquatic insects (Nepa, Gyrinus, Dy-

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 279

ticus, and larvee of Chironomus, Libellula, &c.), and a large
number of young fishes (Pimelodus, Perca, &c.). Numerous
Terrapins were also observed, and a single specimen of Meno-
branchus ; but the latter unfortunately was not secured.

In the following list are indicated the chief forms of animal
life which were obtained in these dredgings. As before re-
marked, time has in most cases not permitted of any specific
determinations being made, and the species will be described
at length in a subsequent notice. ‘The microscopic species
also have, in the meanwhile, been completely neglected.

ANNELIDA.
1. Nephelis, sp.
A small leech, nearly an inch in length when at rest, with
an oblique posterior sucker, and of a liver-brown colour in life.

Nearly allied to, if not identical with, N. lateralis, Say.
Rare in 3 fathoms, Toronto Bay.

2. Nephelis, sp.

An exceedingly remarkable form, apparently undescribed.
The body is much flattened, and the width is nearly as great
as the length when the animal is at rest. Length 4 inch in
extension, } inch or less in contraction. Colour sometimes
dark greenish brown or nearly black, sometimes light brown,
with innumerable black points and numerous yellow spots,
which are especially abundant at the margins. A double black
dorsal line. ‘he habits of this little leech are very remarkable.
The adult leech usually places itself with its entire ventral
surface closely appressed to some foreign body, such as a stone
or dead shell, to which it adheres like a limpet or small Chiton.
When forcibly detached or irritated it rolls up like a hedgehog
or like the Myriopods of the genus Glomeris. The objects
served by these peculiar habits become obvious when it is seen
that almost every individual carries attached to the ventral
surface of the body a large number (generally from twenty to
thirty) of young leeches. The young are attached to the ven-
tral surface of the parent posteriorly in a close cluster, which
is surrounded on all sides by a vacant space; they adhere to
the adult by their posterior suckers, which are separated from
the body by a very distinct constriction. The young leeches
are about =; of an inch in length, in colour light yellow or
reddish, and semitransparent. ‘The stomach is very conspi-
cuous, and fills the greater part of the body ; but no other in-
ternal organs could be detected. This extraordinary habit of
carrying the young has been noticed by Verrill in a species of

280 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

Clepsine; but, so far as I am aware, attention has not been
otherwise drawn to it (American Journ. Science and Arts,
vol. iii. Feb. 1872). I-have also observed it in a species of
Clepsine from Lake Ontario, and shall describe it more fully
upon a future occasion.

Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms. ;

3. Clepsine, sp.

A small leech, about 7 inch in length in extension. The
body flattened, with broad, transparent margins exhibiting
numerous lateral papille. Back and belly, with exception of
the transparent borders above alluded to, of a dirty greenish
brown. ‘The anterior end of the body is attenuated; the pos-
terior extremity wide and flattened out ; and when irritated, it
has the habit of rolling up into a ball, This species, also,
carries its young attached to the posterior portion of its ventral
surface, in a small rounded bunch.

Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

4, Clepsine (?).

A small undetermined leech, of a worm-like shape and a
red colour. Length when contracted about } inch, in exten-
sion about 1 inch. Instead of remaining quietly attached
to some foreign body, like the preceding species, this leech
swims actively through the water by a serpentine bending
of the body.

Rare in 3 fathoms.

5. Senuris, sp.

A large Oligochetous Annelide, about 2 inches in length,
of a red colour, with an iridescent blue intestinal streak.

A single individual was obtained in 3 fathoms, on a sandy
bottom.

6. Senuris or Chirodrillus, sp.

A small and very slender form, varying in length from
2 inch up to 1 inch, and of a red colour. ‘These minute
Annelides occurred in extraordinary numbers at all depths of
the lake from 3 up to 45 fathoms; but they were much more
abundant at the smaller than at the greater depths. They
were uniformly found wherever the bottom consisted of a fine
tenacious clayey mud.

CRUSTACEA.

7. Gammarus, sp.

A small freshwater shrimp, varying in length from } to 4
inch, and of a greenish-brown colour during life, with a dark

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 281

green intestinal tract. The antenne and antennules are about
half the length of the body, and nearly equal. Numerous
examples of this pretty little species occurred amongst Charas
and other water-weeds, in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

8. Gammarus, sp.

A minute form, not uncommon in shallow water in the

ponds at the “island.”
9. Crangonyzx (?), sp.
A small Amphipod, as yet unexamined, which may perhaps
iT OME ? Pa Deut

belong to this genus.

Common in from 10 to 15 fathoms, amongst branches of
Cladophora, upon a muddy bottom.

10. Cypris (?), sp.
A small Ostracode Crustacean, as yet undetermined, which

occurred plentifully, along with the preceding, amongst Clado-
phora at depths of from 10 to 15 fathoms.

11. Pontoporeca affinis (Lindstrém).

Small Amphipods, varying in length from ;4 up to }

inch, of nearly uniform flesh-colour. They .are referable to
the genus Pontoporeta; and though they have not yet been
satisfactorily examined, I have little doubt as to their being
identical with the Pontoporeta affints of the Swedish lakes and
of Lake Superior.

They occur in great plenty in from 30 to 45 fathoms; but
none were found in depths less than this, though they are
found in Lake Superior in all dredgings, from the shallowest
to the deepest. They were uniformly found inhabiting a
muddy bottom; and they died very shortly after they were
brought to the surface.

ARACHNIDA.

12. Limnochares, sp.
A fine species of this genus was extremely abundant in
i C g ae 2
shallow water and in the ponds at the “ island.
13. Hydrachna, sp.
A small water-mite of this genus occurred abundantly in

Toronto Bay in from 1 to 2 fathoms.
INSECTA.
14. Chironomus or Corethra, sp.

The larvee of a species of Dipteron belonging to one of the
Ann, & Mag. N, Hist, Ser. 4. Vol. x,

282 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

above genera occurred in great abundance in all the dredgings
in which a muddy bottom was found in depths of from 2
to 20 fathoms, but more abundantly im the smaller depths.
The colour varied in different examples from deep blood-red
to pink or greenish ; and their semitransparency rendered them
very beautiful under the microscope.

15. Ephemeride.

Larvee of Ephemerids were found rarely in shallow water
to a depth of 2 fathoms. )

MOoLuusca.

16. Planorbis trivolvis, Say.

Very common in shallow water, but not extending beyond
a depth of 3 fathoms.

17. Planorbis parvus, Say.

Very common in shallow water, but not extending beyond
a depth of 1 fathom.

18. Valvata tricarinata (?).

A small species of Valvata, apparently referable to the above,
occurred abundantly in from 2 to 3 fathoms, ranging, though
in much diminished numbers, into depths of from 5 to 8
fathoms.

19. Paludina, sp.

A large form, nearly allied to P. decisa, Say (perhaps P.
impura). ‘This species occurred in a living state and in all
stages of growth in from 2 to 3 fathoms on a sandy bottom,

20. Paludina (Amnicola), sp.

This is a very minute form which occurred in great plenty,
crawling over the stems of Chara or Anacharis in from 1 to
3 fathoms.

21. Limnea jugularis, Say (=L. stagnalis ?).
A large species, occurring in great plenty in shallow water
at Toronto Island. It is very nearly allied to L. stagnalis, but
it may perhaps be distinct.

22. Limnea, sp.

A smaller and more elongated form, nearly allied to L.
columella, Say. .
Rare in from 1 to 2 fathoms.

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 288

23. Physa heterostropha, Say.
Very common in shallow water at the “ island.”

24. Physa, sp.
A smaller form, rare in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

25. Melania, sp.
A form nearly allied to, if not identical with, the WZ. depygis
of Say (=. niagarensis, Lea?).
Common in from 2 to 8 fathoms in Toronto Bay.
26. Cyclas similis, Say.
Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms.
27. Pisidium abditum, Haldeman.
Common in from 2 to 5 fathoms.

28. Unio crassidens, Lam.

Common, both in the living and dead state, in from 1 to 3
fathoms in Toronto Bay.

29. Unio, sp.
A large ventricose form, common at the same depths and m
the same locality as the preceding.

VERTEBRATA.

30. Pimelodus catus (=P. atrarius).
_ The young of this species, not more than 1 inch to 14 inch
in length, occurred abundantly in the pools in the vicinity of
the “island.”
31. Pomotis vulgaris.
The young of the sunfish or northern Pomotis of Richardson
occurred not uncommonly in shallow water at the “ island.”

32. Perca flavescens, Cuv.

The American yellow perch.
Common throughout Toronto Bay.

33. Leuciscus.

Two individuals of a small species of this genus were brought
up by the dredge in Toronto Bay from a depth of about 2
fathoms.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

In a mere preliminary report there are but a few general

considerations which require notice. Upon the whole the
21*

284 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

results obtained in these dredgings in Lake Ontario agree
very fairly with those obtained in take Superior ; and there 3 18
a general conformity in the phenomena observed. The fauna
of Lake Superior, however, so far as deep water is concerned,
is decidedly richer than that of Lake Ontario; whilst some
of the more remarkable forms discovered in the former appear
to be altogether absent in the latter. This is especially notice-
able as regards the singular Stomapod Crustacean Mysis re-
licta, which was found in great plenty in Lake Superior at all
depths up to 148 fathoms, but which was not detected at all
in Lake Ontario.

As might have been expected upon & prior? grounds, the
fauna of Lake Ontario is not extensive, though some forms
occur in great profusion. The shallow-water fauna is very
rich in individuals, and the number of species is quite con-
siderable for fresh water. No doubt, also, the list might be
much increased bya careful examination and bya more extended
investigation than it was in my power to carry out. Beyond
8 or 10 fathoms the fauna becomes very scanty ; and when we
reach depths of 20 fathoms and upwards, the list becomes
reduced to some small Annelides and Amphipod Crustaceans.
The nature of the bottom, also, at great depths is exceedingly
unfavourable to animal life , consisting almost everywhere of a
fine clayey mud, the temperature of which is very low.

The most interesting forms of life discovered were the An-
nelides and Crustaceans. ‘The Annelides are very abundant
and varied, the two orders of the [irudinea and Oligocheta
being both: ‘represented, and the former presenting some species
of peculiar interest. Of the Crustacea the most “interesting 18
the littke Amphipod which occurs in such numbers in depths
of from 80 to 45 fathoms, and which appears to be identical
with the Pontoporeia affinis of the Swedish lakes. This
species and the Stomapod Mys¢s relicta, Lovén, are found in
Lakes Wetter and Wener in Sweden; and it is well known
that their occurrence in this locality, along with other species
of marine genera, led to the belief that these lakes had been
formerly part of the sea, from which they had been cut off by
geological changes. On this theory these Crustaceans are the

survivors of the original marine fauna of the area, which had
been able to bear up under the gradual changes by which the
formerly existing sea was converted into fresh water. The
occurrence, therefore, of these same forms of Pontoporeta and
Mysis in Lake Superior and of the former of them in Lake
Ontario is an extremely interesting fact, whether Lovén’s
theory is to be accepted or not. le may he mentioned also

that there are no insuperable geological difficulties which

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 285

would prevent the application of this theory to the great lakes
of North America. It is a singular fact, however, that whilst
both these Crustaceans have been discovered in Lake Superior
and also in Lake Michigan, only one of them has been found
in Lake Ontario, the Mysts seeming to be wholly wanting.

XLUTT.— On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Loven*.
[Plate XIV. ]

BESIDES the well-known external organs, ocelli, spines, pedi-
cellariz, the clavule of the fasciole, tentacles, and branchie, the
recent Kchinoidea possess another kind of organs which have
hitherto been overlooked, although they occur so generally
that we seek them in vain only in Cidaris. These are very
small, button-like bodies, spheroidal, ellipsoidal, or somewhat
irregular balls, 0°11—0°375 millim. in their greatest diameter,
furnished with a short stalk, which is movably attached to a
small, slightly projecting tubercle. They may not unsuitably
be named sphwridia. 'They are hyaline, shining, hard, solid,
and clothed with connective tissue rich in pigment, with epi-
thelium and a ciliated cuticle. Their pedicel has the reticu-
lated texture typical of the Echinoidea, which spreads more or
less distinctly and continuously around its starting-point. In
the direction of the axis of the ball we not unfrequently see
a tube which opens in its upper pole, and is either simple or
branched in a more or less regular manner, A great many of
the balls have on their surface sinall elevations, tubercles, or
spines—and many also depressions, which are sometimes shal-
low, but sometimes sink deeply in, towards the axis, in a
conical form. But the greater part of the mass of the ball is
formed of very numerous and very thin concentric layers ; and
there are some which do not present any thing but these.
Their solid contents are dissolved by a weak acid, so that only
the epithelium remains.

The spheridia belong exclusively to the ambulacra (radii) ;
and in all the genera which possess them they are never
wanting on the peristomial plates, but differ in number and
distribution in a direction from the mouth. They always
occupy a definite position. In the Spatangide they stand,
generally uncovered, one, two, or more in a little group, by
the base of the tentacular cirri of the buccal area, near the

* Translated by W. 5S. Dallas, F.L.S., from a separate copy communi-

cated by the author, from the ‘(fversigt af Kongl, Vetexskaps-Akad,
Forhandlingar,’ 1871, no. 7, 1

286 Prof. §. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

side turned towards the median suture of the ambulacra, de-
creasing thence the further from the mouth, especially on the
bivium,—not unfrequently four, three, or two upon each of the
first plates, only one upon each of the immediately following
ordinary plates, in Plagionotus, brissus, Schizaster, and Mera
(Gualteria?), more numerous on the bivium, in depressions, or
like rows of beads in narrow, elongated, well-defined furrows ;
but in Lovenia the segregated spheeridia are concealed under
domes, which have a small, narrow, transverse opening at
their apex.

A covering of this kind, which is an exception among the
Spantangide, is the rule in the Cassidulide and Clypeastride.
Ethyncholampas caribearum (Lamk.), Pygorrhynchus pacificus
(Agass.), and many others have on every plate of the first five
pairs in each ambulacrum a spheridium, which is gradually
overgrown by the outer layer of the shell-substance, which
finally leaves only a fine fissure open.

The Clypeastride exhibit two types. Hchinarachnius, Den-
draster, Lobophora, Mellita, Encope, Rotula, Laganum, Scaph-
echinus, and Hchinocyamus have in each radius only a single
spheridium in common for both its peristomial plates, and
most frequently, even in very young individuals, concealed in
a crypt in the mass of the shell. Near the peristomial margin,
which in the middle has a part somewhat projecting over the
two large pores of the buccal tentacles, we see, behind this, a
small, more or less distinctly halved elevation. On breaking
this up we find a spheridium with its pedicel attached to the
inner surface of a rounded cavity towards the mouth, which
is connected with the exterior either only by a fine canal, or,
m Rotula, by means of a tolerably wide opening, which is in
part covered by points projecting from its margin. In EHchin-
arachnius this cavity 1s divided into two halves by a very
thin, vertical membrane, which seems to issue from the edges
of the plate united in the suture. It is otherwise with Cly-
peaster and Arachnoides; these have two spheridia in each
ambulacrum, one in each of its two peristomial plates. In
both, the margins are destitute of the projecting part, and the
two pores of the large tentacles are exposed, not, as in the
preceding, in a surface falling abruptly towards the mouth,
but im a more level and open surface which nowhere exhibits
a sign of the presence of the spheridium. In Clypeaster we
can only perceive that, at adistance from the tentacular pores
twice that of the latter from the margin, the large radial tu-
bercles have between them a greater space than elsewhere, but
not differing in the disposition of the small tubercles and pores.
If we break through the outermost layer of the shell, we find

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea. 287

in both plates a small cavity, and in this a spheeridium, placed
as in the preceding. In the broad, perfectly smooth furrow
which in Arachnoides occupies the middle of each ambula-
crum, nothing indicates the position of the spheeridia; but we
find them concealed in the shell at the same distance from the
pores as in Clypeaster.

Echinoneus has, near the tentacular pores on the first and
second plates, segregated globular sphzeridia, which are seated
uncovered in slight depressions. In this, as in much else, it
‘resembles the regular Kchinoidea.

In most of the latter the spheeridia are numerous and distri-
buted alternately on both rows of plates of the ambulacra.
Echinus Flemingi, E. esculentus, Toxopneustes drébachensis,
Loxechinus albus, Tripneustes ventricosus, Echinometra lu-
cunter, and Amblypneustes ovum have their usually ellipsoidal
spheridia arranged near the sutures, with the long axes nearly
parallel to the surface of the test. In Temnopleurus, Sal-
macis, and Mespilia their form is spheroidal, and they stand
in the apertures of the deep cavities in the angles of the plates.
In all these Echinide the row of spheridia is separated on
both sides from the tentacular pores by the series of large
radiolar tubercles. In Diadema, on the contrary (Astropyga),
the spheridia are seated near the tentacular pores, and the
radiolar series of tubercles is situated between them and the
suture. LHchinocidaris is quite different, as it has in each
ambulacrum only a single spheeridium in a rounded notch in
the suture quite close to the margin. In Cidaris spheridia
are not found.

These organs, which are so well and peculiarly protected in
many genera (Brissopsis lyrifera seems to protect its uncovered
spheeridia by binding together the neighbouring small radioli
over them), cannot be any thing but a sensorial apparatus,
probably destined for the perception of the changes which
take place in the surrounding water and in the substances
which this holds in solution or suspension, consequently an
organ of taste. Brissopsis lyrifera holds them quite still for
hours; then follows a half-circular movement around the
point of attachment, which very soon ceases. The strong
nervous stem which runs internally along the suture in each
ambulacrum gives off alternate branches, one for each plate.
Every such branch enters with the tentacular vessel into the pore
of the plate, and passes through this out to the outer side of the
test ; in this way it may furnish both tentacles and spheeridia
with nerves, although [ have not succeeded in demonstrating
this. It is easier, in Brissopsis lyrifera, especially in the
bivium, to ascertain how the nerve, atter issumg through the

288 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

pore, loses itself on the outside of the calcareous layer, beneath
the overlying connective tissue, in a great number of branches,
which run through the anterior part of the plate in a radiating
and diagonal direction in order to distribute themselves to the
interradial radioli and other external parts attached to the
plate. This branching is most distinctly seen on the third
plate of the bivium situated near the sternum, which is freer
from spines than the second.

The spheeridia make their appearance, seemingly, later than
the spines and pedicellarie in very young Spatangide (Bris-
sopsis lyrifera, Echinocardium ovatum), first one alone in the
single peristomial plate of the ambulacra, then one on the second
plate, and so forth; all in accordance with the order which
prevails in the disposition of the ambulacral plates throughout
the whole class, and which, at least in all recent Echinoidea,
may be expressed by a formula common to all. This order is
as follows :—

If we hold a Spatangus of any species with the mouth
turned upwards and the unpaired interradium backwards, and
count the ten peristomial plates of the ambulacra going from
left to right (that is to say, from the animal’s right to its left
side) round the buccal aperture of the test, marking, in each of
the ambulacra I., II., L1I., IV., V., the plate we first come to
with the letter a, and the second with }, we shall find that the
plates I. a, Il. a, I. d, IV. a, V. b are larger and bear two pores
and two tentacles, whilst [., I. 6, II. a, IV. 4, and V.a are
smaller and furnished with only one pore and one tentacle.
Assuming that here each ambulacral plate has originally only
one tentacle and one pore, the former series of plates should
consequently, although no suture can be detected, be composite
and binary, and the latter simple and primary, like all the other
ambulacral plates. The Casstdulide behave in exactly the
same manner; in the binary plates one of the pores is situated
in the outer horn of the plate. That in the Clypeastride the
peristomial plates of the ambulacra follow the same rule is seen
from their unequal size—I. a, I. a, III. 6, 1V. a, and V. d being
larger than I. 6, IL. 6, IIL. a, IV.d, and V.a; and Clypeaster
rosaceus has in the smaller plates one, and in the larger ones
two tentacular pores, which differ by their size from the
numerous pores for locomotor tentacles. If an Hchinoneus
be held in the above-mentioned position and counted in the
same manner, the same arrangement is manifest. ‘The peri-
stomial plates I. a, I.a, II. 6, IV. a, and V.é are larger and
have two pores, a complete double pore and one which is
marginal and half interrupted; I.d, 11.4, I.a, IV. 6, and
Y.a, on the contrary, are smaller and bear only one double pore.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotidea. 289

Thus in the irregular Echinoidea the peristome of the trivium
is asymmetrical with relation to the antero-posterior axis ; of its
six ambulacral plates, the right side of the animal has two
simple and one binary, and the left side two binary and one
simple. ‘The bivium, on the contrary, includes symmetrically
the unpaired interradium. Right and left are determined here
by the position of the anal aperture, and also, except in the
Clypeastride, by that of the madreporic plate; in the regular
Kchinoidea, hitherto, by the latter alone.

Of the five genital plates, the Spatangide are destitute of
the hinder one, which elsewhere is placed near the end of the
unpaired, anal interradium. It has never been developed, any
more than the genital gland, which otherwise, as in the four
others, should have its efferent duct through it. In all the
known living Spatangide, apparently with the exception of a
single genus, its place is occupied by the madreporic plate ;
the filtering-apparatus of the aquiferous system, which spreads
itself out in the posterior part of the vertex, often occupies a
greater space than any of the four genital plates, is posteriorly
in immediate contact with the last plates of the anal inter-

rn aad

Has
ah

Echinocardium cordatum (Penn.), Schizaster fragilis (Dub. & Kor.),
Abatus Philippi, n., Hemiaster expergitus, n.
radium, by which it is enclosed, and separates from each other
the eye-plates of the bivium and the lateral genital plates.
There is no suture to form a boundary between the mght
anterior genital plate and the madreporic area; and when the
latter has a great extension it is this plate that first enters into

290 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

it:—in some to a small extent, as in Meoma ventricosa; inothers,
e.g. Brissopsis, to a greater extent ; and in some, e.g. Schizaster
fragilis (Diib. & Kor.), so completely that the genital pore is
absent, and with it the right anterior interradial genital gland.
The next in order to disappear are the genital pore and gland
of the left anterior genital plate; and when, as in Adbatus
Philippit, n., and Paleostoma mirabile, Gray, only two genital
pores remain, these are situated in the lateral genital plates. An
arrangement by which the madreporic plate extended backward
separates from each other the eye-plates of the bivium, occurs
among the Spatangide of the Kocene period, and not only in
most of those which also belong to recent times, but also in
some (e.g. Prenaster, Macropneustes) which had already made
their appearance in the younger deposits of the Cretaceous
formation. On the other hand the genera which essentially
belong to the latter formation and attained in it their highest
development, present throughout a different disposition of the
genital and madreporic plates, at the same time that the latter
does not reach the posterior interradium, but is separated from
it by the eye-plates of the bivium, which meet and touch each
other, as do also, in most, the lateral genital plates. Among
the known living Spatangide only one has this character of
antiquity, namely Hemiaster expergitus, n., which was dis-
covered on the voyage of the Swedish corvette ‘ Josephine,’ in
the year 1869, by Smitt and Ljungman, near Josephina’s bank,
in 38° 7! N. lat. and 9°18! W. long., at a depth of 550 fathoms
ona clay bottom. The genus, which until then was regarded
as having become extinct during the Miocene Tertiary period,
and which attained its highest development during the Cre-
taceous period, is recognized by its rounded oval outline,
which, with a length of 14 millims., has a breadth of 13 millims.,
by its posteriorly considerable height (10 millims.), by the posi-
tion of the periproctium high up on the posterior surface, the
single peripetalous broad fasciola, which forms an oval ring,
the short, broad petala of the bivium half as long as the an-
terior ones, and, for still further distinction from Adbatus, by
the madreporic plate with which the anterior right genital
plate is united, but which posteriorly does not reach the unpaired
interradium, but is shut off from it by the two eye-plates of
the bivium and the lateral genital plates. ‘he individual is
young, so that the four genital pores do not yet perforate the
genital plates, and the madreporic plate has only a few pores;
but the peristome is reniform, and the lobes prominent. The
ambulacra are remarkably narrow where they pass under the
fasciola. The test is extremely thin and brittle.

~ Jn the regular Echinoidea the anus opens in the circle formed

Prot, S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 291

by the genital and eye-plates perpendicularly above the mouth,
and the corona, which 1s nowhere in contact with it, developes
in like manner its ambulacra and interradia. The apparently
regularly radiate form is originally disturbed by the madre-
poric apparatus, which perforates with its strainer one of the
genital plates, all of which subsequently, during the early
growth of the animal, become perforated by the efferent ducts
of the genital glands.. That even here the genital plate which
contains the madreporic plate is the right anterior-one, and
that the ideal longitudinal axis of the body passes through
the unpaired ambulacrum, as thereby indicated, is confirmed
by the fact, that only by such a division between right and
left does the same formula prevail for the plates of the peri-
stomial margin in the regular as in the irregular forms, ‘This
is most distinctly observed in very young individuals, in which
the primary plates may still be distinguished.

Ifa young Toxopneustes drébachensis of from 3 to 6 millims.
diameter be held with the mouth upwards, and the unpaired
ambulacrum, determined as above, forwards, and the peri-
stomial plates be gone through in the same sequence as was
adopted in the examination of the irregular Kchinoidea, we
find not only that all the peristomial plates are composite
oe may therefore be denominated large plates), but also that

.a, I. a, I. 6, 1V.a, V.6 are all ternary; that is to say,
every one of them consists of three still distinguishable primary
plates ; whilst I. 6, II. 6, II. a, 1V.d, V.a are binary, formed
of two primary plates. Consequently here also the peri-
stomial plates of series I. a—V. 6 are larger than those of series
I. b-Y. a, and likewise bear more pores. In both series, the first
primary plate has two pores, a complete double pore and one
which is formed only by a notch in the very margin; and it
may be supposed that this primary plate is a combination of
two plates which were distinct in a still younger stage, the
earliest formed of which, like ail others, had a complete double
pore, which afterwards, during growth, shifted to the margin
and became reduced, its upper passage being closed and its
lower one partly removed and thus converted into merely a
notch of greater or less depth (see Plate XIV. figs. 1 & 2-8).

The primary ambulacral plates in the Latistelle are in part
entire, ¢. e. such as occupy the whole space between the inter-
radium and the median suture of the ambulacrum, and in part
halved, or such as extend from the interradium to about the
middle of the entire ones, and terminate there in a more or less
distinct point. The larger peristomial plates of the ambulacral
series I.a—V.b generally consist,in very young individuals, of an
entire adoral, a half intermediate, and an entire aboral primary

of series

of series

292 Prof. 8S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

plate; but sometimes all three are entire; in series I. b-V.a
both primary plates are always entire.

The order which prevails in the ambulacra at the peristome
recurs at the vertex. The corona of a young Towopneustes
dribachensis of 4 millims. diameter, and with a stoma of 2°4
millims, is shown by the proportions given in the following
table, which states for each large plate the number of its pri-
mary plates, of which the half ones are included in paren-
theses :—

—— a eg? 3 4 5 6

plates :—
es I. a ..{1 (2) 3}1 (2) 3/1 (2, 8) 411 (2,3, 4) 5/1 (2, 3,4) 5} 1 QQ)
w: |ILa..) ” ” 1 (2, 3) 4 ” 1 (2, 3, 4)
at 2, 3) 4 1 (2, 3, 4
1 4 IL. 6 ” ” 1 2, 3) ” (2, 0, 4)
SLY. @ 5 We, SrA aiGid)r4 2 1 (2, 3, 4)
TSB ae 93 » fl (2,3) 41 (2, 8,4) 5 1 (2)
< tim 1,2 {1 (2) 3/1 Q, 8) 4) 1 2, 3) 4 {1 (2,3, 4) 5/1 @, 3,4) 5) O
toy a ” ” ” ” ” ” 1
Ei % Ul. a ” ” ” ” ” ” 1, 2
az | IV. b ” ” ” ” ” ”

LV. a@ ” ” ” ” ” ”

It will be seen that the number of primary plates in each
large plate increases from the peristome towards the vertex.
In the rows of series I. a—V. 0 this increase is not quite regular,
but somewhat unequal in the large plates 8 and 4, which may
be an individual peculiarity; but the rows I. a—V.6 of the
bivium agree perfectly, even in the last plates, where the tri-
vium also forms a group of similarly developed plates. In
series I. b-~V.a, however, the increase is the same throughout.
In large plate 3 some individuals have 1 (2) 3.

In each row the peristomial plate 1 is the oldest; the other
plates are younger in proportion as they are further from this ;
and the youngest is that which strikes upon the eye-plate of
the vertex. The youngest plate has not the same ordinal
number in the rows of both series. In the rows of series I. a—
V.6 it is the sixth, in those of series I.J-V.a the seventh,
with the, perhaps, individual exception of I.; so that this series,
which in the peristome has one primary plate less than series
I. a-V.¢, has in its increasing end one or several more than
this, inasmuch as not only is the large plate 6 completed, but
even the large plate 7 is commenced,

Each large plate commences as follows :—Close to the aboral
margin of a previously completed large plate the new first
primary plate is formed, close to this the second, and so on.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 293

All primary plates, even the half ones, are originally in their
first foundation entire plates; that is to say, they reach from
the interradium to the median suture of the ambulacrum.
Subsequently, whilst the whole of the complex of primary
plates which forms large plates increases in breadth, and even
before it is completed by the last primary plates, the inter-
mediate ones fall off in their growth; and whilst they retain
their position in the boundary of the ambulacrum towards the
interradium, their narrowed ends become more remote from
the median suture of the former. ‘The first formed of these
intermediate plates is the smallest of all, the later ones become
gradually larger; and thus it happens that whole groups of
intermediate primary plates acquire forms of a triangular figure,
the apex of which is formed near the middle of the large plate
by the projecting end of the last alone. By all this it is also
clear that these intermediate plates are not of later origin,
neither secondary nor inserted, but that they are formed in
ordinal sequence with the two outer entire plates. But the
latter grow to a much greater degree, so that they directly
touch each other where the intermediate plates cease, constitute
the greatest part of the area of the large plate, and the whole
of its margin towards the median suture.

The youngest large plates are distinctly longer, in the
direction from the vertex towards the peristome, than broad ;
but in proportion as each large plate grows, and at the same time
is removed from the vertex, it becomes broader in proportion to
its length. The greatest periphery of the corona is always
so placed that half the number of the plates and something
more is ventral—that is to say, situated between it and the
peristome, notwithstanding that the distance from it to the
peristome is always less than to the vertical rings. Con-
sequently during growth a compression from above downwards
of the ventral plates takes place, which appears more strongly
in proportion to their age, and, in combination with the move-
ment which also takes place in each large plate, alters their
form in a regular manner and at the same time changes the
position of the pores. In the youngest individuals which
have been examined, all the tentacular pores (with the excep-
tion of the very first interrupted one) are placed near the suture
towards the interradium, and those which belong to the same
large plate form together a curve with a slight, outwardly
convex flexure. These are the primordial pore-arcs. But
the tentacular pores begin very soon to move, in order to take
up a different position, and finally form other secondary ares,
which remain the same during the animal’s whole life, and are
so characteristic that we derive from them the characters of

294 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

the genera. What determines the issue of this removal is that
the pores of the entire plates have, even in comparison with
the size of the plates, a greater movement than those of the
half plates. Every pore which belongs to an entire primary
plate departs by degrees from its margin and approaches the
middle. Within every large plate this movement is strongest
in the first, adoral primary plate, and combined with a drawing
downwards ; in the last, aboral primary plate the same move-
ment occurs, although in a less degree. In the intermediate
half plates the shifting of the pores is nothing or almost im-
perceptible in the first, but more considerable and increasing
in the following ones. Consequently, if a large plate is com-
posed of a first entire primary plate, (1), three intermediate
plates, (2, 3, 4), and again an entire plate, (5), the first pore
moves far inwards nearly to the middle of the plate, the second
retains its original position, the third has drawn itself a very
little inwards, the fourth rather more, and the fifth still more.
But it is a.consequence of this unequal movement that the
first pore no longer belongs to the original pore-arc, but has
separated therefrom and entered and completed a new, secon-
dary arc, the other members of which are constituted by the
pores of the preceding large plate, with the exception of the
first. The ares of 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 pores which characterize
Toxopneustes, and in which the number of pores is dependent
on the number of intermediate plates, are therefore always
counted from and including the second pore in one large plate,
to and including the first in the following plate. These altera-
tions of the ambulacra are represented in Pl. XIV. figs. 2-8.

In the peristome, even in individuals of small size, all order
seems to have disappeared in consequence of these shiftings,
This, however, is only apparently the case. A careful ex-
amination shows that every thing arranges itself in accordance
with the same law.

The peristomial plates of series I.a—V.5 present the fol-
lowing alterations. The rudimentary double pore (1), which
remains only as a notch in the very margin, moves gradually
past the middle of the first plate and becomes still more incon-
siderable; for whilst the corona grows near its vertical pole,
some of its solid substance disappears in the margin of the
peristome, where its caleaceous deposit is slowly absorbed,
with the result that the pore-cup which was moving thither
becomes, as it were, eaten away, and loses a greater or less
portion of its wall. The perfect double pore (2) in the first
primary plate (1,1), which is an entire plate, moves, like this,
from the suture towards the middle, and also approaches the
margin, so that by degrees it loses a good deal of the wall

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 295

round its lower aperture, after the upper one becomes filled up
and blind. These two pores (1 and 2) form persistently a
‘pair of themselves. The second primary plate (1, 2) is a half
plate ; its pore (3) removes very slightly from its original place,
and commences the first distinct secondary are, but, in conse-
quenceof the diminution and depression of the first primary plate,
approaches the margin, where it also in its turn loses a part of
its wall. The third and last primary plate (1,3) of the first
large plate is again an entire plate ; and its pore (4) also moves
inwards, and further than the preceding one. Pore 5, which
belongs to the first primary plate of the second large plate, is,
as such, again the most movable, wanders far from the suture,
and completes the first secondary arc of the three pores 3, 4, 5.
Pore 6, situated in the intermediate half plate 2,2, remains
in its place as the first of the second are, again of three pores,
of which the second, (7), in primary plate 2, s, has moved
inwards not inconsiderably, although not so much as the third
(pore 8), which belongs to primary plate 3,1. With pore 9, in
primary plate 3, 2, again commences a third secondary arc of
four pores, which move in accordance with the same law as
the preceding ones—namely, 9, pl. 3, 2, 10, pl. 3, 3,11, pl. 3, 4,
and 12, pl. 4,1. Whilst these movements have been going on,
the large plates 1, 2, and 3 have also become more strongly com-
pressed. In one individual (fig. 2) they constitute two thirds
of the whole height of the corona, and the greatest periphery
nearly coincides with the suture between 2 and 3; in fig. 3 they
all lie below the line of the greatest periphery, occupy less than
half the height of the corona, and their width is rather greater
than their height. The first large plate (1), the peristomial
plate, especially, is strongly compressed; its pores cease to
grow ; their upper tube is diminished or closed; pore 2 loses
still more of its wall in the margin of the peristome; pore 3
gradually follows in the same direction ; the radiolar tubercles
disappear entirely or for the most part ; and in the individual,
fig. 6, the suture between the large plates 1 and 2 has dis-
appeared, and they have coalesced to form a single binary large
plate of the second order, 1+2, composed of six primary
plates, which number cannot be distinguished; and the large
radiolar tubercle it bears is that which originally belonged to
large plate 2. In the individual, fig. 7, this double large plate
1+2 has become still more compressed ; of pore 2 only half
remains, and but little more of pore 3. The sutures of the
primary plates now disappear still more within the large plate
3; and in the individual, fig. 8, even this has completely
coalesced with 1+2 to form a single ternary plate of the
third order, 1+2+3, composed of eleven primary plates, and

296 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

consequently furnished with eleven pores, so placed that they
may be counted as follows:—1, 2; 3,4, 5; 6, 7,8; 9,10, 11,
and, to complete the latter are, 12 in the following large
plate 4,—that is to say, in groups of 2,3, 3, 4,&c. The form
of this large composite plate has now become such that its
breadth stands to its height about in the relation of 1:0°7. In
the youngest specimen (fig. 2), in which the three plates are
quite distinct, the breadth is to their length, taken together,
as 1: 2°25.

Within the first coronal plates which belong to series I. b-
V.a corresponding changes take place, with only such differ-
ences as are due to the first large plate consisting only of two
primary plates. Here, also, the plates 1, 2, and 3 coalesce,
apparently almost earlier than in series I.a-V.b. The ternary
plate of the third order finally produced by coalescence has
then ten pores so arranged that they may be counted 1, 2; 3,
4; 5,6, 7; 8,9, 10, and, to complete the arc, 11 in the next
large plate (4); consequently 2, 2, 3, 4, &c. It is by the
second number that we recognize the peristomial plates of
series 1.b-V.a ; it is there two, but three in series I. a—V. 6 ; and
this character is constant in the Latistelle, which may be
oriented by this means. ‘The fourth arc, which here has four
‘pores, has only three in occasional individuals ; that is to say,
the third large plate has only one intermediate primary plate.
Some variability seems to prevail in this.

In the Echinide the tentacular pores are double pores.
Within an oval space or cup bounded by a more or less
elevated wall open two straight passages, through which
aquiferous ducts pass to the tentacle. ‘Their openings on the
inside of the shell are considerably further apart than on the
outside. These passages consequently traverse the thickness
of the test in an oblique direction. If we compare the posi-
tion of the outer apertures with that of the inner ones in the
same plate of different ages and sizes, we find that the inner
‘ones do not change their position so much as the outer ones ;
so that the passages which, in the younger specimens, take the
shortest course from the inside to the outside, gradually draw
away during growth in an oblique direction towards the
middle, in the same proportion as the outer apertures shift
their place. The movement which takes place in the sub-
stance of the plate is therefore not the same in its whole mass,
and has, the nearer we go to the outside, a preponderant
direction towards the median suture of the ambulacrum.

Thus, in Toxopneustes drébachensis, do the ambulacra grow,
with constant alterations in the plates and pores; but even in
the largest individuals the different character of the two dif-

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 297

ferent series is recognized by the form aad grouping of the
above parts in the peristome. The numbers by which the
arrangement of the pores can be indicated in that species
(namely, in series I. a—V. b, 2, 8,3, 4, &c. ; and in series I. 6-
V. a, 2, 2, 38, 4) recurs not only in generically allied species,
such as Toxopneustes brevispinosus and T. lividus, but also in
Loxechinus albus, Echinus esculentus, Lytechinus variegatus,
Tripneustes ventricosus, Boletia heteropora, Amblypneustes
ovum, Temnopleurus toreumaticus, in fact throughout the La-
tistelle, even in the Lchinometre. In the arrangement of
the pores round the peristome the same numbers recur in the
West-Indian £. lucunter, Linn., with striking distinctness.
The madreporic plate is situated, as in all others, near the
right anterior interradium ; and the animal’s antero-posterior
does not coincide, as J. Miiller thought he found, with the
longest diameter of the oval test; but itis oblique, as L. Agassiz
supposed ; for the longitudinal diameter passes through ambu-
lacrum I. and the corresponding interradium 3, and in its ver-
tical plane are situated the lines of curvature for the flexure of
the test. On the other hand Heterocentrus and Colobocentrus
are symmetrical ; in these, moreover, the short diameter of the
test 1s its antero-posterior axis, in which direction also the
peristome is elongated, with the posterior sinus deepest. This
is the position accepted by J. Miiller as the correct one in these
genera; but the position which is thus given to the madre-
poric plate, he regarded as an exception from that which he
regarded as the normal one both in “chinus and Cidaris, near
the left posterior interradium. This is not the case. Except
in the Clypeastridee the connexion of the madreporic plate
with the right anterior apical plate is constant in all Hehi-
noidea. If its position is occasionally unknown, it is found
in the Latistelle by the formula of the arrangement of the pores
in the peristomial plates, and by the antero-posterior axis of
the same test, and its division into a trivium and a bivium.
The Latistelle have ten free pore-plates in the buccal mem-
brane. It might be asked whether these do not become very
early detached from the corona, before the auricles are yet
developed. Careful investigations under favourable conditions
ought to settle this question. A small Toxopneustes driba-
chensis, 2 millims. in diameter, has already the five pairs of
large plates in the buccal membrane, each pair in front of
an ambulacrum (fig. 9). Of these ten plates, those of series
I. a—V.¢ are the larger, but destitute of tentacular pores; the
other five, of series I. B-V. a, on the contrary, are smaller, and
each furnished with its pore and its tentacle; that is to say,
this latter series is here, as always, inferior in size, but supe-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 22

298 Dr. Sclater on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis.

rior in development to the former one. In a much earlier
stage (fig. 10), when the young Hchinus, 0°6 millim. in dia-
meter, no longer shows any remains of its pluteus, but still
does not present any indications either of mouth or anus, it
moves, as we learn from J. Miiller’s investigations, by means
of five large primordial tentacles furnished with sucking-disks,
which issue, at equal distances apart, from inconsiderable de-
pressions not far from the margin of the ventral surface of the
lentiform body, which was turned towards the inside of the
pluteus. Within these large tentacles is situated a circle of
five pairs of calcareous reticulated disks, of a rounded, inter-
nally oblong form. ach disk has near its aboral end a
large, evenly bounded, oval, outwardly pointed aperture,
above which is placed one of the ten smaller tentacles (figs.
12 & 13). These five pairs of disks can hardly be any thing
but the foundations of the first primary ambulacral plates, and
the rather because, between the pairs nearer to the periphery,
five smaller, nearly triangular plates come in, which then
would be the first commencement of the interradia. Hach of
the five large primordial tentacles has its base in the line
which separates each pair of the ten smaller and later ones,
at the point from which the median suture of the ambulacrum
will subsequently start. Can these five isolated tentacles have
any thing m common with the tentacles of the buccal mem-
brane, which also first make their appearance isolatedly ?
Krohn saw them become absorbed and disappear before the
mouth opened, and the ten paired tentacles become the instru-
ments of locomotion in their stead*.
[To be continued. |

XLIV.—WNotes on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis.
By 2. L. Sciarnr, MAL) Ph.D. mR Ss.

Tue Lemur described by Dr. Gray in the last Number of the
‘Annals’ (anted, p. 206), as Propithecus bicolor, has been al-
ready named Propithecus Hdwardsi by M. Alfred Grandidier
(Compt. Rend. Ixxii. p. 231, 27 Feb. 1871). M. Milne-Ed-
wards, who has requested me to make known this correction,
informs me that he has examined a marked skin of this animal
received from Mr. EK. Gerrard, jun., and has no doubt of the
identity of the two species.

As regards the two Asiatic two-horned rhinoceroses in
the Zoological Society’s Gardens, when the first specimen ar-
rived from Chittagong I referred it to Rhinoceros sumatrensis,
that being the only species of this section then known to science.

* Miiller’s Archiv, 1851, p. 351.

Bibliographical Notice. 299

But when the second animal (obviously of a different species)
reached us, [ carefully examined the literature on the subject, and
came to the conclusion (exactly contrary to that of Dr. Gray,
antea, p. 207) that the latter was the true R. sumatrensis and the
former new to science. Under these circumstances, in a paper
read before Section D at the British Association’s Meeting
at Brighton on the 16th of August last, I proposed to call the
former Rhinoceros lasiotis*, Supposing even that the exist-
ing descriptions and figures of hinoceros sumatrensis are not
sufficient to settle this question (which, however, is, in my
opinion, by no means the case), the known localities from which
the two animals were brought are of themselves strongly pre-
sumptive that my determination is correct. One was captured
near Chittagong, in a district, where no two-horned rhino-
ceros was previously known to occur; the other in Malacca,
where the fauna is well known to be identical with that of the
adjacent island of Sumatra. I may add that Mr. Blythf,
who has paid special attention to the Asiatic rhinoceroses, and
Dr. Dorner, who has examined not only the specimen in the
Regent’s Park, but also the similar animal in the Gardens of
the Zoological Society of Hamburg, of which he is Secretary,
are both of opinion that the Malaccan animal is the true
L. sumatrensis ; and I believe that any naturalist who has an
opportunity of examining the two animals in the Zoological
Society’s Gardens will come to the same conclusion.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE,

Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles drawn from Life. By James
pE Carte Sowersy, F.L.S., and Epwarp Luar. London, Paris,
and Frankfort: Henry Sotheran, Joseph Baer and Co., 1872.

Dr. Gray, who edits this work, prefaces it by the following intro-
duction :—

“This series of Plates was made under the superintendence of
Mr. Thomas Bell, to illustrate his ‘ Monograph of the Testudinata,’
a work in which the author intended to represent and describe not
only all the known recent, but also fossil species. The publication
of this extensive work was unfortunately interrupted (by the failure
of the publisher) when only two-thirds of the plates that had been
prepared (which in themselves formed but a limited portion of the
intended work) were published.

“We are informed in the original Prospectus that ‘The whole of
the drawings are from the inimitable pencil of Mr. James Sowerby ;
and the author feels that he is only doing justice to that distinguished
artist in natural objects when he states that in correctness of

* See the ‘Times’ of August 19th, p. 5, where a notice of this paper is
given; also ‘Atheneum’ of August 24th, p. 243.

+ See ‘ Field,’ August 24, 1872, letter signed “ Z.”

22*

300 Royal Society :-—

delineation, minute and elaborate execution, and taste in the
general arrangement of the figures, nothing within the range of
zoographical illustration has ever surpassed them. The Plates will
be lithographed by Mr. Lear, coloured (so as to form the most perfect
facsimiles of the drawings) by Mr. Bayfield. The joint talent of
these excellent artists, exhibited in the illustrations of the Psittacide
of the former gentleman, renders it unnecessary to say that the ability
of the painter will be ably seconded by that of the lithographer and
colourist.’ Which I entirely indorse.

“The unsold stock and unpublished plates were purchased at Mr.
Highley’s sale by Mr. Sotheran, and the work has been in abeyance
for many years.

‘Mr. Bell has declined to furnish the text for the unpublished plates.
In this difficulty Mr. Sotheran applied to me; and feeling that it
was much to be regretted that such beautiful and accurate plates
should be lost to science, and considering that such minutely accu-
rate and detailed figures would not require to be accompanied
by a description, I agreed to add a few lines of text to each Plate,
containing first the original name that Mr. Bell placed upon them,
then the name used in the Museum Catalogue of Tortoises, so as to
bring the nomenclature to the level of our present knowledge of
these animals, at the same time referring to a work in which the
synonymy of the species is to be found. I have also added a few
lines on the habits and manners of the species from works of authors
who have had the opportunity of observing them in their native
country.

“« Many of the specimens figured and the rest of Mr. Bell’s collection
of reptiles are now to be found in the Anatomical and Zoological
Museum at Cambridge.”

The work contains 60 plates and represents 36 species; so that of
many species there is a plate of the upper and underside, and of
several, varieties of the same species. They are all from living
specimens except Hmyda ceylonensis, which is from a specimen pre-
served in spirit.

It is one of the most beautiful and accurate works that has appeared
on Tortoises, and, one might almost say, on any known reptiles.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
ROYAL SOCIETY.

June 20, 1872.—Sir James Paget, Bart., D.C.L., Vice-President,
in the Chair.

“On the Echinidea of the ‘Porcupine’ Deep-sea Dredging-Ex-
peditions.” By Prof. Wyvitte THomson, LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.
The deep-sea dredging-cruises of H.M. Ships ‘ Lightning’ and
‘Porcupine’ during the summers of 1868, 1869, and 1870 in the
North Atlantic, were comprehended within a belt 1500 miles in
length by from 100 to 150 miles in width, extending from the Feerde

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 301

Islands along the northern and western coasts of Scotland and Ireland
and the coasts of Portugal and Spain to the Strait of Gibraltar. In
this area fifty-seven successful hauls of the dredge were made during
the three summers in water exceeding 500 fathoms in depth, sixteen
beyond 1000 fathoms, and two beyond 2000 fathoms.

Even at the latter extreme depth Echinodermata appeared to be
abundant. At 2435 and at 2090 fathoms all the Echinoderm orders
were represented—the Echinidea by a small variety of Echinus norvegi-
cus, D. & K., and a young example of Brissopsis lyrifera, Forbes ;
the Asteridea by a species of the genus Archaster ; the Ophiuridea
by Ophiocten sericeum, Forbes, and Ophiacantha spinulosa, M. & T.;
the Holothuridea by Echinocucumis typica, Sars ; and the Crinoidea
by a very remarkable new form of the Apiocrinidee, which has been
described under the name of Bathycrinus gracilis, Wy.T. From
2000 fathoms upwards the number of Echinoderms seems to increase
rapidly ; but this apparent increase may possibly be due to our wider
knowledge of the fauna of the shallower water; at from 300 to 800
fathoms along the coast of Britain many species of all the orders
are enormously abundant, so much so as to give a very marked
character to the fauna of that special zone. Several of these species,
such as Cidaris papillata, Leske, Toxopneustes drobachiensis, Miiller,
Echinus norvegicus, D. & K., Astropecten tenuispinus, D. & K.,
Archaster Parellii, D. & K., 4d. Andromeda, M. & T., and Euryale
Linkii, M. & T., have been long known to inhabit the deep water
of the British area, and form part of a fauna which will be probably
found to have a very wide lateral extension at temperatures whose
minimum ranges from ()° C. to +2° C., a fauna which crops up, as it
were, within the ordinary limits of observation in the seas of Scandi-
navia, and which has consequently been carefully studied by the
Scandinavian naturalists.

Another group of species, including Tripylus fragilis, D. & K.,
Ctenodiscus crispatus, Retzius, Pteraster militaris, M. & T., dm-
phiura abyssicola, Sars, Antedon Eschrichtiit, O. F. Muller, and
several others, are members of the same fauna described from locali-
ties in the seas of Scandinavia and Greenland, but not hitherto
known as British. A third section, consisting of a number of unde-
scribed Echinideans, Asterideans, and Ophiurideans, may probably
also belong to this fauna ; while a fourth group, likewise undescribed,
and including such forms as Porocidaris, Phormosoma, Calveria,
Pourtalesia, Neolampas, Zoroaster, Ophiomusium, Pentacrinus,
Rhizocrinus, and Bathycrinus, would rather appear to be referable
to a special deep-sea fauna of which we as yet know only a few ex-
amples, and with whose conditions and extension we are unacquainted.
This abyssal fauna is of great interest, inasmuch as nearly all the
hitherto discovered forms referred to it show close relations to family
types of Cretaceous or early Tertiary age, and hitherto supposed to
be extinct.

Twenty-seven species of Echinidea were procured during the
cruises of 1868, 1869, and 1870, off the coasts of Britain and Portu-
gal, at depths varying from 100 to 2435 fathoms.

302 Royal Society :—

CIpDARID&.

Cidaris, Lamarck.
1. C. gapillata, Leske.

Occurs in enormous numbers on gravel at depths of from 100 to
400 fathoms, from Feerée to Gibraltar, and small-sized examples
are frequent down to 1000 fathoms. ‘This is a variable species,
and every possible link may be shown between the typical C. papillata,
Leske, and C. Aystriv, Lam. I have no hesitation, after examining
many hundreds of specimens, in fusing the two forms into one
species.

2. C. affinis, Stokes.

This is a pretty little species, and apparently distinct, although it is
sometimes not easy to draw the line between it and small forms of
©. papillata. It occurs abundantly in the Mediterranean, and locally
off the coast of Portugal.

Porocidaris, Desor.

This genus was established by Desor chiefly on a character which I
eannot regard as of great importance, and which is absent in the
present species, a row of small holes surrounding the tubercles of the
primary spines in the scrobicular areee. From the description these
holes seem to be nothing more than complete perforations, owing
to imperfect calcification, in the position of the depressions which
frequently occur in the scrobiculz of the Cidaridee for the insertion
of the muscles of the spines. Along with this character, however,
there were some others of greater value, a very remarkable paddle-
like form of the spines surrounding the mouth, and a tendency to
coalescence in the scrobicular areze. ‘These characters are well marked
in the species described. This genus has hitherto only been found
fossil—a few detached plates and some of the characteristic spines in
the Nummulitic beds of Verona and Biarritz, and some spines referred
to the genus, on account of their having the same singular form, in the
Lower Oolite of Frick.

1. P. purpurata, n. sp.
Four examples from depths of from 500 to 600 fathoms off the Butt
of the Lews.

EcHINOTHURID&.

I think it due to the memory of the late Dr. S. P. Woodward to
adopt as the type of this very distinct and remarkable family the
genus Echinothuria, which he described with singular sagacity from
one or two imperfect specimens from the White Chalk. The Echino-
thuridz are regular urchins with depressed tests, rendered perfectly
flexible by the whole of the plates, both ambulacral and interambu-
lacral, being arranged in imbricating rows, the interambulacral plates
overlapping one another from the apex to the mouth, and the ambu-
lacral plates in the opposite direction. The margin of the peristome
is entire, and the peristomial membrane is covered with imbricated

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 303

scales, through which the ranges of double pores and ambulacral tubes
are continued up to the edge of the mouth as in Cidaris. The am-
bulacral plates are strap-shaped, and the pores trigeminal; the two
inner pairs of each are pass through small accessory plates inter-
calated between the ambulacral plates, and the third pair, remote
from the others, pass through the end of the ambulacral plate. The
dental pyramid is broad and low, and the teeth are simply grooved as
in Cidaris. The two divisions of the tooth-socket are not united by a
closed arch ; the ambulacral tube-feet on the oral surface are provided
with suckers, while those on the apical surface are simple and conical.

Phormosoma, ui. g.
Plates overlapping slightly and forming a continuous shell, the
corona coming to a sharp edge at the periphery, and the upper
surface of body differing greatly in character from the lower.

1. P. placenta, n. sp.
One example from 500 fathoms off the Butt of the Lews; several

fragments from deep water in the Rockall Channel.

Calveria, n. g.

Plates overlapping greatly in the middle line of the ambulacral and
interambulacral areze. Plates narrow, and leaving fenestree between
them which are filled up with membrane. Character of the peri-
stome with regard to the distribution of spines, the structure of the
pore-areze, &c. nearly uniform from the apex to the edge of the peri-
stome.

1. C. hystrix, n. sp.

Fenestrze between the plates small. Colour a nearly uniform rich
claret. One specimen in deep water off the Butt of the Lews.
2. C. fenestrata, n. sp.

Plates narrower than in the last species, and fenestrae wider. Of
a pale grey colour, with bands of chocolate radiating from the apical
pole. Two specimens from the coast of Portugal, and fragments in
deep water off the south and west of Ireland.

Ecuinip&.
Echinus, Link.

1. £. melo, Lam.

One or two small specimens off the coast of Portugal.
2. E. Flemingii, Ball.

The large typical form of this species was met with in deep water
off the Shetlands, but not abundantly.

3. E. rarispina, G. O. Sars.
4. E. elegans, D. & K.

5. E. norvegicus, D. & K.
The last three are critical species ; and although the extreme forms
are very dissimilar, in a large series there are so many intermediate

304. Royal Society :—

links, that it is difficult to tell where the one begins and the other
ends. It is possible that they ought to be regarded as varieties, and
lumped together under Lamarck’s name, F. acutus.

6. EH. microstoma, n. sp.

Although I have great hesitation at present in proposing an addi-
tion to the genus Echinus, I feel compelled in the meantime to
separate this very distinct form with a thin depressed test, a remark-
ably large periproct, and a small peristome with the edge markedly
curved inwards and a uniform vivid red colour. . microstoma is
very abundant from 150 to 400 fathoms off the west coasts of Scot-
land and Ireland.

Spherechinus, Desor.
1. S. esculentus, L., sp.

A marked variety, with a tall narrow test and white spines, in deep
water.

Toxopneustes, Agassiz.
l. T. drébachiensis, Miller.

Of this species it seems to me that 7’. pictus, Norman, and T’. pal-
lidus, G. O. Sars, can only be regarded as varieties. It is generally
distributed at depths beyond 100 fathoms.

2. T'. brevispinosus, Risso, sp.
Shallow water on the coast of Spain.

Psammechinus, Agassiz.
1. P. miliaris, Lam., sp.

2. P. microtuberculatus, Ag.

CASSIDULID&.
Neolmapas, A. Agassiz.

This genus, with a nearly central pentagonal mouth and a tolerably
distinct floscelle, with the anal opening at the bottom of a deep pos-
terior groove excavated in a kind of projecting rostellum, with narrow
ambulacral areze and a small compact group of apical plates, must
be referred to the Cassidulide ; but it differs from all known genera
of the family, living or extinct, in having no trace of a petaloid
arrangement of the ambulacra, which are reduced on the apical sur-
face of the test to a single pore penetrating each ambulacral plate,
and thus forming a double row of alternating simple pores for each
ambulacral area.

1. N. rostellatus, A. Ag.

I believe I am correct in referring to this species a single specimen
dredged at the mouth of the English Channel. It is upwards of an
inch in length, and therefore nearly double the size of the examples

procured by Count Pourtales in depths of from 100 to 150 fathoms in
the Strait of Florida.

CLYPEASTRIDZ.
Echinocyamus, Van Phelsum.
1. E. angulatus, Leske.
Generally distributed, but not found living beyond 150 fathoms.

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 305

ANANCHYTIDE.
Pourtalesia, A. Agassiz.

According to the classification of Desor, which makes the “ dis-
junct ” arrangement of the ambulacra at the apex the test character
of the Dysasteridze, this genus should be referred to that group ; for
the apical disk is truly decomposed as in Dysaster and Collyrites,
and not merely drawn out as in dnanchytes. From the arrangement
and form of the pore-plates, however, and from the general appear-
ance and habit of the animal, I am inclined to think with A. Agassiz
that its affinities are more with such forms as Infulaster. Pourta-
lesia must be an aberrant form, in whatever group it may be placed.
The mouth is at the bottom of a deep anterior groove, occupying the
anterior ambulacral area. ‘The arrangement of the trivium is nearly
normal; but the bivial region is enormously prolonged backward
into a long rostrum, on the upper surface of which, near its pos-
terior extremity, the anus is situated ina pit partially covered by a
projecting boss. The ambulacral pores are simple, one pore on each
plate.

1. P. Jeffreysi, n. sp.
A single specimen of this very remarkable form was dredged in
640 fathoms to the north of the Shetlands. It is nearly allied to

P. miranda, Pourtales, from the Strait of Florida, but differs in several
details.

2. P. phyale, n. sp.

Two or three small specimens were dredged by Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys
in the Rockall Channel. All the specimens are immature ; but from
the marked difference in form, and from some other characters, I
believe them to be the young of a second species.

SPATANGID.
Brissopsis, Agassiz.
1. B. lyrifera, Forbes, sp.

Large specimens of this species are abundant at from 50 to 250
fathoms. Beyond the latter depth the specimens decrease in size,
and at extreme depths only examples which have all the appearance
of being very young are met with. ‘These small delicate specimens
were found at all depths, even down to 2090 fathoms.

Tripylus, Philippi.
1. T. fragilis, D. & K.
At from 400 to 500 fathoms between Scotland and Ferée. Hitherto
known as Scandinavian.
Schizaster, Agassiz.
1. S. canaliferus, Val.
A single small specimen from the coast of Spain.
Amphidetus, Agassiz.
1. A. ovatus, Leske, sp.
Abundant at moderate depths.
Spatangus.
1. S. purpureus, O. F. Miller.

306 Miscellaneous.

2. S. Raschi, Lovén.

This species is apparently gregarious, and is enormously abundant
in patches here and there from the Feerdes to the Strait of Gibraltar
at depths of from 100 to 300 fathoms.

Of the twenty-seven species observed, six (namely Echinus Flem-
ingii, Spherechinus esculentus, Psammechinus miliaris, Eehinocya-
mus angulatus, Amphidetus ovatus, and Spatangus purpureus) may
be regarded as denizens of moderate depths in the ‘‘ Celtic province,”
recent observations having merely shown that they have a somewhat
greater range in depth than was previously supposed. Probably
Spatangus Raschi may simply be an essentially deep-water form
having its headquarters in the same region. Eight species (Cidares
papillata, Echinus elegans, E. norvegicus, E. rarispina, E. micro-
stoma, Toxopneustes drobachiensis, Brissopsis lyrifera, and Tripylus
Jragilis) are members of a fauna of intermediate depth; and all, with
the doubtful exception of Echinus microstoma, have been observed in
comparatively shallow water off the coasts of Scandinavia, Five
species (Cidaris affinis, Echinus melo, Toxopneustes brevispinosus,
Psaummechinus microtuberculatus, and Schizaster canaliferus) are
recognized members of the Lusitanian and Mediterranean faunee,
and seven (Porocidaris purpurata, Phormosoma placenta, Calveria
hystrix, C. fenestrata, Neolampas rosteilatus, Pourtalesia Jeffreysi,
and P. phyale) are forms which have for the first time been brought
to light during the late deep-sea dredging-operations, whether on this
or on the other side of the Atlantic: there seems little doubt that
these must be referred to the abyssal fauna, upon whose confines we
are now only beginning to encroach. ‘Three of the most remarkable
generic forms, Calveria, Neolampas, and Pourtalesia, have been
found by Alexander Agassiz among the results of the deep-dredging
operations of Count Pourtales in the Strait of Florida, showing a
wide lateral distribution; while even a deeper interest attaches to
the fact that while one family type, the Echinothuride, has been
hitherto known only in a fossil state, the entire group find nearer
allies in the extinct faunas of the Chalk or of the earlier Tertiaries
than in that of the present period.

MISCELLANEOUS.
On Thread-cells and Semen in Marine Sponges. By T. Erumr.

Tux researches which have been made during the last few years
on sponges have led to the recognition of striking affinities between
these animals and the Coelenterata; nevertheless certain important
differences in their organization and, in particular, in their histolo-
gical structure even recently checked those who would have been
most disposed to unite these two groups. M. Hiickel said, in 1869:
— <The complete absence of the urticant organs in all the Sponges,
the constant presence of these same organs in all the Coralliaria, the
Hydromeduse, and the Ctenophora, constitute at present the sole
morphological character which separates in a clear and definite manner
the first of these classes from the three others. I have in con-

Miscellaneous. 307

sequence proposed already, in my monograph of the Monera, and,
later still, in my ‘Natiirliche Schépfungsgeschichte,’ to unite these
three last-named classes under the ancient name of Acalephes or
Cnide (urticant animals).”

Notwithstanding the existence of this differential character, the
idea that the sponges are only an inferior group of the Coelenterata
had gained ground. Thus M. Claus, in the second edition of his
work on zoology, divides the subkingdom of the Ccelenterata into
three classes—namely, the Spongiz, Anthozoa, and Ctenophore. This
grouping, which might appear rather rash, has just been confirmed in
a striking manner by the discovery, due to M. Eimer, of urticant
organs in the sponges. This naturalist has observed some organs of
this nature in a certain number of siliceous sponges more or less re-
lated to the Reniere.

In one species with remarkably viscous sarcode the urticant cells
are found disseminated without any regular arrangement, but never-
theless frequently round the spicules, and most frequently surrounding
throughout their whole extent the openings which give access to the
afferent currents. They cover in particular abundance the cavity
of the stomach ; it seems, on the contrary, that they are wanting
at the surface of the animal. Their form is an abbreviated oval, as
in many of the Celenterata. Amongst those which are completely
developed, numerous cells in the course of formation are found.

The second species which has presented urticant cells has oscula
opening most frequently on papilliform eminences and conducting
into canals lined with an extremely distinct membrane. It is this
membrane which is furnished with urticant cells, in all degrees of
development ; they are more spherical and a little smaller than in
the preceding species. Where the canals abut on the exterior sur-
face of the body, they give place to ordinary cells.

A third species of sponges with urticant cells approaches very closely
to the preceding, but differs from it by the absence of a cutaneous
layer and in the nature of its spicules. The canals serving for the
passage of the efferent currents are of the same width, and have the
same arrangement as in the preceding, except that they are only
lined with a very delicate membrane—-so delicate, in fact, that it is
often difficult even to prove its existence. This membrane bears the
urticant cells and cells of formation in all degrees of development ;
but the urticant cells are very rare in the midst of the others. This
species, which thus forms a passage between the sponges with urti-
cant cells and those which are destitute of these organs, may be re-
garded as an arrest of development of the preceding.

The fourth form has no trace of a membrane lining the tubes
which serve for the passage of the efferent currents. Its tissue, in
most cases, is still more delicate than that of the preceding, from
which it differs also in the spicules. It is ordinarily colourless ; but
yet individual specimens are found which have a slight reddish-blue
colour ; and from these we pass to others which are of a violet-blue.
Among a great number of specimens of the bluish variety, M. Eimer
has found some which were filled with urticant cells of a type totally

308 Miscellaneous.

different from that which he had observed in the other species, but
bearing, like the others, very long threads. The urticant cells here
not only cover the internal surface of the efferent tubes; they are
diffused throughout the whole sponge, with their numerous cells of
formation in all stages of development. It can be proved clearly by
the latter that the essential part of the urticant cell (that is to say,
the urticant organ) originates from the nucleus. The different in-
dividuals here do not present the same uniformity that is observed
in the preceding species; they are seen to differ the one from the
other in the numerical proportion of the cells in course of formation
and those fully developed. In certain specimens we only find cells
in course of formation ; in others, as, for example, in the colourless
variety, we no longer find even those.

M. Eimer remarks that, whilst Leuckart and Hickel think that it
is through the calcareous sponges that the change from sponges to
corals takes place, the discovery of the urticant cells reveals a
remarkable affinity between the siliceous sponges and the Ccelen-
terata.

In addition to these details on the urticant organs, the author
communicates the results of his observations on the nourishment of
the sponges, which consists of little Crustacea, like that of certain
polypes, and on the existence in these animals of incontestable
zoosperms. ‘This is not the first time the existence of zoosperms
in the sponges has been noticed. Some bodies of that nature
were found by Lieberkiihn in the Spongille ; and other natura-
lists have indicated their existence in marine sponges. But several
of these observations were contested; it was supposed that, in
certain cases at least, flagellated cells or Infusoria had been taken
for zoosperms. M. Eimer figures perfectly characteristic zoosperms
which he has observed in numerous gelatinous, siliceous, and cal-
eareous sponges. Through the tissues will be found distributed
spherical or oval balls, the surface of which appears granulated.
A very strong magnifying-power shows us that these granules are
caused by myriads of heads of zoosperms, which have their tails
turned inward. When this ball has been broken, it may be seen
that the head of the zoosperm bears a well-developed anterior
prolongation or beak (Schnabel), which is darker than the other
portions of the head. Except the greater length of this prolonga-
tion, the head has quite the same form as the zoosperms in man.
The tail is of extreme thinness ; and we can only perceive it with a
very powerful objective, such as the immersion No. 10 of Hartnack;
and even then it is impossible to follow it throughout its length.
We can, however, see enough of it to convince us that in the full-
grown zoosperms it is of an exceptional length ; often we can count
150 p. These zoosperms originate from cells with distinct nuclei ; and
M. Eimer believes he has noticed that the head is formed at the
expense of the nucleus, whilst the filament originates from the proto-
plasm. He has always found with these zoosperms numerous ova ;
and for these reasons he considers the sponges to be hermaphrodites.

At the same time that M. Eimer was studying the sponges at

Miscellaneous. 309

Capri, M. Hiickel was also occupied with these animals on the shores
of Dalmatia, and had likewise ascertained the existence of zoosperms
and ova in the calcareous and siliceous sponges*. The results of his
researches had even been published a little before the memoir of M.
Eimer. The latter, however, thinks Hiickel, like Huxley and Lie-
berkiihn, had not under examination any completely developed zoo-
sperms, but only slightly advanced forms of those elements. As,
however, Hickel has observed a direct fecundation, M. Eimer hazards
the supposition that there may be some sponges in which the zoo-
sperms are arrested at one of the inferior stages of their develop-
ment.—Archw fiir mikroskopische Anatomie, vol. vill. Heft 2; Bibl.
Univ. August 15, 1872, Bull. Scient. p. 350.

Investigations upon the Development of the Gregarine.
By E. van BenepeEn.

The investigations of M. E. van Beneden upon the Gregarina
gigantea of the lobster confirm the observations of Lieberkiihn
upon the transformation of certain amceboid forms into Gregarine ;
only the phases are here somewhat different from those observed in
the Gregarine of the earthworm. The author found, in the small
intestine of the lobster, some small, finely granular, protoplasmic
masses, destitute both of membrane and nucleus. These masses,
which are continually changing their form, greatly resemble Protu-
meba primitiva or P. agilis of Hackel, from which they differ only
by presenting fine molecular granulations even to the periphery, and
by never emitting true pseudopodia. According to Hiickel’s nomen-
clature, these would be true gymnocytodes.

Side by side with these we find small protoplasmic globules, which
differ from them only by having lost the faculty of moving and
changing their form. They have no enveloping membrane any more
than the former ; but their spheroidal form is preserved by a peri-
pheral layer of denser and less fluid protoplasm.

With these globular and motionless forms we find others perfectly
similar to them, except that they have one or two prolongations
which cannot be assimilated to pseudopodia, but rather to the
movable stalk of the Noctiluce. M. van Beneden names these
generative cytodes, because it 1s these which directly give birth to
the Gregarine. When there are two prolongations, these are
inserted at but a little distance apart. One of these prolongations,
which is shorter and more slender and with paler outlines than the
other, and only contains very fine granules, is almost destitute of
mobility. When brought against a hard body, it is seen to bend;
and the bend thus produced persists for a very long time. The
other prolongation is considerably longer and stouter, with stronger
outlines and a more refractive protoplasm. Besides a very fine
punctation, it contains opaque granules, which are very numerous at
its slightly widened extremity. This process is endowed with an
extreme mobility, which is manifested in two modes. It may
swing about like the stalk of the Noctiluce, or present an inflection

* Jenaische Zeitschrift, vol. vi. Heft 4.

310 Miscellaneous.

which is propagated from the extremity towards the base, and
which is followed by a sudden straightening of the whole arm. At
the same time that this movement of straightening is made, a cur-
rent carries the granular protoplasm from the centre of the cytode
into the interior of the arm. This action repeated produces an
elongation of the arm, which is accompanied by a narrowing of its
basal portion and an accumulation of opaque granulations in its
terminal part.

When the mobile arm has attained a certain length, it separates
from the body of the cytode, and moves like a Nematode worm. We
shall soon see what further transformations it undergoes.

After this arm has separated and acquired an independent
existence, the other process follows the course of its development,
and arrives at the same state as the former one; only for this
purpose it requires the whole remainder of the body of the cytode.

If M. van Beneden has correctly coordinated the different phases
which he has been able to observe in the intestine of the lobster,
we must conclude that a single cytode gives origin successively to
two prolongations, each destined to become developed into a Grega- —
rina: one separates from the body of the cytode, the other ab-
sorbs the rest of that body.

These protoplasmic filaments, endowed with very active move-
ments, the author designates by the name of pseudofilarie ; he sup-
poses that it is their resemblance to young Nematode worms which
has led certain authors to assume that the Gregarine are a phase in
the evolution of the Nematoda,

These pseudofilarize are thinned at one of their extremities, and
slightly inflated at the opposite (cephalic) extremity, which is always
strongly charged with refractive granules. After a certat period
of activity their movements slacken; the length of the hody gra-
dually diminishes at the same time that its width increases, espe-
cially in the anterior part. Then all movement ceases, and the
pseudofilaria remains motionless. Towards the middle of the body,
there appears a dark circular spot, formed by a material more
refractive than the protoplasm, and the limits of which become more
and more distinct; this is the nucleolus. Around the nucleolus
there appears a transparent zone without granulations, the limits of
which are at first not very distinct, and which becomes the nucleus
of the cell. The pseudofilaria shortens and becomes more or less
oval; and an anterior projection or swelling, in which the refractive
granules have a tendency to accumulate, begims to be distinguish-
able.

We have then before us a Gregarina which has no longer any
important changes to undergo. It becomes elongated and acquires
more and more the form of a tube slightly dilated in its anterior
part. The posterior part becoming more elongated than the anterior,
the nucleus finally settles at the extremity of the anterior third of
the body. The refractive granules accumulated in the anterior
terminal inflection form a mass separated from the granular proto-
plasm of the rest of the body by a sort of transverse septum, formed

Miscellaneous. ay ball

by a layer of transparent protoplasm. The external part of the
protoplasm of the body, which at first formed a simple homogeneous
and transparent layer without granules, becomes more and more
distinctly bounded, and soon presents the form of a membrane with
a double contour. The nucleus becomes regularly oval and also
surrounds itself with a membrane.

By these changes and its increase in size the pseudofilaria finally
acquires the definitive form of Gregarina gigantea, and a length of as
much as 16 millims.

M. van Beneden follows this description of the development of the
Gregarina with some very interesting general considerations upon
the Monera and the Monerian phase of the Gregarinew. According
to him, if we admit that the substance of the Monera and cytodes is
identical with the sarcode of the Rhizopoda and the protoplasm of
cells, as regards physical and vital properties, we must regard it as
different from those bodies from a chemical point of view, since it
also contains the elements of the nuclear organs, which are differen-
tiated from it in the cell. He consequently proposes the name of
plasson for the constitutive substance of the body of the Monera and
cytodes. Although recognizing with him that both in the ontogenie
and in the phylogenic series we always, at the beginning, find this
plasson before meeting with cell-formations, it seems to us that the
necessity for this neologism has not yet made itself felt. Our
knowledge with regard to the nuclear formations compared with
protoplasm is too unsatisfactory to render it very urgent for us to
distinguish these substances. by names destined to indicate their
chemical differences. Moreover, if we were to commence this course,
we could not stop at the nomenclature proposed by M. van Beneden ;
it would be necessary to have :—a first name for the living substance
which does not present either nucleolus, nucleus, or enveloping mem-
brane; a second for that which has already abandoned the elements
necessary for the formation of the nucleolus; a third for that from
which have been separated the elements of a nucleolus and a nucleus,
bodies which M. van Beneden regards as chemically distinct (p. 146) ;
and a fourth for that which, besides these nuclear organs, has
furnished the elements of an enveloping membrane. This list is
still incomplete ; we should have to add to it, among others, the
protoplasm of the lepocytodes. It must be remarked, moreover,
that the substance to which M. van Beneden wishes to give the
name of plasson, on account of its chemical composition, is already a
complex substance, even from:a histological point of view, since the
author recognizes in the interior of the transparent mass granules
of two kinds, one kind being regarded by him as nutritive, com-
bustible elements; he even explains, by the presence or absence of
these granules, the different manner in which the movable and
immovable arms of the Gregarine in the ameeboid state behave.

The ontogenic development of the Gregarinc, as M. van Beneden
indicates, represents in an abridged form the phylogenic develop-
ment of the cell. We have here an example of endogenous gene-
ration by the formation of the nucleus in the body of the pseudo-

a2 Miscellaneous.

filaria ; but in the nuclear formation it is the nucleolus that first
appears—a fact which it is important to notice, and which is the
more striking because M. van Beneden has observed in the adult
G. gigantea a successive disappearance and reappearance of the
nucleoli.

To sum up, the Gregarina of the lobster would pass, in the course
of its embryonic development, through the following phases :—the
Monerian phase, the phase of the generative cytode, that of the
pseudofilaria, that of the protoplast, that of the encysted Gregarina,
and that of psorospermia.

There would therefore be in its evolution two phases during
which reproduction would take place by division :—1, that which
gives origin to the psorospermiz after encystation ; 2, that in which
the generative cytode produces pseudofilarize.—Journal de Zoologie,
tome i. (1872) pp. 1384-165; Bibl. Univ., Arch. des Sa. July 15,
1872, p..256.

Diatoms in Hot Springs.

Dr. Blake has collected diatoms at a hot spring in Pueblo valley,
Humboldt Co., Nevada, the temperature of which was 163° F.
More than fifty different species were recognized by him; and they
were found to be mostly identical with the species found in beds of
infusorial earth in Utah and described by Ehrenberg, showing that
the latter must have been accumulated in a hot lake, of about the
same temperature. No other living species were found in the hot
waters, excepting red alge. The deposit was a large one, and in it
there were concretions of silica. On making a thin section of one of
these concretions, a pair of legs of a coleopterous insect were visible
in the quartz; the greater part of the concretion was made up of
petrified algze.

In one of the hot springs at the California geysers, having a tem-
perature of 198° F., he found two kinds of Conferva—one capillary,
resembling Hydrocrocis Bischoffii, but larger; the other a filament,
with globular enlargements at intervals. In another spring, the
temperature 174° F., many Oscillarize were found, which by the
interlacement of their delicate fibres formed a semigelatinous mass,
and also two diatoms. In the water of the creek of Geyser Canon,
112° F., the alge formed layers sometimes 3 inches thick, covering
the bottom of the pools, and the same diatoms were found as in the
174° spring. The waters are acidulated by the presence of free
sulphuric acid ; and Dr. Blake suggests that this may account for the
rarity of diatoms.—Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iv. pp. 183, 189, 193, 197.

On the Habits of Galeodes pallipes. By Prof. Copr.

Prof. Cope exhibited a specimen of a G'aleodes, probably G. pallipes
of Say, taken in the town of Denver, Colorado, by Dr. Gehrung.
According to that gentleman, it was common in that place in houses,
and was an enemy and destroyer of the Crimea lectularius (bed-bug).
In captivity, it showed a preference for them as food, and crushed
them in its short falces, preliminary to sucking their juices.—Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil. part iii. p. 295 (1872).

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. |

No. 59. NOVEMBER 1872.

XLV.—On the Hydroid Lar sabellarum, Grosse, and its Repro-
duction. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

[Plate XIX.]

Many years have elapsed since Mr. Gosse described, in the
‘Transactions of the Linnean Society,’ a remarkable Hydroid,
which he named Lar sabellarum. From that time to the
present nothing more has been heard of it; and meanwhile it
has been regarded with a kind of polite suspicion, and has
held its place in our systematic works almost on sufferance.
The unique oddity of its configuration and the grotesqueness
of its attitude, as depicted by Mr. Gosse’s pencil, are such as
to justify some amount of incredulity, or at least to create a
desire for further information. Allman, with a mixture of
~ courtesy and scepticism, says of it, “we are almost tempted to
regard it as an abnormal condition of some other form ;”’ and
in my ‘ History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes’ I have
assigned it a provisional place, in the hope that some new light
might be thrown upon it by further observation. Under these
circumstances it was with peculiar pleasure that . obtained
during the past summer a fine colony of this h* fmythical
Hydroid in full maturity, and am thus enabled bot: to remove
all doubts as to its true nature, and to complete the history
of which Gosse has given us the first lines.

The Lar was dredged off the @apstone at Ifracombe ; and
- its polypites were distributed along the margin of a Sabella-
tube, the very habitat in which Gosse’s specimen occurred.

In the first place, I am able to vouch for the general accuracy
of the figure which its discoverer has given us and ean affirm
that, extraordinary as it /ooks, it does no more than justice to

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist.. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 23

314 Rev. T. Hincks on Lar sabellarum

the original. It may, perhaps, be admitted that the skilful
pencil of the artist has introduced the slightest touch of cari-
cature ; but it really only serves to bring out more strikingly
the remarkable peculiarities of the creature.

The most marked characteristics of the genus Lar are to be
found in the number and disposition of the tentacles, and in the
curious head-like lobe in which the body of the polypite
terminates above. The arms are reduced to two, which spring
close together from the base of a prominent bilabiate proboscis
endowed with great mobility ; they are smooth, not muricated
or roughened with clusters of thread-cells, and very extensile.
These two tentacles face the mouth-bearing proboscis, and act
with it in the capture of food; they are frequently jerked in
the direction of the latter organ, which is furnished with two
broad lips, and is itself capable of the freest and most energetic
movement. ‘The proboscis is marked off from the rest of the
body by a well-defined constriction ; near the top of it occurs
a small space, which is thickly paved with thread-cells,
forming a kind of boss a little below the summit (PI. XIX.
fig.2,a). The polypites are fusiform, with a trace of brownish
colour a little below the terminal lobe, perfectly sessile, and
quite naked; they are very active and lively in their movements,
and are constantly throwing the body and tentacles into the *
most fantastic attitudes. ‘'The ludicrously close resemblance”’
which they bear to the human figure has already been noticed
by Gosse, and will be apparent to any one on a reference to the
Plate (Pl. XIX. fig.1). In this genus, then, we have a most
interesting modification of the structure that prevails amongst
the Hydroida. Instead of a wreath of tentacles immediately
surrounding the mouth, or several whorls distributed over the
body, we have here two tentacles only, placed on one side and -
opposed to a highly developed movable proboscis, which acts
energetically with them in the capture of prey, and compensates
for the reduced number of the prehensile arms.

Gosse was not so fortunate as to meet with the reproductive
zooids, and was therefore unable to give a satisfactory diagnosis
of the genus ; but the Ilfracombe specimen supplied this de-
ficiency, and has shown that the gonosome, no less than the
trophosome, is marked by very distinctive characters.

The fertile polypites of Zar (Pl. XIX. fig. 1, ff) are distri-
buted along the creeping stolon, amongst the alimentary zooids,
and bear a strong general resemblance to those of Hydractinia.
They are slender, somewhat filiform bodies, destitute of ten-
tacula, and terminated at the free extremity by a globular en-
largement, in which many thread-cells are imbedded ; they are
generally inferior in size to the alimentary polypites. The re-

and its Reproduction. SLs

productive buds are borne in clusters of three or four on the
upper portion of the body, and when mature detach themselves
as free medusiform zooids (planoblasts*); they are destitute
of an ectothecal covering (a character which they share with the
gonozooids of Clavatella, Corymorpha, and Cladonema), and
are therefore freely exposed to the surrounding water. In an
early stage of development the buds are much elongated
(Pl. XIX. fig. 1), and take on their hemispherical form as
they approach maturity.

The planoblast (Pl. XTX. figs. 3,4), at the time of its libera-
tion, is almost hemispherical in form ; the umbrella is perfectly
colourless and destitute of thread-cells. The digestive sac or
manubrium is very mutable in shape; normally it is sub-
cylindrical, and somewhat swollen at the base, with a slightly
lobate mouth. Six radiating canals traverse the umbrella,
terminating on the margin in as many oval bulbs of a brownish
colour, from which six smooth tentacles originate. Both ocelli
and lithocysts are wanting; but halfway between every two
tentacles a minute sac occurs on the margin of the umbrella,
containing two or three glittering bodies, which appear to be
thread-cells (Pl. XIX. fig. 6). The planoblast, when detached,
_ bears with it a portion of the peduncle which had formed the
bond of connexion between it and the parent stock ; this sur-
vives as a somewhat conical process above the base of the
manubrium (Pl. XIX. fig. 3,2), but is no doubt absorbed
after a time.

Six is an unusual number for the radiating canals ; amongst
the British Hydroida it is met with only in Clavatella (which
has also occasionally four) and in the genus Wills¢a of Forbes.
The smooth tentacles (which closely resemble those of the
polypite), the absence of the customary organs of sense, and
the minute marginal sacs with thread-cells may also be noted
as significant characters T.

There can be no doubt that the genus Lar must stand as
the type of a distinct family amongst the Hydroida Athecata,
which will present features as strongly marked as those of any
group in the suborder. Indeed the important modification in
the structure of the polypite has scarcely a parallel within the
limits of the whole order. A question, however, arises as to

* Planoblast (wandering bud) is a happy and expressive term intro-
duced by Allman to designate the free gonozooid.

+ Allman considers it probable that the marginal sac is the origin of
“whatin the adult Medusa would become an interradial marginal tentacle”
(‘ Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids,’ part ii. p. 427).

The substance of this paper was communicated to Prof. Allman by
letter, and is incorporated in the second part of his ‘Monograph’ just
issued by the Ray Society.

23*

316 On Lar sabellarum and its Reproduction.

the name of the family. Laride (which would be the natural
designation, and which I have adopted in my ‘ History ’) has
been appropriated by the ornithologists ; and Allman proposes
to substitute for it the compound Hydrolaride. I confess that
I have serious doubts as to the expediency of this change. It
seems to me that no practical inconvenience of any moment is
likely to arise from the identity of the two family names, under
the circumstances of the case; while there is a positive dis-
advantage in the adoption of a term which does not at once
suggest the typical genus. The rules respecting zoological
nomenclature have been framed with a view to general con-
venience, but are not to be inflexibly applied without regard
to special circumstances. In the present case I should feel in-
clined to retain the name Larida*.

The following is the amended diagnosis of the genus Lar,
and of the only known species.

Subkingdom CH#LENTERATA.
Order HY DROIDA.
Suborder ATHECATA, Hincks.
Fam. Laride.

Genus LAr, Gosse.

Polypites fusiform, developed on a creeping filiform stolon
clothed with a polypary ; tentacles two, filiform, springing from
one side of the base of a bilabiate proboscis, which is separated
by a constriction from the rest of the body. Reproduction by
means of medusiform planoblasts, which are borne on im-
perfectly developed polypites (blastostyles), terminating above
in a spherical cluster of thread-cells.

Gonozoo1D: umbrella (at the time of liberation) subhemi-
spherical; manubrium destitute of oral tentacles; radiating
canals six ; marginal tentacles six, springing from non-ocellated
bulbs.

Lar sabellarum, Gosse.

Polypites about 7; inch in height; a patch of thread-cells
near the summit of the terminal lobe; mouth furnished with
two broad lips; tentacula very extensile, smooth.

Gonozootds borne in clusters of three or four on the upper
portion of the slender blastostyles: umbrella (at the time of
liberation) colourless, destitute of thread-cells; manubrium
subeylindrical, slightly swollen at the base, of a reddish-brown

* Cases like the present, in which two family names are identical while

the names of the typical genera differ (Zar, Larus), are likely seldom to
occur.

On new Genera and Species of Coleoptera. 317

colour, not reaching to the orifice of the bell; tentacles smooth,
springing from brown bulbs; a minute marginal sac, with
thread-cells, halfway between every two tentacles.

Hab. Ilfracombe, off the Capstone, in shallow water, on the
tube of a Sabella.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.

Fig. 1. A colony of Lar sabellarum, Gosse, highly magnified: f f, fertile
polypites, laden with the reproductive buds.

Fig. 2. A single polypite (a portrait) : a, collection of thread-cells.

Fig. 3. The medusiform gonozooid or planoblast: z, the remains of the
peduncle by which it was attached.

Fig. 4. The same, with the tentacles extended.

Fig. 5, The same, as seen from above.

Fig. 6, The marginal sac, containing thread-cells.

XLVI.—Notes on Coleoptera, with Descriptions of new Genera
and Spectes.—Part II. By Francis P. Pascos, F.L.S. &e.

[Plate XV.]
Inst of Genera and Species.
TROGOSITID.
Neaspis (n. g.) villosa ARRHENODINZE.
Poltin ae ad Prophthalmus sanguinalis.
—— planipennis.
CUPESIDA, Stratiorrhina (x. g.) xiphias, Westw.

Cupes ocularis. Eupsalis promissus.

BRENTHID~. BELOPHERINZ.
Blysmia (. g.) ruficollis.

TAPHRODERINZ,
Taphroderes filiformis. CEOCEPHALINZ.
—— obtusus. Ceocephalus internatus.

EPHEBOCERINE. —— tenuitarsis.
Ionthocerus ophthalmicus. ITHYSTENINZE.

TR ACHELIZINA Phocylides (x. g.) collaris.

: vine —— ebeninus.
Trachelizus Howittii. Achrionota (. g.) bilineata.
Cordus semipunctatus.
Amorphocephalus sulcicollis,
NEASPIS.
(Trogositide.)

Caput transversum ; clypeus brevis, sutura clypeali fere obsoleta ;
labrum late transversum. Mentuwm parvum, subrotundatum ;
labium latum, subtransversum, apice anguste truncatum, barba-
tum ; maaille lobis subsequalibus, interiore mutico. Oculi trans-
versi, integri, grosse granulati. Antenne 10-articulate, articulo
basali unilateraliter valde ampliato, secundo et tertio obconicis, illo

318 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

majore, quarto usque septimum gradatim brevioribus et latiori-
bus, octavo, nono et decimo clavam magnam formantibus, sed
duobus ultimis quasi conjunctis. Prothorax transversus, lateri-
bus foliaceis, apice late emarginatus. Hlytra oblonga, lateribus
anguste explanato-marginatis. Femora compressa, tibie recta ;
tarsi lineares 4-articulati. Cove antice valde transverse,
quatuor postici approximati. Prosternum angustum. Abdomen
segmentis longitudine fere sequalibus, liberis.

According to Lacordaire’s arrangement of the Trogositide,
the 10-jointed antennze would place this genus in the A‘go-
line ; but in other respects it agrees better with Leperina, or,
but for the inner unarmed lobeof the maxille, with Peltis. After
a close examination of the tarsi, I can find no indication of an
atrophied basal joint, as is usual in this family, although it is
possible there may be one. The suture between the ninth
and tenth joints of the club of the antenne is so nearly obli-
terated that, except in certain lights, it does not seem to
exist ; as itis, J mention it with hesitation. In any case, the
genus is especially differentiated in having seven joints only
to the antenne exclusive of the club; and it should, I think,
form the type of a new subfamily (Neaspidine). I received
three specimens of the species described below four or five
years ago from my valued correspondent Dr. Howitt, of Mel-
bourne, but without any precise locality. In appearance it
is like Peltis oblonga, but much smaller and proportionally a
little broader.

Neaspis villosa.

NV. depressa, ovalis, supra fusca et subgriseo-villosa, marginibus pro-
thoracis, labro, antennis, corpore infra pedibusque pallide ferru-
gineis ; capite prothoraceque sat vage punctato; scutello semieir-
culari; elytris lateribus parallelis prothorace parum angustioribus,
dorso striato-punctatis, subrugosis. Long. 2—23 lin.

Hab. Australia.
Peltis monilata.

P. oblongo-ovata, fusca, opaca, marginibus prothoracis ferrugineis ;
capite prothoraceque reticulato-punctatis, punctis singulis in fundo
tuberculo minuto instructis ; antennis ferrugineis; lobo interiore
maxillarum transverso, antice rotundato, inermi; scutello parvo ;
elytris rugoso-reticulato-punctatis, singulis lineis tribus elevatis
munitis; corpore infra pedibusque piceis, confertim punctulatis ;
prosterno planato, dilatato, postice late truncato ; acetabulis an-
ticis occlusis ; tibiis anticis apice spinoso-productis. Long. 4} lin.

Hab. Australia.
In general appearance this species is somewhat between
Peltis oblonga and P. procera; and, as in the latter, the inner lobe

and Species of Coleoptera. 319

of the maxille differs from that of Peltis proper (P. grossa) in not
running out and ending in a hook. The anterior cotyloid
cavities, on the other hand, are closed in behind; and in this
it differs from P. procera. It is this latter character which
has induced Dr. Leconte to propose a new genus (Nosodes*)
for the reception of the American species (serrata and si/-
phides); but then these species are said to have the internal
maxillary lobe hooked. Hitherto, I believe, it has been taken
for granted that this is the case in all the species ; and Lacor-
daire even differentiates his tribe ‘ Peltides ” by this character.
With regard to the anterior cotyloid cavities, rather too much
stress has, it appears to me, been laid on them; at least I
think it is as well to be cautious in separating generically
nearly allied species by characters depending on them. Under
an ordinary lens, and in acertain light, the lines on the elytra
have a beaded appearance, which suggested the name.

Cupes ocularis.

C. griseo-brunnea; capite longitudinaliter profunde sulcato, supra
oculos subbituberculato; oculis amplis; prothorace capite mi-
nore, transverso, dorso utrinque fortiter excavato, angulis anticis
subacutis ; scutello postice latiore, rotundato ; elytris carinatis,
inter carinulas biseriatim fortiter, sat confertim punctatis; cor-
pore infra infuscato. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Japan.

This is the second Asiatic species of a genus otherwise
American, except two undescribed species from Borneo in my
collection; the Chilian species (C. Latredlle?) differs from the
others in the antenne having a large basal joint and in other cha-
racters. The species before us is remarkable for its large eyes.

Taphroderes filiformis.

7. angustissimus, nitide piceus, disperse villosus; elytris flavo
trifasciatis ; capite prothoraci latitudine fere sequali, subtilis-
sime vage punctulato; rostro apice flavo; antennis ferrugineis ;
prothorace obsolete impunctato, ante medium valde angusto ;
elytris prothorace angustioribus et sesquilongioribus, apicibus
angulo exteriore productis, fascia flava ante, altera pone me-
dium tertiaque apicali notatis; femoribus anticis ampliatis.
Long. 3 lin.

Hab, Amazons.

In the females of this genus the antenne are longer and
more slender, and the rostrum is not stouter at the base as in
the males. The description of 7’. brevipes, Gyll., in Schénherr

* To Nosodes must be referred the European P. dentata. It is the type
of Caltys, C. G. Thomson, a name of later date than Nosodes.

320 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

appears to have been made from the latter sex—and not from
a female, as stated.

Taphroderes obtusus.

7. robustior, nitide piceus, levigatus, capite quam prothorace
multo angustiore, obsolete punctulato; rostro paulo arcuato ;
antennis piceis, articulis tertio usque decimum unilateraliter pro-
ductis ; prothorace elongato, pone medium ampliato, antice supra
linea longitudinali impressa notato; elytris brevioribus, apice ob-
tusis, maculis quatuor ferrugineis (2 ante, 2 pone medium)
ornatis; corpore infra piceo-nigro; coxis anticis fulvis. Long.
4 lin.

Hab. Amazons.

At least twice as stout as the preceding, the apices of the
elytra not produced, &c.

In reference to M. Lacordaire’s note (Gen. vu. p. 410), I
have reexamined my Cyphagogus advena; and although its
shorter rostrum approaches it to Zemioses, as I have already
remarked, in other respects (¢. e. antenne, legs, &c.) it is a
true Cyphagogus. Aprostoma, Guér., which Lacordaire had
not seen, but refers to the Taphroderine, is a Colydiid, after-
wards named by Erichson Mecedanum.

Ionthocerus ophthalmicus. Pl. XV. fig. 4.

I. omnino nitide rufo-ferrugineus, apicibus articulorum antennarum
nigris exceptis ; rostro modice crasso, basi subcylindrico, antennis
in medio insertis; prothorace levi, dorso antice tenuiter, postice
fortiter sulcato ; elytris simpliciter striatis, striis tribus sutura-
libus tantum conspicuis, apicibus extus planato-productis; tarsis

_ parce pilosis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Rockhampton).

Lacordaire founded Jonthocerus on a species from Ceylon,
from which the present differs in its uniform colour, thinner
rostrum, and glossy elytra otherwise sculptured. My speci-
men, like Lacordaire’s, appears to be a male. With Hphebo-
cerus, Lac., it forms a subfamily remarkable for the long
slender antenne clothed with delicate hairs, and large eyes
occupying the greater part of the head.

Trachelizus Howitttit.

T. nitide fulvo-testaceus ; capite prothoraceque levigatis, remote
punctatis ; rostro paulo arcuato, haud gibboso, inter antennas
sulco longitudinali impresso; oculis parvulis ; antennis articulo
primo vix incrassato, ultimo acuminato ; sulco prothoracis ab apice
ad basin extenso ; elytris fortiter striatis, sutura valde elevata ;
corpore infra sparse punctulato ; metasterno segmentisque duobus

and Species of Coleoptera. 321

basalibus abdominis longitudinaliter late excavatis ; coxis anticis
approximatis ; femoribus subpedunculatis. Long. 2 ln.

Hab. Melbourne.

I have adopted M. Jekel’s catalogue name for this little
species, the only one, I believe, hitherto found in Australia.

Cordus semipunctatus. Pl. XV. fig. 7.

C.(¢) nitide ferrugineus, capite pone oculos cylindrico, subcon-
stricto ; rostro difformi, basi alte carinato, inter antennas excavato,
apice dilatato ; mandibulis productis; antennis validis, articulis
secundo usque decimum transversis, cylindricis, perfoliatis, ultimo
ovato-acuminato; prothorace oblongo, utrinque rotundato, basi
apiceque eequali, antice subtiliter vage, postice gradatim magis con-
fertim et fortiter punctato; scutello nullo; elytris subparallelis, late
suleato-punctatis, punctis haud approximatis, interstitiis acute
carinulatis, apice obtuse rotundatis ; pectore vage punctato; ab-
domine nitidissimo, impunctato; femoribus crassis, muticis ; tibiis
compressis,in medio sensim incrassatis, apice spina conica instructis;
tarsis linmearibus. Long. 83 lin,

Hab. Natal.

This species has the normal head of Cordus and the broad
irregular rostrum of Amorphocephalus, and is therefore inter-
mediate in these respects between the two genera; but as the
former character apppears to be of the most importance, it is
referred to Cordus; it may, however, be desirable eventually
to separate it generically.

Amorphocephalus sulcicollis.

A.(¢) nitide ferrugineus ; capite brevi, postice vix truncato, inter
oculos verticeque profunde triangulariter excavato, fundo excava-
tionis leviter sulcato ; oculis ampliatis ; rostro supra paulo arcuato,
longitudinaliter fortiter excavato, basi utrinque oblique constricto
et lobo ovali munito, infra cornu verticali armato; antennis arti-
culis secundo usque octavum valde transversis, nono et decimo
longioribus, perfoliatis, ultimo conico; prothorace oblongo, basi
quam apice parum latiore, in medio fortiter canaliculato ; elytris
prothorace in medio vix latioribus, striatis, interstitiis convexis
subtilissime sparse punctulatis ; tibiis intus bisinuatis, apice spina
conica instructis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

The canaliculate prothorax is an exceptional character in
the subfamily to which Amorphocephalus belongs; but it oc-
curs in the genus T’rachelizus, the representative of the group.
I have two other specimens of Amorphocephalus trom West
Australia, one of which may possibly be the female of the
above (see fig. 9, a, the head), the other (see fig. 9, 6, the

322 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

head) may be the female of A. australis, Lac., only that the
latter is said to be from Moreton Bay; its prothorax is not
eanaliculate, but is rather closely and coarsely punctured.

Prophthalmus sanguinalis. Pl. XV. fig. 6.

P. validus, nitide piceo-rufus; ¢ rostro levi, supra fortiter exca-
vato, apicem versus late explanato ; antennis articulis tertio usque
octavum longiusculis, subeequalibus, ultimo duobus precedentibus
conjunctim parum longiore; capite prothoraceque impunctatis,
opacis, supra nitidis, illo ab oculis gradatim paulo latiore, hoc in
medio lineatim suleato, apice sulcatim constricto ; elytris longitu-
dine prothoraci cum capite usque ad oculos equalibus, sulcatis,
sulcis primo et secundo a sutura impunctatis, interstitiis planatis,
reliquis punctatis, interstitiis angustioribus, elevatis, singulo
lineola basali alteraque apicali, et plagis duabus, una ante altera
pone medium, sanguineis, decorato, apicibus paulo divergentibus,
subtruncatis, corpore infra pedibusque nitidissimis, levigatis ;
femoribus anticis validis, infra bidentatis. Long. 17 lin.

Hab. India.

Apparently near P. potens, Lac., but with broader sutural
interstices and the others narrower, and having two large
lateral blood-red patches on each elytron. Besides the differ-
ence generically, the female has a broader and more opaque
prothorax, and has only one tooth on the anterior femora, and
their trochanters not produced.

Prophthalmus planipennis. Pl. XV. fig. 5.

P. niger ; capite rostroque levibus, nitidis, parce irregulariter punc-
tatis, ¢ hoe supra fortiter excavato, apicem versus paulo expla-
nato; genis juguloque transversim plicatis ; antennis articulis se-
eundo usque sextum subturbinatis, ceteris parum gradatim crassi-
oribus, ultimo anguste ovato ; prothorace in medio nitido, impune-
tato, ad latera squamositate grisea induto, apice integro; elytris
subnitidis, ad latera abrupte deflexis, dorso planatis, tenuiter sul-
catis, interstitiis 1. et 2. latioribus, planatis, tertio basi, quarto pone
medium, apice excepto, flavis, cum quinto angustis elevatis, ceteris
magis depressis; corpore infra pedibusque nitidis ; femoribus an-
ticis subtus dente valido instructis. Foemina latet. Long. 9 lin.

Hab. Celebes.

Remarkable for the flatness of its elytra; in other respects
it is allied to P. tridentatus, Fab.

STRATIORRHINA.
(Brenthidee. )
Ab Estenorhino differt vostro ante antennas serrato vel dentato, et
mandibulis parvis, concretis.
The type of this genus is Arrhenodes xiphias, Westw.

and Species of Coleoptera. 323

(Cabinet of Oriental Entomology, p. 31, pl. xv. fig. 1), re-
ferred by Lacordaire, oddly enough, to his Hstenorhinus, from
which it essentially differs in the characters given above.
M. Lacordaire mentions having. seen two other allied species
from Malacca.

Eupsalis promissus. Pl. XV. fig. 8.

£. nitide rufo-castaneus, elytris oblonge flavo guttatis; capite an-
tice convexo; rostro inter antennas elevato, basi utrinque lobo
oblongo retrorsum producto; antennis articulis quinque basa-
libus subobconicis, sexto usque decimum oyalibus, ultimo ovato-
acuminato ; prothorace sat anguste ovato, impunctato; elytris
subtiliter striato-punctatis, stria suturali excepta,in certa luce levi-
gatis; femoribus anticis subtus dente acuto instructis, reliquis
subtus ad apicem emarginatis. Long. 5-7 lin.

Hab. Batchian.

The female only differs in having the rostrum, beyond the
insertion of the antennze, slender and cylindrical; in the males
the mandibles vary from being only slightly prominent to the
normal condition, as shown in fig. 8. The lobe at the base of
the rostrum on each side leaves a clear space between it and
the cheek, or part just before the eye. The other three de-
scribed species of Hupsalis are one North-American, extend-
ing so far north as Canada, and two African, including one
from Madagascar; but I have another species from Old

Calabar.
BLYSMIA.

(Brenthide.)

( 2 ) Caput transversum, postice truncatum, collum retractum ; ros-
trum breviusculum, cylindricum, basi inerassatum, elevatum.
Oculi rotundati, majusculi. Antenne lineares, corpore longiores,
articulis longitudinaliter strigosis. Prothorax breviter ovatus,
supra haud sulcatus. Hlytra breviuscula, parallela, apice late ro-
tundata. Pedes breves, antici majores ; femora modice crassa,
mutica; tibie normales; ¢ars? articulo primo breviusculo. Meta-
sternum et abdomen sat brevia.

The male is unknown, but probably differs principally in
having a broader rostrum and the antenne inserted more
towards its middle. The genus in its aspect is quite different
from the ordinary Brenthide ; but its affinities are, I think,
with Belopherus. The tarsi seem to be glabrous or only very
slightly ciliated beneath; but my specimen having been
gummed down, it is difficult to be exact. The abdomen,
however, which is comparatively short, is nearly twice as
long as the metasternum.

324 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera
Blysmia ruficollis. Pl. XV. fig. 1.

B. nigra, opaca, prothorace (apice excepto) rufo, subtus nitide lutea ;
capite impunctato, supra postice subbilobo ; rostro, apice excepto,
rufo-testaceo, subnitido; antennis nigrescentibus, parce setosulis,
articulis tribus basalibus brevioribus, secundo multo breviore ;
prothorace impunctato, apice quam basi angustiore et nitide nigro ;
elytris prothorace haud latioribus, supra subdepressis, striatim
fortiter foveatis, foveis quadratis ; pedibus nigris, nitidis. Long.
3 lin.

Hab. Batchian.

Ceocephalus internatus.

C. rufo-ferrugineus, nitidus, subtus, prothorace femoribusque cas-
taneo-rufis ; ¢ rostro prothorace breviore, basi canaliculato, apicem
versus gradatim dilatato; antennis articulis secundo usque decimum
transversis. perfoliatis, tribus ultimis parum crassioribus ; protho-
race elytris paulo latiore, supra profunde sulcato, apice nigro-
marginato; elytris fere parallelis, apice paulo explanatis, late
rotundatis, striato-punctatis, stria juxta suturam profunda, im-
punctata, postice in strias duas divisa; femoribus apice nigris,
subtus obsolete dentatis. Long. 7-9 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

The female has a more slender rostrum, with the antenne
inserted nearer the base.

Ceocephalus tenuitarsis.

C. nitide castaneus ; rostro prothorace multo breviore, basi canalicu-
lato, versus apicem gradatim dilatato; antennis articulis secundo
usque decimum transversim moniliformibus, tribus ultimis majo-
ribus, clavam quasi formantibus; prothorace elytris vix latiore,
impunctato, profunde sulcato; elytris fere parallelis, brevioribus,
sulcato-foveatis, foveis approximatis ; pedibus sat vage setosulis ;
tarsis angustis. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

In this and the preceding species the constriction of the
neck begins a little behind the eyes; the head, therefore, is
more abruptly limited than in the African members of the
genus.

PHOCYLIDES.

(Brenthide.)

A Prodectore differt tibiis intermediis et posticis brevibus compressis,
tarsis articulo basali brevi, obconico; a Diuro antennis articulis
secundo tertioque fere equalibus, prothorace longitudinaliter sul-
cato, et femoribus clavatis, basi pedunculatis.

The antennz also are shorter and stouter than in either
Prodector or Diurus ; and the elytra at the apex are drawn out

and Species of Coleoptera. 325

in two parallel and contiguous tails, nearly of the same width
as the rest of the elytra. Brenthus ruficollis, Guér., a species
not noticed by Lacordaire, also belongs to this genus.

Phocylides collaris. Pl. XV. fig. 2.

P. niger, subnitidus, prothoracis apice basique sordide rufis; ¢ ca-
pite postice fortiter impresso ; rostro in medio lineatim canalicu-
lato ; prothorace subtilissime punctulato, utrinque pone medium
paulo incurvato, apice transyersim tri- vel quadriimpresso, pone
apicem profunde longitudinaliter sulcato; elytris postice sensim
angustioribus, prope suturam bistriatis, cauda modice elongata ;
corpore infra nitide piceo ; Q rostro basi sola canaliculato ; elytris
singulis apice extus in processum mamilliformem rufum productis.
Long. ¢ 19 lin., 2 11 lin.

Hab. Batchian.
Phocylides ebeninus.

P. niger, capite rostroque nitidis, minus elongatis, illo postice paulo
angustiore, hoc late sed minus profunde canaliculato; prothorace
opaco, subtiliter parce punctulato, pone medium utrinque modice
rotundato; elytris parallelis, prope suturam bistriatis, apice
singulorum in,‘caudam multo breviorem producto; corpore infra
pedibusque nitidis. Long. 9 lin.

Hab. Amboyna.
ACHRIONOTA.

(Brenthide.)

Ab Ithysteno differt elytris singulatim stria unica suturali instructis ;
et femoribus linearibus; a Diuro rostro apice dilatato (vel apice
obcuneiformi).

In Ithystenus there are two striz, and the femora are strongly
pedunculate; the head, antennz, rostrum, and legs are also
shorter than in any of its species. The single character that
distinguishes Achrionota from Diurus is too important to allow
of the species described below being referred to that genus.
The female is unknown.

Achrionota bilineata. Pl. XV. fig. 3.

A, fusca, opaca, parte apicali rostri pedibusque rufo-ferrugineis,
punctis raris squamositate ochracea repletis ubique tecta ; capite
linea longitudinali tenuiter impresso ; rostro capite plus duplo
longiore, supra ante antennas fortiter sulcato, pone antennas
tenuiter bisulcato; antennis griseo-pubescentibus, setulis vagis
nigris adspersis; prothorace dorso punctis bivittatim notato ;
elytris subsulcatis, remote punctatis, singulis linea ochracea e
squamulis condensatis formata, ornatis, apicibus angulo exteriore
in caudam contortam linearem productis ; corpore infra pedibusque
punctis minoribus conspersis. Long. 8-10 lin.

Hab. Sarawak.

326 = Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of Inara.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. Blysmia ruficollis (2 ).

Fig. 2. Phocylides collaris (3).

Fig. 3. Achrionota bilineata (3).

Fig. 4. Tonthocerus ophthalmicus (3); 4a, right fore leg. The hairs on
the antenne are too delicate to be represented in a figure of this
size.

Fig. 5. Prophthalmus planipennis ( ¢ ).

Fig. 6. sanguinalis (3).

Fig. 7. Cordus semipunctatus (3); 7a, head and antenne, side view.

Fig. 8. Eupsalis promissus (3). The antenne are not sufficiently accu-
rate as regards the last five joints.

Fig. 9a. Head of Amerphocephalus, sp. nov. (Q), (prothorax canalicu-
late); 9 6, head of Amorphocephalus, sp. nov. (2), (prothorax
not canaliculate, allied to A. australis, Lac.).

Fig. 10 a. Side view of the head of Amorphocephalus sulcicollis (3);

104, ditto, top view.

Fig. 11. Side view of the head of Cordus hospes, Germ., for comparison.

Fig. 12. Head and antenna of Prophthalmus sanguinalis (Q ).

Fig. 13. Head and antenna of Stratiorrhina xiphias (3), Westw. (Arrhe-
nodes).

XLVII.—Notes on the Mud- Tortoises of India (Trionyx,
Geoffroy). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Tue Three-clawed or Mud-Tortoises are a very natural and
well-defined group; but the division of them ito species
has been a subject of great difficulty to European zoologists,
chiefly arising from the very imperfect material which they
have had at their command.

Formerly Geoffroy, Bell, and Fitzinger seem to have re-
garded the extent of the union of the ribs as a character of a
species ; the latter even attempted to divide them into genera
from characters derived from this part. But it is now well
understood that the extent to which the ribs are united de-
pends entirely upon, the age of the animal, the union being
only partial m the young, and entire in the adult, as in the
land tortoises and terrapins.

The number, extent, and shape of the sternal callosities no
doubt afford very good characters for the distinction of the
species, if adult animals are compared together; but they are
gradually developed, and in some species (or perhaps in some
individuals of the same species) they are much later developed
and much longer in coming to their perfect state than they are
in others. ‘This is also the case with the development of the
odd bone in front of the dorsal disk; so that these parts can
only be used as characters when specimens of the same age
and stage of development are compared, and especially speci-
mens which have arrived at their adult state.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India, — 327

The sternum being furnished with flaps on the sides (which
cover the legs when they are contracted), or being narrow at the
sides and leaving the legs bare (as in most freshwater and marine
tortoises), furnishes a most natural and easily observed character
for the division of the group, and as such has been used by most
authors. But it has been shown that each of these groups con-
tains animals with very different skulls; and it is a matter of
serious consideration whether the form of the skull, on which
such important peculiarities in the animal economy depend, is
not of more importance than the covering or exposure of the
feet when they are withdrawn. When first the covering of the
feet was observed, it was connected with a bony margin to the
dorsal disk ; but it is now well ascertained that many species
with covered feet have the margin flexible and without bones,
like the other mud-tortoises. It is to be remarked that all the
tortoises that have flaps to cover their feet have callosities on
the two anterior bones of the sternum, which have never yet
been observed in those which have naked feet. This character is
common to those that have thin skulls and jaws and narrow
alveolar edge, and those which have thicker skulls and wider
alveolar surface.

Cuvier and Wagler described and figured the skulls of
two or three species of this group; but all the skulls which
they had the opportunity of studying belonged to a single
type of form, of a thick and solid consistency. In my ‘ Cata-
logue of Shield Reptiles in the British Museum’ I figured
a few skulls of the species which we then possessed, pointing
out that they belonged to two different groups—one solid, and
the other light and thin; and in the ‘ Supplement to the Cata-
logue of Shield Reptiles’ I figured and described the skulls
of many more species. I used this character to separate the
soft-disk mud-tortoises into two families, Trionychide and
Chitrade—one having a solid, and the other a thin and light
skull; and I divided the genera of each family according to
the form of the skull, especially the form of the alveolar edge
of the jaws. I consider this one of the most important steps
towards the proper division of the species and defining them,
as it affords us the power of dividing them into natural
groups: for example, Chitra indica, Trionyx gangeticus, and
Tyrse nilotica have been considered specimens of the same
species, but they belong to two very different families ; Chitra
indica and Pelochelys Cantort have been regarded as the
same species, the one having a very long ovate, and the other
a short square skull. In the same manner Fordia africana and
Tyrse nilotica (the one having a broad, flat alveolar surface,
and the other a sharp thin one) have been regarded as the

328 Dr. J.E.Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India.

same species; whilst a Central-African tortoise, Aspidonectes
aspilus, has been separated from Zyrse nilotica because the
individual had slightly differently developed sternal callosities,
whereas the examination of the jaws shows that they are the
same species.

The study of the jaws at various ages has shown that the
form of the alveolar surface is the same in the young as in the
adult, and therefore furnishes a very excellent character for di-
stinguishing the species ; and if one had skulls of all the species
in the collection, they would no doubt afford the characters of
the various kinds, and also the best arrangement of them into
groups. But, unfortunately, that is not the case, and we are
obliged to do the best we can under the circumstances. Un-
fortunately, too, the skulls cannot be extracted from the stuffed
specimens without destroying them ; and it is always difficult
to be certain that the skulls and skeletons that you receive
belong to the species they are said to represent ; for the char-
acters by which the species are distinguished in their perfect
state have been destroyed. Every care has been taken to pre-
vent an error of this kind; and in general the characters of the
genera have been taken from the examination of the head in
the perfect animal, and of the skulls extracted from duplicate
specimens. It is much to be regretted that the Indian zoolo-
gists do not study the numerous Asiatic species and give us the
result of their examination, considering that there are only two
Indian zoologists in modern times who have paid the slightest
attention to these animals, and they have not yet learned the
elements of herpetology. ‘Thus Mr. Theobald and Dr. Ander-
son have described two most different animals under the name
of Trionyx Phayret, and have described them in such an in-
correct and imperfect manner that it is impossible to make out
to what species, or section, or genus either of them is refer-
able.

The receipt of some additional specimens of mud-tortoises
and their skulls required that they should be determined ; and
to do this I have been induced to study and revise what I had
formerly written: as our materials are so imperfect, from the
Indian collectors not sending home specimens, it is a matter of
ereat difficulty. We know far less of the tortoises of our
Indian possessions than we do of those of almost any other part
of the world. Experience has shown me that the most reliable
character for the distinction and arrangement of the tortoises,
and especially of the mud-tortoises, is to be obtained by the
study of the skulls; I have therefore been particular in col-
lecting them, and (where it could be done without injury)
have had the skulls removed from several of the specimens.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 329

The result of this examination has been the discovery of
serious mistakes, some of the separate skulls received having
been assigned to the wrong species. Thus the skull which
was thought to belong to the 7rionyx hurum is found to belong
to Trionyx gangeticus of Cuvier ; the skull which was regarded
and figured as belonging to Potamochelys stellata (and which
was received as a present from Professor Oldham) is found to
be the skull of a species of Hmyda. Such mistakes were un-
avoidable with the very imperfect materials which we had at
our command, and could only be corrected as more authentic
specimens were procured.

MUD-TORTOISES (Trionychoidea).

General Hardwicke, of the Bengal Artillery, at the end of
the last century made at Futteghur a series of drawings (now
in the collection in the British Museum) of the mud-tortoises
( Trionyches) which he obtained from the Ganges :—

1. The ‘ Sewteree.” This is the Chitra indica of the Ca-
talogue of Shield Reptiles. The figure is copied in the
‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology.’

2. The “ Kaavez,” which is the Trionyx hurum of the ‘ I-
lustrations of Indian Zoology’ and of this paper.

3. The ‘ Dekoolee,” which is the Trionyx gangeticus of
Cuvier and this paper.

Hardwicke figures the Dhank or Jaank, which appears to be
a larger specimen of ihe same species.

4. The ‘ Bun-Goma” or “ Turpin,” which is an Emyda,
probably Hmyda punctata. The figures of the young and
old are copied in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’ as Tr7-
onyx punctata.

5. Trionyx subplanus ; but it is from a dried specimen from
Java. The figure is copied in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian
Zoology.’

Dr. Buchanan-Hamilton, a friend and fellow labourer of
General Hardwicke (who allowed Hardwicke to have copies
made by his own artist of the greater part of the fish he de-
seribed, which are now in the British Museum), figured many
species of mud-tortoises of India. The collection of his draw-
ings was in the India House, and is now in the India Museum
at Westminster.

1. Testudo dura is Emyda punctata.

2. Testudo hurum is copiedas Trionyx hurum in the £ IIl-
lustrations of Indian Zoology.’ The Zrionyx hurum of this
paper.

3. Testudo chin. This is copied in Gray’s ‘Synopsis of
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 24

330 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India.

Reptiles,’ tab. x., and is the same as the former, Trionyx
hurum.

4. Testudo ocellatus. Copied in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of
Indian Zoology.’ Called Trionyx ocellatus there and in this
aper.
r 5. Testudo gataghol. Copied as Trionyx javanicus in Gray’s
‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology ;’ but this now proves to be a
new species of Aspilus, named Aspilus gataghol in this paper.

6. TLestudo chitra. 'This is the Chitra indica of the ‘ Cata-
logue of Shield Reptiles in the British Museum.’

In my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles’ I described some of these
drawings ; and in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’ I pub-
lished a selection from them, which I believe were the first
published figures of Indian mud-tortoises. This book contains
some mistakes in nomenclature ; but it is to be recollected that
when it was published (in 1831) there was not a single spe-
cimen of the Asiatic species of the family in this country.

In 1809 M. Geoffroy, in the ‘ Annales du Muséum d’ Histoire
Naturelle’ (vol. iv. p. 1), formed the genus Zrionyx, and
described the species which had come under his notice. ‘They
are as follow :—

1. Trionyx subplanus, p. 15, tab. v. fig. 1. This species is
established upon the bones of a dorsal disk; and the habitat is
unknown. ‘There is little doubt that it is the Dogania subplana
of my ‘ Catalogue of Tortoises.’

2. Trionyx egyptiacus, p. 12, tab. i. fig. 2,a beautiful figure
of the back and lower surface of the animal, and of the bones
of the back and sternum. ‘This is the Tyrse nilotica.

3. Trionyx stellatus, p. 13. From the Testudo cartilaginea
of Boddaert, which the French had taken from the Dutch
museum ; a young specimen, peculiar for having five stars in
the hinder part of the carapace. It is not known from what
country it came, and is in too bad a state to determine;
Duméril and Bibron consider it the young of Gymnopus java-
nicus.

4, Testudo carinatus, p. 14, tab. iv., which represents the
dorsal and sternal disks of a young half-grown specimen, of
which we do not know the locality ; but being without its head it
is impossible to tell whether it belongs to Trionyx, Platypeltis,
or any other genus that has four callosities. It is peculiar for
having the front odd bone at a considerable distance from the
dorsal disk. Schweigger changed the name of this species to
Trionyx Brongniartit ; and Bibron considered it the young of
Gymnopus spiniferus, which he confounded with Testudo ferox
of Pennant. :

5. Trionyx javanicus, p. 15, tab. ii., representing the dorsal

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 331

disk without the odd bone, and the sternal disk with two
narrow lateral callosities. From Java. Though it is without
its head, I have no doubt that this is the Aspilus cariniferus
of my Catalogue, which has the odd bone in front of the
dorsal disk separate from the others, and smooth, except in
the adult.

6. Trionyx coromandelicus, p. 16, tab. v. fig. 1, representing
the dorsal disk. From Coromandel. This isa species of Hmyda ;
but one has no means of knowing to which species of the genus
it belongs.

The two following species he had not seen :—

7. Trionyx georgicus (the Trionyx ferox of Pennant). From
North America. Platypeltis ferox of my Catalogue.

8. Trionyx euphraticus, p.17 (Testudo rafeht of Olivier).
From the Euphrates. afetus euphraticus of my Catalogue.

Schweigger published his ‘ Prodromus Monographie Chelo-
niorum’ in 1814; but the manuscript was presented to the
Institute before 1809, for it is quoted by Geoffroy in his essay ;
and it was originally printed in the ‘ Koénigsb. Archiv fiir
Naturwissensch.’ fase. 11. & iv. Instead of the original name
given by himself (Amyda), he adopts Geoftroy’s genus Tri-
onyx (p. 14), containing :—

1. Trionyx ferox, Pennant, from North America.

2. Trionyx egyptiacus, Geoftr., from the Nile.

3. Trionyx euphraticus, Olivier (tab. 41), from the Euphrates.
4. Trionyx javanicus, Ann. du Mus. 1v. tab. 3, from Java.

“ Bouloufte” according to Leschenault.

5. Trionyx Brongniartii, the Trionyx carinatus, Geoff.
Ann. du Mus. iv. tab. 4.

6. Trionyx granosus, Schcepf, Test. tab. 30,a&6. An
Emyda. é

7. Trionyx subplanus, Geoftr. Dogania subplana.

Dr. John Wagler, in his ‘ Natiirl. Syst. d. Amphibien,’
1830 (large folio), figures the following.

Tab. 2. fig. I. represents, under the name of A sp¢donectes java-
nicus, a young animal, which may be the same as the Trionya
javanicus of (Geoftr., whose figure of the dorsal disk (tab. iu.)
he copies.

Tab. 2. figs. X111.—XX., called Aspidonectes gangeticus, are
copied from Cuvier’s figures of the bones of Trionyx gangeti-
cus of Duvaucel.

Tab. 2. figs. XXXIV., XXXV., Aspidonectes carinatus, are
copied from Geotiroy’s figures of Trionyx carinatus.

Tab. 2. figs. XXI.-XXXIIL, bones of the various parts of
Trionyx coromandelicus, Geoffroy (Testudo granosa, Scheepf).
A species of Hmyda.

24*

332 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

Fam. Chitrade.

CHITRA.
1. Chitra indica. (The Sewteree).

“ Sewteree,” Hardwicke, icon. ined.
Trionyx egyptiacus, var. indicus, Gray, Il. Ind. Zool. i. tab. 80 (copy of
Hardwicke).

Testudo chitra, Buchanan-Hamilton, icon. ined.

Trionyx indicus, Gray, Synopsis, p. 47.

Gymnopus lineatus, Duméril & Bibron, Erp. Gén. ii. p. 491.

Chitra indica, Gray, P. Z. 8S. 1864, figs. 11, 12 (skull); Cat. Shield

Rept. B. M. p. 70, tab. 41 (skull).

General Hardwicke observes, “‘ The Sez¢tevee found in the
Ganges grows to the size of 240 pounds ;” with a green head and
the back of the neck striped. It is described in the ‘ Suppl.
Cat. Shield Rept.’ under the name of Chitra indica. It is
known by the eyes being very near the end of the nose, and,
according to Hardwicke’s figure, by being marked on each
side of the pupil with a spot.

The top of the head and back of the neck are lined. It is
different from all the other mud-tortoises in having an elon-
gate ovate, very thin skull, with weak jaws, with only a linear
alveolar process.

Hardwicke’s figures are copied in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of In-
dian Zoology’ (tab. x.) under the name of Trionyx wgyptiacus,
var.2ndica. Buchanan-Hamilton had itin his drawings, figured
under the name of Testudo chitra; in my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles’
I defined it as Trionyx indicus; and in the ‘Tortoises of the
British Museum, after examining the skull, I formed it into a
genus under the name of Chitra indica, and figured its skull in
the ‘Catalogue of Shield Reptiles.’ It is the Gymnopus
lineatus of Duméril and Bibron (‘ Erpétologie Générale’).

Fam. Trionychide.

* Sternal callosities four, lateral and posterior ; all broad and well
developed in the adult.

NILSSONIA.

Skull rather elongate ; nose shorter than the diameter of the
orbit ; alveolar process broader behind ; separation between the
alveolar surface and groove in the skull to the inner nostrils
narrower, and deeper as well as narrower behind. Alveolar
process of lower jaw very broad, especially in front, with a very
deep, broad, longitudinal, central impression on the front half ;
rather concave on the hinder part of the sides, with a well-
marked elevated ridge on the inner margin.

Skull in the British Museum, presented by Charles Falconer,

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India. 333

Esq. (68. 2.12.15). Itis known from the skulls of Zrionyz,
which it greatly resembles, by the narrowness of the groove
in front of the palate to the internal. nostrils; in Trionyx
gangeticus, T. Jeudit, and in T. Leithii this groove is broad
and shallow, and nearly of uniform width.

1. Nilssonia formosa.

Young only known. Callosities not developed.
Back of the crown with a broad transverse pale band.
Trionyx formosus, Gray, P. Z. 8S, 1869, p. 217, tab. 15. fig. 1; Suppl.
Cat. Shield Rept. p. 99.
Hab. Pegu (B.M.).
The skull of the young is shorter and broader than those of
the adults. I believe this arises only from difference of age.

TRIONYX.

The dorsal disk in the young animals is generally marked
with three pairs of black spots, which have concentric pale
rings within. These spots often last in a more or less perfect
degree throughout the life of the animal ; sometimes the anterior
and sometimes the posterior pair, and rarely a spot on one side
of these pairs, are deficient. The crown of the head of the
young specimens is generally marked with spots of various
colours, which become more and more indistinct as the animal
grows. I believe that these spots are characteristic of the
species ; and sometimes whole series of species have character-
istic spots—that is to say, on the sides of the crown and face.

+ Crown of head olive, with radiating black lines behind.

1. Trionyx gangeticus. (Dekoolee.)

Skull short, broad ; nose suddenly bent down, with a rounded
outline ; eyes within a very short distance of the cavity of the
nostrils, which is not as long as the diameter of the orbit ; al-
veolar surface of the lower jaw deeply concave, with a very
slight, indistinct, central longitudinal ridge.

“‘ Dekoolee,”” Hardwicke, icon. ined.

Trionyx du Gange, Cuvier, Oss. Foss. v. pt. 2, p. 187, tab. ii. figs. 5-8
(skull).

Trionyx gangeticus, “Duvaucel,’’ Cuvier, Régne Anim. vol. ii. p. 16 ;
Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. B. M. p. 66, Suppl. p. 97 (skull only).

Gymnopus Duvaucelit, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. vol. ii. p. 47.

Aspidonectes gangeticus, Wagler, Amphib. Taf. 2. figs. 13-22 (copied

from Cuvier).

Trionyx javanicus, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. p. 67 (not synonyma).

Potamochelys stellata, Gray, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 85; Suppl. Cat. Shield

Rept. B. M. p. 104 (animal only, not skull).

Var.? The black lines irregular.

“ Jaank,” Hardwicke, icon. ined.

334 Dr.J.E. Gray on the Mud-Torioises of India.

General Hardwicke figures this species under the name of
“ Dekoolee,” which grows to the weight of 120 pounds, and is
found in the Ganges. The ‘ Dekoolee”’ has been referred to
the Trionyx javanicus of Geoffroy; but this is evidently a
mistake, as that species is figured with two lateral transverse
callosities, whereas all the more adult specimens of the ‘ De-
koolee”” in the British Museum have four well-developed
callosities.

Cuvier, in the ‘Ossemens Fossiles’ (vol. v. pt. 2, p. 187),
figures a skull under the name of “* Trionyx du Grange” (tab. 1.
figs. 5-8), and in the ‘ Régne Animal’ he refers it to Trionyx
gangeticus, Duvaucel (vol. ips t6).

I find by comparison that the skull which I extracted from
a half-grown specimen (but retaining the black rays on the
crown, ‘and having the four sternal callosities well developed)
is exactly like the skull figured by Cuvier as the Trionyx du
Gange, and by me under the name of Trionyx gangeticus in
the ‘ Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’ (t. 42. fig. 1

Cuvier’s figure most correctly represents. ie skull of this
species, both in outline and in the proportion of the nose to the
orbits, and in the form of the bones on the underside of the
skull, which is very different from that of the skull of 7. Jeudit.

There are now in the Museum four skulls of this species,
of different sizes, which retain their characters most distinctly
marked.

Duméril and Bibron change the name of this species to
Cryptopus Duvaucelit, and quote Trionyx hurum, Gray (Syn-
opsis of Rept. p. 49, tab. x.) as a synonym of ‘this species.
Believing that they had the original specimen to compare with
my figure, I adopted their idea, and described the animal I so
named as the animal of Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier ; but the
examination of the skullof what [had called Trionyx gangeticus
shows that to be the species the skull of which was figured and
described by Cuvier when he established the species.

General Hardwicke figures a specimen of almost one uniform
green colour, which, he says, is called “ Jaank” or “ Dhank”
in the country, and is found in the Ganges and grows to the
weight of 240 pounds. Unfortunately he does not figure the
underside. ‘The top of the head is green, marked with a series
of rather irregular black lines; and there is one from the back
edge of the eye, very different from the regular diverging lines
of Trionyx gangeticus ; but it may be only a variety, or it may
be the Aspilus gataghol with a lined head figured by Hamilton.

2. Trionyx Leithii. (The Poonah Mud-Tortoise.)
A small species; the shield about 10 inches long and 6$

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortotses of India. 335

broad. The alveolar surface of the lower jaw nearly flat, with
a very slight longitudinal ridge across the front end.

Hab. Poonah (Dr. Leith).

Dr. Leith gave the British Museum a stuffed specimen and
a perfect skeleton of this species.

The head of the dried specimen, unfortunately, does not show
any distinct indication of colour by which to distinguish it ;
but Mr. Charles Waterhouse thinks he can observe some ob-
scure indications of olive stripes radiating from a centre in the
hinder part of the crown. The skeleton is mentioned by
mistake in the ‘Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’
(p. 102) under Aspilus cariniferus; and Dr. Giinther had given
this name to both specimens; it has four well-developed
callosities to the sternum.

The skull is rather short and narrow ; the nose shelving to
the forehead, with a rather tapering outline. Eyes a very
short distance from the cavity of the nostrils, not half as long
as the diameter of the orbits. Alveolar surface of the lower
jaw broad, very slightly concave, with a very indistinct central
ridge in front, most elevated in the middle of the front central
portion of the alveolar surface. The centre of the front edge
of the lower jaw of the skeleton marked with a deep notch ;
but this may be only an individual peculiarity, because there
is no indication of it in the stuffed specimen.

+t Crown of the head olive, closely and minutely punctured with
black.
3. Trionyx pequensis.
Trionyx peguensis, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. p. 99.
Hab. Pegu. Head and skull only known.

This is a large species. The skull has a broad palatal
groove to the nostrils.

ttt The hinder part of the crown and sides of the head marked
with pale spots.

4. Trionyx hurum. (The Kaavez.)

Crown of the head varied with irregular black lines, a
yellow spot on each side of the crown and at the back angle
of the mouth.
“« Kaavez,” Hardwicke, icon. ined. B, M.
Trionyx hurum, Gray, Synopsis Rept. tab. x. (copied from Hardwicke) ;
Ill. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from Hamilton).

Testudo hurum and T. chin, Hamilton, icon. ined.

? Trionyx Jeudi, Gray, P. Z.8. 1869, p. 217, fig. 19; Suppl. Cat. Shield
Rept. p. 97, fig. 82 (skull).

Hardwicke figures a second species, under the name of

336 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

“¢ Kaavez ;”’ it is found in the Ganges, and grows to the weight
of 120 pounds. The top of the head in this species is brown,
black-lined, with a yellow spot on each side of the crown and
at the back of the angle of the mouth. This had been named
Testudo hurum by Dr. Hamilton, and is the Trionyx hurum of
my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles,’ tab. x. Duméril and Bibron referred
this species and figure to Trionyx gangeticus; but this was
certainly a mistake, and has been a fertile source of error.

It is figured as Trionyx hurum in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of
Indian Zoology’ from Buchanan-Hamilton’s drawings, where
it is called Testudo hurum.

Of this species there is no specimen in the British Museum ;
but I have a suspicion that the skull which I have described
as Trionyx Jeudi (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869, p. 217, fig. 19;
Gray, Suppl. Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 97, fig. 32) probably belongs
to this species.

The skull named 7. Jeudi has the nose rather elongate, pro-
duced forward, with a rather tapering outline; orbit further
from the cavity of the nostrils than the diameter of the orbit ;
alveolar surface of the lower jaw with a very distinct central
longitudinal ridge in front, with a deep pit on each side.

The British Museum has a second skull of this species,
which was given to us by Mr. Theobald as the skull of his
Trionyx Phayret. It certainly is not the skull of the species
described under that name in the Journal of the Linnean
Society, nor of the tortoise described under that name by Dr.
Anderson.

5). Trionyx sewaare.

The upper surface of the head uniform olive, with a distinct
yellow spot on each side of the crown.

‘¢ Sewaare,” Hardwicke, icon. ined. in B. M.

Trionyx gangeticus, var., Gray, Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 97.

Hab. Bengal.

Hardwicke figures a species under the name of “Se-
waare,’ which grows to the weight of 160 pounds and upwards.
It has a uniform brown head, with a large pale spot on the
side of the crown behind the eyes, and a few similar spots on
the back of the neck. ‘The back is marked with six black
eye-like spots. I know nothing of this tortoise in the adult
state, and at one time considered it a variety of Trionyx hurum ;
but I believe that it is quite distinct.

There are in the British Museum two half-grown speci-
mens (95a & 6) agreeing in some respects with these figures,
one of which is marked with six spots, and the other has the
anterior pair deficient. Unfortunately they are too young to
have the sternal callosities developed.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 337

There are in the Museum three half-grown specimens, possi-
bly of this tortoise, which I mentioned under Trionyx gan-
geticus in the Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. They may be only
varieties of the preceding species.

6. Trionyx ocellatus.

Young only known. Callosities not developed ; nose before
the eyes with a broad lunate yellow spot.
Testudo ocellata, B. Hamilton, icon. ined.

Trionyx ocellatus, Gray, 11. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from Hamilton).
Gymnopus ocellatus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. iv. p. 9.

Hab. India (B.M.).

A young specimen in the British Museum is very like the
Trionyx ocellatus of Gray (Illust. Indian Zool. tab. 78), copied
from the Testudo ocellatus of Dr. Hamilton’s drawings. It
chiefly differs in the crown of the head being black and minutely
punctate like the rest of the head, instead of being uniformly
bluish as in the figure. It is at once known by the broad
yellow lunate mark over the nose just before the eyes, and the
large yellow spot behind each eye. Duméril and Bibron regard
this as a species under the name of “ Gymnopus ocellatus,
Hardwicke ;” and they refer to it Trionyx gangeticus, Guérin
(Cuvier, Régne Animal, tab. 1. fig. 6), from specimens in the
Paris Museum sent home by Duvaucel. This figure is not
very characteristic.

Duméril and Bibron refer to Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier,
Régne Animal, tab. i. fig. 6; but the figure does not represent
the characters of this species. And they also, curiously enough,
refer to Trionyx hurum. They say that there are five speci-
mens in the Paris Museum sent by Duvaucel; but they do not
mention the peculiar broad yellow band across the nose, and
their specimens may be-only the young of Trionyx gangeticus.

7. Trionyx Bellir.
Young only known. Callosities not developed. Upper part
of the head black, white-spotted on the crown, with a red spot
on the sides of the temple and on the angles of the mouth.

Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Bell’s MS.; Gray, Tortoises, Terrapins,
and Turtles, p. 11, tab. 51.

Hab. Asia.

I only know this species from Mr. Bell’s figure. It is very
like 7. ocellatus ; but the nose is black: the back of the crown
is not to be seen, as the head is partially withdrawn.

Mr. Bell’s specimen is probably in the museum at Cambridge
with the rest of his collection.

338 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

Schlegel, in the ‘ Fauna Japonica’ (tab. v. fig. 7), represents
a head which he calls Trionyx stellatus, var. japonicus. The
upper surface is pale-coloured, with pale spots on the edge of
the lips and sides of the neck, the latter being the largest. At
tab. vu. he figures the animal; but the specimen appears to be
bleached. It probably belongs to this genus.

LANDEMANIA.

1. Landemania perocellata.

Trionyx perocellatus, Gray, Cat. Tort. B. M. p. 48; Cat. Shield Rept*
p- 65, tab. 31.

Potamochelys? perocellatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 86,

Landemania? perocellata, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1869, p. 216 ; Suppl. Cat. Shield
Rept. p. 96.

Hab. China, Chusan.
Trionyx tuberculatus, Cantor’s drawings; Gray, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 42.

Potamochelys tuberculatus, Gray, P. Z. 5. 1864, p. 87 ; Suppl. Cat. Shield
Rept. p. 105.

Hab. Chusan.

I believe this is the same as the preceding, as is also the
half-dried specimen called Landemania trrorata, Gray, Suppl.
Cat. Shield Rept. p. 96, fig. 1 (sternum). ‘They all have a
black streak from the back edge of the eye, extending along
the upper part of the side of the neck.

POTAMOCHELYS.

The genus Potamochelys of Fitzinger, as restricted by me in
the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for 1864 and 1869
and in the ‘ Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’
(p. 104, fig. 34), should be erased from the system. The skull
ficured (which was presented to the museum by Prof. Oldham),
now that we have other skulls to compare with it, proves to
be the skull of an Hmyda, with the figure of which in Wagler I
had compared it when I first described it. The animal de-
scribed as Potamochelys stellatus proves to be T'rionyx gangeticus
of Cuvier, having no alliance with 7. yavanicus of Geoftroy,
which is an Aspilus.

I feel considerable regret but no shame in making this con-
fession, when one considers the very imperfect materials I had
to work on when I wrote the “ Revision of the Species of Tri-
onychide ;” and any person who will follow my papers on the
different genera of that family will see the disadvantages under
which I laboured, and how I had to feel my way as specimens
illustrative of the subject were gradually received.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. — 339

DOGANIA.

Dogania subplana.

Trionyx subplanus, Geoftr. Ann. du Mus. iv. p. 15, tab. v. fig. 1; Cuvier,
Oss. Foss. y. pt. 2, tab. xiil. fig. 5 (dorsal disk only); Gray, Ill. Ind.
Zool. tab.

Gymnopus subplanus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. p. 492.

General Hardwicke in his drawings figures the upper and
lower surfaces of a stuffed animal, which I believe he received
from Java, without a name. ‘These figures are copied in the
‘Tllustrations of Indian Zoology’ under the name Trionyx
subplanus, Geoftr.

The specimen was young and had not the sternal callosities
developed.

MM. Duméril and Bibron, because the animal is figured by
Hardwicke, erroneously say it lives in the Ganges.

This animal is not known in the adult state. The specimen
described as Sarbieria frenata (Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept.) is
evidently a specimen of this species approaching to maturity,
having four slightly developed callosities, as the specimen de-
scribed as Dogania Giintheri also has; so that I have no doubt
that the adult animal has four well-developed callosities, and
the odd front bone united to the rest of the dorsal disk.

** Sternal callosities two, lateral ; broad and well developed in the
adult.

RAFETUS.
1. Rafetus euphraticus, Gray, Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 103.

*** Sternal callosities two, lateral, narrow, linear, on the suture
between the pair of lateral bones.

ASPILUS.
The front odd bone of the dorsal disk is small and smooth,
with a central rounded callosity in the adult.
The palatine groove in Aspilus javanicus 1s moderately
narrow, rather deep, and of the same diameter through the
whole of its length.

+ Forehead with radiating black lines.

1. Aspilus gataghol. (The Gataghol.)
Testudo gataghol, Hamilton, icon. ined.
Trionyx javanicus, Gray, Ill. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from B. Hamilton).

Hab. India.

This mud-tortoise is very like Trtonyx gangeticus with its
radiated head; but Buchanan-Hamilton’s figure shows only
two very narrow lateral callosities. I have never seen this
species.

340 = Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

tt Head white-spotted.

2. Aspilus javanicus. (The Boulousse.)

Amyda javanica, Schweigger’s MS., quoted by Geoffroy.

Trionyx javanicus ( Trionyx de Java), Geottr. Ann. du Mus. vol. iv. p. 15,
tab. il. fig. 2.

Aspidonectes javanicus, Wagler, Amphib., Atlas, tab. 2. figs. iii—xiii.
(fig. iii. copied from Geoffroy).

Trionyx carinferus, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. B. M. p. 67, t. 32 (from
a specimen in spirit).

Aspilus cariniferus, Gray, P. Z.S. 1864, figs. 4-6 (skull), 1869, p. 218 ;
Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 101, fig. 33 (skull).

Gymnopus javanicus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. p. 493.

Hab. Java.

Schlegel, in the ‘ Fauna Japonica’ (tab. v. fig. 6), figures
the head of a mud-tortoise under the name of T’rionyax stellatus,
var. javanicus, which is mottled above and below and pro-
bably represents this species.

3. Aspilus ornatus.
Trionyx ornatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 41, tab. v. (young).
Aspilus? ornatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 85; Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept.
p. 103.
Hab. Camboja.
Fam. Emydide.

EMYDA.

General Hardwicke figures a spotted example of this genus
with the upper part of the head spotted, which is copied as
Trionyx punctatus, jun., in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of Indian
Zoology.’

General Hardwicke figures a much larger specimen from
Futteghur, which he says is called “ Bun-Goma,” which is
the country namefor the land-turtle commonly called “ Turpin.”
The lower side shows the sternal callosities well developed.
These figures are copied in my ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’
under the name Trionyx granosus. The back is uniform olive-
green; and the upper part of the head, neck, and limbs is
green, with two pale orange spots, one on each side of the back
of the crown. I do not know whether this difference of colour
depends on age or not.

Buchanan-Hamilton, in his drawings, calls this tortoise Tes-
tudo dura.

Geoffroy describes the species of this genus as Trionya co-
romandelicus (Ann. du Mus. iv. p. 16, tab. v. fig. 1).

The skull is figured as Potamochelys stellatus, Gray, P. Z. 8.
1864, p. 85, figs. 7 & 8(skull) ; Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 105,
fig. 34 (skull only).

Schlegel figures the head of Trionyx granosus (‘ Fauna
Japonica,’ Chelon. tab. v. fig. 4). It is of uniform colour.

On Deep-sea Dredging in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 341

XLVIII.—WNotes on a Deep-sea Dredging-Expedition round
the Island of Anticosti, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. By
J. F. WHITEAVES, F.G.S. &c.

Unti last summer (1871), so far as I am aware, no dredging-
operations have ever been conducted in the deepest parts of
the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence. In 1867 and 1869 I
dredged in upwards of fifty different localities north of the
Bay of Chaleurs, but never in deeper water than 50 fathoms.
The researches of Dr. Packard and others on the coast of
Labrador, those of Principal Dawson, Prof. Bell, &c. in the
Gaspé district, together with those of Mr. Willis on the Nova-
Scotian coast, were all conducted in comparatively shallow
water. On several occasions I have called the attention of
the Natural-History Society of Montreal to the importance,
from a scientific point of view, of a careful investigation into the
nature of the animal and vegetable life of the greater depths
of the gulf, which seemed to me to promise a rich harvest of
new facts.

A committee was appointed to petition the Dominion Go-
vernment to allow qualified observers facilities for deep-sea
dredging on board government vessels. Principal Dawson also,
as President of the Society, represented to the Honourable the
Minister of Marine and Fisheries the practieal value of, and
the useful results that might accrue from, such inquiries, and
met with the most liberal response. ‘The desired facilities on
board government cruisers were at once promised, the neces-
sary rope was provided, and no efforts were spared to make
the cruises successful. I was deputed by the Natural-History
Society to undertake the management of the expedition, and
left Montreal early in July 1871. My friend Mr. G. T.
Kennedy, M.A., of Montreal, an ardent zoologist, started with
me, but returned after he had been a few days at sea.

The first cruise was on board the government schooner ‘ La
Canadienne,’ and lasted three weeks. The ground examined
on this vessel was from Point des Monts (on the north shore
of the St. Lawrence) to the Mingan Islands, then round the
west point of Anticosti, and from there, in a diagonal line, to
Gaspé Bay. Next, embarking on board the ‘ Stella Maris’
at Gaspé Basin, we made an entire circuit of the island of
Anticosti, sailing as far to the north-west as Sawhill Point,
on the north shore, and to the south-east as the Magdalen
Islands. We were driven to Bryon Island, one of the Mag-
dalen group, by a “ nor’-wester,”’ which of course prevented
our dredging there. As these investigations were entirely
subordinate to the special duties upon which the two schooners

342 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

were engaged, dredging could only be carried on at intervals,
and in several cases the same ground was gone over twice or
more.

On ‘ La Canadienne’ we had sixteen successful hauls of the
dredge. Of these, four were in 50 fathoms of water or less,
seven in between 50 and 100 fathoms, and five in from 100
to 200 fathoms.

On the ‘ Stella Maris’ we had nine successful hauls. One
of these was in less than 50 fathoms, two were between 50
and 100, and six between 100 and 250 fathoms.

The deep-sea mud, in the places examined, is dotted over
with (for the most part rounded) masses of rock, usually of Lau-
rentian gneiss, varying in size from that of a pea to considerably
larger than a man’s head. By a modification of the usual
sieving process every organism, piece of rock, &c. larger than
;; of an inch in diameter was first picked out from the mud. A
large bagful of the mudthus sifted, from each locality examined,
was preserved for subsequent microscopic examination. ‘Three
fourths of this mud was found to be a silt so impalpable as,
when wet, to pass readily through fine cambric; the remain-
ing fourth consisted half of organic, and half of inorganic
matter. The organic matter comprised a few diatoms, mul-
titudes of Foraminifera, some Polycystina, many sponge-
spicules, and fragments of other organisms. The inorganic
débris was a more or less coarse kind of sand, made up of
fragments of quartz, bits of felspathic rocks, and small flakes
of mica.

Attempts were made to endeavour to ascertain the approxi-
mate temperature of the deep-sea mud. When the dredge
was hauled up, its contents were emptied as quickly as possible
into a large shallow tub ; and this was covered with a tarpaulin
and placed in the shade. An ordinary thermometer, with a
metal case and perforated base, was then plunged into the
mud, and the whole was kept carefully shaded for some time.
With one exception, the temperature of the mud was found to
be from 37° to 38° Fahr., and this not alone in deep water ;
for sand brought up from 25 fathoms, on the north shore of
the St. Lawrence, also made the mercury sink to 38° or
37° Fahr. In the centre of the river, between the island of
Anticosti and the south shore of the St. Lawrence, mud
brought up from 200 fathoms only made the mercury sink to
from 43° to 45° Fahr. Either a warm current affects the
temperature of the bottom at this point, or else my observa-
tions were inaccurate or defective, which latter assumption is
by no means unlikely.

On one occasion a somewhat curious phenomenon occurred.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 343

We had been dredging in the afternoon in 212 fathoms, be-
tween the east point of Anticosti and the Bird-rocks. About
600 fathoms of rope (made of cocoanut-fibre) had been paid
out, which when hauled in was, of course, wet. About ten
o'clock the same evening we threw the dredge over in 250
fathoms water, and again all the coils were paid out. As
the line went over the side it was luminous throughout its
entire length with electric sparks! The closest examination
with a triplet lens failed to disclose any trace of animal life
entangled in the strands.

With a view of trying to get some information as to the
nature of the food of some of the surface-feeding fishes, and
especially of the herring and mackerel, towing-nets were fre-
quently used; but scarcely any thing was taken in these. I
attribute these failures to the circumstance that the towing-
nets were only used in the daytime; had they been employed.
at night the results might have been different. Hempen tan-
gles, similar to those devised by Captain Calver, were em-
ployed with some success ; but the mistake was made of placing
these some 20 fathoms or so in front of the dredge, instead of
behind and on each side of it.

The following is a brief sketch of some of the most inter-
esting forms of animal life obtained during the expedition.
During the autumn of 1871, Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S.,
visited Montreal, and went over the whole of the testaceous
Mollusca with me. I am also indebted to Professors A. Agassiz,
A. E. Verrill, and 8. J. Smith for the identification of several
critical species.

FORAMINIFERA.

Large quantities of these beautiful organisms were collected,
especially from very deep water, but at present only a portion
of these have been carefully examined. In Mr. G. M. Daw-
son’s paper on the “ Foraminifera of the River and Gulf of the
St. Lawrence,” published in the ‘ Annals’ for February 1871, a
list is given of fifty-five subspecies or varietal forms. Among
the specimens collected last year in deep water are a number
of large specimens to which it is difficult to attach any name,
but which form a series connecting the subgenera Nodosaria,
Dentalina, Marginulina, and Cristellaria, One of the most
remarkable of these is a Marginulina fully one eighth of an inch
long, from the first chamber of which long spines proceed (at
various angles), which, when perfect, must have been as long
as the shell itself; these long spines vary in number from
one to three ; and besides these there are others which are either
rudimentary or imperfect. Cristellaria crepidula and T'ro-

344 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

chammina incerta were collected in comparatively shallow
water (30 to 40 fathoms) ; and Bolivina punctata, Nonionina
umbilicatula, Vulvulina austriaca, and gigantic examples of
the trwe Triloculina tricarinata (reminding one of miniature
beech-nut seeds carved in ivory) were dredged in from 200
to 250 fathoms. By far the greater number of the St.-Law-
rence Foraminifera seem to have a wide range in depth. I
have examined large bagfuls of dredgings from more than
fifty localities in the northern part of the gulf, and out of fifty
or sixty species or varietal forms, only four or five seem pecu-
liar to deep water. Virgulina squamosa, Bolivina costata and
squamosa, Nonionina umbilicatula, and the typical Triloculina
tricarinata are only met with in apparently from 200 to 300
fathoms water. In the St. Lawrence, Lagena distoma (typi-
cal), Bulimina pyrula and marginata, and Vulvulina austriaca
are characteristic of deep water, but are very rarely met with
in lesser depths. Globigerina bulloides, though small, is not
unfrequent at all depths ; but, curiously enough, Orbulina uni-
versa has not yet been found living in Canada. Although many
of the Foraminifera from the deep water are small and delicate,
by far the largest specimens yet collected were taken in from
200 to 250 fathoms. This agrees with the result of Dr. Car-
penter’s observations on board the ‘ Porcupine.’ The Rhab-
dopleura figured by Mr. Dawson I believe to be an annelid-

tube, having examined the animal in a living state.

POLYCYSTINA.

Dictyocha aculeata and a species of Ceratospyris have been
previously catalogued from the Gulf of St. Lawrence by Prin-
cipal Dawson. ‘Three additional species were dredged in up-
wards of 200 fathoms ; but these are at present undetermined.
In Canada, Polycystina are not peculiar to deep water ; for I
have taken fine specimens from the interior of a species of
Halichondria, also from the stomach of Hchinus drébachiensis,
both collected from a little below low-water mark.

SPONGES.

Several examples of the Grantia ciliata of O. Fabricius
were dredged from 96 fathoms in Trinity Bay, on the north
shore of the St. Lawrence. It is the first sponge with cal-
careous spicules recorded from the Gulf. The straight spicules
of the terminating cone and the triradiate ones of the body of
the sponge, make beautiful polariscope objects. A fine species
of Polymastia was abundant in many places in deep water.
In 38 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse a massive Hali-
chondria was dredged, which, besides the ordinary smooth,

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 345

curved, fusiform spicules, has small retentive bihamate ones,
apparently resembling those of Dr. Bowerbank’s H. falcula
in all but size. The other sponges collected are as yet un-
determined.

HypROZOA.

Thuiaria thuyja and articulata and Campanularia verticil-
lata have been noticed among the specimens collected, which,
however, have yet to be examined.

ACTINOZOA.

The two common sea-anemones of the New-England coast,
viz. Metridium marginatum, Say (which is probably a variety
of the European Actinoloba dianthus), and Urticina crassi-
cornis, Khr., were found as abundantly living in the greatest
depths examined as in very shallow water. Prof A. E.
Verrill recognizes a species of Zoanthus in some specimens
which I sent him, which were dredged in 212 fathoms, be-
tween Anticosti and the Bird-rocks. Among the same spe-
cimens he has also detected examples of his Hunephthya glo-
merata, an Aleyonoid previously known only from Greenland
and the banks of Newfoundland; also a new species, and
perhaps genus, near to Cornularia. A large number (50 or
60) of living specimens of a Pennatula, which I believe to
be new to science, was dredged in from 160 to 200 fathoms,
between the island of Anticosti and the south shore of the St.
Lawrence. In the largest specimens collected there are 40
pinnules on each side of the upper portion of the ccenosarc ;
but in average full-grown examples the number is less, and
ranges from 30 to 35. On the back of the rachis there is a
central groove, on each side of which are numerous but un-
equal, spinose, undeveloped polyps. The average number of
polyp-bearing cells on each pinnule seems to be about 11, but
varies from 9 to 16. The polyp-bearing cells are entirely
separate, and are margined with bundles of spines. The 8
mesenteries and somatic chambers, as well as the 8 tentacles
of the polyps, can be well made out in the specimens collected.
In one specimen examined by Mr. G. T. Kennedy the basal
portion of the pinnules is filled with spheres of granular
matter. The spicules of the lower half of the stem are ellip-
tical or oblong, and decidedly constricted in the middle. The
calcareous internal axis is somewhat longer than the ccenosare
itself, and is recurved at the base. Large examples measure
about 8 inches ; but some are only 6 inches long, or even less.
These latter specimens have as few as 21 pinnules on each
side of the stem. The St.-Lawrence Pennatula, although re-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 25

346 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

sembling in some respects some of the varieties of P. phos-
phorea as described by Kélliker, seems nevertheless a distinct
species, for which I venture to propose the name of Pennatula
canadensis. On this point Prof. A. E. Verrill, to whom I
sent specimens, writes tome as follows :—“ I have spent con-
siderable time on the Pennatula. It is very near P. phos-
phorea, and for a time I thought it would prove identical. So
far as the figures and descriptions of the latter go it agrees
very well, allowing that all the varieties and subvarieties re-
cognized by Kélliker really belong to one species; but on
comparison with Norwegian specimens, received from Copen-
hagen, it seems to be sufficiently distinct. The most evident
differences are to be found in the more numerous, crowded,
and unequal rudimentary or asexual polyps along the back of
the stalk in your species, and in the greater smoothness of
the peduncle, due to the much smaller size of the spicula of
the integument in the American species.” For many of the
details respecting this species I am indebted to my friend Mr.
G. T. Kennedy, M.A., of Montreal, who has kindly helped
me in the dissection of specimens.

ECHINODERMATA.

Two fine living examples of Schizaster fragilis (the Brissus
fragilis of Diiben & Koren) were dredged, one off Cap-Rosier
lighthouse, in 125 fathoms, the other from 200 fathoms, in
the centre of the river, between Ellis Bay, Anticosti, and the
south shore. Off Sawhill Point, on the north shore, the
dredge brought up, from 69 fathoms, a curious Asterid covered
with long and slender spines. Prof. Agassiz, to whom I sent
the only specimen collected, informs me that it is identical
with a species dredged on the ‘ Porcupine’ expedition, and
subsequently named by Prof. Wyville Thomson Calveria
hystrix. Prof. A. Agassiz thinks that this Asterid may be
the Solaster furcifer of Diiben & Koren. Unfortunately two
widely different Echinoderms are called Calveria hystrix in
the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society.’ The St.-Lawrence
starfish is the “ singular Asterid allied to Pteraster,” but not
the Echinoderm “belonging to the Diadema family,” to
both of which the same name is given. Ctenodiscus crispatus,
Diiben & Koren, was abundant in every haul at depths
greater than 100 fathoms. Amphiura Holbéllii, Liitken, and
Ophiacantha spinulosa, Miill., were also frequent in deep
water. Large living examples of Ophioglypha Sarsti, Liitken,
were dredged in 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse,
and a few fine specimens of Astrophyton Agassizii were taken,
from 60 fathoms mud, off Thunder River.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 347

ANNELIDA.

By far the most numerous of the denizens of the deep-sea
mud in the St. Lawrence are marine worms. Apparently
about. 20 or 30 species were collected ; but none of them has
as yet been studied or determined.

CRUSTACEA.

Hempen “ tangles ” used in 212 fathoms water, to the south-
east of the east point of Anticosti, brought up several living
examples of a Pycnogonum, which is Dr. Stimpson’s P. pelagr-
cum, but which does not seem to differ from the P. littorale,
Strom, of European seas. A fine specimen of Nymphon
giganteum, Goodsir, was dredged in 125 fathoms off Cap-
Rosier lighthouse. On the authority of the Rev. A. M.
Norman’s ‘ List of the Crustacea of the Shetlands,’ I had quoted
this (in a report printed by the Department of Marine and
Fisheries for the Dominion) as Johnston’s species; but Prof.
8. J. Smith informs me that it was Goodsir who first described
it. Several examples of Munnopsis typica, M. Sars, were
taken in 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse. Several
curious Amphipods were taken, among the more conspicuous
of which were fine specimens of an Epimeria, which Mr.
Smith refers doubtfully to L. coniger of Boeck. No large
Decapods were dredged from deep water; the only specimens
observed were a few shrimps. Mr. Smith recognizes the fol-
lowing critical forms of Macrura in a small series which I sent
to him for identification :—

Pandalus annulicornis, Leach. 96 fathoms, Trinity Bay,
and 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse.

Hippolyte Phippsti, Kréyer, with the preceding species.

Hippolyte Fabric, Kroyer. 125 fathoms, off Cap-Rosier
lighthouse.

Hippolyte polaris, Kroyer. 38 fathoms, off Cap-Rosier
lighthouse.

POLYZOA.

Good specimens of the following species have been deter-
mined, from depths of from 90 to 250 fathoms; but many in-
teresting forms are at present unnamed :—

Crisia eburnea, Linn. Caberea Ellisii, Flem.
Idmonea atlantica, Forbes. Bicellaria ciliata, Zinn.
Defrancia lucernaria ?, Sars. Acamarchis plumosa, Pallas.
Alcyonidium gelatinosum, Padlas. Flustra Barleei, Busk.
Scrupocellaria scruposa, Linn. Retepora cellulosa, var.

elongata, Smitt.

25*

Gemellaria loricata, Linn.

348 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

TUNICATA.

The following is a list of the few species of this order at
present identified by Prof. A. E. Verrill :—

Ascidiopsis complanatus (= Ascidia complanata, Fabr.). In
212 fathoms to the south-east of the east point of Anticosti.

Eugyra pilularis, Verrill. In 50 fathoms off the St. John’s
River, Mingan.

Botryllus, a purple species, distinct from B. Gouldit, Verrill.
Attached to Plustra Barleei?, Busk, from 96 fathoms in
Trinity Bay.

Several examples of Amouroucium glabrum, Verrill, were
collected in and just outside of Gaspé Bay, where I had pre-

viously dredged it in 1869.

MOo.Luusca.

In the ‘ Canadian Naturalist’ for 1869, I published a cata-
logue of 114 species of marine Mollusca inhabiting the Gulf
of St. Lawrence, to the north of the Bay of Chaleurs. We
now know localities for 150 species which inhabit the region
in question. ‘The shells collected last summer have been
carefully studied ; and the following is a list of some of the
most interesting among them *.

Terebratula septentrionalis, Couth. In 112 fathoms, stones, off
Charleton Point, Anticosti, and in 212 fathoms to the 8.S.E.
of the east end of that island.

Terebratella spitzbergensis, Davidson. 38 fathoms, stones,
off Cap-Rosier lighthouse, alive, adult, and frequent; 96
fathoms, in Trinity Bay, one young, but living example ;
112 fathoms, off Charleton Point, Anticosti, one dead, adult.
Most abundant in somewhat shallow water.

Pecten grenlandicus, Chemn. ‘Taken alive in several localities
in from 160 to 250 fathoms, mud.

Lima sulculus, Leach. Fine specimens in 38 fathoms, off Cap-
Rosier lighthouse.

Arca pectunculoides, Scacchi (=A. raridentata, Searles Wood).
Dredged on the north shore of the St. Lawrence, also be-
tween Anticosti and the south shore, in 160 to 170 fathoms.
The specimens were often living, and of large size for the
species. New to the western side of the Atlantic.

Arca glacialis, Gray (= A. raridentata, var. major, Sars). A
few dead examples of this shell were taken with the pre-
ceding one.

* Tam indebted to Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S., for the determination
of those species to which an asterisk is affixed.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 349

Yoldia (? Portlandia) thracieformis, Storer. One living speci-
men occurred in 212 fathoms, 8.S.E. of the east point of
Anticosti, and a dead, but perfect one, in 125 fathoms, off
Cap Rosier.

Yoldia (Portlandia) lucida, Lovén. Living in seven of the
localities examined, its range in depth being apparently from
150 to 250 fathoms.

* Yoldia (Portlandia) frigida, Torell. Frequent, living with
the preceding.

Dacrydium vitreum, Méll. In 212 fathoms, mud, to the 8.8.E.
of the east point of Anticosti, living. This and the pre-
ceding are new to America.

Cryptodon Gouldit, Philippi. Common, living, at all depths ;
it ranges from 10 to 250 fathoms.

Astarte lactea, Brod. & Sow. Fine in several localities. Off
Sawhill Point in 30 fathoms ; off Moisie village in 70 fathoms;
mouth of St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms ; Gaspé
Bay. The young is Astarte Richardsonii, Reeve.

Astarte. ‘Two species of Astarte, both of the A. sulcata
group, were collected in deep water. One, of which two
specimens only were dredged (off Bear Point, Anticosti,
in 112 fathoms), I at first thought to be A. crebricostata ;
the other is by far the most abundant mollusk of the greater
depths of the northern part of the river and gulf of the
St. Lawrence. Mr. Jeffreys says that this latter shell is
Astarte sulcata, var. minor. No specimens that I have seen,
from American or European localities, exactly resemble
either of these shells; and, in my judgment, both are new
and good species.

Tellina (Macoma) inflata, Stimpson, MSS. Perhaps M. fragilis
of Leach. Fine living specimens of a shell which the late
lamented Dr. Stimpson gave to the writer some years ago,
with the label ‘¢ Macoma fragilis, St. MSS.,” were dredged
in 70 fathoms, sand, off Moisie village and at various depths
in other localities.

* Newra arctica, Sars. Several living specimens of this spe-

-cies (the largest of which measures upwards of an inch and
a quarter in its greatest breadth) were taken in 125 fathoms,
off Cap-Rosier lighthouse ; also in 200 fathoms, mud, Ellis
Bay, Anticosti, bearmg §8.8.W. 27 miles distant.

* Newra obesa, Lovén (=.N. pellucida, Stimpson). Off Caribou
Island, on the north shore of the St. Lawrence, nearly oppo-
site Cape Chatte, living, in 170 fathoms, mud. I regard
both N. arctica and N. obesa as varieties of the European
N. cuspidata, N. arctica being adults of unusual size, and N.
obesa the young of the same species. In deference to Mr.

350 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

Jeffreys’s greater experience, however, I keep the two forms
separate. NV. arctica has not previously been found on the
American coast.

* Utriculus pertenuis, Mighels. In 25 fathoms, sand, off Trinity
River, also in Gaspé Bay; abundant at both localities.
(Probably =U. turritus, Moller.)

Utriculus hyalinus ?, Turton (=Diaphana debilis, Gould).
With the preceding, but rare in both places.

*Philine quadrata, Wood. Alive, from 212 fathoms, mud, to

_ the 8.8.W. of the east point of Anticosti.

Philine lineolata, Couth. Gaspé Bay, and off the St. John’s
River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms.

Dentalium abyssorum, Sars. Dead but good specimens of this
species were dredged in three localities: —in 164 fathoms, mud,
off Seven Island Bay; also in 160and 200fathoms to the 5S. W.

_ and §.8.W. of Ellis Bay, Anticosti. New to America.

Stphonodentalium vitreum, Sars. Deep water, in several lo-
calities, fine and living. Most frequent in 200 to 250
fathoms; also new to the American side of the Atlantic.

Margarita argentata, Gould (=M. glauca, MOoll.). Off the

. mouth of the St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms, and

_ sparingly in other localities. Gaspé Bay.

Margarita striata?, Brod. & Sow. A remarkable variety of
this species, with three unusually prominent revolving ribs
(so much so as to remind one of some of the Australian
Trochocochleas), occurred in 70 fathoms, sand, off Moisie
village. The type is abundant and large almost everywhere

in the St. Lawrence in shallow water.

Rissoa carinata, Mighels. Frequent, alive, from 96 fathoms
in Trinity Bay.

Rissoa castanea, Moll. With the above, and elsewhere not
unfrequent.

Rissoa scrobiculata, M6ll. Collected in three localities, in
from 125 to 250 fathoms, where it is large and fine. It
occurs living, but of small size, in Gaspé Bay, at depths of
from 20 to 30 fathoms.

Rissoella eburnea, Stimpson. One living and adult example,
in 70 fathoms, off Moisie village.

Lacuna glacialis, Miller. A living adult specimen of this
species was dredged from 96 fathoms in Trinity Bay. The
shell is not a true Lacuna, and belongs, in my judgment, to
a new genus.

Aporrhais occidentalis, Beck. A remarkable thin and in-
flated variety of this species was taken in 120 fathoms off
Bear Head, Anticosti. The type is not uncommon through-
out the gulf in from 20 to 50 fathoms.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 351

Eulima stenostoma, Jeffreys. A single living adult was taken
from 160 fathoms, to the south-west of Ellis Bay, Anticosti.
New to America.

Astyris Holbillit, M6ll. (= Columbella rosacea, Gld.). Tri-
nity Bay, 96 fathoms, also other localities. Ranges from 20
to 100 fathoms.

Buccinum ciliatum, O. Fabr. Alive, in 112 fathoms, off
Charleton Point, Anticosti.

Buccinum cyaneum?, Brug. From 250 fathoms, mud, be-
tween the east point of Anticosti and the Bird-rocks.

Stpho islandicus, Chemn, Only one living example of this
mollusk was collected, from 112 fathoms, off Charleton
Point, Anticosti.

Sipho Sarsti, Jeffreys. With the above, but much more fre-
quent; also off Egg Island, in 70 to 80 fathoms. The
epidermis is very different in these two species; but it is diffi-
cult to separate them when the specimens are water-worn.

Trophon craticulatus,O. Fabr. Off Cap-Rosier lighthouse, in
38 fathoms, stones, fine and living; also near the mouth of
the St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms, sand, but dead.

Fasciolaria ligata, Mighels. ‘Two living examples were taken
in Gaspé Bay, near Cape Gaspé, on a stony bottom, in
20 or 30 fathoms.

Twenty-five species of shells not previously known to in-
habit the seas of the Province of Quebec were collected during
the two cruises; of these, twelve are new to the American
side of the Atlantic.

FISHES.

The only fishes brought up in the dredge were a young
specimen of each of the following species :—

Sebastes norvegicus. ‘The Norway haddock. 96 fathoms,
Trinity Bay.

Anarrhichas lupus. The wolf fish. 112 fathoms, off Charle-
ton Point, Anticosti.

Agonus hexagonus?, Schneid. With the preceding.

It is estimated that, when the whole of the material collected
has been examined with care and all the specimens are de-
termined, upwards of 100 species of marine invertebrates new
to the Gulf of the St. Lawrence can be added to its previously
recorded fauna. Of these, from 30 to 40 species are new to
the western side of the Atlantic, and a few are undescribed.
When it is considered that only five weeks were spent at sea,
that during this time the ordinary duties upon which the
schooners were engaged (and sometimes unfavourable weather)

aon Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

often made dredging quite impracticable, also that I was
alone (so far as scientific help was concerned) nearly the whole
time, I may be pardoned for thinking that the results of
these investigations, so far as they go; are very encouraging,
and such as should stimulate to renewed exertions in so pro-
mising a field of inquiry.

I have previously shown (in the ‘Canadian Naturalist’ for
1869) that a large proportion of the Greenland invertebrates,
probably three fourths of the whole, range as far south as the
northern part of the Gulf of St. Lawrence down to Gaspé
Bay. In Canada many marine animals (such as, for example,
the oyster and the two species of Crepidula which are found
attached to it) occur off the southern coast of the Bay of Cha-
leurs, but not in the northern part of the same bay. A
number of characteristic New-England species inhabit the
coasts of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, which do not ap-
parently range further north than the Bay of Chaleurs.

On the Admiralty Charts of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, an
irregular line of shallow soundings may be seen to extend from
a little above the northern extremity of the Island of Cape
Breton, round the Magdalen group, and thence, in a westerly
direction, to Bonaventure Island. To the south and south-
west of this line the water is uniformly somewhat shallow,
and never exceeds 50 fathoms in depth. To the north, north-
west, and north-east of the same line the water deepens
rapidly, and perhaps even precipitously. Principal Dawson
suggests that the Subcarboniferous rocks of which the Magdalen
Islands are composed, and which appear again on the mainland,
in Bonaventure County, may possibly crop up under the sea
in the area between the north-west side of Cape Breton and
the mainland of New Brunswick, as well as that of the counties
of Bonaventure and Gaspé, in the Province of Quebec. This
would account, possibly, for the shallowness of the water in
the area in question. Whether this is the case or not, it seems
not improbable that this extended line of shallow soundings
may form a natural barrier to those arctic currents, if any such
there are, which sweep down the Straits of Belle Isle in a south-
westerly direction, and may tend to deflect their course in a
bold curve into and up the river St. Lawrence.

In the centre of this river, opposite Murray Bay, about 80
miles below Quebec, Principal Dawson has dredged quite a
large series of Labrador marine invertebrates ; but how much
further up the stream these salt-water denizens extend, we
have yet to learn.

North of the Bay of Chaleurs the fauna of the Gulf of St.
Lawrence has a purely arctic character. The species of which

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 353

it is composed are remarkable alike for their geological anti-
quity and for their wide range of geographical distribution.
In time, a few of them date back to as ancient periods as the
Coralline and Red Crags, and a much larger number occur in
the Postpliocene deposits of both Kurope and North America.
It is curious to observe that species which are found both living
on the American coast to-day and fossil in the European
Pliocene and Postpliocene, had a different geographical range
in former times from that which they are known to have now.
Many of these arctic marine invertebrates are circumpolar in
their distribution, and not only inhabit both sides of the At-
lantic, but are also found in the Northern Pacific. The prece-
ding generalizations refer almost exclusively to the assemblage
of marine animals characteristic of comparatively shallow
water, the members of which range in depth from low-water
mark up to about 50 fathoms.

The deep-water fauna, at least that of the localities examined,
is also decidedly arctic, but it has at the same time a much
more Scandinavian aspect. Nearly all of the species which
are now for the first time recorded as inhabitants of the Atlantic
coast of America occur also in the seas of the north of Scot-
land, of Norway, and Spitzbergen. There is a striking simi-
larity between the series of fossils from the Quaternary deposits
of Norway (as catalogued by Sars) and the marine inverte-
brates of the deepest parts of the St. Lawrence. Pennatule,
Ctenodiscus, Tripylus (Schizaster) fragilis, Ophioglypha Sarstt,
together with many species of mollusks, are common to both.
Still it must be borne in mind that in the Quaternary deposits
of Norway a number of characteristic European invertebrates
occur, which, so far as we know, do not live on the western
side of the Atlantic.

In the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence, generally speaking,
the number of species of marine animals which may be collected
at or above low-water mark is very small; few specimens,
apparently, are washed ashore by storms. But there is a con-
stant tendency in the opposite direction ; littoral and shallow-
water forms are constantly being drifted down to lower levels,
particularly shells (which are usually dead and empty) and the
larger calcareous Polyzoa, such as Celleporaria incrassata and
Myriozoum subgracile. Sometimes the Mollusca are living:
on one occasion I dredged an example of Littorina rudis,
apparently alive, but certainly with the operculum fitting
tightly into the aperture, from upwards of 100 fathoms water.
When such is the case, it is often difficult to separate the true
denizens of the deep sea from those which are washed down
from shallower water.

354 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

The Government of Canada (to whom I had the honour of
presenting a report on this preliminary deep-sea dredging-
expedition, with special reference to facts collected bearmg on
the fisheries) has decided that the prosecution of these inquiries
shall be continued. A vote of a small sum of money has
been passed, which will, it is hoped, defray the necessary
expenses of the expedition. I propose to devote the months
of July and August of the present year to endeavouring to
dredge in the greatest depths of the River and Gulf of St.
Lawrence, particularly in the deepest place to the west of
Newfoundland. Between the east point of Anticosti and the
Magdalen Islands, about halfway, and in an easterly direction
towards Newfoundland, is the deepest part of the gulf. The
bottom, at this locality, for several miles (nearly two meridians)
has a depth of 313 fathoms. Last year we were unfortunate ;
for as soon as we were fairly on the ground, and had got
every thing in readiness, a stiff north-west gale sprung up,
which lasted sixty hours, and made dredging quite imprac-
ticable. It is hoped that in this respect our efforts will be
more successful during the present season.

Montreal, July 12, 1872.

XLIX.—Descriptions of new Myriopoda of the Family Glo-
meride. By ARTHUR GARDINER BuTLeER, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

[Plate XVIII. |

THE millipedes treated of in the present paper are all in
the collection of the British Museum.

CHILOGNATHA.
Family Glomeride*, Gervais.
Genus ZEPHRONIA, Gray.
1. Zephronia chitonoides, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. figs. 2, 2a.

Brownish testaceous, inclining to castaneous; head and
nuchal plate darker.

Head shining, external area coarsely rugose, central area
coarsely punctured, inner margin bearing about fourteen minute
teeth ; dorsal segments highly polished, covered with exceed-
ingly indistinct, almost obsolete, granulations ; external margin
of first segment rugose ; last segment very oblique ; segmental
lateral wings much incurved in dried specimens, very oblique.

* Variously designated Zephronude, Spherotheride, and Polyzonide !
(Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1865, p. 172). In his ‘ Aptéres,’

M. Gervais restricts this family to the three genera Polyzoniwm, Stiphono-
tus, and Stphonophora.

Mr. A.G. Butler on new Myriopoda. 355

Length 1 inch 7 lines to 1 inch 3 lines; width at first dorsal
segment 9 lines.

Hab. Madras and Ceylon (Dr. A. Smith). Four speci-
mens. B.M.

Allied to Z. Brandtii of Humbert, but differing in the
number of teeth on the back of the head, the projecting last
segment, the incurved character of all the segments, the wings
of which are narrower, the relatively narrower and more
elongate character of the entire animal. We have Z. Brandtit
under two distinct types of coloration; the darker form appears
to be the adult type.

2. Zephronia rugulosa, n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 1.

Very near to the preceding, but pale testaceous; the head,
nuchal plate, and hind margins of dorsal segments olivaceous
brown.

Head glabrous, external third very coarsely and densely
punctured, inner margin bearing about ten small teeth ; nuchal
plate and dorsal segments distinctly rugose and sparsely punc-
tured all over ; segmental wings less oblique and broader than
in the preceding species.

Length 7 lines; width 4 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (£. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

3. Zephronia noticeps, n. sp.

Allied to Z. chitonotdes. Brownish olivaceous; the eyes,
antenne, legs, and nuchal plate (except central area) green;
front of head melining to orange, central area crossed by three
oval red spots.

Head glabrous, somewhat pilose in front, coarsely but
sparsely punctured ; hind margin bearing about eight small
teeth ; nuchal plate surrounded by a series of coarse punctures,
several also scattered over its central area; dorsal segments
dull, almost imperceptibly granulose, the last segment percep-
tibly punctured, especially behind; segmental wings almost as
in preceding species.

‘Length 8 lines ; width 4 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (FE. W. Janson). One specimen. B.M.

4, Zephronia corrugata, n. sp.
Allied to 7. inermis, but paler in colouring, and with all
the dorsal segments coarsely rugose.
Length 1 inch 8 lines to 7 lines; width 9 lines to 3 lines.
Hab, Ceylon (f. Templeton). Four specimens. B.M.

Possibly only a variety of Z. inermis, of which we have four
examples from Madras and Ceylon.

356 Mr. A.G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

5. Zephronia leopardina, n. sp.
_ Allied to Z. inermis, but pale testaceous, blotched all over
with castaneous, and covered with minute, scarcely perceptible
hairs; puncturing almost precisely as in Z. inermis.
Length 8 lines ; width 44 lines.
Hab. Ceylon (&. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

6. Zephronia tigrina, n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 7.

Allied to Z. corrugata. Castaneous, with each of the dorsal
segments, excepting the first and last, crossed by a band of
ochre-yellow ; head and front of first dorsal segment pitchy ;
hind margins of all the dorsal segments pitchy.

Head and nuchal plate covered with coarse punctures; dorsal
segments very rugose; wings not angulated, but obliquely
rounded off in front, and with well-developed anterior ridge.

Length 1 inch 7 lines; width 9 lines.

Hab. “ Kast Indies” (S. Stevens). One specimen. B.M.

7. Zephronia zebraica, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 4.

Allied to Z. téigrina. Ochreous, head pitchy ; front of nuchal
plate and front margins of all the dorsal segments black ; two
uregularly triangular pitchy patches towards the front of last
segment.

Head densely and coarsely punctured in front, otherwise
sparsely punctured; a row of well-defined punctures along
front of nuchal plate; all the dorsal segments sparsely punc-
tured in front, last segment punctured all over.

Length 1 inch 11 lines ; width 11 lines.

Hab. Near Bombay (Col. Whitehill). One specimen. B.M.

8. Zephronia nigrinota, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 9.

Allied to the preceding species. Dark olivaceous or casta-
neous, with dorsal segments slightly paler in front, and dotted
here and there with black and sometimes with ochreous spots ;
head and nuchal plate pitchy.

Head glabrous, densely and coarsely punctured in front,
irregularly and sparsely punctured behind ; nuchal plate ex-
hibiting a few coarse punctures here and there ; dorsal segments
almost imperceptibly granulose; segmental wings as in the
preceding species.

Length 1 inch 3 lines to 1 inch 2 lines.

Hab. Sikkim (Dr. Hooker) ; Assam (Warwick). 81x speci-
mens. B.M.

9. Zephronia lutescens, n. sp.

Testaceous, sometimes clouded with olivaceous; head and
nuchal plate pale olive and covered with short bristles.

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda. 357

Head coarsely punctured, external third densely punctured ;
nuchal plate with a row of coarse punctures in front; dorsal
segments (excepting the front edge of the wings and the
posterior portion of the last segment, which are somewhat
rugose and pilose) polished and without punctuation.

Length 10 to 84 lines ; width 5} to 5 lines.

Hab. India (Mrs. Hamilton). 'T'wo specimens. B.M.

Allied to 7. glabrata of Newport; but larger, broader, and
with the nuchal plate and dorsal segments much less punctured.
10. Zephronia ignobilis, n. sp.

Testaceous, clouded with dusky olivaceous. 2

Head, nuchal plate, and dorsal segments densely punctured
all over and clothed with short hair; segmental wings slightly
curved and very pointed.

Length 44 lines ; width 2 lines.

Hab. Java (Argent). One specimen. B.M.

Allied to Z. Lichtensteinii; but without the shining dorsal
ridge.

11. Zephronia pilifera, n. sp.

Brownish testaceous, spotted here and there with black, and
clothed with short hairs; head and nuchal plate pitchy.

Head coarsely punctured, more densely in front; nuchal
plate coarsely punctured; dorsal segments finely and densely
punctured ; wings curving slightly backwards.

Length 9 lines; width 44 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (Rf. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

Also allied to Z. Lichtensteinit?. It differs also from the
preceding species in size, colour, and the form of the segmental
wings.

12. Zephronia innominata, Newport, MS. Pl. XVIII. fig. 8.

Testaceous, eyes and antenne greenish.

Head coarsely rugose and punctured all over; nuchal plate
densely and coarsely punctured ; dorsal segments densely but
minutely punctured, their external edges minutely pilose.

Length 1 inch 34 lines; width 7 lines. _

Hab. Philippines (Cuming). Two specimens. B.M.

Nearly allied to Z, castanea of Newport; but narrower, paler
in colour, with broader terminal joint to antenna, and more
distinctly punctured dorsal segments.

13. Zephronia sulcatula, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 5.

Allied to 7. inermis, rather paler and duller.
Head flatter than in Z. ¢nermis, punctured in the same way ;

358 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

nuchal plate without punctures; dorsal segments, excepting
the last (which is delicately rugose), without punctures; all,
excepting the first and last, longitudinally multisulcate.

Length 1 inch 11 lines to 1 inch 4 lines; width 1 inch to 9
lines.

Hab. Borneo (W. Jeakes). Eight specimens. B.M.

One example shows scarcely a trace of the sulcations on the
dorsal segments.

Genus SPH#ROTHERIUM, Brandt.

1. Spherotherium latum,n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 3.

Castaneous, dotted here and there with blackish; mouth
black; eyes crystalline white.

Head rugose and densely punctured in front, coarsely but
sparsely punctured in the centre; nuchal plate sparsely punc-
tured ; dorsal segments delicately rugose, last segment also
sparsely punctured.

Length 2 inches 1 line; width 1 inch 3 lines.

Hab. North Madagascar (L. Bouton). One specimen. B.M.

Allied to S. Actwon of White; but smaller, paler in colour,
more depressed in outline, less rugose, and with lateral wings
of segments less curved. The antenne in S, Acton are broken,
which accounts for Mr. White not having more than hinted at
its genus by comparing it with S. hippocastanum*.

2. Spherotherium Neptunus, n. sp. Pl. XVITI. fig. 6.

Olive-green, clouded and blotched with pale ochreous; the
external margins of the segments dark ochreous. Variety
pitchy, clouded with castaneous; the external margins of the
segments castaneous.

Head coarsely and densely punctured in front, sparsely
behind ; nuchal plate with row of coarse punctures in front and
two or three punctures behind; dorsal segments smooth and
shining, the last sparsely punctured.

Length 2 inches to 43 lines ; width 1 inch to 2 lines.

Hab. Madagascar (Madame Ida Pfeiffer); Port Natal
(Gueinzius). Hight specimens. :

Allied to S. rotundatum of Brandt, and agrees in many
respects with the description of S. Titanus ; but the last segment
is not peculiar in shape.

* A Zephronia (!) in the British Museum agrees pretty well with the
description of the latter species ; it will, however, doubtless prove to be
distinct when an opportunity occurs of comparing it with authenticated
examples of that species.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 359

3. Spherotherium fraternum, n. sp.

Closely allied to the preceding, but with head and nuchal
plate coarsely punctured all over and clothed with short hairs,
the dorsal segments exhibiting a number of small, rounded,
whitish pustules.

Length 84 lines ; width 5 lines.

Hab. Victoria, Australia (Dr. Howitt). One specimen. B.M.

4. Spherotherium nigrum, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 11.

Shining black, antenne clothed with reddish hairs.

Head glabrous, coarsely and densely punctured in front,
sparsely behind; nuchal plate delicately rugose and coarsely
but sparsely punctured ; dorsal segments coarsely rugose and
punctured, last segment densely punctured, its outer edge
curving outwards so as to form a distinct projecting rim ; lateral
wings very slightly curved.

Length 1 inch 4 lines ; width 8 lines.

Hab. South Africa (Sir Andrew Smith). One specimen.
B.M.

A remarkable species, coming nearer to S. grossum, Koch,
than to any other described form.

5. Spherotherium sinuatum,n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 10.

Closely allied to S. dorsalis, Gervais (Zephronia pulverea,
White ; Spherotherium retusum, Koch), but smaller, without
dorsal ridge, the punctuation of the head. and nuchal plate finer,
the lateral segmental wings curving distinctly backwards, and
the depression of last segment reduced to a slight sinus.

Length 74 lines ; width 4 lines.

Hab. Sarawak (Wallace). One specimen. B.M.

L.—On Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. By Oscar ScumiptT*.

[Plates XVI., XVII. ]

I must preface my communications upon Coccoliths and a
newly discovered kind of organized corpuscles from the Bathy-
bius-mud, which I call Rhabdoliths, with a short report upon
the course of that expedition in the lower part of the Adriatic
Sea during which I first made a close acquaintance with these
exceedingly remarkable corpuscles.

By working up the sponges captured during the sounding
and surveying of the Florida coast, and incited by the English

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Sitzungsbericht der

k. k. Akad. der Wissenschaften in Wien,’ Bd. Ixii. (1870) Abth. i.
pp. 669-682.

360 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

deep-sea soundings, the desire was raised in me to learn more
accurately the conditions of the bottom of the Adriatic. My
frequent dredging-voyages along the Dalmatian coast had
hardly made me acquainted with a greater depth than from 40
to 50 fathoms. In presence of the surprising results of the
investigations of the Atlantic sea-bottom, and their importance
equally in zoology and geology, a supplemental examination
of the sea near me appeared to be of general interest. But it
was perfectly clear that this could only be undertaken with
large resources ; and for this purpose circumstances were pecu-
liarly favourable. Considering the total deficiency of modern
and fully trustworthy charts of the Adriatic Sea, a thorough
survey of it could no longer be put off. This great work was
confided by the Admiralty to Captain Cisterreicher with a
number of officers. A smaller steamer was associated with the
principal ship, the ‘'Triest,’ a large and convenient steamer ;
and besides its rowing-boats the ‘'Triest’ carried a steam-launch.
As in the summer of 1870 it was proposed to lay down some
lines between the Apulian and the Albano-Dalmatian coasts,
I applied to Vice-Admiral von Tegetthof and Captain Cister-
reicher, and received from them the most obliging permission
and invitation to pass a few weeks with my friend Professor
Gobanz as a guest on board the ‘ Triest,’ and a promise that I
should be as far as possible aided in my designs. Equally liberal
was the assistance of the Imperial Academy with regard to
our equipment. And so my companion and I found ourselves
with the Lloyd’s steamer, on the morning of the 20th of June,
in the roads of Durazzo, where the ‘ Triest’ was lying at anchor.
We were cordially received by the gentlemen of the surveying-
expedition, and 1 look back with pleasure and’ gratitude to
every hour of my living in their company.

IT had had dredges made upon two models :—one the frame of
which was a narrow rectangle; and several with triangular
frames, of which I have previously made use with good results.
The only improvement (to which Professor Lovén had called
my attention) was, that of the three bows which bear the ring
for the rope, only two are riveted together, whilst the third is
united with them by a somewhat thinner piece of rope. In
the event of the catching of the dredge, this union will break
more easily than the hawser, and the dredge will be more
easily freed. I was never in a position to learn this by ex-
perience. The triangular dredge proved perfectly available
down to depths of 630 fathoms, the greatest that we attained,
when leaden weights of 80 lbs. were attached in the angles.
As a tow-line, rope of the thickness of one’s thumb was used ;
and in the absence of a small steam-engine for drawing it up,

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 361

the numerous hands of the crew proved to be more than
sufficient. During the operations with the dredge, the sound-
ings and measurements of temperature were also carried on.
With regard to the temperatures, I have as yet seen no con-
nected series ; but this portion of the operations of the survey
will be worked out by Lieutenant Weyprecht. In the deepest
parts of the gulf, with a surface temperature of 18° R., the tem-
perature does not fall below 12°-10° R., so that these differ-
ences can hardly have any essential influence upon the deve-
lopment or repression of life. Moreover in the basin-like part
of the Adriatic Sea in which we made our observations, the
currents are remarkably small, and do not appear to affect the
greater depths of several hundred fathoms. I place the extra-
ordinary poverty of those deeps in all the higher forms of life
chiefly to the account of this circumstance. On the upper
parts of the Dalmatian coast, where the gulf is more narrowed,
the shore-current is more perceptible, and the position of
elongated islands and groups of reefs (Scoglien) gives origin to
stronger local currents; it is precisely these regions that are
endowed with the richest fauna and flora. As both Heller
and myself ascertained, this abundance diminishes towards
Ragusa, and below this point the coast is almost entirely sterile.
On board the ‘ Triest’ I investigated three lines with the dredge,
namely Sasano-Brindisi, Bari-Durazzo, and Dulcigno-Viesti.
The greatest depth of the first line was reached with 480
fathoms, and that of the third with 630 fathoms. The dredge
could be so often cast, and, notwithstanding its simplicity, acted
with such certainty, that from its contents a tolerably correct
picture of the nature and population of the bottom must result.
The first freshly examined sample of the bottom from 170
fathoms convinced me that I had Bathybius-mud before me,
Its yellowish-grey colour and its exceedingly characteristic
greasy nature were so well known to the officers that I was
unanimously assured by them that this “ primitive mud”
predominates from the upper parts of the Adriatic Sea, alter-
nating only here and there with a few extended sandy tracts.
The soundings of previous years have confirmed this; and in
like manner the dredge constantly brought me up this mud
from all depths on all three lines. It was immediately seen
that it is extremely rich in Foraminifera (predominantly Globi-
gerina, Orbulina, Uvigerina, Rotalia, Textularia); but I looked
in vain for other things which I had expected to find. A
young and consequently not quite certainly determinable
specimen of an Echinus, probably /. melo (= Flemingii?), from
230 fathoms, and an empty but perfect shell of Terebratula
vitrea from 430 fathoms is the entire produce! That from the
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 26

362 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

same depths some very young Bivalves, of scarcely ? millim.
in diameter, made their appearance, whilst no trace of full-
grown animals was to be found, can only be explained by the
supposition that the larve furnished with their velum were
driven unusually far into the open sea.

I turn now to the Bathybius-mud and the coccoliths. Very

soon after my return, I published in the ‘Ausland,’ No. 50, a
short notice of the discovery of these bodies at all depths in
the Adriatic Sea, from 50 fathoms downwards, with the addition
that they would no doubt be present also at less depths. I
was consequently in advance of the publication of the extended
investigations and discoveries of Giimbel, as he explained in
No. 32 of the same journal. We have now a more detailed
statement of these fine observations*, which show the extra-
ordinary diffusion of Bathybius and the coccoliths in all depths
of all seas of the actual world, and the colossal part taken by
them in building up the crust of the earth. I had also already
made the discovery that the coccoliths are strongly represented
in the raised land of Brindisi. Now, as Hiickel also nearly. at
the same time investigated the coccoliths with his usual
thoroughnesst, it might seem to be superfluous for me to go
into the same subject.
_ But as Giimbel’s work, so far as it is at present before us,
extends only to the demonstration of the presence of coccoliths
in the most various calcareous and marly deposits and in
the sediments of the present day, and to certain reactions of
Bathybius, and as I am obliged to conceive the structure of the
coccoliths differently from Hiickel in several points, and, finally,
as, from the almost inconceivable importance of the coccoliths,
any contribution to their more accurate knowledge must be
welcome, the present memoir will carry with it its own justifi-
cation.

I will first of all deal with a statement of Giimbel’s, “that
it is certainly conceivable that Bathybius takes its origin in
the sarcode of the lower animals.”’ He is led to this by the
observation, “that when the shell of calcareous-shelled Fora-
minifera is dissolved away by dilute acid, their punctate mem-
branes and granular flocks remain undissolved in the residue,
which latter possess the form and reaction of Bathybius. ‘These
remains, indeed, may just as well be the residue of the sarcode
of the Foraminifera as of our Bathybius, which had only been
deposited in the cavities of the Foraminifera, and in this way
comes again into view.” The sarcode of the Foraminifera will

* Giimbel, “Vorliiufige Mittheilungen tiber Tiefseeschlamm,” N. Jahrb.
fiir Mineral. &c. 1870, Heft 6.
+ Hiickel, “ Beitrige zur Plastidentheorie,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, vy. 3.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 363

very probably exhibit the same reactions as the protoplasm of
Bathybius ; so that I should by no means be inclined to deduce
the identity of the two bodies in other respects from such a
resemblance. But even before I had read Giimbel’s communi-
cation in the ‘Jahrbuch’ it was known to me, by direct obser-
vation, not only that empty shells of Foraminifera are filled by
Bathybius-mud, but also that living Foraminifera incept Bathy-
bius-flocks together with coccoliths, no doubt as nourishment. The
derivation of Bathybius from Foraminifera and other Protista
is quite inconceivable when we consider the quantitative pro-
portions. If we wash and strain off several pounds of Adriatic
Bathybius-roud, there remains a minute heaplet of Foraminifera.
And, further, the Bathybius-protoplasm, if supposed to originate
from Foraminifera, would necessarily become decomposed be-
fore it could collect into such incalculable masses. Bathybius
freshly taken out of the sea exhibits very sluggish movements,
more sluggish even than those which occur in the sarcodic net of
most sponges, but in other respects exactly the same phe-
nomena which may be detected in specimens preserved in
spirits of wine. This agrees exactly with my numerous com-
parative observations of fresh sponges and sponges preserved
in spirit. Preparations of the finest sarcodic nets derived from
the latter are absolutely undistinguishable, if we leave out of
consideration the sluggish displaceability, from fresh prepar-
ations just taken out of the sea. I believe, therefore, that the
further observation of the living Bathybius will furnish no par-
ticular information as to its nature.

At present the coccoliths seem to be inseparable companions
of the Bathybius-protoplasm. It is a very different question,
however, whether they merely live upon the soil of this pro-
toplasm as independent organisms, or are products of it, as
parts or organs. In what follows, an interpretation will come
out, according to which the coccoliths pass through an inde-
pendent cycle of development.

Both Huxley and Hiickel admit that there are two different,
although nearly allied, forms of coccoliths—namely, a simple
disciform kind (the discoliths), and another which presents the
form of a double disk united by a central pin (the cyatholiths).
I must decidedly affirm that this distinction does not occur,
and that rather all those forms which Hdckel has described as
perfectly developed discoliths with an outer ring are cyatholiths—
in other words, that the outer ring is nothing but the margin
of that shield which in the cyatholiths stands out better, from
its somewhat greater removal from the other parts. Thus I
have met with no supposed discolith the margin of which
could not with patience be ascertained to be a constituent of

26

364 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

an entire disk. I beg the reader who may have Hickel’s work
at hand to compare figures 25 (discolith) and 72 (cyatholith).
Both, when looked at from the surface, have the same appear-
ance; and even in 72, e, the margin of the larger disk appears,
like e in 25, as the outer ring. If 72 when placed on the edge
appears like figs. 33 and 62, whilst 25 in the same position gives
an outline like fig. 44, this is due solely to the fact that in the
latter case the inner circle and disk are completely concealed
by the outer basin-shaped shield.

I desired at the beginning to call attention to this important
point, as it essentially simplifies the question as to the struc-
ture of the coccoliths; and I will now pass to the special ex-
amination.

In Pl. XVI. fig. 15 a coccolith is shown from the flat or
ventral side. The individual parts are named as follows b
Hickel :—a, central granule ; b, medullar space (Markfeld) ; ¢,
medullar ring (Markring) ; d, granular ring (Kérnerring) ; @,
outer ring. I must remark that only im rare cases have I seen
the medullar ring otherwise than as in my drawing and as
Hiickel figures it. It appears to me almost without exception
as the simple contour of the medullar space, and only becomes
more shaded when the medullar space acquires a more concave
form. We now first trace the coccoliths to the development
of the granular ring, which frequently becomes a granular disk.
Numerous corpuscles with a simple or double contour, and
from 0°001 to 0-004 millim. in diameter, appear as isolated cen-
tral granules and as central granules with the medullar space
(figs. 1,2). The most important stage, however, in the deve-
lopment of the coccolith is that of the formation of the granular
ring. Hiackel characterizes this simply as a granulated zone ;
and, according to his figures, the material examined by him
was already so much altered that the composition of the
granular ring of actual spherical portions did not distinctly
appear. Bodies like fig. 3 of our plate are not unfrequent.
It consists of a lenticular central part, with a ring of from 7
to 10 balls. Hiackel also has a similar structure in his fig. 10,
which, however, according to his statement, consists of merely
sarcodic granulations. The bodies of which I am speaking
are solid, but may certainly have proceeded from a sarcodic
foundation.

Although we may remain in doubt as to this category of
corpuscles, this is no longer the case with another very frequent
form. In fig. 4 we see the central granule and medullar
space surrounded by a distinct cirelet of balls ; and from a com-
parison of a great number of specimens and stages, it appears
that this ring of globules originates in a growth and subse-

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 365

quent division of the margin of the medullar space. The
margin of the medullar space swells up; and such specimens
as fig. 5 show that the marginal swelling is not formed
uniformly, and only by degrees constitutes a perfectly closed
circlet. Almost without exception, the whole structure, at
the appearance of the circlet of balls, acquires the form of a
bowl, at the same time that there is the greatest variability in
the number of the globular portions and the size of the individual
globules.

In two cases we have nothing more formed than a mére
zone of globules or granules. This is shown in figs. 6, 7, 9,
10, 11. One case is, that only a circle of large globular por-
tions surrounds the medullar rmg. A very frequent case of
this kind is shown by fig. 6, from the fresh Bathybius, and
fig. 9, from the raised deposits near Brindisi. It is true, as
I shall show hereafter, that here also completion may be
effected by the outer ring, 7. e. the dorsal disk ; but in general
the development of the body seems to be closed with the growth
of the large globular portions; and I have no indication that
these large globules break up into smaller portions. Such bodies
as fig. 11 are excessively rare. It shows, in the circumference
of the central disk, a circlet of large celliform balls; and this
body also occurs but little altered in the deposits at Brindisi
(fig. 10). The centres in the globules of the circlet appear
quite distinctly to be condensed into a sort of nucleus, which
also makes its appearance quite definitely, although irregularly,
in the specimen trom Brindisi.

In the second case (fig. 7) we find, instead of a simple
circlet of globules, a granular zone, ¢. e. a zone in which small
globules of about the diameter of the central granule are placed
in from 2 to 4 rows side by side and partly over one another.
Both this and the above described body may, as we show
further on, cover themselves with the dorsal shield; but fre-
quently this course of further development does not occur, and
bodies are produced like fig. 8 and, more distinctly, fig. 12;
they are hemispherical. In fig. 12 we are looking into the
sphere ; fig. 13 is the appearance from the side, fig. 14 from
behind. Instead of a granular zone, a regular granular mantle
is present. I am uncertain about the observation that some-
times an entire hollow sphere is produced. How the division
into globular portions is compatible with the not unfrequent
concentric striation, is not yet clear to me (fig. 8).

I give on Pl. XVII. figs. 16 & 17 a form of the incomplete
coccolith which is not unfrequent. The central granule and
medullar space are present, the latter undoubtedly as a disk.
There is, however, no medullar ring; but what might be

366 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

regarded as such is the actual margin of the medullar space.
The granular zone is in course of production, although it does
not appear in the whole circumference, but advances round the
margin as an excrescence starting from a particular point.

When the development of the coccolith has taken a direction
as in fig. 12, Pl. XVI., it appears to be concluded with the
granular layer. In all other cases the coccolith usually becomes
completed by the formation of a concavo-convex disk, which
generally appears homogeneous, rarely irregularly notched and
granular, and covers and more or less overarches the parts
previously formed. As already mentioned, I have most de-
cidedly ascertained that Hickel’s so- -called outer ring 1s never
in connexion with the outer margin of the granular zone, but
is only the margin of a regular shield projecting beyond
the granular zone. In every object that I succeeded in turning
and placing on its edge, I was able to trace and ascertain this
dorsal shield.

In Pl. XVI. figs. 16,17, and in Pl. XVII. most of the
figures show the character and position of the dorsal shield.
In figs. 1 and 2 the case is represented in which the central
granule has attained a perfectly excessive development. This
may furnish the explanation of a case occurring at Brindisi
(Pl XVII. fig. 18) in which not only is the central granule
elevated, but its base and the part representing the medullar
space appears granulated. ‘This coccolith is completed by a
strong granular ring. In figs. 3 and 4 (Pl. X VIL.) the aoe
granule is wanting. All these, and the other figures of disco-
liths with a dorsal shield (figs. d, 6,4, LO 12, 13, 145 05),
show individually and when compared with each other that in
the centre of the convex side of the coccolith the dorsal shield
is connected either with the medullar space itself, or with a
peg-like prolongation of the part corresponding to the central
granule. In the fresh state their union seems to be so firm,
and perhaps elastic, that the dorsal shield is scarcely ever
broken away. From the deposits at Brindisi, however, I
have repeatedly obtained coccoliths like Pl. XVII. fig. 19,
with a regular aperture in the centre of the medullar space,
which I imagine to have been produced by the breaking
away of the dorsal shield together with its pin.

From all these observations, therefore, the dorsal shield
cannot be otherwise produced than by its gradually over-
growing the other parts from the dorsal pole of the coccolith.
The observation of such intermediate stages is extremely
difficult, because, up to the period when it projects beyond the
circumference of the granular ring, it appears to adhere closely
to the dorsal surface in the form of a most delicate lamella.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 367

Pl. XVII. fig. 13 shows a coccolith from the dorsal side, and
how the granular zone projects beyond the somewhat irregular
outlines of the shield. A monstrous shield-formation may,
however, occur, as in Pl. XVII. figs. 8 and 9, in which one
half of the shield is completely adherent, whilst the other has
grown out like a tongue. Rarely the margin of the shield is
notched and so swelled as to resemble the margin of the
granular zone, as in fig. 5.

We come now to a very important, and, it seems to me,

quite unsettled question, namely that of the relation of the
coccoliths to the Bathybius-protoplasm. Are they independent
organisms? or are they organs or parts of Bathybius? In other
words, do they propagate themselves by passing through a
definite cycle of development, in which the Bathybius-proto-
plasm serves them as a soil? or does their formation occur as
particles of the protoplasm? In the first place we have to
examine whether the doubling of the central granule, with
division of the surrounding parts, which is represented by
Hickel in a series of figures, leads to any reproduction.
Hickel simply states the fact, and says only that the elliptical
discoliths are often distinguished by having a double central
granule. But the importance of the central granule seems to
be by no means great, as it is frequently wanting in otherwise
perfectly regular and well-developed coccoliths. Many cor-
puscles with fissional processes or doublings occurring in
Bathybius are either decidedly of a different nature or at least
doubtful. Thus Pl. XVI. fig. 24 may be an Alga, and fig. 19
perhaps an Alga, but might also be a double central granule
with a correspondingly divided medullar rmg. With regard
to corpuscles such as fig. 18, with a clear centre and turbid
periphery, if we consider them isolatedly, we can scarcely
make any supposition; but compared with the not unfrequent
stages of coccoliths like fig. 20, they might be brought into
connexion therewith. As we may ascertain by placing it on
its edge, Pl. XVI. fig. 20 is a decided coccolith with a perfect
dorsal shield ; the dark non-granular part represents the gra-
nular zone, and the clear spaces in it a divided medullar space
without central granules. Pl. XVI. figs. 22, 23, is unique in
my knowledge. The structure and size leave no doubt that it
is a coccolith ; but the development in height is quite unusual.
The dorsal shield has become a capsule open above; and the
two central granules appear deeply immersed in it.

When I grasp the impression produced by numerous obser-
vations, compared with the facts of the reproduction of other
low organisms, the coccolith appears to me to be an independent
living creature. That nutrition and growth are performed by

368 Dr. QO. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

the central parts, the granule and the medullar disk, appears
undoubtedly from their arrangement and the connexion of the
other parts with them. The dorsal shield is nothing but a
covering piece, and, notwithstanding its extent, of subordinate
importance. In the globular and granular zone, however, I
see the reproductive apparatus. In favour of this there are
several reasons. So long as, like the previous observers, we
discovered in the granular zone only quite indefinite granula-
tions, the question as to the significance of this part of the
coccolith could hardly be raised; but by the present inves-
tigation the granular zone must be placed in quite a different
light. That the formation of the coccoliths starts from cor-
puscles which vary in form and size exactly like the globular
and ellipsoidal portions of the granular zone, is easy to observe.
Exactly the same scope that we see in the foundations of the
coccoliths is repeated in the dimensions of the parts of the
granular zone, from the small globules like those we find in
coccoliths such as Pl. XVI. fig. 15, to the large lenticular
bodies in fig. 11. The former are isolated as central granules ;
the latter appear as central granules with a medullar space.
An intermediate step is formed by the globule in Pl. XVII.
figs. 1 and 3; and their perfect picture is the central glo-
bule in Pl. XVI. fig. 3. The extraordinary variability of the
mature coccoliths will therefore be in accordance with an
equally wide scope in their foundations ; and the multifarious
forms of the coccolith-cycle, still by no means exhausted by
Hiickel and myself, prove (notwithstanding the identity of
discoliths and cyatholiths) that we have to do with nothing
less than a fixed species. But when we have once accepted
the notion that the corpuscles of the granular zone are the
spores of the coccoliths, the appearance of many coccoliths is
explained by it, as, for example, Pl. XVII. figs. 6, 10, and 14.
In fact we often see, instead of the granular zone, which is
elsewhere so distinct, an irregular ring or an empty disk-margin.
For this I know no other explanation than that the granules
have fallen out, leaving behind them that margin belonging to
the medullar space from which the growth and production of the
corpuscles of the granular zone took place. It is certainly
remarkable that specimens such as Pl. XVII. fig. 14 are rare ;
but they show quite evidently a retrogression and degradation,
which is expressed in the brittleness of the central disk and
the shrinking of the dorsal shield. It will be objected that
this 1s incompatible with the apparently uninterrupted accu-
mulation of the coccoliths. But m opposition to this it may
be said that the fossil coccoliths are still but very little inves-

tigated. The form with a finely granular zone (Pl. XVI.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 369

fig. 15), which is so remarkably abundant among living cocco-
liths, I can hardly detect in the deposits at Brindisi; but it
came most prominently into consideration with regard to
reproduction. The objection is therefore not serious.

My supposition, however, as to the independence and repro-
duction of the coccoliths, is established by the discovery of a
second corpuscle accompanying Bathybius, which is much
simpler and clearer, and consequently easier to check in its
individuality. It also presents certain points of comparison
with the coccoliths. We call it Rhabdolithes (Pl. XVII. figs.
20-35). Its first foundation is a little rod, which may be traced
of all sizes from 0:001 to 0:005 millim. The developed forms
range between 0°0054 and 0°004 millim. inlength. Together
with the cylindrical rods there occur about an equal number
which are thicker at one end than at the other (fig. 22). They
then acquire a button-like or globular terminal inflation (figs.
21, 23) ; and around this is produced a circlet of globules (fig.
24 &c.) which rarely exceed six in number.

The usual form of the fully developed corpuscle is as shown
in figs. 31 and 27, the parts of the circlet becoming cylindrical
or bacillar ; and one can hardly doubt that they are destined to
be thrown off for reproduction. In their size and whole
appearance they agree with the above-mentioned smallest
bacillar corpuscles. Forms such as figs. 29 and 32 are more
rare, and are produced, as we may ascertain by turning and
twisting the object, by the portions of the circlet being pressed
closer together. We may always distinguish in them the
individual globular or bacillar parts when we succeed in placing
the corpuscle upon the vertex which has no circlet. In the
shaft of the larger and especially of the clavate specimens, we
observe a fine streak, the indication of a central canal, as
appears with certainty from cases such as fig. 30. Not unfre-
quently also we have forms such as fig. 26, i which the
main outline is surrounded by a very pale external contour,
and the appearance is produced as if the rod were a larger
cavity. Figs. 33, 34,35 show rare irregular structures. Thus
in fig. 33 we see a sprout in the neighbourhood of the non-
circleted end; in fig. 34 a piece of the circlet has been pro-
duced in the prolongation of the axis of the shaft; and in
fiz. 35 the circlet has been produced above its usual point of
attachment.

In all the samples of mud from the Adriatic which contain
Bathybius and the coccoliths, rhabdoliths also occur in count-
less quantities, so that a complete view of them may be
obtained in almost every microscopic portion. They are just
as well preserved as the coccoliths in the elevated deposits of

370 Dr. A. Giinther on a new Species of Lizard.

Brindisi; and their composition of an organic formation and
of carbonate of lime may be demonstrated just as well as for
the coccoliths. Now, if we compare the granular zone of the
coccoliths with the circlet of globules of the rhabdoliths, and the
central disk (medullar space) of the coccoliths, as the matrix of
the globules, with the shaft of the rhabdoliths, and consider that,
as I believe I have shown, the dorsal disk or covering piece of
the coccoliths is of but little importance, we must recognize the
most intimate relationship between these calcareous organisms,
notwithstanding their difference of form. 'To regard the rhab-
doliths as organs or form-constituents of the Bathybius-proto-
plasm we have not the least reason; and thus, it seems to me,
the last doubt is removed, as to whether the coccoliths are
independent creatures. ‘The two bodies remain no less interest-
ing than they did before, when the coccoliths passed merely
as the tokens of the mysterious Bathybius. ‘The origin and
significance of this latter organic material are still far from
being explained. As I have already indicated, it seems to
me that the supposition that the Bathybius-protoplasm is the
residue of other low organic creatures must be completely
rejected. It is, however, no Protiston or Moneron in the sig-
nification now current, according to which all these simplest
organisms have a limitation in space and a development. A
living creature of unlimited extension is so strongly in contra-
diction to our present notions of life and organization, that our
conceptions and ideas must first adapt themselves to it.

LI.—Notice of a new Species of Lizard (Kumeces albofascio-
latus) from North Australia. By Dr. A. Gintuer, F.R.S.

Tue British Museum has recently received from Mr. Krefft a
specimen of a very large species of Humeces from Northern
Australia, which appears to be undescribed and may be cha-
racterized thus :—

Eumeces albofasciolatus.

A supranasal shield is present, but on one side it is confluent
with the nasal behind the nostril; the nostril itself is so large
as to be partly formed by the supranasal.

The lower eyelid is scaly. Palate entirely toothless, the
palatal notch being considerably behind the level of the orbit.

The single prefrontal forms a suture with the rostral and
vertical, which is very long, as long as the occipitals together ;
a pair of anterior occipitals ; central occipital elongate ; occipi-
tals bordered behind by four large scales. Nine upper labials,
the two posterior low. Opening of the ear not denticulated.

On a Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. 371

Thirty-five longitudinal series of scales round the trunk;
sixty transverse series between the fore and hind limbs. Ten
preanals, scarcely larger than the neighbouring scales. Sub-
caudal scales scarcely larger than those on the back of the
tail.

Limbs somewhat feeble ; the fore legs extend to the eye when
stretched forwards, the hind legs not quite halfway up towards
the axil. The third and fourth fingers equal in length, but
longer than the second. The third hind toe a little shorter
than the fourth and a little longer than the fifth.

Upperand lateral parts blackish brown, with irregular bluish-
white, band-like transverse spots, one or two scales broad.
Tail and legs without such bands. Lower parts uniform
white.

The specimen is 63 inches long to the vent, the greater part
of the tail being lost.

in. lin.
Distance of the snout from the eye .......... OF 25
# as STH as Sets Schacte i) 2
a ae aml 2 sh Jaki 212
os s vent Somos Vi
Benton ObAGte My: can atom a tae ee ee 1 43
ep LMG TUNERS ee ss trace ON cra ee ee 0” 38
| ania (oI hint) oe etc aay tart are Rack ee kisi ak)
55 SECON HOG. eM ee cea ele eee 0 4
H AC POG! eater ae area re 0 6
5 POUMCH COR, ee ete ae ne O 64
af HUES DOO Re ais ee a ees oe ee 0 5

LII.—Dredging-Excursion to Iceland in June and July 1872.
By T. A. VERKRUZEN.

HAvineG relinquished my first idea of paying a second visit
to Norway, where I had had an excursion last year of so much
interest, I left London about the middle of June for Granton
Harbour, Edinburgh, and went thence by the steamer ‘Queen’
to Reykjavik, where we arrived after a voyage of about ninety-
five hours—perhaps the quickest passage made there, the wind
being all the time in our favour. I stayed a month in the
island, had a ride to the Geyser, besides several shorter excur-
sions, and employed the remainder of my time in dredging and
exploring the shores of the Bay of Reykjavik. I had consider-
able difficulty in obtaining good boatmen, the Icelanders not
being accustomed to the labour of dredging, and tiring after a
few hours of exertion. All circumstances considered, however,
I managed, by good pay &c., to get my dredging done tolerably
well; and encouraged by a friend to communicate the result

312 Mr. T. A. Verkriizen on a

of my labours to the conchological world, I now have much
pleasure in doing so, trusting it may prove of some interest.
I returned from Reykjavik towards the end of July, when our
voyage back to Granton Harbour was performed in about five
days and five nights, and took consequently nearly a day anda
night longer than the outward passage. I much regretted my
want of opportunity to visit likewise the more important
northern part of that most interesting island, but should be
happy to do so under favourable circumstances, as no doubt
there we should meet with a decided, and perhaps highly
interesting, arctic fauna.

My shells have been kindly verified by J. Gwyn Jeffreys,
Esq., F.R.8., &c., who has obligingly assisted me in deter-
mining the species which had hitherto not come under my
notice.

List of Mollusca

dredged and collected in the Bay of Reykjavik, Faxa Fjérdur,
Iceland, in 20 to 36 fathoms (ground mostly stony with sea-
plants, in parts muddy sandy), in July 1872, by T. A. Ver-

kriizen.

1. Anomia ephippium, Linné. Small; from between roots of sea-
plants.
: , var. sguamula, L. Small; from leaves of sea-plants.
. Pecten islandicus, Miller. Not plentiful, and difficult to obtain.
. Mytilus edulis, L. Abundant and common.
modiolus, L. Rather plentiful ; occasionally very large.
, var. ovata, Jeffreys. Now and then met with.
. Modiolaria corrugata, Stimpson. The young plentiful, adults
rare.
8. discors, var. semilevis, Jeffr. (levigata, Gray). A fine live
specimen, though it got crushed in the dredge.
9. Crenella decussata, Montagu (cicercula, Moller). Abundant.
10. Nucula tenuis, Mont. Only five young specimens obtained.
11. Leda pernula, Mill. Moderately plentiful ; large specimens and
adults rarer.
12. Awvinus fleaxuosus, Mont. Sparingly.
13. —— , var. Gouldii, Philippi. More plentiful.
14. Cardium echinatum, L. Rather scarce; adults of a thinner
texture and smaller than British specimens.
15. —— fasciatum, Mont. Not common.
16. islandicum, L. Young and middle sizes pretty numerous,
adults scarce.
aly gronlandicum, Chemnitz. Young and middle sizes pretty
numerous, adults scarce.
18. Cyprina islandica, L. Not common in the bay.
19. Astarte sulcata, DaCosta, var. elliptica, Brown. Rather scarce ;
some approach the American variety of wndata, Gould.

ID op oto

Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. ate

20. Astarte compressa, Mont. Abundant.

21. borealis, Ch. (arctica, Gray). Rather plentiful, though
much scarcer than the Jast.

22. Tellina calearia, Ch. Young and middle sizes abundant, fine
adult specimens scarce.

23. Mactra solida, L. Scarce.

24, -—— , var. elliptica, Brown. Similar to the last; a few more

' of these.

25. Scrobicularia nitida, Mill. Pretty abundant.

prismatica, Mont. A few amongst the last.

27. Thracia truncata, Br. About half a dozen obtained.

28. Mya truncata, L. Plenty of young, the adults only in odd valves.

29. Saaicava rugosa, L. Not common.

, var. arctica, L. A few among the last.

31. Dentalium striolatum, St. A few only obtained.

é entalis, L., var. infundibulum, Lee. One dead specimen.

33. Chiton albus, L. Rather abundant.

ruber (Lowe), L. Middling plentiful.

: marmoreus, Fabricius. Not scarce.

36. Helcion pellucidum, L. A few only obtained.

37. Tectura testudinalis, Mill, Plentiful and fine, my largest
measuring about 1} inch (nearly 30 millims.) long.

38. , var. pallida, Verkriizen. Colour white, all but the
centre or dorsal scar, sometimes exhibiting a clouded wreath of
a reddish-brown colour, or other ornamentation, in the inside, with
awhite margin, and sometimes a plain colouring, but without the
longitudinal rays of the typical species. This variety also occurs
in Norway ; I am not aware whether it is hkewise met with on
the north British coasts ; not finding it named, I have proposed
the above designation for it.

39. virginea, Mill. Rather plentiful.

40. , var. lactea, Jeffreys. A few specimens.

41. Lepeta ceca, Mull. Not common. Rather a small form; the
apex sharp and prominent.

42. Punctwra noachina, L. Only two specimens, and a fragment of
a third.

43. Trochus tumidus, Mont. Rather abundant.

44, gronlandicus, Ch. Of a fine rose colour, very beautiful ;
scarce.

45.

46.
vation.

47. Molleria (Jeftr.) costulata, MO. Rather scarce; mostly dead
shells, a few with operculum.

48. Lacuna divaricata, Fabr. Pretty abundant.

49. , var. canalis, Mont. Similar to last.

50. Littorina obtusata, L., var. palliata, Say (=limata, Lovén).
Common colours. Plentiful on sea-plants on the Eider-Duck
Island in the bay.

, var. 1, darkest olive (nearly black). Abundant.

helicinus, Fabr. Only one specimen got.
cinereus, Couthouy. One dead specimen, in good preser-

374. Mr. T. A. Verkriizen on a

Littorina obtusata, var. 2, middle olive. Similar to last.

, var. 3, light olive. Not quite so plentiful.

, var. 4, yellow. Scarce.

The olive varieties have purple or plum-coloured throats; the
yellow varieties have yellow throats.

, var. 5, banded, various colours. Not common.

, var. 6, chequered. Similar to the last.

, var. 7, mottled. More plentiful among the common

colours, though prettily mottled or clouded specimens are

scarce.

rudis, Maton. Common colours. Abundant.

, var. 1, grey. Less common, especially fine examples.

, var. 2, white, brown throats. Plentiful, though

fine specimens rather rarer.

, var. 3, cream, orange throats. Rather scarce.

, var. 4, red. Now and then occurring.

——,var.5, ribbed. Sameas the last, amongst any of the

varieties and type.

, var. 6, grey-and-white banded. Plentiful ; fine spe-

cimens scarcer.

, var. 7, coloured-banded. Not frequently occurring.

, var. 8, chequered. Not frequently occurring.

, var. 9, mottled. Not frequently occurring.

52. Rissoa striata, J. Adams. Perhaps about two dozen obtained,
mostly dead shells.

53. Skenea planorbis, Fabr. Two specimens.

54. Odostomia insculpta, Mont. Fewer than fissoa striata.

55. unidentata, Mont. Only one obtained, a dead shell.

56. Natica islandica, Gmelin. A few only (dead shells) washed on
shore.

57.

dl.

_-

gronlandica (Beck), Moll. Young and middle sizes pretty
plentiful, adults scarce.

58. affinis, Gm. (clausa, Sowerby). Similar to the last, perhaps
rather scarcer.

59. Velutina levigata, Pennant. A few only obtained.

60. Trichotropis borealis, Broderip & Sowerby. Like the last ; some
fine specimens.

61. Admete viridula, Fabr. About twenty dredged; mostly fine
specimens, my largest about 17 millims. long and 9 wide.

62. Aporrhais pes-pelecani, L. A fragment (the spire) of one adult,
and four young.

63. Purpura lapillus, L. Common colours, plain. Very abundant
on piers and rocks.

64. , var. 1, orange-colour. Occasionally met with among
the last.

65. , var. 2, banded. Same as last.

66. , var. 8, ribbed. Occasionally amongst any of the
preceding.

, var. 4, imbricata, Lamarck. Rare, especially the
fine specimens.

Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. Sia

68. Buccinum undatum, L. Shape similar to British ; spire rather
longer in proportion, waves and spiral ribs rather coarse and
strongly produced. All of these were dredged in deep water.

, var. planum, Verkr. Shape conical, spire shorter
than in typical form ; mouth proportionally longer ; whorls flatter ;
suture shallow; waves slight and disappearing on last whorl,
sometimes on the two or three last ; spiral ribs indistinct, except
on intermediate forms; texture thin and more brittle, plain;
colour a purplish olive-grey, with dark purplish-brown throat,
the intermediate forms generally of a lighter hue. This variety
occurred in one to four feet water at lowest ebb-tide, near the
shore; none of these were dredged in deep water.

70. Trophon truncatus, Strom, Rather scarce.

file clathratus, L. Similar to the last, though more frequently
met with.

ae:

69.

, var. Gunneri, Lov. This form occurs perhaps the
most of the irae. though all are rather scarce.

73. Fusus despectus, L., var. tornata, Gould. Only three dredged.

74. Pleurotoma ee Mont. Not common ; fine specimens; my
largest 21 millims. (nearly inch) long, and 11 millims. (nearly
2 inch) wide.

70. Trevelyana, Turton. A few only obtained.

76. pyramidalis, Str. More frequent, still rather scarce ; fine
specimens rare.

77. violacea, Mighels & C. B. Adams. Young rather plentiful,
the older ones not frequent.

78. bicarinata, Couthouy. About half a dozen young shells got,
mostly dead.

79. Utriculus Gouldvi, Couthouy. Pretty plentiful, though mostly
dead shells.

80. hyalinus, Turton. Only three specimens obtained.

81. Actwon tornatilis, L. One young dead specimen.

82. Philine scabra, Mill. A few specimens only.

83. Doris bilamellata, L. Four pretty specimens from under a stone
at low water.

Conspicuous by their absence in the places where I dredged
and collected were :—Brachiopoda, Pecten (except islandicus),
Lucina borealis, Cardium edule, Dentalium entalis and others,
Patellavulgata, Littorina littorea, and other species sofrequently
met with in Norway and on other northern coasts, though I
doubt not but some of them will occur in other parts of Iceland.

Should any one have a wish to inspect my Icelandic collec-
tion, I shall be happy to show the same on receiving a previous
intimation, for the purpose of arranging the time.

The following circumstance may, I trust, not be without
interest to collecting conchologists. One morning the boy I
had engaged brought me several Patelle, which genus I had
not met with near Reykjavik, and one thick Pur, ‘pura lapillus,

376 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

different from those I had found in great numbers. He spoke
but very little Danish, and it was with difficulty I got to un-
derstand from him that hehad obtained them from aship. Going
there with him, I saw them unloading sand brought as ballast
from Great Britain. It was fortunate I found this out, as [
might otherwise have taken them for Icelandic shells from a
different part of the island. Thisis one more instance showing
how shells may be transported to countries where they do not
occur in a living state, thus causing errors against which
conchologists cannot be too much on their guard.

2 Ampton Place, W.C.

LIII.— On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Loven.
[Continued from p. 298. ]

THE explanation just given of the development and changes
of the ambulacra in the Latistelle shows that during the growth
of the Hchinus the primary plates of both rows, as if borne by
a slowly flowing stream, are in motion from the point near the
eye-plates where they make their appearance, as from its
source, down towards the peristome. There the auricles
meet, which belong to the masticatory apparatus, not to the
corona, with their bases firmly attached to the inside of the
oldest plates. It is by their resistance that, in the Latistellee,
the peristome becomes the fixed boundary of the corona towards
the buccal membrane, and that, during their growth and
the simultaneous downward pressure of the primary plates,
the pressure originates of which the consequences are the
regular displacement, shifting, and firm coalescence of the
plates, which renders the position of the pores apparently
confused.

The Angustistelle, or Cidaride, present different conditions.
In them all the primary plates of the ambulacra are entire
plates, continue so always, and distinctly separated from each
other by sutures, which are not effaced by any coalescence.
They are consequently throughout life like the primary plates
in the young of the Latistelle in their first foundation, and
form a narrow, single, and uninterrupted sequence, of nearly
the same width, which descends gradually in the direction of
the margin of the corona, between the margins of the large
interradial plates, with regular flexures, which are not original
curves, but determined by the margins of the interradial plates.
There the bases of the auricles present no resistance; they
remain entirely upon the interradia, by the side of the track of
the ambulacra, which they leave so open that there is no

Prof. S$. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 377

obstacle to cause compression or enlargement in width. On
the contrary, when a primary plate in the ambulacrum reaches
the margin of the corona, the suture which previously united
it with the next following plate separates, it becomes free, and
it moves out into the buccal membrane as if out of the mouth
of a river (fig. 2). At the same time a change takes place in

Fig. 2.

Cidaris hystrix, third ambulacrum: the ninth plate in b has scarcely
separated ; its fellow in a is already free and converted into a lamella.

its form. The curved process on the inside of each plate,
which is more elevated the nearer we approach the peristome,
is absorbed when the plate separates, and disappears quickly.
The plate wears away at its lower margin, and its radiolar
tubercle diminishes ; but it increases greatly in breadth towards
the interradium, and also in depth, and thus becomes attenuated
into a lamella, or scale, which lies with its lower margin over
its predecessor. The pores thus come gradually to be situated
lower and lower, become drawn out transversely, and change
their position relative to the longitudinal axis. In the rows of
scales produced in this manner in the buccal membrane of the
Cidaride, the pair which most closely approach the mouth are
the oldest plates, the others, each in its order, have separated
themselves from the corona, and gradually increased the num-
ber of lamellz in each row.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 27

378 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

The great distinction between the Cidaride and the Latistellee
consists in this dissimilar movement of the ambulacra. Thus,
in the former, the ambulacrum breaks up at the peristome into
its elements, the primary plates, and these become converted
into free imbricated lamelle ; and this is in complete opposition
to the homologous movement which, in the Latistelle, con-
cludes with their union into large plates, which in the peri-
stome coalesce into a solid rmg. And nevertheless the same
law prevails here most distinctly as in all other Hchinoidea.
A careful examination shows that, of the oldest scales (which
immediately surround the mouth), those which belong to series
La, U.a, U1. 6, IV.a, V.6 are somewhat smaller than those
which constitute series I. 6, II.6, III.a, IV.6, V.a. If we
trace the rows upwards towards the corona, we find that the
former throughout cover the latter with their lateral margins ;
and when we come to the corona we see that this position of
theirs is due to the fact that the plates of the former series
come later to the margin, and do not begin to separate until
after their fellows of the latter series are already completely
free and begin to arrange themselves in the imbricated rows
of the buccal membrane ; and this difference is to be recognized
throughout the whole ambulacrum. Of each pair of plates,
that which belongs to the series I. a-V.6 follows that of the
series I. b-V.a; and of the newly formed pair close to the eye-
plate, the plate belonging to the former series is always less
developed than that of the latter series, or even still uncom-
menced. In a Cidaris hystrix of 28 millims. diameter the
number of plates from the mouth to the vertex is as follows :—

THO Ail DSC SPS stra sn ie 54. rive Sime) BY teats Nit cape B= 55

pre Loeeeere gts stiles 542 fey LLG Oe ee eaters eee 552
PMUUL CD oat ek oe toes 54 apie) 0 Uy aaa dae eA bas rt 544
Se slate tajeidisitie nos 56 bys Wis Oh is aelaches ry eee 564
WAN estas ota nase viene 56 Peek Mail vansteck convenes 563

If we compare with the Latistelle the different groups of
irregular Echinoidea, Hchinoneus comes nearest to them in the
structure of the ambulacra. All the pores are double pores.
As in the Spatangide and the Cassidulide, the peristomial
plates of series I.a—V.b have two pores (that is to say, they
consist hypothetically of two early coalescent primary plates),
and those of the series [.b-V.a@ only of one; and in the
former the lowest pore is marginal and broken, and frequently
has its upper tube obliterated, as in the Echinide. But the
buccal membrane is without pore-plates. Although the row
of pores is simple, entire and half plates alternate with each
other in regular order, which does not continue the same from
the vertex to the peristome. The newly formed plates are

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 379

entire; then they arrange themselves in groups of three, two
half aboral and an entire adoral. Gradually the upper aboral
plate increases and becomes entire, and, together with the
adoral plate, embraces the intermediate half plate. But these
groups do not unite into large plates in the neighbourhood of
the peristome by the coalescence of the sutures as in the
Latistelle. Hchinoneus again agrees with the latter in that
the alteration of the plates, which is a consequence of their
growth during the accession of new ones from above, takes
place in a uniform manner throughout the whole ambulacrum,
which, moreover, throughout, from the peristome to the vertex,
bears no other than cylindrical tentacles with sucking-disks, im
which there is a ring of calcareous network. This is not the
case in the other three groups of irregular Echinoidea, in which
the branchize have a portion (in the Cassidulide and Clypeas-
tridee in all the five ambulacra, in the Spatangide in most
cases in the four paired ones)—a portion which during
growth acquires the leaf-like form to which the name of
petalum is given, whilst the lateral plates nearly retain their
first form, and the buccal area, with its peculiar tentacles, is
gradually compressed and altered. While in the Echinide
and Clypeastride the peristome in its firm union with the
masticatory apparatus continues circular or five-cornered as it
was from the beginning, although in some (e. g. Hchinometra
or Lchinocidarts) it deviates therefrom with age in some
degree, its character in the Cassidulide and Spatangide,
which do not possess a masticatory apparatus, is quite dif-
ferent. In both it alters its form during growth ; how it may
be in Hchinoneus remains to be ascertained. When a Cassi-
dulus is still quite young, the peristome is pentagonal, with
rounded angles, and the ambulacra occupy larger portions of
its margin than the interradia, with the exception of the
labrum ; in full-grown examples the conditions are reversed,
inasmuch as the interradial peristomial plates, especially
in 2 and 3, become swelled up during growth, and give
the pentagon the incurved sides which are characteristic of
this group, and between which the first plates of the ambulacra,
compressed into a wedge-shape, enclose the projecting angles.
But the mouth, gradually elongated transversely, remains in
the middle of its naked membrane. Connected with this trans-
formation of the peristome are the compression and displace-
ment of the primary plates situated near the peristome (which
take place with age), and that considerable alteration of their
original relations by which that arrangement is produced
which Desor calls phyllode. We have still to investigate the
origin and progress of this in individuals of different ages.
PH

380 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

Of the living Spatangide, by far the greatest number have
the four paired ambulacra like each other in closing with
petala towards the vertex, whilst the unpaired anterior ambu-
lacrum has its peculiar structure, and in one genus, Echino-
cardium, even the alternation of entire and half plates, which
does not occur elsewhere in this family. Not more than two
genera can be found which form an exception to this: one of
them is Lissonotus fragilis, A. Agass., from the great depths
between Cuba and Florida; the other was discovered by
Smitt and Ljungman during the expedition of the corvette
‘ Josephine’ im the year 1869, off Villa Franca, in the Azores,
at a depth of 200-300 fathoms. A resemblance which this
Spatangid presents at the first glance from above to certain
forms of Ananchytes ovata, leads us to name it Paleotropus ;
the species may be called P. Josephine. All five ambulacra
lie in the plane of the test, without the slightest depression,
and are apetalous ; so that they all finish similarly towards the
vertex—in this way, that their five or six youngest plates form a
simple and narrow row, such as we see nowhere else, in which,
however, the alternating position of the pores indicates to
which side each plate is to be referred. The rows of the
trivium agree completely ; the unpaired one is not depressed,
and the dorsal arching of the test is uniformly within the
obovate circumference. ‘These characters differ greatly from
those of the living Spatangide ; others agree with them. The
mouth has a projecting lobe, and the somewhat depressed
posterior end of the test an infraanal fasciola. The genital
apertures are two in number, corresponding to the posterior
paired interradia 1 and 4. The eye-plates are very distinct ;
but the vertical plates cannot be distinguished; the right
anterior one, however, has a bounded, irregular orifice, which
is the madreporite. The length of the animal described is
11°7 millims., and its breadth 9:1 millims. The presence of a
fasciola and a developed labrum unites Paleotropus with the
Spatangidee, if we exclude from their character the petala and
the difference of the unpaired frontal ambulacrum from the rest.

There is no living Spatangid destitute of tentacular pores in
any of the plates of the frontal ambulacrum. In all, its
oldest ventral plates, within the buccal area, are like those of
the other ambulacra; and the younger ones, situated nearer the
vertex, have more or less distinet double pores, the elongated
apertures being closed in the middle by a portion growing out
from the margins,

Because the Spatangide in general do not grow to an equal
extent in the different radii, but most frequently more in the
direction of the bivium than of the trivium, their ambu-

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 381

lacral plates, which, except the peristomial ones I. a—V.d, are
always simple and primary, behave in a different manner. As
in all the irregular Kchinoidea, the corona has a fixed boundary
in the peristome. Many young Spatangide a few millimetres
in length, which are more rounded than the older ones, and
have the mouth nearer the middle, have the peristome pent-
agonal, and so nearly equilateral, that in a still earlier stage
it was probably completely so (see woodcut, fig. 3). Its sides
all lie in the plane of the test, or are just sunk within it, as
in LHemiaster &c. In accordance with this form of the
peristome, is the part taken in its formation by the ambulacra
and interradia. In opposition to what occurs in Cassidulus,
the former occupy only a small portion, enclosing the angles of
the peristome ; the latter, which are much broader, and nearly
of equal breadth among themselves, form the greatest parts of
its sides. The mouth is now in the middle of the buccal
membrane. ‘he considerable change which the peristome
subsequently undergoes consists in its ambulacral plates in-
reasing in breadth, especially in the trivium, whilst the
peristomial plates of the paired interradia do not increase in
breadth in the same proportion, especially those of the posterior
pair ; and that of the unpaired interradium (the labrum) becomes
widened, shoots forth, and arches itself, at the same time that the
mouth, having become elongated by degrees, gradually moves
backward, so that the greater part of the plated buccal mem-
brane soon comes to lie in front of it, and only a narrow border
behind it, and this is concealed by the projecting lobes. When
the individual is full-grown the ambulacra of the trivium near
the peristome are broader than the interradia, with the exception
of the labrum; in Breynia the peristomial plates of the paired
interradia 2 and 3, 1 and 4, are even entirely expelled from
the peristome, and in Atrapus grandis, Mera atropos, and Mi-
craster cor-anguinum those of the pair 1 and 4. It is especially
the paired ambulacra of the trivium II. and IV., of which the
peristomial plates, longer than broad and nearly wedge-
shaped in the young, in old examples are broader than long,
and so depressed that, while in small individuals of Brissopsis
lyrifera 4°6 millims. in length the anterior margins of the
peristomial plates in the interradia 1 and 4 regularly cor-
respond to two plates in the ambulacra II. and IV., they
receive three plates in older individuals. Thus here also a
movement takes place in the ambulacra towards the peristome,
between the interradia. It is only a little less in degree in the
unpaired ambulacrum. In the bivium it is otherwise. Here it
is the two oldest plates that are the most pressed ; the following
ones, even in the older individuals, preserve their elongated

382 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

form. A different condition stands in connexion with this.
Most of the living genera of Spatangide have an infraanal
fasciola, which forms below the periproctium an oval ring,
within which, as Johannes Miiller first observed in Brissopsis
lyrifera, long tentacular cirri come forth, the pores of which,
therefore, are also situated within its circumference. At the
same time the case is that, in all the genera furnished with
an infraanal fasciola, in both the inner rows of the bivium the
sixth plate and some of the following ones—namely, two in
Paleotropus, Spatangus, and Meoma (which has an incomplete
fasciola),three in Maretia, Echinocardium, Lovenia, Brissopsis,
and Eupatagus, four in Brissus, Kleinia, Plagionotus, and Xan-
thobrissus, and even six in Breynia—have a different form
from the others, inasmuch as they are drawn out towards the
middle line of the test, and form together a produced wedge.
In the seventh and following of these plates, moreover, the
tentacular pore has so shifted that it comes within the fasciola.
In all these genera it is also the rule that the first six plates of
the inner rows of the bivium correspond with the outer mar-
gins of the labrum, sternum, and episternum, the three ventral
parts of the unpaired interradium, and that the episternal pair
of plates forms, with the nearest pair of abdominal plates on
both sides, an angle (angulus episternalis) which receives this
wedge of produced plates, and in different genera is more or
less deep or open. <A young Brissopsis lyrifera, 4°6 millims.
in length, presents in these respects the same characters as the
full-grown individuals; in both it is the fifth ambulacral
plate that corresponds to the angle between the sternum and
episternum, and the sixth to and with the ninth that enter the
episternal angle ; and hence it is clear that in this part of the
bivium during growth no shifting takes place in these plates
in the direction of the peristome ; but we rather see the ambu-
lacral plates here, except those of the peristome, become
somewhat elongated with age. In the genera which are
destitute of a fasciola infraanalis (such as Schizaster fragilis,
Desoria, Agassizia, Abatus, Atrapus, and Hemiaster) the
plates corresponding to the scarcely perceptible angulus epi-
sternalis, which is not always alike on both sides, are but
little or not at all produced im a direction towards the middle
line of the test, but have almost completely the form of the pre-
ceding; and the number of plates of the bivium which occupy
the same length as the three ventral parts of the unpaired
interradium is indeterminate,—in Schizaster seven, in Atrapus
six, in Abatus seven and a half on the left side and six and a
half on the right, in Desortva eight and a half, in Agassizia
six and a half. This irregularity is most considerable in

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 383

Palewostoma, Gray, at least in young individuals; I have no
full-grown ones at my disposal. In the whole of this group
consequently the arrangement, especially in the interradia, is
much less strict and symmetrical than in those with infraanal
fasciole. These latter seem to prevail among the recent
Spatangide, but were apparently represented only in the
genus Micraster during the Cretaceous period, the other
genera of which either want the fasciola or have it peripetalous
or composite, and with this, we may assume, a less regular
arrangement of the plates.

A strongly depressed form of body, the proximity of the two
surfaces (ventral and dorsal) to each other, their union internally
by means of processes, pillars, arches, and chambers, the dis-
tribution of the very numerous tentacular pores even upon the
interradia, the madreporite, which, in most, occupies all the five
apical plates, the position of the genital pores not always in the
apical plates, but separate from them in the interradia—all
these are characters which, with others, distinguish the Cly-
peastridee from the other irregular Echinoidea. On another
side they approach the regular Echinoidea by the presence of
jaws, by the small alterability in form of the peristome during
growth, which is dependent upon this, and its central position
in the ventral surface, opposite to the pentagon of the vertical
and eye-plates in the dorsal surface, in which only the abnormal
Dendraster and some few others present any deviation. When
full-grown, moreover, they have, in many genera, all the five
ambulacra alike ; whilst in others the bivium, to a certain ex-
tent, becomes apparent early, or gradually, by the movements
and changes in the form and size of the plates, which are more
considerable here during growth than in other Echinoidea.
L. Agassiz and Johannes Miiller observed how, in the Clype-
astride, the corona simplifies itself towards the mouth, how the
plates increase more in breadth than in length (as had already
been noticed by Philippi in Lchinus), and how this applies most
to the ambulacral plates, which are imserted into each other.

In the fully developed state Hchinocyamus pusillus and
Laganum depressum, both of which have all the five interradia
connected in an uninterrupted sequence of plates, are regular,
with all the five ambulacra similar, and, with the exception of
the periproctium, essentially also all the interradia—as also
Encope Valenciennest and EL. Stokest, Clypeaster rosaceus and
Stolonoclypus prostratus, in which, im all the ambulacra of both
bivium and trivium, plate 2 in the former and plates 2 and 3
in the latter are so enlarged in breadth that by means of them,
in their outer angles, all the ambulacra touch each other, form
a complete circle, and shut off plate 2 and the following ones

384 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

of the interradia from plate 1, which takes part in the forma~
tion of the peristome, which here, as in all these genera, is
complete, 7. e. composed of ten ambulacral plates and five in-
terradial plates.

Irregular forms, with a bivium which differs from the
trivium, are Mellita (hexapora) and Rotula (Rumphit), im
which plates 2 in I. a and V.é become enlarged inwards, and
therefore do not interrupt the unpaired interradium, of which
the sequence of plates is continuous; whilst the former in the
trivium and in I.6 and V.a has plates 2 and 3, and the latter
plate 2 in the trivium and plates 2 and 3 in I. 0. and V.a, so
dilated that they form a ring which is open only at the un-
paired interradium, and by which the sequence of plates in the
four paired interradia is interrupted and in each of them peristo-
mial plate 1 separated from the following ones. Lehinarach-
nius parma and Lobophora are irregular in a contrary way; im
them plates 2 in I. a and V.d are more dilated than those in
the trivium and in I. and V.a, so that the unpaired inter-
radium is interrupted in a much greater degree than the paired
ones. All these also have the peristome complete, composed
of ten ambulacral and five interradial plates. Arachnovdes is
singular in having the oldest ambulacral plates so strongly
dilated in breadth that in all five interradia plate 1 has dis-
appeared from the peristome, which consists only of the ten
first ambulacral plates, forming with the two or three following
ones a broad connected ring, which throws the interradia far
away. But even here the bivium makes itself felt, although
in a small degree. Between plates 2 in I.a and V. d there is
a little space left open for two very small and compressed
plates of the unpaired interradium.

Thus, whilst in the Echinide, Hehinoneus, and the Cassi-
dulide the test is still nearly regular and regularly divided
into ambulacra and interradia, and in the Spatangide the
former only rarely predominate so as to displace the latter from
the peristome, in the Clypeastride the preponderance of the
ambulacra is the rule, and in most of them the interradia are
therefore interrupted. It is of importance to ascertain whether
these peculiarities pertain to the earliest ages or make their
appearance during growth.

A Mellita hexapora 6°5 millims. long has great distance
between the rows I. a and V. 4, so that the interradium between
them lies free and broader than in the others; but plates 2 in I.d
and V.a of the bivium and in the whole of the trivium have
already become so widened that they form a connected circle
which excludes the following plates from the peristomial in-
terradial plate 1. It is, however, only at a still larger size

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 385

that plate 2 also is so dilated that it enters into this circle ; and
this increase indicates that when of a less size than 6°5 millims.
Mellite: may have all its ambulacra separate. This is actually
the case in Kehinarachnius parma. A young individual of
this species, 6°5 millims. in length, has all five ambulacra
similar; and their plates 2 are not yet broad enough to attect
the form of the interradia, all of which are free and connected
in uninterrupted sequence. But at a length of 384 millims.
plates 2 of 1. a and V.é in the bivium have so increased as to
touch each other and interrupt the unpaired interradium,
although one of the plates 2 is excluded from contact with
plate 1 still only in interradia 1 and 4. It follows from this
that the regular form, with five similar ambulacra and five
similar interradia, is the primordial one in the Clypeastride,
which is retained by Hchinocyamus and Laganum, but from
which Hncope, Clypeaster, and Stolonoclypus, Mellita and
Rotula, Echinarachnius and Lobophora, together with Arach-
noides, depart during growth, the five last named, moreover,
forming a bivium. Pressure towards the peristome during
growth and the addition and great multiplication of new
plates in the petala which are destined for the branchiz have a
great part in these changes. ‘The “equator” is not the same
during the whole life of the animal. We may see, by com-
paring several Hcehinarachnii of different ages, how a great
part of the plate through which the periphery passes gradually
goes over to the ventral surface, until the following one becomes
visible there, and the periproctium, which is at first dorsal,
becomes finally more than half ventral. At the same time the
stoma of the test, as in the Hchin7, becomes less in proportion
to the whole animal. In a Mellita hexapora 6 millims. broad
the transverse diameter of the stoma is about 0°15 of that of
the disk, at 8 millims. 0-1, at 35 millims. 0:04, and at 80
millims. 0°034.

[To be continued. |

LIV.— Contributions to the History of the Hydroida.
By the Rev. THomas H1ncxs, B.A., F.R.S.

I. The Sarcothece (Nematophores) of the Plumulariide.
[Plate XX. figs. 1-3'.]
THE singular organs to which the name nematophore has been
assigned by Busk, and which are confined to the Hydroid
family of the Plumulariide, have been investigated by several
able observers ; and much light has been thrown on their struc-
tural and physiological history, though as yet little is known

386 Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

of their precise function. Meneghini seems to have been the
first to notice them; he was followed by Huxley (1849) ; and
a few years later Busk gave a more complete and accurate
account of them, and drew special attention to the important
characters which they yield to the systematist. Allman (1864)
studied the contents of the nematophore, and established the
very interesting fact that the soft granular mass contained in
it has the power of emitting extensile processes, very similar in
structure and behaviour to the “ pseudopodia”’ of an Amoeba.
More recently (1872) Kirchenpauer has minutely described the
varieties of nematophore which occur in the different groups
of Plumulariide, and has applied the results of his research in
a revised arrangement of the family*. After all, however, one
or two points have escaped observation which are worthy of
record.

The presence of thread-cells in the protoplasm of the nema-
tophore has been noticed by Busk and Allman. They seem
not to occur universally; at least the latter observer failed
to detect them in Antennularia antennina, Linn. In all the
species which I have examined they are present, and occupy
the same position.

It has been observed that these thread-cells are never carried
out in the “ pseudopodia’”’—a remark which indicates that the
true structure of the protoplasmic offshoot enclosed in the chi-
tinous case of the nematophore has not been determined. In
all the cases that have come under my notice the terminal
portion of the sarcode-mass was divided into two distinct and
constant lobes, in one of which (the superior) the cluster of
thread-cells was immersed, while from the other (the inferior)
originated the extensile process.

In the nematophores which stand out on each side of the
ealycle in Aglaophenia pluma this bipartite structure may be
studied to great advantage. The superior lobe (Pl. XX.
fig. 1, a) is elongate in form, and extends from about the
middle of the cavity to the outer extremity of the terminal
aperture; it contains a number of rather large thread-cells,
arranged longitudinally at the very summit. The inferior
lobe, which originates at the base of the other, presents a
rounded outline (Pl. XX. fig. 1,0) when at rest, and is com-
posed of a simple granular substance.

In Plumularia setacea (P|. XX. fig. 2) the bilobate character
is equally marked, though, from the nature of the chitinous cup
or bowl in which the nematophore terminates, the two lobes
are more nearly on a level than in the previous species. At

* ‘Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularida, einzelne Gruppen der-
selben und ihre Fruchtbehalter.’ Hamburg, 1872.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 387

the same time the portion containing the thread-cells stands
out as a well-rounded prominence above the margin of the cup,
while the extensile lobe originates at one side of it, a little
below the summit. I have observed the same structure in
Plumularia pinnata.

The division of the sarcode-mass towards its upper extremity
into two processes with different functions is very apparent in
the mesial nematophore, which adheres to the front of the
calycle in Aglaophenia pluma. In this case the chitinous tube
of the nematophore is not merely furnished with a terminal
aperture, but also communicates with the cavity of the calycle
to which it is attached. The lobe bearing the thread-cells ex-
tends to the top of the tube; the extensile (or inferior) lobe
only to the point where this communication exists, and here
it discharges itself into the calycle, as noticed by Allman, who
does not seem, however, to have recognized the constant diversity
of function in the two branches of the granular mass.

Kirchenpauer has described certain species of Aglaophenia
in which the tube of the anterior nematophore has a second
orifice, placed generally near the point at which it begins to
stand off from the calycle; this orifice does not communicate
with the cavity of the hydrotheca, but affords a passage for the
extensile lobe into the surrounding water. He proposes to de-
signate nematophores of this kind “ double-mouthed ” (zwe7-
miindige). This observer does not seem to have noticed the
bilobate structure of the lateral nematophores, which I have
just described.

We may distinguish, then, in the nematophore:—(1) the chi-
tinous case, which may be simple (PI. XX. fig. 1) or compound
(fig. 2), and, if simple, furnished with one orifice only or with
two; and (2) the soft granular offshoot from the ectoderm per-
vading it, which may be either entire and destitute of terminal
thread-cells, or divided into two lobes above, one bearing
thread-cells and the other extensile.

The protoplasmic processes which are emitted by the inferior
lobe have been well described by Allman. They are very
mutable, and exhibit frequent changes of form, often attaining
a great length. Sometimes they are cylindrical and slender,
stretching along the stems and branches, to which they are
closely appressed and along which they glide slowly, almost
imperceptibly, in Ameba-like fashion ; sometimes they appear
clavate at the extremity ; sometimes they swell out at intervals
into bulbous dilatations. Occasionally they may be seen to
reach across to a neighbouring branch and fix the extremity
upon that; and rarely they give off two branches at the top,
which move in opposite directions (Pl. XX. fig. 3,6). I have

388 Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

observed them in a state of great activity, as I have mentioned
elsewhere, on a young specimen of Plumularia frutescens, which
they completely invested with “a multitude of gossamer-like
threads.”” ‘These extraordinary prolongations of the granular
mass in the nematophore can be entirely withdrawn.

The action of the thread-cells on the superior lobe is much
more rarely witnessed; Meneghini seems to have noticed it,
but without comprehending its true nature. On a specimen
of Aglaophenia pluma I have seen the contents of the nemato-
cysts discharged, and the long delicate threads streaming up-
wards from the extremity of the lateral nematophores (Pl. XX.
fig. 1,a). These fine extensile lines were cast out to enormous
distances, intertwining and waving about in the water; three
or four were usually emitted from each cluster of thread-cells 5
and in some cases I noticed that the cyst itself was raised to
some height above the nematophore and borne on a slender
pedicle. At times a tuft of the threads might be seen slowly
contracting, and I have observed one dragging down with it
a mass of stuff which it had collected.

The sight of this wonderful apparatus in full action was
singularly interesting, and it was impossible not to feel that it
must bear some important relation to the life of the Hydroid.
I may mention that the specimen on which the thread-cells
were in action showed no trace of pseudopodia.

It is difficult to form a conjecture as to the function of these
curious appendages. ‘They have been regarded as organs of
defence; and Kirchenpauer proposes to rank them with the
polypites and gonozooids of the Hydroid colony under the name
of the “ defensive zooids” (Wehrthicre). But it seems to me
very doubtful whether this is the true interpretation of the ne-
matophore. I am inclined to think that its function may be
in great measure nutritive ; the pseudopodia at least seem much
better fitted for the work of alimentation than for that of
defence.

If we may accept Prof. Allman’s very ingenious theory of
the structure of the fossil Graptolites, we shall have important
evidence in favour of this view. He regards them as morpho-
logically Plumulariidans in which the development of hydro-
thecee has been suppressed by the great development of the
nematophores*. In short, according to his interpretation, they
were Plumulariidans in which the ordinary alimentary zooid
(the polypite) was wanting, and the function of nutrition pro-
bably devolved altogether on the nematophores. If this view
be correct we shall have, as Allman has remarked, in the

* ‘Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids,’ part ii.
p. 170.

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 389

nematophore of the existing Plumularva “ the last traces of the
structure of its ancient representative, the Graptolite.”

In this case we must conceive of the remote ancestors of our
recent forms as obtaining their food altogether after the manner
of a Rhizopod, by help of the pseudopodia, which still survive
to supplement the work of the polypite. This view, however,
though ably supported, can hardly claim at present to be more
than a happy conjecture.

A word as to the terms employed in this department of
Hydroid morphology. With our present knowledge, nemato-
phore can scarcely be accounted an appropriate designation for
these singular appendages. The presence of thread-cells is
certainly not the most significant or distinctive character which
they exhibit; and it would seem that it is not universal. As
we have already the terms hydrothecw and gonothece, I should
propose to name them sarcothece, while the oftshoot from the
ectoderm, which they enclose, may be appropriately called the
sarcostyle,

II. New Species of Plumularia (P. cornu-copie, Hincks).
[Plate XXI, figs. 1-3.]

I have lately obtained at Ilfracombe a new Plumularia,
which exhibits some interesting points of structure. In the
form of the calycle, the jointing of the stem and branches, and
the general arrangement of the sarcothecee (nematophores) it
resembles P. Catharina, Johnston; but from this species it
differs notably in size and habit, in the form of the gonothece,
and in the alternate arrangement of the ramules. It is re-
markable, however, that while the pinne are usually alternate
and somewhat widely separated, one or two of the lowest pairs
are not unfrequently opposite, as in P. Catharina. Another
distinction between the two forms is to be found in the structure
of the sarcothece that occur one on each side of the calycle ;
in P. Catharina they are pedunculate, in the present species
sessile. Looking at the whole assemblage of differences and
points of resemblance, it seems not improbable that we may
have in P. cornu-copie a derivative from P. Catharina, though
it is now a strongly marked and well-established form,

Fam. Plumulariide.
Genus PLUMULARIA, Lamarck (in part.).

P. cornu-copie, i. sp.

Plumes distributed at intervals on the creeping stolon.
Stems recurved, regularly jointed; a single internode between
those which bear the ramules. Pinne generally alternate,

390 Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida,

occasionally opposite towards the base of the plume, simple,
moderately distant, a single calycle on the main stem at their
origin. Hydrothece cup-shaped, deep, with an even margin,
separated by two joints. Sarcothece bithalamic, one on each
side of the calycle above and one below it, two on the inter-
mediate internodes of the stem and one on those of the pinne,
and two on the longer internode near their base. Gronothecee
shortly pedunculate, springing singly or in pairs from the base
of the calycles both on the stem and pinne: female in the
shape of an inverted horn, curved inwards towards the calycle ;
aperture suboval, oblique ; two sarcothecee near the base: male
unknown.

Height of plumes about 3 inch.

Hab. On stones, dredged off the Capstone at Ilfracombe.

The plumes of P. cornu-copie are compact and slightly re-
curved. The pinne are not very distant, and of moderate
length, seldom bearing more than six calycles; I have never seen
them branched. The internodes which separate the hydrothece
are not nearly so long as in P. Catharina, and bear only one
sarcotheca, whereas there are two or three in the latter species.
The much greater length of the internodes, both on the stem
and branches, in P. Catharina confers on this species a very
distinctive habit. It approaches P. cornu-copie in many of
the details of its structure, but not at all in general appearance.
The pinnz of the latter species are decidedly alternate, with
the exception I have mentioned above. ‘The most striking
feature undoubtedly is to be found in the gonothecz, the pecu-
liar form of which has suggested the specific name*. ‘The
originate, as in P. Catharina, at the base of the calycles,
sometimes singly, but frequently in pairs, and are perfectly
hyaline and of the most delicate texture ; they are of ample
size and most gracefully curved, bearing, like the similar parts
in the allied species, two of the bithalamic sarcothece near
the base. The polypites are adorned, just below the tentacles,
with a conspicuous belt of opaque white, which forms a striking
feature.

III. Reproduction by Fission in Campanularia neglecta,
Alder.
[Plate XX. fig. 4.]

Allman has described a case of reproduction by spontaneous
fission in a Campanularian Hydroid which he has referred to
a new genus under the name of Schizocladiumf. I have had

* The gonotheca is like an exquisite little crystal cornucopia.

+ Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science,
1870; ‘Monograph of the Gymnoblastic Hydroids,’ part i. p. 151.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 391

the opportunity of observing the same mode of development in
Campanularia neglecta, Alder, and have little doubt that it is
far from uncommon amongst the Hydroida. In the month of
June I obtained a fine colony of the Campanularia bearing a
full complement of polypites and also a considerable number
of branches, carrying at their extremities the planuloid exten-
sions of the coenosare described by Allman (PI. XX. fig. 4, x).
I am inclined to think that they were of greater length than
those of Schizocladium, but in other respects exactly resembled
them. I did not actually witness the liberation of the frustule,
but in one case at least a constriction was very apparent a little
within the chitinous tube of the stem, at which point no doubt
separation would ultimately have taken place.

I confess that, with great deference for Prof. Allman’s
opinion, lam unable to accept his genus Schizocladium, which
seems to rest on a single character, the development of fission-
frustules in a certain way—a character which, there is reason
to believe, may have a wide range amongst the Hydroida.
There seems to be nothing peculiar in the trophosome of his
zoophyte but the presence of the frustule-bearig branchlets ;
there is nothing in his account or figure of it, apart from this
character, to indicate that it is even specifically distinct from
known forms of Obelia or Campanularia.

The observation of reproduction by fission in Camp. neglecta,
and its probable occurrence, as recorded by Allman himself,
in Corymorpha, tend to show that schizocladism may be a
common element in the reproductive history of the Hydroida,
and that it therefore cannot be the peculiarity of a genus.
The frustule with its branchlet is hardly likely to exhibit any
morphological peculiarities that will serve the purpose of the
classifier. It presents the same character in Camp. neglecta as
in Allman’s Hydroid, which is probably an Obelia.

Prof. Allman has made a most important and interesting
addition to our knowledge of the modes of reproduction amongst
the Hydroida; but I venture to think that he himself will
hardly care to retain the new genus.

IV. Cladonema radiatum, Dujardin: the Planoblast.
[Plate XXI. fig. 6.]

Through the kindness of Dr. Hudson, of Clifton, I have
had the opportunity of examining during the past summer, for
the first time, the planoblast of Cladonema radiatum, which he
had taken at Watermouth near Ilfracombe. I was surprised
to find the tentacles unbranched and furnished with only one
suctorial appendage. In this state they bear a very close re-
semblance to those of Clavatella, the only important difference

392 Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

between the two being that in Cladonema the thread-cells are
distributed in several clusters (about five) along the arm, while
in Clavatella they are gathered into a single spherule at the
extremity. Van Beneden has observed that in an early stage
the tentacle of the planoblast is destitute of branches, and is
furnished with two suckers: it appears that in a yet earlier
stage it has only one. Allman, in the concluding part of his
great work on the Tubularian Hydroids, has made the same ob-
servation, and he adds that ‘‘in a very early stage” (before the
liberation of the gonozooid) ‘‘ the marginal tentacles are quite
simple.” At the time of detachment one suctorial appendage
has been developed; and, according to the observation of Van
Beneden, a second makes its appearance before the branching
of the tentacle commences*.

Judging from Allman’s exquisite figure, the bifurcation of
the tentacles begins at a later period in Cladonema than it does
in Clavatella; in the latter the minute lobes on the margin of
the disk, in which they originate, exhibit almost immediately
a slight depression in the centre, indicating the future course
of development.

I was much interested in watching the curious habits of the
young Cladonema. It was exceptionally hardy, and throve
well in confinement. But after a short time it proceeded to
reverse its swimming-bell (just as a man might throw off his
coat on commencing a piece of hard labour), and, firmly planting
itself on its suctorial appendages, made a vigorous attack on
the minute crustaceans that swarmed in the surrounding water.
The manubrium, unimpeded by the restraint of the umbrella,
and placed on a decided vantage ground, moved eagerly from
side to side, and with the aid of its well-armed oral lobes
succeeded, I have no doubt, in securing abundant supplies.
The zooid in this condition presented an extraordinary figure:
the characteristic grace, with much of the familiar appearance,
of the Medusa had vanished; and the stout cylindrical proboscis,
mounted on a kind of pedestal and swaying to and fro as the
little Entomostraca’ played about it, offered a strange contrast
to the exquisite form of which Van Beneden could say, “ rien
nest gracieux comme un Cladonéme.”’

The retroversion of the umbrella has been noticed in several
species and by several observers—but always as occurring late
in the life of the zooid, and shortly before the escape of the
generative products. When the walls of the manubrium were
already laden with ova, I have seen the swimming-bell in the
planoblast of Syncoryne eximia thrown back and contracted
into a small mass, to which the tentacles were still attached.

* ‘La Faune Littorale de Belgique: Polypes,’ 1866, p. 142.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 3938

The locomotive organ perished, and the zooid in its last stage
returned to the condition of the polypite. But in the case of
the young Cladonema the umbrella, though everted, continued
otherwise unchanged, and manifested its healthy condition by
vigorous contractile movements; it was clear that at any
moment it might be restored to its normal position, and
discharge its functions as efficiently as ever.

This peculiarity of habit in the planoblast of the Cladonema
no doubt connects itself with the presence of organs of attach-
ment, which amongst the natatory gonozooids it alone possesses.

I may mention that I was unable to detect any thread-cells
on the umbrella, nor is there any reference to their existence
in Allman’s description; but they are represented in Mr.
Holdsworth’s excellent figure engraved in my ‘ History of the
British Hydroida’*.

V. Zanclea (Gemmaria) implexa, Alder.

I have to record the occurrence of this very beautiful
Hydroid at Ilfracombe, where it was found on the Capstone,
and dredged up from a moderate depth not very far from shore.
In the former locality it grew on Laminaria-roots in the lower
rock-pools. All the specimens obtained were spreading over
masses of Cellepora, in the orifices of which the polypites were
lodged; Mr. Hodge obtained it in the very same habitat at
Seaham Harbour. Hitherto this species has only been met
with on the coasts of Northumberland and Scotland.

The form found in Devonshire is the one first described by
Alder as Coryne pelagica, which he subsequently considered to
be the young of his Tubularia (Coryne) implexa—and is iden-
tical with the Coryne briareus of Allman, and the C. margarica
(natural-size figure) of Wright. It is also the one so beautifully
figured in Allman’s ‘ Monograph’ as G‘emmaria implexa, the
polypites of which are borne on short and simple stems about
half a line in height. At first sight this form seems very
unlike the Hydroid with branching tubes, growing gregariously
and forming “‘a densely tangled mass” from a half to three
quarters of an inch in height, which Alder has described as
his Coryne implexa. I have little doubt, however, that the
two must be referred to the same species.

I have fine specimens of Zanclea implexa from the Firth of
Forth, kindly supplied by Dr. Strethill Wright, in which the
two forms are associated. The creeping stolon gives off many
short stems enclosed in a polypary, which tapers slightly down-
wards and is annulated throughout the greater part of its length,
the upper portion, however, being smooth and of more delicate

* ‘History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ vol. ii. pl. 11. fig. e’.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 28

394 Rev. T.Hincks on the History of the Hydrovda.

material than the rest. These are unbranched, and bear at
their summit a single polypite. Associated with them are
much longer stems, branched for the most part unilaterally,
and invested by a polypary exhibiting the curious structure
described by Alder. Polypites are borne on the summit of the
main stem and of the several ramules. The polypary is com-
posed of two layers or coats, distinctly separated from one
another—the outer transparent and membranous, the inner of
a decided horn-colour and for the most part strongly ringed*.

Every here and there portions occur in which the separation
of the two coats is not apparent; but throughout the greater
part of the stems and branches it is strongly marked.

The inner tube is completely filled by the ccenosarc; its
carinated rings are connected with the epidermis by frequent
processes. Towards the base of the stems this singular struc-
ture is not generally distinguishable; but the ‘thin and
transparent” polypary, which Allman describes as occurring
in his specimens for some distance below the polypite, is no
doubt the epidermal layer, forming in other parts of the stem
a continuous distinct envelope, and enclosing the annulated
tube which immediately surrounds the coenosarc. It appears
that the form with short and simple stems, associated in the
Firth-of-Forth specimens with the larger branched form, not
uncommonly occurs alone; and as in this condition it bears
the reproductive bodies freely, it cannot be accounted im-
mature.

That the Tubularia implexa, Alder, and the Firth-of-Forth
species are identical is beyond a question f; and Dr. Wright’s
specimens show that the humbler form described by Alder
(as Coryne pelagica) and by Allman, and found by myself at
Ilfracombe, is only one state of the same species. A complete
diagnosis of Zanclea implexa, therefore, must include the
branched double-coated stem, which belongs to the perfect
condition of the zoophyte.

The polypites have five or six large-headed tentacles round
the oral extremity; the rest have verysmall capitula, containing
a few thread-cells. I have noticed a large oval thread-cell at
the base of most of the tentacles and imbedded in the ectoderm
at various points, where tentacles would probably have been
developed. Occasionally one occurred in the course of an arm,
and a group on the surface of the body.

The gonophores are borne in large clusters, and number

* Vide ‘History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ pl. 9. fig. 3 6.

+ I have compared specimens of the polypary of the former, received
from Mr, Alder, with the latter; and they exactly agree, as already ob-
served by Wright.

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 895

sometimes as many as seven. The sacs containing thread-
cells on the umbrella of the planoblast were placed, in the I-
fracombe specimens, a little way above the tentacular bulbs;
they are represented in the same position in Alder’s figure ; but
Allman describes them as extending upwards for some distance
from the base of each tentacle.

Thave referred the Coryne implexa of Alder to Gegenbaur’s
genus Zanclea, and at present I see no reason to change this
view. M‘Crady, indeed, has instituted the genus Gemmaria
for a planoblast which seems to agree in all essential (generic)
points with that of our British form ; the trophosome he had
not discovered. But I can find no sufficient ground for this
addition to an already oppressive nomenclature ; Zanclea and
Gemmaria seem to me to embrace one and the same generic
type. The main characteristics of Gegenbaur’s genus are a
bell-shaped umbrella, a moderately long manubrium with
simple mouth, four radiating canals, tentacles springing from
non-ocellated bulbs and furnished along their course with
pedunculated sacs containing thread-cells, and certain pro-
minent ‘‘ribs”’ on the umbrella, in which thread-cells are en-
closed ; and these are really the essential characters of Gem-
maria. Allman, however, has adopted M‘Crady’s genus, but
has not given us his reasons for doing so. It is of course
possible that the structure of the pedunculated sacs on the arms
of Zanclea costata (Gegenbaur) may differ essentially from that
of the similar organs on Coryne implexa, Alder; but it is
hardly probable. It is also possible that the “ribs” on the
umbrella of the former may not correspond with the “sacs”
on that of the latter, though it seems likely enough that the
same kind of structure is intended in both cases. But with
our present information, and looking to the whole group of
characters, it seems to me better to hold provisionally at least
to Gegenbaur’s name.

Alexander Agassiz also accepts M‘Crady’s genus Gemmaria,
and has given us his reasons ; “the form of the bell,” he says,
“of the digestive cavity, and of the tentacles is totally dif-
ferent in the two genera.” “The form of the bell” is a very
doubtful generic character ; but the differences in this respect
between the supposed species of Gemmaria are quite as great
as those between any one of them and the Zanclea costata.
The form of the digestive cavity is a matter of inferior moment ;
there are no important differences in size or structure. The
tentacles may not agree in shape, though there is little dis-
agreement in this respect between Zanclea costata and Zanclea
impleaa ; but they seem to be similar in all essential points.

On the whole I see no reason for dispossessing the established
name.

28*

396 On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa.

LV.—On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa. By the
Rev. Tuomas Hinoxs, B.A., F.R.S.

[Plate XX. fig. 5.]

On stones and stems of seaweed collected from the Capstone
at Ilfracombe a minute Polyzoon has occurred to me not un-
commonly, which, though closely resembling the well-known
Valkeria in general appearance, presents an arrangement of
the tentacles so remarkable that it can only be referred to a
new genus. I suspect that it may prove identical with the
form which I have already characterized under the name of
Valkeria tremula*. At least there is a striking agreement
between the two in the shape and size of the zocecia, and the
manner in which the colonies are distributed on the creeping
stolon ; and asI was unable to make a thorough examination
of the polypide of Valkeria tremula, the peculiarity in the ten-
tacles, supposing it to exist, might readily have escaped me.
This point, however, must be left for future determination.

Class POLYZOA.
Order INFUNDIBULATA.
Suborder CTENOSTOMATA, Busk.
Family Vesiculariide.

Genus CAMPYLONEMA, Hincks.
Der. kdpidos, bent, and vjya, a thread (tentacle).

Generic character.—Polyzoary a filiform creeping stolon, on
which the zocecia are distributed at intervals in groups;
zocecia erect, sessile; polypides with eight tentacles, two of
which are bent outwards for about two thirds of their length,
so as to interrupt the circle of arms on one side; no gizzard.

Campylonema tremulum, n. sp.

Zocecia very small and slender, oblong, tapering off to a
point below.

The remarkable arrangement of the tentacles is the one
point of difference between this form and Valkeria. The
abrupt reversion of two of the arms destroys the circular form
of the tentacular verticil, and gives it somewhat the shape of a
horseshoe. Six of the arms stand erect as usual; the other
two are thrown back, so that on one side the circle is broken.
The flexure of the tentacles takes place at about a third of the
whole height from the base; this peculiarity gives avery remark-

* “Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall,”
p. 58, pl. xii. fig. 9 (Ann. Nat. Hist. 1862, ser. 3, vol. ix. p. 472).

On some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands. 397

able and distinctive appearance to the polypide. The zowcia
are slender, and taper off very decidedly below; when the
polypide is retracted they droop a little to one side, and rise
into an erect position when it expands.

The polypides are extremely minute and delicate, and very
nimble in their habits; those of Valkeria uva appeared coarse
and clumsy beside them. They are destitute of a gizzard, and
present altogether a very simple structure.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PLATE XX.

Fig. 1. One of the lateral sarcothecze (nematophores) of Aglaophenia
pluma, Linn., showing the thread-cells in action: a, the superior
lobe of the sarcostyle (s), which bears the thread-cells ; 6, the
inferior lobe, from which the extensile processes arise; c, the
ectoderm of the cvenosarc, from which the sarcostyle originates ;
d, the chitinous cup of the sarcotheca.

Fig. 2. The bithalamic sarcotheca of Plumularia setacea, Ellis, showing
one of the extensile processes (pseudopodia) given off from the
sarcostyle: a, the superior lobe with thread-cells; 6, the ex-
tensile process ; x, the terminal cup-shaped chamber of the sarco-
theca, in which the two lobes are lodged; y, the inferior tubular
chamber.

Fig. 3. The same, showing one of the processes (6) dividing into two
branches, of which one tends upwards and the other downwards.

Fig. 3'. The same, showing a process with bulbous dilatation (6): a, the
superior lobe ; s, the sarcostyle.

Fig. 4. Campanularia neglecta, Alder: x, a“ fission-frustule ” in course of
formation.

Fig. 5, Campylonema tremulum, Hincks, highly magnified, with one of
the polypides expanded, showing the peculiar arrangement of

the tentacles.
PLATE XXI.

Fig. 1. Plumularia cornu-copia, Hincks, natural size.

Fig. 2. A portion of one of the plumes, magnified.

Fig. 3. Two gonothece, borne on a portion of the main stem.

Fig. 4. A calycle of Plumularia Catharina, Johnston, showing the pedun-
culate sarcotheca (x).

Fig. 5. A gonotheca (female) of Plumularia Catharina.

Fig. 6. The planoblast of Cladonema radiatum, Dujardin, in an early stage
of development.

LVI.—Notice of some Species of Fishes from the Philippine
Islands. By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

Tue British Museum has recently obtained a series of the
fishes collected by Dr. Adolf Bernhard Meyer in the Philip-
pine Islands. ‘The following appear to be undescribed :—
Platycephalus fasciatus.
D. 1)/Sy pyle A. 1255) asdatsew:100:
The angle of the preoperculum is armed with three spines,

398 On some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands.

the upper of which is twice as long as the middle one, and nearly
half as long as the eye, the lowermost being minute. The length
of the head is one third of the total (without caudal), and its
width between the preopercular spines nearly one half of its
leneth. The interorbital space is but slightly concave, and its
width one half of the vertical diameter of the eye, or two
sevenths of the length of the snout. The spines of the super-
ciliary edge and of the other ridges of the head are very small,
and but slightly prominent. Lateral line smooth. 'There are
eight or nine scales in a transverse series between the first
dorsal fin and the lateral line. Greyish brown, with broad
irregular blackish-brown cross bands—one, corresponding to the
first dorsal, and two corresponding to the second, being the more
conspicuous. The first dorsal and the ventrals nearly entirely
black ; the rays of the second dorsal and anal with large black
spots ; caudal with three very large irregular black blotches.
Pectoral deep brown; but the membrane between the five upper
rays is transparent, and these rays are spotted with brown.
One specimen, from the Bay of Manila, 9 inches long.

Otolithus leuciscus.
D.10|5. A.2/7. LL. lat. ca 55.

Snout rather obtuse, with the lower jaw but slightly pro-
jecting beyond the upper. Both jaws with a series of distant
canine-like teeth, the anterior of which form a pair of canines
in the upper jaw, the lower jaw being without canines in front.
There are eight scales in a transverse series between the spinous
dorsal fin and the lateral line. The height of the body is a
little less than the length of the head, and two sevenths of the
total (without caudal). The diameter of the eye is a little less
than the length of the snout and two ninths of that of the head.
The width of the interorbital space is somewhat more than the
diameter of the eye. Praeoperculum distinctly serrated. Fins
sealeless. Anal spine feeble. Coloration uniform silvery ;
vertical fins slightly blackish towards the margin.

Two specimens, from the Bay of Manila, 6 inches long.

Atherina lineata.

D.4|} A. L.lat.37. L. transv. 7.

Evidently closely allied to A. endrachtensis.

The height of the body is two ninths of the total length
(without caudal), the length of the head one fourth. Eye very
large, its diameter being equal to the width of the interorbital
space, and contained twice and one third in the length of the

On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 399

head. Snout very short, one third of the diameter of the eye.
Pectoral long and pointed, as long as the head; dorsal small,
its origin nearly midway between the end of the snout and the
extremity of the caudal. ‘The silvery band is narrow, bordered
above and below by a very conspicuous series of black dots ;
a third series of similar dots runs along the middle of the row
of scales below the silvery band.

Two specimens, 34 inches long, from Cebu; we have re-
ceived also two others from Amboyna.

Salarias holomelas.
D.30. A.(2+)19.

Allied to Salartas fuscus.

Body comparatively short, its depth being contained thrice
and one eighth in the total length (without caudal). Anterior
profile of the forehead nearly vertical. Canine teeth none. No
orbital tentacle, no crest on the head. The dorsal fin is not
notched; this fin, as well as the anal, is elevated, all the
spines and rays terminating in very fine filaments; both fins
connected by a short membrane with the caudal, which is also
produced. Entirely black.

One example, 3 inches long, from Cebu.

LVII.—On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros.
By Epwarp Briytu, Hon. Memb. As. Soe. &e.

In some remarks on two species of Asiatic two-horned rhino-
ceros (Ceratorhinus of Gray) which appeared in the ‘ Annals’
(anted, p. 208), Dr. Gray awards to me the discredit of sup-
posing “that the one inhabits the east coast of the Bay of
Bengal and the series of islands extending to Sumatra, and the
other the Malay peninsula and Tenasserim, separated in Bur-
mah by the Irrawaddy river.” Now as that is a part of the
globe with the geography of which I happen to be tolerably
familiar, and as, moreover, I have especially studied the fauna
of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands and was the first to bring
to notice sundry species inhabiting those islands, it is therefore
somewhat unlikely that I should have suspected them of har-
bouring such an animal as a rhinoceros, or that I should have
ignored the fact that the Tenasserim provinces and northern
part of the Malayan peninsula constitute, equally with the
provinces of Chittagong and Arakan, portions of the eastern
boundary of the Bay of Bengal.

I do know for certain that the small blackish and coarse-
haired rhinoceros procured at Malacca, an example of which
died lately in the Regent’s Park, is identical with one of those

400 Mr. E. Blyth on the Species

inhabiting the Tenasserim provinces,—also that a two-horned
species of some kind inhabits the province of Arakan, which I
presume to be the same as that obtained in the contiguous pro-
vince of Chittagong, viz. f. lasiotis, Sclater. But at present
there is no evidence to show that the latter exists southward
(or to the south-east) of the Gulf of Martaban, unless the figure
of a Tenasserim skull published in the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic
Society of Bengal’ (vol. xxxi. p. 156, pl. ii. fig. 1) represents
that of A. lasiotis, which is notimprobable. That the latter is
the two-horned species which has been killed (as I was assured
by a planter) in Assam, where it is considered an exceedingly
great rarity, is very highly probable; and Dr. J. Anderson
mentions that while at Bhamé, in Upper Burmah, he “ was in-
formed by an intelligent native that two-horned rhinocerotes
are found in the Mogonny district, which is close to the con-
fines of Assam, and as far north as the twenty-sixth degree of
north latitude”’ (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 129).

The larger of the two obviously distinct species which we
have seen alive in London (£. lasiotis, Sclater) is considered
by Dr. Gray to exemplify the true 2. sumatrensis ; while the
smaller of the two he imagines to be identical with the animal
which bore the long and much-curved anterior horn upon which
fi. Crossti, Gray, is founded (vide figure in Proc. Zool. Soe.
1854, p. 250). Mr. Sclater with much better reason, as it
appears to me, assigns the smaller species to the veritable swma-
trensis ; but this can hardly be the same Sumatran animal as
is figured under that appellation by Professors Temminck and
H. Schlegel.

That &. Crossti and R. lasiotis are the same I think extre-
mely probable ; for I have seen well-developed horns attached
to the skin of the head of a Tenasserim male of the small
blackish species, the skull of which was afterwards cleansed,
and is figured together with those horns in ‘ Journ. As. Soe.
Beng.’ (loc. cit. pl. iv. fig. 1). Though of similar peculiar
character, the anterior horn curves much less than in 2. Crossii ;
while that«the very remarkable amount of curvature of the
latter is normal is shown by the existence of a second, though
less developed, specimen of a horn in the museum of the
London Royal College of Surgeons, bearing the number 3086.
In both cases (or species) the horns are very slender except at
the base, and the structure of them is very much harder and
more compact than in other rhinoceros-horns ; for which reason
they command so high a price among the Chinamen (to be
elaborately carved upon) that fine specimens are hardly ever
procurable by Europeans ; and therefore it is that we do not
see them in our museums. The size of the &. Crossii horn

of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 401

would suit /astotis rather than the other; and I think it pro-
bable that the second or posterior horn will prove to be much
shorter than in the smaller species. The British-Museum
specimen, upon which the name Crossiz was founded, measures
32 inches over the curvature, and is 17 inches in span from
base to tip.

R.sumatrensis was originally described, and somewhat rudely
figured, by Surgeon Bell in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions ’
for 1793 (p. 282,-pl. 2). His specimen is stated to have been
a male; ‘the height of the shoulder was 4 feet 4 inches” (over
the curvature of the body ?); “from the tip of the nose to the
end of the tail 8 feet 5inches. From the appearance of the
teeth and bones it was but young, and probably not near its
full size. The general colour was a brownish ash ; under the
belly, between the legs and folds of the skin, a dirty flesh
colour, YF ore" The ears were small and pointed, lined and
edged with short black hair. . . . . The whole skin of the
animal ts rough, and covered very thinly with short black hair.”
Sir T. Stamford Raffles remarks of the animal, as observed by
himself in Sumatra, that ‘its hide is much softer and more
flexible than in the Indian one, and is not, like it, corrugated
into plates of mail; it has, however, some doublings or folds,
particularly round the neck, shoulders, and haunches, rather
more distinct and defined than in Bell's drawing” (‘Trans. Linn.
Soc. vol. xiii. p. 268). Upon the whole, this description
applies fairly to the stuffed specimen in the British Museum,
which is believed to have been procured at Pinang, meaning
the adjacent mainland of province Wellesley ; but it does not
suit /. lasiotis, either as regards the prevailing shagginess of
the hide, the length and colour of the hairy vesture, the very
conspicuous long pendent fringe of hair bordering (but not
lining) the ear-conch, and the copiously tufted tail. But the
latter is represented in Bell’s figure as being slightly tufted,
and not so long and tapering as in the animal from Malacca,
the tail of which had some scattered hairs upon it but was not
distinctly tufted; in the British-Museum specimer? the tail is
mutilated. Moreover the skin of £&. lastotis would rather be
described as smooth than as rough ; and in this respect it con-
trasts remarkably with that of the smaller species.

In his ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Mammiféres’ M. Frédéric
Cuvier supplies two figures assignable to this type of rhinoceros
(Ceratorhinus, Gray), one of which is obviously from a drawing
from life of a very young calf, which he erroneously refers to
the conspicuously distinct single-horned rhinoceros of Java ;
and in his supposition of its representing the latter, he either
overlooked or possibly ventured to suppress the indication of

402 Mr. E. Blyth on the Species

a second and posterior horn, which could scarcely fail to have
been shown in the original drawing. Even at that early age
a rudiment of the posterior horn must needs have been suf-
ficiently apparent in the living animal, as shown by Schlegel’s
figure of a still younger calf. The comparatively rough skin
(although in so very juvenile an individual), the blackish-
brown colour of that skin, and especially the length and pecu-
liar form of the tail combine to identity the animal with the
small blackish species inhabiting the Tenasserim provinces and
Malayan peninsula ; but still I do not understand its being
represented as so very slightly hairy, especially upon the ears,
which is hardly to be sufficiently accounted for by the youth
of the particular specimen.

M. Frédéric Cuvier’s other figure, which he assigns to
£. sumatrensis, appears to me to have been made up from that
of Bell, aided and partly misled by the remark of Raffles
concerning the plaits or creases of the skin. I do not believe
that any original figure of a Ceratorhinus would have repre-
sented the crease on the flanks as extending upwards across
the loins. The attitude and position of the limbs are essen-
tially the same as in Bell’s figure ; and so also is the amount of
development of the horns ; and the accompanying descriptions
and measurements of both swmatrensis and supposed jyavanicus
are compilations. Moreover it is erroneously asserted that
fi. sumatrensis was named Lf. sondaicus by Messrs. Raffles and
Horsfield, inasmuch as that name was first applied by George
Cuvier to the lesser one-horned species, which is the only rhi-
noceros that inhabits Sunda, ¢.e. the western half of Java.
It follows that F. Cuvier’s figure assigned to swmatrensis is
of no authority whatever in détermining whether either or
which of the species in question is properly entitled to that
designation.

Lastly, the figures assigned to FR. sumatrensis (adult and
young) by Professors Temminck and H. Schlegel were made
up from stuffed specimens in the Royal Museum of Natural
History at Leyden; and the fore limbs of the adult are repre-
sented as being much too slender. Otherwise those figures
resemble £2. dascotis rather than the small blackish species, and
have the comparatively short tail of the former ; but they are
represented as being very inconspicuously clad with minute
hairs, which would scarcely be remarked unless especially
looked for. I remember distinctly that the stuffed adult spe-
cimen in the Leyden Museum is hairless (unless to a very
slight extent where least exposed), and that the young (under
glass) was well clad; but not suspecting at the time a plurality
of species of the particular type, nor how such species have

of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 403

since proved to differ, I did not examine those specimens so
critically as I should now do, though I retain the impression that
the adult is notably larger than the stuffed male in the British
Museum, or than the aged female of the same species which
lately died in the Zoological Gardens. The skeleton of a Su-
matran female in the museum of the Royal College of Surgeons
agrees in size with the last mentioned; but although a very old
animal, it retains its front teeth, which the others had lost. But
the skull of a Sumatran male in the same collection indicates a
considerably larger animal, which may even be of a different
specific race, corresponding to Schlegel’s figure; but this is a
matter for further investigation, and to which I can only
recommend attention. The Leyden beast is certainly not so
large by a good deal as is the living R. lasiotis, which appears
to be still growing, and has much increased in size since its
arrival in this country ; but it is not likely to become so large
an animal as the adult of the lesser single-horned species
(R. sondaicus), of which a skull, said to be undoubtedly from
Sumatra, has lately been received at the British Museum.

I was assured at Leyden by Professor Schlegel that A. su-
matrensis existed in Borneo; but an anterior horn said to be
from Borneo, in the possession of Mr. A. D. Bartlett, would
seem to indicate a species of still more diminutive size than that
which I believe, with Mr. Sclater, to be the real sumatrensis
of Bell, the mere difference of size of horn being not the only
reason for suspecting that the Bornean rhinoceros will even-
tually have to be recognized as a peculiar species.

I may also here mention that upon lookmg over a portfolio
of drawings at the India House, belonging formerly to the
Earl of Mornington (Governor-General of India and subse-
quently Marquis of Wellesley), I found two of single-horned
rhinoceros. One of these is a fair representation of a very
young individual of 2. sondaicus ; the other—which, however
faulty in general outline (being much too deep in the body),
is finished elaborately as regards details—appears to me to
represent a peculiar and undescribed species. ‘The folds of the
culrass are the same as in both ¢ndicus and sondaicus, except
the one which crosses the nape in the latter, and is deflected
backward across the shoulder-blade in the former; this one is
intermediate in its direction, for it is deflected backward much
higher upon the shoulder than is regularly the case in R. indicus.
The most remarkable peculiarity, however, consists in the
cuirass being throughout conspicuously studded with uniformly
small tubercles (as in &. sondaicus), while the head and limbs
are represented as wrinkled, but the skin quite smooth and
devoid of tubercles, and in this respect contrasting remarkably
with the adjacent parts of the cuirass. I cannot think that

404 On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros.

any one who looks at the elaborate finish of this drawing from
a living animal can readily suppose the peculiarities described
to be freaks of the native artist; and in the other figure (of
indubitable &. sondazcus) the head and limbs are represented
as being tuberculated uniformly with the cuirass. Moreover,
in the figure of very juvenile /. sondaicus, a slight hairiness is
represented upon the back, between the shoulder-fold and that
which crosses the loins; and I doubt not that this is correctly
copied from the living specimen. No habitat is assigned to
either, nor aught given to guide respecting the dimensions ; but,
without desiring to attach undue importance to any drawing
made by an unscientific artist, I still cannot help thinking that
the one in question indicates, in all probability, a species
hitherto ansuspected—as.much so as were, until quite recently,
the additional species of Asiatic two-horned rhinoceros, which
must now be generally recognized and accepted. Be it re-
membered that for many years a male of £. sondaicus existed
in this country which was never recognized as differmg from
the large R. indicus ; and we only know it now from the two
figures of it, assigned to &. indicus, in the ‘ Naturalist’s
Library;’ while the skeleton of an adult 2. sondaicus in the
anatomical museum of Guy’s Hospital, in Southwark, is in all
probability that of the same individual, which was exhibited
about the country and finally deposited in the Zoological
Garden of Liverpool, at a time when the larger of the two
Indian species was much less familiarly known to us than it is
at present. That particular specimen of £. sondaicus was re-
ceived from Calcutta ; and it is the only species which is known
to inhabit the Sundarbins of Lower Bengal, as it is also the
only single-horned species known to inhabit the Indo-Chinese
countries and contiguous Malayan peninsula. Although the
commonest and most widely diffused of any Asiatic rhinoceros,
I can learn of no other example of it having ever been exhibited
in Europe.

Note.—Since the above was in print I have seen Mr. Sclater’s
paper on the Asiatic two-horned rhinoceroses, published in
‘Nature’ for October 24th, 1872 (pp. 518, 519), and accom-
panied by figures of &. lasiotis and LR. sumatrensis. Un-
fortunately they are not on the same scale, so that the former
is made to appear the larger of the two, and the attitude of
lasiotis does not permit of the distinctions being sufficiently .
shown. At present the tail of the living animal is much more
largely tufted, and the long hair fringing the ears is more de-
veloped, than appears from Mr. Sclater’s figure taken from the
animal when younger; nor is the different quality of the hair
upon the body sufficiently apparent. In &. swmatrensis this
is shorter, much coarser, suberect, ana of a black colour—in

Miscellaneous. 405

R. lasiotis longer, more appressed (or tending to lie flat on the
skin), of a light greyish-brown colour, and somewhat glistening
at certain angles of vision. In &. swmatrensis the muzzle an-
terior to the nasal horn is much broader, and the space between
the ears is proportionally much less. Moreover Mr. Sclater
states that “the tail of the Malacca animal is shorter and
nearly naked ; in that from Chittagong it is longer and tufted
at the extremity ;” on the contrary, it 1s conspicuously shorter
in &. lasiotis, and even with its tuft does not descend so low
as in the other. That of &. swmatrensis is correctly represented
in Mr. Sclater’s figure of the species, in which also the very
strongly marked crease behind the shoulders is not at all
exaggerated.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Varieties of the Tiara (Galera barbata).
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Tis animal is generally brown, with a pale head and a large white
or yellow blotch on the throat. It has a large distribution in the
tropical or subtropical parts of America.

The British Museum has lately received two half-grown specimens,
which have the whole head, neck, and front of back between the
shoulders pure white ; one of the specimens has the chin and middle
of the throat grey. These come from Xalapa in Mexico.

Mr. Salvin sent to the Museum a specimen from Costa Rica, which
is entirely black, without any pale colour on the head and neck; and
there is a young specimen in the Museum which is entirely of a pale
whity-brown colour.

On Branchipus and Artemia. By C. Voer.

At the meeting of the “‘ Société Helvétique des Sciences Naturelles ”
held at Fribourg in August last, M. Vogt gave a summary of the
results of his researches upon these genera. The first species in-
vestigated by him was Branchipus diaphanus, found in August 1871
near the summit of the Reculet (Jura), in artificial ponds dug by the
herdsmen for the use of their cattle. M. Vogt obtained several
hundred individuals of this species, among which the males and
females were nearly in equal numbers. When placed in an aqua-
rium they lived there very well at first, and produced a multitude of
eggs, from which larve issued ; but towards the end of September
they all perished by degrees. At the approach of cold weather the
water was emptied out of the aquarium, leaving only the mud
at the bottom, which was completely frozen during the winter.
Towards the end of February the aquarium received some new
inhabitants, namely about 50 larvee of Petromyzon, which concealed
themselves in the mud. In the month of May of the present yeara
certain number of larve of Branchipus made their appearance, being
hatched, no doubt, from eggs which had remained in the mud.
M. Vogt succeeded in rearing several generations of them, which
enabled him to follow all the phases of their development. Several

406 Miscellaneous.

excursions to the Reculet during the present year furnished no
results ; no traces of Branchipus could be found in that locality.

Wishing to compare Branchipus with an allied genus, M. Vogt
applied to Prof. C. Martins of Montpellier, to ask him for some speci-
mens of Artemia salina, a species of Branchiopod which swarms in
the salt marshes of the neighbourhood of Cette. M. Martins sent
several thousands of these animals, with a supply of the mother
liquors in which they live. They arrived at Geneva in good con-
dition, and are living in an aquarium, in which they produce enor-
mous quantities of eggs and larve.

M. Vogt exhibited a bottle filled with living Artemiw and their
larvee and explained the structure of the adult Branchipus, describing,
among other things, a pair of footjaws which had escaped the obser-
vation of MM. Joly, Leydig, &c. He then dwelt upon the form of
the larve, which in both Artemia and Branchipus exhibit the
primitive fundamental type of the Crustacea, to which the name of
Nauplius has been given. But although fundamentally the same,
the Nauplit of the two genera present considerable differences, those
of Branchipus being shorter and more compressed, and those of
Artemia more slender and elongated. The lateral compound eyes
appear much later in Artemia than in Branchipus.

The first pair of appendages in the Nauplius consists of two
antenne which afterwards become the antenne of the perfect
animal. The second pair forms the chief or sole organ of locomotion
of the larva; and after numerous moults these appendages finally
become the horn-shaped pieces which serve as prehensile organs in
the male Branchipus and are rudimentary in the female. The third
pair serve the larva to carry its food to its mouth; in the adult it
forms the mandibles, which constitute the third pair of appendages.
The eleven pairs of natatory feet and the pair of footjaws of the
adult originate subsequently by budding.

M. Vogt confirms the observation of M. Joly that among the
Artemice collected at Cette during the months of July and August
there are no males, and that the females propagate by parthenogensis.
This fact is the more remarkable as we find males in great abundance
in other salt marshes inhabited by the same or analogous species.—
Bibl. Univ. Sept. 15, 1872, Arch. des Ser. p. 30.

On Osteocella septentrionalis from British Columbia.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

The substance described by me in the ‘ Annals, 1872, ix. p. 406,
under this name was, at the meeting of the British Association at
Brighton, and since in ‘ Nature,’ regarded as the notochord of a fish !
Professor Dawson of M‘Gill College, Montreal, Canada, states that it
was submitted to Professor Verrill of Yale College, who “had no doubt
as to its nature ” (that is, of its being the axis of a Virgularia or
some similar creature), ‘‘ but believed it probably belonged to an un-
described species.” Dr. Dawson states that Mr. Selwyn’s specimen
has “‘ attached to the granulated lower extremity some trace of animal
matter, in which I think I can detect, under the microscope, a few
club-shaped spicules.”

Miscellaneous. 407

The observation of Professor Verrill is interesting, as since I
described it I thought it might probably be the axis of a species of
his genus Stylatula, which has a subcylindrical axis instead of the
quadrangular one of Virgularia, and of which he describes two
species from California; but Professor Verrill does not recognize it
as being a species of that genus.

Sowerby and Lear’s ‘ Tortoises.’
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrNTLEMEN,—In the notice of Sowerby’s Plates of Tortoises &c.
recently published by Sotheran, edited by Dr. J. E. Gray, it is
stated that ‘“‘ Many of the specimens figured and the rest of Mr. Bell’s
collection of reptiles are now to be found in the Anatomical and
Zoological Museum at Cambridge.”

This statement is incorrect, as Professor Bell’s collection of reptiles
(both in a dry condition and in spirit) was purchased by the late Rev.
F, W. Hope, and was by him presented to the University Museum
of Oxford. Professor Bell’s admirable collection of Crustacea is also
in the same museum, having been purchased by myself and presented
to the University on my appointment as Hope Professor of Zoology.

I am, Gentlemen,
Your obedient Servant,
J. O. WzEstwoop.

The correctness of the statement in Dr. Gray’s preface to this work
having been called in question, we thought it our duty to submit
Prof. Westwood’s letter to Dr. Gray, from whom we have received
the following answer :—

British Museum,
October 24th, 1872.

My pear Francis,—Mr. Westwood’s letter is entirely erroneous. I
have had one specimen of Mr. Bell’s lent me by Prof. Newton; and I
have consulted the others in the museum of the Cambridge Philo-
sophical Society, where they were before they were transferred to
the Anatomical Museum. I never before heard that Mr. Bell had a
second collection, and think it must be a mistake; I knew the col-
lection of Crustacea was purchased by Mr. Westwood.

Yours truly, J. E. Gray.

The Ahu (Capreolus pygargus). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &.

We have three specimens of this animal in the British Museum—
one from North China, and the others from Siberia ; they are of very
different sizes.

The Siberian specimens, male and female, are much the largest.
They stand 38 inches high at the withers, and the length from the
nose to the place of the tail is 53 inches ; length of the hind leg to the
hock 16 inches. In the specimens in the museum the horns are very
slender, elongate, nearly smooth, and simple ; one has a single branch
on the inner side near the tip.

The Chinese specimen, on the other hand, is much smaller, about
the size of the common Scotch roebuck, and of the same dark colour
asitis inthe summer. The horns are stout and long, with distinct

408 Miscellaneous.

anterior and posterior snags, and have numerous beads round various
parts of the lower half, some of which are large and covered with
tubercles. Height at the withers 26 inches; length to the place of
the tail 41 inches; length of the hind leg to the hock 12 inches.

A new British Callithamnion. By Dr. J. EK. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

The Seriospora Griffithsiana has long been known as an inhabitant
of the coast of Devonshire. Agardh refers it to the genus Call-
thamnion, and calls it C. sertospermum—which was the specific name
that Mrs. Griffiths first gave to it; and she was the first discoverer of
it. Dr. Harvey considered it a variety of Callithamnion ver-
sicolor, but afterwards corrected this. We have never yet found spe-
cimens of the true Callithamnion versicolor on the British coast ; for
it is very distinct from Callithamnion corymbosum, of which Dr.
Harvey thinks it is a synonym.

Mr. Holmes kindly presented to Mrs. Gray a series of specimens
which he had obtained in Plymouth Sound, of a form which, he said,
had only been observed very lately, and differed from the usual
Seriospora, which has the spores at the end of the branches, in having
them in the first lower branchlet on the inner side of the branches,
as in other Callithamnia. I have examined the specimens; and
there is no doubt of their being the true Callithamnion versicolor,
very distinct from the Seriospora. The C. versicolor has the spores
triangularly divided, while in the genus Seriospora they are cru-
ciately divided. It is a most interesting addition to our flora.

It is very curious that the majority of the Plymouth collectors
regard Seriospora Griffithsiana and Callithamnion versicolor as
varieties of the same species, the different kinds of fruits being pro-
ductions of different seasons on the same plant; but they must have
overlooked the different forms of the sphzerospores.

On Macroxus tephrogaster. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1867 (xx.
p. 431) I described a species of American squirrel as Macroaus tephro-
gaster, which was sent from Guatemala, Bogota, and Honduras; I
also mentioned that M. Sallé had sent it from Mexico.

Mr. E. Gerrard, Junior, has shown me five specimens from Medellin,
Antioquia, in the New-Granadan Confederation, South America.
They are all not above half the size of the more southern specimens ;
and I should be inclined to regard them as a variety or species, under
the name of Macroaus medellinensis.

Two specimens in the Museum, bought from Mr. Gerrard, Junior,
vary in the extent of the black mark and of the white on the under-
side. In the larger specimen the dorsal patch begins at the back of
the neck and extends to the base of the tail, being very broad just
behind the shoulders, and the white on the underside only occupies
the middle of the throat, chest, and belly, the sides being greyish,
having the rest of the hairs black. Thesmaller specimen has a very
indistinct dorsal streak, with a squarish black spot on the middle of
the back, which appears to be further back than the broad part of
the patch on the other specimen; the throat, chest, abdomen, and
inside of limbs much more white than in the other specimen.

.-THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

No. 60. DECEMBER 1872.

LVIUIL.—On a new Family and Genus and two new Species
of 'Thelyphonidea. By the Rev. O. P. CAmBripce, M.A.,
C.M.Z.S.

[Plate XXII.]

In September 1871, among numerous spiders of great interest
received from Ceylon from Mr. G. H. K. Thwaites were
several other minute Arachnids. At first sight I was inclined
to pass them over as very young examples of some species of
Thelyphonus; but a closer examination showed them to be
not only destitute of eyes (no vestige of a visual organ being
apparent), but presenting some other remarkable differences in
form and structure from the genus Thelyphonus. 'The prin-
cipal of these differences (which seem to render it necessary
to form a new family to receive these arachnids) are the sub-
division of the cephalothorax into two segments, the broad
fore part, and the convexity of the first segment (including the
caput), whose fore margin is prolonged into a central pointed
beak-like prominence: other interesting and important generic
and specific characters are also detailed below. As far as lam
able to determine, the examples comprise two species.

Mr. Thwaites informs me that these arachnids were found
by M. Ferdinandus (the successful discoverer of the four-
eyed spiders, Miagrammopes, Cambr.) among decayed leaves
&c. on the ground. The absence of eyes was observed by
M. Ferdinandus, who begged Mr. Thwaites to call my atten-
tion to it.

The discovery of a blind arachnid thus above ground is a
remarkable fact. As far as I am aware, there is no instance
on record of any blind creature having ever been found except

9

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x.

410 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on two

in caves, where (the supposition is) the eyes have become
gradually and at length totally obsolete from ages on ages of
disuse. If in the present instance the eyes of this Ceylon
arachnid have vanished from a similar cause, the light having
been shut out merely by the interposition of decayed leaves, it
would seem to show, on the part of these creatures, a persistency
in keeping out of the light almost amounting to a quasi-suicidal
determination.

Although undoubtedly a near ally to Thelyphonus, yet a
strong general resemblance to Solpuga may be traced in the
form and segmentation of the cephalothorax. The rough
sketches of the main features of form and structure, added to
the subjoined descriptions, will, it is hoped, give a better idea
of the peculiarities of these small but very interesting arachnids
than could be formed from description alone.

Order THELYPHONIDEA.

Fam. nov. Tartarides.

Nearly allied to the family Thelyphonides, but. differing in
the general form, which is more elongate. The cephalothorax
also is divided into two parts or segments; the first comprises
the caput and segments belonging to the first two pairs of legs,
the hinder part (much the smallest) comprises the segments
pertaining to the third and fourth pairs of legs; but in neither
part are these segments indicated by any groove or indentation.
The abdomen is segmented, or rather covered both above and
below with articulated, corneous, transverse plates; the upper
series 1s separated from the lower, being divided from it by a
horizontal narrow divisional line or space; it terminates with
a short tail, varying in form in different species, and issuing
from the last of several small postabdominal rings or segments.

Gen. nov. NYCTALOPS.

Cephalothorax divided into two parts, oblong, tolerably
convex above; the foremost part greatly the largest and of a
somewhat oblong form, broader before than behind, the fore
corners depressed and rounded; the central part of the fore
margin is prolonged into a strongish pointed rostrum or beak,
the point of which is a little depressed; the hinder part is
broade: than long, and appears to be simply an arched covering
to the sternal surface, upon which the two hinder pairs of legs
are articulated.

Eyes none.

Kalces strong, much deeper than broad, of a flattened cylin-
drical form; they project in the same plane as the cephalo-

new Species of Thelyphonidea. 411

thorax, and terminate with a movable, sharp, curved fang,
which appears to be destitute of teeth.

Palpi very strong, 5-jointed; each issues from a large,
strong, long, nearly cylindrical basal joint or maxilla, the inner
fore corner of which is prolonged into a sharp strong point;
the other joints are armed variously with teeth; and the final
or digital joint terminates with an apparently movable, sharp,
curved fang.

Legs moderately long, 7-jointed, those of the first pair much
the longest, slender, and palpiform; the tarsal joint of this
pair is divided into several minute articulations, and without
any terminal claws; the tarsi of the other three pairs appear
to be undivided, and each is furnished with three simple, curved,
terminal claws; the femora of the fourth pair are of inordinate
strength.

Abdomen covered above and below with transverse horny
plates, and ending with a variously formed, short, caudal
prolongation.

Sternum situated beneath the fore portion of the cephalo-
thorax, between the basal joints of the legs of the first two
pairs, of a somewhat hollow-sided pentagonal form, considerably
drawn out behind. There is no sternum, properly so called,
connected with the basal joints of the legs of the two hinder
pairs, these being articulated to the general sternal surface of
that portion of the cephalothorax.

Nyctalops crassicaudata, sp.n. Pl. XXII. fig. 1.

Length 23 lines.

The general colour is yellow-brown, the cephalothorax being
of a rather darker though duller hue than the rest, and the
palpi and falces a little richer and brighter, with red-brown
edgings to their different articulations.

The /egs are sparingly furnished with hairs and fine spine-
like bristles; the two superior terminal claws are long,
moderately strong, simple, and curved, the inferior one small
and sharply bent downwards; their relative length is 1, 4, 2, 3,
those of the first pair much the longest, slender, and without
terminal claws; the tarsi short, and subdivided into about six
minute articulations.

The palp7 issue from the maxilla by a narrowish neck, but
quickly swell out into a strong tumid first jot, which has a
moderately strong, curved, sharp-pointed tooth at its lower
outer fore corner, and another smaller one opposite to it on
the inner side; the second joint is still stronger, longer, and
also more tumid; the third is not so large, but very nearly as

long, rather bent, and with a moderate strong sharp tooth
29*

412 On two new Species of Thelyphonidea.

directed forwards on its underside; the fourth joint is a little
longer than the third and straighter, and appeared to be some-
what serrated beneath; the fifth or digital joint is a little
curved, slightly tapering and has a sharp ‘terminal claw, which
appeared to be movable; beneath the fifth joint are some small
teeth.

The abdomen has eight transverse corneous plates above, and
seven beneath ; the first of those beneath is much the largest,
and probably conceals the sexual parts, which, however, pre-
sented no external aperture beyond a line-like fissure : near the
fore margin of each of the three succeeding plates are two
small reddish-brown transverse slits, probably the openings to
the breathing-apparatus ; these openings form two parallel
longitudinal rows. In this view the spiracular openings would
be six in number ; but it was difficult to determine whether or
not there were two others connected with the hinder margin of
the first segment. Several very narrow plates, decreasing
rapidly in size, form a sort of postabdominal continuation,
terminating with a caudal appendage of a peculiar form, some-
what resembling the fluke of an anchor blunted at the point
and rounded at the hinder corners; from this appendage there
issue a few long, straight, slender, diaphanous, spine-like
bristles, of which there are also numerous others beneath the
hinder part of the abdomen.

Several examples of this species were received from Ceylon
(where they were found, under decayed leaves and rubbish, by
M. Ferdinandus in the Royal Botanic Gardens), and kindly
sent to me by Mr. G. H. K. Thwaites, together with numerous
rare and new spiders.

I could not determine with any certainty whether or not
these examples were adult, or, indeed, of which sex they were ;
there was no apparent difference whatever of form or structural
detail by which the sex might*be concluded.

Nyctalops tenuicaudata, sp.n. Pl. XXII. fig. 2.

Length 24 lines.

In general form, structure, and colour this species resembles
the foregoing; but it may readily be distinguished by the
almost total absence of the teeth at the extremity of the first
joint of the palpus, these being quite rudimentary; those on
the other joints also appeared ‘to be wanting; another strong
character is also furnished by the caudal appendage being
slender and cylindrical. Possibly this may be the female of
the former species ; I am, however, inclined to think that it is
distinct.

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 413

Several examples were found in the Ceylon collection re-
ceived from Mr. Thwaites.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXII.

Fg. 1. Nyctalops crassicaudata: a, profile, greatly enlarged ; }, cephalo-
thorax, abdomen, and falces, upperside, with legs truncated and
palpi absent; c, underside, showing maxille and sternum ; legs
and palpi truncated; d, first two joints of right palpus, from
outer side in front; e, hinder extremity of abdomen, showing
caudal appendage, from underside ; f, profile of fore part of
cephalothorax, showing falx and fang; maxilla and portion of
first joint of palpus truncated; g, natural length, exclusive of
caudal appendage.

Fig. 2. Nyctalops tenuicaudata: a, left palpus, from outer side; b, hinder
extremity of abdomen, showing caudal appendage ; ¢, left leg of
fourth pair, from the outer side; d, first two joints of right
palpus, from outer side, rather in front; e, natural length, ex-
clusive of caudal appendage.

LIX.—On Balenoptera patachonica and B. intermedia.
By Dr. H. BURMEISTER*.

AN interesting acquisition is the skeleton of the whale met
with in our river near the mouth of the Rio de Jujan during
the month of August. Unfortunately the skeleton is not
complete, owing to the negligence of the people who cleaned
it provisionally ; it wants the extreme point of the tail and the
ends of both fms, which defect greatly diminishes its scientific
value.

The skeleton belongs to the species which I have de-
scribed (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 191) under the name of
Balenoptera patachonica, and completes our knowledge of that
species, founded on an imperfect specimen, which showed some
characters of importance—and proves, by its perfect identity
with that specimen, that the other whale received last year (see
Boletin, p. vu) does not belong to the same species, but is
quite different, as I can now confidently prove by comparison
of the two entire skeletons.

The whale now found was, according to the information
given by the sailors, 22 varas or 58 feet in length; but as I
did not see the animal before the body had been dried, I cannot
accurately describe its external appearance. Therefore the only
subject for comparison is the skeleton, the general characters of
which I will now give.

The specimen in question was, like the other, rather young—
as is proved by the vertebrae separate from the free apophyses,

* Translated by Miss Miers from the ‘ Boletin del Museo publico de
Buenos Aires,’ 1871, from a corrected copy with additions sent by the
author.

414 Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera.

and also by the skull, in which the maxillary bones are easily
separated from their sutures. Although the entire skeleton is
not shorter than that of the species described in the ‘ Boletin’
(p. viii), the whole breadth is less, which is a proof that this
was a more slender species than that found last year. In
order to prove this difference, I give some of the principal
measurements of the cranium, naming last year’s species Ba-
lenoptera intermedia, on account of its affinity with the species
above described as B. patachonica, adding tothese measurements
those of the third and much smaller species described as B.
bonaérensis.

Measurements in English inches.

B. intermedia.| B. patachonica. |B. bonaérensis.

———

Length of the base of the
cranium from the occipi-
tal hole to the tip of
thpevomer sis. Mahe 128 122 80

Breadth of the cranium be-
tween the anterior points
GETNE ORDILA » oc inys sfc i030 68 62 42

Central breadth of the ver-
tex between the temporal

10/372) ea asl rea aes AP 39 33 24
Length of the plane of the

WEEDON | Se. ci bieie Alaais wo 32 28 26
Length of the upper jaw .. 102 102 70
Length of the lower jaw . . 136 138 92
Length of the intermax-

BUMS V POLIS be. beara abet ats tohe 102 100 63
Breadth of the base of the

MAQSOY: riche a fo steer ous © es 19 16 103
Length of the apophysis of

the temporal bone...... 24 22 12
Width of the shoulder-

Ls es Ae eo ae 40 373 32
Greatest breadth of the

cranium, between the

apophyses of the tempo-

eS NApeeea tie. ack Gh ape 72 67 48

The vertebral column has had probably sixty-two to sixty-
four vertebree—that is to say, four less than in the other species ;
but not more than fifty-eight and a half have been preserved,
the end of the tail with the caudal fin having been cut off by
the sailors, who found the body of the animal floating im the
river. Each one of these vertebree has a smaller body than
the corresponding one in the other species, although its apo-
physes are a little longer and also rather broader. In order to
prove this remarkable difference, | give the measurements of

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 415

the thirty-fifth vertebra in each individual, which vertebra is
one of the largest of the skeleton. This vertebra in B. pata-
chonica has a height in the body (with the spinous apophysis)
of 30 inches, of which 10 are occupied by the body, and a
breadth between the transverse apophyses of 34 inches, the
breadth of the body being 12 inches ; whereas in B. intermedia
the same vertebra is 28 inches in height, with 12 inches in
height of the body, and 32 inches in breadth, with 14 inches
in breadth of the body; which difference appears to me suf-
ficient indication of a specific difference between the two
animals.

The fifty-eight and a half vertebrae are distributed in the
following manner. There are seven well separated in the
neck; the five posterior very slender, two inches thick in the
body, and with two free apophyses excepting in the first two
(the atlas and axis), which are a good deal larger and have not
free apophyses, the atlas on both sides, the axis on the an-
terior side. ‘The axis has two large closed lateral wings, in-
cluding an oval aperture; the three following are open, with
two curved apophyses, but separated at the end; the sixth
has a lower and shorter apophysis; and the last has no lower
apophysis at all. In B. intermedia all the vertebre of the
neck are broader in the body, but the apophyses are shorter ;
and this species has a lower and tolerably large apophysis on
the sixth vertebra, which is wanting only on the seventh.

The seven vertebrae of the neck are followed by sixteen
dorsal vertebree, with the same number of pairs of ribs—that
is, one pair more than in the other species, now called B. ¢n-
termedia. ‘This difference seems to me of great importance,
principally on account of the constant difference of the
corresponding ribs, which are all longer and larger to the
very end in B. intermedia than in B. patachonica, and very |
different also in the shape of the upper part of the rib, and of
the tubercle of each rib. Hach rib of the first pair is 34 feet
in length in B. patachonica and 32 in B. intermedia. In the
former species the head of the rib is slender and the tubercle
rather large ; in the latter the small tubercle can scarcely be
said to be separate, and the head of the rib is larger, scarcely
separated from the neck, which is also large. The second rib
of B. intermedia is 5 feet in length, and the same rib in B.
patachonica 44 feet; the longest rib, which is the sixth, measures
in the former species 7 feet 2 inches, and in the latter 6 feet
8 inches. We may infer from these differences that the body
of B. intermedia must have a much larger circumference than
that of the other species, and that-its general shape must be
less slender, as we said at the beginning of our comparison.

416 Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Baleenoptera.

The number of the lumbar vertebre is seventeen in B. pata-
chonica and sixteen in B. intermedia. After these vertebree
there come in B. patachonica thirteen, and in B. intermedia six-
teen caudal vertebrae, with free lower spines or hemapophyses,
the last of these spines being in both species open—that is to
say, divided into two separate lamine, larger in B. patachonica
than in B. intermedia. At last, to the end of the tail, follow
nine or ten vertebra, successively smaller, of which, in both
species, the last six have been lost. The fifty-eighth vertebra
in B. patachonica has almost the same bulk as the fifty-ninth
vertebra of B. intermedia, but is a little larger in the body ;
which permits us to suppose that the total number of verte-
bre in the two species was not the same, but that B. pata-
chonica had several vertebre less than B. intermedia, although
the last inferior spine is situated in both species on the same
vertebra, ¢.e. the fifty-fourth. All these differences seem to
me to indicate a specific difference in the two animals.

Of the fins only the shoulder-blade and the humerus have
been preserved in the skeleton of B. tntermedia, the sternum
also is wanting; but in that of B. patachonica we have the
fins almost quite complete, the smallest inner finger alone
having been lost. The sternum also has been preserved: this
has nearly the shape of the same bone in 5. physalus; but
the large central excision of the anterior portion is absent im
our species, and in place of it there is asmall hole in the centre
of the same portion, which measures 17 inches in breadth, and
the whole sternum 15 inches in length, the central aperture
occupying 23 inches of this extension, and commencing 24
inches behind the slightly excavated anterior margin. The
narrow posterior portion of the sternum is 8inches long and
5 inches broad at first, but 2} at the end.

The shoulder-blade presents nothing of importance; it is
23 inches in height and 373 at its greatest breadth. The
humerus is 18 inches long; and each bone of the forearm is
25-26 inches in length, the cubitus above having behind a
large salient angle. The pectoral fin is 6 feet in length and
18 inches in breadth at the beginning of the forearm, the pro-
jecting angle of the olecranon being occupied by a large,
sharp, triangular cartilage. There are the usual five carpal
bones, and in the terminal portion of the fin five fingers, as
with all the Balenoptere. In these fingers the first (external)
one has four bones, namely one metacarpal and three phalanges,
the four measuring 44, 4, 33, and 3 inches in length. In the
second finger, which is longer, there are six large bones and a
small terminal point as indication of a seventh ; these articu-

lations are 54, 5, 4, 22, 2, and 14 inch in length. The third

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 417

finger is but little shorter than the second, though somewhat
longer than the first, and has the same bones as the second,
though each one is rather smaller—44, 4}, 34, 3, 2,and 13 inch
in length. The fourth finger (which ought to contain, ac-
cording to analogy, one metacarpal bone and three phalanges,
being the shortest of all) has been completely lost from both fins.

Of the bones at the side of the sexual aperture, corresponding
to the bones of the pubis of the pelvis, one has been preserved,
very similar to the same bone in B. physalus. It is slender
and nearly a foot long, compressed and slightly arched, with a
projecting and rather sharp angle on the upper margin, 3 inches
above the termination. To conclude, the hyoid apparatus is com-
posed of the three bones which are well known in all whales,
of which the middle one much resembles the same bone
figured in the work of Van Beneden and Gervais, pls. x. & xi.
fig. 15; but the two lateral ones are not externally so bulky as
those in the same figure. The central bone has a transverse
Jength, measured in a straight line, of 26 inches; and each of
the lateral processes is 15} inches long.

We have also the hyoidal apparatus of B. intermedia. It is
a little larger ; its middle portion measures 31 inches in length ;
and each anterior horn is somewhat larger in bulk though
shorter, 144 inches in length. In the middle portion the two
angles at which the horns are united are shorter and more
divergent; and the whole shape of the apparatus is slightly
different from that of the other species. For the rest, I
can affirm that not a single bone of the one skeleton is
identical in shape or size with the corresponding bone of the
other; and this proves clearly a specific difference between the
two animals.

Unfortunately I am not acquainted with the sex of my
skeleton of B. patachonica so as to certify definitely that the
indicated differences are not sexual ; but they appear to me of
too great importance to admit this supposition. I have also
under my notice the whalebone-plates of the two animals;
but those of B. intermedia are too much destroyed for a com-
plete description. Those of B. patachonica are composed of
300 lamine on each side of the mouth, of which the 136
smaller ones at the end are all white, also the underside of
the others, with the bristles of the whole; whereas the beards
of the plates of B. intermedia are completely black, and there
is no vestige of the whitish colour of the other species.

It follows from the explanation here given, according to my
views, that there are actually three well-defined species different
from the Balenoptera of our coast of the Atlantic Ocean, which
are distinguished in the following manner :—

418 Dr. A. Giinther on some new

1. B. intermedia. The largest; 58 feet long, with a head 14
feet in length and 6 feet in breadth, and 8 feet high at the
middle of the body; has the most robust figure, most bulky
cranium; and its vertebree number at least sixty-six (besides the
sixty-one preserved there being five to six wanting), which
number may be divided into seven cervical, fifteen dorsal, six-
teen lumbar, and sixteen caudal with spines beneath.

2. B. patachonica. Rather smaller, although not shorter ;
but has a more slender figure and less bulky head, 53 feet broad,
although also 14 feet in length; of the fifty-eight and a halt
vertebree preserved, seven are cervical, sixteen dorsal, seventeen
lumbar, and thirteen caudal with under-spines, also wanting
the five to six terminal vertebree. This species is described in
the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.’ 1865, p. 191.

3. B. bonaérensis. The smallest, 30 to 32 feet in length,
with a head 7 feet long and 4 feet wide, and a vertebral column
of forty-eight vertebrae, divided into seven cervical, eleven
dorsal, twelve lumbar, and eighteen caudal; but only the nine
anterior have under-spines. ‘The skeleton of this species was

described by me in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.’ 1867, p. 707.

Posrscript.—In the description, instead of nine under-spines
of the tail it should be twelve, as I have lately found three more
bones on the skeleton, each open and composed of two separate
pieces; the number of vertebra is exactly the same as im the
European species. Mr. Turner of Edinburgh is of Dr. Gray’s
opinion, and separates Stbbaldius from Physalus. I have seen
the Ostend specimen of Stbbaldius at Leipsic, and cannot under-
stand how M. van Beneden could unite this gigantic animal
with the slender Physalus, which I know very well, from the
daily inspection of the skeleton in the museum of Greifswald.

Buenos Ayres, Et. ie
September 25, 1872.

LX.—On some new Species of Reptiles and Fishes collected by
J. Brenchley, Esq. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S.

Tue following diagnoses are taken from an account of the
reptiles and fishes collected by J. Brenchley, Esq., in Poly-
nesia, the East Indies, and Central Asia, and kindly presented
by him to the Trustees of the British Museum. This ac-
count, which contains more detailed descriptions, was prepared
some time ago for a large work which Mr. Brenchley has in
the press; but as the execution of the numerous plates with
which the work will be illustrated may cause a further delay
in its publication, I have thought it best to publish now the
following shorter notices.

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 419

REPTILES.
Evremias Brenchleyt.

The supranasals meet, separating the prefrontals from the
rostral; preefrontals not confluent; a small azygos shield be-
tween the postfrontals. Six upper labials in front of the
infraocular, which forms a part of the free margin of the lip ;
the sixth labial only about half the size of the infraocular.
Eyelid entirely scaly. Collar formed by eight scales, subequal
insize. Ventral scutes forming thirty-one transverse and twelve
longitudinal series. Preeanal region covered with small scales.
Fore limb reaching nearly to the extremity of the snout when
stretched forwards ; hind limb extending to the axil of the fore
limb. Upper parts brownish olive, with an indistinct series of
light-coloured ocelli on each side of the back; a well-defined
whitish band commences behind the eye, passes through the
tympanum, and runs along each side of the body to the axil of
the hind leg. Hinder side of the thighs with a few whitish
ocelli on a black ground.

A single adult female was obtained in Mongolia.

Eremias multiocellata.

The supranasals meet, separating the single preefrontal from
the rostral; prefrontals confluent into a single shield; a small
azygos shield between the postfrontals. Six upper labials in
front of the infraocular, the narrow lower corner of which
enters the free margin of the lip; the sixth labial as large as the
infraocular. Lyelid entirely scaly. Collar formed by a central
larger and numerous smaller lateral shields. Ventral scutes
forming thirty transverse and eighteen longitudinal series.
Preanal region covered with small scales. Fore limb reaching
nearly the extremity of the snout when stretched forwards ;
hind limb extending to the axil of the fore limb. Greenish
olive above, with numerous more or less perfect black rings
enclosing a lighter centre. A somewhat irregular, whitish,
black-edged band along each side of the body, from the eye to
the axil of the hind limb.

A single specimen was obtained in the desert of Gobi, on the
route from Sumé to the Tola river.

Euprepes haplorhinus.

This species would appear to represent a distinct generic
division ; but more than enough genera have been distinguished
by names in the Scincoid family, and I am unwilling to increase
their number without being fully convinced of the generic value
of the distinctive characters.

420 Dr. A. Giinther on some new

This species, then, differs from Huprepes by lacking supra-
nasal shields; it would be a Mocoa, but it has the scales
distinctly provided with three or four keels.

The prefrontal forms a broad suture with the rostral as well
as with the vertical. Only one fronto-parietal, notched behind
to receive the front part of the central occipital. Vertical five-
sided, nearly as long as broad. Nostril wide, in the centre of
the nasal. Har-opening with two or three short lobules in front.
The middle of the body is surrounded by twenty-eight longi-
tudinal series of scales, subequal in size; there are thirty-eight
scales in a longitudinal series between the fore and hind legs.
Six preanal scales, the middle of which are rather larger than
the others. The fore leg extends to the middle of the eye if
stretched forwards; third finger a little shorter than the fourth.
The hind leg covers about two thirds of its distance from the
fore lez; the fourth toe one fourth longer than the third.

With regard to coloration it is very similar to Mocoa tri-
lineata. The dorsal parts are brownish, uniform or with dark
markings more or less confluent into a pair of longitudinal
bands. Sides black, with a well-defined white streak, one scale
broad, from the tympanum, above the shoulder, to the axil of
the hind leg. Lower parts uniform white.

Two examples from the Feejee Islands.

Mocoa micropus.

Prefrontal shield single, in contact with the rostral as well
as with the parietal. Five occipitals, of which the central is
as large as one of the anterior. Har-opening very small, with-
out any lobules. The middle of the body is surrounded by
twenty-one longitudinal series of smooth scales ; six series are
dorsal and rather larger than the others. There are thirty-
five scales in a longitudinal series between the axils of the
fore and hind limbs. Four preanal scales, the two middle of
which are twice the size of the lateral. Legs very feeble, but
five-toed; the fore leg does not reach the ear-opening if stretched
forwards; fingers very short, subequal in length; the third
and fourth toes equal in length. Back light greenish olive,
with a few minute black specks, bordered on the side by a
deep-black band, which gradually passes into the greyish
coloration of the lower parts ; the latter are indistinctly marbled
with whitish.

Two specimens, apparently young, from the Feejee Islands.

Hinulia tetragonurus.

The prefrontal forms a broad suture with the rostral as well
aswith thevertical. Vertical five-sided, much longer than broad.

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 421

Only one fronto-parietal, notched behind to receive the front
part of the central occipital. Nostril in the centre of the nasal,
with a lunate groove behind. LEar-opening without lobes in
front. The middle of the body is surrounded by twenty-
eight longitudinal series of scales, those on the back being
rather larger than those on the sides and abdomen; there are
forty scales in a longitudinal series between the fore and hind
legs. Four preanal scales, subequal in size. Tail strong,
tetrahedral. Legs feeble; the anterior extends to the ear-
opening if stretched forwards ; fingers very feeble and short ;
the hind leg covers about one half of its distance from the fore
leg; the fourth toe one fourth longer than the third. Upper
parts light brownish, finely marbled with darker, sides lighter ;
lower parts white.
One example, apparently adult, from the Feejee Islands.

NANNOSCINCUS (g.n. Scincid.).

Appears to be allied to Cophoscincus (Ptrs.), but differing by
having keeled scales. Body of moderate proportions; legs
feeble, five-toed. Eyelid narrow, scaly. No supranasal. Har-
opening externally not visible, entirely hidden by scales.

Nannoscincus fuscus.

Rostral shield depressed, flat, somewhat wedge-shaped.
Preefrontal forming a broad suture with the rostral as well as with
the vertical. Vertical much longer than broad, tapering behind.
Four supraciliaries. Five occipitals, the middle of which is
smaller than one of the anterior. Nasals rhomboid, with the
anterior and posterior angles acute, perforated in the middle by
the nostrils. Five or six supralabials. Scales with three or
four keels, in twenty-two longitudinal series, the dorsal not
being conspicuously larger than the lateral; there are thirty-
eight transverse series of scales between the fore and hind legs.
Four preanal scales, the middle being somewhat the larger.
Anterior toes almost rudimentary ; the third and fourth hind
toes rather longer than the second. Upper parts uniform
shining blackish brown ; lower parts speckled with greyish.

One example from the Feejee Islands.

Gymnodactylus multicarinatus.

Snout broader than long. Head without any larger tubercles,
except in the occipital and temporal regions. Six upper
labials; the middle lower labial large, without mentalia, or
with a pair of only rudimentary ones behind. Back with from
sixteen to twenty regular longitudinal series of small conical

422 . Dr. A. Giinther on some new

tubercles ; the series are equidistant from each other, and the
tubercles are close to one another and ribbed. The abdominal
scales are very small, strongly keeled, and gradually reduced
to minute tubercles in the direction towards the vent. . ‘The
tail in all our specimens is more or less reproduced and uni-
formly granular, without tubercles or scutes. The upperside
of the hind limbs with scattered, strongly ribbed tubercles.
No pores. Upper parts brownish uniform, or with dark trans-
verse markings; sometimes a blackish streak from the eye to
above the tympanum.

Several examples from the New Hebrides (Aneiteum) and
Tongatabu.

Peripia cyclura.

Back uniform granular, without any tubercles. Scales in
the middle of the belly in about forty-five longitudinal series.
Tail rounded, not depressed, very narrowly verticillated, with-
out enlarged subcaudals. Nine upper and
eight lower labial shields. Front lower labial
elongate; but the two adjoining labials are
still longer; the chin is covered with very
small shields, of which one in the centre,
immediately behind the front labial, is /
generally the largest. Brownish grey above,
with more or less irregular brown bands
across the back, each band being ornamented
with some small white spots ; the brown bands are sometimes
replaced by a dark marbling.

Several specimens from New Caledonia, all agreeing in the
peculiar pholidosis of the chin and in the form of the tail. The
longest is 43 inches long, of which the tail takes 2 inches.

I have no doubt that Professor Peters is perfectly right in
supposing that Peripia Peronii is identical with Peropus mu-

tilatus of Wiegmann (Monatsber. Berl. Acad. 1867, p. 14).

Twice nat. size.

FISHES.
Dicerobatis draco.

Teeth tessellated, those of the upper jaw in forty-six series,
each tooth being much broader than long and_ trenchant
behind. The band of teeth terminates laterally at a short
distance from the angle of the mouth. Body and tail smooth.
The distance between the mouth and dorsal fin is one half of
the greatest width of the body. ‘Tail more than twice as long
as the disk, without spine. Upper parts uniform brown, top
of the dorsal fin white. - EEE re,

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 423

Misol Island. Greatest width ofthe disk 15 inches ; distance
between the front margin of the head and dorsal fin 73 inches.

Scolopsis xenochrous.
DD: 7 A. .. L. lat. 44. LL. transv. 33/14.

Allied to Scolopsis ghanam.

The height of the body is contained thrice in the total length
(without caudal), the length o head thrice and a third.
The diameter of the eye is one third of the length of the head,
and a little more than that of the snout, and equal to the width
of the interorbital space. Infraorbital arch with two strong
spines, one pointing forwards, the other backwards ; two or
three small denticulations below the strong spine. Preeoper-
culum with the angle projecting. Dorsal spines rather strong,
but less so than those of the anal fin; second and third anal
spines nearly equal in strength and length. Brownish olive ;
a narrow pearl-coloured band along the uppermost dorsal series
of scales; a large blackish-brown spot on the posterior part
of the gill-cover. A broad silvery band, three scales broad,
along the trunk below the lateral line ; the anterior part of the
band is crossed by a pair of short oblique brown streaks, the
middle part with a brown spot on the base of each scale ; the
posterior portion uniform pearl-coloured. Preorbital with a
narrow silvery band. Fins colourless.

Misol Island. Length 7 inches.

Cubiceps pauctradiatus.
D.10| 75. A.;. Lat. 50.

The height of the body is one fourth of the total length
(without caudal), the length of the head two sevenths. Ab-
domen compressed into a ridge in front of the ventral fins,
which are received into a groove of the posterior part of the
abdomen. The diameter of the eye is equal to the width of
the interorbital space and one third of the length of the head.
Snout shorter than the eye. Jaws with a series of minute
teeth. The vomer and tongue are armed with a long elliptical
patch of very small obtuse teeth ; no teeth on the palatine bones.
Maxillary hidden below the preorbital, and extending to the
front margin of the orbit. Humeral plate much developed,
triangular. Pectoral fin very long, longer than the head, and
extending to the vent; not quite thrice as long as the ventrals.
Caudal fin forked nearly to the base; the lobes can overlap
each other. Uniform brown; inside of the mouth and gill-
cavity black.

Misol Island. Length 53 inches.

424 D:. A. Giinther on some new

Percis alboguttata.
D5 | 22. A... Ue lat.60. 1. transy. 5/13)

The height of the body is contained six times and a half in
the total length (without caudal), the length of the head thrice
and a half. The width of the interorbital space is one
third of the diameter of the eye, which is two sevenths of the
length of the head, and not quite equal to the length of the
snout. Lower jaw slightly projecting beyond the upper ; the
maxillary extends somewhat behind the vertical from the front
margin of the orbit. Cheek covered with minute scales to
below the middle of the eye. The fourth dorsal spine is rather
longer than the third, and about twice as long as the fifth.
The ventral fins reach to the vent ; caudal truncated. Brownish
olive, with a series of five small pearl-coloured spots on each
side of the back, along the base of the dorsal fin; a series of
indistinct brownish spots along the lower half of the side;
caudal fin with a pair of brown spots on the base, the lower ~
spot being followed by an ovate white spot. Fins without
distinct markings.

Misol Island. Length 6 inches.

Salarias coronatus.
DAZ 20 TAL20)

The height of the body is contained six times in the total
length (without caudal), the length of the head five times and
a third. The forehead projects a little beyond the mouth.
The supraciliary tentacle is about as long as the eye, and ter-
minates in several fringes. Nuchal crest none. <A pair of
canine teeth in the lower jaw. Dorsal fin deeply notched.
Pectoral nearly as long as the head. TF lesh-coloured, with
eight dark cross bands as broad as, or broader than, the inter-
spaces, darkest on the edges. Back with scattered brownish-
violet spots smaller than the pupil. Sides and upper surface
of the head with small round yellow spots, a group on the
crown of the head being placed in a circle. Throat with
three brownish-violet cross bands. Vertical fins nearly imma-
culate; anal with a blackish margin; pectoral finely dotted
with black.

Salomon Islands. Length 32 inches.

Cherops Brenchleyt.

D7. A.% LL. lat. 28. L. transv. 3.

The height of the body is equal to the length of the head,
and one third of the total (without caudal). Head much
longer than high ; the depth of the preeorbital is more than the

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 425

width of the orbit. Scales on the cheek small, scarcely im-
bricate, in four series. Operculum terminating in a membra-
naceous flap behind. Posterior canine tooth present. Pre-
operculum not serrated. Reddish olive: a broad pearl-coloured
band ascends obliquely from above the axil of the pectoral to-
wards the origin of the soft dorsal ; its upper half is surrounded
by a broad brown margin, which is spread over the base of the
last dorsal spines and anterior rays. Root of the pectoral
silvery. No other markings in a preserved state.
Misol Island. Length 73 inches.

Clupea pinguis.
Bros Dedl7inpA,o19, Liilatt43. do. transys.

The height of the body is one fifth of the total length
(without caudal), the length of the head one fourth. Scales
deciduous. Lower jaw but slightly projecting beyond the
upper; maxillary extending to below the front margin of the
eye. Teeth none. Snout longer than the eye, which is one
fourth of the length of the head. Ventral fin inserted below
the anterior third of the dorsal fin, the base of which is midway
between the root of the caudal and the end of the snout. Caudal
fin deeply forked. There are fourteen abdominal scutes behind
the base of the ventrals. Back bluish green, sides silvery,
both colours being sharply defined from each other.

Misol Island. Length 5 inches.

Ophichthys pinquis.

Teeth pointed, in a single series in the maxillary, mandible,
and on the vomer. Head small, pointed, its length being con-
tained five times and a half in the distance of the gill-opening
from the vent. Eye about half the length of the snout, the
cleft of the mouth extending considerably behind its hinder
margin. Dorsal and anal fins low, nearly entirely hidden in
a groove ; the former commences somewhat in advance of the
gill-opening. The length of the pectoral fin is about one third
of that of the head. Reddish brown, with eight large broad
black spots across the back of the trunk, and fifteen across the
back of the tail ; they extend downwards to the middle of the
side. Head with numerous small round blackish spots. No
other spots.

Salomon Islands. Length 16 inches, the tail being 94 inches
long.

Ophichthys filaria.
Allied to O. longipinnis and O. Kirkii, but distinguished

from both by the considerably greater slenderness of the body,
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 30

426 Dr. A. Giinther on Psammoperca and Cnidon.

the depth of which is two ninths of the length of the head, whilst
it is rather more than one third in those two species.

The length of the head is one tenth of the distance between
the gill-opening and vent; tail almost as long as the body.
Cleft of the mouth of moderate width, extending to some dis-
tance behind the eye, which is small, and somewhat nearer to
the corner of the mouth than to the end of the snout. Snout
pointed, more than twice as long as the eye, projecting beyond
the mouth. Anterior nostril with a small tube ; posterior on
the inner side of the lip, below the front margin of the eye.
Teeth pointed, uniserial. Gill-openings lateral. Pectoral fin
reduced to a minute filament. ‘The dorsal and anal are about
half as high as the body, the former commencing midway
between the gill-opening and the eye. Coloration uniform.

Misol Island. Length 24 inches, the tail being 114 inches
long ; depth of the body 3 lines.

85
Ophichthys misolensis.

The length of the head is one seventh of the distance between
the gill-opening and vent; tail as long as the body. The depth
of the body is one third of the length of the head. Eye small,
above the middle of the cleft of the mouth, which is of moderate
width. Snout pointed, twice as long as the eye, projecting
beyond the mouth. Anterior nostril with a very short tube ;
posterior on the inner side of the lip, below the front margin of
the eye. Teeth equally small, pointed, uniserial. Gill-openings
somewhat oblique, lateral. Pectoral fin none. Dorsal and
anal fins low, the former commencing at a very short distance
behind the gill-opening, the latter immediately behind the vent.
Coloration uniform.

Misol Island. Length 11 inches.

LXI.—On Psammoperca and Cnidon. By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

THESE two genera are identical; and the name Psammoperca
given by Richardson in 1846 has the priority, the name
Cnidon dating. from the year 1849 (Mill. & Trosch. Hor.
Ichthyol. Heft 3). The amended diagnosis of the genus will
stand as follows :—

Seven branchiostegals. Pseudobranchie none. All the
teeth villiform, in bands, without canine teeth ; tongue with a
small, ovate, rough patch. Operculum with a small spine ;
preoperculum with a strong spine at the angle, with the
posterior edge serrated, and with the lower limb smooth and
covered by membrane. ‘Two dorsal fins, slightly continuous,
the first with seven or eight strong spines, another being

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 427

attached to the soft dorsal ; three anal spines. Caudal rounded.
Pectoral short, rounded. Scales rather large, finely ctenoid.

It is more difficult to come to a final decision as regards the
specific affinity of Psammoperca waigiensis and Cnidon chi-
nensis. The British Museum possesses now six examples:— —

1. The typical example, stuffed, from Australia (9 inches).

2. A stuffed example from Victoria (7 inches).

3. An example in spirits from New South Wales (9 inches).

4, A stuffed example from Torres Straits (12 inches).

5. An example in spirits from Manila (10 inches); obtained
by Dr. A. B. Meyer, and undoubtedly identical with Cnidon
chinensis.

6. A dry skin, said to be from China, obtained from a dealer
(10 inches long).

In all these specimens the formula of the fins is the same:
the first dorsal has only seven spines, not eight *, the eighth
spine belonging to the second dorsal fin. In other respects
nearly every one of the specimens shows certain peculiarities,
so that no two agree perfectly with one another, not even those
from South Australia; but I think these differences are so
slight as not to allow of specific distinction. Thus the number
of scales in the lateral line varies from forty-seven to fifty-five ;
the vertical fins are sometimes quite naked, sometimes more or
less thinly covered with minute scales ; the humerus has some-
times two short points behind, sometimes one of the points is
slightly denticulated, sometimes the lower is absent altogether.
There is only one point by which the Philippine specimen is
somewhat more conspicuously distinguished; and that is the
distinctly concave profile of the snout ; but also in this respect
it is approached by that of our Australian example which is
preserved in spirits, although the concavity is so slight that it.
has been entirely effaced in the stuffed specimens.

Under these circumstances I am inclined to regard these
fishes as specifically identical.

LXII.—On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Lovin.
[Concluded from p. 385. }

THE same arrangement that is expressed by the formula for
the two series of the ambulacral peristomial plates, makes itself
apparent also in the appearance of the spheridia. In the Spa-
tangidee (for example, brissopsis lyrifera) they first show them-
selves in the one-pored peristomial plate in each ambulacrum,
quite close to the suture, and usually incline over towards the

* What I have formerly (in dried specimens) taken for the spine of the
second dorsal fin is, in fact, only the hardened first simple ray.

30*

428 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

two-pored plate. While the peristome is still pentagonal, and
the mouth only.a very little removed from the middle of the
buccal membrane, a spheeridium has appeared in the two-pored
peristomial plate also in Echinocardium ovatum ; but this is still
much smaller than the first. Thus, even here, series I. a—V.
comes after series I.6-V.a. When the mouth has shifted its
position so far backwards that it nearly touches the labrum,
each ambulacrum shows a third spheridium in plate 2 in series
I. 6-V. a; and when the mouth begins to be concealed by the
prolceng labrum, the fourth is added in plate 2 in series

.a-V.b, apparently first in the paired rows of the trivium.
A very young Cassidulus caribearum, 4 millims. in length, has
already two spheeridia, the unequal size of which shows that
of the one-pored peristomial plate to be the older one ; when
7 millims. long it has four, all visible, in deep cavities. When
it has reached a length of 12 millims., there are six spheeridia,
but the overgrowth characteristic of this group has likewise
commenced. An outer layer of shell-substance of irregularly
reticulate texture, closely resembling a froth, spreads upon the
surface of the test ; itis seen most distinctly in the sternal region
of the unpaired interradium, where it starts from the middle of
each plate and extends over its margins in narrow, tortuous,
irregular ridges, so as finally, in the adult, to form the uniform
surface with small scattered holes which is peculiar to these
genera. In the ambulacra this excrescent layer is first seen to
raise the margins of the depressions in which the spheridia
are seated, thus forming a projection from them which gradually
coversthe spheeridia; and just as of each pair the firstspheridium
makes its appearance in series I. (-V. a, so it is also this which
in its order is first concealed, and afterwards that of series
I. a-V. 6, so that they are overgrown in the order of their
appearance.

Toxopneustes dribachensis again may show how the spheeridia
appear in the Latistelle (see Pl. XIV. figs. 1-8). An indi-
vidual of 3 millims. (fig. 2) has two spheeridia in each ambula-
crum :—one, the oldest, on the binary plate of the first primary
plate of series I. 0-V. a, near its margin ; another on the ternary
plate of series I.a-V.6. At the size of 6 millins. (fig. 3) their
number is four; 1 stands still nearer the margin of its primary
plate 1, and 2 as before, and two new ones have made their
appearance—3 on the other primary plate of the binary large
plate of series I. B~V.a, and 4 on the third primary plate (3)
of the ternary of series [. a-V. b, which is an entire plate, not
on 2, which is intermediate and a half plate. When the animal
is a little more grown (fig. 4), it.has also four spheridia, not,
however, 1, 2, 3, 4, but 2, 3, 4, 5. The binary large plate

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 429

of series I. b~V. a, both primary plates of which have coalesced,
has become depressed to a great. extent ; and its spheridium,
which was the first to appear and stood on the margin of its
primary plate 1, has disappeared. Spheeridium 2 still remains,
but, during the progress of the depression, has approached the
margin; 3 stands, as before, on the binary large plate of series
I. b-V. a, and 4 on the ternary plate of series .a-V.b; anda
new spheridium has made its appearance on the primary plate
1 of large plate 2 of series I.6-V.a. These spheridia, 2, 3,
4, 5, are still present after the large plates 1 and 2 of both
series have coalesced into secondary large plates, and the animal
has become 11 millims. in diameter (fig. 6). But in a some-
what larger animal of 15 millims. diameter (fig. 7), which has
five spheeridia, these are not 2,3, 4, 5, 6, but 3, 4, 5, 6,7; for
the spheridium 2, gradually approaching the margin, has
disappeared, a spheridium, 6, has been added apparently on the
primary plate 1 of large plate 2 in series I. a—V.6, and yet
another, 7, apparently on the primary plate 1 of large plate 2
in series I. 0-V.a. Finally, at the size of 52 millims. (fig. 8),
when the ambulacral peristomial plates are large plates of the
third order, consisting of 1, 2, and 3 united, their six spheeridia
have the ordinal numbers 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, the last of which
apparently belongs to primary plate 1 of large plate 3. “Thus
by the resorption which takes place in the margin of the peri-
stome, two spheridia have been lost, and one radiole with its
tubercle.

Thus the asymmetry in the Echinoidean skeleton, with relation
to tts antero-posterior axis,is expressed within each ambulacrum,
im its two subordinate rows of plates, most strikingly in the
arrangement, size, form, changes, and movements, during growth,
of the peristomial plates and those immediately following them,
in the number and position of their pores, in the order of the
appearance and disappearance of the spheridia; and it will
probably not fail, upon closer investigation, in the relations of
the radioles and pedicellariz. In effect it abrogates the radiate

lan of structure and displays the homologies between the
Spatangide and Kchinide, that even under the latter appa-
rently radiate form we find in the bivium, which symmetrically
encloses an unpaired interradium, a bilateral arrangement on
the two sides of an antero-posterior axis, which is the same in
the mature animal in all the different groups in the class.

If in the peristome of Toawopneustes drébachensis (fig. 1,
Plate XIV.), or of some other Echinid, we unite by straight
lines the five plates I. a, I. a, III. 6, 1V. a, V. 6, and the five,
1.6, IL. 4, U1. a, IV. 4, V. a, two pentagons of the same size
and form are inscribed in the circle, each of which has three

430 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

approximated angles of equal size. ‘These two pentagons are
so placed that the side I. a V.6 stands towards the unpaired
interradium, and towards the madreporite’s interradium the
side II. 6 III. a, which is homologous with this,—that the four
sides which in the two pentagons enclose angles of equal size
but not homologous, are parallel two and two, but the sides
which are common for the two unequal but homologous angles
intersect each other,—and, moreover, so that the two pentagons
together form with their outer lines a figure whichissymmetrical,
not in relation to that diameter of the stoma which coincides
with the antero-posterior axis of the animal, but only in relation
to a diameter, a@, which passes through the pomt where
the last-mentioned sides intersect each other, so that all lines
which unite the homologous angles of the two pentagons
(namely, [V.a with IV.6, II. 6 with V.a, V. 6 with HI. a,
I. awith II. }, and I. 6 with II. a) are reciprocally parallel and
perpendicular to the same diameter—and that consequently, if

sph. 5 are

Buccal area in a young Brissopsis lyrifera: sph. spheeridia.

one pentagon is turned round this diameter as upon an axis, it
coincides with the other. In the same way we get two similar
pentagons in the pentagonal peristome with rounded angles of

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 4381

the young Spatangus (see fig. 3) ; and it is clear that this is the
case also in the typically equally pentagonal peristome of the
Clypeastrid and Cassidulide. ‘The diameter a passes, if
produced, through ambulacrum IV. and interradium 1.

The interradia are rows of plates of the perisome, different
from the ambulacra in growth and movement. If, by boiling
in solution of soda, we carefully separate their plates in Spa-
tangus purpureus, Brissopsis lyrifera, and Hchinocardium
ovatum, we find that many of them are furnished at their adoral
angles with a semilunar lamella,which projects within the aboral
margin of the preceding plate, which has a corresponding de-
pression on its mner side. Spatangus has such a lamella on
the third and fourth frontal and the third, fourth, and fifth
lateral plates ; Brissopsds on the third and fourth frontal and
third, fourth, fifth, and sixth lateral plates in the hinder row ;
Lichinocardium on the third lateral plate in the anterior row.
No doubt the same is the case in many Spatangidee, perhaps
also in other irregular Echinoidea. This is an indication that
the plates of the interradia are in some degree scales, although
they never fulfil the same functions as the scales in the peri-
some of the Holothuriz and Crinoidea.

The interradia in the Echinide are in a high degree mutually
accordant ; into the peristome of these they always enter with
two plates, a large and a small one. It is generally only in
young Kchinide that the position of these can be observed.
Toxopneustes drébachensis, when young, constantly shows that
if we mark the animal’s right lateral interradium with 1, and
consequently the unpaired one with 5, the smaller peristomial
plate and the larger new-formed plate close to the vertical plate
are found to belong to la, 2a, 36, 4a, 5a, and the larger
peristomial and smaller new-formed plates to 1 6, 26, 3a, 44,
56. It is the interradium 3, the left frontal of the animal, that
changes the position of the plates (see fig. 1, Pl. XIV.). We
find that such an arrangement is symmetrical on the two sides
of a diameter passing through ambulacrum I. and interradium
3, the same that is the longitudinal axis in Hchinometra, and in
the vertical plane of which it has the curved line of its flexure.

Whilst in Hchinoneus the interradia greatly resemble those
of the Kchinide in the forms and relative sizes of the plates,
so that even the unpaired one, although perforated by the large
periproctium, is still in a high degree in accordance with the
paired ones, there is nevertheless a remarkable difference with
respect to the peristomial plates, which is worth indicating in
order that it may be carefully investigated in young indivi-
duals, like so many other things in that animal, such as the
oblique mouth, &c. Interradia 1, 3, and 5 enter the peristome

.

432 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

with a single plate, 2 and 4 with two plates; and if we reduce
the peristome of Hchinoneus to a circle, this arrangement also is
symmetrical to the diameter which passes through ambulacrum
I. and interradium 3. All other irregular Echinoidea have in
each interradium only a single plate in the peristome. The
arrangement of the interradia is symmetrical in relation to the
animal’s antero-posterior axis, which is also its longitudinal
axis, and passes through the unpaired ambulacrum III. and
the unpaired interradium 5—with a constant deviation in the
Spatangidz, without deviation in the Clypeastrid and Cassi-
dulide ; whilst in these two families all the four paired
interradia resemble each other in a high degree, the two frontal
above all, and the two lateral are reciprocally perfectly sym-
metrical, and the unpaired interradium differs little from
them, the plates being analogous in proportion and form, but
cut out as if eroded for the periproctium, which is surrounded
by the same plates during the whole life of the animal. This
is the case in a high degree in Laganum and Echinocyamus,
which have one of the youngest plates which pushes into the
vertical plate large and pointed. So also in Clypeaster, Sto-
lonoclypus, Encope, Mellita, Echinarachnius, and Arachnotdes,
in which the younger plates are gradually smaller and smaller,
and those which lie close to the vertical plates small and of
equal size, diverging and receiving the genital pores between
them.

Much of all this is quite different in the Spatangide. The
frontal interradia are symmetrical in all living genera; and
between them and the lateral ones there is a considerable
agreement. Ifthe plates 2 in the frontals are very large, and
the following ones very short, as in Breynia, Lovenia, Hupa-
tagus, Plagionotus, Maretia, Spatangus, and Echinocardium,
the same conditions occur in the lateral interradia ; if the plates
of the frontals approach a nearly equilateral pentagonal or
hexagonal form, the same prevails in the laterals. But among
themselves the lateral interradia are never alike, always un-
symmetrical on both sides of the longitudinal line; and it is
always the right lateral interradium, 1, that deviates. Those
Spatangidee, which seem to be most numerous among existing
forms, but were very few during the earliest periods of the
family, the Prymnodesmit, or those which have an infraanal
fasciola and the most regular ambulacra, are also those in which
this asymmetry is most strictly maintained. All their genera
have in the right lateral interradium, in its hinder row, 1 a,
one plate less than in the same row of the left one, 40; the
first three plates of the right peristomial plate 1 and two
following, represent the first four of the left lateral interradium,

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 433

namely peristomial plate 1 and the three following 2, 3, 4.
One of the three in interradium 1 a must therefore be regarded
as composed of two plates; and it is clear that it is the second,
which consequently should be indicated by 24+3; but both
plate 1 and plate 4, and sometimes plate 5, assist in filling up
the deficiency which occurs when the right 2 +3 is not so large
as the left 2 and 3 taken together. In most cases the former
is as large as the two latter, asin Brissopsis, Maretia, Lovenia,
Eupataqus, and Echinocardium ; and in these, moreover, plate
4 is of equal size on both sides; in Breynia, Plagionotus, Spa-
tangus, Xanthobrissus, Micraster, Paleotropus, and Meoma
(which last has only a half infraanal fasciola) the plate 2+3 of
the right side is somewhat less than the left 2 and 3 taken
together; and then it is the right plate 4 in Wicraster, Echino-
cardium, and Paleotropus, and with this also plate 1, and, in
Meoma, plate 5, that is larger than the corresponding plate on
the left side and fills up the deficiency. In Brissus, on both
sides, plate 2 in 16 and 4a, is so large and so nearly equi-
laterally pentagonal that it presses away plate 2 in 1a and 46
from all contact with plate 1; and, moreover, plate 2 in 16 is
much larger than in 4a, so that it makes up no small part of
the measure that must be filled up in order to correspond with
2,3,4in 44; here, also, 2+3 in 1a is considerably less than
2 and 3 im 46 taken together, and 4 in 1a larger than 4
in 40.

The second group of Spatangide, which is now, so far as we
know, less rich in generic forms, the Prymnadeti, those which
are destitute of an infraanal fasciola, is far less regular as
regards what is here in question. Five genera resemble many
of the Prymnodesmii in this respect—that they have plate 2+3
in interradium 1 a of the right side equal in size to the left
2 and 3 taken together, and, moreover, plate 4 of equal size on
both sides, as in Agassizia and Schizaster, or, as in Mera,
Abatus, and Hemiaster, plate 2+3 in 1a smaller than 2 and 3
in 4 6, and therefore plates 1 and 4 of the right side, and in
Hemiaster also 5, somewhat larger than on the left. But three
other genera are very divergent. Desorda has plate 2 of inter-
radium 1a@ amalgamated, not with plate 3 in the same row,
but with plate 2 in 14; and the same occurs in Atrapus; and
in the former plate 2 in 44 is besides separated from plate 1.
Paleostoma, however, is the most divergent. Whilst all other
Spatangide have, in each interradium, immediately after the
peristomial plate 1, a pair of plates 2, this genus has plate 2
simple in both the frontal and lateral interradia ; and, moreover,
in interradium 1 it is not in 1 a that plates 2 and 3 are amal-
gamated, but in the row 1 6.

434 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

This is the diversity that the right interradium 1 shows in
all known genera of recent Spatangide. It is quite clear that
it is not the left side that has a plate more, but the right that
has a plate less, and that here within a region not far from the
peristome, but separated therefrom, the normal structure of the
plates is disturbed. It is in the direction of this interradium
that the diameter lies in relation to which the ambulacra are
symmetrically disposed. Whether this diameter may possibly
indicate the heterologous position which the Echinoderm, whilst
still residing in its larva, had with regard to the latter, a pri-
mordial axis, from which it subsequently passed to another
antero-posterior axis, or whether this abnormal coalescence
of certain plates on one side of the animal may perhaps have
some connexion with what takes place when the Echinoderm
took up into itself the stomach and intestine of its larva, are
questions which deserve to be borne in mind during further in-
vestigations upon the development of the Echinodermata, but
which, for the present, we can only treat in a general way.

The unpaired interradium differs far more from the paired
in the Spatangide than in the other irregular Kchinoidea. _ It
has a far more independent structure; and its dissimilar
plates, which are essentially symmetrical, are differentiated for
various functions. ‘The first, or peristomial plate, which in the
young is not very unlike those of the paired interradia, becomes
developed into the labrum, with which the animal, during its
movement forward in the soft sea-bottom, raises the mass of
mud which constantly fills its intestinal canal. Behind the
labrum follows the sternum, composed, like all the following seg-
ments, of two paired plates, furnished with powerfully movable,
more or less oar-shaped radioles, with which the animal rows
itself away; and behind the sternum the episternum and the
long row of the abdominal plates, which are generally numerous,
and which, in most of the existing genera, close at the ma-
dreporite, or, in Hemiaster and many extinct genera, are sepa-
rated therefrom by eye-plates or vertical plates, when these
close together behind the madreporite.

The labrum, in most, is very short, so that, with its
outer margins, it occupies only the first 2-pored radial plate ;
in others, such as Maretia, Lovenia, Breynia, Hupatagus,
Atrapus, and Paleostoma, it is so produced backward that it
corresponds to the two or three first radial plates. The sternum
presents, most distinctly in the Prymnodesmii, a certain corre-
spondence with the plates 2 of the paired interradia, inasmuch
as it is usually small when these are very large, as in Breynia,
Plagionotus, Eupatagus, and Lovenia. Its relation to the bivium
has already been mentioned. The plates of the episternum, in

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 435

the same group, are narrowed or pointed backward ; and their
outer margin forms, with the outer margin of the first abdominal
pair on each side, the angulus episternalis, into which the pro-
duced plates of the bivium project. This angle is very deep
in Lupatagus, Breynia, Plagionotus, Maretia, Echinocardium,
Xanthobrissus, and Paleotropus, and shallower in Lovenia,
Brissus, Meoma, Brissopsis, and Spatangus. It is very small
in the Micraster of the Chalk, in which it makes its earliest
appearance, and which has the episternal plates still of nearly
the same form as the other abdominal plates; this is also the
condition in the Prymnadeti, in which all the posterior part of
the unpaired interradium (e. g. in Hemdaster), by its uniformity,
has a certain resemblance to the same part in the Cassidulide.
This group of Spatangide also differs from the Prymnodesmii
in that the plates of the unpaired interradium belonging to the
left side are notably longer than those of the right side. Even
the left sternal plate projects beyond the right one in most of
them; if not, the episternum and all following segments are
elongated. In Palwostoma this difference goes very far, inasmuch
as the left plate of the episternum lies with nearly the whole of
its length behind the right one, and all the following nearly in
the same way. <A consequence of this is a projection by which
the periproctium, which here also is bounded, at least in front,
by the same plates during the whole life of the animal, is not
always symmetrically enchased—that is to say, that on one side
a smaller number of plates attain its margin; and then it is
always the left side that is furnished with a plate more than the
right side. In general we may observe that in the Spatangidee
the left side is preponderant.

If we compare avery young Brissopsis lyrifera,4’6 millims. in
length, with a full-grown one, we find that the paired interradia
in the former have already acquired their permanent form, only
that the oldest plates (of the peristome) are comparatively
broader, and plates 2 a little longer than in the full-grown spe-
cimen—and that in the frontals the small individual has eleven
or ten plates, and the large one thirteen, two small plates having
been added at the ends. In the laterals ten plates may be
counted in both. The unpaired interradium has undergone far
more change. The labrum and sternum are alike in both; the
episternum in the small individual very short, its posterior
margin very narrow ; and the praanal plate, that which does
not enter into the periproctium, and which changes most of all
the plates of the test, is still three times as long as broad, while
in the adult its length and breadth are nearly equal. In the
latter there are 5-8 anal plates, in the young 5-9; the whole
number of plates in the young is fourteen, in the adult fifteen,

436 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

It appears from this that the interradia in the Spatangide are
enlarged principally by the growth of the individual plates,
very little by the addition of new plates near the vertical plates.
Every plate has a nucleus, which may often be recognized as
its umbo, and is surrounded internally by the curves of growth.

If we examine a Mellita hexapora 6°5 millims. in length side
by side with an adult of 85 millims., we find (besides the changes
in the interradia of the ventral side, which are a consequence of
the outgrowth of the ambulacra at their expense) that all the
interradia in the small individual have from 9 to 10 plates, and
in the large one 13 or perhaps 12; for it is scarcely possible to
ascertain how far the plate through which the periphery passes
is or is not divided into two by a suture. Here, also, the un-
paired interradium is differentiated from the rest, although not
so much as in Brissopsis. The hiatus (“ lunula”’), which occurs
early in this interradium (all the others are situated in the
ambulacra and have not yet made their appearance), is in the
young nearly circular, in the adult long and narrow; and it
shifts its position during growth, so that in the former it is
bounded by the ventral plates 2 and 3, and by the dorsals 5,
6, and 7, but in the adult by the same ventrals (2 and 3) but
by the dorsals 6, 7, and 8; the dorsals approach the margin,
and there even, in some degree, become ventrals. The peri-
proctium, which, like the stoma, is much larger in proportion
in the young than in the adult, is round in the former and sur-
rounded in front by a narrow margin of plate 2, which gradually
disappears, so that finally plate 1 constitutes the anterior boun-
dary of the aperture,which is oval in the adult. The circumstance
that the number of pairs of plates in the interradia in the adult
onlyin aslight degree exceeds that in the youngest, is notdifficult
to observe also in the Cassidulide and regular Echinide ; whilst
in all the augmentation within the ambulacra is far more consi-
derable, and extraordinarily great in the petala of the Irregulares,
in which it is greatly multiplied. We soon ascertain that in all
Kchinoidea the interradia and ambulacra grow and move in-
dependently, the former as the plated perisome, the latter as
fixed arms.

In Brissopsis it is easy to see that the peripetalous fasciola
strikes over the same interradial plate in the adult as in the
young, over plates 4 and 5 in the frontals, 6 and 7 in the
laterals, and over the tenth plate of the unpaired interradium ;
and it keeps in both to the same ambulacral plate in the bivium,
namely the 14th or 15th, in the paired radii of the trivium to the
ninth or tenth, but shifts, apparently, in the unpaired ambula-
crum from plates 4 and 5 to plates 5 and 6.. So also the
infraanal fasciola passes in young and old over plate 3 of the

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 437

unpaired interradium (the episternum) and its plates 4 and 5,
and over plates 6, 7, 8, and 9 of the inner rows of the bivium.
The fasciola consequently grows nearly equally with the plates
of the test—but not pertectly ; for it shifts a little on the plate
within the limits of which it remains. On the inside of the
test no indication of it is seen ; it does not occupy an interspace
between the plates of the test, but is entirely external, and
belongs to a stratum of the test which lies without the radioli.
For we see sometimes, e.g. in Agassizia, how, perfectly un-
affected and entire, it covers groups of radiolar tubercles which
are perfectly recognizable, as to form andarrangement, asthrough
a piece of gauze, and in size are but little inferior to those of
the same group which bear radioles immediately beyond its
margin. Or we see, for example in Plagionotus, a crack in it; _
and through this the subjacent layer with its radiolar tubercles
sticks forth. It has fractures which run transversely ; during
growth joints arise, when its close rows of tubercles change
their direction ; and sometimes such a joint coincides with the
suture between subjacent plates, sometimes not, when the
fasciola passes over it unaltered. Both the peripetalous and
infraanal fascioles contain special forms of tentacles which do
not overstep their boundaries. In Lrissopsis the peripetalous
fasciola contains, in the unpaired ambulacrum, the powerful
tentacles with annular calcareous disks, and in the paired ones
branchie ; the infraanal constitutes the limit between the large
tentacles wreathed with cirri, belonging to the inner rows of
the bivium, which are produced so that their pores fall within
its circle, and the simple, finger-shaped ones, which issue from
the ambulacral plates of the sides. When we observe the
entirely external position of the fasciola, how it glides over
ready developed radiolar tubercles, how the most powerful ex-
ternal organs stand forth only within its circle, how in certain
genera (such as Plagionotus, Eupatagus, and Breynia) the
tubercles of the test, which on one side of the boundary indi-
cated by it are small and but slightly developed, suddenly make
their appearance of large size and strongly marked on the other
side, and if we, moreover, note the opposition between the
dissimilarity of the regions thus distinguished in the Spatan-
gide, and the thorough uniformity in the Cidaridz, Cassidulide,
and Echinoneus, which have no fasciola, we are induced to ask
whether a membrane, perhaps following the largest circumfe-
rence of the test, may not cover the sides of the dorsal surface,
and then, in some forms, check the development of the radioli,
but beyond its border, which is the fasciola, leave two free fields
for the outer organs and the hard structures of the test, one
around the vertex and one infraanal. But this is of little con-

438 Prof. 8S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

sequence ; the fasciola is still an unexplained organ. It has a
border-line (“‘ Sawmlinie”’), says Johannes Miiller, comparable
with the ciliary border of the larva in these respects, that it
forms closed loops and produces an extremely brisk ciliary
movement. Its satin-like close clavule of equal height, the
shafts of which, and not the rounded and soft heads, are the
vibratory organs, as was already observed by Johannes Miiller,
are in a high degree sensitive ; and if a few of them are touched,
many pass instantly into a common waving movement. With
respect to the important question whether the Echinoderm has
taken this over from its larva, and the membrane bounds it, it
is worth remembering that the infraanal fasciola and the lateral
(Desor) exclude each other.

On the dorsal surface, in all recent Echinoidea, the five
ambulacra and the five interradia meet at a circle of five
ocellar plates and, typically, five vertical plates. The latter
have been called genital plates, because, in most cases, the
efferent ducts of the genital glands have their external aper-
tures, the genital pores, in them, and they have been regarded
as belonging to the organs of reproduction. But they are no
more a part of these than the plates of the unpaired interradium
are a part of the nutritive organs because in the irregular
Echinoidea the anus perforates them. It is easy to ascertain
that the plates which have here hitherto been named vertical
plates are present and ready formed in young individuals
which are not yet fertile, and to observe how it is only at a
later period, when the genital glands are matured, that their
efferent ducts, oviducts, or vasa deferentia, perforate the plates
from within. The madreporite, on the other hand, is com-
menced early during the larval state, and is undistinguishable
from the vertical plates, while the genital pores in certain
cases are distant from them. The greater the part occupied
in the vertical plates by the aquiferous system, the smaller is
that of the genital organs; and, vice versd, when the former is
small the latter is large. In the Spatangide the genital pore
is wanting in the plate towards which the percolating appa-
ratus spreads from its central region—so far, that of the nor-
mal five never more than four remain, in some not more than
two. When, as in Laganum, the madreporite, which in some
species of that genus opens into a ramified fissure, occupies the
middle of the stellate ring, or, as in Echinocyamus, it consists
only of a single pore, and when, besides, as in both these
genera, the interradia close with one plate of the last pair very
large and wedge-shaped, the genital pores in the vertical plates
are situated near their margins; but when the madreporite is
more widely expanded, so that it occupies the whole star of

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 439

the vertex, they are placed between the vertical plates and the
interradia, as in Mellita, or, as in Clypeaster, entirely in the
latter and separated from the vertex by their last two or three
plates. Cotteau long ago made the important observation
that an Kchinid also, namely G'oniopygus, has the genital
pores outside the vertical plates, near their apices*. But in
all the Echinide every one of the five vertical plates bears its
genital pore, and the madreporite is confined to one of them
only, namely 2, the right anterior one. It cannot be doubted
that the madreporite and sand-canal are carried to this position
in this way—that the intestinal canal, which, in the irregular
Kchinoidea, has its anal orifice surrounded by the periproctium
in the unpaired interradium and only in that, but there ter-
minates at any point from the neighbourhood of the mouth
till it cuts through the circle of the vertical and ocellar plates,
opens in the Kchinidz in the middle of that circle, which closes
round it. While the mouth, which opens earlier, has in all
Kchinoidea the same position with relation to the ambulacra
and interradia, and its peristome independently formed regu-
larly by the same plates fitted for the purpose and in a definite
order, the anal apexture has a highly variable position, sur-
rounded by eroded plates, in which it occupies during growth
a gradually increased space.

Ina young Toxopneustesdrébachensis of 5 millims. the vertical
plates form a closed circwit, each over its interradium, and in their
reentrant angles the five plates which bear the eyes are placed
equally regularly. This is also the case in adult individuals of
Echinus, Spherechinus, and Psammechinus, and also in the
Salenidew. But in Zoxopneustes and most others this primor-
dial and normal arrangement is soon disturbed. The eye-
plates of the bivium are gradually pushed into the circle on
both sides of the vertical plate of the unpaired interradium 5,
between this and 1 on the right side and 4 on the left. It is
eye-plate I. that first reaches the inner circumference, and
next eye-plate V., as in most genera, such as Lowechinus, Lyt-
echinus, Heliocidaris, Tripneustes, Boletia, Salmacis, Echino-
cidaris, Acrocladia, and Echinometra; in Amblypneustes and
Mespilia they come quite near it. Of the eye-plates of the
trivium, IV. approaches the inner circumference, which it
reaches in many; II. also approaches it, but in a less degree ;
and III., the eye-plate of the unpaired ambulacrum, is always
distant from it. In Diadema, on the other hand, all the eye-
plates are seen more or less completely to touch the anal

* «“Fehinides fossiles du Département de la Sarthe,” pp. 152, 154, pl. 26.

fig. 2, and pl. 27. fig. 25; ‘ Echinides fossiles du Département de l’ Yonne,”
ii. p. 50, Hi 52. fig. 14: Bull. Soc. Géol, Fr. 2° sér, xvi, p. 162,

440 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

membrane. This change of position depends, no doubt, upon
the circumstance that the periproctium, by the resorption, espe-
cially, of the vertical plates 1 and 5 and by stretching, is
enlarged more rapidly and strongly than the breadth of the
vertical plates increases, and that the eye-plates, on which the
growth of the ambulacra reacts as a vis & tergo, are driven into
its median space. Vertical plate 2, which contains the madre-
porite, is enlarged more than the others, and keeps back eye-
plates II. and III.

The anal aperture is produced in the same way in the Spa-
tangidee and Hichinide. Quite young individuals of the former
have the periproctium much more dorsal than older ones, as is
the case in a high degree in a Spatangus purpureus, 2°025
millims. in length; this species is destitute of the peripetalous
fasciola. So early as this the periproctium is nearly round, with
the anus about in the middle. ‘The anal membrane is closely
covered with thin imbricated scales, which form circles :—
the innermost one of long, narrow, pointed lamelle, connivent
around the anus; and around this one or more, consisting of
larger triangular scales; the outermost a circle of still larger
plates. Of these last, in many genera, the adoral grow pre-
ponderantly, so that the periproctium is gradually elongated,
and the anus comes to be situated more excentrically in an
aboral direction. It is otherwise in the Echinide.

In his memoir on the Echinoidea collected by Pourtales in
the great depths between Florida and Cuba, Alexander
Agassiz states that in a very early stage, when, however, the
mouth with its jaws is already developed, “ the anal system of
the Echinide is limited toa single subanal plate, which makes
its appearance before the genital and ocellar plates, and long
remains more prominent than the other plates, which are
added to complete the enlarged anal system”’*. The penta-
gonal or somewhat rounded space which is enclosed by the
five vertical plates is embraced at this stage by a single un-
paired disk. Soon afterwards, in a young Toxopneustes dré-
bachensis, place begins to be prepared for the anus; but
this occurs not in the middle of the disk, but excentrically and
outside of it. The margins of vertical plates 1 and 5 are
absorbed, and between them and the central disk an interspace
is produced which is occupied by the soft general integument.
In this is formed a pair of free, rounded, oblong, calcareous
pieces, which do not coalesce with the disk. Whilst the peri-
proctium enlarges so that it becomes oval in an oblique direc-
tion, and the disk is raised a little at its free margin, although

* Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf-stream ’ &c. pp. 281, 284, 285.
From ‘ Memoirs of the American Academy,’ ix. p. 12.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 441

it constantly remains attached by that opposite to vertical
plate 3, another pair of rounded pieces appears in the enlarged
interspace, and another near vertical plates 2 and 4; and, as
many such are added, gradually becoming smaller and smaller,
their number is greatly increased; while the original central
disk, which itself does not grow much, is still long recogniza-
ble by its position and size. Finally the periproctium is
eroded into a large oval aperture; the calcareous pieces which
closely fill its covering membrane become very numerous, and
the surrounding plates strongly eroded. ‘The anal aperture,
which is not completed until this augmentation of the calca-
reous pieces in the skin is considerably advanced, is always
situated more or less excentrically in the apex of the membrane,
which gradually rises conically, and normally in the direction
of ambulacrum I.; and the oval periproctium generally has its
longest diameter in the same direction from interradium 3 to
ambulacrum I., the same that is the longitudinal axis of the
test in Hehinometra, and in relation to which the peristomial
plates of the interradia are symmetrically arranged in the
Latistellee.

This formation of hard pieces of calcareous network occurring
in the central space, within the circle of the vertical plates, and
which, in the earliest stage, gives origin to a single disk, but
afterwards, during growth, divides itself regularly into different
centres for the production of numerous, free, smaller and
smaller pieces, agreeing in their texture with the first disk—the
whole of this structure, although in close connexion with the
appearance of the anus, belongs nevertheless not to its deve-
lopment but to that of the dermal skeleton; and the complex
of hard parts which originates therefrom is an independent
part of the latter. It recurs in the Salenide, not early broken
up into different small parts, but constant, coherent, and solid,
in the pentagonal disk which here regularly occupies the
central space. At the appearance of the anal tube it is partly
eroded by absorption in its posterior margin, but still more the
vertical plates lying behind, in Heterosalenia and Salenia, 1
and 5, in the normal direction towards ambulacrum I.,—in
Acrosalenia, Goniophorus, and Peltastes only plate 5, as has
been explained by Cotteau, who was the first that correctly
oriented both these and all other forms of Echinide, in the
manner here confirmed. In these genera it is not an added
supernumerary plate, but a normal part of the skeleton, which
in them retains during the whole life of the animal its original
_ form but little altered by the intrusion of the anal tube; whilst
in other Echinide it 1s very early changed into a flexible
covering, or, as in Diadema, entirely disappears. It seems

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x.

442 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

probable that careful investigations will show that this inde-
pendent central disk may recur in the irregular Echinide in
the median area of the vertex, which is penetrated by the
madreporite, and in many of them (Pygurus, Clypeus, and
others) is very large.

If we get rid of the notion that the vertical plates are an
appendage of the generative organs and the central disk of
the alimentary canal, if we see the latter in young Echinide
in its original state, and consider, moreover, the vertex of the
Salenidee as being entire and not eroded from the periproctium,
we obtain an arrangement of these parts of the skeleton the
nearest homologue of which is to be sought in an Echinoderm
of a class which is regarded as very distinct from the Echi-
noidea. The Marsupites, only known as fossil, a Crinoid
without a peduncle, has in the pole opposite to the mouth a
single pentagonal disk closely embraced by the five basalia.
It is the same arrangement as that of the vertex in the young
of Echinus and in the Salenide. The central disk and the
basalia, with the rest of the plates in Marsupzttes, have strive
or grooves which are perpendicular to the suture, and may be
traced up to the middle of the plate, and make their appear-
ance most distinctly when its outermost calcareous layer is eaten
away. But this character is no peculiarity of Marsupites or
of the numerous Crinoidea in which it occurs. If we carefully
examine the central disk and vertical plates in small Echinide,
we find exactly the same structure. It may be discerned even
on the surface by direct light, but is exceedingly distinct by
transmitted light and suitable treatment. We see the penta-
gonal plate divided into five triangular areas, which have its
five sides for their bases, their apices united in its middle; the
reticulated texture is arranged, in each area, so that straight
parallel rods perpendicular to the base have narrow interspaces
between them. In the middle of the plate the rods and inter-
spaces of the different areas meet together and unite, crossing
each other in a closed and apparently irregular network ; but
in the sutures those of one plate are seen to meet those of
another in the same direction. This structure recurs in all
plates in the Echinoidea, whether regular or irregular, and is
the same that has long been known in the Cystidea. In the
fossil Salenidz these strie are seen very generally; and the
structure of parallel rods in the interior is very distinct in a
living Salenia from the great depths near the Antilles, for
which, as for a Pygaster from the same depths, and numerous
other valuable objects, our Royal Museum is indebted to
Dr. Axel Goés’s conscientious and indefatigable researches.

Another trait which expresses the homology between the

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 443

base of Marsupites and the vertex of the Salenide is to be
found in the elevated ridges which in both unite the middle
points of the plates; and the strongly developed vertical plates
of the Salenide scarcely present any “sculpture” which
does not recur in a similar form in the Crinoidea.

Now, since the central disk in the young Echinide and in
the Salenide is to be regarded as homologous with that of
Marsupites, the five plates which embrace it, and which here
are called vertical plates, but have hitherto borne the name of
genital plates, are zpso facto to be interpreted as basal pieces
(basalia), and the “eye-plates”’ in their reentrant angles as
radial pieces (radialia). A calyx is present in its essential
parts, homologous, by its position at the pole opposite to the
mouth, its constitution, and its structure, with that of the Cri-
noidea. But since the Echinoidea are free animals which
turn their mouth towards the surface whence it takes its food,
the calyx comes to be the vertex of the dermal skeleton instead
of its base. Itreceives the newly formed plates of the corona,
the basalia meeting the growing ends of the interradia, and
the radialia those of the ambulacra. In the HEchinide which
have their anal aperture where the peduncle of the Crinoidea
is attached, the calyx is normal and recognizable in its form ;
in the Clypeastride it is most frequently entirely penetrated
by the madreporite, which effaces the sutures of the pieces;
and in the nregular forms with an elongated antero-posterior
axis and a developed bivium (Hchinoneus, Cassidulide, and
Spatangide) it becomes entirely abnormal, and, in the Colly-
ritid, during the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods, was broken
up, so that the two radialia which meet the bivium were sepa-
rated from it by the perisome. But it is not absent from any
form of Echinoidea.

The investigations which are here communicated will, it is
hoped, speedily appear in a more detailed form, illustrated by
a selection from numerous figures carefully prepared by M.
A. M. Westergren.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. A young Toxopneustes drobachensis of 4 millims., spread out from
the peristome. I., II., IIJ., IV., V., ambulacra; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
interradia. In the middle the mouth with the teeth; around
this, in the buccal membrane, ten free pore-plates, two for each
ambulacrum, of which the five which lie before I. a, II. a, III. 4,
IV.a, V.6 are poe ently larger than the others. Peristomial
er I. a-V. 6 and [.b-V.a are united by straight lines; and

y this means two pentagons are inscribed in the circular stoma,
symmetrical only in relation to the diameteraa. The plates
of the vertex kept together, upon interradium 2 (where the madre-
porite has its place), with the central disk, d, c. The inner circle,

She

444 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

already enlarged and elongated in the direction of ambulacrum I.
by the absorption of the vertical plates 1 and 5 at their inner
margins; in the interspace small pieces of calcareous network
show themselves. The verticals are not yet perforated by the
genital pores. Of the eye-plates, I. has already pressed in be-
tween.1 and 5, and II. approaches the inner circle.

Figs. 2-8. Toxopneustes drobachensis. Ambulacrum III., to show its

changes during growth. 1, 2, 3, &c., primary plates and tenta-
cular pores; 1, 2, 3, &c., large plates; 1, 2,3, &c., spheeridia;
1, 2, 3, radiolar tubercles.

Fig. 2. Young of 3 millims. The tentacular pores still in nearly unaltered

Fig.

Fig.

Fg.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

3.

9.

10.

ra Lil's

. 13.

primordial curves. Two spheeridia.

Young of 6 millims. The tentacular pores already distinctly
arranged in secondary curves. Four spheridia, 1, 2, 3,4. The
peristomial plates depressed. The radiolar tubercle 1 in a1
much diminished.

. Young, somewhat larger. The peristomial plates more depressed ;

in a1 the two primary plates have coalesced. Spheeridium 1
has disappeared, and 5 has been added. JRadiolar tubercle 1 in
a very small, that in 6 diminished.

. Young, somewhat larger still. In a, large plates 1 and 2 have

coalesced to form a binary peristomial pate ; in db the sutures of
the primary plates have disappeared. Radiolar tubercle lina 1
lost, in 61 diminished.

. Young of 11 millims. diameter. In this, as in the following,

large plate 3 in a has only three primary plates. Large plates
1 and 2 coalesced into a binary plate, also in 6. Radiolar tu-
bercle 1 has disappeared both in a and 6.

. Young individual of 15 millims. The binary large plates 142

in both rows depressed. Spheeridium 2 has disappeared, and
6 and 7 have been added. KRadiolar tubercle 2 diminished.

. Adult individual, of 52 millims. diameter. Large plates 1, 2, and

3 in both rows have coalesced to form ternary peristomial plates.
One spheridium, 8, added. In 6 there is still, apparently, a
residue of radiolar tubercle 1.

Stoma of a very young Toxopneustes drébachensis of 2 millims.
diameter. Of the free plates in the buccal membrane those
which belong to I.a, I. a, II. 6, IV. a, V. 6, have not yet ac-
quired pores. One spheeridium in each ambulacrum in I. 6-V. a.
Young of some northern Echinide, 0°6 millim. in diameter, from
the ventral side. The pigment-spots are omitted, and the
radioli only partially represented. No remains of the larva; no
trace of jaws; no mouth or anus. Five large primordial tenta-
cles, which, according to Krohn, soon disappear. Within these
five pairs of smaller permanent tentacles, each of which stands
over a disk of calcareous network, the first primary plates in
the ambulacra. Outside of and between the pairs of these there
are other disks, probably the foundations of the interradia.: From
an individual preserved in spirit.

One of the large primordial tentacles with its disk, and in the
latter a ring of calcareous net. In the wall of the tube longitu-
dinal and transverse muscular fibres.

. One of the smaller permanent tentacles in the young animal,

fig. 10, with its disk and a portion of the calcareous net which
lies beneath its base.

The oblong, externally pointed opening in the calcareous network,
the pore, over which the tentacle stands.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Guémul. 445

LXIII.—On the Guémul (Huamela leucotis).
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.
Mr. Bares has kindly sent to the British Maseum the skins of
amale and of afemale Guémul, forwarded to the Geographical
Society by Don Henrique M. Simpson, who observes: —“ These
deer were encountered in a valley through the Cordilleras in
lat. 46° S. There is only one other specimen known in Chili,
in the Santiago Museum, which was found in lat. 35°.”

The skins sent are in winter fur, consisting of “ quills” like
those of the roebuck. They agree with the female animal
which the Earl of Derby sent to the Zoological Society in 1849,
and which was obtained by him from Valparaiso, from whence
it was brought by “Don Benjamin Munoz, a Commodore in the
Chilian navy; the animal was shot by one of the Chileno
officers about 20 leagues from Port Famine, in the Straits of
Magellan.” I described and figured this animal under the
name of Capreolus leucotis (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1849, p. 64, t. xil.).
The male now sent has very peculiar horns, showing that it is
different from any South-American deer hitherto existing in
European museums ; it is also characterized by the length and
acuteness of its face. The horns are nearly erect, and some-
what like the horns of the fawn of Cervus elaphus, with a
conical subbasal anterior branch. The beam is about the length
of the head, quite simple, and tapering to a point; the front
of the right horn is keeled, and rather below the middle there
is a compressed tubercle, probably indicating a branch in the
adult state; but there is no appearance of this on the other
horn. It forms a genus distinct from any other, which may
bear the name of Huamela leucotis; it differs from all the
other Guazus in having a nearly basal frontal snag to the
horns.

The Guémul or Huamel (Zquus bisulcus of Molina, ‘ Hist.
Nat. de Chili,’ p. 303) has been a great puzzle to zoologists,
and has been very imperfecrly described by Molina, who ob-
serves that it is ‘ the unknown animal found by Captain Wallis
in the Straits of Magellan (Hawkesworth, Voy. tom. i. cap. 2,

. 28).”
: The rediscovery of the Guémul in its original country is of
considerable importance, as there has been great confusion about
it. It is quite distinct from and at least one third larger than
the Xenelaphus leucotis brought from Tinta in South Peru, by
Mr. Whitely, Jun., of which we have fine specimens in the
British Museum, and which I formerly thought might be the
Guémul ; it must now be called Xenelaphus anomalocera. The
specimens of the latter animal are covered with paler and thinner
quills; but this appears to be the summer coat, and in the

446 C. Ritsema on Crinodes Sommeri

adult male there are patches of a darker colour and of thicker
quills, indicating the coming of the winter coat.

This species differs from the Guémul in having, at least in
summer, pale haunches and whitish legs. We have in the
British Museum the imperfect skin in winter fur of a female,
which Admiral Thornby, the brother-in-law of the Earl of
Derby, brought from the coast of Chili in 1849. I have
hitherto considered it a specimen of the Guémul; but it has
much more whitish on the rump and abdomen. It may be the
winter coat of Xenelaphus anomalocera, or a third species of
South-American deer.

The South-American deer called Guazus are blastocerus
paludosus from Brazil and Paraguay, Furcifer antisiensis and
Xenelaphus anomalocera (X. leucotis, Gray, Cat. Ruminant
Mammalia, p. 89) from the Bolivian or Peruvian Alps, Blasto-
cerus campestris and Huamela leucotis from Patagonia.

LXIV.—On Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda, in
answer to Mr. Butler’s Remarks. By C. Ritsema.

Iy the ‘ Annals’ of last October Mr. Butler rejects my opinion
concerning the synonymy of the above-named moths.

It is, however, clear that the author, when he drew up the
description of Mr. Cornthwaite’s insect, was totally unac-
quainted with Hiibner’s Crino Sommeri, and that it was only
after he saw my synonymic note that he compared the new (?)
moth with Hiibner’s figures, and endeavoured to find some
differences which might justify him in retaining his names.
Why otherwise did he not mention this very similar moth, or
indicate the supposed generic and specific differences when
describing the new one?

In the following lines I will refute the arguments used.

Mr. Butler considers Crino Bescket the type of the genus
Crino, because this species is figured before C. Sommert.
But, if we pay attention to the characters ascribed by Hiibner
(‘ Verzeichniss bekannter Schmetterlinge,’ p. 216) to this genus
(““Schwingen blass-sehnig, dunkelstriemig, mit gliinzend
weissen Flecken geziert”’), we shall see that this lepidopterist
really had in view the species called by him OC. Sommert, and
that this description, without any modification, applies to
Butler’s Tarsolepis remicauda. With respect to C. Beseked it
is clear that Hiibner was not attached to the so-called type-
system, and consequently we have nothing to do here with the
last-named species. There is no doubt that Tarsolepis remi-
cauda ought to be transferred into the genus Crino, Hiibner,
= Crinodes, Herrich-Schiiffer.

and Tarsolepis remicauda. 447

Whilst Mr. Butler believes that Hiibner’s figure is really a
representation of a male insect, as possessing a well-developed
anal tuft of radiating scales (this character, however, occurs
also in the Javan females, and is therefore without value), I
rather believe it to be a female, on account of the feebly pec-
tinated antenne. The anal tuft, as covering entirely the
sexual organs, may have been the cause of Hiibner’s mistake ;
in such cases only the examination of the retinaculum will
furnish certainty concerning the sex of the moth.

The want of the two long tufts of carmine hairs at the base
of the abdomen most probably must be ascribed to the sex,
such tufts being almost confined (at this moment I do not re-
collect an example of the contrary) to the male insect; they
are often totally hidden, as probably is the case with the male
in Mr. Snellen’s collection.

As regards the length of the palpi, I notice that the females

I examined agree in this respect with Hiibner’s figures, and
that Mr. Snellen’s specimen (¢) holds the middle between
Hiibner’s and Butler’s.
_ No importance can be attached to the size of the abdomen
and to its spinous processes as figured by Hiibner, the former
depending chiefly upon the sex and the state of desiccation,
the latter, formed by some diverging long scales on the sides
of the abdomen, occurring also in Mr. Snellen’s male. More-
over it is incomprehensible to me how Mr. Butler can regard
these processes as a generic difference, although nothing of
the kind is to be seen in the representation of Crino Bescker,
the species which, according to Butler, should be the type of
the genus Crino.

The specific differences summed up by Butler must certainly
be ascribed to a great extent to inaccuracies of the artist. In
order to prove this it may be sufficient to notice the inner
margin of the front wings in both Hiibner’s figures, which is
waved only in fig. 1, and also the hind wings of the same
figure, which are unlike one another. Moreover Hiibner’s
figures are coloured too dark, and have almost all the markings
(the pale basal patches excepted) defined too sharply, instead
of the underside of the wings only, as Mr. Butler states; as
for the latter, this author inclines to the contrary.

In the specimens I examined, the pale costal band does not
quite-extend to the apex and is broader than in Butler’s figure,
especially at the base of the wings; the central marginal line
of the hind wings is continued round the margin, but, at the
upper and underside, converted into spots as in Hitbner’s
fig. 2; the transverse band of the front wings is strongly
waved and not nearly parallel to the outer margin, whilst the
fringe of all the wings is tolerably long.

448 On the Habits and Distribution of Lycosa ingens.

For these reasons I persist in my assertion that Butler’s
Tarsolepis remicauda is identical, generically as well as spe-
cifically, with Hiibner’s Crinodes Sommert.

After all, I may remark that it is not ¢mpossible that C.
Sommert occurs also in the New World*, although I rather
believe it to be a mistake—just as seems to be the case with
Hemeroblemma peropaca, which, according to Hiibner (‘ Zutriige
zur Sammlung exotischer Schmetterlinge,’ No. 271, figs. 541
& 542), is from Monte Video, but has since been sent over
from Sumatra, Java, Ternate (coll. Royal Mus. Leyden), and
Celebes (Mr. Snellen’s coll.), and also, with Ophiusa magica,
received by Dr. Boisduval from Madagascar and Bengal
(‘ Faune Entomologique de Madagascar, Bourbon et Maurice,’
Lepidoptéres, p..100), and by the Royal Museum of Leyden
from Java, and ‘not from Monte Video as stated by Hiibner
(Zutrige &c., No. 268, figs. 535 & 536).

Leyden, Novehuiisk 1872

LXV.—On the Habits and Distribution of re aoe (Bi.).
By the Rev. O. P. Campripcs, M.A., C.M.Z.S.

Accounts of the habits of spiders must nee be interesting
to arachnologists, and especially important to those who may
themselves be unable to see their objects of study in a living
state. ‘The question, therefore, now raised (not for the first
time) by Mr. F’. Pollock’s account (Ann. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1872,
p: 271) of the habits of Lycosa ingens (Bl.) is one on which,
as an arachnologist, I should wish to have some clearer and
more detailed evidence. I allude to the possibility of a spider
swallowing solid matter; in the instance recorded by Mr.
Pollock the solid matter consisted of the ‘‘ bones, and head, and
claws and all” of a lizard 3 inches long, ‘the only remnant
of the feast being a small ball about { of an inch in diameter.”
My own impression has always been that no arachnid could
do more than swallow the juices of its prey, or at most such
other parts as could be so completely comminuted by the action
of the fangs, falces, and maxille as to be enabled to pass in a
kind of semifluid state through the simple but very small
passage to the stomach. Did Mr. Pollock’s spider thus com-
minute the ‘bones, head and all” of the lizard, except that
small portion represented by the ball of a quarter of an inch in

* T am informed (October 14th, 1872) by Mr. Walker that at present
he has no opportunity of inspecting the specimen from Rio Janeiro,
mentioned in the ‘ List of the Specimens of Lepidopterous Insects in the
Collection of the British Museum’ (/. c.), because it is no longer in Mr.
Fry’s collection.

t Vide ‘Entomologist’ for June 1870, No. 77, pp. 65-67.

On a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons. 449

diameter? This is a point which it would be both important
and interesting to have confirmed by more detailed and special
observation.

Lycosa ingens must indeed have great power ; it is the largest
known spider of the Tarantula group; an adult female in my
own collection (from Porto Santo) measures 13 inch in length,
exclusive of the legs and palpi; the male, however, is much
smaller. If Mr. Pollock’s example was an adult female, the
length of its body and that of the body of the lizard (ex-
clusive of the tail) would be about equal, so that the easy and
speedy demolition of the lizard need not excite surprise.

Another observation of Mr. Pollock, and one upon which he
grounds a strong and (if sound) an interesting generalization,
is that each of the three islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and
Deserta Grande has its “own peculiar large Lycosa, no two
being alike; and (Mr. Pollock continues) it is a very remarkable
fact that these Lycose vary in size inversely with the magni-
tude of the island in which they are found,—Madeira, the
largest island, having the smallest Lycosa, and Deserta Grande,
the smallest island, having by far the largest spider.” It
would be important to know what were the range and extent
of the observations upon which this is stated; the already
published facts respecting the localities frequented by Lycosa
éngens are certainly at variance with it. Mr. Blackwall states
(Ann. Nat. Hist., Sept. 1867) that he had received both sexes
of this species from all three of those islands; the same author
(Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xx. p. 284) also states that he had
received another almost equally large species, Lycosa tarantu-
loides maderiana (Walck.), from Porto Santo; and I have in
my collection examples of this same species from that island.
It would therefore surprise me very much to find that any
careful and at all extended search should confirm Mr. Pollock’s
conclusion that these three islands, so apparently derived from
a common origin and so near to each other, should be yet so
capricious in respect of the distribution of their Lycose,

Bloxworth, November 16, 1872.

LXVI.—WNotice of a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons.
By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER.

THE Trustees of the British Museum have recently purchased
a very large specimen of a Siluroid from the river Huallaga,
Upper Amazons; it had been captured by B. La Mert, Esq.,
who adopted the best method of preparing such large specimens,
by having it carefully skinned, the fins and head remaining
intact and attached to the skin, and then packing it in spirits

450 Mr. R. B. Sharpe on some new Species of Birds.

of wine, which had to be changed twice, in a cask of suit-
able size. The specimen arrived in very good condition,
and is now stuffed and mounted.

It belongs to a species apparently allied to Platystoma trun-
catum, but differing in the width of the bands of teeth in the
upper jaw and palate; moreover it has the barbels much
shorter than any of the other known species. I propose to
name it

Platystoma gigas.

D. 1/6. A. 11. The upper jaw projects conspicuously
beyond the lower. The length of the head is contained thrice
and two thirds in the total length (without caudal). Head
covered with skin; maxillary barbels much shorter than the
head, mandibulary barbels still shorter. The intermaxillary
band of teeth is rather broader than the vomerine portion of
the band on the palate, which has acrescentic form ; the inter-
maxillary and palatine bands are separated from each other by
avery narrow interspace. The dorsal fin commences midway
between the end of the snout and the origin of the adipose fin,
and its first ray is rather feeble ; the length of the adipose fin
equals that of the anal. Caudal deeply forked. Colour of a
uniform greyish brown, darker above than below.

ft. in.
Vota lemmeeh ss bide eigce (castes epee oe a 0
engtnr or MeBAi cin hh cue sie tiete <1 eins Bint
», snout (from the eye) ........ 0 8
Distance between the eyes ...........- 0 53

LXVII.—Description of some new Species of Birds in the
National Collection. By RK. BowpDLER SuHarpe, F.L.8.,
¥.Z.8., &c., Senior Assistant, Zoological Department,
British Museum.

Family Paride.
Subfamily Srrrivz.
Sitta tephronota, n. sp.

S. similis 8. Newmayeri, sed rostro longiore, coloribus conspicue pal-
lidioribus, et linea nigra per oculum ducta usque ad interscapulium
extensa distinguenda.

The large Nuthatch from Central Asia appears to me to be
worthy of specific separation from the typical S. Newmayert
of Europe (S. syriaca, Ehr.). In the ‘ Birds of Europe,’ Mr.
Dresser and myself examined a bird from Kokand, which
differed extraordinarily in size from the typical Grecian and

Mr. R. B. Sharpe on some new Species of Birds. 451

Palestine specimens. I do not think, however, that the species
will rest so much on the larger dimensions, as they seem to
be very variable, as upon the clear pale grey coloration and
the pronounced elongation of the black eye-stripe. Two spe-
cimens from Candahar in the National Collection appear to
belong to the eastern form. The comparative measurement of
the Kokand example with another of the true S. Newmayert
gave me the following results :—

Long. tot. culm. ale. caudee. tarsi.
S. Neumayert ........ 56 0:75 2:9 1:85 0-9
S. tephronota ........ 6:0 1:0 35 2°1 1:05

Family Muscicapide.
Diaphorophyia Blissetti, n. sp.

D. supra saturate cinereus, vix viridi lavatus: tectricibus alarum remi-
gibusque nigricantibus, extus viridi-cinereo marginatis: cauda
supra metallice viridi, subtus nigricante: genis et regione parotica
lete castaneis, plagam conspicuam triquetram formantibus: gula
sordide at metallice viridi: corpore reliquo subtus pure albo, late-
ribus fuscescentibus nigro striolate lavatis: caruncula conspicua
orbitali erecta scarlatina; rostro nigro: pedibus saturate brunneis.

Hab. Gold Coast. Presented by Andrew Swanzy, Esq.

Of this beautiful little Flycatcher I have another specimen, in
my own collection of African birds, which is apparently the
adult male; it differs from the one above described in having
a dark metallic green back. ‘This bird was sent to me by m
friend Mr. H. F. Blissett, who procured it on the Gold Coast,
in the province of Wassaw; and I have great pleasure in
oftermg him a public acknowledgment for the aid he has
rendered me by collecting birds in Western Africa.

Family Timaliide.
Trichastoma rufipennis, n. sp.

T. similis 7. fulvescenti (Cass.), sed multo minor, et pileo brunneo,
dorso rufescente lavato, remigibus extus sordide castaneis dis-
tinguenda. Long. tota 5:3 poll. Angl., culm. 0°55, ale 2:45,
caudee 2°3, tarsi 1:0.

Hab, Gaboon. Collected by Mr. Paul Du Chaillu.

There can be no doubt, as Lord Walden some time ago
pointed out to me, that the genera L//ladopsis of Heine and
Trichastoma of Blyth are identical; and the other African
species are Trichastoma fulvescens (Cass.) and T. gularis
(Sharpe). ‘The present species is distinguished from both these
last-named birds by its small size and red wings.

452 Mr. J. Gould on new Species of Humming-birds.

LXVILI.—Descriptions of three new ts of mek
By Joun Gout, F.R.S. &

Lolema Whitelyana. (Whitely’s ai Seaeien

Male. Crown, all the upper surface, and flanks deep grass-
green; an obscure glittermg mark on the forehead; chin,
chest, and centre of the abdomen jet-black, with a broad gorget
of beautiful violet on the throat; the bill, which is stout and
straight, is black, as are also the legs and toes; the tail and
the under tail-coverts steel-black ; primaries and secondaries
purplish brown, the external edge of the outer primary reddish
brown.

Total length 53 inches; bill 14, wing 3, tail 24.

Hab. Cosnipata, province of Cusco, in the Peruvian Andes.

Remark. About the size of Lolema Schretberstit and I. fron-
talis, but distinguished from both those species by its black
chest.

Ihave great pleasure in naming this fine humming-bird
after Mr. Henry Whitely, who is at this moment energetically
searching for novelties pertaining to this beautiful family of
birds in the more remote provinces of Peru. The specimen
above described was obtained in August 1871 at Cosnipata,
at an elevation of 2300 feet.

Adelomyia chlorospila.

Male. Crown and upper surface bronzy green, the feathers
of the crown and upper tail-coverts greener than those of the
back ; over and behind the eye and curving downwards on the
sides of the neck a somewhat conspicuous streak of buffy white ;
ear-coverts blackish brown; throat, chest, and centre of the
abdomen buffy white, the feathers of the throat punctated with
glittering green ; flanks bronzy buff; under tail-coverts the
same, but lighter ; tail bronzy brown, all the feathers con-
spicuously tipped with fawn- -colour ; bill blackish brown, in-
clining to yellow beneath; legs and toes brown, the soles of
the latter inclining to yellow ; wines purplish brown.

Total length a inches ; bill 4 L, wing 254, tail 13.

Hab. San Antonio, in the Peruvian Andes.

Remark. The female of this species was, I believe, brought
home by M. Warszewicz; but we are indebted to Mr. Henry
Whitely for the discovery of the male. Its nearest ally is the
Adelomyia tnornata; but it has a longer bill than that bird,
and, moreover, has the throat punetated with green instead of
being of a bright blue. Mr. Whitely’s specimen was collected
at San Antonio in July 1871, at an elevation of 3600 feet.

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 453

Adelomyia cervina.

Crown and all the upper surface bronzy green; over and
behind the eye and curving down the sides of the neck a con-
spicuous mark of buffy white; ear-coverts blackish brown ;
throat, sides of the neck, and centre of the abdomen delicate
fawn-colour, with very minute speckles of brown on the former ;
flanks bronzy russet, with reflections of golden yellow-brown ;
under tail-coverts hoary buff; wings purplish brown ; tail very
dark olive, glossed with green; all the feathers tipped with
buff, but less so on the two centre ones; bill black on the
upper mandible, the lower one lighter and inclined to flesh-
colour at the base.

Total length 4 inches; bill 2, wing 23, tail 12.

Remark. This new species was discovered near Medellin in
Columbia by Mr. Salmon, whose exploration of the country
westward of the Magdalena has just commenced.

LXIX.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.
K. Parxer, F.R.S., F.Z.8., and Prof. T. RuPERT JONES,
fo. EGS.

Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg (continued).
[Continued from p. 271. ]

APPENDIX II.

To enable the student to utilize the foregoing collocations of
the species and notable varieties of Foraminifera figured and
described by Dr. Ehrenberg and other rhizopodists, it is
necessary to append a classified list of the adopted names,
with references to the localities and materials. treated of in the
‘ Mikrogeologie’ and the Berlin Academy ‘ Transactions.’

In the followimg List, therefore, we have arranged the
genera treated of in their order, and have appended to the
species numbers corresponding with those divisions of the
foregoing memoir which contain references to or descriptions
of them. Thus:—I. From AMgina (1), Greece. IL. From
Zante. ILI. From Aigina (2). IV. From Oran, Africa. V.
From Caltanisetta, Sicily. VI. From Gyzeh and Mokattam,
Egypt. VII. From Thebes, Egypt. VIII. From Antili-
banon, A. IX. From Antilibanon,B. X. From Haman Fe-
raun, Arabia. XI. From Cattolica, Sicily. XII. From
Meudon, France. XIII. From Gravesend, England. XIV.
From the Island of Méen, Denmark. XV. From the Island

454 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

of Riigen, Baltic. XVI. From Volsk, Russia. XVII. From
the Upper Missouri, North America. XVIII. From the
Upper Mississippi, North America.

- Nos. 19-28 (included in Section XX.) are miscellaneous
fossil Foraminifera figured by Ehrenberg ; thus :—19, from the
Chalk of Alabama; 20, the Pliner-Kalk of Teplitz, Bohemia ;
21, Nummulitic Limestone of France ; 22, Nummulitic Lime-
stone of Traunstein, Bavaria; 23, Orbitoidal Limestone of
Java; 24, Zeuglodon-beds, Alabama; 25, Polycystina-beds,
Barbadoes; 26, Jurassic Limestone, Baden; 27, Coral-rag,
Cracow ; 28, Carboniferous Limestone, Russia.

By the use of this List the student will see at a glance
which are the more abundant and persistent of the species
under notice; and he will also be enabled to find the synonyms,
sometimes numerous, which several of them have received in
the ‘ Mikrogeologie,’ ‘ Abhandlungen,’ and ‘ Berichte,’ during
the long course of Dr. Elrenberg’s researches.

Classified List of the Foraminifera figured by Dr. Ehrenberg.

References to Sections (1. to xvlI.)
in the foregoing Memoir, and

: to subsections in Section xx.
J. IMPERFORATA (19-38),
1 Maliola eeihve2..555 Spsindetensve.ssch ees costae soa Ill.
(Spiroloculina) ... sp. indet................000 eons rie
)yeneuvedecsseces planulata (Lam.) ............ I.
==) srosonpconoocee (stoloniferous)) .:...-css-++--- 23.
(Quinqueloculina) sp. indet.............:sccsceesees VII., XI., 227
(Triloculina) ...... Sp. INdehar.secesstastceseeseso es 23.
2. Alveolina .......... pom S Ps WNCCbesaeeecearscnossesccees: 22?, 23.

II. ARENACEA.
3. Lituola (Haplo-

phragmium)...... SPPwideba: senna awere ee tate site 22, 24.
4. Endothyra ......... spheeroidea (EAr.) ...cec.s.eee 26.
Bngigqual (LWT) wesccenacesseee 28.
5. Valvulina (Tetra-
TEAS) plas ctleeeeese palzotrochus (Hhr.) ......... 28.

III. PERFORATA.

Grelarengy. «secsess ones globosa (Montagi)............ Vile Wie, ales Soa
(entosolenian) ......... 20.
Sulcatial (Vs Gude) meeesascc ee xe
costata, Williamson ......... VII., XVIII.
Clawata, OP B.watethosss. see XVIII.
stiligera (Ehr.) seo.........000 XVI.
apiculata, BSS. .1.........200 XIV.
elongata (Ehr.) ..........e00e- VIIL., XI.
CMACIAIA, LSS. ssesacees ve s0+sce VII., XVI., XVIII.

7. Glandulina ......... levigata, D’Orb.........4 vacew Mie Ov MLE

455

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.
References.
8. Nodosaria ......... filiformis, D’ Orb. ....ecceoces I.) III., VIII.
glabra, D’ Orb. aUecatesaue XVII., XVIII.
CUR I eeeeseseceas Sade saees XVII.
ovicula, D Orb. Secor sass ve NVIKs, VELMe, 1X5 XTEs, KEN,
) XIV., XV., XVI., XVIII.
pyrula, D’ Orb. ......000..-00 VIL, 21.
gracilis, D’ Ord, ...... Papeectiog Bele
subulata; 23S), cdesursss..cdcces XIV
subnodosa, 2258) \c..0csessc0e VIII.
hispida, D' Orb. ..........00-+) XIVs
PINdOReHAGi eb adaccsmeemcees ac 28.
sp. indet .........0. Spec oneagson 24, 27.
9) Dentalana:.c.. .:.s.04- Boueana, D’ Orb. ........+. ore SQV
10. Vaginulina ......... laevigata, Rem. .........000 VII., XI., XIII.
leguminiformis (Batsch) .. VIL., XVIII.
longa, Cornuel .......006 onoos 2st,
AGUA LTS ae neacvecsescaapdecee XIV.
subulatay Liitivescsscecsecsenses 21.
marginata, D’ Orb. ....... coose XVI
SPsINCetoncwceseseeaessmcekeense 24.
11. Marginulina ...... OHISIN; E59. ewan ccanasntoaenasr XIV.
12. Planularia ...... geenitene lla wLAiagrcncasee doesent: XIV.
crepidula (F. & M.) ......+.- XVIII.
13. Cristeilaria ......... TGARICAN (DE{7")\V.teecceercncseniee VII.
rotulata (Lam.) .........0.+0+ IIl., XI., XV., XVIII.
cultrata (Montf.) .....-00++- THs Ves VIX Te SNOT KLIN
XV.,. XVIII.
BPs INGeb.... caccuetodeeewackanse xvii ?, 27.
14. Polymorphina...... lactea (W. § J.)...csscseeeeee XVI.
compressa, D’ Orb. ..... eooeees VIL, VIIL., XVIII,
problema, D’ Orb. ......s000 xI,
tuberculata, D’Orb. ......... XIV.
Mhouint, ViOrGaeccasesesceenee X0e, XUN KITS
SP MMe te tetecn snes aeevoeaawens 20?, 24?
15. Bulimina......... Ee eeacileatanD) Orb Aasacsnccnaces a Tk :
16. Bolivina ......... .» punctata, D’ Orb. ....c0.c0e0ee Tuy UL, IV., VI., VII. VIIL.,
Ki, XL XLV eve
Gilatata, RSs. vic... orelaa: TINes LV ey) VEC AVMs XLV eg Ves
XVI., XVIII.
americana (Hhr.) .......0.02- XVIII.
panty (U2)! poncdedoesetodnoar IIL,
Reussil (Gei.) ..secesseeeoeee Xv.
INGPASSALAS He SSausaciesceccnecees XV.
guilcatay (H/T) \acndetes conscesoes Il.
costulata (Hhr.) ............06- VIII.
aculeata (Lh7.) ....s..00« seoes XLV s
17. Virgulina..........6 squamosa, D’Orb. ...cce.ssoee Vil.,, XIf:,. XIVs, 0 Xie), XVI,
XVIII.
— tegulata, Rss....... Focce 2a
asparagus (Hhr.) ...... XII, XIV.
—— Schreibersii, Czjz....... 1.?, I11., V., VII. XI., XII,
SHG, 36, 20h 2aRler
XVIII.

Hemprichii (Zvr.)...... ease

—— gemma (Ehr.) w..1..00-
—— nucleus (Hhr.) ...... ze
—— calcipara (Ehr.) ...4
—— tessera (Ehr.)

eoecereee

TVs Vien AVilss WIMKs (5) Kiley
XII. ?, XIV., XV. XVI. ?,
XVIII.

XV.
XVIII.

Saweeernceas

18. Bifarina
LOM Mextilaria cessceccnes

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.

References.
Hemprichiiamericana(Hhr.) Xvuit.
—— stiligera (Hhr.) ......... XI.

paradoxa (Hhr.) ...... XI.
saxipara. (Hhr.) -.2...s-.00+0 .. XVIII.

globulosa, Hhi. ....00..-s00
Mibbosay LOND: hese. scecmr

agelutinans, D’Orb. .........
BABILCHIA, D2/%, > Sb eaecocceeses

jqnabaplly JES Soonecncaqoudsceue
subangulata, D’ Ord. .........
striata, Ehr.

Sewer necee Soeveee

SePAVE-y VILe nV Tes XoXo es eX TTA

XIV., XV., XVI., XVIII., 19,
20, 22.

Tes Le, Vis5) Villes Ves exe OT
XII., XIII., XIV., XV., XVI.,
XVII., XVIII.

Vi, Vile) VI, XT tT
XVI., Xvii1., 19, 24.

Wilt, WEIN. Xe eXT, ex Key
xvi., 21, 24.

XIV.

MII, XLVeg) RVET eV

us XIV., XV., XVII., XVIII.

striato-punctata, Hager ...... XVII.
missouriensis, Hhr. ....... pee antl
americana, Hhr. .........0 SH PEREXSV IES
ANILO ALA, HHIe ie ceeeteceecet 23.
bUrSsi vera Minter e.erersee bon een
daleata, LAP: cose naseaeee 28.
DIET el 01 pan sale anceace eb cue 28.
IS) ons (el papage ore cesacossscoooce wie
D0 ss piroplectalsescccen COSA: Mr ecseecesocerccses XVIII.
americana, LAr. ......0c.eccess XVII, xvur., 19.
sp.-indet........ Rees Seems
21. Vulvulina............. pennatula (Batsch)............ XIII.
apiculatay (He) ecscescsesessest XL
22. Bigenerina ......... digitata, Orb. Siccdetesseness XVIII.
acanthopora (Ehr.) ......... XVI.
javanica (Zhr.) ......c..se000 23.
23. Heterostomella ... tumens (Hhr.) ..........0006 XVI., XVIII.
aculeata ((22A7.) o..ts-scseeces KIl., XIU, -XV., XVI-
24. Verneuilina......... pygmea (Hager) ....2.-..008 XII., XIV., XViII., 19, 22.
Bpinulosa, WSS.) ..ceacsove cece XII.
25s Orbuling) ....0..cere- universa, D’ Orb. ...... Seatene XV., XVI.
26. Globigerina ......... cretacea, DiOrbMes.cseenesa ves VII., VIII., XII., XIII, XIV.,
KVsy KiVIey MVIIL Oe
bulloides, D’ Orb. ............ Me,) WML; 5)| DVe5) Wag) Wiley Vis Xs
hirsuta Orbe eaoseeee teen XVII.
(so 1018 (2) pre gasopncbanocecoucce tee, Dane
27. Spheroidina ...... bulloides, D'Ord. ........ conn, 20
28. Planorbulina ...... Haidingerii (D’Ord.)......... E., III., V., VII.) VIIIe XI., XV.,
XVI.
denticulata (Hhr.) ......... etg, WE
ammonoides (fss.) ........ EV 5) Vin CouaVEsgu Vilas Xe Eas
Glin, AA Sone OA
xvult., 25.
globulosa (Zhr.)...........0008 Tey Hs Wks VAs Vadis esr C-
XIL, XIV., XV., XVII.
farctay (Gere eiVe\ eres cs oy eccese) Ves) Ville nViles XT
Vu Cars O7- Deter ses case VII., VIII, Ix., 24.
Sp indotncweceeaseeeeree tess cee 19, 25.
29. Planulina........,.... ariminensis, D’Orb. ...... seorebed UMEePaiVles WiINe sVINTeo Ties
XIV., XVI., XVIII.
BP. INdota.2 slecwdrey-vecwes ds. ees I1.?

Bibliographical Notices. 457

References.
30. Pulvmulina......... repanda { spatiosa (Hhr.) ... Iv., XIV.
type |squama (Ehr.) ... xv.
i Menardii (D’ Orb.)... Xt.
'S » | Pharaonum (Fhr.)... v1.
8 & 4 truncatulinoides
S 2 IDO RUS © aecoecece XII.
Micheliniana(D’ Orb.) x11., XIIL, Xv.
mini eg Karsteni( ss.) vit.
elegans { *legans (D’ Orb.)... x1v.?
ie Orbignyi (em.) x1v.?
YP© | caracolla (Rem.) xvi.
Gills Sh yaalfoie>) aqganeeoedee ERIGUetba, LATS eaesseccseseces XIv.
32. Rotalia.....:.s.cc0.. Becearit (Lin \e-anaacosee sete 24.
ammoniformis (Lam.) ...... VI.
orbicularis, D’ Orb............. III.
oo.) Nonionina 5...-.... Scaplai (Hi Gj 1M:)) .ic.c-n.cos VI.
Sp indetaccssecsesscooteceaeans 11. ?
34. Polystomella ...... craticulata (Ff. f& M.)......... 23.
Bp Ainidetsitnteccdes sceeeccves 22, 24.
85. Orbitoides ......... javanicus, Hhr. ......sece.s0e 20+
Mantelli? (Morton) ......... 23.
36. Operculina ......... complanata (Def7.)..........+ VI.
SMIMOnIS (HAL) 2.01.0 .s008 22.
turgida (Hii.)) te2.ccste.cs5.e XVI.
Sprindebsccasscn.ateosesees fea 2,23.
37. Nummulina......... gyzehensis (Forsk.) ......... VI.
curvispira, Meneg. .....0...... VI.
Guettardi, D'A.g H. ...... VI.
Miarchisont..2.2es.esse. coca: 22.
Duiren ovine sa acee ee sseeee 22.
StriataseiOrUm ey caseceeseen: 21.
planulata (Zam.) .........04. 21.
38. Amphistegina ...... TENE MN a eeedodoecnanwed 23.
Bpeindetaaepe-vacessecestasents 22.
39. Fusulina ............ cylindrica, Fischer ........,... 28.
constricta (Zhr.)....6..+2.000+ 28.
palzosphera (EHhr.) ......... 28.
spheroidea (Hhr.) ............ 28.
labyrinthiformis (hr.)...... 28.
paleophacus (HAr.) ......... 28.
paleophus (Hhr.) .........3:. 28.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
New Ornithological Works.

Tue first in importance of the works we here propose to notice is
Andersson’s ‘ Birds of Damara Land,’ edited by Mr. J. H Gurney *.
For nearly seventeen years Mr. Andersson collected materials for

* “Notes on the Birds of Damara Land and the adjacent countries of
South-west Africa.’ By the late Charles John Andersson, author of
‘ Lake Ngami’ and of ‘The Okavango River.’ Arranged and edited by
John Henry Gurney, with some additional notes by the Editor, and an
introductory chapter containing a sketch of the Author’s life,abridged from
the original published in Sweden. London: 1872. 8vo, pp. 394, with a
map and 3 plates. (Van Voorst.)

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 32

458 _— Bibliographical Notices.

a work on the bird-fauna of South-western Africa, when death
prevented him from accomplishing his task, the arrangement of
which had already been commenced. Most fortunately for ornitho-
logical science he left behind him copious notes, which, with numerous
prepared skins, made it possible for another to take up the work
where he left it off and carry it to a successful conclusion. Yet Mr.
Gurney’s task in editing and arranging Andersson’s notes has been
no light one; and no small amount of original work has he performed
in determining the species, and in making intricate points of synonymy
intelligible to the student of ornithology.

Andersson’s own notes describe the habits of each species, and
give the places where they were found. For descriptions the reader
is referred to Layard’s ‘ Birds of South Africa,’ and in many cases to
Finsch and Hartlaub’s ‘ Vogel Ost-Afrika’s.’

In the nomenclature adopted by Mr. Gurney he has, we think,
pushed the use of generic subdivisions to an extent that future
researches will not warrant. He makes use of most of the terms
given in Gray’s ‘ Hand-list’ in a subgeneric sense as indicating
genera. It will be some time yet before ornithologists come to any
agreement on the moot point of the value of generic names ; for very
much hasty work has to be carefully examined before many a genus
can fairly be accepted or rejected as such. Yet we hardly think that
the genera proposed, frequently in the most off-hand informal manner,
by Bonaparte, or in such works as those of Reichenbach, are entitled
to the respect here accorded them.

As a contribution to the knowledge of the geographical distribu-
tion of birds this work is invaluable, and makes a sensible addition
to our information on African birds, now fast becoming complete,
from Cape Colony northwards to the limits of Andersson’s researches.
With Cape Colony itself, Mr. E. L. Layard’s useful little volume has
made us familiar; while on the east coast in Port Natal and the
Trans-Vaal Republic another diligent explorer, Mr. Ayres, with
whom Mr. Gurney has cooperated, has done excellent work. North-
ward of these points our knowledge is but fragmentary; while of
the ornithology of the districts the scenes of Livingstone’s recent
journeyings we, of course, know nothing as yet. In conclusion, we
must record our opinion that this volume is a real and substantial
addition to ornithological literature, and that we owe much to Mr.
Gurney for rescuing Andersson’s valuable notes from the danger in
which his death had placed them.

The ornithology of Egypt has long been a subject of interest, and
its birds have most of them been mentioned in various articles of
greater or less completeness scattered though the pages of ‘The
Tbis’ and elsewhere; so that, though Captain Shelley has done good
work in collecting these scattered materials*, more especially as he
has verified and observed for himself during several visits to the

* ‘A Handbook to the Birds of Egypt.’ By G. E. Shelley, F.G.S.,

F.Z.8., &e. London: 1872. Large 8vo, pp. 342, with 14 coloured plates.
(Van Voorst.)

Bibliographical Notices. 459

country, not much novelty was to be expected in retraversing well-
trodden ground.

Some short chapters at the commencement of the book give a
general idea of the mode of travelling in Egypt, and of the favourite
haunts of its birds. These serve as an introduction to the more
formal part, where each species of bird is individually treated of and
described.

The number of species mentioned is 352, which at first sight seems
a large total when the nature of the country is taken into consider-
ation, and seeing that no high mountain-chains are present to main-
tain a varied fauna. But Egypt is peculiarly situated, being the only
strip of fertile land, with deserts on either side, to form a connexion
between the Mediterranean and the equatorial regions of Africa, and
is hence a highway, as it were, for birds passing both north and
south. The number of birds, both of species and individuals, is
doubtless increased by this favourable circumstance.

The portion of Egypt treated of by Captain Shelley is confined
between the Mediterranean and the Second Cataract, and west and
east by the Libyan and Arabian deserts. A glance at the list of
birds found there shows that they chiefly belong to the fauna of
South-eastern Europe. Its connexion with Ethiopia proper and
with the East is only shown here and there by the presence of such
forms as Pycnonotus, Crateropus, Nectaruua, and Centropus. But
Egypt, though belonging to the European fauna, forms quite an out-
lying province of it; passing a little further south, we come to the
truly Ethiopian fauna of Abyssinia.

But to return to the book itself. Captain Shelley’s plan through-
out has been to give the Latin and English name of each species, a
short note of the places where it is found in Egypt, a brief descrip-
tion and a reference to some well-known illustrated work to assist
in the subsequent identification of each species. Where his own
observations have been extended or modified by others who have
preceded him over the same ground, he has given a reference to the
observation quoted. These chiefly refer to the works of Von Heuglin,
who has travelled in and written much on the ornithology of this
country and those adjoining it immediately to the southward.

With this plan we have not much fault to find; and we believe
that any one travelling in Egypt with Captain Shelley’s book, and a
smattering only of bird lore, will make fair way in determining the
birds he shoots ; but his task would have been instructively lightened
had a little assistance been rendered him towards determining the
genera and higher groups, which, as the work stands, are left for deter-
mination to any prior knowledge the traveller may possess. But we
are, in the case of genera, perhaps asking a little too much in a work
of this description; we regret, however, to see serious confusion in
the names of the families, and even orders, which we are at a loss to
account for, unless it be that pardonable oversights in the MS, have
not been detected by a careful revision of the proofs.

The plates in this work are very acceptable, and have been ex-
ecuted by Mr. Keulemans in the style which has rendered him so

32*

460 Bibliographical Nottces.

favourite an ornithological draughtsman. The subjects are judi-
ciously selected from characteristic or peculiar species.

Mr. Harting’s last contribution* brings us nearer home; and
though he offers a quasi apology for adding another to the already
extant works on British Birds, we think none was needed; and we
doubt not the present volume will be accepted as a useful addition
to the ornithological literature of the British Islands.

In the first portion Mr. Harting comes forward as a reformer of
nomenclature, and, to some extent, of arrangement, taking Yarrell’s
third edition as his starting-point. On both subjects he still leaves
room for justifiable improvement. As regards nomenclature, the
three rules he specifies as his guide by no means attempt to solve
several intricate questions—such, for instance, as the best generic
name available for the Nightingale. He uses Luscinia; but we
think Daulias of Boie, on the whole, far preferable. Then, too, why
should Linneeus’s name in connexion with the Stilt entirely disappear ?
There are other cases we might mention. Mr. Harting states that
he has avoided the use of subgeneric names; yet he does not hesitate
to place the Titlarks under a family name, Anthida, as distinct from
the Wagtails, Motacillidw, and to banish the Rock from the true
Thrushes under the name Petrocinclide. We are at a loss to know,
and Mr. Harting makes no attempt to show us, how the adoption of
these family names can be justified by the production of definite
characters of sufficient value to show their distinctness.

The alterations in arrangement are so far advantageous; but a
little more might have been done in this direction without doing much
violence to the feelings of British ornithologists. We point especially
to the retention of the Hirundinide in juxtaposition with the Swifts.
Those whose studies are bestowed on exotic species are considerably
in advance of their fellow students whose attention is confined to the
birds of these islands in such matters; and with them there are
questions of affinities which have passed out of the region of doubt
which are clung to by our home naturalists with, we might say,
almost obstinate tenacity. What is required of our workers at home
is a more independent spirit, a thorough investigation of bird-strue-
ture, and, what has never been the case, a keener appreciation of the
work that is going on around them, much of which affects the special
sphere to which they may confine their attention.

The second portion of Mr. Harting’s work has the merit of greater
completeness; and in gathering together all the records of the ap-
pearance of occasional visitants to our shores, he has provided
workers over the same ground with a ready index to facilitate their
labours. The records thus gathered show a goodly list of instances
where members of the same species have over and over again wan-

* ‘A Handbook of British Birds, showing the Distribution of the Resi-
dent and Migratory Species in the British Islands, with an Index to the
records of the Rarer Visitants.’ By J. E. Harting, F.L.S., F.Z.8., Member
of the British Ornithologists’ Union, &c. &c. London: 1872. Large 8vo,
pp. 198. (Van Voorst.)

Miscellaneous. 461

dered to our shores; and on seeing how numerous in some cases
they are, one cannot refrain from the feeling that it is far from
impossible that we might now own some of these birds as established
settlers had the treatment they received at our hands been reversed.
The passion for collecting British-killed birds, so prevalent at the
present time, has much to answer for.

In his introductory chapter, Mr. Harting has analyzed the occa-
sional visitants to show the origin whence they came. It is not a
little surprising to see how large is the proportion of American
species which again and again find their way to these shores. He
finds it extremely difficult to believe that the non-aquatic species
have actually performed unaided this journey of, at least, 1700 miles ;
but of the powers of sustained flight possessed by birds we, as yet,
know very little indeed, and the task may not, under favourable cir-
cumstances, be so difficult as it would appear.

In reading Mr. Harting’s book we detect some errors perhaps
unavoidable in a work of the kind; but there are others we hardly
expected to see, such as the mistake about the Grouse and Ptar-
migan in the Introduction (p. xvii). We are not aware that the
distinctness of the Ptarmigan of Scotland from the continental bird
has ever been advocated; whilst the validity of the Grouse of the
British Islands to be considered a species distinct from the Willow
Grouse has been a bone of contention for years, Then, too, Gilbert
White’s account of the Honey Buzzard breeding in Selborne Hanger
is overlooked, and also the fact of the Harlequin Duck breeding
regularly in considerable numbers in Iceland. Mr. Harting records
it as of accidental occurrence in Europe.

But we are not disposed to criticise too severely a book which
will prove of undoubted service.

MISCELLANEOUS.
The Bell Collection of Reptiles.
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

Museum of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy,
Cambridge, Noy. 22, 1872.
GENTLEMEN,—My attention has been drawn to the letters of Prof.
Westwood and Dr. Gray in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural
History’ for November 1872, respecting Mr. Bell’s collection of
reptiles. I beg to be allowed to make the following statement.

The whole of that gentleman’s museum was purchased by my
late father, Professor Clark, in 1856, who thus describes the acqui-
sition in the preface to the ‘ Catalogue of the Osteological Portion of
Specimens contained in the Anatomical Museum of the University of
Cambridge’ (Cambridge, 1862) :—

“In 1856 I had the pleasure of increasing the Collection by
adding to it the osteological collection of Professor Bell, F.R.8., &e.

462 Miscellaneous.

&c., by which every order of Vertebrata is more adequately repre-
sented, and especially that of the Reptiles, amongst which is that
yaluable collection he had formed for the illustration of his work on
the ‘ Testudinata.’ His specimens are marked ‘ Bell collection.’”

It is of course quite possible that some specimens might have
passed into the hands of dealers before Mr. Bell sold the collection;
but these could not have formed an important portion of the whole,
as Mr. Bell expressly stated to my father that he was selling to him
his entire museum. This fact is impressed upon my memory by the
recollection of my father’s annoyance and regret at the non-appear-
ance of one specimen, a skull of the Sumatran rhinoceros, which
was noted in Mr. Bell’s MS. catalogue (which I now possess) as
part of his collection, and which could never be found. It would be
interesting, especially at the present time, to know what has become
of this skull.

We have at present at least thirty-three skeletons and parts of
skeletons of Chelonia alone, which belonged to Mr. Bell—a number
even larger than that noted in his Catalogue. I think this facet
proves conclusively that whatever Mr. Hope may have purchased
and given to the Oxford Museum, it could not have been the “ Bell
Collection of Reptiles” properly so called. I ought to mention that
we received no specimens in spirit from Mr. Bell, nor any in a
stuffed state.

There is but one trifling error in Dr. Gray’s letter of October 24.
He says that he consulted Mr. Bell’s specimens “in the Museum of
the Cambridge Philosophical Society, where they were before they
were transferred to the Anatomical Museum.” The collection was
never placed, even for a single day, in any other building than the
Museum of Anatomy.

I am, Gentlemen,
Your obedient servant,
J. W. Crarx (Superintendent).

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

November 22, 1872.

GrenTLEMEN,—My attention having been directed to a correspond-
ence in the ‘ Annals’ between Dr. Gray and Professor Westwood, I
find myself called upon to state that Dr. Gray is entirely in error
respecting the distribution of my collection of Reptilia, including, in
particular, the Testudinata.

In the year 1856 I sent a few specimens of the latter, with others
of my osteological collection, to my late friend Professor Clark, of
Cambridge. Amongst them there are now in the museum at Cam-
bridge, as I am informed by my friend Professor Newton, the shells of
only about half a dozen species of Testudinata, besides a few heads
and several osteological specimens. In 1861, five years subsequently
to my sending these few specimens to Cambridge, the whole of my large
collection of Reptilia was purchased by Mr. Hope, in order to present

Miscellaneous. 463

it entire to the new museum at Oxford, where it now is. Amongst
the specimens included are those which formed the subjects figured
in my work on the Testudinata. I have to add that the few dupli-
cates (for such they were) of the shells of tortoises at Cambridge

are, most of them, of common occurrence in collections.
Tuomas BELL.

On Spatulemys Lasale, a new Genus of Hydraspide from Rio
Parana, Corrientes. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Colonel P. Perez de Lasala has kindly presented to the Museum
a water-tortoise from Rio Parana, Corrientes, which has not been
recorded in scientific catalogues. It differs from Hydraspis in the
general form of the head and thorax, and in the head being entirely
covered with small shields. It is like Hydromedusa in many par-
ticulars, especially in the thorax of one sex at least being concave ;
but it has a regular small nuchal plate.

SPATULEMYsS.

Thorax oblong, elongate, depressed, with a distinct elongate nuchal
plate. First vertebral plate very broad; second, third, and fourth
longer than broad; anterior marginal plates broad; the second
and ninth largest, angular above. The sternum elongate, broad and
rounded in front, deeply notched behind ; gular plate large, marginal.
Head broad, depressed, entirely covered with small polygonal shields ;
forehead convex, rhombic, with a broad flat crown between the very
large temporal muscles; chin with two beards; mouth broad and
rounded in front. The two outer hinder claws very small, rudi-
mentary. Tail conical, Sternum in male (?) slightly concave,
especially behind.

Spatulemys Lasale.

Shell above olive, nearly uniform, with a few small black spots on
the margin, which are more abundant and larger on the hinder plates.
Thorax and underside of margin pale, with symmetrical black spots,
which are largest on the front and sides of thorax. Length of thorax
15 in., breadth 84 in. ; length of head 25 in.

Hab. Rio Parana, Corrientes (Colonel P. Perez de Lasala, Novem-
ber 5, 1872).

Observations on the Metamorphoses of the Bony Fishes in general, and
especially on those of a small Chinese Fish, of the Genus Macropoda,
recently introduced into France. By M. N. Jory.

In a letter addressed to M. H. Milne-Edwards on the 24th of
December 1864, M. Agassiz expressed himself as follows :—“I have
lately observed among fishes metamorphoses as considerable as those
which are known among reptiles. Now-a-days, when pisciculture is
pursued with such success and on so large a scale, it is surprising
that this fact has not long since been observed ”*.

* See Ann. des Sci. Nat. 5° sér. tom. iil. p. 55.

464 Miscellaneous.

By the kindness of M. Guy, who is successfully rearing a pair of
Macropode in his magnificent aquarium of the Faubourg Saint-
Cyprien, I have been able to study, not only the nidification of this
handsome fish, but also its ova and their development, which is so
rapid that I have seen them hatched in sixty hours. I shall not
enter into long details as to the embryogeny of our Macropode, as I
have the intention of soon making known all its phases, with numerous
drawings to illustrate them. It will be sufficient at present to say
that the development of our little Chinese fishes presents much
analogy with that of the perch, which was so well studied by our
colleague Lereboullet. Ishali therefore at present confine myself
to the most striking features.

The ovum of the Macropoda, which is of the size of a poppy-seed
at the time of its being deposited, is distinguished by its perfect
transparency and its density, which is inferior to that of water.
Hence it rises of itself to the surface and comes into contact with the
air-bubbles which compose the nest fabricated by the male, or which
are expelled from his mouth when he respires. We have already
stated that the embryogenie work which has to be accomplished
within the ovum does not last longer than from sixty to sixty-five
hours; but rapid as the hatching is, it is not more so than that of
the tench and some other fishes. But it will be easily understood
that, in consequence of this rapid developmemt, the animal must be
born in a very imperfect state. In point of fact it presents the form
of an obese tadpole, the head and trunk of which are applied to an
enormous umbilical vesicle, whilst the tail is free, already very
mobile, and furnished all round with an extremely transparent
natatory membrane.

Although it appears to be completely destitute of striated muscu-
lar fibres, the animal wriggles briskly upon the object-slide. It
is about 14 millim. in length,

Its head is remarkable by the existence of two large eyes still
destitute of pigment. The mouth does not yet exist. This is also
the case with the intestine and the anus. But the heart has already
been in motion for more than twelve hours, and there is an active
circulation in a part of the tail (nearly the anterior half),in the
vitelline vesicle, and in the remainder of the body. There are no
branchie; the respiration is effected by means of the skin and the
umbilical vesicle ; there are no secretory organs of bile or urine, no
genital organs, and no fins properly so called.

As in all fishes and, indeed, in all Vertebrata, the nervous system,
which is very early formed, consists of two parallel cords which swell
out in the head to give origin to the cerebral vesicles. The skeleton
is as yet represented only by the chorda dorsalis; the vertebral
lamine, if they exist, are not yet very distinct.

Numerous pigment-spots are to be seen upon all parts of the body,
and even upon the umbilical vesicle.

Many organs which do not yet exist will appear sooner or
later after birth. Of this number are the mouth, the intestine, the
liver, the swimming-bladder (at least in the perch); the genito-

Miscellaneous. 465

urinary organs, the hyoid apparatus, and especially the branchie will
be formed. The circulation which took place in the umbilical
vesicle, a provisional respiratory organ, will cease. New vessels will
appear and others will become atrophied ; the chorda dorsalis and
the sheath which surrounds it will become solidified to produce the
bodies of the vertebree. The true or permanent fins, at first reduced
to two pectoral palettes which the animal agitates very rapidly, will
originate in the interior and at the expense of the embryonic caudal
membrane or fin; finally brilliant iridescent scales will cover the
body of the animal, which, from this moment, will appear under
the form belonging to the adult age.

Such is, briefly, the series of changes which will be manifested at
various intervals in our new-born fish. These changes are exactly
of the same nature and at least as considerable and numerous as
those which occur in Petromyzon Planeri, in the Insects, or in the
Crustacea (Caridina Desmarestii, Cancer pagurus, &c.). Formation
of new parts (mouth, intestine, branchial apparatus, genito-urinary
apparatus, permanent fins, vertebral arches), disappearance of parts
previously existing (vitelline vesicle and its vessels, embryonic caudal
membrane), modifications in the form of the body, in that of the heart
and in its structure (which was at first entirely cellular), in the eyes
(originally destitute of pigment and becoming movable instead of im-
movable as at first), &c. &e. Now formation, disappearance, and modi-
fication are the three essential modes which are included, according to
Dugés, in that very complex operation that we call metamorphosis ; and
if I am not deceived, the embryogeny of the Macropoda has displayed
them to us.

To accept the reality of metamorphosis in the case of the grass-
hopper for example, and the other Orthoptera or Hemiptera which
quit the egg with all their parts except the wings, and to refuse to
believe in this phenomenon when we have to do with osseous fishes
such as the perch or the Macropoda, would, it seems to me, be to show
a deficiency of logic and to close our eyes voluntarily against
evidence.— Comptes Rendus, Sept. 30, 1872, p. 766.

On the Habits of Terebratule, or Lamp-shells.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Mr. Davidson informs me that the shell [have named Terebratula
truncata in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1872
(x. p. 152) is what is now called Kraussca rubra (T. rubra, Pallas).
He also informs me that “ Mr. Jeffreys found a number of specimens
of Terebratulina caput-serpentis attached to seaweed ; and he believes
some forms of Argiope that occur in the Mediterranean likewise affix
themselves to seaweed.”

On referring to Mr. Jeffreys’s ‘ British Conchology,’ ii. p. 15, he
says, ‘ 7’. caput-serpentis is attached to stones, old shells, and occa-
sionally to small seaweeds and other substances ;” and Mr. Davidson
informs me that ‘“ Prof. E. Forbes had found some small specimens

466 Miscellaneous.

of Argiope attached to Fuci, though more commonly attached to
stones.”

It therefore appears that the habitat I gave for Kraussia rubra is
not quite peculiar to that species, though it certainly is the usual
habitat of Kraussia, while in other lamp-shells attachment to sea-
weeds is the exception.

On the Conneaion which exists between the Nervous System and the
Muscular System in the Helices. By M. Stcarp.

In his celebrated memoir on the slug and the snail, Cuvier has
described the submission (to use the term which he has employed) of
the nervous to the muscular system. It is established, in his opinion,
by the close cellulosity which unites the retractor muscles of the great
tentacles to the envelope of the cerebroid ganglia, and the principal
lobes of the retractor muscles of the foot to that of the subcesophageal
ganglia. Since then, every one abides by that assertion; neverthe-
less the union of the two systems is much more intimate than was
indicated by Cuvier, and histological study shows that they are
directly united with each other. It is not, in fact, simply cellular
tissue which joins the nervous centres to the neighbouring museles ;
microscopical examination discloses, in this tissue, the presence of
smooth muscular fibres ; so that the nervous system is surrounded by
an actual expansion of the muscular apparatus.

In certain species the arrangement is very manifest, particularly
in Zonites algirus—that old Helix of which a great many malacolo-
gists justly make a distinct genus. In it clearly marked membranous
muscles surround the oesophageal collar. From the upper surface of
the retractor muscle of the foot, from the outside, and for nearly
half its length, there starts on each side a little muscular band two
millimetres in width, which soon divides into two lobes, the outer
of which, the external, goes to the superior, and the other to the
small tentacle ; these muscles are known as the retractor muscles of
the tentacles. Now the little band which constitutes the second of
these muscles enlarges, spreads like a fan on the internal side to
unite with the neurilemma of the cesophageal collar, and thus form
with its fellow a sort of muscular framing; then this muscle goes
to the little tentacle with the nerve which is destined for it. On the
other hand the muscular bundle which goes to the superior tentacle
receives into its interior the tentacular nerve, which, from its point
of origin on the subcesophageal ganglion to the point where it enters
into the cavity of the retractor muscle, is accompanied by a muscular
band, which envelops it and which thus unites the nervous centres to
this muscle.

The connexion just described, of the retractor muscles of the ten-
tacles with the cesophageal collar, and the union of these two
muscles behind into a single primitive bundle, would make it more
proper to designate this muscular whole the common retractor
muscle of the tentacles and nervous collar. The action, however, is
not so simple as this denomination would seem to indicate; for if

Miscellaneous. 467

during the retreat of the animal all these parts act in order to pro-
duce the retraction, they do not act all in the same way during its
unfolding. Then the portions placed in front of the nervous collar
intervene, at least passively, in its protraction. These muscular
bands having on one side their points of attachment to the integu-
ments, they must, as the latter are carried forward, aid in drawing
the collar into this movement if they did not act only as simple
ligaments.

This is not all; the muscular expansion which surrounds the
nervous collar furnishes to the nerves which start from the supra-
and subcesophageal gangha a regular contractile sheath. This is
often considerable, and then, if the nerve be examined by the mi-
croscope, under a low power, or by the help of a simple lens, it pre-
sents the appearance of an opaque, more or less flexuous cord in
the middle of this envelope, which constitutes an external newri-
lemma for it, the histological composition of which must detain us a
moment. In the first place we find in it a superficial conjunctive
layer, formed by voluminous cells, the mean diameter of which is
-05 millimetre, and which is, up to a certain point, comparable to
the adventitia of the vessels. Below this cellular membrane we re-
cognize the presence of a muscular layer formed of fine and very
elongated fibres arranged longitudinally. It is easy to ascertain
the existence of these muscular elements by macerating, for three or
four days, the collar and the nerve which starts from it in a mixture
of equal parts of hydrochloric and nitric acids, diluted with ten or
twelve parts of water. It is then easy to separate them.

Immediately round the nerves may be remarked a second con-
junctive element, or inner neurilemma, composed of cellular elements,
but less voluminous. These cells are about 0°025 millimetre in
diameter.

This double neurilemmatic envelope has not yet been indicated,
so far as we know, in-the animals under consideration. Leydig has
observed it in the Arthropoda and in the Annelida, where the ex-
ternal neurilemma is represented by the ventral vessel; he has re-
cognized, particularly in the earthworm, the presence of muscular
elements; but we have nowhere seen the existence of these elements
indicated in the neurilemma of the Mollusca. According to Leydig, it
takes that cellular form of conjunctive tissue which is seen elsewhere
among the organs. This is only correct with regard to the super-
ficial cellular layer ; and what we have said shows how much more
complex is the composition of this neurilemma.

The existence of muscular fibres in the sheath which encloses the
nerve has the effect of producing an elongation and shortening of
this musculo-nervous cord; and, indeed, when there is a contraction,
the flexuosities described by the nerve in its envelope are more
marked the stronger this contraction is; in the state of relaxation,
on the contrary, the nerve follows a rectilineal direction.

It is plain that this peculiar musculature of the nerves has a
manifest physiological relation with the intimate connexion that
we have indicated between the nervous collar and the muscular

468 Miscellaneous.

apparatus. In consequence of this connexion, in fact, the nervous
centres connected with the muscles suffer some displacements in
relation to the changes of form that the body undergoes when the
animal retracts or expands itself; and the nerves themselves, by
virtue of the muscular envelope with which they are provided,
being able to elongate or shorten themselves, form active bands,
which intervene in the modifications which the movements of the
animal cause. — Comptes Rendus, September 30, 1872, pp. 769-
aes
On Delphinus Desmarestii, Risso (Aliama Desmarestit, Gray).
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.

Risso, in his ‘ Histoire Naturelle de ’Europe Méridionale,’ de-
scribes and figures a species of dolphin under the name of Delphinus
Desmarestit (vol. ii. p. 24, t. 2. f. 3). As the figures of the two
dolphins on the preceding plate are accurate, and his figures in
general reliable, and the figure itself agrees with the description, I
am inclined to regard it as correct until it is proved otherwise. It
has been considered the same as Ziphius cavirostris of Cuvier,
a ziphioid whale. It is so unlike all the other ziphioid whales
known that it may be considered one of the whales requiring fur-
ther examination. Instead of having the rounded head and short
cylindrical beak and small pectoral and dorsal fin common to all the
ziphioid whales, it has an elongated, conical, tapering head, acute in
front, with two teeth produced in front of the lower jaw, elongate-
lanceolate pectoral fins low down on the sides of the body, like the
Grampus and Globiocephalus, and a large elongated truncated dorsal
fin; and the body is marked with a multitude of irregularly placed
white lines, as in Grampus. The female described and figured was
nearly 20 feet long.

In the P. Z.S. 1864, p. 242, I proposed a genus for this dolphin
under the name of Aliama; but I unwisely placed the Hyperoodon de
Corse, Doumet, Bull. Soc. Cuviér. 1842, p. 207, t. 1. f. 2, and Del-
phinus Philippi, Cocco, Erich. Arch. 1846, p. 204, t. 4. f. 6, which
are both true ziphioid whales, probably belonging to the genus Epi-
odon, as synonyma of the same species. Most probably Doumet’s
Hyperoodon de Corse is the animal of the skull described as Ziphius
cavirostris of Cuvier ; if it is the Ziphius de Corse of Gervais (Ostéog.
Cét.), which appears to be a female animal, it is interesting as show-
ing that the inner side of the intermaxillaries of the female animals
are dilated and turned up.

This whale has been confounded with Delphinus Desmarestit under
the name of Hpiodon Desmarestit (see Suppl. Cat. Seals and Whales,
p- 98), figured by Gervais, which differs from all other Petrorhynchi in
the inner margin of the intermaxillary bones not being nearly so
much elevated behind as in that genus, and not elevated but rounded
in front, and margining the linear vomer; while in Petrorhynchus
the inner edge of the intermaxillaries is dilated, forming a well-
marked concavity round the nostrils, and much elevated on the sides,
forming a thin hood over each side of the much-swollen vomer.

Miscellaneous. 469

Ishould propose to call this species Epiodon Heraultii, to distinguish
it from Risso’s Delphinus Desmarestii, Theskull of HE. Heraultit and
Petrorhynchus cavirostris, as shown in Gervais’s figure, is very dif-
ferent; and probably, as the Hyperoodon de Corse of Doumet is
proved to be the animal of Petrorhynchus, Delphinus Philippi of
Cocco may be the animal of Epiodon Heraultii.

The Swedish Scientific Expedition.
[Extract from a letter from Mr. J. E. Lrypant to Dr. J. E. Gray.]

My Greenland expedition was very successful. The ‘Gladan’
shipped the meteorite iron at Disco Island, and then she made a
cruise to some places where our geologist, Dr. Nanckhoff, wanted to
carry out his explorations ; and Dr. Th. M. Fries, a botanist who had
joined the expedition as a private passenger, followed him. I had
got the steamer ‘ Inzegerd’ for my dredging-operations. I went up
to Upernivik at the 73rd degree of latitude, thence westward till we
met the lasting ice; and following the edge of the ice we made south-
ward down to St. John’s, Newfoundland, to fall in with the ‘ Gladan ’
and return to Sweden in company.

From Cape Terewek to Upernivik, and thence to St. John’s, we
dropped our dredges at least once for every degree of latitude that
we passed, often in pretty good depths of water down to 980 fathoms.
In 410 fathoms I got two specimens of the Umbellula granlandica—
I think better Umbellularia encrinus. There is not the slightest
doubt that they are not of the same species as those described and
figured by Ellis and Mylius. My specimens are younger, only some
12 inches long, and with fewer polypes (about 12), than in the former
ones. I am just going to work out a paper upon them, which will
probably appear in the beginning of next year. Although these
animals are probably the most interesting things brought home by
the expedition, they are by no means the only objects of high scien-
tific value. Among the great number of siliceous sponges and
starfishes, as well as some other groups of animals, I have reason to
believe that many new or rare things are to be found; but nothing
is yet examined except the Arachnida, described by Tamerlan Tho-
rell in the ‘ Gfversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps Akademiens Forhand-
lingar, 1872, no. 2, pp. 147-166. I had not much time for
explorations on shore. Our physicists, Dr. Nystrom and Dr. Fries,
assisted in making collections on shore. We found but twenty
specimens of Arachnida, nearly all of them new to science. <A few
of them were also taken by Professor Nordenskiold in 1870. We
collected a pretty good amount of skeletons and implements from
some long-abandoned Esquimaux villages. Also temperature sound-
ings were taken; and samples of water from the abysses of Baffin’s
Bay were brought home. [I hope the expedition will prove to have
many important results to science; only we want the means of
employing scientific people to work it all out; but the Swedes have
not copper enough to do such things rapidly.

This summer I have examined the greater depths in Skagerrack

470 Miscellaneous.

down to 355 fathoms, the greatest depth ever found in Skagerrack
being a little more than 400 fathoms. Although I had not’ very
long time for the explorations, I was very successful indeed. The
most interesting haul during the cruise may be one in lat. 58° 35’ N.,
long. 10° 15' E., depth 150 fathoms, bottom clay. Among other
things, I got there two specimens of the rare Synaptoid Olizotrochus
vitreus.

I suppose you know that the Swedish naturalists are never allowed
to keep any specimens obtained in the expeditions fitted out by the
government; all belong to the Royal Museum of the Vetenskaps
Akademien; and thus I have no right whatever to make a bargain
with the animals that I collected in Greenland.

I am very much obliged to you for your kindness in sending me the
catalogue.

Report on a Memoir by Dr. Dufossé, “ On the Noises and Expressive
Sounds which the Freshwater and Marine Fishes of Europe pro-
duce.” By M. C. Rosin.

The memoir submitted to our examination is a considerable work,
a true monograph ; it has cost its author numerous investigations.
This subject has been, on his part, the object of very diverse obser-
vations, the summary of which has on several occasions been inserted
in the ‘Comptes Rendus.’

The first part of Dr. Dufossé’s work consists of a very extended
history, summing up all that naturalists and physiologists have said
with regard to the noises produced by certain fishes. This history
commences with Aristotle, whose remarks upon this question deserve
to be recalled.

‘“‘ Fishes,” he says, “‘ having neither lung, nor trachea, nor pharynx,
have no voice. ‘Those which have been said to have one, produce
nothing but certain sounds and whistlings. Such is the kind of
grunting of the Lyre, the Chromis, and the fish called the boar-fish,
which is found in the Acheloiis. We may also cite the Chalets and
the cuckoo-fish: the former makes a sort of whistling; the second
emits a sound approaching that of the bird whose name it has re-
ceived in consequence of this resemblance. All these fishes produce
what has been called thew voice either by the rubbing of their
branchiz, which they have garnished with points, or by means of
certain internal parts near the intestine, and which contain air. It
is this air the agitation and friction of which produce a sound.
Some Selachii also seem to whistle. All this, however, can only
improperly be called voice; we must say that it is a sound.”
(Hist. Anim. Lib. iv., Camus’s translation, Paris, 1783, tom. i.

. 221.)
The sounds emitted by fishes may be very varied irregular noises,
such as those which the Cyprini, the loaches, the Dactylopteri, the
Hippocampi and others produce with their lips or their opercula,
or by moving certain articulations.

There are other, regular noises: various Scomberoidei produce

Miscellaneous. 471

these by the friction of the pharyngeal bones; the Orthagorisce
cause them by the friction of their intermaxillary teeth; various
Cyprinoidei, Anguilliformes, Siluroidei, &c. cause them by expelling
into the cesophagus the air of their swimming-bladder.

Lastly, there are noises which, while regular and voluntary, like
the preceding, result from certain peculiarities presented by muscles
in course of contraction in fishes furnished with an air-bladder
which has no communication with the cesophagus. These have been
observed in Peristedion cataphracta, Trigla, Sciena, Zeus, Umbrina
cirrhosa, and Hippocampus brevirostris.

The mechanism of the production of the first two varieties of
these sounds was already pretty well known; but M. Dufossé, by a
fresh examination and by his dissections, has given more precision
to several of the anatomical and physiological notions relating to it.
This part of his investigations, which is already old, has, moreover,
been the subject of a favourable report from our regretted colleague,
Constant Duméril (see ‘Comptes Rendus,’ 1858, tome xlvi. p. 610).
Therefore we will dwell only upon the later communications of the
author, made from 1858 to 1862 (Comptes Rendus, 1862, tome Lxiv.
p- 393), which appear to us to be still more valuable than the pre-
ceding ones.

He has set himself to show, that the regular sounds which fishes
emit may be voluntarily produced, and are not a simple consequence
of some other physiological action. They are consequently, in cer-
tain cases, true acts of expression, however rudimentary.

M. Dufossé has shown that in the fishes which voluntarily pro-
duce regular sounds, these are commensurable as musical sounds ;
and although they are more imperfect than those emitted by ser-
pents, as Lacépéde had already remarked, he has determined their
note in all the species which he has observed. He has also shown,
by conclusive experiments, that all the fishes which emit noises or
regular expressive sounds in the air, produce them also in the water—
that is to say, in the medium in which they live and are naturally
in relation to each other.

In the case of several species, the intensity of the sounds is so
great that, when produced by a single individual, they may be heard
at a distance of several metres; this is the case with certain 7’rigle,
Zeus, and especially Pogonias chromis, &. When emitted by
animals combined in shoals, they may be transmitted still further ;
more than once, under these conditions, they have frightened the
crews of ships, who did not know to what cause to ascribe the noises
produced around and beneath their vessels. They have been the
source of more than one fable spread among maritime populations,
M. Dufossé has himself ascertained the existence of these noises, by
going frequently, and not always without danger, to pass whole nights
on the open sea in fishing-boats.

In the case of the fishes with an air-bladder which does not com-
municate with the esophagus, M. Dufossé has ascertained experi-
mentally that the wall of this reservoir was affected by strong and
frequent movements during the production of the sounds. He has
thoroughly studied the nerves and muscles then in action. His

472 Miscellaneous.

vivisections, aided by touch and auscultation, proved to him abso-
lutely that the muscles themselves are the agents producing the vibra-
tions from which the sounds formed originate (loc. cit. 1862, p. 394).
Since then a distinguished physiologist, M. Armand Moreau, by sub-
mitting the nerves which run to the air-bladder of the gurnards to
the action of an electric current, has ascertained that the striated
muscles of the air-bladder contract and cause the reproduction of
the characteristic sounds, and this in the animal when killed by
section of the spinal cord (Comptes Rendus, 1864, tome lix. p. 437).

This mode of formation of sounds by contraction of the muscles
of the air-bladder was not known before the investigations of M.
Dufossé. Science has to thank him for this discovery, and for the
care which he has taken in observing the diversities of this pheno-
menon from species to species of the fishes which present it.

We shall conclude this report by calling the attention of the
Academy to another point in this work, because it will certainly
become the subject of fresh experiments made by means of the re-
gistering and other instruments which now-a-days serve to determine
the real nature of a great number of organic phenomena. Accord-
ing to M. Dufossé, it is not the readily visible movements of the
air-bladder that are the cause of the sound heard while they last.
Although much greater than the concomitant trepidations which cause
the sonorous vibrations, these contractions merely tighten or relax cer-
tain parts of the air-reservoir ; and the use of the latter in this respect
is to act as a sounding-board, an organ for the reinforcement of
the sounds produced, which are comprised between s7” and re’.

It is well known that the striated muscles during contraction
give rise to a peculiar sound, which is called the muscular sound,
rotatory sound, susurrus, wrinkling, or myophonia, and has been
well studied by Wollaston, Erman, Gilbert, Laennec, and many
modern observers. According to M. Marey this muscular sound cor-
responds sometimes to the wt, and sometimes to the sz of the lower oc-
tave of the piano. Now, according to M. Dufossé, the noise produced
by the fishes of which we are speaking is this very muscular sound,
caused by the contraction of the voluntary muscles of the air-bladder ;
and the latter plays, with respect to it, the part of an organ of re-
inforcement in a sufficiently marked manner to enable it to reach
our ears.

The Academy will see that, if the correctness of this ingenious
analysis of the mechanism of production of the sounds produced by
the air-bladder should be experimentally confirmed, the acoustic
property of muscular contraction will be raised to the height of a
phenomenon productive of sounds, not merely commensurable, but
even expressive. In the absence of experiments made by your
committee, it cannot yet pronounce a formal opinion upon this
point. But it recognizes that, by the sagacious and laborious em-
ployment of his knowledge of comparative anatomy and physiology,
M. Dufossé has discovered new facts which have elucidated several
previously obscure ichthyological questions. — Comptes Rendus,
November 4, 1872, tome lxxy. pp. 1074-1078.

Miscellaneous. 473

On a new Species of Balenoptera. By Capt. C. M. Scamaon, U.S.R.M.

BaLZNopTerA, Gray,
P. Z. 8. 1847, p. 89, B. M. Cat. Cet. 1850, p. 31.

Balenoptera Davidsoni, Scammon, n. sp.

Above dull black; body, pectoral and caudal fins white below,
with a white band across the upper surface of the pectorals near their
bases. Gular folds seventy in number, the interspaces having a
pinkish cast, though the more prominent portions are of a milky
white. Head pointed; dorsal fin small, falcate, placed two thirds
the length of the body from the end of the beak; pectorals small,
narrow, placed one third of the animal’s length from the anterior
extremity. Genitalia opening below and slightly behind the anterior
edge of the dorsal fin. Baleen pure white ; lamine on each side 270
in number, the longest not exceeding 10 inches. Total length of
animal 27 feet ; pectorals 4 feet long, 13 inches wide; spiracles 3
feet 8 inches, pectorals 8 feet 6 inches, anterior edge of dorsal 15 feet
6 inches, and posterior edge of dorsal 18 feet behind the end of the
beak; height of dorsal 10 inches; breadth of flukes, from point to
point, 7 feet 6 inches, width of lobes of the same 25 inches; from
the fork of the caudal fin to the anus 8 feet 4 inches, to opening of
vagina 923 feet; anterior end of snout to corner of mouth 4 feet
8 inches.

Distribution from Mexico to Behring Strait, on the west coast of
America.

The specimen from which this description was taken was obtained
in Admiralty Inlet, Washington Territory, October 1870. It was a
female, and contained a foetus five feet long—thus correcting the
error of the whalers, who commonly regard this small species as the
young of the “ finback” of the coast. The skull has been deposited
in the National Museum at Washington.

This species is evidently congeneric with the Balenoptera rostrata
of the British-Museum Catalogue of 1850; and, while changes in
nomenclature (more recent than those reported in the works of
reference now accessible to me) may render it necessary to change
the generic appellation at some future day, the one now used seems
sufficient for purposes of description. In specific details, also, the
present species is nearly allied to the B. rostrata, as far as descriptions
will admit of instituting acomparison. Ihave dedicated the species
to Prof. George Davidson, U. 8. Coast Survey, and President of the
Academy, as a testimony of respect for his scientific attainments, no
less than as a personal token of appreciation of his efforts to assist in
the advancement of the scientific interests of this coast.

A more detailed account of this animal and its habits, accompanied
by illustrations, is reserved for a monograph on the Cetaceans of this
coast, which I have long contemplated, and which is now on the
point of publication.— Proceedings of the Cal. Academy of Sciences,
Oct. 4, 1872.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 33

474 Miscellaneous.

On the Varieties of Indris and Propithecus.
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

A series of specimens of lemurs have arrived from Madagascar.
The examination of them has confirmed the idea that I expressed in
a paper sent to the Zoological Society, that these animals are lable
to considerable variation, and that the presumed species of the genera
Indris and Propithecus are mere varieties of colour.

The British Museum has lately received an adult Indris, which,
instead of being black with a white patch on the hinder part of the
back and a black tail, has a patch over each eyebrow, the fore legs
nearly to the hands, the hinder part of the thighs, the legs from
the knee to the ankle, and the whole of the underside iron-grey—that
is to say, having a very large quantity of whitish hairs intermixed
with the black ones; the ankles and hinder part of the heels white,
and yellow below. The variety may be named Jndris variegatus.

The British Museum has also received a fine adult specimen of the
animal called Propithecus diadema, which differs from the three other
specimens in the British Museum in having a greyish black in-
stead of the white forehead that is to be found in the three other
specimens.

On Peloric Structures. By Dr. Pryrrtscu.

In this paper, types of peloric structures in Labiate, Verbenacee,
Scrophulariacewe, and Ranunculaceze were described in detail, and the
peculiarities which each of these families presents in its peloric
structures were discussed. With regard to the Labiate, the author
endeavoured to show that the prevailing theory upon the structure
of the Labiate flower is not tenable. Upon the hypothesis that with
the first three whorls of flower-leaves an equal number of whorl-
members must be assumed as originally present, the structure of the
Labiate flower indicates changes which have taken place in the num-
ber of the flower-leaves. The prevailing theory explains the number
of the anthers by the complete abortion of the fifth anther; but
changes in the number of the whorl-members of the calyx and corolla
may also have taken place, and the number of the anthers may indi-
cate the original type.

The author expressed himself in favour of the latter alternative.
The preponderant occurrence of quaternary types in the apical and
lateral regular flowers is, in his opinion, in contradiction to the
assumption of the quinary type. In zygomorphic flower-structures
anomalies in the number of anthers often occur ; but those are most
rare in which a posterior anther appears. The assumption of a qua-
ternary type has, moreover, the advantage of simplicity, and the
number and position of the flower-leaves then stand in connexion
with the position of the leaves and bracts, which only in the rarest
cases depart from the cruciformly opposite position.—Anzeiger der
kais. Akad. der Wiss. in Wien, October 24, 1872, p. 161.

475

INDEX to VOL. X.

ACHERRES, description of the new
genus, 87.

Achrionota, characters of the genus,
325.

Adelomyia, new species of, 452.

/Kdriodes, description of the new
genus, 85,

Agenopus, characters of the new
genus, 99.

Agriocheta, description of the new
genus, 96.

Algee, on a new genus of unicellular,
139.

Amorphocephalus, new species of,
321,

Anderson, Dr., on Trionyx gangeti-
cus, 219.

Antipathes, on a new species of, from
the Polar seas, 77.

Aoplocnemis, new species of, 92.

Aplysina, on a new species of, 101.

Apus cancriformis, on the reproduc-
tion and mode of life of, 152.

Arachnida, on a new family and
genus of, 409.

Argas reflexus, on the eggs and
newly hatched young of, 280,

Argus Pheasant, on the two (?) un-
known species of, 67.

Arpexylon, description of the new
genus, 227.

Artemia, observations on, 405.

Atherina, new species of, 398.

Baleenoptera, new species of, 413,
473.

Balistidee, on the natural affinities of
the, 68.

Bathybius-mud, on the, 362.

Bell’s Collection of Reptiles, 407,
461, 462.

Belus, new species of, 95.

Birds, new, 61, 71, 114, 252, 450,
452; on fossil, 72; on the sense of
sight in, 142; new species of cre-
taceous, 212.

Black Redstart, on the specific name
of the, 227.

Blake, Dr., on Diatoms in hot springs,
312.

Blysmia, characters of the genus, 323.

Blyth, E., on the species of Asiatic
two-horned Rhinoceros, 399.

Boeckia, description of the new
genus, 6,

Books, new:—Sowerby and Lear's
Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles,

~ 299; Andersson’s Birds of Damara
Land, 457; Shelley’s Birds of
Egypt, 458; Harting’s Handbook
of British Birds, 460.

Bowerbank, Dr. J. 8., on Mr. Car-
ter’s paper on two new Sponges
from the Antarctic Sea &c., 58;
reply thereto, 141.

Brachiopoda, on a new family of, 248.

Brady, G. 8., on the non-parasitic
marine Copepoda of the north-east
coast of England, 1,

Branchipus, observations on, 405.

Brauer, Dr. F., on the reproduction
and mode of life of the Phyllopoda,
152.

Burmeister, Dr. H., on his so-called
Globiocephalus Grayi, 51; on Ba-
lenoptera patachonica and B. in-
termedia, 413.

Butler, A. G., on a new genus and
species of Heterocerous Lepido-
ptera, 125, 228, 274; on the species
of Thelyphonus, 200 ; on new My-
riopoda, 354,

Calamites, on the structure of the,
225.

Callithamnion, on a new British, 408.

Callograptus radicans, description of,

Calveria, characters of the new genus,

Cambridge, Rev. O. P., on a new
family and genus and two new
species of Thelyphonidea, 409; on
the habits and distribution of Ly-
cosa ingens, 448.

Campanularia neglecta, on reproduc-
tion by fission in, 390.

Campylonema, description of the
new genus, 396,

Canthocamptus, new species of, 11.

mel pygargus, observations on,
407.

476

Cariama cristata, on a deformed ex-
ample of, 67.

Carter, H. J., on the sponge-animal,
and on the origin of thread-cells
in the Spongiade, 45; on a new
species of Aplysina, 101; on two
new Sponges from the Philippine
Islands, 110; on new species of
Tethya, 141.

Centyres, new species of, 91.

Ceocephalus, new species of, 324.

Chilodactylus, new species of, 184.

Chcerops, new species of, 424.

Cladonema radiatum, on the plano-
blast of, 391.

Clark, J. W., on the Bell Collection
of Reptiles, 461.

Clepsine, on some species of, 280.

Cletodes, description of the new
genus, 12.

Clupea, new species of, 425.

Coccoliths, observations on, 359.

Codiophyllum, description of the new
genus, 139.

Coleoptera, new genera and species
of, 317. ;

Colluricincla, new species of, 114.

Cope, Prof., on intelligence in mon-
keys, 229; on a curious habit of a
snake, 230; on the habits of Ga-
leodes pallipes, 312.

Copepoda, on the non-parasitic ma-
rine, of the north-east coast of
England, 1.

Coral, on a new species of black, 77.

Corals from the Red Sea, list of, 124.

Cordus, new species of, 521.

Crateromorpha, new species of, 112;
observations on the genus, 186.

Crinodes Sommeri, observations on,
228, 274, 446.

Cubiceps, new species of, 423.

Cupes, new species of, 319.

Curculionidz, on new Australian, 84.

Cyanocephalus hamadryas, on the
anatomy of, 62.

Cyclophis zestivus, on the habits of,
230.

Cyclopicera, description of the new
genus, 8.

Cyclops, new British species of, 5.

Dactylopus, new species of, 15.

Dareste, C., on the natural affinities
of the Balistide, 68.

David, the Abbé A., on a new species
of Paradoxornis, 71.

Davidson, T., on the genera Trime-

INDEX.

ary Dinobolus, and Monomerella,

48.

Delphinus Desmarestii, observations
on, 468.

Diaphorophyia, new species of, 451.

Diatoms in hot springs, 312.

Diczeum, new species of, 114.

Dicerobatis, new species of, 422.

Dinobolus, Monomerella, and Tri-
merella, observations on the genera,
248.

Dorvillia agariciformis, observations
on, 209.

Drassicus, description of the new
genus, 98.

Dredgings in Lake Ontario, 276; in
the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 341; on
the coast of Iceland, 371; on the
coast of Greenland, 469.

Dufossé, Dr., on the noises and ex-
Breen sounds produced by fishes,
470.

Echinidea, of the ‘ Porcupine’ deep-
sea dredging-expeditions, on the,
300.

Echinoderms from the Red Sea, list
of the, 115.

Echinoidea, on the stracture of the,
285, 376, 427.

Eimer, T., on thread-cells and semen
in marine Sponges, 506.

Emys nigra from Upper California, on,
54

Enchymus, new species of, 92.

Ennothus, characters of the new
genus, 87.

Entomostraca, contributions to the
study of the, 1.

Epeira aurelia, on the habits of,
271.

Eremias, new species of, 419.

Escharide, on a new genus of, 167.

Eumeces, new species of, 370.

Euprepes, new species of, 419.

Eupsalis, new species of, 323.

Euryalidee, on the synonymy of the
genera, 71.

Fish-remains, fossil, on some dermal
tubercles associated with, 66.

Fishes, new, 397, 418, 449; on the
metamorphoses of the bony, 463 ;
on the noises and expressive sounds
produced by, 470.

Flustra marginata of Krauss, on the,
167.

Flustramorpha, descriptions of the
new genus, 167.

.

INDEX.

Foraminifera, on the nomenclature
of the, 184, 253, 453.

Fossa Daubentonii, observations on,
207.

Galeodes pallipes, on the habits of,
312.

Galera barbata, on varieties of, 405.

Globiocephalus Grayi, observations
on, 51.

Gordii, on the embryonic form of
the, 231.

Gould, J., on two new species of
birds, 114; on three new species
of Humming-birds, 452.

Graculavus, new species of, 215.

Graptolite, on a new dendroid, 233.

Gepiolies on the migrations of the,

5

Gray, Dr. J. E., on the Emys nigra
from Upper California, 54; on the
synonymy of the genera of Eurya-
lide, 71; on a new netted Sponge
from the Philippines, 76; on Os-
teocella septentrionalis, 76,406; on
the Echinoderms from the Red Sea,
115; on a new genus of hexara-
diate and other Sponges, 154; on
Codiophyllum, 189; on the name
Tethya, 150; on the Clustered
Sea-polype, 151; on the Marine
Sponges in the British Museum,
152; on the habits of Terebratula
truncata, 152; on Flustra margi-
nata, 167; on a new Propithecus
and the Fossane from Madagascar,
206: on the double-horned Asiatic
Rhinoceros, 207; on the genera
Manouria and Scapia, 218; on the
Mud-Tortoises of India, 326; on
varieties of the Tiara, 405; on
the Ahu, 407; on a new British
Callithamnion, 408; on Macroxus
tephrogaster, 408 ; on the Guémul,
445; on a new genus of Hydras-
pidee, 463 ; on the habits of Tere-
bratulee, 465 ; on Delphinus Des-
marestii, 468; on the varieties of
Indris and Propithecus, 474.

Grayella cyathophora, note on, 124.

Gregarine, on the development of
the, 309.

Gulliver, G., on the eggs and newly
hatched young of Ixodes Dugesii
and Argas reflexus, 280.

Gunther, Dr. A.,on a deformed ex-
ample of Cariama cristata, 67; on
two new fishes from Tasmania, 183 ;

477

on a new species of Lizard, 370; on
some species of fishes from the
Philippme Islands, 397; on new
species of reptiles and fishes, 418 ;
on Psammoperca and Cnidon, 426 ;
onalarge Siluroid from the Upper
Amazons, 449,

Gymnodactylus, new species of, 421.

Helices, on the connexion existing
between the nervous and muscular
systems in the, 466.

Hemiaster, new species of, 290.

Hesperornis regalis, description of,
212.

Hincks, Rey. T., on Lar sabellarum
and its reproduction, 313; contri-
butions by, to the history of the
Hydroida, 385; on a new genus of
Polyzoa, 396.

Hinulia, new species of, 420.

Hopkinson, J., on Callograptus radi-
cans, 253.

Huamela leucotis, observations on,
445,

Hydraspide, on a new genus of, 463.

Hydroida, contributions to the history
of the, 385.

Hyloterpe, new species of, 252.

Idotasia, new species of, 100.

Imaliodes, new species of, 98.

Indris, on the varieties of, 474.

Insects, on the position of the centre
of gravity in, 55.

Toleema, new species of, 452.

Ionthocerus, new species of, 320.

Ixodes Dugesii, on the eggs and
newly hatched young of, 230,

Jeffreys, J.G., on the Mollusca of
Europe compared with those of
Eastern North America, 237.

Joly,N., on the metamorphoses of the
bony fishes, 463.

Jones, Prof. T. R., on the nomencla-
ture of the Foraminifera, 184, 253,
453.

Kent, W.S., on Tethya muricata and
Dorvillia agariciformis, 209.

King, Prof. W., on the genera Tri-
merella, Dinobolus, and Monome-
rella, 248.

Krefft, Dr.G., on Thylacoleo carni-
fex, 169.

Lanioperca, description of the new
genus, 183,

Laophonte, new species of, 12.

Lar sabellarum, on the reproduction
of, 313.

478

Lee, Dr. R. J., on the sense of sight
in birds, 142.

Lepidoptera, new, 125, 228, 274.

Lindahl, J., on the Swedish Scien-
tific Expedition, 469.

Lizard, on a new species of, 370.

Lovén, Prof. 8., on the structure of
the Echinoidea, 285, 376, 427.

Liitken, Dr. C.,on Antipathes arctica,
(is

Lycosa Blackwallii, observations on,
272.

ingens, on the habits and dis-
tribution of, 275, 448.

Macalister, Prof. A., on the myology
of Sarcophilus ursinus, 17 ; on the
anatomy of Cynocephalus hama-
dryas, 62; on the muscular ana-
tomy of Phascolarctos cinereus,
127.

M‘Andrew, R., on the Echinoderms
collected by, in the Red Sea, 115.

Macrochiron, description of the new
genus, 9.

Macropoda, on the metamorphoses of,
463.

Macroxus tephrogaster, note on, 408.

Major, Dr. J. Forsyth, on some fossil
monkeys found in Italy, 155.

Manouria and Scapia, on the genera,
218.

Marsh, Prof. O. C., on Hesperornis
regalis, and other new species of
Cretaceous birds, 212.

Meyerella, characters of the new
genus, 76.

Meyerina, description of the new
genus, 110, 184.

Milne-Edwards, A., on fossil birds, 72.

Misophrice, description of the new
genus, 93.

Mocoa, new species of, 420.

Meechius, description of the new
genus, 96.

Mollusca of Europe compared with
those of Eastern North America,
237.

Monkeys, on some fossil, found in
Italy, 153; on intelligence in, 229.

Monomerella, Trimerella, and Dino-
bolus, observations on the genera,
248.

Myriopoda, descriptions of new, 354.

Myrmacicelus, new species of, 95.

Mythites, new species of, 84.

Nannoscincus, characters of the new
genus, 421.

INDEX.

Neaspis, characters of the new genus,
517

Nechyrus, new species of, 99.

Nephelis, on some species of, 279.

Nephila aurelia, on the habits of, 271.

Newton, Prof. A-, on the specific
name of the Black Redstart, 227.

Nicholson, Prof. H. A., on migra-
tions of the Graptolites, 75; on
dredgings in Lake Ontario, 276.

Nyctalops, characters of the new
genus, 410.

Oditesus, description of the new
genus, 88.

(Enochroma, characters of the new
genus, 92.

Ophichthys, new species of, 425.

Orpha, new species of, 94.

Orthotomus, new species of, 252.

Osteocella septentrionalis, observa-
tions on, 76, 406.

Otolithus, new species of, 398.

Paleeotringa, new species of, 217.

Paradoxornis, new species of, 71.

Parker, W. K., on the nomenclature
of the Foraminifera, 184, 253, 458 ;
on the structure and development
of the skull of the salmon, 222.

Pascoe, F. P., on new Australian
Curculionide, 84; on new genera
and species of Coleoptera, 317.

Peltis, new species of, 318.

Percis, new species of, 424.

Peripia, new species of, 422.

Peters, Dr. W., on the systematic
name of the Walrus, 151.

Peyritsch, Dr., on peloric structures,
474.

Phascolarctos cinereus, on the mus-
cular anatomy of the, 127.

Phocylides, characters of the genus,
524,

Phormosoma, characters of the new
genus, 303.

Phrenozemia, description of the new
genus, 94,

Phyllopoda, on the reproduction and
mode of life of the, 152.

Plants of the Coal-measures, on the,
224.

Plateau, F., on the position of the
centre of gravity in insects, 55.

Platycephalus, new species of, 397.

Platystoma, new species of, 449.

Plumularia, new species of, 389.

Plumulariidz, on the sarcothecz ot
the, 585.

IN DEX.

Pollock, F., on the habits of some
Madeiran Spiders, 271.

Polypes, on parasitic, in the paren-
chyma of a sponge, 50.

Polyzoa, on a new genus of, 396.

Prophthalmus, new species of, 322.

Propithecus, new species of, 206,
298 ; on the varieties of, 474.

Psammoperca and Cnidon, on the
identity of the genera, 426.

Pseudocyclops, description of the
new genus, 7.

Pseudorca, new species of, 51.

ee review of the fossil,

Reptiles, new species of, 418.

Rhabdoliths, observations on, 359.

Rhinoceros, on the double-horned
Asiatic, 207, 298, 399.

Ritsema, C., on Tarsolepis and Cri-
nodes, 228, 274, 446.

Robin, C., on the noises and expres-
sive sounds produced by fishes,
470.

Rossella, new species of, 137.

Rotch, W. D., on a new genus and
species of hydroid Zoophytes, 126.

Royal Society, proceedings of the,
142, 222, 300.

Szenuris, on some species of, 280.

Salarias, new species of, 399, 424.

Salmon, on the structure and deve-
lopment of the skull of the, 222.

eae ursinus, on the myology
or, 17.

Scammon, Capt. C. M., ona new
species of Baleenoptera, 473.

Scapia, on the genus, 218.

Schmidt, Dr. O., on Coccoliths and
Rhabdoliths, 359.

Sclater, Dr. P.?L., on Propithecus bi-
color and Rhinoceros lasiotis, 298.

Scolopsis, new species of, 425.

Seeley, H. G., on the origin of the
vertebrate skeleton, 21.

Sharpe, R. B., on some new species
of birds, 450.

Sicard, M., on the connexion which
exists between the nervous and
muscular systems in the Helices,
466.

Sitta, new species of, 450.

Sosytelus, description of the new
genus, 90.

Spatulemys, description of the new
genus, 465.

479

Spheerotherium, new species of, 358.

Spiders, on the habits of some Ma-
deiran, 271.

Sponges, on new species of, 58, 76,
101, 110; on some parasites of,
108; on a new genus of hexara-
diate and other, 134; of the Bri-
tish Museum, on the marine, 152;
on thread-cells and semen in ma-
rine, 306.

Spongiadee, on the origin of the
thread-cells in the, 50.

Spongozoon, on the, 45.

Staurocoryne, description of the new
genus, 126.

Stratiorrhina, characters of the genus,
322.

Taphroderes, new species of, 319.

Tarsolepis, description of the new
genus, 125, 228, 274, 446.

Tartarides, description of the new
family, 410,

Terebratule, on the habits of the,
152, 465.

Tethya, on the name, and its varie-
ties of spelling, 150, 227.

antarctica and T. zetlandica, ob-

servations on, 58, 141.

muricata, observations on, 209.

Thelyphonidea, new genus and species
of, 409.

Thelyphonus,
genus, 200,

Thomson, J., on some dermal tuber-
cles associated with fossil fish-re-
mains, 66.

Thomson, Prof., on the Echinidea
of the ‘ Porcupine’ deep-sea dredg-
ing-expeditions, 300.

Thylacoleo carnifex, observations on,
169.

Timalia, new species of, 61.

Tortoises, on the Mud-, of India,
326.

Trachelizus, new species of, 320.

Tragopus, new species of, 97.

Trichastoma, new species of, 451.

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monome-
rella, observations on the genera,
248,

Trionyches of India, on the, 219,
326.

Umbellula groenlandica, note on,
151.

Van Beneden, Prof. E., on the deve-
lopment of the Gregarinz, 309.

monograph of the

480

Verkriizen, T. A., on a dredging-ex-
cursion to Iceland, 371.

Vertebrate skeleton, on the origin of
the, 21.

Villot, A., on the embryonic form of
the Gordii, 251.

Vogt, C., on Branchipus and Ar-
temia, 405.

Walden, Arthur Viscount, on a new
species of Timalia, 61; on two
new species of birds from the
Philippine Islands, 252.

Walrus, on the systematic name of
the, 151.

INDEX.

Whiteaves, J. F., on deep-sea dredg-
ing in the Gulf of St. Lawrence,
341.

Williamson, Prof. W. C., on the
plants of the coal-measures, 224.
Wood, T. W., on the two(?) un-

known species of Argus Pheasant,

Zanclea implexa, observations on,
393.

Zephronia, new species of, 354,

Ziphius Sowerbiensis, note on, 151.

Zoophytes, on a new genus and
species of hydroid, 126.

END OF THE TENTH VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

ALERE

) FLAMMAM,
N.

Anwé Mag, Nat fist $4. Vol.10. PL}

aes = Peete
EW Robinson,Del et Se JB

oe.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist.S.4.Vol.10. PLIL.

/ Ann.& Mag. Nat. HistS 4 Vol 10 PLUT ~

et ie
ee

ea

2. C¥CLOPS OVALIS WWest £0" ime
yee mor sot S.

i 3—8, CYCLOPICERA LATA

a 9-18 MACROCHEIRON FUCICOLUM.

ge.S Brady det LWest ec.

=o fie ib Ann. Mag Nat. Hist 3 4.Vol IOP

GS. Brady del T West se W.West & C? imp
1-5, CANTHOCAMPTUS IMUS.

6-10, SCUTHGMIDIUM JEISBOIDE'S.

Fiist.S.4 Vol.10. PLV.

+
~
—
>
=)
~é
pieces
~
as

W.West &C° axtp

GS Brady dealt TWesi sc.

OMA

ao
=
Pe)

ANICEP

=
oe

MEL
NORT

TOS
=)

’
é
'
‘ °
‘
.
‘
A!
'
‘]

x a

« = in ME
‘i .
, &
. 5

1
‘ é

‘

+
4

4 Vol.10 PLVE

n.& Mag. Nat. Hist

W.West& C? imp

: i 2 eLAOPHON LE BOM eri:
6001) Chet OPES’ LING OL A.

ro Bros. hth

Want

Atty tah’ te oe)

aie ; 2 Petey

vier
vase
hp eer

Ki 1

v\
yh 1

Arar. § Wag. Nat.Hest.S 4. Voll) PLUVIM

A G Butler. del. lth. Mintern Brosimp.

TARSOLEPIS REMICAUDA. Butler.

Ann. & Mag Not Hist..S.4 Vol IO PLT

ord % Mintern Bros.imp.

CODIOPHYLLUM NATALENSE.

ae y 4
nee

te

ITHO. PHOTOGRAPHIC

CALLOGRAPTUS LALICANS,

cede AO
Ne

te, = r
f

SN
5
NN
\
S
~~
>
S
S
ay
+
SS
al
8
~
=
fan
~
~~
=
1S,
>
~
x

Mintern Bros. )ith

ae

Te q a
ay

a

: om
ia in aA ;

Ani.§ Mag Not Hist. S.7Vol 10.P¢ All.

Mimtern Bros hth.

Ani §& Mag. Nat. Hist. S.4.Vol.10.PU_XII

GH Ford. Mirtern Bros. imp.
ite NEW SPECIES OF THRLYPHONUS

a Phy, hair

Fl
3
ed
is
=
EB
iq

Ara. & Mag. Nat. Hist. S.4.Vol.10.PU.AVIL.

H¥ord. , 4 = £*-" Mintern Bros imp.

i

if }

*

’ iY
,

; sh
Wee ee
i Wis en 1

a diet |
Pe kala f
DTA eG

ae

eg
on ed

‘ 7 "4
a :

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. S'.4.Vol.10.PU_XVIL.

Mintern Bros imp.

GHY¥ ord.

il
a , ue
he a y

Aah

1 Fs

Ann & Mag. Nat Hist § 4 Vol 10. PUA

A.G Butler del & lith.

Mintern Bros inp.

NEW MYRIOPODA.

a

Ann blag. Nat. Hist. $4 Vol10. Pl. XIX p.

re

4

Mintern Bros. hth.

Ann Mag Nat. Hist $4 Vol IO PLXX.

oe

Nantern Bros hth

~ THincks del.

ym

hs Oe
'

Ar A

eae ia
ol ane rt
Cl eae

ee i

WO &
1
Ar | ms
iy mn
Let ea
jae i
7 a

*

‘a rth
} i

4. Vol 1 Pe OE,

”

iste.

Ann & Mag. Nat

Wintern Bros i

>...
Anwk Mag Nat. fist. 8.4 Vol. 70.PLXAA

OPCambridge del. R.Mantern kth. Mintern Bros mup

.
a

‘

.

mies

MOP

i

‘ ih

= F
tits

is iA I

dp ait |

?

ats ip
LEE TION
Sa eas

BSS)
bie cet ras
ais Sy

p .

4 6) SS 4.

Pee

gi,

| i %, ©
\'

d ( |

i

—~
—
~
a»
YW a
ei

3 a »,
| ie
A"

°

| “Oy

ys
SO) ww

i
te = Ke iH

|
Yo ith
%

Ry)
p)

ft
es

Fi
it |

ui |
S; i i| ih >
ek A EE «

Wy,

Ms"

“oy
NG
ee santa Meni